A cement and concrete industry publication
CCIP-008
User Guide to RC Spreadsheets: v3
This user guide provides guidance on the use of
RC Spreadsheets v3 for the design of reinforced
concrete elements.
The release of Version 3 of the spreadsheets and user guide
follows the publication of BS EN 1992-1-1 (Eurocode 2) and its
UK National Annex and the publication of Amendment 3 to
BS 8110 Part 1: 1987.
For more information on the spreadsheets visit
www.concretecentre.com/rcspreadsheets
Cover files.indd 1
CI/Sfb
UDC
624.04
User Guide to RC Spreadsheets: v3
User Guide to
RC Spreadsheets: v3
User guide to Excel spreadsheets for design to BS 8110: Part 1, 1997 (Amd. 3)
and BS EN 1992: 2004 Part 1-1 and its UK National Annex
C H Goodchild BSc CEng MCIOB MIStructE
Charles Goodchild is Principal Structural Engineer for
The Concrete Centre where he promotes efficient concrete R M Webster CEng FIStructE
design and construction. He was responsible for the concept,
content and management of this publication and of the
RC Spreadsheets.
C H Goodchild BSc CEng MCIOB MIStructE R M Webster CEng FIStructE
Rod Webster of Concrete Innovation & Design is
principal author of the spreadsheets. He has been writing
spreadsheets since 1984 and is expert in the design of tall
concrete buildings and in advanced analytical methods.
CCIP-008
Published July 2006
ISBN 1-904818-38-2
Price Group O
© The Concrete Centre
Riverside House, 4 Meadows Business Park,
Station Approach, Blackwater, Camberley, Surrey, GU17 9AB
Tel: +44 (0)1276 606800 Fax: +44 (0)1276 606801
www.concretecentre.com
17/07/2006 11:51:53
 Foreword The Advisory Group Members
This publication was originally produced by the Reinforced Concrete Council (RCC) as part of its S Alexander H Dikme G King M Perera
project ‘Spreadsheets for concrete design to BS 8110 and EC2’. Since their release in 2000 the S Alhayderi C P Edmondson S King B Quick
spreadsheets have proved enormously popular and have been maintained by the RCC and its Dr H Al-Quarra J Elliott K Kus Y Rafiq
successor The Concrete Centre. I Baldwin I Feltham I Lockhart A Rathbone
C Barker G Fernando M Lord M Rawlinson
The release of Version 3 of the spreadsheets follows the publication of BS EN 1992-1-1 (Eurocode 2) M Beamish M Fernando B Lorimer P Reynolds
plus its UK National Annex and the publication of Amendment 3 to BS 8110 Part 1: 1987. A Beasley I Francis M Lovell H Riley
The requirements within these standards have necessitated the revision of all the published T Bedford A Fung Dr Luker N Russell
spreadsheets. This user guide gives guidance on the use of all design spreadsheets to BS 8110 and G Belton P Gardner J Lupton U P Sarki
Eurocode 2 contained on the CD ROM RC Spreadsheets: v3, published by The Concrete Centre R Bhatt J Gay M Lytrides T Schollar
(order ref. CCIP-008CD). R Bickerton P Green Prof I Macleod A Stalker
P Blackmore A Hall F Malekpour A Starr
D Blackwood N Harris A McAtear M Stevenson
M Brady G Hill A McFarlane B Stoker
Acknowledgements C Buczkowski D W Hobbs F Mohammad B Treadwell
A Campbell R Hulse A Mole A Truby
The ideas and illustrations come from many sources. The help and guidance received from many
Dr P Chana M Hutcheson M Morton R Turner
individuals are gratefully acknowledged.
G Charlesworth A Idrus R Moss T Viney
L Cheng N Imms B Munton Dr P Walker
Thanks are due to members of the original project’s Advisory Group for their time and effort in
Mr Chichger P Jennings C O’Boyle B Watson
helping to make the project feasible and in bringing it to fruition. The members of the Advisory
R Collison D Kennedy Dr A Okorie J Whitworth
Group are listed on the inside back cover.
A Craddock G Kennedy T O’Neill C Wilby
M Morton R Jothiraj B Osafa-Kwaako S Wilde
Special appreciation is extended to: Richard Cheng, BSc, CEng, Eur Ing, FIStructE, author of the
J Curry Dr S Khan D Patel A Wong
retaining wall and basement wall spreadsheets, Peter Noble for conversions and checking, and to
J Dale A King D Penman E Yarimer
Andy Pullen for initial studies into compatibility of spreadsheet software. Also the late Sami Khan
for help with post-tensioning spreadsheets.

Published by The Concrete Centre

Riverside House, 4 Meadows Business Park, Station Approach, Blackwater, Camberley, Surrey GU17 9AB
Tel: +44 (0)1276 606800 Fax: +44 (0)1276 606801

CCIP-008
Published July 2006
ISBN 1-904818-38-2
Price Group O
© The Concrete Centre

User Guide v1 published by the British Cement Association on behalf of the Reinforced Concrete Council.
User Guide v2 published electronically by The Concrete Centre.

CCIP publications are produced by The Concrete Society on behalf of the Cement and Concrete Industry
Publications Forum – an industry initiative to publish technical guidance in support of concrete design
and construction.
CCIP publications are available from the Concrete Bookshop at www.concretebookshop.com
Tel: +44 (0)7004 607777

All advice or information from The Concrete Centre is intended for those who will evaluate the significance and limitations of
its contents and take responsibility for its use and application. No liability (including that for negligence) for any loss resulting
from such advice or information is accepted by the Concrete Centre or their subcontractors, suppliers or advisors. Readers should
note that The Concrete Centre publications are subject to revision from time to time and should therefore ensure that they are in
possession of the latest version.

Cover artwork: D J Killoran - The Concrete Society.

Printed by Cromwell Press, Trowbridge, UK.

Cover files.indd 2 17/07/2006 11:52:24

 User Guide to
RC Spreadsheets: v3

Contents
INTRODUCTION 1
GENERAL NOTES 3

SPREADSHEETS TO BS 8110 17
Elements 19
Analysis 35
Slabs 38
Beams 72
Columns 113
Walls 125
Stairs 139
Foundations 146
Tabular versions 158

SPREADSHEETS TO EUROCODE 2 179

Elements 185
Analysis 205
Slabs 208
Beams 243
Columns 270
Stairs 284
Foundations 287

ADMIN FOLDER 298

REFERENCES AND FURTHER READING 299

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd i 17/07/2006 17:00:56

 User Guide to
RC Spreadsheets: v3
Contents in full
INTRODUCTION 1
GENERAL NOTES 3
Using the spreadsheets 10
Menu.xls 16
SPREADSHEETS TO BS 8110 17
Elements RCC11 Element Design.xls 19
RCC12 Bending and Axial Force.xls 26
RCC13 Punching Shear.xls 28
RCC14 Crack Width.xls 33
Analysis RCC21 Subframe Analysis.xls 35
Slabs RCC31 One-way Solid Slabs (A & D).xls 38
RCC31R Rigorous One-way Slabs.xls 43
RCC32 Ribbed Slabs (A & D).xls 50
RCC32R Rigorous Ribbed Slabs.xls 56
RCC33 Flat Slabs (A & D).xls 64
Beams RCC41 Continuous Beams (A & D).xls 72
RCC41R Rigorous Continuous Beams (A & D).xls 78
RCC42 Post-tensioned Slabs & Beams (A & D).xls 85
RCC43 Wide Beams (A & D).xls 107
Columns RCC51 Column Load Take-down & Design.xls 113
RCC52 Column Chart generation.xls 118
RCC53 Column Design.xls 120
RCC54 Circular column charting .xls 123
Walls RCC61 Basement Wall.xls 125
RCC62 Retaining Wall.xls 132
Stairs RCC71 Stair Flight & Landing - Single.xls 139
RCC72 Stairs & Landings - Multiple.xls 142
Foundations RCC81 Foundation Pads.xls 146
RCC82 Pilecap Design.xls 149
Tabular versions RCC91 One-way Solid Slabs (Tables).xls 158
RCC92 Ribbed Slabs (Tables).xls 161
RCC93 Flat Slabs (Tables).xls 166
RCC94 Two-way Slabs (Tables).xls 173
RCC95 Continuous Beams (Tables).xls 175

ii

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd ii 17/07/2006 17:01:53

 SPREADSHEETS TO EUROCODE 2 179
General notes to Eurocode 2 versions 181
Elements TCC11 Element Design.xls 185
TCC12 Bending and Axial Force.xls 194
TCC13 Slab Punching.xls 196
TCC14 Crack Width.xls 201
Analysis TCC21 Subframe Analysis.xls 205
Slabs TCC31 One-way Slabs.xls 208
TCC31R Rigorous One-way Slabs.xls 214
TCC32 Ribbed Slabs (A&D).xls 221
TCC33 Flat Slabs (A&D).xls 228
TCC33X Flat Slabs (A&D).xls 237
Beams TCC41 Continuous Beams.xls 243
TCC41R Rigorous Continuous Beams.xls 249
TCC42 Post-tensioned Analysis & Design.xls (Beta) 256
TCC43 Wide Beams (A & D).xls 264
Columns TCC51 Column Load Take-down Design.xls 270
TCC52 Column Chart generation.xls 276
TCC53 Column Design.xls 278
TCC54 Circular Column Design.xls 280
TCC55 Axial Column Shortening.xls 282
Stairs TCC71 Stair Flight & Landing - Single.xls 284
Foundations TCC81 Foundation Pads.xls 287
TCC82 Pilecap Design.xls 291
ADMIN FOLDER 298
REFERENCES AND FURTHER READING 299

iii

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd iii 17/07/2006 17:01:53

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd iv 17/07/2006 17:01:54

Introduction
The RC spreadsheets were originally produced under the
Reinforced Concrete Council’s project, ‘Spreadsheets for concrete
design to BS 8110 and EC2’. They were released in January 2000
and have been maintained and extended by the RCC and its
successor The Concrete Centre. They continue to be supported
by The Concrete Centre.
In recognition of the new and updated spreadsheets made
available as part of the version 2.x issue, it was decided to revise
(but not publish) the second edition of the User Guide.
The introduction of Eurocode 2[3], its National Annex and
Amd of BS 8110:1997[2] has necessitated the revision of all the
spreadsheets and publication of version 3 of the User Guide. This
third edition of the User Guide provides guidance on the use of all
spreadsheets produced to date (July 2006).
For the experienced engineer, the spreadsheets allow the
rapid production of clear and accurate design calculations. The
spreadsheets allow younger users to understand concrete design
and help them to gain experience by studying their own ‘what if’
scenarios. The individual user should be able to answer his/ her
own questions by chasing through the cells to understand the
logic used. Cells within each spreadsheet can be interrogated and
can have their formulae checked and values traced. The original
spreadsheets reflected a consensus of opinion on several design
issues. The version 3 Eurocode 2 spreadsheets reflect a consensus
of opinion of a limited number of engineers. Students and young
engineers may follow the ‘model’ calculations presented in the
spreadsheets to form an understanding of current reinforced
concrete design.
The spreadsheets are intended to follow normal design practice
and cater for the design of low- to medium-rise multi-storey
concrete framed buildings. They are offered as shareware.
However, users are required to register when using them in
any commercial capacity. Registration is through The Concrete
Bookshop (07004 607777 and www.concretebookshop.com).
The original project was jointly funded by the RCC and the
Department of the Environment Transport and the Regions
(DETR) under its Partners in Technology scheme. It was made
possible by the support and contributions of time given by
individual members of industry. The project was managed by the
RCC and guided by an 80-strong Advisory Group of interested
parties, including consulting engineers and software houses.
In producing the original spreadsheets several issues had to be
addressed. Firstly, which spreadsheet package should be used?
Excel (© Microsoft Corporation) appeared to hold about 70% of
the market amongst structural engineers and was thus adopted.
More specifically, Excel ’97© was originally adopted as being de
facto the most widely available spreadsheet in the field. To avoid
complications, it was decided not to produce corresponding
versions using other spreadsheet packages. The spreadsheets are
compatible with later versions of Excel.
EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:1
Introduction
Eurocode 2 parts 1-1 and 1-2 together with their UK National
Annexes have now been published. Students and both
inexperienced and experienced engineers will all need to grasp
an understanding of design to this code. There are differences
between EC2 and BS 8110. The spreadsheets should help with
the transition.
Whilst the spreadsheets to BS 8110 provide a consensus of current
commercial reinforced concrete design practice, the spreadsheets
to Eurocode 2, provide a consensus of design proceedures to this
new design code. The introduction of Eurocode 2 will provide
commercial opportunities for those who are prepared to use it.
It is believed that both novices and experienced users of
spreadsheets will be convinced that spreadsheets have a great
potential for teaching BS 8110 and Eurocode 2, improving
concrete design and, above all, improving the concrete design
and construction process. The spreadsheets to Eurocode 2 should
help all engineers to familiarise themselves with the details of this
new design code.
Version 2.x
The version 2.x released in 2003[3] introduced new spreadsheets
to BS 8110, to the more finalised EN 1992-1-1 (Eurocode 2) and
an overarching menu spreadsheet. Previously issued spreadsheets
to BS 8110 were updated.
The new spreadsheets introduced were:
■ Menu
BS 8110
■ RCC31R Rigorous One-way Slabs
■ RCC32R Rigorous Ribbed Slabs
■ RCC41R Rigorous Continuous Beams
■ RCC43 Wide Beams (A&D)
■ RCC54 Circular Column Design
■ RCC82 Pilecap Design
Eurocode 2
■ RCCen11 Element Design
■ RCCen12 Bending and Axial Force
■ RCCen13 Punching Shear
■ RCCen14 Crack Width
■ RCCen21 Subframe analysis
■ RCCen31 One-way Solid Slabs (A & D)
■ RCCen31R Rigorous* One-way Solid Slabs
■ RCCen32 Ribbed Slabs (A & D)
17/07/2006 17:01:54
 ■ RCCen33 Flat Slabs (A & D)
Using and improving the spreadsheets
■ RCCen41 Continuous beams (A & D)
■ RCCen41R Rigorous* Continuous Beams Since their release in 2000 the spreadsheets have proved to be
enormously popular. They may now be regarded as having now
■ RCCen43 Wide Beams (A&D)
been thoroughly tested by engineers in practice but this does not
■ RCCen52 Column Chart generation mean that they are infallible! The user is referred to Managing the
■ RCCen53 Column Design spreadsheets and other General Notes that follow.
■ RCCen55 Axial Column Shortening
The older spreadsheets’ usefulness and robustness have
■ RCCen81 Foundation Pads been enhanced by users reporting problems or suggesting
■ RCCen82 Pilecap Design improvements. Comments or suggestions for improvement
are welcomed. Contact The Concrete Centre’s Helpdesk at
helpdesk@concretecentre.com or on 0700 4 500 500.

Version 3
The release of version 3 of the spreadsheets follows the
publication of BS EN 1992-1-1 (Eurocode 2)[3] and the UK
National Annex and the publication of Amendment 3 to BS
8110 Part 1: 1987[2]. The requirements within these documents
necessitated the revision of all previously published spreadsheets.
The opportunity has been taken to introduce new spreadsheets
as follows:

BS 8110
■ RCC82 Pilecap Design

Eurocode 2
■ TCC33X Flat Slabs (Whole floor)
■ TCC41R Rigorous Continuous Beams
■ TCC42 Post-tensioned Slabs and Beams (A&D) (β version)
■ TCC43 Wide Beams (A&D)
■ TCC54 Circular Column Charting
■ TCC71 Stair Flight and Landing - single
■ TCC81 Foundation Pads
■ TCC82 Pilecap Design

Spreadsheets numbered RCCen11, RCCen12 etc released as Beta

versions have been released for use as TCC11, TCC12 etc.

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:2 17/07/2006 17:01:55


General notes
Managing the spreadsheets
Use
Spreadsheets can be a very powerful tool. Their use has become
increasingly common in the preparation of design calculations.
They save time, money and effort. They provide the facility to
optimise designs and they can help instill experience. However,
these benefits have to be weighed against the risks associated
with any endeavour. These risks must be recognised and
managed. In other words appropriate levels of supervision and
checking, including self-checking, must, as always, be exercised
when using these spreadsheets.
Advantages
For the experienced engineer, the spreadsheets help in the
rapid production of clear and accurate design calculations for
reinforced concrete elements. The contents are intended to be
sufficient to allow the design of low to medium-rise multi-storey
concrete framed buildings.
Spreadsheets allow users to gain experience by studying their
own ‘what if’ scenarios. Should they have queries, individual
users should be able to answer their own questions by chasing
through the cells to understand the logic used. Cells within each
spreadsheet can be interrogated, formulae checked and values
traced. Macleod[7] suggested that, in understanding structural
behaviour, doing calculations is probably not a great advantage;
being close to the results probably is.
Other benefits include quicker and more accurate reinforcement
estimates, and the possibilities for electronic data interchange
(EDI) Already, bending schedules derived from spreadsheets are
the basis of some EDI and the control of bar-bending machines.
Standardised, or at least rationalised, designs make the checking
process easier and quicker.
Appropriate use
In its deliberations{8} the Standing Committee on Structural
Safety (SCOSS) noted the increasingly wide-spread availability
of computer programs and circumstances in which their misuse
could lead to unsafe structures.
These circumstances include:
■ People without adequate structural engineering knowledge or
training may carry out the structural analysis.
■ There may be communication gaps between the design
initiator, the computer program developer and the user.
■ A program may be used out of context.
■ The checking process may not be sufficiently fundamental.
EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:3
General notes
■ The limitations of the program may not be sufficiently
apparent to the user.
■ For unusual structures, even experienced engineers may not
have the ability to spot weaknesses in programs for analysis
and detailing
The committee’s report continued: “Spreadsheets are, in principle,
no different from other software…” With regard to these
spreadsheets and this publication, The Concrete Centre hopes to
have addressed more specific concerns by demonstrating “clear
evidence of adequate verification” by documenting the principles,
theory and algorithms used in the spreadsheets. The spreadsheets
have also had the benefit of the Advisory Group’s overview and
inputs. Many, especially the spreadsheets to BS 8110, have had
several years use and maintenance. Inevitably, some unconscious
assumptions, inconsistencies, etc.[9] will remain.
Liability
A fundamental condition of use Is that the user accepts
responsibility for the input and output of the computer and how
it is used.
As with all software, users must be satisfied with the answers
these spreadsheets give and be confident in their use. These
spreadsheets can never be fully validated but have been through
Beta testing, both formally and informally. The BS 8110 versions
have been used for several years and as a result of feedback they
have been updated to address known errors. However, users
must satisfy themselves that the uses to which the spreadsheets
are put are appropriate.
This is especially true with the spreadsheets to Eurocode 2. While
the Eurocode 2 versions have been through Beta testing, they
have not yet been used in anger. Also, Eurocode 2 is a completely
new code to most designers and so there is little experience of
design to this standard.
Control
Users and managers should be aware that spreadsheets can be
changed and must address change control and versions for use.
The flexibility and ease of use of spreadsheets, which account
for their widespread popularity, also facilitate ad hoc and
unstructured approaches to their subsequent development.
Quality Assurance procedures may dictate that spreadsheets are
treated as controlled documents and subject to comparison and
checks with previous methods prior to adoption. Users’ Quality
Assurance schemes should address the issue of changes. The
possibilities of introducing a company’s own password to the
spreadsheets and/ or extending the revision history contained
within the sheet entitled Notes! might be considered.
17/07/2006 17:01:56
 Application
The spreadsheets have been developed with the goal of producing
calculations to show compliance with codes. Whilst this is the
primary goal, there is a school of thought[10] that designers are
primarily paid for producing specifications and drawings that work
on site and are approved by clients and/ or checking authorities.
Producing calculations happens to be a secondary exercise,
regarded by many experienced engineers as a hurdle on the way
to getting the project approved and completed. From a business
process point of view, the emphasis of the spreadsheets might,
in future, change to establishing compliance once members,
loads and details are known. Certainly this may be the preferred
method of use by experienced engineers.
The spreadsheets have been developed with the ability for users
to input and use their own preferred material properties, bar sizes
and spacings, etc. However, user preferences should recognise
moves for efficiency through standardisation.
Another long-term objective is automation. To this end,
spreadsheet contents might in future be arranged so that input
and output can be copied and pasted easily by macros and/ or
linked by the end-user. There are counter arguments about users
needing to be closer to the calculations and results in order to
ensure they are properly considered – see Appropriate use above.
We emphasise that it is up to the user how he/ she uses the
output. The spreadsheets have been produced to cater for both
first-time users and the very experienced without putting the
first-time user off. Nonetheless, their potential applications are
innumerable.
Summary
With spreadsheets, long-term advantages and savings come
from repeated use but there are risks that need to be managed.
Spreadsheets demand an initial investment in time and effort,
but the rewards are there for those who make the investment.
Good design requires sound judgement based on competence
derived from adequate training and experience, not just computer
programs.
Familiarisation
There are many different ways to present structural concrete
calculations. ‘Calcs’ should demonstrate compliance with
relevant design codes of practice, but different designers want
to investigate different criteria and want to set out calculations
in different ways. Spreadsheets cannot satisfy everyone. The
spreadsheets presented here have been set out to cover the
criteria that may be deemed ‘usual’. It is incumbent on the user
to judge whether these criteria are pertinent and sufficient for
the actual case in hand. It is also incumbent on the user to ensure
that inputs are correct and that outputs are of the correct order
of magnitude.
EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:4
The spreadsheets are intended to follow normal design practice
and cater for the design of low- to medium-rise multi-storey
concrete framed buildings. Each type of element may be designed
in several different ways, e.g. horizontal frame elements may be
designed using:
■ Element design: design of simple elements to BS 8110: Part
1[2] or BS EN 1992[3]
■ Tabular design: design of elements based on moments and
shears derived from BS 8110: Part 1 Tables 3.12 and 3.5
■ Analysis and design: design of elements based on moments
and shears from analysis, e.g. sub-frame analysis, embodied
within the spreadsheets
Element design
The element design spreadsheets illustrate the basic principles
of reinforced concrete design from input material properties,
dimensions, moments, shears and axial loads, etc. They form the
basis of element design used in succeeding spreadsheets. The
moments, shears and axial loads used should be derived from
separate analysis (e.g. hand calculations, sub-frame analysis
spreadsheet or other analysis package). For further explanation
the user is referred to BS 8110, BS EN 1992-1-1 or a number of
standard reference works[11, 12 , 13] .
Tabular design
The tabular design spreadsheets use Tables 3.12 and 3.5 from BS
8110: Part 1 to automate the derivation of design moments and
shears. However, the use of these tables is restricted for slabs.
BS 8110: Part 1, Clause 3.5.2.4, restricts the use of Table 3.12 to
where:
■ In a one-way slab, the area of a bay (one span x full width)
exceeds 30m2
■ The ratio of characteristic imposed loads, Qk , to
characteristic dead loads, Gk does not exceed 1.25
■ The characteristic imposed load, Qk, does not exceed 5
kN/m2 , excluding partitions
■ Additionally, for flat slabs, there are at least three rows of
panels of approximately equal span in the direction being
considered.
For beams, Clause 3.4.3, Table 3.5 is valid only where:
■ Characteristic imposed loads, Qk, do not exceed characteristic
dead loads, Gk
■ Loads are substantially uniformly distributed over three or
more spans
■ Variations in span length do not exceed 15% of the longest
span
If design parameters stray outside these limits, the tabular design
spreadsheets should be used with caution.
17/07/2006 17:01:57

Analysis and design
To provide for more general application, these versions combine
sub-frame analysis with design. Spreadsheets for one-way slabs,
ribbed slabs, flat slabs and beams provide powerful design tools.
Sub-frame analysis is also used in the post-tensioned concrete
design spreadsheets.
The sub-frame analysis spreadsheet RCC21.xls may of course be
used alone (and the elements designed by other means such as
RCC11.xls).
The flat slab spreadsheet RCC33 is intended to be used one-
direction at a time. TCC33x designs flat slabs to BS EN1992-1-1 in
two directions at one time. The post-tensioned concrete design
spreadsheet follows the 1994 ‘BS’ version of Concrete Society
TR43[14] and involves sub-frame analysis at various limit states.
The principles used are applicable to both beams and slabs with
either bonded or unbonded tendons being designed to BS 8110. A
Beta version of the post-tensioned concrete design spreadsheet
to Eurocode 2 and the 2005 version of Concrete Society TR43 is
included. The examples of the retaining wall and basement wall
spreadsheets are based on common UK practice.
Deflections
In most spreadsheets deflection checks are based on span:depth
criteria in the codes. Estimates of actual deflections are available
within the ‘rigorous’ spreadsheets.
Rigorous spreadsheets
Deflection can be the governing criterion of many designs. These
spreadsheets allow the estimation of deflection to BS 8110 Parts
1 and 2 or Eurocode 2 Part 1-1. Rather than just check span-to-
effective depth ratios, the spreadsheets calculate deflections at
1
/20 the spans using vigorous methods.
The Eurocode 2 spreadsheets follows methods described in TR58[30].
Spreadsheet terminology
Excel file name Drop down menu bar
Cell reference
Cell
Worksheet area
Sheet tabs
EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:5
General Notes
Column design
Column design is presented in, essentially, two different ways;
either an amount of reinforcement is determined or the capacity
of a section is checked – two valid design approaches.
Under RCC11 Element Design.xls (or RCC11.xls for short) or
TCC11, the amount of reinforcement is calculated by iterating to
find the neutral axis depth in order to solve two simultaneous
equations.
Under RCC52.xls for single axis bending and RCC53.xls for two
axis bending, N-M interaction charts are derived from presumed
reinforcement arrangements. Individual load cases are checked
against the capacity of the column with the various reinforcement
arrangements. TCC52 and TCC53 similarly.
RCC51.xls is set out so that the user may undertake a traditional
column load take down, assess design moments and critical axis
before calculating the amount of reinforcement required. TCC51.xls
similarly.
RCC12.xls determines the capacity of an unsymmetrical
reinforced column (or beam). TCC12.xls similarly.
Others
Other spreadsheets provide for the design of pad foundations
catering for one or two columns, punching shear, stairs (either
as single flights and single landings or flights and landings as
in a stair core), small retaining walls and basement walls. More
detail and further references are given within the spreadsheets
themselves.
Terminology
As with all software, spreadsheets have their own jargon. The basic
terminology for layout is shown on the screen dump below:
Toolbars
(use View/Toolbars to
switch on and off)
Formula bar
Scroll bar
17/07/2006 17:01:58
 Sheet Architecture Project
Client
Spreadsheets to BS 8110
Advisory Group Made by
The Concrete Centre
Date Page
Location Level 2, Beam on line 6, from B to E RMW 11-Apr-06 36
SUBFRAME ANALYSIS to BS8110:2005 Checked Revision Job No

Each spreadsheet may contain several linked sheets (i.e. layers Originated from RCC21.xls v3.0 on CD

BENDING MOMENT DIAGRAMS (kNm)

© 2006 TCC chg - R68

or pages) that deal with different aspects of design. The sheet’s 1000 1000
800 800

name on the sheet tab gives an indication of the content. For 600
400
600
400
200

the more involved spreadsheets, individual sheets are devoted to -200

200
0
0
-200
-400

a full explanation of the design (with references for educational -400

-600
-600
-800
-800 -1000

and validation purposes) or analysis, etc. and other sheets give 0 10 20 30 40 0 10 20 30 40

B Elastic Moments E B Redistributed Envelope E

an abridged version more in keeping with the requirements
SUPPORT No 1 2 3 4 5
of experienced practicing engineers. Further sheets may Elastic M
Redistributed M
95.3
90.5
743.3
557.5
868.6
694.9
427.6
406.2
34.3
32.6
~
~
kNm
kNm

contain analysis calculations, data for graphs and calculation ßb

Redistribution
0.950
5.0%
0.750
25.0%
0.800
20.0%
0.950
5.0%
0.950
5.0%
~ ~

of reinforcement weight. All spreadsheets have a Notes! sheet Elastic M

SPAN No
185.0
1 2
633.1
3
400.1
4
121.4 ~ ~ Based on support

where disclaimers, status and revision histories relating to each Redistributed M

ßb
152.1
0.822
746.8
1.180
373.5
0.934
118.8
0.979
~
~
~
~
moments of
min(ßbM, Malt/ßb)
SHEAR FORCE DIAGRAMS (kN)
spreadsheet are incorporated (sheet names are differentiated by 500 500

the use of an appended exclamation mark). 400

300
200
400
300
200
100 100
0 0
-100 -100
-200 -200

Those sheets with names in capitals are intended for printing -300
-400
-300
-400
-500 -500

out as design calculations. Other sheets are available to view 0 10 20 30 40 0 10 20 30 40

in the spreadsheets. These may need to be printed for checking B Elastic Shears E B Redistributed Shears E

purposes and parts of them, such as simple design routines, may SPAN No
Elastic V 191.0
1
312.6 435.6
2
432.2 356.9
3
282.0
Redistributed V 177.7 302.0 422.8 433.2 345.1 273.7
be pasted into word-processed calculations.
ACTIONS! sheet
Sheet tabs (from RCC 41.xls) Main graphical output of Bending Moment Diagrams, Shear Force
Diagrams. Also input for redistribution percentages.
Sheet tabs

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made by Date Page

Typical spreadsheet screens Location D&D: Main Beam, from grid C to H

RIGOROUS CONTINUOUS BEAMS to BS 8110:2005 Checked
rmw Apr-2006
Revision Job No
59

Originated from RCC41R.xls v3.0 on CD © 2006 TCC chg - R68

The spreadsheets are intended to be as consistent as possible. SPAN 3

ACTIONS M kNm
LEFT
208.9
CENTRE
192.7
RIGHT
206.6
Generally, upper sheets consist of calculations, notes and DESIGN
ßb
d mm
1.00
327.5
0.99
322.5
0.86
327.5
workings as illustrated in the examples below, which gives an As mm²
As' mm²
1860
286
1447
0
1799
357

indication of the contents of a typical spreadsheet. The first sheet TOP STEEL Layer 1
Layer 2
4
0
H 25 2
0
H 16 4
0
H 25

consists of input, followed by results of analysis, design, weight As prov mm²

BTM STEEL Layer 1 3
1963
H 16
As' prov
3
402
H 25
As prov
3
1963
H 16
Layer 2 0 0 0
of reinforcement, analysis, detailed design with references, graph As' prov mm² 603 As prov 1473 As' prov 603
DEFLECTION Permanent = 13.00 < 24.00 Imposed = 5.77 < 12.00 Precamber (mm) = 0
data and finally a revision history. mm Affecting partitions = 15.56 < 17.14 ok Increase btm As by 0%
SHEAR V kN 222.2 Link Ø V 215.8
v N/mm² 2.262 10 v 2.197
vc N/mm² 0.743 Nominal vc 0.743
LINKS H10 @ 125 for 1875 H10 @ 225 H10 @ 150 for 1800
legs No 2 2 2
Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre
Client Advisory Group Made by Date Page CHECKS % As ok ok ok
Location Level 2, Beam on line 6 from B to E RMW 11-Apr-2006 35 Cover ok ok ok
min S ok ok ok
SUBFRAME ANALYSIS to BS8110:2005 Checked Revision Job No
Links ok ok ok
Originated from RCC21.xls v3.0 on CD © 2006 TCC chg - R68
Main bars ok ok ok
max V ok ok
LOCATION Supports from grid B to grid E
Crack width ok 0.233 ok 0.300 ok 0.266
SPANS
L (m) H (mm) bw (mm) hf (mm) Type bf (mm) LOADING PATTERN
SPAN 4 LEFT CENTRE RIGHT
SPAN 1 7.000 600 375 150 T 1355 min max
ACTIONS M kNm 209.9 169.7 57.3
SPAN 2 12.000 600 375 150 T 2055 DEAD 1 1.4
ßb 0.85 0.98 1.00
SPAN 3 12.000 600 375 150 T 2055 IMPOSED 0 1.6
DESIGN d mm 327.5 325.0 332.0
SPAN 4 6.000 600 375 150 T 1215
As mm² 1819 1264 421
SPAN 5 0
SPAN 6 0
As' mm² 403 0 0
TOP STEEL Layer 1 4 H 25 3 H 16 3 H 16
SUPPORTS L 2 0 0 0 0
ABOVE (m) H (mm) B (mm) End Cond BELOW (m) H (mm) B (mm) End Cond
Support 1 2.95 400 300 F 3.10 400 300 P SPANS! sheet
Support 2 3.00 400 300 P 3.10 300 300 P
Support 3 0.00 3.10 400 300 P This sheet shows the design of the left, centre and right hand
Support 4 K
Support 5 4.00 400 300 P 3.10 300 300 P side of each span. Input is needed for the diameter of bars and
Support 6
Support 7 number of legs of links required. Extraneous spans are blanked
LOADING UDLs (kN/m) PLs (kN) Position (m) out.
Dead Imposed Position Loaded Dead Imposed Position Loaded
Span 1 Load Load from left Length Span 4 Load Load from left Length
UDL 32.20 12.50 ~~~~~ ~~~~~ UDL 17.50 5.60 ~~~~~ ~~~~~
PL 1 ~~~~~ PL 1 24 6 2.000 ~~~~~
PL 2 ~~~~~ PL 2 5 18 4.500 ~~~~~
Part UDL Part UDL
Span 2 Span 5
UDL 32.20 12.50 ~~~~~ ~~~~~ UDL ~~~~~ ~~~~~
PL 1 ~~~~~ PL 1 ~~~~~
PL 2 25 25 5.000 ~~~~~ PL 2 ~~~~~
Part UDL Part UDL
Span 3 Span 6
UDL 24.42 8.65 ~~~~~ ~~~~~ UDL ~~~~~ ~~~~~

MAIN! sheet

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:6 17/07/2006 17:01:59

 General notes

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110

Location Level 2, Beam on line 6 ANALYSIS I
REINFORCEMENT DESIGN SPAN 1 Span = 7.500 m BS8110
SUBFRAME ANALYSIS to BS8110:2005 Top Steel Ref
Originated from RCC21.xls v3.0 on CD © 2006 TCC
LEFT SPAN RIGHT 0.25L
Total Design M kNm 92.8 319.9 328.5 58.8
ANALYSIS
Min load 1.0 x dead load ßb 1.000 1.077 0.800 1.000 3.4.4.3
Live load 0.4 x dead load + 1.6 x imposed load (Table 2.1)
Be mm 625 2175 Fig 3.13
Distribution Factors
SUPT 1 SUPT 2 SUPT 3
Mt max kNm 176.6 614.5 3.7.4.2
Up col Lo col R L Up col Lo col R L Up col Lo col R MIDDLE STRIP
Aw 225000 225000 225000 225000 225000
Af 147000 147000 252000 252000 252000
b mm 3425 1875 1875 1875 Fig 3.12
X bar
I 1.6E+09 1.6E+09
211.08871
1.1527E+10
211.08871
1.1527E+10 1.6E+09 675000000
181.132075
1.324E+10
181.132075
1.324E+10 0 1.6E+09
181.13
1E+10
M kNm 1.8 144.0 82.1 20.6 Table 3.18
Stiffness
Sum
542372881 387096774 1646679868
2576149523
1646679868
3.E+09
400000000 163306452 1103349057 1103349057
3.E+09
0 387096774 1E+09
Bar dia mm 12 20 16 12
Factor 0.2105 0.1503 0.6392 0.4970 0.1207 0.0493 0.3330 0.4254 0.0000 0.1492 0.4254 d mm 219.0 215.0 217.0 219.0
SUPT 4 SUPT 5 SUPT 6
L Up col Lo col R L Up col Lo col R L Up col Lo col R K' 0.156 0.156 0.132 0.156 3.4.4.4
Aw 225000 225000 225000 0 0 0
Af 252000 126000 126000 0 0 0 K 0.0003 0.0415 0.0233 0.0057 3.4.4.4
X bar 181.132075 219.230769 219.230769 #DIV/0! #DIV/0! #DIV/0!
I 1.324E+10 0 0 1.1075E+10 1.1075E+10 1.6E+09 675000000 #DIV/0! #DIV/0! 0 0 #DIV/0!
z mm 208.1 204.3 206.2 208.1 3.4.4.4
Stiffness 1103349057 0 0 1845865385 1845865385 300000000 163306452 0 0 0 0 0 As mm²/m 6 865 489 121 3.4.4.4
Sum 3.E+09 2.E+09 0.E+00
Factor 0.3741 0.0000 0.0000 0.6259 0.7994 0.1299 0.0707 0.0000 1.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 As enhancement deflection control 47.52% 0.00%
SUPT 7
L Up col Lo col As final mm²/m 325 1276 489 325 3.12.5.3
Aw 0 Partial UDL factors
Af 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
S mm 325 225 400 325
X bar #DIV/0! a 0 0 0.2 0 #DIV/0! #DIV/0! Clause b ? No Yes No No 3.12.11.2.7
I #DIV/0! 0 0 b 0 0 0.225 0 #DIV/0! #DIV/0!
Stiffness 0 0 0 S max mm 657 ok 378 ok 651 ok 657 ok 3.12.11.2.7
Sum 0.E+00
Factor 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 As prov mm²/m 348 1396 503 348
Fixed End Moments
=% % 0.159 0.649 0.232 0.159
SPAN 1 SPAN 2 SPAN 3 SPAN 4 SPAN 5 SPAN 6
Min load L R L R L R L R L R L R fs N/mm² 5.7 191.7 405.1 116.2 Eqn 8
Cant 788.90 2443.40 1806.84 385.50 0.00 0.00
UDL 131.48 131.48 386.40 386.40 293.04 293.04 52.50 52.50 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
Deflection Base ratio 26 k tens 1.478 k comp 1.050 Allowed 36.335 > 34.88
PL 1 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 21.33 10.67 #DIV/0! #DIV/0! #DIV/0! #DIV/0! COLUMN STRIP
PL 2 0.00 0.00 42.53 30.38 0.00 0.00 1.41 4.22 #DIV/0! #DIV/0! #DIV/0! #DIV/0!
part UDL 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 28.24 8.71 0.00 0.00 #DIV/0! #DIV/0! #DIV/0! #DIV/0! b mm 625 2175 2175 2175 Fig 3.12
FEM 131.48 131.48 428.93 416.78 321.28 301.75 75.24 67.39 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
Live load
M kNm 92.8 176.0 246.4 38.2 Table 3.18
Cant 805.56 2617.36 1765.87 464.28 0.00 0.00 Bar dia mm 16 20 16 12
UDL 134.26 134.26 394.56 394.56 283.30 283.30 47.88 47.88 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
PL 1 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 17.07 8.53 #DIV/0! #DIV/0! #DIV/0! #DIV/0! d mm 217.0 215.0 217.0 219.0
PL 2 0.00 0.00 85.07 60.76 0.00 0.00 8.66 25.99 #DIV/0! #DIV/0! #DIV/0! #DIV/0!
part UDL 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 38.40 11.84 0.00 0.00 #DIV/0! #DIV/0! #DIV/0! #DIV/0! K' 0.156 0.156 0.132 0.156 3.4.4.4
FEM 134.26 134.26 479.63 455.32 321.70 295.14 73.61 82.40 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
K 0.0789 0.0438 0.0601 0.0092 3.4.4.4

Moment Distribution
z mm 195.9 204.0 201.4 208.1 3.4.4.4
HiCol SUPT 1 LoCol HiCol SUPT 2 LoCol HiCol SUPT 3 LoCol HiCol As mm²/m 1743 912 1294 194 3.4.4.4
Min load -131.48 131.48 -428.93 416.78 -321.28
27.68 84.04 19.76 35.91 147.83 99.05 14.66 0.00 -40.63 -40.63 -14.25 0.00 As enhancement deflection control 54.36% 0.00%
73.91 42.02 -20.31 49.53 -42.37
-15.56 -47.25 -11.11 -2.62 -10.79 -7.23 -1.07 -3.04 -3.04 -1.07
As final mm²/m 1743 1408 1294 325 3.12.5.3
-5.39 -23.62 -1.52 -3.61 8.84 S mm 100 200 100 325
1.14 3.45 0.81 3.04 12.50 8.37 1.24 -2.22 -2.22 -0.78
6.25 1.72 -1.11 4.19 -5.01 Clause b ? Yes Yes Yes No 3.12.11.2.7
-1.32 -3.99 -0.94 -0.07 -0.30 -0.20 -0.03 0.35 0.35 0.12
-0.15 -2.00 0.18 -0.10 1.31
S max mm 175 ok 358 ok 189 ok 657 ok 3.12.11.2.7
0.03 0.10 0.02 0.22 0.90 0.61 0.09 -0.52 -0.52 -0.18 As prov mm²/m 2011 1571 1508 348
0.45 0.05 -0.26 0.30 -0.66
-0.10 -0.29 -0.07 0.03 0.10 0.07 0.01 0.15 0.15 0.05 =% % 0.927 0.731 0.695 0.159
0.05 -0.14 0.08 0.03 0.21
-0.01 -0.03 -0.01 0.01 0.03 0.02 0.00 -0.11 -0.11 -0.04 fs N/mm² 289.0 179.7 357.5 186.0 Eqn 8
Sum 11.87 -20.34 8.47 36.50 299.79 -351.20 14.90 421.11 -404.97 -16.14
Deflection Base ratio 26 k tens 1.485 k comp 1.050 Allowed 36.489 > 34.88

ANALYSIS! sheet BAR! sheet

This sheet shows calculations carried out using moment This sheet shows the design of the distribution concrete section in
distribution. detail and gives references to the appropriate clause numbers in
BS 8110. The designs for Spans 2,3 etc follow on.

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre Location Level 2, Beam on line 6 GRAPH DATA I
Client Advisory Group Made by Date Page SUBFRAME ANALYSIS to BS8110:2005
Originated from RCC21.xls v3.0 on CD © 2006 TCC
Location 3rd Floor slab, from 1 to 5a rmw Apr-2006 /47
RIBBED SLABS to BS 8110:2005 (Analysis & Design) Checked Revision Job No
Originated from RCC32.xls v3.0 on CD © 2006 TCC chg - R68 LOADING DIAGRAM 26
BEAM 0 37
0 0
APPROXIMATE WEIGHT of REINFORCEMENT SUPPORTS 0 0 7 7 19 19 31 31 37 37 37 37
-80.7 76.8 -80.7 78.1 -80.7 0 -26 0 -80.7 104 -26 26
D UDL 0 0 7 7 7 19 19 19 31 31 31 37 37 37 37 37 37 3
TOP STEEL No Type Dia Length Unit Wt Weight
0 32.2 32.2 0 32.2 32.2 0 24.4 24.4 0 17.5 17.5 0 0 0 0 0
Support 1 2 H 12 1025 0.888 1.8 L UDL 32.2 44.7 44.7 32.2 44.7 44.7 32.2 33.1 33.1 24.4 23.1 23.1 17.5 0 0 0 0
5 H 8 1025 0.395 2.0 D PUDL 0 0 0 0 7 7 7 7 20.5 20.5 22.9 22.9 31 31 3
Span 1 1 H 16 2225 1.578 3.5 44.7 44.7 44.7 44.7 44.7 44.7 44.7 44.7 33.1 40.6 40.6 33.1 23.1 23.1 2
L PUDL 44.7 44.7 44.7 44.7 44.7 44.7 44.7 44.7 33.1 37.6 37.6 33.1 23.1 23.1 2
Support 2 2 H 20 2250 2.466 11.1 PL 1 0 0 7 7 19 19 33 33 37 37 37 37
4 H 8 2250 0.395 3.6 44.7 44.7 44.7 44.7 33.1 33.1 23.1 47.1 0 0 0 0
Span 2 4 H 12 4425 0.888 15.7 44.7 44.7 44.7 44.7 33.1 33.1 47.1 53.1 0 0 0 0
PL 2 0 0 12 12 19 19 35.5 35.5 37 37 37 37
Support 3 2 H 20 3625 2.466 17.9 44.7 44.7 44.7 69.7 33.1 33.1 23.1 28.1 0 0 0 0
4 H 8 3625 0.395 5.7 44.7 44.7 69.7 94.7 33.1 33.1 28.1 46.1 0 0 0 0
Span 3 3 H 12 4675 0.888 12.5
Support 4 2 H 20 2400 2.466 11.8 MOMENT DIAGRAMS
SPAN 1
4 H 8 2400 0.395 3.8
X 0 0 0.35 0.7 1.05 1.4 1.75 2.1 2.45 2.8 3.15 3.5 3.85 4.2 4.55 4.9 5.25 5
M(e) all 0 36 -10 -48.1 -78.2 -100 -115 -121 -119 -109 -91.5 -65.8 -32.1 9.57 59.2 117 182 25
M(e) odd 0 95.3 32.4 -22.5 -69.4 -108 -139 -162 -177 -184 -183 -175 -158 -133 -100 -59.3 -10.6 4
M(e) even 0 -39 -45.7 -48.4 -47.2 -42 -32.9 -19.9 -2.93 18 42.9 71.7 104 141 182 226 275 3
Beam 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
M(r) all 0 37.8 -11.9 -53.7 -87.5 -113 -131 -141 -143 -137 -123 -101 -71 -33.1 12.9 66.7 129 19
M(r) odd 0 90.5 32.3 -17.9 -60.2 -94.5 -121 -139 -150 -152 -146 -133 -111 -81.9 -44.5 0.96 54.4 11
M(r) even 0 -40.9 -48.5 -52.1 -51.7 -47.5 -39.2 -27.1 -10.9 9.11 33.1 61.1 93 129 169 212 260 3
70% max 0 66.7 22.7 -15.7 -33 -29.4 -23.1 -13.9 -2.05 12.6 30 50.2 73.1 98.8 127 158 192 2
70% min 0 -27.3 -32 -33.9 -54.8 -75.8 -97.5 -114 -124 -129 -128 -122 -110 -93 -70.1 -41.5 -7.41 32
Lower bound 0 -40.9 -48.5 -53.7 -87.5 -113 -131 -141 -150 -152 -146 -133 -111 -93 -70.1 -41.5 -7.41
Upper bound 0 90.5 32.3 0 0 0 0 0 0 12.6 33.1 61.1 93 129 169 212 260 3
Beam 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
BOTTOM STEEL Support 1 1 H 16 1150 1.578 1.8 SPAN 2
Span 1 1 H 20 400 2.466 1.0 Local X 0 0.6 1.2 1.8 2.4 3 3.6 4.2 4.8 5.4 6 6.6 7.2 7.8 8.4 9 9
Support 2 1 H 16 3475 1.578 5.5 X 7 7.6 8.2 8.8 9.4 10 10.6 11.2 11.8 12.4 13 13.6 14.2 14.8 15.4 16 16
M(e) all 743 501 282 85.9 -86.4 -235 -361 -463 -541 -566 -553 -516 -456 -373 -266 -135 18
Span 2 2 H 25 4750 3.853 36.6 M(e) odd 354 245 149 63.5 -10 -71.9 -122 -161 -188 -194 -183 -160 -126 -80.1 -22.7 46.3 12
Support 3 2 H 16 3475 1.578 11.0 M(e) even 741 491 265 62.2 -117 -273 -406 -515 -600 -632 -626 -597 -543 -467 -367 -244 -9
Span 3 2 H 25 5900 3.853 45.5 Beam 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
M(r) all 557 316 97 -98.1 -270 -418 -543 -644 -722 -747 -733 -695 -635 -550 -443 -312 -1
Support 4 3 H 16 1725 1.578 8.2 M(r) odd 442 335 240 156 83.3 22.6 -26.5 -64 -89.9 -94.3 -82 -58.2 -22.7 24.3 82.9 153 2
M(r) even 557 316 97 -98.1 -270 -418 -543 -644 -722 -747 -733 -695 -635 -550 -443 -312 -1
70% max 520 351 197 60.1 -7.01 -50.4 -85.6 -113 -132 -136 -128 -112 -88.1 -56.1 -15.9 32.4 88
70% min 248 172 104 43.6 -82 -191 -284 -360 -420 -443 -438 -418 -380 -327 -257 -171 -6
Lower bound 0 0 0 -98.1 -270 -418 -543 -644 -722 -747 -733 -695 -635 -550 -443 -312 -1
Upper bound 557 351 240 156 83.3 22.6 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 24.3 82.9 153 2
Beam 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SPAN 3

WEIGHT! sheet GRAF! sheet

Calculates the theoretical weight of reinforcement required. Data for graphs used in charts.

12.92 202.3

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:7 17/07/2006 17:02:10

 Disclaimer
All advice or information from the British Cement Association and/or Reinforced Concrete Council is intended for those
contain variously checks, print boxes and combo-boxes, (see
who will evaluate the significance and limitations of its contents and take responsibility for its use and application. No
liability (including that for negligence) for any loss resulting from such advice or information is accepted by the BCA,
TCC or their subcontractors, suppliers or advisors. Users should note that all TCC software and publications are
Help in Excel). Print buttons (buttons with macros assigned to
subject to revision from time to time and should therefore ensure that they are in possession of the latest version.

This spreadsheet should be used in compliance with the accompanying publication 'Spreadsheets for concrete design to
them) automatically print out the calculation sheets providing
BS 8110 and EC2' available from The Concrete Centre, Riverside House, 4 Meadows Business Park, Station Approach,
Blackwater, Camberley, Surrey GU17 9AB. macros that have not been switched off. Combo-boxes allow
Status of spreadsheet
Public release version.
This spreadsheet is shareware. It may be distributed freely, but may not choices between specified options.
be used for commercial purposes until the user has registered with the
Revision history RCC11 Element Design.xls
RCC

Date
15-Feb-06
Version
RCC11 v3.1
Action
Differentiation between flat slabs and other slabs on SLAB page.
Size (kB)
331
To the right hand side of many spreadsheets are intermediate
20-Oct-05
03-Feb-04
RCC11 v3.0
RCC11 v2.2
Updated to 2005 versions of BS8110 & BS8666
Minor correction to cell N12 on "SLAB" (> changed to < ).
317
289
calculations, data for graphs, etc. These ‘workings’ are not
21-Jan-03 RCC11 v2.1 DETR logo replaced by DTI. 289
11-Oct-02 RCC11 v2.0 Version 2 enhancements 304 considered vital to understanding the calculation; they may
01-Oct-02 RCC11 v1.7 COLUMN: Minor mods to N37:U37; Chart at U2 reactivated. 284
22-Jun-01
26-Jan-01
RCC11 v1.6
RCC11 v1.5
Addition of input controls.
Addition of input controls.
284
283
nonetheless be viewed and investigated. ‘Workings’ may also be
05-Dec-00

24-Nov-00
RCC11 v1.4

RCC11 v1.3
SHEAR:K22 lateral link spacing corrected.
SHEAR:C19 & C20 reformatted, and lateral link spacing check added (C
189

185
contained on supplementary sheets.
Braidwood).
30-May-00 RCC11 v1.2 R Lawson comments incorporated ( γc refs etc). 183

Revisions to TEE~BEAM. Option of required compression rebar added.

08-May-00

03-Aug-99
RCC11 v1.1

RCC11 v1.0
Neutral axis, x allowed below flange soffite - IStructE 'Green book' method
followed where flanges outside bw have z = d-hf/2, and bw acts as beam.

First public release.

182

190
Other sheets
Includes β version comments & chg mods to COLUMN

These sheets are not necessarily intended for printing out and
NOTES! sheet
Disclaimers, status and revision history of the spreadsheet. may not be understandable without reference to the printed
calculations. For instance, in the case of RCC52.xls Calcs!, the N-
M relationship in a particular column is calculated for increments
of neutral axis depth. Many iterations are required in order to
Upper sheets construct the N-M graph. Therefore there are many calculations
and these are set out in tables. The volume of calculations makes
The calculations are intended to mimic hand-written calculations
it difficult to produce legible print-outs on a limited number of
as far as possible with a little more explanation by way of
sheets.
references to codes and derivation of numbers than would
usually be the case in normal submissions. Sheets intended
for printing out are divided into three sections: calculations, Notes!
operating instructions and workings. The output is intended to be
sufficient to allow detailing, although the designer should always The Notes! sheet shows the disclaimer, status and revision
consider and allow for rationalising reinforcement both within history of each spreadsheet. The disclaimer and status should be
and between elements. Input cells are in blue and are underlined read and understood. The revision history provides a record of
(so they can be recognised in black and white printouts). the spreadsheet being used and may provide a basis for users’
Quality Assurance procedures. The revision/ version and name of
The cells under Operating Instructions to the right hand side the spreadsheet should appear on all print-outs. This example is
contain help and error messages that are intended to help the taken from RCC52.xls Notes!
user with the correct operation of the spreadsheet. They also

Typical Upper sheet

Combo-box
Concurrent software being used (Used for automated choices)

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:8 17/07/2006 17:02:24

 General notes

Example of an ‘other’ sheet

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110
Location Columns at A1, A2 etc CALCULATIONS I
COLUMN CHART FOR SYMMETRICALLY REINFORCED RECTANGULAR COLUMNS BENT ABOUT THE X-X AXIS TO BS 8110:2005

Originated from 'RCC52.xls' v3.0 on CD © 2006 TCC

CALCULATIONS

.67fcu/
m = 13.40 N/mm² ALL CALCULATIONS DERIVED FROM 0.00 408.42

fy/
m = 434.78 N/mm² FIGURE 3.3 AND CLAUSE 3.4.4.1 480.00 480.00
net fy/
m = 421.38 N/mm²

32 Bar diameter
d' = 54 mm d= 346 mm Asc = 4825.5 mm²
N=0 quadratic a = 4824.000 b = ######## c = -9.E+07
n max = 913.2 Interval = 5.497 (24 intervals between N=0 and Nbal)
N=0 (solve for zero N)
n Neutral axis 88.26 93.76 99.25 104.75 110.25 115.74 121.24 126.74 132.23 137.73 143.23 148.72
Fc Conc comp force 425764 452281 478797 505313 531830 558346 584862 611379 637895 664412 690928 717444
c strain Steel comp strain 0.00136 0.00148 0.00160 0.00170 0.00179 0.00187 0.00194 0.00201 0.00207 0.00213 0.00218 0.00223
t strain Steel tens strain 0.01022 0.00942 0.00870 0.00806 0.00748 0.00696 0.00649 0.00606 0.00566 0.00529 0.00496 0.00464
fsc Steel comp stress 258.32 283.43 305.76 325.74 343.73 360.02 374.82 388.34 400.74 412.15 421.38 421.38
fst Steel tens stress 434.8 434.8 434.8 434.8 434.8 434.8 434.8 434.8 434.8 434.8 434.8 434.8
Fsc Steel comp force 623255 683837 737709 785928 829338 868625 904349 936975 966888 994414 1016688 1016688
Fst Steel tens force 1049019 1049019 1049019 1049019 1049019 1049019 1049019 1049019 1049019 1049019 1049019 1049019
z Conc lever arm 306.28 303.81 301.34 298.86 296.39 293.92 291.44 288.97 286.49 284.02 281.55 279.07
N Fc + Fsc - Fst 0.00 87.10 167.49 242.22 312.15 377.95 440.19 499.34 555.76 609.81 658.60 685.11
M MOR 312.39 324.37 335.24 345.15 354.22 362.56 370.26 377.36 383.94 390.04 395.25 397.07
Labels for chart
N diff 87.10 80.39 74.73 69.93 65.80 62.24 59.14 56.43 54.04 48.79 26.52 26.52
M diff 11.98 10.87 9.91 9.08 8.34 7.69 7.11 6.58 6.10 5.20 1.82 1.69
25 Bar diameter
d' = 50.5 mm d= 349.5 mm Asc = 2945.2 mm²
N=0 quadratic a = 4824.000 b = 370831.72 c = -5.E+07
n max = 922.5 Interval = 6.253 (24 intervals between N=0 and Nbal)

Notes! sheet
Disclaimer
All advice or information from the British Cement Association and/or Reinforced Concrete Council is intended for those
who will evaluate the significance and limitations of its contents and take responsibility for its use and application. No
liability (including that for negligence) for any loss resulting from such advice or information is accepted by the BCA,
TCC or their subcontractors, suppliers or advisors. Users should note that all TCC software and publications are
subject to revision from time to time and should therefore ensure that they are in possession of the latest version.

This spreadsheet should be used in compliance with the accompanying publication 'Spreadsheets for concrete design to
BS 8110 and EC2' available from The Concrete Centre, Riverside House, 4 Meadows Business Park, Station Approach,
Blackwater, Camberley, Surrey GU17 9AB.

Status of spreadsheet This spreadsheet is shareware. It may be distributed freely, but may not
Public release version. be used for commercial purposes until the user has registered with the
Revision history RCC11 Element Design.xls
RCC

Date Version Action Size (kB)

15-Feb-06 RCC11 v3.1 Differentiation between flat slabs and other slabs on SLAB page. 331
20-Oct-05 RCC11 v3.0 Updated to 2005 versions of BS8110 & BS8666 317
03-Feb-04 RCC11 v2.2 Minor correction to cell N12 on "SLAB" (> changed to < ). 289
21-Jan-03 RCC11 v2.1 DETR logo replaced by DTI. 289
11-Oct-02 RCC11 v2.0 Version 2 enhancements 304
01-Oct-02 RCC11 v1.7 COLUMN: Minor mods to N37:U37; Chart at U2 reactivated. 284
22-Jun-01 RCC11 v1.6 Addition of input controls. 284
26-Jan-01 RCC11 v1.5 Addition of input controls. 283
05-Dec-00 RCC11 v1.4 SHEAR:K22 lateral link spacing corrected. 189
SHEAR:C19 & C20 reformatted, and lateral link spacing check added (C
24-Nov-00 RCC11 v1.3 185
Braidwood).
30-May-00 RCC11 v1.2 R Lawson comments incorporated ( γc refs etc). 183

Revisions to TEE~BEAM. Option of required compression rebar added.

08-May-00 RCC11 v1.1 Neutral axis, x allowed below flange soffite - IStructE 'Green book' method 182
followed where flanges outside bw have z = d-hf/2, and bw acts as beam.

First public release.

03-Aug-99 RCC11 v1.0 190
Includes β version comments & chg mods to COLUMN

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:9 17/07/2006 17:02:30

 Using the spreadsheets
Frequently Asked Questions
Macros
When loading the individual spreadsheets, Excel may warn about
the presence of macros. All the macros provided in the files are
either to allow automated printing of the ‘calculations’ or to
provide choices by way of combo-boxes. The printing macros
have been assigned to buttons. Turning the macros off may affect
the actual function of the spreadsheets but will certainly make
printing of the sheets as configured more difficult and make the
choice of options very much more difficult.
Fonts
Unless the appropriate fonts Tekton and Marker (supplied in the
CD-ROM) have been installed by the user, the appearance on
screen will be different from that intended. These upright fonts
have been used to emulate a designer’s handwriting and to allow
adequate information to be shown across the page and in each
cell.
If problems are experienced it is most likely that the fonts on your
computer screen will have defaulted to the closest approximation
of the fonts intended (e.g. the toolbar may say Tekton but a
default font such as Arial will have been used). The spreadsheets
will work but not as intended – ends of words may be missing,
numbers may not fit cells resulting in a series of hashes, #####.
Column width and cell overlap problems only occur when the
correct fonts are not loaded.
It is strongly recommended that the Tekton and Marker fonts are
copied into your computer’s font library. The Freewave fonts may
be found in the Fonts folder on the CD-ROM.
They may be copied in the following manner, either:
■ Start/Settings/Control Panel/Fonts/ File/ Add Fonts and when
asked ‘copy fonts to system directory?’ answer ‘yes’.
or
■ Through Microsoft Explorer and copying (or dragging)
the font files into your font library, usually contained in
Windows/ Set-up/ Fonts
Help
A printed copy of this User Guide is available from The Concrete
Bookshop (07004 607777 or www.concretebookshop.com). The
User Guide is also available as an Adobe Acrobat file UserGuid
pdf, (on the CD-ROM). A copy of Adobe Acrobat Reader will be
required to read this file.
Help is also available at the following places:
■ Within Excel under Help
10
EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:10
■ to the right hand side of the spreadsheets, cells under
Operating Instructions contain help and error messages.
■ Queries may be e-mailed to helpdesk@concretecentre.com.
Preference will be given to those who have registered.
Support
E-mailed questions, comments, developments and suggestions
are welcomed. Send them to helpdesk@concretecentre.com.
Preference will be given to those who are registered, as detailed
above.
Shareware
These spreadsheets are offered as shareware. This can be
considered a ‘try before you buy’ system where you are expected
to pay the program owners a registration fee if you find the
program useful or if the programs are used for commercial
use. In general you may pass on copies of shareware programs
to colleagues within the UK, although commercial (for a fee)
distribution requires special written permission from the
publisher.
Availability/registration
The RC Spreadsheets are made available as shareware from The
Concrete Centre see www.concretecentre.com/rcspreadsheets.
However, the spreadsheets may not be used for commercial
purposes until the user has purchased and validated a licence.
Licences may be purchased from The Concrete Bookshop
(www.concretebookshop.com, Tel +44 (0)7004-607777) or via
The Concrete Centre website. Licences may be validated via
www.concretecentre.com/rcspreadsheets. The purchase price
includes
■ Permission to use the spreadsheets for commercial purposes
for at least one year
■ A hard copy of this publication, User Guide to RC
Spreadsheets: v3
■ CD-ROM containing RC Spreadsheets: v3, together with
Admin files, which themselves contain fonts, issue sheets,
user guide files etc.
■ Occasional e-mails to inform them of any revisions
orchanges to the spreadsheets or other relevant information
■ Details of how to download updates of the spreadsheets
■ Preferential treatment with regard to support
Further information, updates, FAQs, free trial download versions
of some spreadsheets, latest news and other information on
the RC-Spreadsheet suite is available on www.concretecentre.
com/rcspreadsheets
17/07/2006 17:02:37

Overseas use
The spreadsheets have been developed and maintained for use
within the UK. The Concrete Centre reserves the right to pass
details of non-UK registrants to any future owner of the non-UK
copyright or overseas distributor of the spreadsheets.
Updates
It is intended that The Concrete Centre’s website will include
updated versions of the spreadsheets. Registrants will be provided
with information on how to download updates.
Using the spreadsheets for the
first time
Base versions
Initially, always start from the base versions on the CD-ROM. If in
doubt, go back to the version on the CD-ROM. These safeguards
are to avoid using corrupted or bespoke files. Eventually, familiarity
with the spreadsheets and Quality Assurance procedures may
overtake this basic precaution.
Please note that whilst all spreadsheet cells, apart from input
cells, are covered by nominal protection, it is possible to change
the contents of cells. Original versions are available on CD-ROM
or from The Concrete Centre’s website www.concretecentre.com.
Also, please note conditions of use and disclaimers associated
with the use of the spreadsheets contained within the sheet
titled Notes! and elsewhere in this User guide.
Excel
The spreadsheets are normal Excel files. Excel (© Microsoft
Corporation) is a standalone package or may be included as part
of the Microsoft Office package on PCs or Macs. The files are
compatible with Excel 2002, part of Office 2002, and are likely
to be compatible with future versions of Excel. Those not familiar
with Excel are directed to the Help functions within Excel and
relevant literature available at book and computer shops.
Please note that the spreadsheets will not necessarily work with
previous versions of Excel (e.g. ’95, 5.x etc.) or other spreadsheet
programs. This is due to incompatibility between software and
backward incompatibility between versions. (To check which
version of Excel you are running see sign-on screen, or Help/
About Microsoft Excel). Those running Excel 2000 are advised
to use the Save As/ .xls function to avoid inordinately large file
sizes.
Long file names
The base versions of the spreadsheets are saved with long file
names to aid familiarity with each spreadsheet’s purpose. Some
EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:11
General notes
software and networks only recognise eight characters for a file
name. In use, users may be requested by the system to allow
abbreviated names, e.g. RCC11.xls .
As shorthand, the spreadsheets are generally referred to by their
number rather than their name in full, i.e. RCC11.xls is used as
shorthand for RCC11 Element Design.xls.
Loading a spreadsheet for the first time
Under Windows ’98, NT, 2000, 2002 or XP insert the spreadsheet
CD-ROM into the CD drive (drive D: assumed).
A spreadsheet can be loaded using one of the following
methods:
■ Your computer may automatically present a view of the files
available on the CD-ROM in which case double click the
mouse pointer on the spreadsheet of your choice, e.g.MENU.
xls//. If not already loaded and presuming it is available, Excel
will boot up and load up with MENU.xls ready for operation.
Excel will most probably warn about macros before loading
the spreadsheet fully. In order to proceed, enable macros (see
below).
Otherwise
■ From ‘My Computer’, double click(//) on My Computer, double
click on D (assumed CD drive) //double click on spreadsheet of
ones choice //.
■ Successively click Start/ Programs/ Microsoft Explorer/ double
click mouse on CD Drive (D)//. Double click the mouse pointer
on the spreadsheet of your choice, e.g.Menu.xls//. If not
already loaded and available, Excel will boot up and load up
with Menu.xls.
■ Successively click Start/ Programs/ Microsoft Excel. Once
Excel has booted up, click mouse pointer on File in top menu
bar/ click mouse on Open/ click mouse on the ‘Look in’ box
and scroll through to the CD Drive
■ Click mouse on the CD Drive (D)//. Double click mouse on the
spreadsheet of your choice, e.g. Menu.xls//.
The design spreadsheets may, if the user wishes, be loaded direct.
In the above instructions replace MENU.xls with the name of the
spreadsheet required. The advantages of using MENU.xls are
explained later.
No installation program per se is included. Under file managers
such as Microsoft Explorer, the CD-ROM versions of the
spreadsheets can be dragged and dropped into an appropriate
folder specified by the user. Alternatively, from within Excel, the
spreadsheets can be loaded directly from the CD-ROM – but
should users wish to save the modified spreadsheet, it has to be
saved to an alternative drive.
11
17/07/2006 17:02:39
 Default font size
Even with the correct fonts installed, the appearance of the sheets
might be different from those intended. This may be due to the
default font size on the user’s computer being different from the
font size 12 used in the development of the spreadsheets. For
instance if the user’s default font size is 10, pages will appear and
print narrower than intended (as unformatted cells will revert to
a narrower cell width than intended).
Please ensure that the default font size is set at 12. (In Excel check
Tools/ Options/ General/ Standard font and size). If standard font
or size is changed it will become effective only after rebooting
Excel. While the spreadsheets were developed using Tekton 12,
many True Type font size 12 (e.g. Arial or preferably Times New
Roman 12) may give adequate presentation. If a series of hashes
(#####) still appears, it may be necessary to resize the column
width.
Screen view
The spreadsheets have been developed assuming that part, if not
the whole, of the Operating Instructions column is in view. This
column contains comments, instructions, checks, explanations,
etc. and is important for the correct operation of the spreadsheets.
Generally, a screen zoom of 75% has been used as a default size
on the sheets. Occasionally, other zoom sizes have been used in
order to aid comprehension.
Screen resolution
The spreadsheets have been developed in 1024 x 768 resolution,
so that their appearance will be acceptable between SVGA (800
x 600) and 1280 x 1024.
They will obviously work in VGA (600 x 480), but higher
resolutions are recommended.
Input
In the spreadsheets, input data is blue and underlined. New data
may be input by overwriting default values or by entering values
in ‘greyed-out’ cells. Entering data in far-left greyed-out cells
may also remove the grey conditional background to other cells,
which will then require data entry. Some input cells refer back to
data on previous sheets within a workbook. These are coloured
magenta, but change back to blue if other data is entered.
Do not copy and paste input from one cell to another as this
may cause formatting and other errors. Do not use Space,
Enter (the space equals text). If similar input is required in other
cells then use ‘= cell reference’ with caution, e.g. ‘= B16’ in the
appropriate input cell.
All non-input cells should have nominal protection and the
contents of these cells can only be overwritten if the user has
taken positive steps to overwrite original contents. In the page
headers the ‘Made by’ and ‘Checked’ boxes should be completed
12
EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:12
or cleared by using a blank or hyphen; clearing the cell completely
would produce ‘0’ on subsequent sheets.
Values in red or red backgrounds
During operation, values in red or cells with red backgrounds
flag either incorrect data to be changed or excess data to be
cleared (manually). Even a space as an entry might generate red
backgrounds.
If you make a mess of it, start again from the base version of the
spreadsheet on the CD-ROM.
#DIV/0! (Divide by zero) errors
In some spreadsheets, #DIV/0! results may arise and be displayed.
In sheets intended for printing out, #DIV/0! indicates an error in
or invalid input. In sheets of workings, they have no relevance to
the validity of the sheet or the spreadsheet as a whole.
Please note that in many cases, but not all, a very small value
has been used rather than zero in order to avoid #DIV/0! (divide
by zero) problems in Excel, e.g. [RCC53.xls] Cases!B3:B8 where
=IF(ERROR(G3),0.000001,G3) has been used.
Printing
The sheets may be printed out in several ways:
■ Through the automated print buttons in the spreadsheets
(using these print macros will over-write print areas defined
elsewhere)
■ Using the Print icon on Excel’s standard toolbar
■ Using File/ Print within Excel
■ Copying and pasting (special) parts of the spreadsheets to
a word processor or other package. Pasting (special) into a
word processor file as a bitmap produces a wysiwyg image.
■ Pasting as other formats will probably require some
pre-copying formatting of the spreadsheet and/ or post-
formatting of receiving cells.
Print areas may be defined by:
■ Highlighting area then clicking File/ Print Area/ Set Print Area
■ Clicking View/Page Break Preview and adjusting boundaries
to suit
Print previewing can be achieved using the Print Preview icon on
the standard toolbar.
Print formatting
Different hardware and software are configured in many different
ways. This situation leads to many variations on the actual print
from individual printers. Best results are likely to be obtained
from Windows printers but even these may not produce printing
that is identical to that intended. Some manipulation for printing
with your configuration may be inevitable.
17/07/2006 17:02:41

AutoComplete
Excel’s facility for AutoCompleting cells (e.g. entering ‘T’ might
autoComplete to ‘Type’) can be a mixed blessing. In most
spreadsheets it should be turned off via Tools/ Options / Edit and
clearing the Enable AutoComplete for cell values box.
Continued use
Conditions of use: disclaimers
A fundamental condition of use that the user accepts responsibility
for the input and output of the computer and how it is used.
Whilst the spreadsheets have been checked with all reasonable
care and diligence, they cannot be guaranteed for every
eventuality.
Users must satisfy themselves that the uses to which the
spreadsheets are put are appropriate. Users must have read,
understood and accepted the disclaimer contained on the inside
front cover of this publication (and repeated in the sheet named
Notes! in each spreadsheet).
Nominal protection
Users and managers should be aware that the spreadsheets can
be changed. Beyond nominal cell and sheet protection, the files
are open and can be changed.
There are several reasons for this:
■ The files can be customised by users to their own preferred
methods of presentation and design (e.g. deflections might be
calculated to part 2 of BS 8110; individual firms’ or project
logos might replace the The Concrete Centre logo).
■ The protection should stop inadvertent changes and
corruption of cells.
■ Developments and improvements can be made and fed back
to The Concrete Centre. Such feedback is encouraged and
allows a wider consensus to be gained.
■ Protection can always be overcome by determined users.
■ Fully protected files can hide cell contents .
■ Spreadsheet emulators are at present unsuitable for this
application.
■ Different designers want different facilities available to them
and should not be restricted.
The spreadsheets are all protected but with no password, in other
words users have to do something positive if they are to change
any formulae, and must therefore take responsibility for any
deliberate or accidental changes. The project’s Advisory Group
held this to be a sensible position.
Users and managers must address change control and versions
for use. The Concrete Centre can only control the base versions
issued on CD-ROM (and web page). The published examples can
EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:13
General notes
be used as record copies to help identify changes. Users’ Quality
Assurance procedures may dictate the use of more sophisticated
protection measures.
Development
The nominal protection within the spreadsheets may be over-
ridden to allow customisation and individual development.
Any development of the spreadsheets should be undertaken
by experienced staff who have a good understanding of the
problems and pitfalls of both design and spreadsheets. It may
take an experienced engineer four or five times longer to prepare
a spreadsheet than it would to produce the equivalent manual
calculation. Robust, commercially acceptable spreadsheets may
take 50 times as long. They can take even longer to test, check
and correct. Only repetition of use makes the investment of time
worthwhile.
With relatively open files, designers are at liberty to alter the
spreadsheets as they wish. However, they must satisfy themselves
that any alterations are correct and do not interfere with any
other aspect of the spreadsheet in question and conform to any
Quality Assurance procedures.
Notwithstanding the above, copyright of the spreadsheet
contents remains with The Concrete Centre. Altered or amended
versions of the spreadsheets may not be sold or hired without
the written permission of the Centre. Please inform The Concrete
Centre of any major discrepancies found or improvements
made.
Saving files/ file management
Many users save spreadsheets to a directory and/ or folder of their
choice. This is particularly true where spreadsheets pertaining to a
particular project are saved to a folder given the project’s name.
Linking spreadsheets
To avoid complications, links between different design
spreadsheets have not been used. Nonetheless, for the
experienced user, linking provides a powerful tool. The results
of one spreadsheet can be linked through to become the input
for another, or project data can be auto-loaded. This minimises
the amount of input required and at the same time reduces the
scope for error in data transfers. For example, the results of a
beam analysis can be carried through to beam design. Any links
created by the user are at his or her discretion.
Assumptions made
During the course of development of these spreadsheets, a
number of structural and computing assumptions have been
made. These are discussed below.
13
17/07/2006 17:02:43
 As enhancement
Several of the BS8110 spreadsheets contain automatic routines
that increase As in order to reduce service stress fs and therefore
increase modification factors in order to satisfy deflection checks.
The ‘As enhancement’ values are the percentages by which As
required for bending are increased in order to satisfy deflection
criteria.
Redistribution
Those spreadsheets with analysis allow redistribution in
accordance with BS 8110: Part 1, Clause 3.2.2.1 or Eurocode 2
Clause 5.5. The user may choose between three options. These
options do not affect redistribution at supports but do determine
how span moments are calculated, as shown in Table 1.
Reinforcement densities
Some spreadsheets give an indication of weight of reinforcement
in the margin under ‘Operating Instructions’. These densities
should be used with great caution. Many factors can affect actual
reinforcement quantities on specific projects. These include
different methods of analysis, non-rectangular layouts, large
holes, actual covers used, detailing preferences (curtailment, laps
and wastage), and the unforeseen complications that inevitably
occur. As may be examined in the sheets entitled ‘Weight’,
the densities given relate to simple rectangular layouts and
the author’s interpretation of BS 8110. They make no specific
allowance for wastage.
The densities assume that the areas or volumes of slabs are
measured gross, e.g. slabs are measured through beams. Beam
reinforcement densities relate to web width multiplied by overall
depth.

Table 1
Redistribution options in spreadsheets with analysis

Spreadsheet Design Design span moments

option support
number moment Support moment from Comments
which span moment is calculated

0 ßbM ßbM Design span moments will probably be less than elastic moment
(minimum of 70% of elastic moment).

This option may lead to a kinked bending moment diagram as the

70% kicks-in in the spans.

In the case of thin sections such as slabs, consideration of span

deflection and service stress often leads to reinstatement of any
reinforcement theoretically saved.

1 ßbM Minimum of ßbM and Malt/ßb Design span moments might be less than elastic moment but less
likely than with option 0.

Increasing the minimum support moment for the calculation of

span moment from Malt to Malt/ßb is seen as a sensible compromise
between options 0 and 2.

2 ßbM Minimum of ßbM and Malt Design span moments cannot be less than elastic moment.

Most often used but, if, typically, 20% redistribution is specified at

supports, design span moments will increase by about 10% over
elastic span moments.

Again, in thin sections, consideration of deflection and service

stress can limit additional amounts of reinforcement due to
increased span moment.

Where
ßb = (moment after redistribution)/(moment before redistribution)
= 100% - % redistribution requested
M = elastic moment at support, all spans loaded
Malt = maximum elastic Moment at support, alternate spans loaded

14

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:14 17/07/2006 17:02:45

 General notes

Rationalisation of reinforcement Analysis: cantilever deflections and

Although it may appear that many of the spreadsheets give
support rotation
least weight solutions (hence more bars, more work), the
Support rotations are ignored. Support rotation cannot be
amounts of reinforcement derived are actually accurate (and
determined except as part of a rigorous deflection analysis.
not necessarily rationalised). It is intended, therefore, that the
Rotations cannot be easily derived from moment distribution,
amounts of reinforcement derived from the spreadsheet should
and in any case, gross section slopes are of little or no value. It
be considered as minimal.
is assumed that BS 8110’s or Eurocode 2’s deemed-to-satisfy l/d
checks are adequate.
The user should specify more rationalised reinforcement layouts
to the detailer. Rationalisation should be done manually – there
If support rotations are expected to be critical additional checks
would seem to be too many variables and personal preferences
should be undertaken.
to enable automatic rationalisation. A detailer can always close
up spacing and/ or reduce bar diameters if desired.

Most often the spreadsheets require bar size as input, rather than
bar spacing. This can lead to unusual, but correct, spacings. Where
bar diameter input is available, it may be worth investigating
larger bars (at larger centres). For instance, in the design of a flat
slab it would probably be preferable to use 4828 larger bars at
greater centres rather than 6840 smaller bars at small centres
(weight is marginally different, 82.5 kg/m3 c.f. 80.8 kg/m3).
This results in 30% fewer bars compared with 2% extra steel.
Rationalised arrangements with least number of bars (without
breaking the spacing rules) and least number of bar marks are
always preferable. Eventually, it may be possible to automate this
process, but for the time being it is between the program user
(i.e. the designer) and the detailer to decide how to rationalise
bar arrangements. Any estimates of reinforcement must take this
process into account.

Other spreadsheets tend to size bars in such a way that minimum

centres (or clear spacings) are not exceeded.

It is assumed that issues of detail will be considered by the

engineer and detailer. Issues such as radius of bottom bars and
beam bearings, space between bars in narrow beams, spliced
bars at supports of beams, connection details, etc. need to be
considered.

Definitions of imposed and live loads

For the BS8110 spreadsheets, imposed load is taken to be the
characteristic imposed load input by the user. For floors this
might be the minimum imposed floor loads described in BS
6399[19] Part 1 Table 1.

Live load is taken to be that part of the ultimate load that is not
characteristic dead load (i.e. in BS8110 spreadsheets, live load
= n - gk ).

(For the Eurocode 2 spreadsheets no such distinction is needed.

Variable actions should be as described in BS EN 1991-1[35]. For
permanent actions, γG is intended to be constant across all spans
and therefore not ‘live’.)

15

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:15 17/07/2006 17:02:46

 Menu.xls
This spreadsheet acts as both menu program, allowing the user to Welcome!
load the spreadsheet they want to use, and as a version checker.
It is intended to help the user designing a number of elements at
one session and to help ensure that the most up to date versions
of the spreadsheets are in use. To work properly it must reside in
the same folder as the design spreadsheets themselves.

Depending upon the level of security you have set up on your

version of Excel, you may be asked whether you wish macros to
run; please answer ‘Enable macros’. Once Menu.xls is loaded,
you may also be asked whether you want to update links. If you
wish the current version numbers in your folder to be displayed
answer ‘Update’.

BS8110!
Welcome!
Welcome gives a quick introduction to the spreadsheets by
covering in outline:

Limitations & Assumptions System requirements

■ Disclaimer
■ Licence conditions
■ Instructions for Use
■ Basic Instructions
■ Macros

Eurocode 2!
BS8110!
This sheet shows the spreadsheets available for the design of
elements to BS 8110. Adjacent to the title of each spreadsheet is a
button which may be clicked in order to load that spreadsheet.

Eurocode 2!
Similarly, this sheet highlights the spreadsheets available for the
design of elements to Eurocode 2.

Adjacent to the title of each spreadsheet is a button that may be

clicked in order to load that spreadsheet.
Versions!

In due course further spreadsheets will be released and made

available.

Versions!
This sheet shows the version number of each spreadsheet in your
folder.

16

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:16 17/07/2006 17:02:47

 Spreadsheets to BS 8110

Spreadsheets to BS 8110

17

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:17 17/07/2006 17:03:09

 18

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:18 17/07/2006 17:03:09


RCC11 Element Design.xls
RCC11.xls includes sheets for designing:
■ Solid slabs,
■ Rectangular beams
■ T beams (and ribbed slabs) for bending
■ Beam shear an
■ Columns with axial load and bending about one axis
RCC11.xls designs elements to BS 8110: Part 1, 1997 including
Amd 3[2]. It is assumed that loads, moments, shears, etc. are
available for input from hand calculations or analysis from
elsewhere. A governing criterion can be deflection; span-to-
depth ratios are used as per BS 8110: Part 1, Clause 3.4.6.
SLAB!
This sheet allows for the design of a section of solid slab in a
single simply-supported span, in a continuous span, at supports
or in a cantilever. These choices have a bearing on deflection
limitations and the user should choose the appropriate location
from the combo-box to the right hand side. The user may
also choose to allow for no or nominal compression steel; this
again affects deflection factors. To an extent the spreadsheet
will automatically increase reinforcement in order to lower
service stresses and enhance allowable span to depth ratios. The
spreadsheet allows a certain amount of theoretical over-stress as
defined by the user in cell M7. Engineering judgement is required
to ensure that any over-stress is acceptable and that specified
reinforcement is sensibly rationalised.
Slight variances in reinforcement requirements may be found.
These are due to the spreadsheet allowing marginal over-stress
and allowing centres in increments of 25 mm.
RECT~BEAM!
This sheet designs rectangular beams. The location of the beam
may be either in a single simply-supported span, in a continuous
span, at supports or in a cantilever. These choices have a
bearing on deflection limitations and the user should choose
the appropriate location from the combo-box to the right hand
side.
When considering span reinforcement, the spreadsheet will,
where necessary, automatically increase reinforcement in order
to lower service stresses and enhance allowable span-to-depth
ratios. In checking deflection, the sheet entitled RECT~BEAM!
includes two bars of the specified reinforcement diameter to
derive a modification factor for compression reinforcement.
The facility to specify additional compression reinforcement to
enhance span-to-depth ratios is contained within TEE~BEAM!
EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:19
RCC11 Element Design.xls
TEE~BEAM!
TEE~BEAM! designs T beams and L beams in single simply-
supported span, end span, internal span or cantilever locations.
Again, these choices have a bearing on deflection limitations
and the user should choose the appropriate location from the
combo-box to the right hand side. With respect to the effective
width of the flange, the user may also choose that the section is
considered as a tee- or inverted L beam.
A default value for the width of the flange bf is calculated and
displayed as input. This cell may be overwritten if, for instance,
say the user wishes to allow for openings, etc. The default is
calculated as being:
web width + 0.14 span for T beams, internal span
web width + 0.16 span for T beams, end span
web width + 0.07 span for L beams, internal span
web width + 0.08 span for L beams, end span
In the determination of compression steel, where the neutral
axis lies below flange, the concrete in web, bw, below flange has
been ignored. This is seen as a valid alternative to the approach
in Clause 3.4.4.5.
In order to calculate the appropriate deflection factor for
compression reinforcement, there is a facility to specify
compression reinforcement. When considering deflection, the
spreadsheet will, where necessary, automatically increase span
reinforcement in order to lower service stresses and enhance
allowable span-to-depth ratios.
SHEAR!
This sheet checks beams or slabs for shear and calculates any
shear reinforcement required. It is hoped that the input is self-
explanatory. Providing the applied load is fundamentally a UDL,
or where the principal load is located further than 2d from the
face of the support, BS 8110: Clause 3.4.5.10 allows shear to be
checked at d from the face of support.
Checks for maximum shear (either 5.0 N/mm2 or 0.8fc u 0.5 )
are carried out automatically. In beams, the designed links will
be necessary for a distance from the support before reverting to
nominal link arrangements. A maximum link spacing of 600 mm
is used; this is seen as a sensible maximum.
Apart from punching shear, shear in slabs is rarely critical (see
RCC13.xls).
19
17/07/2006 17:03:10
 COLUMN!
This sheet designs symmetrical rectangular columns where both
axial load, N, and maximum design moment, Mx are known
(see BS 8110: Part 1, Clauses 3.8.2, 3 and 4). It iterates x/h to
determine where the neutral axis lies. The sheet includes stress
and strain diagrams to aid comprehension of the final design.

For simplicity, where three or more bars are required in the top
and bottom of the section, it is assumed that a (rotationally)
symmetrical arrangement will be required for the side faces.
This appears to be common practice, for small to medium sized
columns. For more detailed consideration see RCC52.xls. In
particular, see RCC53.xls regarding the issue of side bars.

COLUMN! assumes that the moment entered has already been

adjusted, if necessary, for bi-axial bending.

For many side and all corner columns, there is no other choice
than to design for bi-axial bending, and the method given in
Clause 3.8.4.5 must be adhered to, i.e., RCC53.xls or sheets 2 and
3 of RCC51.xls should be used.

In theory, negative amounts of reinforcement required can be

obtained but these are superseded by requirements for minimum
amounts of reinforcement in columns. No adjustment is made
in the area of concrete occupied by reinforcement. Theoretical
overstressing by up to 2% is considered to be acceptable.

Maximum link centres are given. The routine in the area L61:U81
investigates shear when, in accordance with Clause 3.8.4.6, M/N
> 0.6h. In such cases either a maximum allowable shear is shown
where shear is critical, or input of shear and number of legs in
links allows the links to be designed for the applied shear. Even in
unbraced structures shear is rarely likely to be critical.

Notes!
This sheet gives disclaimers and revision history

20

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:20 17/07/2006 17:03:11

 RCC11 Element Design.xls

RCC11 Element/ SLABS!

ELEMENT DESIGN to BS 8110:2005

SOLID SLABS
Originated from RCC11.xls v3.1 © 2006 TCC

INPUT Location D&D: interior span solid slab

Design moment, M 216.0 kNm/m fcu 40 N/mm² γc = 1.50
ßb 1.00 fy 500 N/mm² γ s = 1.15
span 6500 mm steel class A
Height, h 1000 mm Section location CONTINUOUS SPAN
Bar Ø 20 mm Compression steel NONE
cover 50 mm to these bars (deflection control only)
ONE or TWO WAY SLAB
OUTPUT D&D: interior span solid slab Compression steel = NONE
d = 1000 - 50 - 20/2 = 940.0 mm .
(3.4.4.4) K' = 0.156 > K = 0.006 ok .
(3.4.4.4) z = 940.0 [0.5 + (0.25 - 0.006 /0.893)]^½ = 933.6 > 0.95d = 893.0 mm
(3.4.4.1) As = 216.00E6 /500 /893.0 x 1.15 = 556 < min As = 1300 mm²/m
PROVIDE H20 @ 225 = 1396 mm²/m .
(Eqn 8) fs = 2/3 x 500 x 556 /1396 /1.00 = 132.8 N/mm²
(Eqn 7) Tens mod factor = 0.55 + (477 - 132.8) /120 /(0.9 + 0.244) = 2.000
(3.4.6.3) Permissible L/d = 26.0 x 2.000 = 52.000
. Actual L/d = 6500 /940.0 = 6.915 ok .
. .

21

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:21 17/07/2006 17:03:12

 RCC11 Element Design/ RECT~BEAMS!

ELEMENT DESIGN to BS 8110:2005

RECTANGULAR BEAMS
Originated from RCC11.xls v3.1 © 2006 TCC

INPUT Location D&D: Main beam 1st Floor @internal support

Design moment, M 282.0 kNm fcu 35 N/mm² c 1.50
ßb 0.70 fy 500 N/mm² s 1.15
Span 8000 mm steel class A
Height, h 500 mm Comp cover 40 mm to main reinforcement
Breadth, b 300 mm Tens cover 48 mm to main reinforcement
Tens Ø 25 mm Side cover 35 mm to main reinforcement
Comp Ø 12 mm Section location CONTINUOUS SPAN

OUTPUT D&D: Main beam 1st Floor @internal support .

d = 500 - 48 - 25/2 = 439.5 mm
(3.4.4.4) K' = 0.104 < K = 0.139 compression steel required
(3.4.4.4) z = 439.5(0.5 + (0.25 - 0.104/0.893)^½ ) = 380.7 < 417.5 mm
(3.4.4.4) x = (439.5 - 380.2) /0.45 = 131.9 mm
d' = 40 + 12/2 = 46.0 mm .
(Fig 3.3) Gross fsc = 434.8 N/mm² from strain diagram .
(Fig 3.3) net fsc = 434.8 - 0.67 x 35 /1.5 = 419.1 > 0 N/mm²
Excess M = M - Mu = 282.0(0.139 - 0.104) /0.139 = 70.4 kNm
As' = 70.4E6 /419.1 /(439.5 - 46.0) = 427 mm²
PROVIDE 4H12 compression steel = 452 mm² .
(Fig 3.3) fst = 434.8 N/mm² .
As = (70.4E6 /393.5 + 211.6E6 /380.2) /434.8 = 1692 mm² .
PROVIDE 4H25 tension steel = 1963 mm² As enhanced by 14% for deflection
(Eqn 8) fs = 2/3 x 500 x 1,692 /1,963 /0.70 = 410.3 N/mm²
(Table 3.11) Comp mod factor = 1 + 0.343 /(3 + 0.343) = 1.103 < 1.5
(Table 3.10) Tens mod factor = 0.55 + (477 - 410.3) /120 /(0.9 + 4.866) = 0.646 < 2
(3.4.6.3) Permissible L/d = 26.0 x 1.103 x 0.646 = 18.533
(3.4.6.1) Actual L/d = 8000 /439.5 = 18.203 ok .

22

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:22 17/07/2006 17:03:17

 RCC11 Element Design.xls

RCC11 Element Design/ TEE~BEAMS!

ELEMENT DESIGN to BS 8110:2005

SIMPLE TEE & L BEAMS
Originated from RCC11.xls v3.1 © 2006 TCC

INPUT Location D&D: Main beam, 1st Floor 8m span

M 280.0 kNm fcu 40 N/mm² c 1.50
ßb 1.00 fy 500 N/mm² s 1.15
span 8000 mm steel class A
h 500 mm Comp cover 48 mm to main reinforcement
bw 300 mm Tens cover 40 mm to main reinforcement
bf 400 mm Side cover 35 mm to main reinforcement
hf 100 mm Section location INTERIOR SPAN
Tens Ø 32 mm Section shape T BEAM
Top steel 2 no & Ø 12 .

OUTPUT D&D: Main beam, 1st Floor 8m span .

d = 500 - 40 - 32/2 = 444.0 mm
(3.4.4.4) K' = 0.156 > K = 0.089
(3.4.4.4) x = 444 /0.45(0.5 - (0.25 - 0.089 /0.893)^½) = 110.4 mm (within flange)
(3.4.4.4) z = 444 - 0.45 x 110.4 = 394.3 < 421.8 mm
As' = 0 < 226 mm²
(3.4.4.4) As = 280.0E6 / 394.3 /500 x 1.15 = 1633 mm² .
PROVIDE 3H32 bottom = 2413 mm² .
(Eqn 8) fs = 2/3 x 500 x 1,633 /2,413 = 225.6 N/mm²
(Table 3.11) Comp mod factor = 1 + 0.170 /(3 + 0.170) = 1.054 < 1.5
(Table 3.10) Tens mod factor = 0.55 + (477 - 225.6) /120 /(0.9 + 3.551) = 1.021 < 2
(3.4.6.3) Permissible L/d = 24.1 x 1.054 x 1.021 = 25.961
(3.4.6.1) Actual L/d = 8000 /444.0 = 18.018 ok

23

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:23 17/07/2006 17:03:19

 RCC11 Element Design/ SHEAR!

ELEMENT DESIGN to BS 8110:2005

BEAM SHEAR
Originated from RCC11.xls v3.1 © 2006 TCC

INPUT Location D&D: Main beam, 1st Floor 8m span, RH end

fcu = 35 N/mm² c 1.50 d b
fyl = 500 N/mm²  s  1.15 540 400
steel class A
Main Steel Link Legs Side cover Shear V UDL
4 25 10 2 35 264.0 97.9
No mm Ø mm Ø No mm kN kN/m

OUTPUT D&D: Main beam, 1st Floor 8m span, RH end

As = 1963 N/mm² = 0.909%
(Eqn 3) v = 264.0 x 10³ /400 /540 = 1.222 N/mm²
(Table 3.8) vc = 0.685 N/mm², from table 3.8
(v - vc)bv = 214.9 N/mm
PROVIDE 2 legs H10 @ 300 = 227.7 N/mm
Provide for distance of 300 mm
then nominal links = 2 legs H10 @ 400

24

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:24 17/07/2006 17:03:22

 RCC11 Element Design.xls

RCC11 Element Design/ COLUMN!

ELEMENT DESIGN to BS 8110:2005

SYMMETRICAL RECT-ANGULAR
COLUMN DESIGN COLUMN DESIGN

Originated from RCC11.xls v3.1 © 2006 TCC

INPUT Location D&D: external column

Axial load, N 1654 kN fcu 40 N/mm²
Moment, M 125.0 kNm fy 500 N/mm²
height, h 300 mm fyv 500 N/mm²
breadth, b 300 mm γm 1.15 steel
Max bar Ø 32 mm γm 1.50 concrete
cover (to link) 30 mm steel class A

CALCULATIONS D&D: external column Link Ø 8 mm

from M As = {M - 0.67fcu.b.dc(h/2 - dc/2)}/[(h/2-d').(fsc+fst).gm] (3.4.4.1)
from N As = (N - 0.67fcu.b.dc/gm) / (fsc - fst) (Figs 2.1, 2.2 & 3.3)
where As = Ast = Asc: dc=min(h,0.9x)
.67fcu/gm = 17.9 N/mm² d' = 54.0 mm
fy/gm = 434.8 N/mm² d= 246.0 mm
from iteration, n.a. depth, x, = 225.9 mm dc = 203.3 mm
0.67.fcu.b.dc/gm = 1089.7 kN
Steel comp strain = 0.00266
Steel tens strain = 0.00031
Steel stress in comp. face, fsc = 435 N/mm² (Comp. stress in reinf.)
Steel stress in tensile face, fst = 62 N/mm² (Tensile stress in reinf.)
from M, As = 1515 mm² from N, As = 1516 mm²
OK
OUTPUT D&D: external column
As req'd = 1515mm² T&B:- PROVIDE 4H32
(ie 2H32T&B - 1609mm² T&B - 3.6% o/a - @ 192cc.)

Links : - PROVIDE H8 @ 300

.

Strain diagram Stress diagram

0.00350 0 17.9 N/mm²

0.00266
435

Notes
-0.00031 2
Stresses in N/mm
-62 Compression +ve
-0.00115 0 - - - Neutral axis

25

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:25 17/07/2006 17:03:26

 RCC12 Bending and Axial Force.xls
This spreadsheet gives an interaction chart for moment
against axial load for rectangular sections with asymmetrical
reinforcement arrangements. Initially intended for beams with
axial load it is also applicable to asymmetrically or symetrically
reinforced columns.

MAIN!
Moments are considered to be about the x-x axis. All applied
loads and moments should be ultimate and positive, as positive
moments induce tension in the bottom reinforcement.

With asymmetrical arrangements of reinforcement the diagram

indicates that negative moments are theoretically possible. After
much consideration, the diagram is considered to be correct but
strictly is valid only for load cases where the member is operating
above 0.1fcu and with at least minimum eccentricity.

These limits are shown on the graph. A reciprocal diagram

is generated automatically when top and bottom steels are
reversed in the input.

Calcs!
Calcs! Shows the derivation of the chart where moment capacity
is calculated at intervals of neutral axis depth from n.a. depth for
N = 0 to n.a. depth for N = Nbal , then in intervals from n.a. depth
for N = Nbal to n.a. depth for N = Nuz. This sheet shows workings
and is not necessarily intended for printing out other than for
checking purposes.

Notes!
This sheet gives disclaimers and revision history.

26

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:26 17/07/2006 17:03:30

 RCC12 Bending and Axial Force.xls

RCC12 Bending and Axial Force/ MAIN!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made by Date Page
Location Beam C1-2, Level 3 RMW 11-Apr-06 25
27
BENDING AND AXIAL FORCE to BS 8110:2005 Checked Revision Job No
Originated from RCC12.xls v 3.0 on CD © 2006 TCC chg - R68

MATERIALS
fcu 35 N/mm² γs 1.15
fy 500 N/mm² γc 1.50

SECTION COVERS (to main steel)

h 450 mm TOP 30 mm
b 300 mm BOTTOM 30 mm
SIDES 30 mm
REINFORCEMENT
Bar Ø No Area % Space
TOP 25 2 982 0.727 190.0 .
BOTTOM 32 3 2413 1.787 72.0 .

M:N interaction chart for 450 x 300 section, C35 concrete.

4000

3000

2400
AXIAL COMPRESSION, N kN

2000
M min

1000 1000

0.1Acfcu

-1000

-2000
-200 -100 0 100 200 300 400 500
MOMENT, Mxx kNm

LOADCASES (ULS) CASE N Mxx CASE N Mxx

1 2400 100 2 1000 300

27

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:27 17/07/2006 17:03:31

 RCC13 Punching Shear.xls
This spreadsheet designs punching shear links. Essentially it is
intended to be used with simple rectangular flat slabs to BS 8110
i.e. with RCC33.xls. Equally it can be used in conjunction with
RCC81.xls or to check wide beams in, say, troughed slabs.
The spreadsheet is presented as four pairs of sheets dealing with
internal, edge, (external) corner and re-entrant corners.
It should be remembered that in slabs these traditional links are
time-consuming to fix on site – proprietary systems are generally
much quicker to fix on site and this can far outweigh material
costs.
INTERNAL! (Similarly EDGE!,
CORNER! and REENTRANT!)
These sheets constitute the input and main output. Input is
fairly self-evident but, as ever, care must be exercised in ensuring
correct values are used. The top diagram acts as a legend and the
chart at the bottom of the sheet shows the column, any holes
and link perimeters, and should act both as a check for input and
help explain output. The x-x axis is across the page.
Reinforcement can be increased both ways to increase vc to
overcome problems with rules regarding v > 2vc (see Clause
3.7.7.5). In the case of edge columns, a factor of 1.25 can be used
if bending is about an axis parallel to edge and 1.4 if perpendicular
(Clause 3.7.6.3). A worse case should be taken.
Int Dets! (Edge Dets!, Corner Dets!
and Re-ent Dets! similar)
These sheets show design calculations, determination of critical
perimeters, enclosed areas and link requirements complete with
references to BS 8110. They are not necessarily intended for
printing out other than for checking purposes. The area load is
deducted from Vt , before Vt is enhanced.
These sheets use the relationship Veff /Vt to calculate shear at
successive perimeters. Deductions for holes in the calculation of
shear perimeters are calculated by finding the angle defined by
the extremities of the hole.
The projection of this angle is deducted from the appropriate
perimeter.

To the right is a combo-box that allows either:

Notes!
■ Input of both Vt (design shear transferred to column) and
Veff (design effective shear including allowance for moment This sheet gives disclaimers and revision history.
transfer) is required. These figures should be available from
sub-frame analysis e.g. output from RCC33.xls/ACTIONS!
B55:J62 under Reactions. A value of Veff, computed from
Vt and the factor according to location of the column (see
BS 8110: Part 1, Clause 3.7.6) is suggested under Operating
Instructions: in general this figure may be regarded as a
maximum: calculating effective shear from moment transfer
generally results in lower figures.

or

■ Input of Vt alone. Veff defaults to the values given in BS 8110:

Part 1, Clause 3.7.6

The areas of steel in the two directions should be averages in each

direction, i.e., ensure that it reflects the actual reinforcement
in the sides of the perimeter, an average of column strips and
middle strips as appropriate.

Except when checking column face shear, holes under half the
slab depth or 1/4 column side are ignored as in the second
paragraph of BS 8110: Part 1, Clause 3.7.7.7. Multiple holes should
be aggregated pro-rata as if they were one hole at one position.

The shear at 1.5 d from the face of the column and at the first
perimeter requiring no reinforcement is shown under Results.

28

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:28 17/07/2006 17:03:35

 RCC13 Punching Shear.xls

RCC13 Punching Shear/ INTERNAL!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made by Date Page
Location ECBP Typical Floor Column B3 rmw 11-Apr-2006 29
31
PUNCHING SHEAR to BS8110:2005 INTERNAL Checked Revision Job No
Originated from RCC13.xls v3.0 on CD © 2006 TCC COLUMN chg - R68

2
MATERIALS fcu N/mm 40 STATUS Legend
2
fyv N/mm 500 VALID DESIGN
link Ø mm 10
steel class A
DIMENSIONS A mm 300 E mm 150
B mm 500 F mm -50
G mm 125 H mm 100

LOADING Vt kN 2954 0 0 3397.1

ult UDL kN/m2 16.10

2
SLAB h mm 525 dx mm 484 Asx mm /m 5362
2
dy mm 455.5 Asy mm /m 3908
ave d mm 469.75 ave As % 0.983

2
RESULTS Veff = 3397.1 kN vc = 0.7349 N/mm (Table 3.8)
2 2
At col. face, v max = 4.899 N/mm At 1.5d perimeter, v = 1.0886 N/mm
2
At 3d perimeter, v = 0.5896 N/mm

PROVIDE LINKS (single leg) .

Perimeter 1 15 H10 @ 240 234 from col face

Perimeter 2 21 H10 @ 295 587 from col face
Perimeter 3 29 H10 @ 300 940 from col face
0 0 0
0 0 0
0 0 0
0 0 0
0 0 0 Plan
0 0 0

29

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:29 17/07/2006 17:03:36

 RCC13 Punching Shear/ EDGE!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made by Date Page

Location Column B2 rmw 11-Apr-2006 32
30
PUNCHING SHEAR to BS8110:2005 EDGE Checked Revision Job No
Originated from RCC13.xls v3.0 on CD © 2006 TCC COLUMN chg - R68

2
MATERIALS fcu N/mm 40 STATUS Legend
2
fyv N/mm 500 VALID DESIGN
link Ø mm 8
steel class A
DIMENSIONS A mm 200 E mm -62.5
B mm 200 F mm -275
D mm 50 G mm 150
H mm 125

LOADING Vt kN 223 0 0 1399

2
ult UDL kN/m 14.40

2
SLAB h mm 250 dx mm 207 Asx mm /m 2010
2
dy mm 187 Asy mm /m 1005
ave d mm 197 ave As % 0.754

2
RESULTS Veff = 312.2 kN vc = 0.8032 N/mm (Table 3.8)
2 2
At col. face, v max = 1.976 N/mm At 1.5d perimeter, v = 1.0364 N/mm
2
At 2.25d perimeter, v = 0.7813 N/mm

PROVIDE LINKS (single leg) .

Perimeter 1 6 H8 @ 220 98 from col face

Perimeter 2 7 H8 @ 265 246 from col face
0 0 0
0 0 0
0 0 0
0 0 0
0 0 0
0 0 0 Plan
0 0 0

30

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:30 17/07/2006 17:03:40

 RCC13 Punching Shear.xls

RCC13 Punching Shear/ CORNER!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made by Date Page
Location Columns A1, D1, A5 & D5 rmw 11-Apr-2006 33
31
PUNCHING SHEAR to BS8110:2005 CORNER Checked Revision Job No
Originated from RCC13.xls v3.0 on CD © 2006 TCC COLUMN chg - R68

2
MATERIALS fcu N/mm 40 STATUS Legend
fyv N/mm2 500 VALID DESIGN
link Ø mm 8
steel class A
DIMENSIONS A mm 400 E mm -50
B mm 250 F mm -250
C mm 0 G mm 100
D mm 0 H mm 100

LOADING Vt kN 272.0 0 0 350

ult UDL kN/m2 16.10

SLAB h mm 250 dx mm 215 Asx mm2/m 2010

2
dy mm 195 Asy mm /m 2010
ave d mm 205 ave As % 0.983

RESULTS Veff = 340.0 kN vc = 0.8686 N/mm2 (Table 3.8)

2 2
At hole face, vmax = 2.745 N/mm At 1.5d perimeter, v = 1.6585 N/mm
2
At 4.5d perimeter, v = 0.7741 N/mm

PROVIDE LINKS (single leg) .

Perimeter 1 6 H8 @ 140 102 from col face

Perimeter 2 8 H8 @ 125 256 from col face
Perimeter 3 5 H8 @ 275 410 from col face
Perimeter 4 6 H8 @ 265 564 from col face
Perimeter 5 7 H8 @ 265 717.5 from col face
0 0 0
0 0 0
0 0 0 Plan
0 0 0

31

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:31 17/07/2006 17:03:44

 RCC13 Punching Shear/ REENTRANT!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made by Date Page
Location An example rmw 11-Apr-2006 32
34
PUNCHING SHEAR to BS8110:2005 RE-ENTRANT Checked Revision Job No
Originated from RCC13.xls v3.0 on CD © 2006 TCC CORNER chg - R68

2
MATERIALS fcu N/mm 40 STATUS Legend
2
fyv N/mm 500 VALID DESIGN
link Ø mm 10
steel class A
DIMENSIONS A mm 350 E mm -125
B mm 350 F mm -425
C mm 0 G mm 250
D mm 0 H mm 250

LOADING Vt kN 447.0 0 0 591.6

2
ult UDL kN/m 14.40

2
SLAB h mm 250 dx mm 202 Asx mm /m 2580
2
dy mm 180 Asy mm /m 2580
ave d mm 191 ave As % 1.355

2
RESULTS Veff = 558.8 kN vc = 0.9841 N/mm (Table 3.8)
2 2
At col. face, v max = 2.534 N/mm At 1.5d perimeter, v = 1.1738 N/mm
2
At 2.25d perimeter, v = 0.9209 N/mm

PROVIDE LINKS (single leg) .

Perimeter 1 6 H10 @ 220 95 from col face

Perimeter 2 8 H10 @ 255 239 from col face
0 0 0
0 0 0
0 0 0
0 0 0
0 0 0
0 0 0 Plan
0 0 0

32

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:32 17/07/2006 17:03:48

 RCC14 Crack Widths.xls

RCC14 Crack Width.xls

acr is the distance from the point considered to the surface of
Crack Width! the nearest longitudinal bar. The input value is defaulted to the
distance at the point on the tension face midway between two
In the design of reinforced concrete structures, it is assumed
bars. However other values can be entered to suit other locations,
that the tensile capacity of concrete does not contribute to the
e.g. corner bars. The default value can be reset by pressing the
strength of the structure, and steel reinforcement is provided
blue button on the right hand margin.
to resist the internal tensile forces that develop. Because steel
reinforcement can develop the resisting tensile force only by
extension (i.e. steel needs to extend to develop stress), and Notes!
hence causes cracks to form in the surrounding concrete, cracks
in reinforced concrete structures cannot be avoided. In day-to- This sheet gives disclaimers and revision history.
day practical design, crack widths are controlled by limiting the
maximum spacings of the tension reinforcement. However there
are times when the engineer will need to carry out more rigorous
analysis and calculations, e.g. in the design of water-retaining
structures, and design for severe exposure where estimation/
prediction of crack width is important.

This spreadsheet calculates crack widths in accordance with BS

8110 and BS 8007.

Crack width limits are set as:

■ BS 8110: Part 1, Clause 3.12.11.2.1 0.3 mm – In ‘normal’

reinforced concrete structures
■ BS 8007 0.2 mm – In water-retaining structures under severe
or very severe exposure
■ BS 8007 0.1 mm – In water-retaining structures with critical
aesthetic appearance

In calculation of crack width, elastic theory with ‘cracked section’

is adopted. Both BS 8110: Part 2 and BS 8007 appendix B gives
the crack width formula.

w = 3acrεm/{1+2(acr-c)/(h-x)}

In calculating crack width, w, the average strain, εm , at the level

where cracking is being considered allows a stiffening effect, ε2 ,
of concrete between cracks

where ε1 is the theoretical strain at the level considered, calculated

on the assumption of a cracked section using half the concrete
modulus Ec to allow for creep effects.

ε2 = b(h-x)2/3EsAs(d-x)

BS 8007 allows an additional enhancement factor of 1.5 in

calculating e2 for structures designed with a crack width limit
of 0.1 mm. The spreadsheet provides an option to adopt this
enhanced factor if design crack width is limit to 0.1 mm. To
choose this option, select the blue ‘check box’ on the right hand
margin.

33

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:33 17/07/2006 17:03:52

 RCC14 Crack Widths/ CRACK WIDTHS!

Project
Spreadsheets to BS 8110etc The Concrete Centre
Client
Advisory Group Made by Date Page
Location
Grid line 1 RC 11-Apr-2006 33
34
Crack Width Calculations to BS8110: 2005/ BS8007:1987 Checked Revision Job No
Originated from RCC14.xls v 3.0on CD © 2006 TCC chg - R68

CRACK WIDTH CALCULATIONS - FLEXURE -

INPUT
fcu= 35 N/mm2
fy= 500 N/mm2
Area of reinforcement " As " = 2093 mm2
b= 1000 mm
h= 250 mm
d= 200 mm
Minimum cover to tension reinforcement " CO " = 40 mm
Maxmum bar spacing " S " = 150 mm
Bar dia " DIA " = 20 mm
" acr " =(((S/2)^2+(CO+DIA/2)^2)^(1/2)-DIA/2) as default or enter other value = 80.14 mm
"acr " is distance from the point considered to the surface of the nearest longitudinal bar
Applied service moment " Ms "= 69.0 KNm

CALCULATIONS
moduli of elasticity of concrete " Ec" = (1/2)*(20+0.2*fcu) = 13.5 KN/mm2
moduli of elasticity of steel " Es " = 200.0 KN/mm2
Modular ratio " α " = (Es/Ec) = 14.81
" ρ " = As/bd = 0.010
2 0.5
depth to neutral axis, "xx" = (-α.ρ +((α.ρ) + 2.α.ρ) .d = 85 mm

" Z " = d-(x/3) = 172

Reinforcement stress " fs " = Ms/(As*Z) = 192 N/mm2
Concrete stress " fc " = (fs*As)/(0.5*b*x) = 9.50 N/mm2
Strain at soffit of concrete beam/slab " ε1 " = (fs/Es)*(h-x)/(d-x) = 0.001375
Strain due to stiffening effect of concrete between cracks " ε2 " =
ε2 = b.(h-x)2/(3.Es.As.(d-x)) for crack widths of 0.2 mm Used
ε2 = 1.5.b.(h-x)2/(3.Es.As.(d-x)) for crack widths of 0.1 mm n/a
ε2 = 0.000189
Average strain for calculation of crack width " εm "= ε1-ε2 = 0.001186

Calculated crack width, " w " = 3.acr.εm/(1+2.(acr-c)/(h-x))

CALCULATED CRACK WIDTH, 'w' = 0.19 mm

34

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:34 17/07/2006 17:03:54

 RCC21 Subframe Analysis.xls

RCC21 Subframe Analysis.xls

RCC21 Subframe Analysis.xls analyses sub-frames in accordance
with BS 8110 using moment distribution. Inputs are required on
two sheets.
MAIN!
The user is required to input desired amounts of redistribution
to the initial moments in line 26. Cell L14 allows three types of
distribution according to the user’s preference for calculating span
moments (see Redistribution). Redistribution input is included
close to the bending moment diagrams in order to give the user
control rather than relying on blanket redistribution.

This single sheet consists of the main inputs, most of which should The sheet also tabulates elastic and redistributed ultimate shears
be self-explanatory. As in other spreadsheets, avoid pasting input and column moments according to the various load cases.
from one cell to another as this may cause formatting and other
errors.
Analysis!
The dimension of the flange width, bf, is automated to be either
bw + 0.07 x span for L beams or bw + 0.14 x span for T beams. This sheet details the moment distribution analysis carried out
but is not necessarily intended for printing out other than for
Unwanted data cells are ‘greyed-out’. Supports may be specified checking purposes
by giving dimentions and end conditions in cells C21:J27. The use
of C, K, or E in column C can alter the characteristics of a support
from cantilever to knife-edge to encastre. Where supports are Graf!
dimentions the remote ends of supports may be F for fixed in
columns F and J; otherwise they default to pinned. Extraneous This sheet comprises data for graphs used on other sheets,
data is highlighted in red or by messages in red. Under Operating particularly in ACTIONS! It is not necessarily intended for printing
Instructions a number of checks, mainly for missing entries, are out other than for checking purposes
carried out and any problems are highlighted. At the bottom
of the sheet a simplistic but to-scale arrangement and loading
diagram is shown. This is given to aid data checking. Notes!
It may prove prudent to write down expected values for This sheet gives disclaimers and revision history.
bending moments at each support down before progressing to
ACTIONS!

Also, under Operating instructions, the user should input the

type of redistribution required as explained more fully under
Redistribution.

■ 0 means full redistribution.

■ 1 limits alternate span upward redistribution to the
percentage specified.
■ 2 means no span moment redistribution.

UDLs are input as line loads e.g. 4kN/m2 for a 5.0 m wide bay
would be input as 20 kN/m. Point loads should be at least
0.001m from supports.

Ultimate and characteristic support reactions are given at the

bottom of the sheet

ACTIONS!
This sheet includes charts showing the elastic bending moment
diagram, redistributed moment envelope, elastic shear forces
and envelope of redistributed shear forces. These diagrams are
based on data from the analysis undertaken in Analysis! at 1/20
span points. Maximum span and support moments are given.
35

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:35 17/07/2006 17:04:04

 RCC21 Subframe Analysis/ MAIN!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made by Date Page
Location Level 2, Beam on line 6 from B to E RMW 11-Apr-2006 36
35
SUBFRAME ANALYSIS to BS8110:2005 Checked Revision Job No
Originated from RCC21.xls v3.0 on CD © 2006 TCC chg - R68

LOCATION Supports from grid B to grid E

SPANS
L (m) H (mm) bw (mm) hf (mm) Type bf (mm) LOADING PATTERN
SPAN 1 7.000 600 375 150 T 1355 min max
SPAN 2 12.000 600 375 150 T 2055 DEAD 1 1.4
SPAN 3 12.000 600 375 150 T 2055 IMPOSED 0 1.6
SPAN 4 6.000 600 375 150 T 1215
SPAN 5 0
SPAN 6 0

SUPPORTS
ABOVE (m) H (mm) B (mm) End Cond BELOW (m) H (mm) B (mm) End Cond
Support 1 2.95 400 300 F 3.10 400 300 P
Support 2 3.00 400 300 P 3.10 300 300 P
Support 3 0.00 3.10 400 300 P
Support 4 K
Support 5 4.00 400 300 P 3.10 300 300 P
Support 6
Support 7

LOADING UDLs (kN/m) PLs (kN) Position (m)

Dead Imposed Position Loaded Dead Imposed Position Loaded
Span 1 Load Load from left Length Span 4 Load Load from left Length
UDL 32.20 12.50 ~~~~~ ~~~~~ UDL 17.50 5.60 ~~~~~ ~~~~~
PL 1 ~~~~~ PL 1 24 6 2.000 ~~~~~
PL 2 ~~~~~ PL 2 5 18 4.500 ~~~~~
Part UDL Part UDL
Span 2 Span 5
UDL 32.20 12.50 ~~~~~ ~~~~~ UDL ~~~~~ ~~~~~
PL 1 ~~~~~ PL 1 ~~~~~
PL 2 25 25 5.000 ~~~~~ PL 2 ~~~~~
Part UDL Part UDL
Span 3 Span 6
UDL 24.42 8.65 ~~~~~ ~~~~~ UDL ~~~~~ ~~~~~
PL 1 ~~~~~ PL 1 ~~~~~
PL 2 ~~~~~ PL 2 ~~~~~
Part UDL 7.5 4.5 1.500 2.400 Part UDL

LOADING DIAGRAM

B E

REACTIONS (kN)
SUPPORT 1 2 3 4 5
ALL SPANS LOADED 153.5 724.8 778.3 478.4 75.0
ODD SPANS LOADED 177.7 465.9 568.4 415.9 -8.2
EVEN SPANS LOADED 27.2 621.0 636.4 271.0 116.7
Characteristic Dead 72.8 354.6 386.7 237.2 30.5
Characteristic Imposed 47.4 142.7 148.1 91.4 46.2

36

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:36 17/07/2006 17:04:06

 RCC21 Subframe Analysis.xls

RCC21 Subframe Analysis/ ACTIONS!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made by Date Page
Location Level 2, Beam on line 6, from B to E RMW 11-Apr-06 37
36
SUBFRAME ANALYSIS to BS8110:2005 Checked Revision Job No
Originated from RCC21.xls v3.0 on CD © 2006 TCC chg - R68
BENDING MOMENT DIAGRAMS (kNm)

1000 1000
800 800

600 600
400
400
200
200
0
0
-200
-200
-400
-400 -600
-600 -800
-800 -1000
0 10 20 30 40 0 10 20 30 40

B Elastic Moments E B Redistributed Envelope E

SUPPORT No 1 2 3 4 5
Elastic M 95.3 743.3 868.6 427.6 34.3 ~ kNm
Redistributed M 90.5 557.5 694.9 406.2 32.6 ~ kNm
ßb 0.950 0.750 0.800 0.950 0.950 ~ ~
Redistribution 5.0% 25.0% 20.0% 5.0% 5.0%

SPAN No 1 2 3 4
Elastic M 185.0 633.1 400.1 121.4 ~ ~ Based on support
Redistributed M 152.1 746.8 373.5 118.8 ~ ~ moments of
ßb 0.822 1.180 0.934 0.979 ~ ~ min(ßbM, Malt/ßb)
SHEAR FORCE DIAGRAMS (kN)

500 500
400 400
300 300
200 200
100 100
0 0
-100 -100
-200 -200
-300 -300
-400 -400
-500 -500
0 10 20 30 40 0 10 20 30 40

B Elastic Shears E B Redistributed Shears E

SPAN No 1 2 3
Elastic V 191.0 312.6 435.6 432.2 356.9 282.0
Redistributed V 177.7 302.0 422.8 433.2 345.1 273.7

SPAN No 4
Elastic V 203.4 118.4 ~ ~ ~ ~
Redistributed V 204.7 116.7 ~ ~ ~ ~

COLUMN MOMENTS (kNm) 1 2 3 4 5

ALL SPANS Above 21.0 80.7 -4.1
LOADED Below 15.0 32.9 -40.2 -2.2
ODD SPANS Above 55.6 0.7 17.5
LOADED Below 39.7 0.3 51.6 9.5
EVEN SPANS Above -22.7 116.5 -22.2
LOADED Below -16.2 47.6 -108.0 -12.1

37

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:37 17/07/2006 17:04:10

 RCC31 One-way Solid Slabs (A & D).xls
This spreadsheet analyses and designs (A & D: Analysis and
design) up to six spans of one-way solid slabs to BS 8110 using
continuous beam analysis. There is user input on each of the
first four sheets and choice of reinforcement for each span is
implicit.
MAIN!
This single sheet consists of the main inputs, most of which
should be self-explanatory.
The number of spans is altered by entering or deleting data in
cells C16:C21 under L (m). Unwanted data cells are ‘greyed-
out’. The use of C, K or E can alter the characteristics of the end
supports from cantilever to knife-edge to encastre. Extraneous
data is highlighted in red or by messages in red. Under Operating
Instructions a number of checks are carried out and problems are
highlighted.
For the purposes of defining load, the section is assumed to be
1.00 m wide. At the bottom of the sheet a simplistic loading
diagram is given to aid data checking. Great care should be
taken to ensure this sheet is completed correctly for the case
in hand. It may prove prudent to write down expected values of
bending moments at each support down before progressing to
ACTIONS!
Support reactions are given at the bottom of the sheet.
ACTIONS!
This sheet shows bending moment and shear force diagrams
from the analysis undertaken in Analysis! The user is required to
input the desired amount of redistribution to the initial moments
in line 25. Cell J14 allows three types of distribution according to
the user’s preferences. Requesting redistribution at a cantilever
produces a warning message in the remarks column.
SPANS!
In SPANS! the user is required to choose top, bottom and link
reinforcement for each span. The amounts of bending and shear
reinforcement required and checks are derived from detailed
calculations in Bar!Unwanted cells are ‘greyed-out’.
Unless overwritten, reinforcement diameter specified for a
support carries through both sides of the support, i.e. the
diameter specified for the right hand support of a span carries
over to the left hand support of the next span. It may be possible
to obtain different numbers of bars each side of the support due
to differences in moment either side of the support, differences
in depth or to comply with minimum 50% span steel; practicality
should dictate that the maximum number of bars at each support
should be used.
38
EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:38
With regard to deflection, the area of steel required, As mm2 /
m, shown under heading Design, may have been automatically
increased in order to reduce service stress, fs, and increase
modification factors to satisfy deflection criteria. The percentage
increase, if any, is shown under Deflection. With respect to
cantilevers, neither compression steel enhancement nor
consideration of rotation at supports is included.
Hogging moments at 1/4 span are checked and used in the
determination of top steel in spans. Careful examination of the
Bending Moment Diagram and Graf! should help to determine
whether any curtailment of this reinforcement is warranted.
To avoid undue sensitivity, especially with regard to deflection,
reinforcement may be over-stressed by up to 2.5%.
WEIGHT!
Weight! gives an estimate of the amount of reinforcement
required in one direction of the slab per bay and per cubic metre.
Bay and support widths are required as input.
Simplified curtailment rules, as defined in BS 8110 Clause 3.12, are
used to determine lengths of bars. The figures should be treated as
approximate estimates only as they cannot deal with the effects
of designers’ and detailers’ preferences, rationalisation, etc, etc.
They do allow for distribution steel but not for reinforcement in
supporting beams or for mesh.
Analysis!
This sheet details the moment distribution analysis carried out
but is not necessarily intended for printing out other than for
checking purposes.
Bar!
This sheet shows design calculations, complete with references
to BS 8110. It is not necessarily intended for printing out other
than for checking purposes. In many instance service stress, fs,
has been set to 1.0 or 0.0001 N/mm2 to avoid problems with
division by zero.
Graf!
This sheet comprises data for graphs used on other sheets,
particularly in ACTIONS! It is not necessarily intended for printing
out other than for checking purposes.
Notes!
This sheet gives disclaimers and revision history.
17/07/2006 17:04:12
 RCC31 One-way Solid Slabs (A & D).xls

RCC31 One-way Solid Slabs (A & D)/ MAIN!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made by Date Page
Location 8th Floor slab from A to G rmw 11-Apr-06 39
38
ONE-WAY SOLID RC SLAB DESIGN to BS 8110:2005 c/w ANALYSIS Checked Revision Job No
Originated from RCC31.xls v3.0 on CD © 2006 TCC chg - R68

LOCATION Supports from grid A to grid G

MATERIALS COVERS
fcu 35 N/mm² h agg 20 mm Top cover 25 mm
fy 500 N/mm² γs 1.15 steel Btm cover 25 mm
fyv 500 N/mm² γc 1.50 concrete
steel class A
SPANS L (m) H (mm) SUPPORTS
SPAN 1 8.000 350 Support No Type
SPAN 2 7.200 250 1 K
SPAN 3 7.200 250 LOADING PATTERN 5 K
SPAN 4 4.500 250 min max K(nife), C(antilever) or E(ncastre)
SPAN 5 DEAD 1 1.4
SPAN 6 IMPOSED 1.6

LOADING UDLs (kN/m²) PLs (kN/m) Position (m) LOADING

Dead Imposed Position Dead Imposed Position
Span 1 Load Load from left Span 4 Load Load from left
UDL 9.70 5.00 ~~~~ UDL 6.00 1.50 ~~~~
PL 1 35.00 1.000 PL 1
PL 2 PL 2
Span 2 Span 5
UDL 6.00 1.50 ~~~~ UDL ~~~~
PL 1 PL 1
PL 2 PL 2
Span 3 Span 6
UDL 8.50 5.00 UDL ~~~~
PL 1 PL 1
PL 2 PL 2

LOADING DIAGRAM

A G
REACTIONS (kN/m)
SUPPORT 1 2 3 4 5
Characteristic Dead 63.80 72.78 49.39 51.45 6.59
Max Imposed 19.00 27.17 22.79 25.77 3.28
Min Imposed -0.72 6.45 5.46 3.07 -3.75
MAX ULTIMATE 120.17 141.99 108.37 110.70 16.35

39

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:39 17/07/2006 17:04:13

 RCC31 One-way Solid Slabs (A & D)/ ACTIONS!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made by Date Page
Location 8th Floor slab, from A to G rmw 11-Apr-06 39
40
ONE-WAY SOLID RC SLAB DESIGN to BS 8110:2005 c/w ANALYSIS Checked Revision Job No
Originated from RCC31.xls v3.0 on CD © 2006 TCC chg - R68
BENDING MOMENT DIAGRAMS (kNm/m)

100 100

50 50

0 0

-50 -50

-100 -100

-150 -150

-200 -200
0 5 10 15 20 25 30 0 5 10 15 20 25 30

A Elastic Moments G A Redistributed Envelope G

SUPPORT No 1 2 3 4 5
Elastic M 85.0 60.4 71.2 ~ ~
Redistributed M 72.2 60.4 64.1 ~ ~
ßb 1.000 0.850 1.000 0.900 1.000 ~ ~
Redistribution 15.0% 10.0%

SPAN No 1 2 3 4
Elastic M 168.7 19.6 69.3 13.5 ~ ~
Redistributed M 166.4 15.6 72.1 12.4 ~ ~
ßb 0.986 0.798 1.040 0.917 ~ ~

SHEAR FORCE DIAGRAMS (kN/m)

150 150

100 100

50 50

0 0

-50 -50

-100 -100

-150 -150
0 5 10 15 20 25 30 0 5 10 15 20 25 30

A Elastic Shears G A Redistributed Shears G

SPAN No 1 2 3
Elastic V 120.9 103.1 42.3 35.5 70.1 74.4
Redistributed V 120.2 101.5 43.6 37.2 71.1 73.6

SPAN No 4
Elastic V 40.1 17.1 ~ ~ ~ ~
Redistributed V 38.5 16.4 ~ ~ ~ ~

40

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:40 17/07/2006 17:04:16

 RCC31 One-way Solid Slabs (A & D).xls

RCC31 One-way Solid Slabs (A & D)/ SPANS!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made by Date Page
Location 8th Floor slab, from A to G rmw 11-Apr-06 41
40
ONE-WAY SOLID RC SLAB DESIGN to BS 8110:2005 c/w ANALYSIS Checked Revision Job No
Originated from RCC31.xls v3.0 on CD © 2006 TCC chg - R68

SPAN 1 LEFT CENTRE RIGHT

Av mm 1000 7000
ACTIONS M kNm/m 0.0 166.4 72.2
ßb 1.00 0.99 0.85
V kN/m 120.17 101.47
DESIGN d mm 319.0 315.0 317.0
As mm²/m 455 1287 552
As' mm²/m 0 As' 0 As' 0
TOP STEEL H 12 @ 225 @0 H 16 @ 350
As prov mm²/m 503 0 As prov 574
BTM STEEL H 12 @ 200 H 20 @ 175 H 16 @ 350
As' prov mm²/m 565 As prov 1795 As' prov 574
SHEAR v N/mm2 0.377 0.320
vc N/mm2 0.420 0.424
Links not required
DEFLECTION L/d 25.397 Allowed 26.178 ok (As increased by 32.8%)
& CHECKS % As ok ok ok
d'/x ok ok ok
max S ok ok ok

SPAN 2 LEFT CENTRE RIGHT

Av 0 7200
ACTIONS M 72.2 15.6 60.4
ßb 0.85 0.80 1.00
V 43.56 37.24
DESIGN d 217.0 219.0 219.0
As 807 325 668
As' 0 As top 412 0
TOP STEEL H 16 @ 225 H 10 @ 175 H 12 @ 150
As prov 894 As' prov 449 As prov 754
BTM STEEL H 16 @ 600 H 12 @ 300 H 12 @ 300
As' prov 335 As prov 377 As' prov 377
SHEAR v 0.201 0.170
vc 0.613 0.576
Links not required
DEFLECTION L/d 32.877 Allowed 55.325 ok
& CHECKS % As ok ok ok
d'/x ok ok ok
max S ok ok ok

41

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:41 17/07/2006 17:04:19

 RCC31 One-way Solid Slabs (A & D)/ SPANS!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made by Date Page
Location 8th Floor slab, from A to G rmw Apr-2006 42
41
ONE-WAY SOLID RC SLAB DESIGN to BS 8110:2005 c/w ANALYSIS Checked Revision Job No
Originated from RCC31.xls v3.0 on CD © 2006 TCC chg - R68

SPAN 3 LEFT CENTRE RIGHT

Av 0 7200
ACTIONS M 60.4 72.1 64.1
ßb 1.00 1.04 0.90
V 71.13 73.63
DESIGN d 219.0 219.0 219.0
As 668 797 709
As' 0 As' 0 As' 0
TOP STEEL H 12 @ 150 10 @0 H 12 @ 150
As prov 754 0 As prov 754
BTM STEEL H 12 @ 200 H 12 @ 100 H 10 @ 200
As' prov 565 As prov 1131 As' prov 393
SHEAR v 0.325 0.336
vc 0.576 0.576
Links not required
DEFLECTION L/d 32.877 Allowed 36.934 ok (As increased by 18.3%)
& CHECKS % As ok ok ok
d'/x ok ok ok
max S ok ok ok

SPAN 4 LEFT CENTRE RIGHT

Av 0 4500
ACTIONS M 64.1 12.4 0.0
ßb 0.90 0.92 1.00
V 38.55 16.35
DESIGN d 219.0 220.0 219.0
As 709 325 325
As' 0 As top 406 As' 0
TOP STEEL H 12 @ 150 H 12 @ 275 H 12 @ 300
As prov 754 As' prov 411 As prov 377
BTM STEEL H 10 @ 225 H 10 @ 225 H 12 @ 300
As' prov 349 As prov 349 As' prov 377
SHEAR v 0.176 0.075
vc 0.576 0.457
Links not required
DEFLECTION L/d 20.455 Allowed 55.050 ok
& CHECKS % As ok ok ok
d'/x ok ok ok
max S ok ok ok

42

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:42 17/07/2006 17:04:21


RCC31R Rigorous One-way Slabs.xls
This spreadsheet allows the estimation of deflections in one-way
solid slabs according to BS 8110 Part 2. The spreadsheet is based
on RCC31 but has an initial sheet JOBDATA! to allow input of all
the variables and performance criteria required. The calculation
of deflection is not carried out automatically. The user is required
to press the ‘Calculate deflections’ button in column N of
SPANS! (or elsewhere) when every other aspect of the design has
been completed. Deflections are given as a range in a chart at the
bottom of ACTIONS! They are shown as a range due to potential
pattern loading. In SPANS! the worst case is compared with the
specified serviceability criteria.
It should be noted that the number of assumptions and
uncertainties in the material and design criteria and construction
process mean that deflection calculations carried out in
this manner can be notoriously inaccurate (and usually over
conservative) compared with actual measured deflections. For
instance, a slab’s deflection is very dependent upon whether the
slab has cracked in bending during construction or not.
The calculated deflections might be regarded as being akin to a
95% confidence limit that they will not be exceeded in service.
The spreadsheet analyses and designs up to six spans of one-way
solid slabs to BS 8110 using continuous slab analysis. There is user
input on each of the first four sheets and choice of reinforcement
for each span is implicit. Input of spans and loads is in MAIN! User
input is required for bar sizes used in SPANS!
JOBDATA!
This sheet consists of the main inputs of material, loading,
construction and serviceability criteria pertaining to the
calculation of deflection to BS 8110 Part 2. Users are expected to
use their knowledge of the project and judgement in completing
this sheet. The default values given in this sheet are not unusual.
For creep reference is made to Eurocode 2 Annex B.
MAIN!
This single sheet consists of the main inputs of span and loads,
most of which should be self-explanatory. The number of spans
is altered by entering or deleting data under L (m). Unwanted
data cells are ‘greyed-out’. The use of C, K or E can alter the
characteristics of the end supports from cantilever to knife-edge
to encastre. Extraneous data is highlighted in red or by messages
in red. Under ‘Operating Instructions’ a number of checks are
carried out and problems are highlighted.
For the purposes of defining load, the section is assumed to be
1.00 m wide. At the bottom of the sheet a simplistic loading
diagram is given to aid data checking. Great care should be
taken to ensure this sheet is completed correctly for the case
EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:43
RCC31R Rigorous One-way Slabs.xls
in hand. It may prove prudent to write down expected values of
bending moments at each support down before progressing to
ACTIONS!
Support reactions are given at the bottom of the sheet.
ACTIONS!
This sheet shows bending moment and shear force diagrams
from the analysis undertaken in Analysis! The user is required to
input the desired amount of redistribution to the initial moments
in line 25. Cell J14 allows three types of distribution according to
the user’s preferences (see Table 1). Requesting redistribution at a
cantilever produces a warning message in the remarks column.
The chart at the bottom of the page shows calculated deflections
at construction of partitions, and ranges for longer term
deflections due to patterns of permanent and imposed loading.
The worst case is taken in subsequent checks and this might be
viewed as being unduly conservative.
SPANS!
In SPANS! the user is required to choose top, bottom and link
reinforcement for each span. The amounts of bending and shear
reinforcement required and checks are derived from detailed
calculations in Bar!
Unwanted cells are ‘greyed-out’.
Deflection calculations involve many iterative calculations,
which may take some time on even the fastest of computers.
Calculation of deflections is therefore controlled by clicking
the ‘Calculate Deflections’ button in column N and should be
undertaken once all the design is complete. Deflection results will
only appear on this sheet after the ‘Calculate Deflections’ button
has been used and the macro has been allowed to complete its
iterations. They will disappear if relevant data (e.g. span, load) is
changed. Should the span fail deflection criteria, the user has the
option to increase bottom steel at cell M24 etc, and reuse the
‘Calculate Deflection’ button.
Unless overwritten, reinforcement diameter specified for a
support carries through both sides of the support, i.e. the
diameter specified for the right hand support of a span carries
over to the left hand support of the next span. It may be possible
to obtain different numbers of bars each side of the support due
to differences in moment at the edge of support,differences in
depth or to comply with minimum 50% span steel; practicality
should dictate that the greater number should be used.
Hogging moments at 1/4 span are checked and used in the
determination of top steel in spans. Careful examination of the
43
17/07/2006 17:04:24
 Bending Moment Diagram and Graf! should help to determine
whether any curtailment of this reinforcement is warranted.
WEIGHT!
Weight! gives an estimate of the amount of reinforcement
required in one direction of the slab per bay and per cubic metre.
Bay and support widths and distribution steel diameters are
required as input.
Simplified curtailment rules, as defined in BS 8110 Part 1, Clause
3.12, are used to determine lengths of bars. The figures should be
treated as approximate estimates only as they cannot deal with
the effects of designers’ and detailers’ preferences, rationalisation,
etc. They do not allow for reinforcement in supporting beams or
for mesh.
Def!
This sheet calculates deflections at 1/20th points for each span
and for each load condition. For each point and condition it
considers moment - As, As’, d, d’, inertia - I, cracked neutral axis
depth - x, cracked inertia – I, uncracked moment capacity – Mcr,
z, final x, concrete stresses – fc, moment of resistance – MOR,
curvature -1/r, load, slope and curvature to calculate deflection.
The sheet is rather large and is not necessarily intended for
printing out other than for checking purposes.
Graf!
This sheet comprises data for graphs used on other sheets,
particularly in ACTIONS! It is not necessarily intended for printing
out other than for checking purposes.

Uls! Notes!
This sheet details the moment distribution analysis carried out
at the ultimate limit state but is not necessarily intended for This sheet gives disclaimers and revision history.
printing out other than for checking purposes.

Sls!
This sheet details the analysis carried out at the serviceability
limit state at 1/20th points along each span. The results are used
in Def!. This sheet is not necessarily intended for printing out
other than for checking purposes.

Bar!
This sheet shows design calculations, complete with references
to BS 8110. It is not necessarily intended for printing out other
than for checking purposes. In many instances, service stress, fs,
has been set to 1.0 or 0.0001 N/mm2 to avoid problems with
division by zero.

44

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:44 17/07/2006 17:04:25

 RCC31R Rigorous One-way Slabs.xls

RCC31R Rigorous One-way Slabs/ JOBDATA!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made by Date Page

Location 8th Floor slab from A to G rmw 11-Apr-06 45

38
RIGOROUS ONE-WAY SOLID RC SLAB DESIGN to BS 8110:2005 Checked Revision Job No
Originated from RCC31R.xls v3.0 on CD © 2006 TCC chg - R68

LOCATION Supports from grid A to grid G

MATERIALS COVERS
fcu 30 N/mm² h agg 20 mm Top cover 25 mm
fy 500 N/mm² γs 1.15 steel Btm cover 25 mm
fyv 500 N/mm² γc 1.50 concrete Concrete density 24 kN/m³
steel class A
SERVICEABILITY CRITERIA Maximum permanent ∆ = L / 250 3.3.3 (Pt 2)

Maximum imposed ∆ = L / 500

Max ∆ affecting partitions/walls = L / 350 or 20 mm
Maximum precamber = 50% of permanent ∆
Permanent portion of imposed loading = 25%
Design crack width, Wk = 0.3 mm 2.2.3.4.2
CREEP COEFFICIENTS (to EN 1992-1)
RH 50 % relative humidity fcm = 32 N/mm² Table 3.1

Cement N Type (S, N, R or RS) Ecm = 30.16 kN/mm² & Annex A

AMBIENT TEMPERATURES ºC from 0 to 7 days from 7 to 100 days from 100 days on
20 20 20

LOADING SEQUENCE - Span 1 At 70 years At 70 years At 90 days

Loading At age Et Et Et
Ø0 Ø0 Ø (t,t0)
kN/m² Days kN/mm² kN/mm² kN/mm²
Self weight 5.40 7 3.44 6.80 3.44 6.80 1.84 10.64
Partitions/walls 1.00 90 2.11 9.68 2.11 9.68 0 30.16
Other dead loads 1.50 100 2.07 9.82 2.07 9.82 1.55 11.83
Permanent imposed 0.63 90 2.11 9.68 2.11 9.68
Variable load 1.88 ∞ 0 30.16
Composite 10.40 2.94 7.65 2.41 8.84
Permanent Total load

45

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:45 17/07/2006 17:04:26

 RCC31R Rigorous One-way Slabs/ MAIN!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made by Date Page

Location 8th Floor slab from A to G rmw 11-Apr-06 38
46
RIGOROUS ONE-WAY SOLID RC SLAB DESIGN to BS 8110:2005 Checked Revision Job No
Originated from RCC31R.xls v3.0 on CD © 2006 TCC chg - R68

SPANS L (m) H (mm) SUPPORTS

SPAN 1 6.000 225 Support No Type
SPAN 2 6.000 225 1 K
SPAN 3 6.000 225 LOADING PATTERN 4 K
SPAN 4 min max K(nife), C(antilever) or E(ncastre)
SPAN 5 DEAD 1 1.4
SPAN 6 IMPOSED 1.6

LOADING UDLs (kN/m²) PLs (kN/m) Position (m) LOADING

Dead Imposed Position Dead Imposed Position
Span 1 Load Load from left Span 4 Load Load from left
UDL 6.90 3.50 ~~~~ UDL ~~~~
PL 1 PL 1
PL 2 PL 2
Span 2 Span 5
UDL 6.90 3.50 ~~~~ UDL ~~~~
PL 1 PL 1
PL 2 PL 2
Span 3 Span 6
UDL 6.90 3.50 UDL ~~~~
PL 1 PL 1
PL 2 PL 2

LOADING DIAGRAM

A G
REACTIONS (kN/m)
SUPPORT 1 2 3 4
Characteristic Dead 16.56 45.54 45.54 16.56
Max Imposed 9.45 23.10 23.10 9.45
Min Imposed -1.05 11.55 11.55 -1.05
MAX ULTIMATE 38.14 99.34 99.34 38.14

46

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:46 17/07/2006 17:04:29

 RCC31R Rigorous One-way Slabs.xls

RCC31R Rigorous One-way Slabs/ ACTIONS!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made by Date Page
Location 8th Floor slab, from A to G rmw 11-Apr-06 47
39
RIGOROUS ONE-WAY SOLID RC SLAB DESIGN to BS 8110:2005 Checked Revision Job No
Originated from RCC31R.xls v3.0 on CD © 2006 TCC chg - R68
BENDING MOMENT DIAGRAMS (kNm/m) Elastic Redistributed
80 80
60 60
40 40
20 20
0 0
-20 -20
-40 -40
-60 -60
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20

A G A G
SUPPORT No 1 2 3 4
Elastic M 0.0 54.9 54.9 0.0 ~ ~ ~
Redistributed M 0.0 46.7 46.7 0.0 ~ ~ ~
ßb 1.000 0.850 0.850 1.000 ~ ~ ~
Redistribution 15.0% 15.0%

SPAN No 1 2 3
Elastic M 50.2 28.8 50.2 ~ ~ ~
Redistributed M 47.7 22.8 47.7 ~ ~ ~
ßb 0.950 0.792 0.950 ~ ~ ~

SHEAR FORCE DIAGRAMS (kN/m) Elastic Redistributed

80 60
60 40
40
20 20
0 0
-20 -20
-40
-60 -40
-80 -60
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20

A G A G
SPAN No 1 2 3
Elastic V 39.1 54.9 45.8 45.8 54.9 39.1
Redistributed V 38.1 53.6 45.8 45.8 53.6 38.1

SPAN No
Elastic V ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~
Redistributed V ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~

DEFLECTIONS (mm) Precamber not included .

10

-10

-20

-30

-40

SPAN No 1 2 3
Before partitions 8.8 0.1 8.8 mm
Permanent 22.4 2.8 22.4 #DIV/0! #DIV/0! #DIV/0! mm

47

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:47 17/07/2006 17:04:32

 RCC31R Rigorous One-way Slabs/ SPANS!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made by Date Page
Location 8th Floor slab, from A to G rmw 11-Apr-06 48
40
RIGOROUS ONE-WAY SOLID RC SLAB DESIGN to BS 8110:2005 Checked Revision Job No
Originated from RCC31R.xls v3.0 on CD © 2006 TCC chg - R68

SPAN 1 LEFT CENTRE RIGHT

Av mm 0 6000
ACTIONS M kNm/m 0.0 47.7 46.7
ßb 1.00 0.95 0.85
V kN/m 38.14 53.56
DESIGN d mm 195.0 194.0 195.0
As mm²/m 293 595 580
As' mm²/m 0 As top 293 As' 0
TOP STEEL H 10 @ 250 H 10 @ 250 H 10 @ 125
As prov mm²/m 314 As' prov 314 As prov 628
BTM STEEL H 10 @ 250 H 12 @ 175 H 10 @ 250
As' prov mm²/m 314 As prov 646 As' prov 314
SHEAR v N/mm2 0.196 0.275
vc N/mm2 0.437 0.551
Links not required
DEFLECTIONS Permanent = 17.43 < 24.00 Imposed = 10.32 < 12.00 Precamber (mm) = 5
mm Affecting partitions = 13.67 < 17.14 ok Increase btm As by 0%
CHECKS % As ok ok ok
d'/x ok ok ok
Crack width ok 0.00 ok 0.20 ok 0.22

SPAN 2 LEFT CENTRE RIGHT

Av 0 6000
ACTIONS M 46.7 22.8 46.7
ßb 0.85 0.79 0.85
V 45.78 45.78
DESIGN d 195.0 194.0 195.0
As 580 293 580
As' 0 As top 293 0
TOP STEEL H 10 @ 125 H 10 @ 250 H 10 @ 125
As prov 628 As' prov 314 As prov 628
BTM STEEL H 10 @ 250 H 12 @ 350 H 10 @ 250
As' prov 314 As prov 323 As' prov 314
SHEAR v 0.235 0.235
vc 0.551 0.551
Links not required
DEFLECTIONS Permanent = 2.77 < 24.00 Imposed = 7.93 < 12.00 Precamber (mm) = 0
mm Affecting partitions = 2.62 < 17.14 ok Increase btm As by 0%
CHECKS % As ok ok ok
d'/x ok ok ok
Crack width ok 0.22 ok 0.15 ok 0.22

48

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:48 17/07/2006 17:04:34

 RCC31R Rigorous One-way Slabs.xls

RCC31R Rigorous One-way Slabs/ SPANS!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made by Date Page
Location 8th Floor slab, from A to G rmw Apr-2006 49
41
RIGOROUS ONE-WAY SOLID RC SLAB DESIGN to BS 8110:2005 Checked Revision Job No
Originated from RCC31R.xls v3.0 on CD © 2006 TCC chg - R68

SPAN 3 LEFT CENTRE RIGHT

Av 0 6000
ACTIONS M 46.7 47.7 0.0
ßb 0.85 0.95 1.00
V 53.56 38.14
DESIGN d 192.0 194.0 195.0
As 589 595 293
As' 0 As top 293 As' 0
TOP STEEL H 16 @ 300 H 10 @ 250 H 10 @ 250
As prov 670 As' prov 314 As prov 314
BTM STEEL H 10 @ 250 H 12 @ 175 H 10 @ 250
As' prov 314 As prov 646 As' prov 314
SHEAR v 0.279 0.196
vc 0.568 0.437
Links not required
DEFLECTIONS Permanent = 17.42 < 24.00 Imposed = 10.33 < 12.00 Precamber (mm) = 5
mm Affecting partitions = 13.66 < 17.14 ok Increase btm As by 0%
CHECKS % As ok ok ok
d'/x ok ok ok
Crack width ok 0.28 ok 0.20 ok 0.00

SPAN 4 LEFT CENTRE RIGHT

Av 0 0
ACTIONS M 0.0 0.0 0.0
ßb 1.00 0.00 0.00
V #VALUE! #VALUE!
DESIGN d -30.0 -31.0 -30.0
As 0 427 413
As' 0 As top 413 As' -196
TOP STEEL H 10 #DIV/0! H 10 @ 175 H 10 @ 175
As prov #DIV/0! As' prov 449 As prov 449
BTM STEEL H 10 @ 450 H 12 @ 250 H 10 @ 450
As' prov 175 As prov 452 As' prov 175
SHEAR v #VALUE! #VALUE!
vc #NUM! #VALUE! #NUM!
#VALUE! #VALUE! #VALUE! #VALUE!
DEFLECTIONS Permanent = #DIV/0! Imposed = #DIV/0! Precamber (mm) = 5
mm Affecting partitions = #DIV/0! #DIV/0! Increase btm As by 0%
CHECKS % As #DIV/0! > 4% > 4%
d'/x ok ok FAILS
Crack width #DIV/0! #DIV/0! #DIV/0! #DIV/0! #DIV/0! #DIV/0!

49

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:49 17/07/2006 17:04:37

 RCC32 Ribbed Slabs (A & D).xls
Using continuous beam analysis, this spreadsheet analyses and
designs up to six spans of ribbed slab to BS 8110. There is user
input on each of the first three sheets and choice of reinforcement
for each span is implicit.
MAIN!
This single sheet consists of the main inputs which should be
self-explanatory. The number of spans is altered by entering or
deleting data under L(m). Unwanted data cells are ‘greyed-out’.
The use of C, K or F can alter the characteristics of the end
supports from cantilever to knife-edge to fixed. Extraneous data
is highlighted in red or by messages in red. Under Operating
Instructions a number of checks are carried out and any problems
are highlighted.
For the purposes of defining load the section under consideration
is assumed to be 1.00m wide. It will be seen from Bar! that
moments per metre are converted to moments per rib, and
calculations of reinforcement areas required etc., are based on
moments and shear per rib. Great care should be taken to ensure
this sheet is completed correctly for the case in hand. It may
prove prudent to write expected values of bending moments at
each support down before progressing to ACTIONS!
Support reactions are given the bottom of the sheet
ACTIONS!
This sheet shows bending moment and shear force diagrams
from the analysis undertaken in Analysis! The user is required to
input desired amount of redistribution to the initial moments in
line 26. Cell L14 allows three types of distribution according to
the user’s preferences. See Redistribution (page XX).
SPANS!
In SPANS! the user is required to choose top, bottom and link
reinforcement for each span. The amounts of bending and shear
reinforcement required and checks are derived from detailed
calculations in Bar!Unwanted cells are ‘greyed-out’.
The reinforcement diameter specified for a support carries
through both sides of the support, i.e. the diameter specified
for the right hand support of a span carries over to the left
hand support of the next span. It should be noted that hogging
moment is checked both at the centre of support (solid section)
and the solid/ rib intersection (ribbed section). As the moments
at the solid/ rib intersection each side of the support may differ,
it may be possible to obtain a design giving different numbers of
bars each side of the support.
50
EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:50
Practicality should dictate that the greater number of bars are
used for detailing. Hogging moments at 1/4 span positions
within a span are checked and are used in the determination of
top steel in spans.
WEIGHT!
WEIGHT! Gives an estimate of the amount of reinforcement
required in one direction of the slab per rib and per square metre.
Simplified curtailment rules, as defined in BS 8110: Part 1, Clause
3.12, are used in the determination of lengths of bars. The figures
should be treated as approximate estimates only as they cannot
deal with the effects of designers’ and detailers’ preferences,
rationalisation, etc, etc. They do not allow for reinforcement in
supporting beams or for mesh.
Analysis!
This sheet details the moment distribution analysis carried out.
It is not necessarily intended for printing out, other than for
checking purposes.
Bar!
This sheet shows design calculations, complete with references
to BS 8110. It is not necessarily intended for printing out other
than for checking purposes. In spans, service stress, fs, may be
reduced to satisfy deflection criteria. In many instances, minima
of 1.0 or 0.0001 have been used to avoid problems with division
by zero.
Graf!
This sheet comprises data for graphs used on other sheets,
particularly in ACTIONS! It is not necessarily intended for printing
out other than for checking purposes.
Notes!
This sheet gives disclaimers and revision history.
17/07/2006 17:04:40
 RCC32 Ribbed Slabs (A & D).xls

RCC32 Ribbed Slabs (A & D)/ MAIN!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made by Date Page
Location 3rd Floor slab from 1 to 5a rmw 11-Apr-06 51
43
RIBBED SLABS to BS 8110:2005 (Analysis & Design) Checked Revision Job No
Originated from RCC32.xls v3.0 on CD © 2006 TCC chg - R68

LOCATION Supports from grid 1 to grid 5a

MATERIALS COVERS (to links, or if no links, to reinf)

fcu 35 N/mm² h agg 20 mm Top cover 20 mm
fy 500 N/mm² γm 1.15 steel Btm cover 20 mm
fyv 500 N/mm² γm 1.50 concrete Side cover 20 mm
steel class A RIBS
Density 23.6 kN/m³ (Normal weight concrete) slab depth, hf 100 mm
SPANS Solid (mm) Rib width 150 mm
L (m) H (mm) Left Right Centres 900 mm
SPAN 1 2.000 275 450 1100 1 in 10 taper
SPAN 2 7.000 275 1100 1100 SUPPORTS
SPAN 3 7.500 275 1100 450 Support No Type
SPAN 4 1 C
SPAN 5 4 K
SPAN 6 K(nife), C (antilever) or E (ncastre)

LOADING UDLs (kN/m²) PLs (kN/m) Position (m)

Self Add Dead Imposed Position Self Add Dead Imposed Position
Span 1 Weight Load Load from left Span 4 Weight Load Load from left
UDL 5.73 2.50 4.00 ~~~~ UDL ~~~~
PL 1 ~~~~ PL 1 ~~~
PL 2 ~~~~ PL 2 ~~~
Span 2 ~ ~ ~ ~ Span 5 ~ ~ ~ ~
UDL 4.19 2.50 4.00 ~~~~ UDL
PL 1 ~~~~ 8.50 1.00 1.450 PL 1 ~~~
PL 2 ~~~~ PL 2 ~~~
Span 3 ~ ~ ~ ~ Span 6 ~ ~ ~ ~
UDL 3.82 2.50 4.00 ~~~~ UDL ~~~~
PL 1 ~~~~ PL 1 ~~~~
PL 2 ~~~~ PL 2 ~~~~

LOADING PATTERN min max

DEAD 1 1.4
IMPOSED 0 1.6
LOADING DIAGRAM

1 5a
REACTIONS (kN/m)
SUPPORT 1 2 3 4
Characteristic Dead 43.0 58.0 18.2 ~ ~ ~
Max Imposed 20.4 34.9 13.3 ~ ~ ~
Min Imposed 7.3 17.3 -1.6 ~ ~ ~
MAX ULTIMATE 94.9 133.0 46.6 ~ ~ ~

51

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:51 17/07/2006 17:04:41

 RCC32 Ribbed Slabs (A & D)/ ACTIONS!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made by Date Page
Location 3rd Floor slab, from 1 to 5a rmw Apr-2006 44
52
RIBBED SLABS to BS 8110:2005 (Analysis & Design) Checked Revision Job No
Originated from RCC32.xls v3.0 on CD © 2006 TCC chg - R68

BENDING MOMENT DIAGRAMS (kNm/m)

120 120
100 100
80 80
60 60
40 40
20 20
0 0
-20 -20
-40 -40
-60 -60
-80 -80
-100 -100
0 5 10 15 20 0 5 10 15 20

1 Elastic Moments 5a 1 Redistributed Envelope 5a

SUPPORT No 1 2 3 4
Elastic M 0.0 35.9 97.9 0.0 ~ ~ kNm/m
Redistributed M 0.0 35.9 83.2 0.0 ~ ~ kNm/m
ßb 1.000 1.000 0.850 1.000 ~ ~ ~
Redistribution 0.0% 15.0%

SPAN No 1 2 3
Elastic M 0.00 66.48 75.34 ~ ~ ~
Redistributed M 0.00 62.29 71.04 ~ ~ ~
ßb 1.000 0.937 0.943 #VALUE! #VALUE! #VALUE!
SHEAR FORCE DIAGRAMS (kN/m)

80 80
60 60
40 40
20 20
0 0
-20 -20
-40 -40
-60 -60
-80 -80
0 5 10 15 20 0 5 10 15 20

1 Elastic Shears 5a 1 Redistributed Shears 5a

SPAN No 1 2 3
Elastic V 0.0 35.9 58.2 66.8 70.3 47.9
Redistributed V 0.0 35.9 59.1 67.1 68.3 46.6

SPAN No
Elastic V ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~
Redistributed V ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~

52

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:52 17/07/2006 17:04:44

 RCC32 Ribbed Slabs (A & D).xls

RCC32 Ribbed Slabs (A & D)/ SPANS!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made by Date Page
Location 3rd Floor slab, from 1 to 5a rmw 11-Apr-06 53
45
RIBBED SLABS to BS 8110:2005 (Analysis & Design) Checked Revision Job No
Originated from RCC32.xls v3.0 on CD © 2006 TCC chg - R68

SPAN 1 LEFT CENTRE RIGHT

ACTIONS M kNm/m 0.0 0.0 35.9
ßb 1.00 1.00 1.00
DESIGN d mm 243.0 239.0 (x=26.6<hf/0.9) 239.0
As mm² 16 0 327
As' mm² 0 As T 188 As' 0
TOP STEEL 2H 12 /rib 1H 16 /rib 2H 20 /rib
+ 5 H8 between + 4 H8 between
As prov mm² 478 As T prov 201 As prov 829
BTM STEEL 1H 16 /rib 1H 20 /rib 1H 16 /rib
As' prov mm² 201 As prov 314 As' prov 201
SHEAR V kN/m 0.00 V 35.85
v N/mm² 0.000 v 0.423
vc N/mm² 0.658 Link Ø 6 vc 0.935
LINKS . 2 H6 @ 1,200 .
DEFLECTION L/d 8.368 Allowed 14.000 ok
& CHECKS % As ok ok ok
Bar Ø & cover ok ok ok
Bar spacing ok ok ok

Dist to link ok ok ok

SPAN 2 LEFT CENTRE RIGHT

ACTIONS M kNm/m 35.9 62.3 83.2
ßb 1.00 0.94 0.85
DESIGN d mm 239.0 236.5 (x=26.3<hf/0.9) 239.0
As mm² 327 574 (710 mm² for defln) 759
As' mm² 0 As T 356 As' 12
TOP STEEL 2H 20 /rib 4H 12 /rib 2H 20 /rib
+ 4 H8 between + 4 H8 between
As prov mm² 829 As T prov 452 As prov 829
BTM STEEL 2H 16 /rib 2H 25 /rib 2H 16 /rib
As' prov mm² 402 As prov 982 As' prov 402
SHEAR V kN/m 59.09 V 67.12
v N/mm² 0.945 v 1.126
vc N/mm² 0.935 Link Ø 6 vc 0.935
LINKS 2 H6 @ 175 for 175 2 H6 @ 1,200 2 H6 @ 175 for 525
DEFLECTION L/d 29.598 Allowed 36.887 ok (As increased by 23.8%)
& CHECKS % As ok ok ok
Bar Ø & cover ok ok ok
Bar spacing ok ok ok

Dist to link ok ok ok

53

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:53 17/07/2006 17:04:47

 RCC32 Ribbed Slabs (A & D)/ SPANS!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made by Date Page
Location 3rd Floor slab, from 1 to 5a rmw Apr-2006 /46
54
RIBBED SLABS to BS 8110:2005 (Analysis & Design) Checked Revision Job No
Originated from RCC32.xls v3.0 on CD © 2006 TCC chg - R68

SPAN 3 LEFT CENTRE RIGHT

ACTIONS M kNm/m 83.2 @col face 71.0 0.0
ßb 0.85 0.94 1.00
DESIGN d mm 239.0 236.5 (x=26.3<hf/0.9) 239.0
As mm² 759 654 (955 mm² for defln) 0
As' mm² 0 As T 265 As' 0
TOP STEEL 2H 20 /rib 3H 12 /rib 2H 20 /rib
+ 4 H8 between + 4 H8 between
As prov mm² 829 As T prov 339 As prov 829
BTM STEEL 2H 16 /rib 2H 25 /rib 3H 16 /rib
As' prov mm² 402 As prov 982 As' prov 603
SHEAR V kN/m 68.30 V 46.55
v N/mm² 1.152 v 0.890
vc N/mm² 0.935 Link Ø 6 vc 0.935
LINKS 2 H6 @ 175 for 700 2 H6 @ 1,200 .
DEFLECTION L/d 31.712 Allowed 32.266 ok (As increased by 45.9%)
& CHECKS % As ok ok ok
Bar Ø & cover ok ok ok
Bar spacing ok ok ok

Dist to link ok ok ok

54

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:54 17/07/2006 17:04:49

 RCC32 Ribbed Slabs (A & D).xls

RCC32 Ribbed Slabs (A & D)/ WEIGHT!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made by Date Page
Location 3rd Floor slab, from 1 to 5a rmw Apr-2006 /47
55
RIBBED SLABS to BS 8110:2005 (Analysis & Design) Checked Revision Job No
Originated from RCC32.xls v3.0 on CD © 2006 TCC chg - R68

APPROXIMATE WEIGHT of REINFORCEMENT

TOP STEEL No Type Dia Length Unit Wt Weight

Support 1 2 H 12 1025 0.888 1.8
5 H 8 1025 0.395 2.0
Span 1 1 H 16 2225 1.578 3.5
Support 2 2 H 20 2250 2.466 11.1
4 H 8 2250 0.395 3.6
Span 2 4 H 12 4425 0.888 15.7
Support 3 2 H 20 3625 2.466 17.9
4 H 8 3625 0.395 5.7
Span 3 3 H 12 4675 0.888 12.5
Support 4 2 H 20 2400 2.466 11.8
4 H 8 2400 0.395 3.8

BOTTOM STEEL Support 1 1 H 16 1150 1.578 1.8

Span 1 1 H 20 400 2.466 1.0
Support 2 1 H 16 3475 1.578 5.5
Span 2 2 H 25 4750 3.853 36.6
Support 3 2 H 16 3475 1.578 11.0
Span 3 2 H 25 5900 3.853 45.5
Support 4 3 H 16 1725 1.578 8.2

LINKS Span 1 1 H 6 800 0.222 0.2

Span 2 9 H 6 800 0.222 1.6
Span 3 9 H 6 800 0.222 1.6

SUMMARY All figures approximate - see User Guide.

Reinforcement density (kg/m²) 12.92 Total rebar per rib, excluding mesh (kg) 202.3

55

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:55 17/07/2006 17:04:51

 RCC32R Rigorous Ribbed Slabs.xls
This spreadsheet analyses, designs and estimates deflections in
up to six spans of continuous ribbed slab. Design is to BS 8110
Parts 1 and 2 and is analysed using continuous beam analysis,.
There is user input on each of the first four sheets and choice of
reinforcement for each span is implicit.
The spreadsheet is based on RCC32 and similarly to RCC31R has
an initial sheet JOBDATA! to allow input of all the variables and
performance criteria required. The calculation of deflection is
not carried out automatically. The user is required to press the
‘Calculate deflections’ button in column N of SPANS! when every
other aspect of the design is complete. Deflections are given as a
range in a chart at the bottom of ACTIONS! They are shown as a
range due to potential pattern loading. In SPANS! the worst case
is compared with the specified serviceability criteria.
It should be noted that the number of assumptions and
uncertainties in the material and design criteria and construction
process mean that deflection calculations carried out in
this manner can be notoriously inaccurate (and usually over
conservative) compared to actual measured deflections. For
instance, a slab’s deflection is very dependent upon whether the
slab has cracked in bending during construction or not.
The calculated deflections might be regarded as being akin to
95% confidence limits.
JOBDATA!
This sheet consists of the main inputs of material, loading,
construction and serviceability criteria pertaining to the
calculation of deflection to BS 8110 Part 2. Users are expected to
use their knowledge of the project and judgement in completing
this sheet. The default values given in this sheet are not unusual.
For creep reference is made to Eurocode 2 Annex B.
MAIN!
This single sheet consists of the main inputs which should be
self-explanatory. The number of spans is altered by entering
or deleting data under L (m). Unwanted data cells are ‘greyed-
out’. The use of C, K or F can alter the characteristics of the end
supports from cantilever to knife-edge to fixed. Extraneous data
is highlighted in red or by messages in red. Under ‘Operating
Instructions’ a number of checks are carried out and any problems
are highlighted. The data under ‘Solid’ define the distances from
support centrelines to the start of the ribbed cross-section.
For the purposes of defining load the section under consideration
is assumed to be 1.00 m wide. It will be seen from Bar! that
moments per metre are converted to moments per rib, and
calculations of reinforcement areas required etc., are based
on moments and shear per rib. Great care should be taken to
56
EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:56
ensure this sheet is completed correctly for the case in hand. It
may prove prudent to write down expected values of bending
moments at each support before progressing to ACTIONS!
Combo-boxes to the right under Operating Instructions define
minimum bar sizes to be used (e.g. at supports between ribs) and
whether the user wants to use links or not. If links are required
these may be either designed or nominal links; the centres of
nominal links can be changed.
Towards the bottom of the sheet a simplistic loading diagram is
given to aid data checking. At the bottom of the sheet, support
reactions are given.
ACTIONS!
This sheet shows bending moment and shear force diagrams
from the analysis undertaken in Analysis! The user is required to
input desired amount of redistribution to the initial moments in
line 21. Cell L14 allows three types of distribution according to
the user’s preferences. See ‘Redistribution’ under ‘Assumptions
made’ in Table 1.
The chart at the bottom of the page shows calculated deflections
at construction of partitions, and ranges for longer term
deflections due to patterns of permanent and imposed loading.
Deflection calculations involve many iterative calculations, which
take some time on even the fastest of computers. Calculation of
deflections is therefore controlled by clicking the ‘Calculate
Deflections’ button in column L and elsewhere and should be
undertaken once all the design is complete. The worst case
deflection is taken in subsequent checks and this might be viewed
as being unduly conservative.
SPANS!
In SPANS! the user is required to choose top, bottom and link
reinforcement for each span. The amounts of bending and shear
reinforcement required and checks are derived from detailed
calculations in Bar! Unwanted cells are ‘greyed-out’.
The reinforcement diameter specified for a support carries
through both sides of the support, i.e. the diameter specified for
the right hand support of a span carries over to the left hand
support of the next span.
It should be noted that hogging moment is checked both at the
centre of support (solid section) and the solid/ rib intersection
(ribbed section). As the moments at the solid/ rib intersection
each side of the support may differ, it may be possible to obtain a
design giving different numbers of bars each side of the support.
Practicality should dictate that the greater number of bars is used
for detailing. Hogging moments at 1/4 span positions within a
17/07/2006 17:04:54
 RCC32R Rigorous Ribbed Slabs.xls

span are checked and are used in the determination of top steel
in spans. For top steel at supports, reinforcement requirements
Graf!
are checked at both the support centreline (solid) and at the start
This sheet comprises data for graphs used on other sheets,
of the ribbed cross-section. Deflection calculations involve many
particularly in ACTIONS! It is not necessarily intended for printing
iterative calculations, and these are controlled by clicking the
out other than for checking purposes.
‘Calculate Deflections’ button in column N. Deflection results will
only appear on the spreadsheet after the ‘Calculate Deflections’
button has been used and the macro been allowed to complete
Notes!
its iterations. They will disappear again if relevant data (e.g. span, This sheet gives disclaimers and revision history as in the Notes!
load) is changed. Should the span fail deflection criteria, the user sheet in other spreadsheets.
has the option to increase bottom steel at cell M24 etc, and reuse
the ‘Calculate Deflection’ button.

WEIGHT!
WEIGHT! Gives an estimate of the amount of reinforcement
required in one direction of the slab per rib and per square metre.
Simplified curtailment rules, as defined in BS 8110 Part 1, Clause
3.12, are used in the determination of lengths of bars. The figures
should be treated as approximate estimates only as they cannot
deal with the effects of designers’ and detailers’ preferences,
rationalisation, etc. They do not allow for reinforcement in
supporting beams or for mesh.

Uls!
This sheet details the moment distribution analysis carried out
at the ultimate limit state but is not necessarily intended for
printing out other than for checking purposes.

Sls!
This sheet details the analysis carried out at the serviceability
limit state at 1/20th points along each span. The results are used
in Def!. This sheet is not necessarily intended for printing out
other than for checking purposes.

Bar!
This sheet shows design calculations, complete with references
to BS 8110. It is not necessarily intended for printing out other
than for checking purposes. In spans, service stress, fs, may be
reduced to satisfy deflection criteria. In many instances, minima
of 1.0 or 0.0001 have been used to avoid problems with division
by zero.

Def!
This sheet calculates deflections at 1/20th points for each
span and for each load condition. The sheet is large and is not
necessarily intended for printing out other than for checking
purposes.

57

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:57 17/07/2006 17:04:56

 RCC32R Rigorous Ribbed Slabs/ JOBDATA!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made by Date Page
Location 3rd Floor slab from 1 to 5a rmw 11-Apr-06 43
58
RIGOROUS RIBBED SLAB DESIGN to BS 8110:2005 Checked Revision Job No
Originated from RCC32R.xls v3.0 on CD © 2005 TCC chg - R68

LOCATION Supports from grid 1 to grid 5a

COVERS (to all steel)
MATERIALS Top cover 20 mm
fcu 35 N/mm² h agg 20 mm Btm cover 20 mm
fy 500 N/mm² γs 1.15 steel Side cover 20 mm
fyv 500 N/mm² γc 1.50 concrete Concrete density 23.6 kN/m³
steel class A
SERVICEABILITY CRITERIA Maximum permanent ∆ = L / 250 3.3.3 (Pt 2)
Maximum imposed ∆ = L / 500
Max ∆ affecting partitions = L / 350 or 20 mm
Maximum precamber = 50% of permanent ∆
Permanent portion of imposed loading = 25%
Design Crack width, W k = 0.3 mm 2.2.3.4.2
CREEP COEFFICIENTS (to EN 1992-1)
RH 50 % relative humidity fcm = 36 N/mm² Table 3.1
Cement N Type (S, N, R or RS) Ecm = 31.37 kN/mm² & Annex A

AMBIENT TEMPERATURES ºC from 0 to 7 days from 7 to 60 days from 60 days on

15 17 20

LOADING SEQUENCE (loads rationalised to kN/m²)

Span 1 Span 2 Span 3 Span 4 Span 5 Span 6 At age
kN/m² kN/m² kN/m² kN/m² kN/m² kN/m² Days
Self weight 3.93 4.19 4.11 4.27 0.00 0.00 7
Partitions 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 28
Other dead loads 3.81 3.71 2.50 2.50 #DIV/0! #DIV/0! 60
Permanent imposed 0.79 0.79 0.75 0.75 #DIV/0! #DIV/0! 28
Variable load 2.37 2.36 2.25 2.25 #DIV/0! #DIV/0! ∞
Total 11.89 12.04 10.61 10.77 #DIV/0! #DIV/0!

COMPOSITE E and φ VALUES - Span 1

At 70 years At 70 years At 28 days
Et Et Et
Ø0 Ø0 Ø (t,t0)
kN/mm² kN/mm² kN/mm²
Self weight 3.60 6.82 3.60 6.82 1.27 13.83
Partitions 2.74 8.40 2.74 8.40 0 31.37
Other dead loads 2.32 9.43 2.32 9.43 1.01 15.60
Permanent imposed 2.74 8.40 2.74 8.40 At partition
Variable load 0 31.37 loading
Composite 2.93 7.98 2.35 9.37
Permanent Total load

58

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:58 17/07/2006 17:04:56

 RCC32R Rigorous Ribbed Slabs.xls

RCC32R Rigorous Ribbed Slabs/ MAIN!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made by Date Page
Location 3rd Floor slab, from 1 to 5a rmw Apr-2006 59
44
RIGOROUS RIBBED SLAB DESIGN to BS 8110:2005 Checked Revision Job No
Originated from RCC32R.xls v3.0 on CD © 2005 TCC chg - R68

RIBS
slab depth, hf 100 mm Centres 900 mm
Rib width 150 mm Side taper of 1 in 10

SPANS Solid (mm) SUPPORTS

L (m) H (mm) Left Right Support No Type
SPAN 1 6.500 275 450 1100 1 K
SPAN 2 7.000 275 1100 1100 5 K
SPAN 3 7.500 275 1100 1100 K(nife), or C(antilever)
SPAN 4 6.500 275 1100 1100 LOADING PATTERN
SPAN 5 min max
SPAN 6 DEAD 1 1.4
IMPOSED 0 1.6
LOADING UDLs (kN/m²) PLs (kN/m) Position (m)
Self Add Dead Imposed Position Self Add Dead Imposed Position
Span 1 Weight Load Load from left Span 4 Weight Load Load from left
UDL 3.93 2.50 4.00 ~~~~ UDL 4.27 2.50 4.00 ~~~~
PL 1 ~~~~ 8.50 1.00 0.450 PL 1 ~~~
PL 2 ~~~~ PL 2 ~~~
Span 2 Span 5
UDL 4.19 2.50 4.00 ~~~~ UDL
PL 1 ~~~~ 8.50 1.00 1.450 PL 1 ~~~
PL 2 ~~~~ PL 2 ~~~
Span 3 Span 6
UDL 4.11 2.50 4.00 ~~~~ UDL ~~~~
PL 1 ~~~~ PL 1 ~~~~
PL 2 ~~~~ PL 2 ~~~~

LOADING DIAGRAM

1 5a
REACTIONS (kN/m)
SUPPORT 1 2 3 4 5
Characteristic Dead 23.4 57.9 48.6 52.5 16.8 ~ ~
Max Imposed 12.7 31.1 28.4 31.6 11.8 ~ ~
Min Imposed -1.7 14.0 13.6 14.3 -1.9 ~ ~
MAX ULTIMATE 53.6 128.5 116.2 120.7 42.5 ~ ~

59

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:59 17/07/2006 17:05:00

 RCC32R Rigorous Ribbed Slabs/ ACTIONS!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made by Date Page
Location 3rd Floor slab, , from 1 to 5a rmw Apr-2006 45
60
RIGOROUS RIBBED SLAB DESIGN to BS 8110:2005 Checked Revision Job No
Originated from RCC32R.xls v3.0 on CD © 2005 TCC chg - R68

BENDING MOMENT DIAGRAMS (kNm/m) Elastic Redistributed

100 100
80 80
60 60
40 40
20 20
0 0
-20 -20
-40 -40
-60 -60
-80 -80
0 5 10 15 20 25 30 0 5 10 15 20 25 30

1 5a 1 5a
SUPPORT No 1 2 3 4 5
Elastic M 0.0 80.2 68.1 79.6 0.0 ~ kNm/m
Redistributed M 0.0 72.2 68.1 67.7 0.0 ~ kNm/m
ßb 1.000 0.900 1.000 0.850 1.000 ~ ~
Redistribution 10.0% 0.0% 15.0%

SPAN No 1 2 3 4
Elastic M 60.47 51.71 53.85 60.16 ~ ~
Redistributed M 58.31 48.59 51.09 56.94 ~ ~
ßb 0.964 0.940 0.949 0.947 #VALUE! #VALUE!

SHEAR FORCE DIAGRAMS (kN/m) Elastic Redistributed

80 80
60 60
40 40
20 20
0 0
-20 -20
-40 -40
-60 -60
-80 -80
0 5 10 15 20 25 30 0 5 10 15 20 25 30

1 5a 1 5a
SPAN No 1 2 3
Elastic V 54.4 63.3 68.1 56.2 57.2 60.3
Redistributed V 53.6 62.1 69.0 57.4 58.8 61.0

SPAN No 4
Elastic V 63.8 43.7 ~ ~ ~ ~
Redistributed V 62.0 42.5 ~ ~ ~ ~

DEFLECTIONS (mm) Precamber not included .

10

-10

-20

-30

-40

SPAN No 1 2 3 4
Before partitions 11.2 6.4 9.8 10.7 #DIV/0! #DIV/0! mm
Permanent 24.6 20.8 24.0 24.0 #DIV/0! #DIV/0! mm
Variable 10.0 9.6 11.9 9.7 #DIV/0! #DIV/0! mm

60

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:60 17/07/2006 17:05:02

 RCC32R Rigorous Ribbed Slabs.xls

RCC32R Rigorous Ribbed Slabs/ SPANS!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made by Date Page
Location 3rd Floor slab, , from 1 to 5a rmw 11-Apr-06 61
46
RIGOROUS RIBBED SLAB DESIGN to BS 8110:2005 Checked Revision Job No
Originated from RCC32R.xls v3.0 on CD © 2005 TCC chg - R68

SPAN 1 LEFT CENTRE RIGHT

ACTIONS M kNm/m 0.0 58.3 72.2
ßb 1.00 0.96 0.90
DESIGN d mm 243.0 239.0 (x=26.6<hf/0.9) 241.0
As mm² 0 532 653
As' mm² 0 As T 239 As' 0
TOP STEEL 2H 12 /rib 2H 16 /rib 2H 16 /rib
+ 5 H8 between + 5 H8 between
As prov mm² 478 As T prov 402 As prov 653
BTM STEEL 2H 16 /rib 2H 20 /rib 2H 16 /rib
As' prov mm² 402 As prov 628 As' prov 402
SHEAR V kN/m 53.61 V 62.10
v N/mm² 0.733 v 1.005
vc N/mm² 0.798 Link Ø 6 vc 0.801
LINKS . 2 H6 @ 1,200 2 H6 @ 175 for 700
DEFLECTIONS Permanent = 24.65 < 26.00 Imposed = 9.98 < 13.00 Precamber (mm) = 0
mm Affecting partitions = 13.42 < 18.57 ok Increase btm As by 0%
CHECKS % As ok ok ok
Bar Ø & cover ok ok ok
Crack width ok 0.00 ok 0.17 ok 0.22
Dist to link ok ok ok

SPAN 2 LEFT CENTRE RIGHT

ACTIONS M kNm/m 72.2 48.6 68.1
ßb 0.90 0.94 1.00
DESIGN d mm 241.0 239.0 (x=26.6<hf/0.9) 241.0
As mm² 653 443 616
As' mm² 0 As T 175 As' 0
TOP STEEL 2H 16 /rib 2H 12 /rib 2H 16 /rib
+ 5 H8 between + 4 H10 between
As prov mm² 653 As T prov 226 As prov 716
BTM STEEL 2H 16 /rib 2H 20 /rib 2H 16 /rib
As' prov mm² 402 As prov 628 As' prov 402
SHEAR V kN/m 68.97 V 57.37
v N/mm² 1.158 v 0.899
vc N/mm² 0.801 Link Ø 6 vc 0.801
LINKS 2 H6 @ 175 for 1050 2 H6 @ 1,200 2 H6 @ 175 for 350
DEFLECTIONS Permanent = 20.84 < 28.00 Imposed = 9.63 < 14.00 Precamber (mm) = 0
mm Affecting partitions = 14.48 < 20.00 ok Increase btm As by 0%
CHECKS % As ok ok ok
Bar Ø & cover ok ok ok
Crack width ok 0.22 ok 0.08 ok 0.16
Dist to link ok ok ok

61

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:61 17/07/2006 17:05:05

 RCC32R Rigorous Ribbed Slabs/ SPANS!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made by Date Page
Location 3rd Floor slab, , from 1 to 5a rmw Apr-2006 /47
62
RIGOROUS RIBBED SLAB DESIGN to BS 8110:2005 Checked Revision Job No
Originated from RCC32R.xls v3.0 on CD © 2005 TCC chg - R68

SPAN 3 LEFT CENTRE RIGHT

ACTIONS M kNm/m 68.1 @col face 51.1 67.7
ßb 1.00 0.95 0.85
DESIGN d mm 241.0 239.0 (x=26.6<hf/0.9) 241.0
As mm² 616 466 612
As' mm² 0 As T 197 As' 0
TOP STEEL 2H 16 /rib 2H 12 /rib 2H 16 /rib
+ 4 H10 between + 5 H8 between
As prov mm² 716 As T prov 226 As prov 653
BTM STEEL 2H 16 /rib 2H 20 /rib 2H 16 /rib
As' prov mm² 402 As prov 628 As' prov 402
SHEAR V kN/m 58.78 V 60.99
v N/mm² 0.931 v 0.980
vc N/mm² 0.801 Link Ø 6 vc 0.801
LINKS 2 H6 @ 175 for 350 2 H6 @ 1,200 2 H6 @ 175 for 525
DEFLECTIONS Permanent = 24.01 < 30.00 Imposed = 11.92 < 15.00 Precamber (mm) = 0
mm Affecting partitions = 14.17 < 20.00 ok Increase btm As by 0%
CHECKS % As ok ok ok
Bar Ø & cover ok ok ok
Crack width ok 0.16 ok 0.08 ok 0.22
Dist to link ok ok ok

SPAN 4 LEFT CENTRE RIGHT

ACTIONS M kNm/m 67.7 56.9 0.0
ßb 0.85 0.95 1.00
DESIGN d mm 241.0 239.0 (x=26.6<hf/0.9) 241.0
As mm² 612 519 0
As' mm² 0 As T 227 As' 0
TOP STEEL 2H 16 /rib 3H 12 /rib 2H 16 /rib
+ 5 H8 between + 4 H8 between
As prov mm² 653 As T prov 339 As prov 603
BTM STEEL 2H 16 /rib 2H 20 /rib 2H 16 /rib
As' prov mm² 402 As prov 628 As' prov 402
SHEAR V kN/m 62.00 V 42.52
v N/mm² 1.003 v 0.568
vc N/mm² 0.801 Link Ø 6 vc 0.801
LINKS 2 H6 @ 175 for 525 2 H6 @ 1,200 .
DEFLECTIONS Permanent = 24.03 < 26.00 Imposed = 9.72 < 13.00 Precamber (mm) = 0
mm Affecting partitions = 13.37 < 18.57 ok Increase btm As by 0%
CHECKS % As ok ok ok
Bar Ø & cover ok ok ok
Crack width ok 0.22 ok 0.11 ok 0.00
Dist to link ok ok ok

62

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:62 17/07/2006 17:05:08

 RCC32R Rigorous Ribbed Slabs.xls

RCC32R Rigorous Ribbed Slabs/ WEIGHT!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made by Date Page
Location 3rd Floor slab, , from 1 to 5a rmw Apr-2006 /48
63
RIGOROUS RIBBED SLAB DESIGN to BS 8110:2005 Checked Revision Job No
Originated from RCC32R.xls v3.0 on CD © 2005 TCC chg - R68

APPROXIMATE WEIGHT of REINFORCEMENT

TOP STEEL No Type Dia Length Unit Wt Weight

Support 1 2 H 12 2150 0.888 3.8
5 H 8 2150 0.395 4.2
Span 1 2 H 16 4475 1.578 14.1
Support 2 2 H 16 3375 1.578 10.7
5 H 8 3375 0.395 6.7
Span 2 2 H 12 4425 0.888 7.9
Support 3 2 H 16 3625 1.578 11.4
4 H 10 3625 0.617 8.9
Span 3 2 H 12 4675 0.888 8.3
Support 4 2 H 16 3500 1.578 11.0
5 H 8 3500 0.395 6.9
Span 4 3 H 12 4175 0.888 11.1
Support 5 2 H 16 2800 1.578 8.8
4 H 8 2800 0.395 4.4

BOTTOM STEEL Support 1 2 H 16 1150 1.578 3.6

Span 1 2 H 20 4900 2.466 24.2
Support 2 2 H 16 3475 1.578 11.0
Span 2 2 H 20 4750 2.466 23.4
Support 3 2 H 16 3475 1.578 11.0
Span 3 2 H 20 5250 2.466 25.9
Support 4 2 H 16 3475 1.578 11.0
Span 4 2 H 20 4250 2.466 21.0
Support 5 2 H 16 2375 1.578 7.5

LINKS Span 1 8 H 6 800 0.222 1.4

Span 2 12 H 6 800 0.222 2.1
Span 3 10 H 6 800 0.222 1.8
Span 4 7 H 6 800 0.222 1.2

SUMMARY All figures approximate - see User Guide.

Reinforcement density (kg/m²) 10.08 Total rebar per rib, excluding mesh (kg) 263.4

63

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:63 17/07/2006 17:05:11

 RCC33 Flat Slabs (A & D).xls
RCC33.xls analyses and designs bays of simple rectangular flat
slabs to BS 8110: Part 1. The spreadsheet uses sub-frame analysis
with pattern loading to calculate a bending moment envelope.
This envelope may be subjected to redistribution.
For a complete rectangular flat slab the user is expected to use
the spreadsheet at least four times (internal bay(s) x - x, internal
bay(s) y - y, edge bay(s) x - x and edge bay(s) y - y). Punching
shear should be checked using RCC13.xls.
The spreadsheet does not currently allow for holes or drops. If
holes are considered critical then the user is directed towards
using RCC21.xls (sub-frame analysis) and allowing for holes in
the breadths used. See also Clause 3.7.5. The single load case of
all spans loaded (Clause 3.5.2.3) is not used. Beyond panel aspect
ratios of 1.5 consideration might be given to the appropriateness
of using other forms of analysis (e.g. grillage or finite element).
MAIN!
This sheet provides the main inputs to the spreadsheet (although
other inputs occur in other sheets). Most inputs are (we hope)
self-explanatory.
LEGEND! should help with definition of dimensions, e.g. edge
distance C is actually from centreline of column to edge of slab.
Cover is defined as being to the layer being designed. The layering
is set at T1 - B1 (& T2 - B2) although T1 - B2 might be deemed
more appropriate (e.g. with prefabricated mats).
The number of spans is altered by entering data in the appropriate
cells. Unwanted data cells are ‘greyed-out’. The use of C, K, F or P
can alter the characteristics of a support from Cantilever to Knife-
edge to Fixed to Pinned. Extraneous data is highlighted in red or
by messages in red. Under Operating Instructions a number of
checks are carried out and problems found are highlighted. At
the bottom of the sheet a simplistic loading diagram is given to
aid data checking. Great care should be taken to ensure that this
sheet is completed correctly for the case in hand. It may prove
prudent to estimate values for bay width bending moments at
each support by hand before progressing to ACTIONS!
Cantilevers less than 1.00m should be described as end distances
(rather than cantilevers; otherwise certain logic regarding breadth
of effective moment transfer strip, be (see BS 8110: Part 1, Figure
3.13), goes wrong).
End distances equivalent to the half width of the column should
be used to define slabs whose edge is flush with the outside of
the column. On edge columns, be restricts Mt max which in itself
restricts the amount of moment transferred into columns above
and below.
64
EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:64
Load input should define the loads on the slab only. A combo-
box is used to switch between the internal and edge bays. If
EDGE is chosen, cells H14:I14 and E16:G16 become operative
and information about the perimeter load along the edge and
the distance of the edge from the centreline is required as input.
Perimeter loading is assumed to be dead load.
The spreadsheet also allows lines loads to be input. This facility
might be used with caution to deal with small point loads
being distributed over suitable widths in the two orthogonal
directions.
Cell L51 gives an estimate of reinforcement requirements for
the element considered in the direction considered (not both
directions).
It will be noted that the example assumes the reinforcement is
in the second layer; therefore warnings concerning cover greater
than 40 mm should not be of too much concern.
The spreadsheet takes automatic measures to ensure deflection
criteria are met. It may be argued that in this instance, with equal
spans in the two directions, these measures are unwarranted in
that deflection criteria will have been met in the orthogonal T1/
B1 layer.
To the right under Operating instructions a number of checks are
carried out. Box markers indicate where checks have been carried
out and proved satisfactory.
ACTIONS!
This sheet shows bending moment and shear force diagrams
from the analysis undertaken in Analysis! The user is required to
input the desired amount of redistribution to the initial moments
in line 26. Cell L14 allows three types of distribution according to
the user’s preference.
The sheet also provides output reactions and column moments.
Using the value of Veff for punching shear obviates the need to
use the 1.15, 1.25 and 1.4 factors in Clause 3.7.6.2 to determine
Veff from Vt .
SPANS!
SPANS! details the amounts of reinforcement required derived
from detailed calculations in Bar!.
LEGEND!
LEGEND! gives an explanation of the dimensions used in MAIN!
and for the analysis and design.
17/07/2006 17:05:14
 RCC33 Flat Slabs (A & D).xls

WEIGHT!
WEIGHT! gives an estimate of the amount of reinforcement
required in one direction of the slab for the internal or end
bays considered. Simplified curtailment rules, as defined in
Clause 3.12, are used to determine lengths of bars. The figures
should be treated as approximate estimates only as they cannot
deal with the effects of designers’ and detailers’ preferences,
‘rationalisation’, the effects of holes etc, etc. They do not allow
for punching shear links or link carrier bars.

Analysis!
This sheet details the moment distribution analysis carried out
but is not necessarily intended for printing out other than for
checking purposes. It is derived from RCC21.xls.

Bar!
This sheet shows design calculations, complete with references
to BS 8110. It is not necessarily intended for printing out other
than for checking purposes.

Hogging moments at 1/4 span positions within a span are

checked and are used in the determination of top steel in spans.

Graf!
This sheet comprises data for graphs used on other sheets,
particularly in ACTIONS!

Notes!
This sheet gives disclaimers and revision history.

65

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:65 17/07/2006 17:05:15

 RCC33 Flat Slabs (A & D)/ MAIN!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made by Date Page
Location ECBP Typical Floor from grids A to D rmw 11-Apr-06 49
66
FLAT SLAB ANALYSIS & DESIGN to BS 8110:2005 Checked Revision Job No
Originated from RCC33.xls v3.1 on CD © 2006 TCC chg - R68

MATERIALS fcu 40 N/mm² h agg 20 mm COVERS mm TO LAYER

fyl 500 N/mm² γs 1.15 steel Top cover 25 1
fyv 500 N/mm² γc 1.50 concrete Btm cover 25 1
steel class A
SPANS L (m) GEOMETRY PERIMETER LOADS characteristic
SPAN 1 7.500 Bay type EDGE 8.85 kN/m outside supports 1 & 4
SPAN 2 7.500 Slab depth, h 250 mm 2.47 10.00 kN/m along bay edge
SPAN 3 7.500 Edge Panel width, b 3750 mm LOADING PATTERN
SPAN 4 Edge distance 300 mm to C/L min max
SPAN 5 End distance 125 from supt 1 DEAD 1.0 1.4
SPAN 6 End distance 125 from supt 4 IMPOSED 1.6
.
SUPPORTS ABOVE (m) H (mm) B (mm) End Cond BELOW (m) H (mm) B (mm) End Cond
Support 1 3.750 250 400 F 3.75 250 400 F
Support 2 3.750 400 400 F 3.75 400 400 F
Support 3 3.750 400 400 F 3.75 400 400 F
Support 4 3.750 250 400 F 3.75 250 400 F
Support 5
Support 6
Support 7

LOADING UDLs (kN/m²) PLs (kN/m) Position (m)

Dead Imposed Position Loaded Dead Imposed Position Loaded
Span 1 Load Load from left Length Span 4 Load Load from left Length
UDL 7.50 3.50 ~~~~~ ~~~~~ UDL ~~~~~ ~~~~~
PL 1 ~~~~~ PL 1 ~~~~~
PL 2 ~~~~~ PL 2 ~~~~~
Part UDL Part UDL
Span 2 Span 5
UDL 7.50 3.50 ~~~~~ ~~~~~ UDL ~~~~~ ~~~~~
PL 1 ~~~~~ PL 1 ~~~~~
PL 2 ~~~~~ PL 2 ~~~~~
Part UDL Part UDL
Span 3 Span 6
UDL 7.50 3.50 ~~~~~ ~~~~~ UDL ~~~~~ ~~~~~
PL 1 ~~~~~ PL 1 ~~~~~
PL 2 ~~~~~ PL 2 ~~~~~
Part UDL Part UDL

LOADING DIAGRAM

A D

66

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:66 17/07/2006 17:05:16

 RCC33 Flat Slabs (A & D).xls

RCC33 Flat Slabs (A & D)/ ACTIONS!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made by Date Page
Location ECBP Typical Floor, from grids A to D rmw 11-Apr-06 67
50
FLAT SLAB ANALYSIS & DESIGN to BS 8110:2005 Checked Revision Job No
Originated from RCC33.xls v3.1 on CD © 2006 TCC chg - R68
BENDING MOMENT DIAGRAMS (kNm)

600 500
500 400
400 300
300
200
200
100
100
0
0
-100
-100
-200 -200
-300 -300
-400 -400
0 5 10 15 20 25 0 5 10 15 20 25

Elastic Moments Redistributed Envelope

SUPPORT No 1 2 3 4
Elastic M 123.7 465.4 465.4 123.7 ~ ~ ~
Redistributed M 123.7 372.3 372.3 123.7 ~ ~ ~
ßb 1.000 0.800 0.800 1.000 ~ ~ ~
Redistribution 20.0% 20.0%
End support reinf. Ø mm 16 16
* *
SPAN No 1 2 3
Elastic M 297.1 205.5 297.1 ~ ~ ~
Redistributed M 319.9 184.6 319.9 ~ ~ ~
ßb 1.077 0.898 1.077 ~ ~ ~
SHEARS FORCE DIAGRAMS (kN)

400 400
300 300
200 200
100 100
0 0
-100 -100
-200 -200
-300 -300
-400 -400
0 5 10 15 20 25 0 5 10 15 20 25

Elastic Shears Redistributed Shears

SPAN No 1 2 3
Elastic V 258.2 343.6 297.0 297.0 343.6 258.2
Redistributed V 263.9 331.1 297.0 297.0 331.1 263.9

SPAN No
Elastic V ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~
Redistributed V ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~

REACTIONS (kN)
SUPPORT 1 2 3 4
ALL SPANS LOADED 323.0 628.2 628.2 323.0
ODD SPANS LOADED 323.9 481.6 481.6 323.9
EVEN SPANS LOADED 153.4 487.3 487.3 153.4
Veff for punching 404.9 878.0 878.0 404.9
Characteristic Dead 168.7 326.4 326.4 168.7
Characteristic Imposed 49.3 114.8 114.8 49.3

COLUMN MOMENTS (kNm) 1 2 3 4

ALL SPANS Above 54.7 -35.9 35.9 -54.7
LOADED Below 54.7 -35.9 35.9 -54.7
ODD SPANS Above 59.4 -86.2 86.2 -59.4
LOADED Below 59.4 -86.2 86.2 -59.4
EVEN SPANS Above 23.0 32.1 -32.1 -23.0
LOADED Below 23.0 32.1 -32.1 -23.0

67

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:67 17/07/2006 17:05:18

 RCC33 Flat Slabs (A & D)/ SPANS!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made by Date Page
Location ECBP Typical Floor, from grids A to D rmw Apr-2006 68
51
FLAT SLAB ANALYSIS & DESIGN to BS 8110:2005 Checked Revision Job No
Originated from RCC33.xls v3.1 on CD © 2006 TCC chg - R68

SPAN 1 LEFT CENTRE RIGHT

ACTIONS ßb 1.000 1.077 0.800
Be 625 2175
Total M kNm 92.8 319.9 328.5
Mt max kNm 176.6 614.5

MIDDLE STRIP Width mm 3425 1875 1875

M kNm 1.8 144.0 82.1
d mm 219.0 215.0 217.0
As mm²/m 6 865 489
As deflection mm²/m 1276 489
Provide H12 @ 325 T1 Provide H20 @ 225 B1 Provide H16 @ 400 T1
As prov mm²/m 348 1396 503
Top steel Provide H12 @ 325 T1
Deflection L/d = 7,500 /215.0 = 34.884 < 26.0 x 1.478 x 1.050 x 0.9 = 36.335 OK
(As increased by 47.5 % for deflection)
COLUMN STRIP Width mm 625 2175 2175
M kNm 92.8 176.0 246.4
d mm 217.0 215.0 217.0
As mm²/m 1743 912 1294
As deflection mm²/m 1408 1294
Provide H16 @ 100 T1 Provide H20 @ 200 B1 Provide H16 @ 100:200 T1
As prov mm²/m 2011 1571 1508
Top steel Provide H12 @ 325 T1
Deflection L/d = 7,500 /215.0 = 34.884 < 26.0 x 1.485 x 1.050 x 0.9 = 36.489 OK
(As increased by 54.4 % for deflection)
CHECKS % As ok ok ok
Singly reinforced ok ok ok
max S ok ok ok

SPAN 2 LEFT CENTRE RIGHT

ACTIONS ßb 0.800 0.898 0.800
Be 2175 2175
Total M kNm 328.5 184.6 328.5
Mt max kNm 614.5 614.5

MIDDLE STRIP Width mm 1875 1875 1875

M kNm 82.1 83.1 82.1
d mm 217.0 215.0 217.0
As mm²/m 489 499 489
As deflection mm²/m 489 654
Provide H16 @ 400 T1 Provide H20 @ 450 B1 Provide H16 @ 400 T1
As prov mm²/m 503 698 503
Top steel Provide H12 @ 325 T1
Deflection L/d = 7,500 /215.0 = 34.884 < 26.0 x 1.500 x 1.050 x 0.9 = 36.863 OK
(As increased by 31.0 % for deflection)
COLUMN STRIP Width mm 2175 2175 2175
M kNm 246.4 101.5 246.4
d mm 217.0 215.0 217.0
As mm²/m 1294 526 1294
As deflection mm²/m 1294 702
Provide H16 @ 100:200 T1 Provide H20 @ 400 B1 Provide H16 @ 100:200 T1
As prov mm²/m 1508 785 1508
Top steel Provide H12 @ 325 T1
Deflection L/d = 7,500 /215.0 = 34.884 < 26.0 x 1.548 x 1.050 x 0.9 = 38.038 OK
(As increased by 33.6 % for deflection)
CHECKS % As ok ok ok
Singly reinforced ok ok ok
max S ok ok ok

68

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:68 17/07/2006 17:05:21

 RCC33 Flat Slabs (A & D).xls

RCC33 Flat Slabs (A & D)/ SPANS!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made by Date Page
Location ECBP Typical Floor, from grids A to D rmw Apr-2006 69
52
FLAT SLAB ANALYSIS & DESIGN to BS 8110:2005 Checked Revision Job No
Originated from RCC33.xls v3.1 on CD © 2006 TCC chg - R68

SPAN 3 LEFT CENTRE RIGHT

ACTIONS ßb 0.800 1.077 1.000
Be 2175 625
Total M kNm 328.5 319.9 92.8
Mt max kNm 614.5 176.6

MIDDLE STRIP Width mm 1875 1875 3425

M kNm 82.1 144.0 1.8
d mm 217.0 215.0 219.0
As mm²/m 489 865 6
As deflection mm²/m 489 1276
Provide H16 @ 400 T1 Provide H20 @ 225 B1 Provide H12 @ 325 T1
As prov mm²/m 503 1396 348
Top steel Provide H12 @ 325 T1
Deflection L/d = 7,500 /215.0 = 34.884 < 26.0 x 1.478 x 1.050 x 0.9 = 36.335 OK
(As increased by 47.5 % for deflection)
COLUMN STRIP Width mm 2175 2175 625
M kNm 246.4 176.0 92.8
d mm 217.0 215.0 217.0
As mm²/m 1294 912 1743
As deflection mm²/m 1294 1408
Provide H16 @ 100:200 T1 Provide H20 @ 200 B1 Provide H16 @ 100 T1
As prov mm²/m 1508 1571 2011
Top steel Provide H12 @ 325 T1
Deflection L/d = 7,500 /215.0 = 34.884 < 26.0 x 1.485 x 1.050 x 0.9 = 36.489 OK
(As increased by 54.4 % for deflection)
CHECKS % As ok ok ok
Singly reinforced ok ok ok
max S ok ok ok

69

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:69 17/07/2006 17:05:24

 RCC33 Flat Slabs (A & D)/ LEGEND!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made by Date Page
Location ECBP Typical Floor, from grids A to D rmw 11-Apr-06 70
53
FLAT SLAB ANALYSIS & DESIGN to BS 8110:2005 Checked Revision Job No
Originated from RCC33.xls v3.1 on CD © 2006 TCC chg - R68

Legend for Input Data

70

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:70 17/07/2006 17:05:26

 RCC33 Flat Slabs (A & D).xls

RCC33 Flat Slabs (A & D)/ WEIGHT!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made by Date Page
Location ECBP Typical Floor, from grids A to D rmw 11-Apr-06 71
54
FLAT SLAB ANALYSIS & DESIGN to BS 8110:2005 Checked Revision Job No
Originated from RCC33.xls v3.1 on CD © 2006 TCC chg - R68
No
WEIGHT of REINFORCEMENT Mid Strip Col Strip Type Dia Length Unit wt Weight
TOP STEEL Support 1 11 H 12 2350 0.888 22.9
8 H 16 2550 1.578 32.2
Span 1 6 H 12 4950 0.888 26.4
7 H 12 4950 0.888 30.8
Support 2 5 H 16 3750 1.578 29.6
17 H 16 3750 1.578 100.6
Span 2 6 H 12 4950 0.888 26.4
7 H 12 4950 0.888 30.8
Support 3 5 H 16 3750 1.578 29.6
17 H 16 3750 1.578 100.6
Span 3 6 H 12 4950 0.888 26.4
7 H 12 4950 0.888 30.8
Support 4 11 H 12 2350 0.888 22.9
8 H 16 2550 1.578 32.2

BTM STEEL Span 1 9 H 20 6875 2.466 152.6

11 H 20 7750 2.466 210.2
Span 2 5 H 20 6825 2.466 84.2
6 H 20 7650 2.466 113.2
Span 3 9 H 20 6875 2.466 152.6
11 H 20 7750 2.466 210.2

SUMMARY Rebar for single direction only. All figures approximate - see User Guide.
TOTAL REINFORCEMENT IN BAY (kg) 1465 REINFORCEMENT DENSITY (kg/m3) 63.6

71

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:71 17/07/2006 17:05:28

 RCC41 Continuous Beams (A & D).xls
The spreadsheet designs multiple-span rectangular or flanged
beams using sub-frame analysis to derive moments and shears.
SPANS!
The intention is to provide the design and analysis of up to six
This sheet designs reinforcement for bending in spans and
spans of continuous beams with columns above and below. Spans
supports and for shear in the spans.
may incorporate cantilevers, fixed ends or knife-edge supports.
There are three main sheets: MAIN!, ACTIONS! and SPANS!
User input is required for the diameters of bending and shear
reinforcement and for the number of legs of links in each span.
MAIN! Some intuition may be required to obtain sensible and rational
arrangements of reinforcement. In order to discourage the use of
second layers of reinforcement, the input cells for diameters of
This sheet contains user input of materials, frame geometry
reinforcement in second layers are nominally protected.
and load data. Input data is blue and underlined. New data may
be input by overwriting default values or by entering values in
Support moments (including cantilever moments) are considered
‘greyed-out’ cells. Guidance on input for the type of section and
at the face of the support. This may lead to unequal amounts of
type of end condition of the support is given under Operating
reinforcement being designed for each side of the support. See
Instructions.
Bar! Usually, the detailer would be expected to detail the larger
amounts of reinforcement; however where different sections
The sheet has been set up with as many ‘carry throughs’ as
occur either side of a support, the detailer should be briefed as to
possible, i.e. input cells are made equal to preceding input cells
the designer’s detailed requirements.
to make the inputting of regular beams easier. Inputting C18
as “= C17” will insert 8.00 in the remaining spans: it will also
Non-existent spans are blanked out.
remove the grey conditional background to the remaining spans,
supports and loads and allow data entry. Deleting C18, indeed
Besides the limit of maximum modification factor for deflection
C19, will blank out remaining spans, etc. Generally, values in red
= 2.0, an additional limit of maximum allowable area of steel
or red backgrounds indicate either incorrect or excess data. For
to comply with deflection criteria, Asdef, = 2 x Asreqd has been
instance, if knife-edge supports are required, entering ‘K’ in cell
imposed.
C25 will elicit red data to the right, which needs to be cleared
manually. Point loads should be at least 0.001m from a support.

Do not copy and paste input values as this can corrupt formatting
(“copy” and “Paste Special values” is OK).
‘Rebar layering’ refers to whether there are beams and therefore
reinforcement in the other direction. Answering yes drops by one
bar diameter the steel at the supports.
With respect to cantilevers, design for bending caters for
moments at the face of support; design for deflection considers
the cantilever from the centre line of support. N.B. root rotation
is not considered. In beam-to-beam situations the width of
support can be input as being very small to avoid under-design
in bending.
ACTIONS!
ACTIONS! Includes bending moment and shear force diagrams,
summaries of moments and shears and user input for amounts
of redistribution. Users should ensure that the amounts of
redistribution are always considered as there are no default
values.
WEIGHT!
This sheet estimates the weight of reinforcement in the beam
when designed according to normal curtailment rules as defined
in BS 8110. Workings are shown on the right hand side of the
sheet. The estimate may be printed out using File/print or the
print button on the normal toolbar. It should be recognised
that different engineers’ and detailers’ interpretations of these
clauses, and different project circumstances and requirements
will all have a bearing on actual quantities used.
Analysis!
This sheet shows the moment distributions used in the analysis
of the beam: it is not intended for formal printing. It will be seen
that the loads are considered initially as 1.0gk over all spans then
as (γgk - 1.0) + γqk qk over alternate spans.
Bar!
Intended mainly for first time users and young engineers, this
sheet gives further details of the calculations summarised in
SPAN! Support moments are considered at faces of supports;
checks at 1/4 span relate to hogging and any top steel required is
provided in the span.

72

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:72 17/07/2006 17:05:31

 RCC41 Continuous Beams (A & D).xls

Graf!
This sheet provides data for the charts in MAIN! and ACTIONS!:
it is not intended for formal printing.

Notes!
This sheet gives disclaimers and revision history.

73

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:73 17/07/2006 17:05:32

 RCC41 Continuous Beams (A & D)/ MAIN!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made by Date Sheet No
Location D&D: Main beam Grids C to H from grid 1 to 3 rmw 11-Apr-06 55
74
CONTINUOUS BEAM (Analysis & Design) to BS 8110:2005 Checked Revision Job No
Originated from RCC41.xls v3.0 on CD © 2006 TCC chg - R68

LOCATION Supports from grid 1 to grid 3

MATERIALS COVERS (to all steel)

fcu 40 N/mm² h agg 20 mm Top cover 25 mm
fyl 500 N/mm² γs 1.15 Btm cover 40 mm
fyv 500 N/mm² γc 1.50 Side cover 35 mm
steel class A
SPANS L (m) H (mm) bw (mm) hf (mm) Type bf (mm) LOADING PATTERN
SPAN 1 1.50 500 300 175 R 300 min max
SPAN 2 8.00 500 300 175 R 300 DEAD 1 1.4
SPAN 3 1.50 500 300 175 R 300 IMPOSED 0 1.6
SPAN 4 REBAR LAYERING
SPAN 5 Support steel
SPAN 6 in alt layer ? Y

SUPPORTS ABOVE (m) H (mm) B (mm) End Cond BELOW (m) H (mm) B (mm) End Cond
Support 1 C
Support 2 3.50 300 300 F 5.00 300 300 P
Support 3 3.50 300 300 F 4.00 300 300 P
Support 4 K
Support 5
Support 6
Support 7

LOADING UDLs (kN/m) PLs (kN) Position (m)

Dead Imposed Position Loaded Dead Imposed Position Loaded
Span 1 Load Load from left Length Span 4 Load Load from left Length
UDL 25.8 20.0 ~~~~~ ~~~~~ UDL ~~~~~
PL 1 ~~~~~ PL 1 ~~~~~
PL 2 ~~~~~ PL 2 ~~~~~
Part UDL Part UDL
Span 2 Span 5
UDL 25.8 20.0 ~~~~~ ~~~~~ UDL ~~~~~ ~~~~~
PL 1 ~~~~~ PL 1 ~~~~~
PL 2 ~~~~~ PL 2 ~~~~~
Part UDL Part UDL
Span 3 Span 6
UDL 25.8 20.0 ~~~~~ ~~~~~ UDL ~~~~~ ~~~~~
PL 1 25.0 1.50 ~~~~~ PL 1 ~~~~~
PL 2 ~~~~~ PL 2 ~~~~~
Part UDL Part UDL

LOADING DIAGRAM

1 3
REACTIONS (kN)
SUPPORT 1 2 3 4
ALL SPANS LOADED 0.0 362.6 543.9 -122.2 0.0 0.0 0.0
ODD SPANS LOADED 0.0 198.7 252.9 -5.9 0.0 0.0 0.0
EVEN SPANS LOADED 0.0 295.8 515.5 -163.9 0.0 0.0 0.0
Characteristic Dead 0.0 134.1 211.1 -36.4 0.0 0.0 0.0
Max characteristic Imposed 0.0 103.9 163.6 16.9 0.0 0.0 0.0
Min characteristic Imposed 0.0 32.1 11.0 -64.5 0.0 0.0 0.0

74

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:74 17/07/2006 17:05:32

 RCC41 Continuous Beams (A & D).xls

RCC41 Continuous Beams (A & D)/ ACTIONS!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made by Date Page
Location D&D: Main beam Grids C to H, from grid 1 to 3 rmw 11-Apr-06 75
56
CONTINUOUS BEAM (Analysis & Design) to BS 8110:2005 Checked Revision Job No
Originated from RCC41.xls v3.0 on CD © 2006 TCC chg - R68
BENDING MOMENT DIAGRAMS (kNm)

500 400

400 300

300 200

200 100

100 0
0 2 4 6 8 10 12
0 -100
0 2 4 6 8 10 12
-100 -200

-200 -300

-300 -400

1 Elastic Moments 3 1 Redistributed Envelope 3

SUPPORT No 1 2 3 4
Elastic M 0.0 215.7 390.5 0.0 ~ ~ kNm/m
Redistributed M 0.0 215.7 312.4 0.0 ~ ~ kNm/m
ßb 1.000 1.000 0.800 1.000 ~ ~ ~
Redistribution 20.0%

SPAN No 1 2 3
Elastic M 0.00 259.55 0.00 ~ ~ ~
Redistributed M 0.00 295.71 0.00 ~ ~ ~
ßb 1.000 1.139 0.700 ~ ~ ~
SHEARS (kN)

300 300

200 200

100 100

0 0

-100 -100

-200 -200

-300 -300

-400 -400
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 0 2 4 6 8 10 12

1 Elastic Shears 3 1 Redistributed Shears 3

SPAN No 1 2 3
Elastic V 0.0 102.2 251.8 297.6 264.2 -172.8
Redistributed V 0.0 102.2 260.4 287.8 259.4 -163.9

Elastic V ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~
Redistributed V ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~

COLUMN MOMENTS
(kNm) 1 2 3 4
ALL SPANS Above 91.2 -36.9
LOADED Below 47.9 -24.2
ODD SPANS Above 20.5 -11.8
LOADED Below 10.8 -7.7
EVEN SPANS Above 105.3 -39.1
LOADED Below 55.3 -25.7

75

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:75 17/07/2006 17:05:36

 RCC41 Continuous Beams (A & D)/ SPANS!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made by Date Page
Location D&D: Main beam Grids C to H, from grid 1 to 3 rmw 11-Apr-06 76
57
CONTINUOUS BEAM (Analysis & Design) to BS 8110:2005 Checked Revision Job No
Originated from RCC41.xls v3.0 on CD © 2006 TCC chg - R68

SPAN 1 LEFT CENTRE RIGHT

ACTIONS M kNm 0.0 62.1
ßb 1.00 1.00 1.00
DESIGN d mm 450.0 444.0 447.0
As mm² 0 336
As' mm²
TOP STEEL Layer 1 3 Y 10 3 Y 12 3 Y 12
Layer 2
As prov mm² 236 As' prov 339 As prov 339
BTM STEEL Layer 1 2 Y 10 2 Y 12 2 Y 20
Layer 2
As' prov mm² 157 As prov 226 As' prov 628
DEFLECTION L/d 3.356 Allowed 9.388
SHEAR V kN 30.7 Link Ø 61.5
v N/mm² 0.227 10 0.459
vc N/mm² 0.413 Nominal 0.468
LINKS H10 @ 325 for 650 H10 @ 325 H10 @ 325 for 975
legs No 2 2 2

CHECKS % As ok ok ok
Cover ok ok ok
min S ok ok ok
max S ok ok ok
Links ok ok ok
Main bars ok ok ok
max V ok ok
Deflection ok

SPAN 2 LEFT CENTRE RIGHT

ACTIONS M kNm 177.5 295.7 270.5
ßb 1.00 1.14 0.80
DESIGN d mm 427.5 434.0 417.0
As mm² 1061 1903 1807
As' mm²
TOP STEEL Layer 1 3 Y 25 2 Y 16 3 Y 32
Layer 2
As prov mm² 1473 As' prov 402 As prov 2413
BTM STEEL Layer 1 3 Y 20 3 Y 32 3 Y 20
Layer 2
As' prov mm² 942 As prov 2413 As' prov 942
DEFLECTION L/d 18.433 Allowed 25.145
SHEAR V kN 221.1 Link Ø 249.2
v N/mm² 1.724 10 1.992
vc N/mm² 0.614 Nominal 0.920
LINKS H10 @ 200 for 1800 H10 @ 325 H10 @ 200 for 1800
legs No 2 2 2

CHECKS % As ok ok ok
Cover ok ok ok
min S ok ok ok
max S ok ok ok
Links ok ok ok
Main bars ok ok ok
max V ok ok
Deflection ok

76

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:76 17/07/2006 17:05:38

 RCC41 Continuous Beams (A & D).xls

RCC41 Continuous Beams (A & D)/ SPANS!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made by Date Page
Location D&D: Main beam Grids C to H, from grid 1 to 3 rmw Apr-2006 77
58
CONTINUOUS BEAM (Analysis & Design) to BS 8110:2005 Checked Revision Job No
Originated from RCC41.xls v3.0 on CD © 2006 TCC chg - R68

SPAN 3 LEFT CENTRE RIGHT

ACTIONS M kNm 278.6 0.0 0.0
ßb 0.96 0.70 1.00
DESIGN d mm 417.0 444.0 450.0
As mm² 1876 0 0
As' mm²
TOP STEEL Layer 1 3 Y 32 3 Y 25 3 Y 10
Layer 2
As prov mm² 2413 As' prov 1473 As prov 236
BTM STEEL Layer 1 2 Y 10 2 Y 12 2 Y 10
Layer 2
As' prov mm² 157 As prov 226 As' prov 157
DEFLECTION 3.378 Allowed 66.003
SHEAR V kN 220.8 Link Ø V 194.6
v N/mm² 1.765 10 v 1.441
vc N/mm² 0.730 Nominal vc 0.325
LINKS H10 @ 200 for 1400 H10 @ 325 H10 @ 200 for 400
legs No 2 2 2

CHECKS % As ok ok ok
Cover ok ok ok
min S ok ok ok
max S ok ok ok
Links ok ok ok
Main bars ok ok ok
max V ok ok
Deflection ok

77

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:77 17/07/2006 17:05:41

 RCC41R Rigorous Continuous Beams (A & D).xls
The spreadsheet designs multiple-span rectangular or flanged
beams and estimates deflection to BS 8110 Parts 2. It uses sub-
frame analysis to derive moments and shears. For each span
and load case it calculates deflections at 1/20th spans. The
intention is to provide the design and analysis of up to six spans
of continuous beams with columns above and below. Spans may
incorporate cantilevers, fixed ends or knife-edge supports. There
are four main sheets: JOBDATA!, MAIN!, ACTIONS! and SPANS!
where the user is required to input data.
The spreadsheet is based on RCC41 but has an initial sheet
JOBDATA! to allow input of all the variables and performance
criteria required. The calculation of deflection is not carried
out automatically. The user is required to press the ‘Calculate
deflections’ button in column N of SPANS! (or elsewhere) when
every other aspect of the design has been completed. Deflections
are given as a range in a chart at the bottom of ACTIONS! They
are shown as a range due to potential pattern loading. In SPANS!
the worst case is compared with the specified serviceability
criteria.
It should be noted that the number of assumptions and
uncertainties in the material and design criteria and construction
process mean that deflection calculations carried out in
this manner can be notoriously inaccurate (and usually over
conservative) compared with actual measured deflections. The
calculated deflections might be regarded as being akin to 95%
confidence limits.
JOBDATA!
This sheet consists of the main inputs of material, loading,
construction and serviceability criteria pertaining to the
calculation of deflection to BS 8110 Part 2. Users are expected to
use their knowledge of the project and judgement in completing
this sheet. The default values given in this sheet are not unusual.
For creep reference is made to Eurocode 2 Annex B.
MAIN!
This sheet contains user input of frame geometry and load data.
Input data is blue and underlined. New data may be input by
overwriting default values or by entering values in ‘greyed-out’
cells. Guidance on input for the type of section and type of end
condition of the support is given under Operating Instructions.
Generally, values in red or red backgrounds indicate either
incorrect or excess data. For instance, if knife-edge supports are
required, entering ‘K’ in cell C18 will elicit red data to the right,
which needs to be cleared manually.
The sheet has not been set up with many ‘carry throughs’ (making
the value of one cell equal another).
78
EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:78
Users may choose to equate cells in their saved version to speed
input.
Do not copy and paste input values as this can corrupt formatting
(copy and ‘paste values only’ is OK).
‘Rebar layering’ refers to whether there are beams in the other
direction. Answering ‘yes’ drops by one bar diameter the steel at
the supports.
With respect to cantilevers, design for bending caters for
moments at the face of support; design for deflection considers
the cantilever from the centre line of support. N.B. root rotation
is not considered.
In beam-to-beam situations the width of support can be input as
being very small to avoid under-design in bending.
ACTIONS!
ACTIONS! Includes bending moment and shear force diagrams,
summaries of moments and shears and user input for amounts
of redistribution. Users should ensure that the amounts of
redistribution in row 22 are always considered - there are no
default or automated values. Cell L14 determines how the
redistribution is carried out (see Table 1 of this document).
The chart at the bottom of the page shows calculated deflections
at construction of partitions, and ranges for longer term
deflections due to patterns of permanent and imposed loading.
The worst case is taken in subsequent checks and this might be
viewed as being unduly conservative.
SPANS!
This sheet designs reinforcement for bending in spans and
supports, and for shear in the spans. User input is required for
reinforcement sizes – some intuition may be required to obtain
sensible arrangements of reinforcement. The amounts of bending
and shear reinforcement required and checks are derived from
detailed calculations in Bar! Support moments (including
cantilever moments) are considered at the face of the support.
This may lead to unequal amounts of reinforcement being
designed for each side of the support, see Bar! Non-existent
spans are blanked out.
Deflection calculations are controlled by clicking the ‘Calculate
Deflections’ button in column N and should be undertaken once
all the other design is complete. Deflection results will only appear
on this sheet after the ‘Calculate Deflections’ button has been
used and the macro been allowed to complete its iterations.
They will disappear if relevant data (e.g. span, load) is changed.
Should the span fail deflection criteria, the user has the option to
17/07/2006 17:05:43
 RCC41R Rigorous Continuous Beams (A & D).xls

increase bottom steel at cell M21 etc, and reuse the ‘Calculate
Deflection’ button Hogging moments at are checked 1/4 span
Graf!
This sheet provides data for the charts in MAIN! and ACTIONS!:
positions within a span and are used to determine the top steel
it is not intended for formal printing.
in spans.

WEIGHT! Notes!
This sheet gives disclaimers and revision history.
This sheet estimates the weight of reinforcement in the beam
when designed according to normal curtailment rules as defined
in BS 8110. Workings are shown on the right hand side of the
sheet. The estimate may be printed out using File/print or the
print button on the normal toolbar. It should be recognised
that different engineers’ and detailers’ interpretations of these
clauses, and different project circumstances and requirements
will all have a bearing on actual quantities used.

Uls!
This sheet details the moment distribution analysis carried out
at the ultimate limit state but is not necessarily intended for
printing out other than for checking purposes. It will be seen that
the loads are considered initially as 1.0gk over all spans then as
(γgk - 1.0)gk + γgk qk on alternately odd and even spans.

Sls!
This sheet details the analysis carried out at the serviceability
limit state at 1/20th points along each span. The results are used
in Def!. This sheet is not necessarily intended for printing out
other than for checking purposes.

Bar!
Intended mainly for first time users and young engineers, this
sheet gives further details of the calculations summarised in
SPAN! Support moments are considered at faces of supports;
checks at 1/4 span relate to hogging and any top steel required is
provided in the span.

Def!
This sheet calculates deflections at 1/20th points for each span
and for each load condition. For each point and condition it
considers moment, As, As’, d, d’, uncracked neutral axis depth -
x, uncracked inertia - I, cracked neutral axis depth - x, cracked
inertia – I, uncracked moment capacity – Mcr, z, final x, concrete
stresses – fc, moment of resistance – MoR, curvature -1/r, load,
slope and curvature, etc. to calculate deflection. The sheet is
rather large and is not necessarily intended for printing out other
than for checking purposes.

79

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:79 17/07/2006 17:05:44

 RCC41R Rigorous Continuous Beams (A & D)/ JOBDATA!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made by Date Page
Location D&D: Main Beam from grid C to H rmw 11-Apr-06 55
80

RIGOROUS CONTINUOUS BEAMS to BS 8110:2005 Checked Revision Job No

Originated from RCC41R.xls v3.0 on CD © 2006 TCC chg - R68

LOCATION Supports from grid C to grid H

MATERIALS COVERS (to links)

fcu 35 N/mm² h agg 20 mm Top cover 25 mm
fyl 500 N/mm² γs 1.15 Btm cover 30 mm
fyv 500 N/mm² γc 1.50 Side cover 30 mm
steel class A Concrete density 24 kN/m³
SERVICEABILITY CRITERIA Maximum permanent ∆ = L / 250 3.3.3 (Pt 2)
Maximum imposed ∆ = L / 500
Max ∆ affecting partitions/walls = L / 350 or 20 mm
Maximum precamber = 50% of permanent ∆
Permanent portion of imposed loading = 25%
Design Crack width, W k = 0.3 mm 2.2.3.4.2

CREEP COEFFICIENTS (to EN 1992-1)

RH 50 % relative humidity fcm = 36 N/mm² Table 3.1
Cement N Type (S, N, R or RS) Ecm = 32.937 kN/mm² & Annex A

AMBIENT TEMPERATURES ºC from 0 to 7 days from 7 to 60 days from 60 days on

16 18 18

LOADING SEQUENCE (loads rationalised to kN/m)

Span 1 Span 2 Span 3 Span 4 Span 5 Span 6 At age
kN/m kN/m kN/m kN/m kN/m kN/m Days
Self weight 16.80 16.80 16.80 16.80 0.00 0.00 7
Partitions/walls 5.00 5.00 5.00 5.00 5.00 5.00 28
Other dead loads 11.20 12.40 17.40 11.20 #DIV/0! #DIV/0! 60
Permanent imposed 3.75 3.75 4.38 3.75 #DIV/0! #DIV/0! 28
Variable load 11.25 11.25 13.13 11.25 #DIV/0! #DIV/0! ∞
Total 48.00 49.20 56.70 48.00 #DIV/0! #DIV/0! 123.00

COMPOSITE E and φ VALUES - Span 1

At 70 years At 70 years At 28 days
Et Et Et
Ø0 Ø0 Ø (t,t0)
kN/mm² kN/mm² kN/mm²
Self weight 3.52 7.28 3.52 7.28 1.37 13.91
Partitions/walls 2.68 8.96 2.68 8.96 0 32.94
Other dead loads 2.31 9.96 2.31 9.96 1.05 16.04
Permanent imposed 2.68 8.96 2.68 8.96 At partition
Variable load 0 32.94 loading
Composite 2.95 8.34 2.26 10.11
Permanent load Total load

80

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:80 17/07/2006 17:05:45

 RCC41R Rigorous Continuous Beams (A & D).xls

RCC41R Rigorous Continuous Beams (A & D)/ MAIN!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made by Date Sheet No
Location D&D: Main Beam, from grid C to H rmw 11-Jul-06 81
56
RIGOROUS CONTINUOUS BEAMS to BS 8110:2005 Checked Revision Job No
Originated from RCC41R.xls v3.0 on CD © 2006 TCC chg - R68

Bay width 5000 mm

SPANS L (m) H (mm) bw (mm) hf (mm) Type bf (mm) LOADING PATTERN
SPAN 1 6.000 375 300 125 T 1140 min max
SPAN 2 6.000 375 300 125 T 960 DEAD 1 1.4
SPAN 3 6.000 375 300 125 T 1020 IMPOSED 0 1.6
SPAN 4 6.000 375 300 125 T 1080 REBAR LAYERING
SPAN 5 Support steel
SPAN 6 in alt layer ? N

SUPPORTS ABOVE (m) H (mm) B (mm) End Cond BELOW (m) H (mm) B (mm) End Cond
Support 1 3.750 250 250 F 3.75 250 250 F
Support 2 3.750 250 250 F 3.750 250 250 F
Support 3 3.750 250 250 F 3.750 250 250 F
Support 4 3.750 250 250 F 3.750 250 250 F
Support 5 3.750 250 250 F 3.750 250 250 F
Support 6
Support 7

LOADING DIAGRAM

C H
LOADING UDLs (kN/m) PLs (kN) Position (m)
Dead Imposed Position Loaded Dead Imposed Position Loaded
Span 1 Load Load from left Length Span 4 Load Load from left Length
UDL 33.0 15.0 ~~~~~ ~~~~~ UDL 33.0 15.0 ~~~~~
PL 1 ~~~~~ PL 1 ~~~~~
PL 2 ~~~~~ PL 2 ~~~~~
Part UDL Part UDL
Span 2 Span 5
UDL 34.2 15.0 ~~~~~ ~~~~~ UDL ~~~~~ ~~~~~
PL 1 ~~~~~ PL 1 ~~~~~
PL 2 ~~~~~ PL 2 ~~~~~
Part UDL Part UDL
Span 3 Span 6
UDL 34.2 15.0 ~~~~~ ~~~~~ UDL ~~~~~ ~~~~~
PL 1 30.0 15.0 2.50 ~~~~~ PL 1 ~~~~~
PL 2 ~~~~~ PL 2 ~~~~~
Part UDL Part UDL

REACTIONS (kN)
SUPPORT 1 2 3 4 5
ALL SPANS LOADED 186.7 448.2 472.4 481.3 182.4
ODD SPANS LOADED 188.4 338.1 348.8 381.9 64.5
EVEN SPANS LOADED 69.2 350.5 321.4 360.1 184.5
Characteristic Dead 84.7 216.6 219.3 233.3 82.5
Characteristic Imposed 45.0 95.5 97.1 99.1 42.8

81

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:81 17/07/2006 17:05:48

 RCC41R Rigorous Continuous Beams (A & D)/ ACTIONS!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made by Date Page
Location D&D: Main Beam, from grid C to H rmw 11-Apr-06 57
82
RIGOROUS CONTINUOUS BEAMS to BS 8110:2005 Checked Revision Job No
Originated from RCC41R.xls v3.0 on CD © 2006 TCC chg - R68
BENDING MOMENT DIAGRAMS (kNm)

400 300
300 200
200
100
100
0
0
-100
-100
-200 -200
-300 -300

C Elastic Moments H C Redistributed Envelope H

SUPPORT No 1 2 3 4 5
Elastic M 81.8 252.7 240.2 278.1 79.8 ~ kNm/m
Redistributed M 81.8 214.8 240.2 236.4 79.8 ~ kNm/m
ßb 1.000 0.850 1.000 0.850 1.000 ~ ~
Redistribution 15.0% 15.0%

SPAN No 1 2 3 4
Elastic M 179.26 135.23 194.44 173.40 ~ ~
Redistributed M 176.94 127.14 192.72 169.71 ~ ~
ßb 0.987 0.940 0.991 0.979 ~ ~
SHEARS (kN)
400 400
200 200
0 0
-200 -200
-400 -400

C Elastic Shears H C Redistributed Shears H

SPAN No 1 2 3
Elastic V 191.4 240.8 219.0 214.1 249.6 249.0
Redistributed V 188.4 234.5 221.7 217.6 254.8 248.4

SPAN No 4
Elastic V 245.7 188.5 ~ ~ ~ ~
Redistributed V 238.8 184.5 ~ ~ ~ ~

COLUMN MOMENTS 1 2 3 4 5
ALL SPANS Above 35.6 -8.3 6.8 1.3 -33.6 kNm
LOADED Below 35.6 -8.3 6.8 1.3 -33.6 kNm
ODD SPANS Above 40.9 -23.5 24.5 -17.7 -9.6 kNm
LOADED Below 40.9 -23.5 24.5 -17.7 -9.6 kNm
EVEN SPANS Above 11.5 11.5 -14.7 19.6 -39.9 kNm
LOADED Below 11.5 11.5 -14.7 19.6 -39.9 kNm

82

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:82 17/07/2006 17:05:51

 RCC41R Rigorous Continuous Beams (A & D).xls

RCC41R Rigorous Continuous Beams (A & D)/ SPANS!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made by Date Page
Location D&D: Main Beam, from grid C to H rmw 11-Apr-06 83
58
RIGOROUS CONTINUOUS BEAMS to BS 8110:2005 Checked Revision Job No
Originated from RCC41R.xls v3.0 on CD © 2006 TCC chg - R68

SPAN 1 LEFT CENTRE RIGHT

ACTIONS M kNm 58.8 176.9 186.2
ßb 1.00 0.99 0.85
DESIGN d mm 332.0 322.5 327.5
As mm² 433 1328 1623
As' mm² 0 0 201
TOP STEEL Layer 1 3 H 16 2 H 16 4 H 25
Layer 2 0 0 0
As prov mm² 603 As' prov 402 As prov 1963
BTM STEEL Layer 1 3 H 16 4 H 25 3 H 16
Layer 2 0 0 0
As' prov mm² 603 As prov 1963 As' prov 603
DEFLECTION Permanent = 16.34 < 24.00 Imposed = 4.88 < 12.00 Precamber (mm) = 0
mm Affecting partitions = 15.07 < 17.14 ok Increase btm As by 20%
SHEAR V kN 156.3 Link Ø 202.8
v N/mm² 1.570 10 2.064
vc N/mm² 0.497 Nominal 0.743
LINKS H10 @ 200 for 1400 H10 @ 225 H10 @ 150 for 1650
legs No 2 2 2

CHECKS % As ok ok ok
Cover ok ok ok
min S ok ok ok
Links ok ok ok
Main bars ok ok ok
max V ok ok
Crack width ok 0.163 ok 0.003 ok 0.228

SPAN 2 LEFT CENTRE RIGHT

ACTIONS M kNm 188.6 127.1 200.0
ßb 0.91 0.94 1.00
DESIGN d mm 327.5 325.0 327.5
As mm² 1694 947 1787
As' mm² 113 0 210
TOP STEEL Layer 1 4 H 25 2 H 16 4 H 25
Layer 2 0 0 0
As prov mm² 1963 As' prov 402 As prov 1963
BTM STEEL Layer 1 2 H 16 4 H 20 2 H 16
Layer 2 0 0 0
As' prov mm² 402 As prov 1257 As' prov 402
DEFLECTION Permanent = 18.83 < 24.00 Imposed = 0.00 < 12.00 Precamber (mm) = 0
mm Affecting partitions = 22.15 > 17.14 FAILS Increase btm As by 0%
SHEAR V kN 189.2 Link Ø 185.1
v N/mm² 1.926 10 1.884
vc N/mm² 0.743 Nominal 0.743
LINKS H10 @ 175 for 1400 H10 @ 225 H10 @ 175 for 1400
legs No 2 2 2

CHECKS % As ok ok ok
Cover ok ok ok
min S ok ok ok
Links ok ok ok
Main bars ok ok ok
max V ok ok
Crack width ok 0.235 ok -0.134 ok 0.218

83

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:83 17/07/2006 17:05:54

 RCC41R Rigorous Continuous Beams (A & D)/ SPANS!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made by Date Page
Location D&D: Main Beam, from grid C to H rmw Apr-2006 59
84
RIGOROUS CONTINUOUS BEAMS to BS 8110:2005 Checked Revision Job No
Originated from RCC41R.xls v3.0 on CD © 2006 TCC chg - R68

SPAN 3 LEFT CENTRE RIGHT

ACTIONS M kNm 208.9 192.7 206.6
ßb 1.00 0.99 0.86
DESIGN d mm 327.5 322.5 327.5
As mm² 1860 1447 1799
As' mm² 286 0 357
TOP STEEL Layer 1 4 H 25 2 H 16 4 H 25
Layer 2 0 0 0
As prov mm² 1963 As' prov 402 As prov 1963
BTM STEEL Layer 1 3 H 16 3 H 25 3 H 16
Layer 2 0 0 0
As' prov mm² 603 As prov 1473 As' prov 603
DEFLECTION Permanent = 13.00 < 24.00 Imposed = 5.77 < 12.00 Precamber (mm) = 0
mm Affecting partitions = 15.56 < 17.14 ok Increase btm As by 0%
SHEAR V kN 222.2 Link Ø V 215.8
v N/mm² 2.262 10 v 2.197
vc N/mm² 0.743 Nominal vc 0.743
LINKS H10 @ 125 for 1875 H10 @ 225 H10 @ 150 for 1800
legs No 2 2 2

CHECKS % As ok ok ok
Cover ok ok ok
min S ok ok ok
Links ok ok ok
Main bars ok ok ok
max V ok ok
Crack width ok 0.233 ok 0.300 ok 0.266

SPAN 4 LEFT CENTRE RIGHT

ACTIONS M kNm 209.9 169.7 57.3
ßb 0.85 0.98 1.00
DESIGN d mm 327.5 325.0 332.0
As mm² 1819 1264 421
As' mm² 403 0 0
TOP STEEL Layer 1 4 H 25 3 H 16 3 H 16
Layer 2 0 0 0 0
As prov mm² 1963 As' prov 603 As prov 603
BTM STEEL Layer 1 3 H 16 4 H 20 2 H 16
Layer 2 0 0 99 H 0
As' prov mm² 603 As prov 1257 As' prov 402
DEFLECTION Permanent = 18.39 < 24.00 Imposed = 5.62 < 12.00 Precamber (mm) = 0
mm Affecting partitions = 16.28 < 17.14 ok Increase btm As by 0%
SHEAR V kN 207.0 Link Ø 152.4
v N/mm² 2.107 10 1.530
vc N/mm² 0.743 Nominal 0.497
LINKS H10 @ 150 for 1800 H10 @ 225 H10 @ 200 for 1400
legs No 2 2 2

CHECKS % As ok ok ok
Cover ok ok ok
min S ok ok ok
Links ok ok ok
Main bars ok MORE THAN 2 LAYERS ok
max V ok ok
Crack width ok 0.117 ok 0.288 ok 0.301

84

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:84 17/07/2006 17:05:56

 RCC42 Post-tensioned Slabs & Beams (A & D).xls
RCC42 Post-tensioned Slabs & Beams (A & D).xls
This spreadsheet designs post-tensioned slab and beam
elements in accordance with BS 8110: Part 1, 1997. In essence the
spreadsheet checks a number of parameters: stresses at transfer,
stresses in service, moments of resistance at ULS, shear, vibration,
deflection, neutral axis depth, and reinforcement service stress.
These checks are shown in SUMMARY!
The spreadsheet is set out in several sheets.
■ MAT DATA! Defines load cases, various options and material
properties.
■ SUMMARY! Summarises the design, analysis, checks and
outputs from the rest of the spreadsheet.
■ DETAILS! Shows the workings for the moment distribution
for the various load cases, profiles, prestress losses and checks
in some detail.
■ DEFLECT! Shows workings for deflection at 1/20 points
along each span.
■ Graf! Provides the data for the graphs, and values generated
are used for checking.
Users are referred to CS TR43 Post-tensioned concrete floors
– Design Handbook(14), and Post-tensioned concrete floors(16) for
further details of methods and values used.
A maximum of three spans may be considered. Cantilevers are
not available. Shortening is calculated in the losses section, but is
not used to modify column moments. The effects of restraint to
both columns and prestress in the member must be considered.
The spreadsheet considers one direction at a time only.
The nub of this spreadsheet is page two of SUMMARY! The source
of any failures or missing information (e.g. no tendons or no
tendon height specified) will become apparent in SUMMARY ii.
It is suggested that users may wish to create a second window of
this part of the spreadsheet (Window/ New Window/ Arrange).
MATDATA!
The first sheet includes all the general and material input data
used in the subsequent sheets. Load combinations and load
factors are defined. The input under Options should be self-
explanatory. The choices have implications on the design as
shown below.
■ Stressing ends determines where prestressing losses occur
■ Prestressing system – Specifying unbonded or bonded changes
prestress loss calculations. Prestress losses tend to be higher
with bonded tendons as wobble factors and coefficients of
friction are higher but using several strands in a single duct
can lead to overall economy, especially in more heavily loaded
beams. Bonded systems tend to require less conventional
reinforcement.
EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:85
■ Commonly 70% to 75% is taken for initial estimates for
jacking force/ final force. This quantity is calculated at Details
N68:N69 and has to be re-specified in Details! line 68 to be
within 5% of that calculated.
■ With respect to allowable flexural tensile stresses in prestressed
beams (and slabs), BS 8110: Part 1, defines three classes (see
Clause 4.3.4.3). These classes determine the limits of tensile
stress. For example see BS 8110: Part 1, Clause 4.1.3, which also
allows 5.0 N/mm2 tensile strength for C40 concrete. For Class
3, which is generally used for internal environments, cracking
is allowed either up to 0.1 mm or, more usually, to 0.2 mm.
■ Slab or Beam varies shear requirements and determines
whether nominal top bonded reinforcement is included in
the spans or not. Nominal top steel is included in mid-span
of beams. If slabs are specified, the user may choose to use
nominal top steel to overcome hogging moments in the
spans. Invoking the nominal bonded reinforcement in mid-
span should overcome most problems with hogging in, say,
dissimilar spans of slabs. Slabs requires a second input; type of
slab alters parameters used in checking vibration.
■ Normal curtailment rules for conventional reinforcement
are not necessarily satisfactory for post-tensioned slabs and
beams. Nonetheless the spreadsheet assumes that curtailment
occurs at 0.3 x span.
With regard to concrete, the usual minimum strength used in
prestressing is 40 N/mm2 . The minimum allowable strength at
transfer (i.e. when the tendons are initially stressed), fci, is 25 N/
mm2 .. Ambient temperatures during curing may be taken as 15oC
for a UK summer, but otherwise may be dependent upon curing/
insulation regimes. Typically, long-term Relative Humidity may
be taken as 45% indoors, or 85% outdoors for the UK. Other
data used in the determination of various concrete factors, e.g.
determination of creep factors, is shown on the right hand side of
the sheet. These factors are case specific and have been derived
from the best available data for the various parameters shown.
The formulae for calculating creep factors and free shrinkage
strain are from C&CA paper TDH 2391(17 ), and use the following
factors.
■ Kb is a factor depending on the composition of the concrete,
■ Kc is an environmental factor,
■ Kd is a maturity factor,
■ Ke is an effective member thickness factor, and
■ Kt covers the development of the deferred deformation with
time.
Factors used in the derivation of material data are given to the
right hand side of the sheet.
85
17/07/2006 17:05:59
 Details of strand used in the UK are given at the bottom of the
sheet. Users should ensure that their chosen strand is readily
available. Post-tensioned concrete floors(16) gives typical values
for µ (coefficient of friction), K (wobble factors), Rel% (relaxation)
and draw-in (mm) in Tables 2.6 and 7.1.
It is usually assumed that working loads are applied at a concrete
age of 60 days (user input). The quasi-permanent imposed load
should be assessed from the ψ 2 factor in EC2, which is usually
20% of imposed load for dwellings, 30% for offices and stores,
and 60% for parking. (One never takes 100%, as y2 adjusts for
the very different f (creep) values. Hence 30% is appropriate for
a more or less permanently loaded structures: the high value for
parking is to compensate for long-term dynamic effects.)

Factors used in the derivation of material data

Assume Final prestress + dead +

BS 8110 Table 4.2

30 3.8 0 4.9736
40 5 0 0
50 5.8 5.8 0
1.271 1.267 1.258 1.249 1.245 1.235 1.225 1.210 1.195 1.185 1.170 1.160 1.145 1.110
Maturity Curve 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
0 0.8 1 1.5 2 2.5 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 13
0.8 0.2 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 3
30 0 2.6 4.5 7.9 10.3 12.2 13.7 16.2 18 19.5 20.6 21.7 22.6 23.2 25.2
40 0 5.2 7.8 12.2 15.5 18.1 20.1 23.2 25.5 27.3 29 30.4 31.3 32.2 34.5
50 0 11.4 12.7 18.1 22.2 25.1 27.3 31.1 33.7 35.8 37.8 39.2 40.3 41.3 43.9
60 0 13.7 15.2 21.7 26.6 30.1 32.8 37.3 40.4 43 45.4 47 48.4 49.6 52.7
60 0 13.7 15.2 21.7 26.6 30.1 32.8 37.3 40.4 43 45.4 47 48.4 49.6 52.7
60 0 13.7 15.2 21.7 26.6 30.1 32.8 37.3 40.4 43 45.4 47 48.4 49.6 52.7
60 0 13.7 15.2 21.7 26.6 30.1 32.8 37.3 40.4 43 45.4 47 48.4 49.6 52.7

Longterm fcu inf Et inf

67.2 34.30

EARLY STRENGTH LATE STRENGTH

1 4 0.8 5.8 40 60 0 100
60 37.3 40.4 3.1 39.78 60 64.8 67.2 2.4 64.80

Kc = Relative Humidity factor

30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80 85 90 95 100
3.2 3.13 3.05 2.95 2.85 2.77 2.65 2.5 2.3 2.13 1.9 1.7 1.5 1.25 1
50 55 2.85 2.77 0.08 0 2.850

Kd = Ambient factor
30 90 210 420 840 2700 5400 10800
60 120 210 420 1860 2700 5400
1.8 1.6 1.4 1.2 1 0.75 0.65 0.5
120 120 1.6 1.4 0.2 30 1.550
1500 1860 1 0.75 0.25 660 0.911 1.000

Kb = Cement Content & W/C Ratio factor

0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8
200 0.5 0.8 1.02 1.28
300 0.7 0.9 1.17 1.48 1.82
400 0.83 1.17 1.63 2.1 2.55
500 0.97 1.45 2 2.55 3.1 0.5
300 0.7 0.9 1.17 1.48 1.82 0.981
400 0.83 1.17 1.63 2.1 2.55 1.308
0.739 0.981 1.308 1.666 2.039 0.327 1.145

Ke = Effective Thickness factor 406.5 406.5 #DIV/0!

0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500
10 1.2 1 0.94 0.85 0.795 0.75 0.733 0.72 0.709 0.7
Span 1 400 450 0.72 0.709 0.011 6.5 0.719
Span 2 400 450 0.72 0.709 0.011 6.5 0.719
Span 3 #DIV/0! #DIV/0! #DIV/0! #DIV/0! #DIV/0! #DIV/0! #DIV/0!

εc = Free Shrinkage Strain

40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80 85 90 95 100
420 405 380 360 330 305 275 243 205 162 115 58.5 0
50 55 380 360 20 0 380

Ke factor for Shrinkage

0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500
10 1.3 1.05 0.907 0.8 0.71 0.65 0.587 0.55 0.513 0.5
Span 1 400 450 0.55 0.513 0.037 6.5 0.548
Span 2 400 450 0.55 0.513 0.037 6.5 0.548
Span 3 #DIV/0! #DIV/0! #DIV/0! #DIV/0! #DIV/0! #DIV/0! #DIV/0!

Ultimate Shrinkage Strain - Bending Kt

0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1 0.93143
% 0.26 0.26 0.26 0.26 0.26 0.26 0.26 0.26 0.26 0.26 0.26
Kp 0.9418 0.9418 0.9418 0.9418 0.9418 0.9418 0.9418 0.9418 0.9418 0.9418 0.9418
εcs 208.9 208.9 208.9 208.9 208.9 208.9 208.9 208.9 208.9 208.9 208.9 microstrain
m 20.3909 Ec 28 32 Ø 2.3462 Ec 9.56309 Ks = 23.75

Ultimate Shrinkage Strain - Prestress

Span 1 Span 2 Span 3
% 0.3 0.3 0.3
Kp 0.9335 0.9335 0.9335
εcs 207.1 207.1 #DIV/0!

86

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:86 17/07/2006 17:06:01

 RCC42 Post-tensioned Slabs & Beams (A & D).xls

Loads are characteristic and are for the whole bay width (not
SUMMARY! expressed as kN/m2 – unless a 1 m bay width is being analysed).
The self-weight is a user input. The construction load is intended
The first page (top part of the sheet entitled SUMMARY!) shows
to be that required to be applied during transfer (usually 1.5
input for the sub-frame analysis, i.e. dimensions and loads.
kN/m2 ). However, designers should consider the load history of
the slab to ensure worst cases are checked, e.g. temporary loads
Input should be fairly self explanatory. It should be noted that H
while casting floors above. Bay widths in the normal direction
is in the plane of the screen and b, bw etc. at right angles to the
do not affect the loading unless, of course, the user chooses to
plane of the screen. Several warnings are given under Operating
introduce a suitable relationship (in the loads input).
Instructions and with conditional formatting should data be
incorrect.
The current configuration being designed is shown in a chart.
This gives a scale representation of the spans, supports, loads
Supports can be made to be knife-edge by inputting K in column
and an idealised cross section of each member. Charts also show
D: remote ends of columns can be either F for fixed, or P for
representations of the tendon profiles and equivalent loads used
pinned. The line can be left blank. A support width (h below) can
in the analysis. For the tendons, a reversed parabolic profile is
be used in conjunction with a ‘K’ support so that design moments
used but minimum lengths of straight tendon are used at the
are used at the support face.
supports as recommended by Khan(16) . Service equivalent loads
are shown: those at transfer may be viewed at DETAILS!B361:
Data under ‘Normal Direction’ is used for the vibration checks.
N372.
The number of bays affects possible modes of vibration, which is
checked in accordance with CS TR43(14) . The vibration response
The next page (SUMMARY! B67:M79) is the nub of the
factors calculated are accordance with Steel Construction
spreadsheet: it has a number of key inputs and out-puts. These
Institute(18) and Concrete Society guidelines. Vibration should
include inputs of PI / Pj (initial force/ jacking force), Pf / Pj (final
not be a problem in post-tensioned slabs and beams. Normally,
force/ jacking force), number and height of tendons, and amounts
vibration response factors of 12 are used for very busy offices, 8 for
of conventional reinforcement (some of the inputs are necessary
normal offices, or 4 for high specification offices or laboratories
to avoid circular arguments).
where vibration is critical.
With regard to Tendons the spreadsheet automatically calculates
Designers should be aware that the 2005 version of CS TR43-
the number of tendons for each span using an algorithm. The
Appendix G gives revised recommendations on vibration.
algorithm uses either the maximum of the median stress levels,

Extract from SUMMARY!

SUMMARY ii: Tendons & bonded reinforcement

(a) TENDONS Pj = 130 kN Pf/Pi = 90.0% Pf/Pj = 80.0% kN
No of STRANDS Supt 1 Span 1 Supt 2 Span 2 Supt 3 Span 3 Supt 4
Recommended 24 24 24 26 26 26 0 0 0
Use 24 24 24 24 24 24 0 0 0
Recommend'd height 295 40 485 40 295 0
Height mm 300 40 480 480 40 300 300 0
Length Straight mm 150 150 150 0 0 0
x to max Sag mm 5311 7006 0
Pi kN 2769 2763 2760 2760 2763 2769 0 0 0
Balance Load kN 278.4 371.8 354.7 261.5 0.0 0.0
Pf kN 2521 2515 2513 2513 2515 2521 0 0 0
Balance Load kN 253.4 338.5 322.9 238.1 0.0 0.0

CHECKS 'EFFICIENCY' a 52%

Tendons (a) OK b(C) 47%
Stresses at transfer (b) OK
b(T) 59%
Stresses in service (c) OK
ULS MOR (d) OK
c(C) 53%
Shear (e) OK c(T) 81%
Vibration (f) OK d 94%
Deflection (g) OK e 36%
Neutral axis depth OK
f 8%
Rebar stress OK
g 28%
GLOBAL STATUS VALID DESIGN 0% 42% 83% 125%

87

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:87 17/07/2006 17:06:03

 or the maximum permitted. The spreadsheet calculates the
minimum number of strands required so that permissible concrete
DETAILS!
tensions are not exceeded at either the initial or final stage. Thus
Over nine pages, DETAILS! shows detailed calculations regarding
the numbers of tendons are then shown as recommended values,
section properties, distribution factors, moment distribution
and the user can override them if required. Once the number of
used for the sub-frame analysis, profiling constants, pre-stressing
tendons for each span has been fixed, the program attempts to
losses, balanced loads, ULS moment and shear checks, and finally
find an optimum single level of initial prestress for all strands (this
vibration.
often appears to be the maximum permissible). If the minimum
force required generates excessive compressive stresses, the
section is deemed to have failed.
DEFLECT!
Tendons are assumed to be level through supports and follow a
The deflection sheet gives details of calculations dealing with
parabolic profile between. The points of inflection are taken to be
defections.
at 1/10 of the clear span points.

Besides number of tendons, the main user control is to adjust the

value of Pf / Pj. This adjusts the number of tendons. One would
TYPICALC!
rarely need to adjust tendon heights.
This sheet is intended to illustrate typical calculations for a
particular point in a span in order to show how all the criteria
The checks carried out are listed below.
are satisfied. The sheet illustrates the transfer and service stress
checks and the calculation of Moment of Resistance carried out
■ Tendons (a) in tabular form in Graf! The point chosen is at 1/4 span and is
■ Stresses at transfer (b) highlighted in Graf!
■ Stresses in service (c)
■ ULS MOR (d)
Graf!
■ Shear (e)
■ Vibration (f) Graf! provides the data for the charts of the configuration and
loads, tendon profile, equivalent loads, ULS moments and
■ Deflection (g)
capacities, shear envelopes, deflections, stresses at transfer
■ Neutral axis depth and stresses in service within SUMMARY! Each chart is plotted
■ Rebar stress at 1/20 points along each span. Many values within Graf! are
used and checked for being minima or maxima for the various
In the spreadsheet, those that are unsatisfactory are highlighted criteria. For instance it may be here that problems with hogging
and directions are given for further information. moments are found.

There are also two charts. The ‘efficiency’ chart gives the user
an idea of how hard the section is working or how far it is out. Notes!
The second chart, ultimate limit state moment envelope and
moments of resistance (capacity), should be used in conjunction This sheet gives disclaimers and revision history.
with choosing amounts of bonded reinforcement.

The third page (SUMMARY! B125:M171) shows stresses at transfer

and in service in both tabular and chart form. It should be noted
that, in keeping with current practice, moments are considered
at the face of columns. Thus peak moments are not necessarily
at column centrelines and moments might be different each side
of an internal column.

The convention used in the stress charts is:

■ Red squares – tension, blue circles – compression

■ Solid markers – bottom, hollow markers – top
■ Dotted lines – permissible stresses

The fourth page (SUMMARY iv) gives details of shear envelopes,

vibration and deflection together with support reactions and
column moments.

88

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:88 17/07/2006 17:06:07

 RCC42 Post-tensioned Slabs & Beams (A & D).xls

RCC42 Post-tensioned Slabs & Beams (A & D)/ MATDATA!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made by Date Page
Location Level 2 - Beam on Grid 7 RMW 11-Apr-2006 89
70
POST-TENSIONED ANALYSIS & DESIGN to BS 8110:2005 Checked Revision Job No
Originated from RCC42.xls v3.0 on CD © 2006 TCC chg - R68

POST-TENSIONED ANALYSIS & DESIGN to BS 8110:2005 - GENERAL DATA

LOAD COMBINATIONS NOTES

SLS 1 Initial prestress + OW + construction load on all spans INPUT IS UNDERLINED.
INITIAL SLS 2 Initial prestress + OW + construction load on odd spans FRAMES ARE ASSUMED TO
SLS 3 Initial prestress + OW + construction load on even spans BE BRACED
SLS 4 Final prestress + dead + imposed load on all spans
FINAL SLS 5 Final prestress + dead + imposed load on odd spans
SLS 6 Final prestress + dead + imposed load on even spans
ULS 1 Final prestress + factored dead and imposed load on all spans
ULTIMATE ULS 2 Final prestress + factored dead + factored imposed load on odd spans
ULS 3 Final prestress + factored dead + factored imposed load on even spans
DEFLECTION SLS 7 Final prestress + dead + 30% imposed load on odd spans

LOAD FACTORS min max VIBRATION

DEAD 1 1.4 Limiting reponse factor = 8
IMPOSED 0 1.6

OPTIONS Stressing Ends B (L, R, B) Prestress system U (U, B) Assume 20% max redistribution
Jacking F/strength 0.7 BS 8110 Class 3 (Clause 4.1.3) .
Slab or beam B (B or S) Limiting crack width 0.2 mm .
In slabs, nominal top bonded reinforcement in span? Y (Y or N; use Y for dissimilar spans)
Slab type S (S)olid, (R)ibbed or (W)affle, supported by beam Damping, ζ (2% to 8%) 5%

MATERIALS CONCRETE fcu = 60 Ec28 = 32 σc = 19.80 σt = 5.80 unmodified

At days 4.80 fci = 39.78 Eci = 25.53 σic = 15.91 σit = 4.97 unmodified
Cement content 330 W/C ratio 0.55 OPC or RHPC ? OPC .
Ave ambient during curing = 15ºC Longterm R/H % 50 γm = 1.50

STRAND fpu = 1860 Ap, mm² = 100 µ = 0.140 K = 0.0010

Ep = 195 Rel % = 2 Draw in= 6 Depth to strand centre = 40

REBAR fy = 500 COVERS Top Bottom Sides

γm = 1.15 to links 25 25 25

LOADING SEQUENCE Permanent loads for Ø assessment 30% of Imposed is permanent

Load @ Age fcut Et Ø Ec
kN/m² days N/mm² kN/mm² Creep kN/mm²
Own weight 13.81 4.80 39.78 25.53 3.64 5.51
Applied dead 42.00 60 64.80 33.54 2.14 10.69
Quasi-Permanent Imposed 9.60 -=-
COMBINED 65.41 - - 30.80 2.45 8.92

NOTES on MATERIALS

BRITISH LOW RELAXATION STRAND

Type Dia Area Breaking Weight RELAXATION at 0.7fpu
Standard 15.2 139 1670 1.090 Ambient ºC 20 40 60 80 100
12.5 93 1770 0.730 Relaxation 1.8 3.5 5.1 7.5 10.7
Super 15.7 150 1770 1.180
12.9 100 1860 0.785
Compact 15.2 165 1820 1.295
12.7 112 1860 0.890

89

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:89 17/07/2006 17:06:08

 RCC42 Post-tensioned Slabs & Beams (A & D)/ SUMMARY! i

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made by Date Page
Location Level 2 - Beam on Grid 7 RMW 11-Apr-2006 71
90
POST-TENSIONED ANALYSIS & DESIGN to BS 8110:2005 Checked Revision Job No
Originated from RCC42.xls v3.0 on CD © 2006 TCC chg - R68
SUMMARY I : Dimensions and Loads
NORMAL DIRECTION
SPANS Lm H mm bw mm hf mm Section bf mm No Bays BAY WIDTH m
SPAN 1 12.000 525 1800 200 T 3000 5 6.000
SPAN 2 12.500 525 1800 200 T 3000 5 6.000
SPAN 3

SUPPORTS ABOVE m H mm B mm End Cond BELOW m H mm B mm End Cond

SUPPORT 1 4.000 300 600 F
SUPPORT 2 4.000 300 600 F
SUPPORT 3 K
SUPPORT 4

CONFIGURATION BEAM supporting Solid Slab to BS8110 Class 3 (0.2 mm crack width), fcu = 60, Stressed from Both Ends

LOADING UDLs~kN/m (char), PLs~kN (char), Position~m

Applied Imposed Position Loaded Applied Imposed Position Loaded
SPAN 1 OW Dead Load from left Length SPAN 3 OW Dead Load from left Length
UDL 13.81 42.00 32.00 ~~~~~ ~~~~~ UDL ~~~~~ ~~~~~
PL 1 ~~~~~ PL 1 ~~~~~
PL 2 ~~~~~ PL 2 ~~~~~
Part UDL Part UDL
Construction ~~~~~ ~~~~~ 18.00 ~~~~~ ~~~~~ C'strction ~~~~ ~~~~ ~~~~~ ~~~~~
SPAN 2
UDL 13.81 42.00 32.00 ~~~~~ ~~~~~
PL 1 ~~~~~
PL 2 ~~~~~ GLOBAL STATUS
Part UDL VALID DESIGN
Construction ~~~~~ ~~~~~ 18.00 ~~~~~ ~~~~~

TENDON PROFILE (heights to strand centre: see heights specified under TENDONS below)

480

300 300

40 43

EQUIVALENT LOADS in service

400 322 kN/m 294 kN/m

241 kN/m
300 190 kN/m
200
100 0 kN/m
-62 kN/m -56 kN/m
0
-100
-200

90

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:90 17/07/2006 17:06:11

 RCC42 Post-tensioned Slabs & Beams (A & D).xls

RCC42 Post-tensioned Slabs & Beams (A & D)/ SUMMARY! ii

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made by Date Page
Location Level 2 - Beam on Grid 7 RMW 11-Apr-2006 91
72
POST-TENSIONED ANALYSIS & DESIGN to BS 8110:2005 Checked Revision Job No
Originated from RCC42.xls v3.0 on CD © 2006 TCC chg - R68
SUMMARY ii: Tendons & bonded reinforcement
(a) TENDONS Pj = 130 kN Pf/Pi = 90.0% Pf/Pj = 80.0% kN
No of STRANDS Supt 1 Span 1 Supt 2 Span 2 Supt 3 Span 3 Supt 4
Recommended 24 24 24 26 26 26 0 0 0
Use 24 24 24 24 24 24 0 0 0
Recommend'd height 295 40 485 40 295 0
Height mm 300 40 480 480 40 300 300 0
Length Straight mm 150 150 150 0 0 0
x to max Sag mm 5311 7006 0
Pi kN 2769 2763 2760 2760 2763 2769 0 0 0
Balance Load kN 278.4 371.8 354.7 261.5 0.0 0.0
Pf kN 2521 2515 2513 2513 2515 2521 0 0 0
Balance Load kN 253.4 338.5 322.9 238.1 0.0 0.0

CHECKS 'EFFICIENCY' a 52%

Tendons (a) OK b(C) 47%
Stresses at transfer (b) OK
b(T) 59%
Stresses in service (c) OK
ULS MOR (d) OK
c(C) 53%
Shear (e) OK c(T) 81%
Vibration (f) OK d 94%
Deflection (g) OK e 36%
Neutral axis depth OK
f 8%
Rebar stress OK
g 28%
GLOBAL STATUS VALID DESIGN 0% 42% 83% 125%

REINFORCEMENT Input bonded rebar arrangement (Support bars cutailed at 0.3L)

Supt 1 Span 1 Supt 2 Span 2 Supt 3 Span 3 Supt 4
Main bar Ø 16 20 20 12 20 20 16
No 20 20 20 20 20 20 20
% 0.426% 0.665% 0.665% 0.239% 0.665% 0.000% 0.000%
Link Ø = 10
No of legs 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8

(d) ULS MOMENTS With bonded reinforcement

Supt 1 Span 1 Supt 2 Span 2 Supt 3 Span 3 Supt 4
Mu 42.2 1523.2 1529.6 1500.1 1766.0 11.5 0.0 0.0 0.0
MOR 1477.2 2611.6 2440.3 2440.3 1883.9 1843.1 0.0 0.0 0.0

ULS MOMENT ENVELOPE/MOR

3000

2000

1000

-1000

-2000

-3000

91

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:91 17/07/2006 17:06:14

 RCC42 Post-tensioned Slabs & Beams (A & D)/ SUMMARY! iii

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made by Date Page
Location Level 2 - Beam on Grid 7 RMW 11-Apr-2006 73
92
POST-TENSIONED ANALYSIS & DESIGN to BS 8110:2005 Checked Revision Job No
Originated from RCC42.xls v3.0 on CD © 2006 TCC chg - R68
SUMMARY iii STRESSES
(b) STRESSES at TRANSFER

Supt 1 Span 1 Supt 2 Span 2 Supt 3 Span 3 Supt 4

Tendon height 286.8 41.8 462.3 462.4 41.9 285.2 0.0 0.0 0.0
Pi 2768.6 2762.8 2760.3 2760.3 2762.9 2768.6 0.0 0.0 0.0
Max Compression 3.14 7.50 6.28 6.09 7.52 2.92 0.00 0.00 0.00
Max Tension 0.00 -1.69 -2.76 -2.51 -1.70 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00

STRESSES AT TRANSFER
25

20

15

10

0
Com-Top Com-Btm Ten-Btm x 4 Ten-Top x 4 Com Limit Ten Limit x 4 Col centres

(c) STRESSES in SERVICE

Supt 1 Span 1 Supt 2 Span 2 Supt 3 Span 3 Supt 4

Tendon height 286.8 40.5 462.3 462.4 40.7 285.2 0.0 0.0 0.0
Pf 2520.6 2515.5 2512.8 2512.8 2515.7 2520.6 0.0 0.0 0.0
Max Compression 3.55 5.54 10.44 10.56 6.79 4.07 0.00 0.00 0.00
Max Tension 0.00 -2.28 -4.35 -4.44 -3.88 -0.38 0.00 0.00 0.00

STRESSES IN SERVICE
30

25

20

15

10

0
Com-Top Com-Btm Ten-Btm x 4 Ten-Top x 4 Com Limit Ten Limit x 4 Col centres

92

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:92 17/07/2006 17:06:17

 RCC42 Post-tensioned Slabs & Beams (A & D).xls

RCC42 Post-tensioned Slabs & Beams (A & D)/ SUMMARY! iv

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made by Date Page
Location Level 2 - Beam on Grid 7 RMW 11-Apr-2006 93
74
POST-TENSIONED ANALYSIS & DESIGN to BS 8110:2005 Checked Revision Job No
Originated from RCC42.xls v3.0 on CD © 2006 TCC chg - R68
SUMMARY iv
(e) SHEAR Link Ø = 10
Span 1 Span 2 Span 3
Left Right Left Right Left Right
V 636.2 881.9 919.1 678.1 0.0 0.0
cracked? N Y Y N N N
Vc 1629.0 733.0 753.3 1629.0 0.0 0.0
No of legs 8 8 8 8 8 8
Link spacing 375 375 375 375 0 0

ULS SHEAR ENVELOPE

1500
1000 938.5
650.6
500
0 0.0
-500
-678.1
-1000 -901.3

-1500

(f) VIBRATION Span 1 Span 2 Span 3

Response factor 0.60 0.61 0.00
OK OK OK

(g) DEFLECTION

MAX DEFLECTIONS
15
10
5 7.97
6.88
0
-5 0.0
0.00
-10
-8.4
-15
-13.7
-20 Transfer Final Col centres Zero axis

Span 1 = 8.6mm < 48 OK Span 2 = 14mm < 50 OK

- -

SUPPORT REACTIONS Supt 1 Supt 2 Supt 3 Supt 4

ULS 4 650.6 1839.8 678.1 0.0 kN
ULS 5 655.6 1361.7 232.2 0.0 kN
ULS 6 199.2 1409.0 678.1 0.0 kN
DEAD 274.6 803.5 289.2 0.0 kN
IMPOSED 147.0 484.4 152.6 0.0 kN

COLUMN MOMENTS Supt 1 Supt 2 Supt 3 Supt 4

ULS 4 Above 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 kNm
Below 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 kNm
ULS 5 Above 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 kNm
Below 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 kNm
ULS 6 Above 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 kNm
Below 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 kNm

93

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:93 17/07/2006 17:06:19

 RCC42 Post-tensioned Slabs & Beams (A & D)/ TYPICALC!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made by Date Page
Location Level 2 - Beam on Grid 7 RMW 11-Apr-06 75
94
POST-TENSIONED ANALYSIS & DESIGN to BS 8110:2005 Checked Revision Job No
Originated from RCC42.xls v3.0 on CD © 2006 TCC chg - R68

TYPICAL CALCULATION BS 8110

for Span 1 at 3.60 m from C/L of LH support Reference
Class 3 Tee section, h = 525 mm, bw = 1800 mm hf = 200 mm, bf =3000 mm.
Ac = 1185000mm2, Z top = 120.0E6 mm³, and Z bottom = 93.3E6 mm³
Tendons are unbonded, Ap = 100mm2, fpu = 1,860 N/mm2 and 75.9 mm from soffite
There are 24 tendons, jacked to 1,302 N/mm² or 70.0% fpu
Prestress losses at this section are -2,504.4 kN at transfer and -2,256.6 kN longterm

(b) Stresses at transfer 4.3.5

M = 395.0 kNm hogging, and prestressing force = 2,764.8 kN
Max compression (bottom) = M/Z + P/A = 395.0E3 / 93.3 + 2,764.8 / 1185 = 6.57 N/mm²
< 15.91 N/mm² allowed
Max tension (bottom) = M/Z - P/A = -159.0E3 / 93.3 - 2,764.8 / 1185 = 0.96 N/mm²
< 4.66 N/mm² allowed
(c) Stresses in service 4.3.4
M = 397.1 kNm sagging, and prestressing force = 2,517.0 kN
Max compression (top) = 397.12E6 / 120.0E6 + 2,517.0E3 / 1185E3 = 5.43 N/mm²
< 20.00 N/mm² allowed
Max tension (bottom) = 397.12 / 93.3 - 2,517.0 / 1185 = 2.13 N/mm²
< 5.49 N/mm² allowed
(d) MOR at ultimate limit state 4.3.7
M = 1,383.7 kNm sagging, and prestressing force = 2,517.0 kN
fpe = 1000 x 2,517.0 / 24 / 100 = 1,048.8 N/mm²
Reinforcement d = 480 mm
Rp = 1860 x 100 x 24 / 60 / 3000 / (525 - 75.86) = 0.055
fpe/fpu = 1,048.8 / 1860 x 1.15 = 0.648
Lte = 12,250 mm
fpb (unbonded)
= 1,048.8 + 7000 x (525 - 75.86) / 12,250 (1 - 1.7 x 0.055) = 1,281.3 N/mm² Eq 52
Tendon force = 1,281.3 x 24 x 100 / 1000 = 3,075.2 kN
Rebar force = 500 / 1.15 x 6,283 / 1000 = 2,731.8 kN
Total tensile force = 3,075.2 + 2,731.8 = 5,807.0 kN
Compression block depth, dn = 1000 / 5,807.0 / 0.45 / 60 / 3000 = 71.69 mm
MOR = (3,075.2 ( 525 - 75.9 - 71.69 / 2) + 2,731.8 x (480 - 71.69 / 2)) / 1000 Eq 51
= 2,484.3 kNm > 1,383.7 ok

94

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:94 17/07/2006 17:06:22

 RCC42 Post-tensioned Slabs & Beams (A & D).xls

RCC42 Post-tensioned Slabs & Beams (A & D)/ DETAILS!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made by Date Page
Location Level 2 - Beam on Grid 7 RMW 11-Apr-2006 95
76
POST-TENSIONED ANALYSIS & DESIGN to BS 8110:2005 Checked Revision Job No
Originated from RCC42.xls v3.0 on CD © 2006 TCC chg - R68
DETAILED CALCULATIONS
SECTION PROPERTIES
Supt 1 Span 1 Supt 2 Span 2 Supt 3 0 0
Flange area, Af 240000 240000 0
Web area, Aw 945000 945000 0
Total area, Ac 1E+06 1E+06 0
Flange Yf 100 100 0
Web Yw 262.5 262.5 0
Σ = Ac.Yt 3E+08 3E+08 0
Yt 229.59 229.59 0.00
Yb 295.41 295.41 0.00
If 5E+09 5E+09 0
Iw 2E+10 2E+10 0
Σ = Ixx 3E+10 3E+10 0
Zt 1E+08 1E+08 0
Zb 9E+07 9E+07 0
em 4.59 255.41 184.59 184.59 255.41 4.59 300.00 0.00 #VALUE!
St 1.045 -1.521 2.822 2.822 -1.521 1.045 0.000 0.000 0.000
Sb 0.942 4.244 -1.345 -1.345 4.244 0.942 0.000 0.000 0.000

DISTRIBUTION FACTORS
SUPT 1 SUPT 2 SUPT 3 SUPT 4
Up col Lo col R L Up col Lo col R L Up col Lo col R L Up col Lo col
I 0 1.4E+09 2.8E+10 2.8E+10 0 1.4E+09 2.8E+10 2.8E+10 0 0 0 0 0 0
Stiffness 0 3.4E+08 2.3E+09 2.3E+09 0 3.4E+08 2.2E+09 2.2E+09 0 0 0 0 0 0
Sum 2.6E+09 4.8E+09 2.2E+09 0
Factor 0.0000 0.1281 0.8719 0.4746 0.0000 0.0697 0.4556 1.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 1.0000 0.0000 0.0000

Partial UDL factors

1 2 3
a 0 0 0
b 0 0 0

FIXED END MOMENTS

OWN SPAN 1 SPAN 2 SPAN 3 APPLIED DEAD SPAN 1 SPAN 2 SPAN 3
WEIGHT L R L R L R L R L R L R
Cant 994.0 1078.6 0.0 Cant 3024.0 3281.3 0.0
UDL 165.7 165.7 179.8 179.8 0.0 0.0 UDL 504.0 504.0 546.9 546.9 0.0 0.0
PL 1 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 #DIV/0! #DIV/0! PL 1 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 #DIV/0! #DIV/0!
PL 2 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 #DIV/0! #DIV/0! PL 2 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 #DIV/0! #DIV/0!
part UDL 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 part UDL 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
FEM 165.7 165.7 179.8 179.8 0.0 0.0 FEM 504.0 504.0 546.9 546.9 0.0 0.0
IMPOSED CONSTRUCTION
Cant 2304.0 2500.0 0.0 Cant 1296.0 1406.3 0.0
UDL 384.0 384.0 416.7 416.7 0.0 0.0 UDL 216.0 216.0 234.4 234.4 0.0 0.0
PL 1 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 #DIV/0! #DIV/0! FEM 216.0 216.0 234.4 234.4 0.0 0.0
PL 2 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 #DIV/0! #DIV/0!
part UDL 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
FEM 384.0 384.0 416.7 416.7 0.0 0.0

MOMENT DISTRIBUTION
HiCol SUPT 1 LoCol HiCol SUPT 2 LoCol HiCol SUPT 3 LoCol HiCol SUPT 4 LoCol
OWN -165.7 165.7 0.0 0.0
WEIGHT 0.0 144.4 21.2 0.0 -78.6 -75.5 -11.6 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
ODD -39.3 72.2 0.0 -37.7 0.0 0.0
SPANS 0.0 34.3 5.0 0.0 -34.3 -32.9 -5.0 0.0 37.7 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
-17.1 17.1 18.9 -16.5 0.0 0.0
0.0 14.9 2.2 0.0 -17.1 -16.4 -2.5 0.0 16.5 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
-8.5 7.5 8.2 -8.2 0.0 0.0
0.0 7.5 1.1 0.0 -7.5 -7.2 -1.1 0.0 8.2 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
-3.7 3.7 4.1 -3.6 0.0 0.0
0.0 3.2 0.5 0.0 -3.7 -3.6 -0.5 0.0 3.6 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
-1.9 1.6 1.8 -1.8 0.0 0.0
0.0 1.6 0.2 0.0 -1.6 -1.6 -0.2 0.0 1.8 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
-0.8 0.8 0.9 -0.8 0.0 0.0
0.0 0.7 0.1 0.0 -0.8 -0.8 -0.1 0.0 0.8 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
Σ 0.0 -30.4 30.4 0.0 125.1 -104.0 -21.1 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

95

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:95 17/07/2006 17:06:24

 RCC42 Post-tensioned Slabs & Beams (A & D)/ DETAILS!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made by Date Page
Location Level 2 - Beam on Grid 7 RMW 11-Apr-2006 96
77
POST-TENSIONED ANALYSIS & DESIGN to BS 8110:2005 Checked Revision Job No
Originated from RCC42.xls v3.0 on CD © 2006 TCC chg - R68
DETAILED CALCULATIONS ii
HiCol SUPT 1 LoCol HiCol SUPT 2 LoCol HiCol SUPT 3 LoCol HiCol SUPT 4 LoCol
OWN -179.8 179.8
WEIGHT 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 85.3 81.9 12.5 0.0 -179.8 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
EVEN 42.7 0.0 -89.9 41.0 0.0 0.0
SPANS 0.0 -37.2 -5.5 0.0 42.7 41.0 6.3 0.0 -41.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
21.3 -18.6 -20.5 20.5 0.0 0.0
0.0 -18.6 -2.7 0.0 18.5 17.8 2.7 0.0 -20.5 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
9.3 -9.3 -10.2 8.9 0.0 0.0
0.0 -8.1 -1.2 0.0 9.3 8.9 1.4 0.0 -8.9 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
4.6 -4.0 -4.5 4.5 0.0 0.0
0.0 -4.0 -0.6 0.0 4.0 3.9 0.6 0.0 -4.5 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
2.0 -2.0 -2.2 1.9 0.0 0.0
0.0 -1.8 -0.3 0.0 2.0 1.9 0.3 0.0 -1.9 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
1.0 -0.9 -1.0 1.0 0.0 0.0
0.0 -0.9 -0.1 0.0 0.9 0.8 0.1 0.0 -1.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
Σ 0.0 10.4 -10.4 0.0 127.9 -151.8 23.9 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
IMPOSED -384.0 384.0 0.0 0.0
ODD 0.0 334.8 49.2 0.0 -182.3 -175.0 -26.8 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
SPANS -91.1 167.4 0.0 -87.5 0.0 0.0
0.0 79.5 11.7 0.0 -79.5 -76.3 -11.7 0.0 87.5 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
-39.7 39.7 43.7 -38.1 0.0 0.0
0.0 34.6 5.1 0.0 -39.6 -38.0 -5.8 0.0 38.1 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
-19.8 17.3 19.1 -19.0 0.0 0.0
0.0 17.3 2.5 0.0 -17.3 -16.6 -2.5 0.0 19.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
-8.6 8.6 9.5 -8.3 0.0 0.0
0.0 7.5 1.1 0.0 -8.6 -8.3 -1.3 0.0 8.3 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
-4.3 3.8 4.1 -4.1 0.0 0.0
0.0 3.8 0.6 0.0 -3.8 -3.6 -0.6 0.0 4.1 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
-1.9 1.9 2.1 -1.8 0.0 0.0
0.0 1.6 0.2 0.0 -1.9 -1.8 -0.3 0.0 1.8 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
Σ 0.0 -70.4 70.4 0.0 289.9 -241.0 -48.9 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
IMPOSED -416.7 416.7 0.0
EVEN 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 197.8 189.8 29.1 0.0 -416.7 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
SPANS 98.9 0.0 -208.3 94.9 0.0 0.0
0.0 -86.2 -12.7 0.0 98.9 94.9 14.5 0.0 -94.9 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
49.4 -43.1 -47.5 47.5 0.0 0.0
0.0 -43.1 -6.3 0.0 43.0 41.3 6.3 0.0 -47.5 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
21.5 -21.6 -23.7 20.6 0.0 0.0
0.0 -18.7 -2.8 0.0 21.5 20.6 3.2 0.0 -20.6 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
10.7 -9.4 -10.3 10.3 0.0 0.0
0.0 -9.4 -1.4 0.0 9.3 9.0 1.4 0.0 -10.3 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
4.7 -4.7 -5.2 4.5 0.0 0.0
0.0 -4.1 -0.6 0.0 4.7 4.5 0.7 0.0 -4.5 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
2.3 -2.0 -2.2 2.2 0.0 0.0
0.0 -2.0 -0.3 0.0 2.0 1.9 0.3 0.0 -2.2 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
Σ 0.0 24.0 -24.0 0.0 296.4 -351.8 55.4 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
APPLID -504.0 504.0 0.0 0.0
DEAD 0.0 439.4 64.6 0.0 -239.2 -229.6 -35.2 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
ODD -119.6 219.7 0.0 -114.8 0.0 0.0
SPANS 0.0 104.3 15.3 0.0 -104.3 -100.1 -15.3 0.0 114.8 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
-52.1 52.1 57.4 -50.1 0.0 0.0
0.0 45.5 6.7 0.0 -52.0 -49.9 -7.6 0.0 50.1 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
-26.0 22.7 25.0 -25.0 0.0 0.0
0.0 22.7 3.3 0.0 -22.7 -21.8 -3.3 0.0 25.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
-11.3 11.3 12.5 -10.9 0.0 0.0
0.0 9.9 1.5 0.0 -11.3 -10.8 -1.7 0.0 10.9 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
-5.7 4.9 5.4 -5.4 0.0 0.0
0.0 4.9 0.7 0.0 -4.9 -4.7 -0.7 0.0 5.4 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
-2.5 2.5 2.7 -2.4 0.0 0.0
0.0 2.1 0.3 0.0 -2.5 -2.4 -0.4 0.0 2.4 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
Σ 0.0 -92.4 92.4 0.0 380.5 -316.3 -64.2 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

96

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:96 17/07/2006 17:06:27

 RCC42 Post-tensioned Slabs & Beams (A & D).xls

RCC42 Post-tensioned Slabs & Beams (A & D)/ DETAILS!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made by Date Page
Location Level 2 - Beam on Grid 7 RMW 11-Apr-2006 97
78
POST-TENSIONED ANALYSIS & DESIGN to BS 8110:2005 Checked Revision Job No
Originated from RCC42.xls v3.0 on CD © 2006 TCC chg - R68
DETAILED CALCULATIONS iii
HiCol SUPT 1 LoCol HiCol SUPT 2 LoCol HiCol SUPT 3 LoCol HiCol SUPT 4 LoCol
APPLID -546.9 546.9 0.0
DEAD 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 259.6 249.2 38.1 0.0 -546.9 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
EVEN 129.8 0.0 -273.4 124.6 0.0 0.0
SPANS 0.0 -113.2 -16.6 0.0 129.8 124.6 19.1 0.0 -124.6 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
64.9 -56.6 -62.3 62.3 0.0 0.0
0.0 -56.6 -8.3 0.0 56.4 54.2 8.3 0.0 -62.3 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
28.2 -28.3 -31.1 27.1 0.0 0.0
0.0 -24.6 -3.6 0.0 28.2 27.1 4.1 0.0 -27.1 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
14.1 -12.3 -13.5 13.5 0.0 0.0
0.0 -12.3 -1.8 0.0 12.3 11.8 1.8 0.0 -13.5 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
6.1 -6.1 -6.8 5.9 0.0 0.0
0.0 -5.3 -0.8 0.0 6.1 5.9 0.9 0.0 -5.9 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
3.1 -2.7 -2.9 2.9 0.0 0.0
0.0 -2.7 -0.4 0.0 2.7 2.6 0.4 0.0 -2.9 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
Σ 0.0 31.5 -31.5 0.0 389.0 -461.8 72.7 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
CONSTRUCTION ODD SPANS

-216.0 216.0 0.0 0.0

0.0 188.3 27.7 0.0 -102.5 -98.4 -15.1 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
-51.3 94.2 0.0 -49.2 0.0 0.0
0.0 44.7 6.6 0.0 -44.7 -42.9 -6.6 0.0 49.2 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
-22.3 22.3 24.6 -21.5 0.0 0.0
0.0 19.5 2.9 0.0 -22.3 -21.4 -3.3 0.0 21.5 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
-11.1 9.7 10.7 -10.7 0.0 0.0
0.0 9.7 1.4 0.0 -9.7 -9.3 -1.4 0.0 10.7 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
-4.9 4.9 5.3 -4.7 0.0 0.0
0.0 4.2 0.6 0.0 -4.8 -4.6 -0.7 0.0 4.7 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
-2.4 2.1 2.3 -2.3 0.0 0.0
0.0 2.1 0.3 0.0 -2.1 -2.0 -0.3 0.0 2.3 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
-1.1 1.1 1.2 -1.0 0.0 0.0
0.0 0.9 0.1 0.0 -1.1 -1.0 -0.2 0.0 1.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
Σ 0.0 -39.6 39.6 0.0 163.1 -135.6 -27.5 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
CONSTRUCTION: EVEN SPANS

-234.4 234.4
0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 111.2 106.8 16.3 0.0 -234.4 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
55.6 0.0 -117.2 53.4 0.0 0.0
0.0 -48.5 -7.1 0.0 55.6 53.4 8.2 0.0 -53.4 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
27.8 -24.2 -26.7 26.7 0.0 0.0
0.0 -24.2 -3.6 0.0 24.2 23.2 3.6 0.0 -26.7 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
12.1 -12.1 -13.3 11.6 0.0 0.0
0.0 -10.5 -1.5 0.0 12.1 11.6 1.8 0.0 -11.6 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
6.0 -5.3 -5.8 5.8 0.0 0.0
0.0 -5.3 -0.8 0.0 5.3 5.0 0.8 0.0 -5.8 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
2.6 -2.6 -2.9 2.5 0.0 0.0
0.0 -2.3 -0.3 0.0 2.6 2.5 0.4 0.0 -2.5 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
1.3 -1.1 -1.3 1.3 0.0 0.0
0.0 -1.1 -0.2 0.0 1.1 1.1 0.2 0.0 -1.3 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
Σ 0.0 13.5 -13.5 0.0 166.7 -197.9 31.2 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

ELASTIC SUPPORT MOMENTS BEFORE EQUIVALENT LOADING (3.2.1.2.2)

SUPT 1 SUPT 2 SUPT 3 SUPT 4
LEFT RIGHT LEFT RIGHT
SLS 1 46.1 582.8 589.2 0.0 0.0 0.0
SLS 2 59.6 416.0 391.3 0.0 0.0 0.0
SLS 3 6.5 419.7 453.7 0.0 0.0 0.0
SLS 4 127.2 1608.8 1626.7 0.0 0.0 0.0
SLS 5 151.3 1312.4 1274.8 0.0 0.0 0.0
SLS 6 56.8 1318.9 1385.7 0.0 0.0 0.0
SLS 7 102.0 1109.4 1139.4 0.0 0.0 0.0 102 1109
ULS 1 187.4 2369.6 2395.9 0.0 0.0 0.0 Min load 1.0 x dead
ULS 2 242.6 1688.5 1587.5 0.0 0.0 0.0 Max load 0.4 x dead + 1.6 x imposed (Table 2.1)
ULS 3 25.7 1703.5 1842.2 0.0 0.0 0.0

REDISTRIBUTION 20% (3.2.2.1)

ßb - 80% ßb + 110%
Max M 194.1 1916.7 0.0 0.0
ULS 1 194.1 1916.7 1916.7 0.0 0.0 0.0
ULS 2 194.1 1857.4 1746.3 0.0 0.0 0.0
ULS 3 28.2 1873.9 1916.7 0.0 0.0 0.0

97

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:97 17/07/2006 17:06:30

 RCC42 Post-tensioned Slabs & Beams (A & D)/ DETAILS!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made by Date Page
Location Level 2 - Beam on Grid 7 RMW 11-Apr-2006 98
79
POST-TENSIONED ANALYSIS & DESIGN to BS 8110:2005 Checked Revision Job No
Originated from RCC42.xls v3.0 on CD © 2006 TCC chg - R68
DETAILED CALCULATIONS iv
TOTAL LOADS
Span 1 Span 2 0
UDL PL1 PL2 part UD UDL PL1 PL2 part UD UDL PL1 PL2 part UD
SLS 1 381.7 0.0 0.0 0.0 397.6 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
SLS 2 381.7 0.0 0.0 0.0 172.6 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
SLS 3 165.7 0.0 0.0 0.0 397.6 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
SLS 4 1053.7 0.0 0.0 0.0 1097.6 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
SLS 5 1053.7 0.0 0.0 0.0 697.6 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
SLS 6 669.7 0.0 0.0 0.0 1097.6 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
SLS 7 784.9 0.0 0.0 0.0 817.6 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
ULS 1 1551.9 0.0 0.0 0.0 1616.6 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
ULS 2 1551.9 0.0 0.0 0.0 697.6 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
ULS 3 669.7 0.0 0.0 0.0 1616.6 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

SUPPORT SHEARS BEFORE EQUIVALENT LOADING

Span 1 Span 2 Span 3
SLS 1 146.1 235.6 245.9 151.6 0.0 0.0
SLS 2 161.1 220.5 117.6 55.0 0.0 0.0
SLS 3 48.4 117.3 235.1 162.5 0.0 0.0
SLS 4 403.4 650.3 678.9 418.7 0.0 0.0
SLS 5 430.1 623.6 450.8 246.8 0.0 0.0
SLS 6 229.7 440.0 659.6 437.9 0.0 0.0
SLS 7 308.5 476.4 499.9 317.6 0.0 0.0
ULS 1 632.4 919.5 961.6 655.0 0.0 0.0
ULS 2 637.4 914.6 488.5 209.1 0.0 0.0
ULS 3 181.0 488.6 961.6 655.0 0.0 0.0

SLS SPAN MOMENT BEFORE EQUIVALENT LOADING

SPAN 1 Left < > PL1 < > PL2 < > Right Loadings 0 0
Elastic V SLS 3 48.4 0 48.4 0 48.4 100 117.3 13.81 0.00 0.00 0.00
SLS 5 430.1 0 430.1 0 430.1 100 623.6 87.81 0.00 0.00 0.00
X bar SLS 3 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 3.506 12
SLS 5 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 4.898 MAX
Span M SLS 3 6.5 -6.5 -6.5 -6.5 -6.5 78.4 419.7 78.4
SLS 5 151.3 -151.3 -151.3 -151.3 -151.3 902.0 1312.4 902.0 at 4.898
SPAN 2 0 0
Elastic V SLS 2 117.6 0 117.6 0 117.6 100 55.0 13.81 0.00 0.00 0.00
SLS 6 659.6 0 659.6 0 659.6 100 437.9 87.81 0.00 0.00 0.00
X bar SLS 2 0.000 0 0.000 0 8.518 12.5
SLS 6 0.000 0 0.000 0 7.512 MAX
Span M SLS 2 391.3 -391.3 -391.3 -391.3 -391.3 109.5 0.0 109.5
SLS 6 1385.7 -1385.7 -1385.7 -1385.7 -1385.7 1092.1 0.0 1092.1 at 7.512
SPAN 3 0 0
Elastic V SLS 3 0.0 100 0.0 100 0.0 100 0.0 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
SLS 5 0.0 100 0.0 100 0.0 100 0.0 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
X bar SLS 3 0.000 0 0.000 0 0.000 0
SLS 5 0.000 0 0.000 0 0.000 MAX
Span M SLS 3 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
SLS 5 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 at 0.000

TENDONS (a) Breaking load = 186.0 Assume 104.2 kN max per strand
Supt 1 Span 1 Supt 2 Span 2 Supt 3 0 0
Pfmin 0 1181.3 1980.2 2217.7 1750.2 -6164.2 0.0 0.0 0 2217.7 min 0
Pfmax 16289.9 4209.4 7334.2 7244.9 4293.3 16234.7 0.0 0.0 0.0 4209.4 max
MIN 1980.2 2217.7 0.0
MAX 4209.4 OK 4293.3 OK 0.0 OK 104.2 Pf per strand
Recomm'ed Number 24 26 1 0.225
Actual Number 24 24 0 Max(MIN):Min(MAX) = 0.517
Recomm'ed heights 40 40 0 Margin OK

98

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:98 17/07/2006 17:06:33

 RCC42 Post-tensioned Slabs & Beams (A & D).xls

RCC42 Post-tensioned Slabs & Beams (A & D)/ DETAILS!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made by Date Page
Location Level 2 - Beam on Grid 7 RMW 11-Apr-2006 99
80
POST-TENSIONED ANALYSIS & DESIGN to BS 8110:2005 Checked Revision Job No
Originated from RCC42.xls v3.0 on CD © 2006 TCC chg - R68
DETAILED CALCULATIONS v
PROFILING Span 1 Span 2 0
a 1050 1100 0
X -0.692 0.4091 0
Y -1.758 -1.846 0
Z 0.9103 0.8988 0
b 5161 6856 0
c 1050 1250 0
net L 11700 12350 0
y1 260 440 0
y3 440 260 0
A1 -5E-05 -6E-05 0
A2 1E-05 1E-05 0
A3 -6E-05 -4E-05 0
ya 207.1 369.4 0.0
yc 369.4 200.8 0.0 STRESSING LENGTHS
Stressed from BOTH ends
PRESTRESS LOSSES Pj = 130 kN Ap = 100 Lt max = 24650 SPAN No Length AVGE
Supt 1 Span 1 Supt 2 Span 2 Supt 3 0 0 24 24650
FRICTION & WOBBLE 1 0 24650 24650
Angle θ 0.101 0.135 0.128 0.095 0.000 0.000 0 12300
x left 0 5161 11700 11700 18556 24050 24050 24050 24050 24 24650
0 6856 12350 12350 12350 12350 2 0 12650 24650
0 0 0 0 12650
x right 24050 18889 12350 12350 5494 0 0 0 0 0 24650
24050 18889 12350 12350 5494 0 3 0 12650 0
11700 6539 0 0 0
Cum θ left 0 0.202 0.471 0.471 0.727 0.917 0.917 0.917 0.917
0.000 0.257 0.446 0.446 0.446 0.446
0.000 0.000 0.000
m θ right 0.917 0.715 0.446 0.446 0.189 0.000 0.000 0.000 0
0.917 0.715 0.446 0.446 0.189 0
0.471 0.269 0
from left 0.0 102.6 233.3 233.3 354.4 441.7 441.7 441.7 441.7
0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
Sum 0.0 102.6 233.3 233.3 354.4 441.7 441.7 441.7 441.7
from right 441.7 350.6 225.2 225.2 98.4 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
Sum 441.7 350.6 225.2 225.2 98.4 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 Deanna Troi's Table
Loss 220.8 226.6 229.2 229.2 226.4 220.8 0.0 0.0 0.0 for Bonded Tendons
DRAW-IN ß Z Pi
x left 300 5461 12000 12300 19156 24650 24650 24650 24650 0.0008 12227 111.1 1 Left
300 7156 12650 12650 12650 12650 0.0000 0 0.0 2 Left
0 0 0 0.0000 0 0.0 3 Left
x right 24350 19189 12650 12350 5494 0 0 0 0 0.0000 0 0.0 1 Right
24350 19189 12650 12350 5494 0 0.0007 12522 111.5 2 Right
12000 6839 300 0.0000 0 0.0 3 Right
Px left (B) 2671.1 2768.0 2890.9 2665.5 2665.5 2665.5 2665.5 2665.5 2665.5
Px right (B) 2676.3 2676.3 2676.3 2897.5 2774.7 2676.3 0.0 0.0 0.0
Loss 113.9 113.9 113.9 113.9 113.9 113.9 0.0 0.0 0.0
ELASTIC LOSS
Loss 21.4 21.4 21.4 21.4 21.4 21.4 0.0 0.0 0.0
Σ losses 356.2 361.9 364.5 364.5 361.7 356.2 0.0 0.0 0.0
Initial Force 2769 2763 2760 2760 2763 2769 0 0 0
RELAXATION
Loss 55.4 55.3 55.2 55.2 55.3 55.4 0.0 0.0 0.0
SHRINKAGE
Loss 96.9 96.9 96.9 96.9 96.9 96.9 0.0 0.0 0.0
CREEP
Loss 95.7 95.5 95.4 95.4 95.5 95.7 0.0 0.0 0.0
Σ losses 248.0 247.7 247.5 247.5 247.7 248.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
Final Force 2521 2515 2513 2513 2515 2521 0 0 0

99

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:99 17/07/2006 17:06:36

 RCC42 Post-tensioned Slabs & Beams (A & D)/ DETAILS!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made by Date Page
Location Level 2 - Beam on Grid 7 RMW 11-Apr-2006 100
81
POST-TENSIONED ANALYSIS & DESIGN to BS 8110:2005 Checked Revision Job No
Originated from RCC42.xls v3.0 on CD © 2006 TCC chg - R68
DETAILED CALCULATIONS vi
BALANCE LOADS
Supt 1 Span 1 Supt 2 Span 2 Supt 3 0 0
Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right
y1 260 260 440 440 440 440 260 260 0 0 0 0
a 1050 1050 1050 1050 1100 1100 1250 1250 0 0 0 0
b 5161 5161 6539 6539 6856 6856 5494 5494 0 0 0 0
INITIAL PRESTRESS
V1 = -We 278.41 371.80 354.66 261.52 0.00 0.00
UDL 265.1 -67.7 -67.7 354.1 322.4 -61.6 61.6 209.2 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
FINAL PRESTRESS
V1 = -We 253.45 338.47 322.87 238.07 0.00 0.00
UDL 241.4 -61.7 -61.7 322.4 293.5 -56.1 56.1 190.5 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

BALANCE LOAD FEM Span 1 Span 2 0

Left Right Left Right Left Right
CENTRE a/L 0.343 0.460 0.000
LEFT b/L 0.271 0.330 0.100
factor 0.132 0.055 0.130 0.073 0.081 0.009
FEM i -442.5 -185.2 -577.7 -324.5 0.0 0.0
FEM f -402.9 -168.6 -525.9 -295.5 0.0 0.0
CENTRE a/L 0.457 0.340 0.800
RIGHT b/L 0.671 0.730 0.500
factor 0.073 0.130 0.055 0.132 0.098 0.098
FEM i -324.7 -582.0 -179.7 -432.8 0.0 0.0
FEM f -295.6 -529.8 -163.6 -394.0 0.0 0.0
LEFT a/L 0.088 0.088 #DIV/0!
END b/L 0.056 0.056 #DIV/0!
factor 0.049 0.004 0.049 0.003 #DIV/0! #DIV/0!
FEM i 163.5 11.7 216.0 15.5 0.0 0.0
FEM f 148.8 10.7 196.6 14.1 0.0 0.0
RIGHT a/L 0.088 0.100 #DIV/0!
END b/L 0.944 0.950 #DIV/0!
factor 0.004 0.049 0.003 0.044 #DIV/0! #DIV/0!
FEM i 15.7 218.3 10.1 142.5 0.0 0.0
FEM f 14.3 198.7 9.2 129.7 0.0 0.0
TOTALS FEM i -588.1 -537.2 -531.3 -599.4 0.0 0.0
FEM f -535.4 -489.0 -483.7 -545.7 0.0 0.0

BALANCE LOAD MOMENT DISTRIBUTION

HiCol SUPT 1 LoCol HiCol SUPT 2 LoCol HiCol SUPT 3 LoCol HiCol SUPT 4 LoCol
INITIAL 588.1 -537.2 531.3 -599.4 0.0 0.0
0.0 -512.7 -75.3 0.0 2.8 2.7 0.4 0.0 599.4 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
1.4 -256.4 299.7 1.3 0.0 0.0
0.0 -1.2 -0.2 0.0 -20.6 -19.7 -3.0 0.0 -1.3 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
-10.3 -0.6 -0.7 -9.9 0.0 0.0
0.0 9.0 1.3 0.0 0.6 0.6 0.1 0.0 9.9 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
0.3 4.5 4.9 0.3 0.0 0.0
0.0 -0.3 0.0 0.0 -4.5 -4.3 -0.7 0.0 -0.3 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
-2.2 -0.1 -0.1 -2.1 0.0 0.0
0.0 1.9 0.3 0.0 0.1 0.1 0.0 0.0 2.1 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
0.1 1.0 1.1 0.1 0.0 0.0
0.0 -0.1 0.0 0.0 -1.0 -0.9 -0.1 0.0 -0.1 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
-0.5 0.0 0.0 -0.5 0.0 0.0
0.0 0.4 0.1 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.5 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
Σ 0.0 73.9 -73.9 0.0 -811.3 814.6 -3.3 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
2nd'y M 0.0 61.2 -61.2 0.0 -301.3 304.6 0.0 0.0 12.7 0.0 0.0 0.0 #VALUE! 0.0
FINAL 535.4 -489.0 483.7 -545.7 0.0 0.0
0.0 -466.8 -68.6 0.0 2.5 2.4 0.4 0.0 545.7 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
1.3 -233.4 272.8 1.2 0.0 0.0
0.0 -1.1 -0.2 0.0 -18.7 -18.0 -2.8 0.0 -1.2 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
-9.4 -0.6 -0.6 -9.0 0.0 0.0
0.0 8.2 1.2 0.0 0.6 0.5 0.1 0.0 9.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
0.3 4.1 4.5 0.3 0.0 0.0
0.0 -0.2 0.0 0.0 -4.1 -3.9 -0.6 0.0 -0.3 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
-2.0 -0.1 -0.1 -2.0 0.0 0.0
0.0 1.8 0.3 0.0 0.1 0.1 0.0 0.0 2.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
0.1 0.9 1.0 0.1 0.0 0.0
0.0 -0.1 0.0 0.0 -0.9 -0.8 -0.1 0.0 -0.1 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
-0.4 0.0 0.0 -0.4 0.0 0.0
0.0 0.4 0.1 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.4 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
Σ 0.0 67.3 -67.3 0.0 -738.6 741.6 -3.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
2nd'ry M 0.0 55.7 -55.7 0.0 -274.3 277.3 0.0 0.0 11.5 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

100

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:100 17/07/2006 17:06:40

 RCC42 Post-tensioned Slabs & Beams (A & D).xls

RCC42 Post-tensioned Slabs & Beams (A & D)/ DETAILS!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made by Date Page
Location Level 2 - Beam on Grid 7 RMW 11-Apr-2006 101
82
POST-TENSIONED ANALYSIS & DESIGN to BS 8110:2005 Checked Revision Job No
Originated from RCC42.xls v3.0 on CD © 2006 TCC chg - R68
DETAILED CALCULATIONS vii
SUPPORT MOMENTS WITH EQUIVALENT LOADING
SUPT 1 SUPT 2 SUPT 3 SUPT 4
LEFT RIGHT LEFT RIGHT
SLS 1 -27.8 -228.6 -225.4 0.0 0.0 0.0
SLS 2 -14.3 -395.3 -423.3 0.0 0.0 0.0
SLS 3 -67.4 -391.6 -360.9 0.0 0.0 0.0
SLS 4 60.0 870.2 885.1 0.0 0.0 0.0
SLS 5 84.0 573.8 533.2 0.0 0.0 0.0
SLS 6 -10.4 580.3 644.1 0.0 0.0 0.0
SLS 7 34.7 370.9 397.8 0.0 0.0 0.0
ULS 1 126.8 1178.1 1175.1 0.0 0.0 0.0
ULS 2 126.8 1118.8 1004.7 0.0 0.0 0.0
ULS 3 -39.1 1135.3 1175.1 0.0 0.0 0.0
DEAD 25.1 748.2 756.6 11.5 0.0 0.0
IMPOSED 46.4 586.3 592.8 0.0 0.0 0.0

SUPPORT SHEARS WITH EQUIVALENT LOADING

Span 1 Span 2 0.0
SLS 1 166.1 -20.0 215.6 220.5 25.4 177.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
SLS 2 181.1 -20.0 200.5 92.2 25.4 80.4 0.0 0.0 0.0
SLS 3 68.4 -20.0 97.3 209.7 25.4 187.9 0.0 0.0 0.0
SLS 4 421.6 -18.2 632.1 655.8 23.1 441.8 0.0 0.0 0.0
SLS 5 448.3 -18.2 605.4 427.7 23.1 269.9 0.0 0.0 0.0
SLS 6 247.9 -18.2 421.8 636.5 23.1 461.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
SLS 7 326.7 -18.2 458.2 476.8 23.1 340.7 0.0 0.0 0.0
ULS 1 650.6 -18.2 901.3 938.5 23.1 678.1 0.0 0.0 0.0
ULS 2 655.6 -18.2 896.4 465.4 23.1 232.2 0.0 0.0 0.0
ULS 3 199.2 -18.2 470.4 938.5 23.1 678.1 0.0 0.0 0.0
DEAD 274.6 395.1 408.4 289.2 0.0 0.0
IMPOSED 147.0 237.0 247.4 152.6 0.0 0.0
ELASTIC
ULS 1 612.3 -18.2 939.6 976.9 23.1 639.7 0.0 0.0 0.0
ULS 2 673.7 -18.2 878.2 452.7 23.1 244.9 0.0 0.0 0.0
ULS 3 213.2 -18.2 456.4 932.6 23.1 684.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

ADJUSTED SPAN MOMENTS Loadings 0 0

Span 1 Left < > PL1 < > PL2 < > Right UDL PL1 PL2 pUDL 12
V SLS 1 166.1 0 166.1 0 166.1 100 215.6 31.8 0.0 0.0 0.0
SLS 2 181.1 0 181.1 0 181.1 100 200.5 31.8 0.0 0.0 0.0
SLS 3 68.4 0 68.4 0 68.4 100 97.3 13.8 0.0 0.0 0.0
SLS 4 421.6 0 421.6 0 421.6 100 632.1 87.8 0.0 0.0 0.0
SLS 5 448.3 0 448.3 0 448.3 100 605.4 87.8 0.0 0.0 0.0
SLS 6 247.9 0 247.9 0 247.9 100 421.8 55.8 0.0 0.0 0.0
SLS 7 65.4 0.0 0.0 0.0
ULS 1 650.6 0 650.6 0 650.6 100 901.3 129.3 0.0 0.0 0.0
ULS 2 655.6 0 655.6 0 655.6 100 896.4 129.3 0.0 0.0 0.0
ULS 3 199.2 0 199.2 0 199.2 100 470.4 55.8 0.0 0.0 0.0
Xbar SLS 1 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 5.223
SLS 2 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 5.695
SLS 3 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 4.955
SLS 4 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 4.801
SLS 5 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 5.105
SLS 6 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 4.442
ULS 1 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 5.031
ULS 2 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 5.069
ULS 3 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 3.570
M SLS 1 -15.1 15.1 15.1 15.1 15.1 449.0 281.4 M X bar T height
SLS 2 -1.6 1.6 1.6 1.6 1.6 517.4 114.7 517.4 max @ 5.695 41.8
SLS 3 -54.7 54.7 54.7 54.7 54.7 224.2 118.4 224.2 min @ 4.955 41.5
SLS 4 71.5 -71.5 -71.5 -71.5 -71.5 940.6 1334.5
SLS 5 95.5 -95.5 -95.5 -95.5 -95.5 1048.8 1038.1 1048.8 max @ 5.105 40.5
SLS 6 1.1 -1.1 -1.1 -1.1 -1.1 549.4 1044.6 549.4 min @ 4.442 49.3
ULS 1 138.4 -138.4 -138.4 -138.4 -138.4 1498.3 1642.4
ULS 2 138.4 -138.4 -138.4 -138.4 -138.4 1523.2 1583.1 1523.2 max @ 5.069 40.7
ULS 3 -27.52 27.52 27.52 27.52 27.52 383.21 1599.55 383.2 min @ 3.570 77.1

101

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:101 17/07/2006 17:06:43

 RCC42 Post-tensioned Slabs & Beams (A & D)/ DETAILS!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made by Date Page
Location Level 2 - Beam on Grid 7 RMW 11-Apr-2006 102
83
POST-TENSIONED ANALYSIS & DESIGN to BS 8110:2005 Checked Revision Job No
Originated from RCC42.xls v3.0 on CD © 2006 TCC chg - R68
DETAILED CALCULATIONS viii Loadings 0 0
Span 2 Left < > PL1 < > PL2 < > Right UDL PL1 PL2 pUDL 12.5
V SLS 1 220.5 0 220.5 0 220.5 100 177.0 31.8 0.0 0.0 0.0
SLS 2 92.2 0 92.2 0 92.2 100 80.4 13.8 0.0 0.0 0.0
SLS 3 209.7 0 209.7 0 209.7 100 187.9 31.8 0.0 0.0 0.0
SLS 4 655.8 0 655.8 0 655.8 100 441.8 87.8 0.0 0.0 0.0
SLS 5 427.7 0 427.7 0 427.7 100 269.9 55.8 0.0 0.0 0.0
SLS 6 636.5 0 636.5 0 636.5 100 461.0 87.8 0.0 0.0 0.0
SLS 7 65.4 0.0 0.0 0.0
ULS 1 938.5 0 938.5 0 938.5 100 678.1 129.3 0.0 0.0 0.0
ULS 2 465.4 0 465.4 0 465.4 100 232.2 55.8 0.0 0.0 0.0
ULS 3 938.5 0 938.5 0 938.5 100 678.1 129.3 0.0 0.0 0.0
Xbar SLS 1 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 6.934
SLS 2 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 6.679
SLS 3 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 6.593
SLS 4 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 7.469
SLS 5 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 7.663
SLS 6 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 7.249
ULS 1 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 7.257
ULS 2 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 8.339
ULS 3 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 7.257
M SLS 1 285 -285 -285 -285 -285 480 13 M X bar T height
SLS 2 87 -87 -87 -87 -87 221 13 542.2 max @ 6.593 41.9
SLS 3 149 -149 -149 -149 -149 542 13 221.2 min @ 6.679 41.2
SLS 4 1349 -1349 -1349 -1349 -1349 1100 12
SLS 5 998 -998 -998 -998 -998 641 12 1198.8 max @ 7.249 40.7
SLS 6 1108 -1108 -1108 -1108 -1108 1199 12 641.2 min @ 7.663 44.8
ULS 1 1639 -1639 -1639 -1639 -1639 1766 12
ULS 2 1469 -1469 -1469 -1469 -1469 471 12 1766.0 max @ 7.257 40.7
ULS 3 1639 -1639 -1639 -1639 -1639 1766 12 471.5 min @ 8.339 59.8
Loadings 0 0
0 Left < > PL1 < > PL2 < > Right UDL PL1 PL2 pUDL 0
V SLS 1 0.0 100 0.0 100 0.0 100 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
SLS 2 0.0 100 0.0 100 0.0 100 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
SLS 3 0.0 100 0.0 100 0.0 100 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
SLS 4 0.0 100 0.0 100 0.0 100 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
SLS 5 0.0 100 0.0 100 0.0 100 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
SLS 6 0.0 100 0.0 100 0.0 100 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
SLS 7 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
ULS 1 0.0 100 0.0 100 0.0 100 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
ULS 2 0.0 100 0.0 100 0.0 100 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
ULS 3 0.0 100 0.0 100 0.0 100 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
Xbar SLS 1 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000
SLS 2 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000
SLS 3 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000
SLS 4 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000
SLS 5 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000
SLS 6 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000
ULS 1 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000
ULS 2 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000
ULS 3 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000
M SLS 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 #VALUE! M X bar T height
SLS 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 #VALUE! 0.0 max @ 0.000 0.0
SLS 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 #VALUE! 0.0 min @ 0.000 0.0
SLS 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SLS 5 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0.0 max @ 0.000 0.0
SLS 6 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0.0 min @ 0.000 0.0
ULS 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
ULS 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0.0 max @ 0.000 0.0
ULS 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0.0 min @ 0.000 0.0

102

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:102 17/07/2006 17:06:45

 RCC42 Post-tensioned Slabs & Beams (A & D).xls

RCC42 Post-tensioned Slabs & Beams (A & D)/ DETAILS!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made by Date Page
Location Level 2 - Beam on Grid 7 RMW 11-Apr-2006 103
84
POST-TENSIONED ANALYSIS & DESIGN TO BS 8110 Checked Revision Job No
Originated from RCC42.xls v3.0 on CD © 2006 TCC chg Date R68
DETAILED CALCULATIONS ix
(d) ULS MOMENT C Supt 1 Supt 2 Supt 3 0
Span 1 Span 2 0
Right Left Right Left Right Left
DESIGN MOMENT 42.2 1523.2 1529.6 1500.1 1766.0 11.5 0.0 0.0 0.0
TENDON HEIGHT 300.0 40.7 480.0 480.0 40.7 300.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
fpe 1050 1048 1047 1047 1048 1050 0 0 0
Hinges 2 2 0
Lt 24.50 24.50 0.00
Lte 12250 12250 0
dt 300.0 484.3 480.0 480.0 484.3 300.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
dr 482.0 480.0 480.0 480.0 484.0 480.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
Rp 0.138 0.051 0.086 0.086 0.051 0.138 0.000 0.000 0.000
fpe/fpu 0.649 0.648 0.647 0.647 0.648 0.649 0.000 0.000 0.000
TABLE 4.4 1a 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
1b 1 1.00 1 1 1.00 1 0 0.00 0
2a 0.99 1.00 1 1 1.00 0.99 0 0.00 0
2b 0.99 1.00 1 1 1.00 0.99 0 0.00 0
fpb bonded 1605 1617 1617 1617 1617 1605 0 0 0
fpb unbonded 1182 1301 1281 1281 1301 1182 0 0 0
TENDON FORCE 2836 3122 3075 3075 3122 2836 0 0 0
As 4021 6283 6283 2262 6283 0 0
REBAR FORCE 1748.4 2731.8 2731.8 2731.8 983.5 2731.8 2731.8 0.0 0.0
TOTAL TENSION 4584 5854 5807 5807 4105 5568 2732 0 0
dn 94.3 72.3 119.5 119.5 50.7 114.6 0.0 0.0 0.0
Steel stress 435 435 435 435 435 435 0 0 0
Zt 252.8 448.2 420.3 420.3 459.0 242.7 0.0 0.0 0.0
Zr 434.8 443.9 420.3 420.3 458.7 422.7 0.0 0.0 0.0
MOR 1477.2 2611.6 2440.3 2440.3 1883.9 1843.1 0.0 0.0 0.0

(e) SHEAR Span 1 Span 2 0 ft = 1.859

Left Right Left Right Left Right
V 636.2 881.9 919.1 678.1 0.0 0.0
Mu 42.2 1529.6 1500.1 11.5 0.0 0.0
M0 213.5 574.7 574.7 213.5 0.0 0.0
Cracked ? N Y Y N N N
UNCRACKED fcp 2.127 2.120 2.120 2.127 0.000 0.000
Vco 1629.0 1627.8 1627.8 1629.0 0.0 0.0
CRACKED Aps 2400 2400 2600 2600 0 0
As 6421 8683 8883 8883 0 0
d 414.0 480.0 480.0 210.0 0.0 0.0
As% 0.862 1.005 1.028 2.350 0.000 0.000
fpe/fpu 0.448 0.380 0.392 0.394 0.000 0.000
vc 0.558 0.588 0.592 0.916 0.000 0.000
Vcr 3531.2 733.0 753.3 12815.2 0.0 0.0
Vc 1629.0 733.0 753.3 1629.0 0.0 0.0 Links required
Asv/Sv 1.656 1.656 1.656 1.656 0.000 0.000
Sv 375 375 375 375 0 0

f) VIBRATION nx = 2
Span 1 Span 2 0
ny : ly 5 6.000 5 6.000 0 0.000 Khan/Williams Ref
Ix : Iy 3E+10 2E+09 3E+10 2E+09 0 0 (Concrete Society Method)
λx : λy 1.934 5.170 2.015 4.963 0.000 0.000 (9.8)
kx : ky 1.267 1.037 1.246 1.041 0.000 0.000 (9.9, 9.10)
ω 65.41 54.51 65.41 54.51 0.00 0.00
δx : δy 8.56 13.69 13.99 13.69 0.00 0.00
f'x : f'y 6.11 6.32 6.01 4.96 0.00 0.00 (9.11)
fbx : fby 6.11 6.32 6.01 4.96 0.00 0.00 (9.12, 9.13)
fx : fy 6.11 6.32 6.01 4.96 0.00 0.00 (9.14)
Nx : Ny 1.388 2.036 1.404 1.995 1.000 1.000 (9.17, 9.18)
Cx : Cy 246.7 243.4 248.3 275.3 0.0 0.0 (9.19)
Rx : Ry 0.36 0.25 0.35 0.26 0.00 0.00 (9.20)
R 0.60 0.61 0.00 (9.21)

103

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:103 17/07/2006 17:06:48

 Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre

104
Client Advisory Group Made by Date Page
Location Level 2 - Beam on Grid 7 DEFLECTION CALCULATIONS RMW 11-Apr-2006 85
104
POST-TENSIONED ANALYSIS & DESIGN to BS 8110:2005 Checked Revision Job No
Originated from RCC42.xls v3.0 on CD © 2006 TCC chg - R68
SPAN 1 As(b) = 6283 d = 480 h= 525 bw = 1800 bf = 3000 hf = 200 bd3/12 = 2E+10
Distance 0 525 1050
1650 2250 2850 3450 4050 4650 5250 5850 6450 7050 7650 8250 8850 9450 10050 10650 11175 11700
Element b 263 525 563
600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 563 525 263

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:104

d' 43 43 4343 43 43 43 43 43 43 43 43 43 43 43 45 45 45 45 45 45
As(t) 4021 4021 4021
4021 4021 4021 4021 4021 4021 4021 4021 4021 4021 4021 4021 6283 6283 6283 6283 6283 6283
TRANFORMED SECTION PROPERTIES at TRANSFER E= 25.53 m= 7.83 m-1= 6.83
A 1E+06 1E+06 1E+06 1E+06 1E+06 1E+06 1E+06 1E+06 1E+06 1E+06 1E+06 1E+06 1E+06 1E+06 1E+06 1E+06 1E+06 1E+06 1E+06 1E+06 1E+06
Σ A.Yt 3E+08 3E+08 3E+08 3E+08 3E+08 3E+08 3E+08 3E+08 3E+08 3E+08 3E+08 3E+08 3E+08 3E+08 3E+08 3E+08 3E+08 3E+08 3E+08 3E+08 3E+08
Yt 234.1 234.1 234.1 234.1 234.1 234.1 234.1 234.1 234.1 234.1 234.1 234.1 234.1 234.1 234.1 231.8 231.8 231.8 231.8 231.8 231.8
Yb 290.9 290.9 290.9 290.9 290.9 290.9 290.9 290.9 290.9 290.9 290.9 290.9 290.9 290.9 290.9 293.2 293.2 293.2 293.2 293.2 293.2
Ixx 3E+10 3E+10 3E+10 3E+10 3E+10 3E+10 3E+10 3E+10 3E+10 3E+10 3E+10 3E+10 3E+10 3E+10 3E+10 3E+10 3E+10 3E+10 3E+10 3E+10 3E+10
TRANFORMED SECTION PROPERTIES - LONGTERM E= 8.92 m= 22.43 m-1= 21.43
A 1E+06 1E+06 1E+06 1E+06 1E+06 1E+06 1E+06 1E+06 1E+06 1E+06 1E+06 1E+06 1E+06 1E+06 1E+06 1E+06 1E+06 1E+06 1E+06 1E+06 1E+06
Σ A.Yt 3E+08 3E+08 3E+08 3E+08 3E+08 3E+08 3E+08 3E+08 3E+08 3E+08 3E+08 3E+08 3E+08 3E+08 3E+08 3E+08 3E+08 3E+08 3E+08 3E+08 3E+08
Yt 242.1 242.1 242.1 242.1 242.1 242.1 242.1 242.1 242.1 242.1 242.1 242.1 242.1 242.1 242.1 235.7 235.7 235.7 235.7 235.7 235.7
Yb 282.9 282.9 282.9 282.9 282.9 282.9 282.9 282.9 282.9 282.9 282.9 282.9 282.9 282.9 282.9 289.3 289.3 289.3 289.3 289.3 289.3
Ixx 4E+10 4E+10 4E+10 4E+10 4E+10 4E+10 4E+10 4E+10 4E+10 4E+10 4E+10 4E+10 4E+10 4E+10 4E+10 4E+10 4E+10 4E+10 4E+10 4E+10 4E+10
TRANFORMED SECTION PROPERTIES - IMPOSED
RCC42 Post-tensioned Slabs & Beams (A & D)/ DEFLECTS!

E= 33.54 m= 5.96 m-1= 4.96

A 1E+06 1E+06 1E+06 1E+06 1E+06 1E+06 1E+06 1E+06 1E+06 1E+06 1E+06 1E+06 1E+06 1E+06 1E+06 1E+06 1E+06 1E+06 1E+06 1E+06 1E+06
Σ A.Yt 3E+08 3E+08 3E+08 3E+08 3E+08 3E+08 3E+08 3E+08 3E+08 3E+08 3E+08 3E+08 3E+08 3E+08 3E+08 3E+08 3E+08 3E+08 3E+08 3E+08 3E+08
Yt 232.9 232.9 232.9 232.9 232.9 232.9 232.9 232.9 232.9 232.9 232.9 232.9 232.9 232.9 232.9 231.2 231.2 231.2 231.2 231.2 231.2
Yb 292.1 292.1 292.1 292.1 292.1 292.1 292.1 292.1 292.1 292.1 292.1 292.1 292.1 292.1 292.1 293.8 293.8 293.8 293.8 293.8 293.8
Ixx 3E+10 3E+10 3E+10 3E+10 3E+10 3E+10 3E+10 3E+10 3E+10 3E+10 3E+10 3E+10 3E+10 3E+10 3E+10 3E+10 3E+10 3E+10 3E+10 3E+10 3E+10
DEFLECTIONS at TRANSFER
M (SLS 3) 77.5 73.9 -6.6 -132.8 -239.6 -327.0 -395.0 -443.6 -472.8 -482.5 -472.9 -443.8 -395.3 -327.4 -240.1 -133.4 -7.3 138.3 303.2 405.3 406.1
1/R 1E-07 9E-08 -8E-09 -2E-07 -3E-07 -4E-07 -5E-07 -6E-07 -6E-07 -6E-07 -6E-07 -6E-07 -5E-07 -4E-07 -3E-07 -2E-07 -9E-09 2E-07 4E-07 5E-07 5E-07
Load 3E-05 5E-05 -5E-06 -1E-04 -2E-04 -2E-04 -3E-04 -3E-04 -4E-04 -4E-04 -4E-04 -3E-04 -3E-04 -2E-04 -2E-04 -1E-04 -5E-06 1E-04 2E-04 3E-04 1E-04
Load x dist 0.003 0.026 -0.005 -0.165 -0.406 -0.702 -1.027 -1.354 -1.657 -1.909 -2.085 -2.157 -2.101 -1.888 -1.493 -0.875 -0.051 1.03 2.244 2.938 1.489
End slope -0.002 -9E-04
Span δ 0 -0.93 -1.89 -2.99 -4.02 -4.95 -5.73 -6.33 -6.73 -6.91 -6.88 -6.63 -6.19 -5.56 -4.79 -3.91 -2.96 -2.02 -1.14 -0.47 0
Cant δ 0 -10.62 -11.13 -11.70 -12.22 -12.62 -12.88 -12.96 -12.84 -12.51 -11.95 -11.19 -10.22 -9.07 -7.78 -6.38 -4.92 -3.45 -2.05 -0.93 0
δ 0 -0.93 -1.89 -2.99 -4.02 -4.95 -5.73 -6.33 -6.73 -6.91 -6.88 -6.63 -6.19 -5.56 -4.79 -3.91 -2.96 -2.02 -1.14 -0.47 0
DEFLECTIONS - LONGTERM
M (SLS 7) 13.6 137.6 177.2 173.4 168.2 161.7 153.8 144.6 134.0 122.1 108.8 94.2 78.3 61.0 42.3 22.3 0.9 -21.8 -45.8 -120.9 -302.9
1/R 4E-08 4E-07 5E-07 5E-07 5E-07 5E-07 4E-07 4E-07 4E-07 4E-07 3E-07 3E-07 2E-07 2E-07 1E-07 6E-08 3E-09 -6E-08 -1E-07 -3E-07 -8E-07
Load 1E-05 2E-04 3E-04 3E-04 3E-04 3E-04 3E-04 3E-04 2E-04 2E-04 2E-04 2E-04 1E-04 1E-04 7E-05 4E-05 2E-06 -4E-05 -7E-05 -2E-04 -2E-04
Load x dist 0.001 0.11 0.303 0.496 0.657 0.799 0.921 1.016 1.081 1.112 1.105 1.055 0.957 0.809 0.606 0.327 0.015 -0.363 -0.76 -1.963 -2.487
End slope 0.002 5E-04
Span δ 0 1.07 2.03 2.96 3.70 4.27 4.68 4.92 5.01 4.96 4.78 4.50 4.11 3.64 3.11 2.53 1.93 1.33 0.76 0.29 0
Cant δ 0 6.61 7.31 7.94 8.39 8.66 8.76 8.71 8.50 8.16 7.68 7.10 6.41 5.65 4.82 3.94 3.05 2.15 1.28 0.55 0
δ 0 1.07 2.03 2.96 3.70 4.27 4.68 4.92 5.01 4.96 4.78 4.50 4.11 3.64 3.11 2.53 1.93 1.33 0.76 0.29 0
DEFLECTIONS - IMPOSED
M(SLS 5-7) -31.29 27.69 80.51 133.30 178.04 214.71 243.31 263.85 276.33 280.75 277.10 265.38 245.60 217.76 181.86 137.89 85.85 25.75 -42.41 -108.67 -181.10
1/R -3E-08 3E-08 8E-08 1E-07 2E-07 2E-07 2E-07 3E-07 3E-07 3E-07 3E-07 3E-07 2E-07 2E-07 2E-07 1E-07 8E-08 3E-08 -4E-08 -1E-07 -2E-07
Load -8E-06 1E-05 4E-05 8E-05 1E-04 1E-04 1E-04 2E-04 2E-04 2E-04 2E-04 2E-04 1E-04 1E-04 1E-04 8E-05 5E-05 2E-05 -2E-05 -6E-05 -5E-05
Load x dist -0.001 0.008 0.047 0.13 0.237 0.363 0.497 0.633 0.761 0.873 0.96 1.014 1.026 0.987 0.889 0.714 0.475 0.151 -0.248 -0.622 -0.524
End slope 0.001 7E-04
Span δ 0 0.53 1.05 1.62 2.15 2.61 2.99 3.29 3.49 3.60 3.60 3.51 3.32 3.05 2.69 2.28 1.81 1.32 0.81 0.38 0
Cant δ 0 8.53 8.67 8.81 8.91 8.94 8.89 8.76 8.53 8.21 7.79 7.26 6.65 5.94 5.16 4.32 3.42 2.50 1.56 0.76 0
δ 0 0.53 1.05 1.62 2.15 2.61 2.99 3.29 3.49 3.60 3.60 3.51 3.32 3.05 2.69 2.28 1.81 1.32 0.81 0.38 0

17/07/2006 17:06:51
 Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre
Client Advisory Group Made by Date Page
Location Level 2 - Beam on Grid 7 DEFLECTION CALCULATIONS (ii) RMW 11-Apr-2006 105
86
POST-TENSIONED ANALYSIS & DESIGN to BS 8110:2005 Checked Revision Job No
Originated from RCC42.xls v3.0 on CD © 2006 TCC chg - R68
SPAN 2 As(b) = 2262 d = 484 h= 525 bw = 1800 bf = 3000 hf = 200 bd3/12 = 2E+10
Distance 0 550 1100
1725 2350 2975 3600 4225 4850 5475 6100 6725 7350 7975 8600 9225 9850 10475 11100 11725 12350
Element b 275 550 588
625 625 625 625 625 625 625 625 625 625 625 625 625 625 625 625 625 313

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:105

d' 45 45 4545 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45
As(t) 6283 6283 6283
6283 6283 6283 6283 6283 6283 6283 6283 6283 6283 6283 6283 6283 6283 6283 6283 6283 6283
TRANFORMED SECTION PROPERTIES at TRANSFER E= 25.53 m= 7.83 m-1= 6.83
A 1E+06 1E+06 1E+06 1E+06 1E+06 1E+06 1E+06 1E+06 1E+06 1E+06 1E+06 1E+06 1E+06 1E+06 1E+06 1E+06 1E+06 1E+06 1E+06 1E+06 1E+06
Σ A.Yt 3E+08 3E+08 3E+08 3E+08 3E+08 3E+08 3E+08 3E+08 3E+08 3E+08 3E+08 3E+08 3E+08 3E+08 3E+08 3E+08 3E+08 3E+08 3E+08 3E+08 3E+08
Yt 226.4 226.4 226.4 226.4 226.4 226.4 226.4 226.4 226.4 226.4 226.4 226.4 226.4 226.4 226.4 226.4 226.4 226.4 226.4 226.4 226.4
Yb 298.6 298.6 298.6 298.6 298.6 298.6 298.6 298.6 298.6 298.6 298.6 298.6 298.6 298.6 298.6 298.6 298.6 298.6 298.6 298.6 298.6
Ixx 3E+10 3E+10 3E+10 3E+10 3E+10 3E+10 3E+10 3E+10 3E+10 3E+10 3E+10 3E+10 3E+10 3E+10 3E+10 3E+10 3E+10 3E+10 3E+10 3E+10 3E+10
TRANFORMED SECTION PROPERTIES - LONGTERM E= 8.92 m= 22.43 m-1= 21.43
A 1E+06 1E+06 1E+06 1E+06 1E+06 1E+06 1E+06 1E+06 1E+06 1E+06 1E+06 1E+06 1E+06 1E+06 1E+06 1E+06 1E+06 1E+06 1E+06 1E+06 1E+06
Σ A.Yt 3E+08 3E+08 3E+08 3E+08 3E+08 3E+08 3E+08 3E+08 3E+08 3E+08 3E+08 3E+08 3E+08 3E+08 3E+08 3E+08 3E+08 3E+08 3E+08 3E+08 3E+08
Yt 220.4 220.4 220.4 220.4 220.4 220.4 220.4 220.4 220.4 220.4 220.4 220.4 220.4 220.4 220.4 220.4 220.4 220.4 220.4 220.4 220.4
Yb 304.6 304.6 304.6 304.6 304.6 304.6 304.6 304.6 304.6 304.6 304.6 304.6 304.6 304.6 304.6 304.6 304.6 304.6 304.6 304.6 304.6
Ixx 4E+10 4E+10 4E+10 4E+10 4E+10 4E+10 4E+10 4E+10 4E+10 4E+10 4E+10 4E+10 4E+10 4E+10 4E+10 4E+10 4E+10 4E+10 4E+10 4E+10 4E+10
TRANFORMED SECTION PROPERTIES - IMPOSED E= 33.54 m= 5.96 m-1= 4.96
RCC42 Post-tensioned Slabs & Beams (A & D)/ DEFLECTS!

A 1E+06 1E+06 1E+06 1E+06 1E+06 1E+06 1E+06 1E+06 1E+06 1E+06 1E+06 1E+06 1E+06 1E+06 1E+06 1E+06 1E+06 1E+06 1E+06 1E+06 1E+06
Σ A.Yt 3E+08 3E+08 3E+08 3E+08 3E+08 3E+08 3E+08 3E+08 3E+08 3E+08 3E+08 3E+08 3E+08 3E+08 3E+08 3E+08 3E+08 3E+08 3E+08 3E+08 3E+08
Yt 227.2 227.2 227.2 227.2 227.2 227.2 227.2 227.2 227.2 227.2 227.2 227.2 227.2 227.2 227.2 227.2 227.2 227.2 227.2 227.2 227.2
Yb 297.8 297.8 297.8 297.8 297.8 297.8 297.8 297.8 297.8 297.8 297.8 297.8 297.8 297.8 297.8 297.8 297.8 297.8 297.8 297.8 297.8
Ixx 3E+10 3E+10 3E+10 3E+10 3E+10 3E+10 3E+10 3E+10 3E+10 3E+10 3E+10 3E+10 3E+10 3E+10 3E+10 3E+10 3E+10 3E+10 3E+10 3E+10 3E+10
DEFLECTIONS at TRANSFER
M (SLS 2) 437.0 435.7 332.7 167.2 20.4 -107.7 -217.1 -307.9 -380.0 -433.4 -468.2 -484.3 -481.6 -460.4 -420.4 -361.8 -284.4 -188.4 -73.8 6.7 0.0
1/R 6E-07 6E-07 4E-07 2E-07 3E-08 -1E-07 -3E-07 -4E-07 -5E-07 -6E-07 -6E-07 -6E-07 -6E-07 -6E-07 -5E-07 -5E-07 -4E-07 -2E-07 -1E-07 9E-09 6E-21
Load 2E-04 3E-04 3E-04 1E-04 2E-05 -9E-05 -2E-04 -3E-04 -3E-04 -4E-04 -4E-04 -4E-04 -4E-04 -4E-04 -3E-04 -3E-04 -2E-04 -2E-04 -6E-05 5E-06 2E-18
Load x dist 0.022 0.172 0.281 0.235 0.039 -0.261 -0.638 -1.061 -1.504 -1.936 -2.33 -2.657 -2.888 -2.995 -2.949 -2.722 -2.286 -1.61 -0.668 0.064 2E-14
End slope -8E-04 -0.002
Span δ 0 -0.53 -1.25 -2.23 -3.30 -4.38 -5.40 -6.31 -7.07 -7.63 -7.97 -8.07 -7.92 -7.53 -6.91 -6.06 -5.04 -3.87 -2.60 -1.30 0
Cant δ 0 -25.08 -24.66 -24.34 -24.10 -23.88 -23.60 -23.21 -22.67 -21.93 -20.97 -19.77 -18.32 -16.63 -14.71 -12.57 -10.24 -7.77 -5.20 -2.60 0
δ 0 -0.53 -1.25 -2.23 -3.30 -4.38 -5.40 -6.31 -7.07 -7.63 -7.97 -8.07 -7.92 -7.53 -6.91 -6.06 -5.04 -3.87 -2.60 -1.30 0
DEFLECTIONS - LONGTERM
M (SLS 7) -327.0 -124.4 -30.4 12.9 52.5 88.6 121.0 149.7 174.9 196.3 214.2 228.4 239.0 245.9 249.2 248.9 244.9 237.3 226.0 163.0 0.0
1/R -1E-06 -4E-07 -1E-07 4E-08 2E-07 3E-07 4E-07 5E-07 6E-07 6E-07 7E-07 7E-07 8E-07 8E-07 8E-07 8E-07 8E-07 8E-07 7E-07 5E-07 1E-20
Load -3E-04 -2E-04 -6E-05 3E-05 1E-04 2E-04 2E-04 3E-04 3E-04 4E-04 4E-04 5E-04 5E-04 5E-04 5E-04 5E-04 5E-04 5E-04 5E-04 3E-04 4E-18
Load x dist -0.039 -0.12 -0.063 0.044 0.246 0.525 0.868 1.261 1.69 2.143 2.604 3.061 3.501 3.909 4.272 4.576 4.808 4.954 5.001 3.809 5E-14
End slope 0.002 0.004
Span δ 0 1.10 2.37 3.84 5.29 6.68 7.96 9.09 10.04 10.76 11.24 11.45 11.38 11.01 10.34 9.35 8.06 6.46 4.56 2.38 0
Cant δ 0 46.06 45.23 44.32 43.39 42.40 41.30 40.05 38.61 36.95 35.05 32.88 30.43 27.68 24.62 21.26 17.58 13.60 9.32 4.76 0
δ 0.0 1.1 2.4 3.8 5.3 6.7 8.0 9.1 10.0 10.8 11.2 11.5 11.4 11.0 10.3 9.4 8.1 6.5 4.6 2.4 0.0
DEFLECTIONS - IMPOSED
M(SLS 4-7) -460.7 -367.5 -281.0 -191.1 -109.8 -37.3 26.4 81.4 127.6 165.1 193.9 213.9 225.1 227.6 221.3 206.3 182.5 150.0 108.8 58.8 0.0
1/R -5E-07 -4E-07 -3E-07 -2E-07 -1E-07 -4E-08 3E-08 8E-08 1E-07 2E-07 2E-07 2E-07 2E-07 2E-07 2E-07 2E-07 2E-07 2E-07 1E-07 6E-08 0
Load -1E-04 -2E-04 -2E-04 -1E-04 -7E-05 -2E-05 2E-05 5E-05 8E-05 1E-04 1E-04 1E-04 1E-04 1E-04 1E-04 1E-04 1E-04 1E-04 7E-05 4E-05 0
Load x dist -0.018 -0.113 -0.185 -0.209 -0.164 -0.071 0.06 0.218 0.393 0.574 0.751 0.913 1.051 1.153 1.209 1.209 1.142 0.998 0.767 0.438 0
End slope -1E-04 8E-04
Span δ 0 -0.03 0.08 0.30 0.60 0.94 1.30 1.64 1.96 2.22 2.42 2.54 2.57 2.52 2.38 2.15 1.83 1.45 1.00 0.51 0
Cant δ 0 9.64 9.29 9.00 8.79 8.62 8.46 8.30 8.10 7.85 7.54 7.15 6.67 6.11 5.45 4.71 3.88 2.98 2.02 1.02 0
δ 0 -0.03 0.08 0.30 0.60 0.94 1.30 1.64 1.96 2.22 2.42 2.54 2.57 2.52 2.38 2.15 1.83 1.45 1.00 0.51 0

105
RCC42 Post-tensioned Slabs & Beams (A & D).xls

17/07/2006 17:06:54
 Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre

106
Client Advisory Group Made by Date Page
Location Level 2 - Beam on Grid 7 DEFLECTION CALCULATIONS (iii) RMW 11-Apr-2006 106
86
POST-TENSIONED ANALYSIS & DESIGN to BS 8110:2005 Checked Revision Job No
Originated from RCC42.xls v3.0 on CD © 2006 TCC chg - R68
SPAN 3 As(b) = 0 d = -45 h= 0 bw = 0 bf = 0 hf = 0 bd3/12 = 0
Distance 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0.00
Element b 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:106

d' 45 45 45 45 45 45 43 43 43 43 43 43 43 43 43 43 43 43 43 43 43
As(t) 6283 6283 6283 6283 6283 6283 6283 6283 6283 6283 6283 6283 6283 6283 6283 0 0 0 0 0 0
TRANFORMED SECTION PROPERTIES at TRANSFER E= 25.53 m= 7.83 m-1= 6.83
A 42940 42940 42940 42940 42940 42940 42940 42940 42940 42940 42940 42940 42940 42940 42940 1E-04 1E-04 1E-04 1E-04 1E-04 1E-04
Σ A.Yt 2E+06 2E+06 2E+06 2E+06 2E+06 2E+06 2E+06 2E+06 2E+06 2E+06 2E+06 2E+06 2E+06 2E+06 2E+06 -1E-04 -1E-04 -1E-04 -1E-04 -1E-04 -1E-04
Yt 45 45 45 45 45 45 43 43 43 43 43 43 43 43 43 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1
Yb -45 -45 -45 -45 -45 -45 -43 -43 -43 -43 -43 -43 -43 -43 -43 1 1 1 1 1 1
Ixx 0.554 0.554 0.554 0.554 0.554 0.554 0.529 0.529 0.529 0.529 0.529 0.529 0.529 0.529 0.529 0.265 0.265 0.265 0.265 0.265 0.265
TRANFORMED SECTION PROPERTIES - LONGTERM E= 8.92 m= 22.43 m-1= 21.43
A 1E+05 1E+05 1E+05 1E+05 1E+05 1E+05 1E+05 1E+05 1E+05 1E+05 1E+05 1E+05 1E+05 1E+05 1E+05 4E-04 4E-04 4E-04 4E-04 4E-04 4E-04
Σ A.Yt 6E+06 6E+06 6E+06 6E+06 6E+06 6E+06 6E+06 6E+06 6E+06 6E+06 6E+06 6E+06 6E+06 6E+06 6E+06 -4E-04 -4E-04 -4E-04 -4E-04 -4E-04 -4E-04
Yt 45 45 45 45 45 45 43 43 43 43 43 43 43 43 43 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1
Yb -45 -45 -45 -45 -45 -45 -43 -43 -43 -43 -43 -43 -43 -43 -43 1 1 1 1 1 1
Ixx 1.736 1.736 1.736 1.736 1.736 1.736 1.66 1.66 1.66 1.66 1.66 1.66 1.66 1.66 1.66 0.83 0.83 0.83 0.83 0.83 0.83
TRANFORMED SECTION PROPERTIES - IMPOSED E= 33.54 m= 5.96 m-1= 4.96
RCC42 Post-tensioned Slabs & Beams (A & D)/ DEFLECTS!

A 31188 31188 31188 31188 31188 31188 31188 31188 31188 31188 31188 31188 31188 31188 31188 1E-04 1E-04 1E-04 1E-04 1E-04 1E-04
Σ A.Yt 1E+06 1E+06 1E+06 1E+06 1E+06 1E+06 1E+06 1E+06 1E+06 1E+06 1E+06 1E+06 1E+06 1E+06 1E+06 -1E-04 -1E-04 -1E-04 -1E-04 -1E-04 -1E-04
Yt 45 45 45 45 45 45 43 43 43 43 43 43 43 43 43 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1
Yb -45 -45 -45 -45 -45 -45 -43 -43 -43 -43 -43 -43 -43 -43 -43 1 1 1 1 1 1
Ixx 0.402 0.402 0.402 0.402 0.402 0.402 0.384 0.384 0.384 0.384 0.384 0.384 0.384 0.384 0.384 0.192 0.192 0.192 0.192 0.192 0.192
DEFLECTIONS at TRANSFER
M (SLS 3) 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
1/R 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Load 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Load x dist 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
End slope 0 0
Span δ 0 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0
Cant δ 0 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0
δ 0 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0
DEFLECTIONS - LONGTERM
M (SLS 7) 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
1/R 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Load 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Load x dist 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
End slope 0 0
Span δ 0 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0
Cant δ 0 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0
δ 0 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0
DEFLECTIONS - IMPOSED
M(SLS 5-7) 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
1/R 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Load 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Load x dist 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
End slope 0 0
Span δ 0 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0
Cant δ 0 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0
δ 0 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0

17/07/2006 17:06:57
 RCC43 Wide Beams (A & D).xls

RCC43 Wide Beams (A & D).xls

This spreadsheet designs multiple-span rectangular or flanged
beams using sub-frame analysis to derive moments and shears.
ACTIONS!
The intention is to provide the design and analysis of up to six
ACTIONS! includes bending moment and shear force diagrams,
spans of continuous wide beams with columns above and below.
summaries of moments and shears and user input for amounts
Spans may incorporate cantilevers, fixed ends or knife-edge
of redistribution. Users should ensure that the amounts of
supports. There are three main sheets: MAIN!, ACTIONS! and
redistribution in row 26 are always considered - there are no
SPANS!
default or automated values. Cell L14 determines how the
redistribution is carried out (see also Table 1 of this document).
This spreadsheet is very similar to RCC41.xls except that it caters
for wide beams (beams wider than they are deep) by allowing
two sizes of bar in one layer and by allowing top steel in the span
to be augmented to help satisfy span:depth criteria.
SPANS!
This sheet designs reinforcement for bending in spans and
The selection of size and number of top and bottom bars is supports and for shear in the spans. User input is required for
automated. link sizes (e.g. at cell I22) and the amount by which span top
steel should be increased (e.g. at cell N21) in order to help meet
The number of bars determined by either: deflection criteria. Non-existent spans are blanked out. Support
■ Area of steel required/ area of maximum sized bar (e.g. moments (including cantilever moments) are considered at
32mm diameter) the face of the support. This may lead to unequal amounts of
■ Spacing rules
reinforcement being designed for each side of the support. See
Bar!
■ Number of legs of links required in shear.
Besides the limit of maximum modification factor for deflection
Where the latter two may govern, two diameters of bending = 2.0, an additional limit of maximum allowable area of steel has
steel are allowed in the same layer to avoid excessive over- been imposed to comply with deflection criteria, Asdef, = 2 x Asreq’d ,
specification of reinforcement. Input to the right of SPANS! i.e. an allowable increase of 100% bottom span steel.
allows top steel to be increased to satisfy span:depth criteria. The
designer and detailer are expected to rationalise this output (but
always remembering that bar spacings should not be increased). WEIGHT!
The size of link to be used remains as manual input. This sheet estimates the weight of reinforcement in the beam
when designed according to normal curtailment rules as defined
in BS 8110. Workings are shown on the right hand side of the
MAIN! sheet. The estimate may be printed out using ‘File/print’ or the
print button on the normal toolbar. It should be recognised
This sheet contains user input of materials, frame geometry and
that different engineers’ and detailers’ interpretations of these
load data, as explained earlier.
clauses, and different project circumstances and requirements
will all have a bearing on actual quantities used.
‘Rebar layering’ refers to whether there are beams in the other
direction. Answering ‘yes’ drops by one bar diameter the steel at
the supports. For instance when using splice bars at the support
bars in the other direction has to be avoided - and allowed for in
Analysis!
the design.
This sheet shows the moment distributions used in the analysis
of the beam: it is not intended for formal printing. It will be seen
With respect to cantilevers, design for bending caters for
that the loads are considered initially as 1.0gk over all spans then
moments at the face of support; design for deflection considers
as (gfg - 1.0)gk + gfqqk over alternate spans.
the cantilever from the centre line of support. In beam-to-beam
situations (where the beam soffits are the same depth), the width
of support can be input as being very small to avoid under-design
in bending.
Bar!
Intended mainly for first time users and young engineers, this
sheet gives further details of the calculations summarised in
SPAN! Support moments are considered at faces of supports;

107

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:107 17/07/2006 17:07:00

 checks at 1/4 span relate to hogging and any top steel required at
either of these points is provided throughout the span.

Graf!
This sheet provides data for the charts in MAIN! and ACTIONS!:
it is not intended for formal printing.

Notes!
This sheet gives disclaimers and revision history.

108

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:108 17/07/2006 17:07:01

 RCC43 Wide Beams (A & D).xls

RCC43 Wide Beams (A & D)/ MAIN!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made by Date Sheet No
Location D&D: Main beam Grids C to H from grid 1 to 3 rmw 11-Apr-06 109
55
WIDE BEAM (Analysis & Design) to BS 8110:2005 Checked Revision Job No
Originated from RCC43 v3.0 on CD © 2006 TCC chg - R68

LOCATION Supports from grid 1 to grid 3

MATERIALS COVERS (to all steel)

fcu 40 N/mm² h agg 20 mm Top cover 25 mm
fyl 500 N/mm² γs 1.15 Btm cover 40 mm
fyv 250 N/mm² γc 1.50 Side cover 35 mm
steel class A
SPANS L (m) H (mm) bw (mm) hf (mm) Type bf (mm) LOADING PATTERN
SPAN 1 5.50 375 1200 125 T 1900 min max
SPAN 2 8.00 375 1200 125 T 2100 DEAD 1 1.4
SPAN 3 8.50 375 1200 125 T 2200 IMPOSED 0 1.6
SPAN 4 4.00 375 1200 125 T 1650 REBAR LAYERING
SPAN 5 Support steel
SPAN 6 in alt layer ? N

SUPPORTS ABOVE (m) H (mm) B (mm) End Cond BELOW (m) H (mm) B (mm) End Cond
Support 1 3.75 300 300 F 3.75 300 300 F
Support 2 3.75 300 300 F 3.75 300 300 F
Support 3 3.75 300 300 F 3.75 300 300 F
Support 4 3.75 300 300 F 3.75 300 300 F
Support 5 3.75 300 300 F 3.75 300 300 F
Support 6
Support 7

LOADING UDLs (kN/m) PLs (kN) Position (m)

Dead Imposed Position Loaded Dead Imposed Position Loaded
Span 1 Load Load from left Length Span 4 Load Load from left Length
UDL 62.2 30.0 ~~~~~ ~~~~~ UDL 62.2 30.0 ~~~~~
PL 1 ~~~~~ PL 1 ~~~~~
PL 2 ~~~~~ PL 2 ~~~~~
Part UDL Part UDL
Span 2 Span 5
UDL 62.2 30.0 ~~~~~ ~~~~~ UDL ~~~~~ ~~~~~
PL 1 25.0 25.0 4.00 ~~~~~ PL 1 ~~~~~
PL 2 ~~~~~ PL 2 ~~~~~
Part UDL Part UDL
Span 3 Span 6
UDL 62.2 30.0 ~~~~~ ~~~~~ UDL ~~~~~ ~~~~~
PL 1 ~~~~~ PL 1 ~~~~~
PL 2 ~~~~~ PL 2 ~~~~~
Part UDL Part UDL

LOADING DIAGRAM

1 3
REACTIONS (kN)
SUPPORT 1 2 3 4 5
ALL SPANS LOADED 271.5 1037.5 1178.6 965.4 134.2
ODD SPANS LOADED 323.2 637.7 889.8 830.3 -19
EVEN SPANS LOADED 74.4 831.0 907.4 539.8 214.1
Characteristic Dead 126.1 464.7 551.6 438.4 61.4 0.0 0.0
Max Service Imposed 71.1 236.7 273.4 210.0 63.0 0.0 0.0
Min Service Imposed -16.3 0.0 0.0 0.0 -32.9 0.0 0.0

109

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:109 17/07/2006 17:07:02

 RCC43 Wide Beams (A & D)/ ACTIONS!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made by Date Page
Location D&D: Main beam Grids C to H, from grid 1 to 3 rmw 11-Apr-06 56
110
WIDE BEAM (Analysis & Design) to BS 8110:2005 Checked Revision Job No
Originated from RCC43 v3.0 on CD © 2006 TCC chg - R68
BENDING MOMENT DIAGRAMS (kNm)

1200 1000
1000 800
800
600
600
400
400
200 200
0 0
-200 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 0 5 10 15 20 25 30
-200
-400
-400
-600
-800 -600

1 Elastic Moments 3 1 Redistributed Envelope 3

SUPPORT No 1 2 3 4 5
Elastic M 95.0 661.2 888.9 661.3 33.6 ~ kNm/m
Redistributed M 95.0 661.2 755.6 661.3 33.6 ~ kNm/m
ßb 1.000 1.000 0.850 1.000 1.000 ~ ~
Redistribution 15.0%

SPAN No 1 2 3 4
Elastic M 291.64 561.87 542.57 136.11 ~ ~
Redistributed M 291.64 533.32 528.36 136.11 ~ ~
ßb 1.000 0.949 0.974 1.000 ~ ~
SHEARS (kN)

800 800
600 600
400 400
200 200

0 0
-200 -200
-400 -400
-600 -600
-800 -800
0 5 10 15 20 25 30 0 5 10 15 20 25 30

1 Elastic Shears 3 1 Redistributed Shears 3

SPAN No 1 2 3
Elastic V 323.2 471.5 570.4 605.1 604.6 570.3
Redistributed V 323.2 471.5 566.0 592.4 589.0 563.0

SPAN No 4
Elastic V 406.1 214.1 ~ ~ ~ ~
Redistributed V 406.1 214.1 ~ ~ ~ ~

COLUMN MOMENTS
(kNm) 1 2 3 4 5
ALL SPANS Above 29.7 25.9 4.7 -42.8 0.2
LOADED Below 29.7 25.9 4.7 -42.8 0.2
ODD SPANS Above 47.5 -20.6 57.2 -61.9 17.1
LOADED Below 47.5 -20.6 57.2 -61.9 17.1
EVEN SPANS Above -3.8 57.5 -49.2 -0.8 -16.8
LOADED Below -3.8 57.5 -49.2 -0.8 -16.8

110

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:110 17/07/2006 17:07:05

 RCC43 Wide Beams (A & D).xls

RCC43 Wide Beams (A & D)/ SPANS!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made by Date Page
Location D&D: Main beam Grids C to H, from grid 1 to 3 rmw 11-Apr-06 111
57
WIDE BEAM (Analysis & Design) to BS 8110:2005 Checked Revision Job No
Originated from RCC43 v3.0 on CD © 2006 TCC chg - R68

SPAN 1 LEFT CENTRE RIGHT

ACTIONS M kNm 48.0 291.6 540.1
ßb 1.00 1.00 1.00
DESIGN d mm 332.0 315.0 324.0
As mm² 350 2241 4449
As' mm² 0 0 0
TOP STEEL Layer 1 2H16 + 7H12 2H20 + 5H16 1H32 + 8H25
. . .
As prov mm² 1194 As' prov 1634 As prov 4731
BTM STEEL Layer 1 4H12 + 3H10 4H20 + 5H16 4H12 + 3H10
. . .
As' prov mm² 688 As prov 2262 As' prov 688
DEFLECTION L/d 17.460 Allowed 27.490
SHEAR V kN 258.1 Link Ø 407.5
v N/mm² 0.648 10 1.048
vc N/mm² 0.518 Nominal 0.832
LINKS R10 @ 225 for 675 R10 @ 225 R10 @ 225 for 675
legs No 7 7 7

CHECKS % As ok ok ok
Cover ok ok ok
min S ok ok ok
max S ok ok ok
Links ok ok ok
Main bars ok ok ok
max V ok ok
Deflection ok

SPAN 2 LEFT CENTRE RIGHT

ACTIONS M kNm 577.9 533.3 668.6
ßb 1.00 0.95 0.86
DESIGN d mm 324.0 309.0 324.0
As mm² 4825 4179 5787
As' mm² 0 0 0
TOP STEEL Layer 1 2H32 + 7H25 1H20 + 6H16 3H32 + 7H25
. . .
As prov mm² 5045 As' prov 1521 As prov 5849
BTM STEEL Layer 1 1H20 + 6H16 3H32 + 6H25 1H20 + 6H16
. . .
As' prov mm² 1521 As prov 5358 As' prov 1521
DEFLECTION L/d 25.890 Allowed 26.212 As auto-increased by 28.2 %
SHEAR V kN 502.0 Link Ø 528.4
v N/mm² 1.291 10 1.359
vc N/mm² 0.675 Nominal 0.893
LINKS R10 @ 150 for 1050 R10 @ 225 R10 @ 200 for 800
legs No 7 7 7

CHECKS % As ok ok ok
Cover ok ok ok
min S ok ok ok
max S ok ok ok
Links ok ok ok
Main bars ok ok ok
max V ok ok
Deflection ok

111

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:111 17/07/2006 17:07:08

 RCC43 Wide Beams (A & D)/ SPANS!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made by Date Page
Location D&D: Main beam Grids C to H, from grid 1 to 3 rmw Apr-2006 112
58
WIDE BEAM (Analysis & Design) to BS 8110:2005 Checked Revision Job No
Originated from RCC43 v3.0 on CD © 2006 TCC chg - R68

SPAN 3 LEFT CENTRE RIGHT

ACTIONS M kNm 669.3 528.4 578.4
ßb 0.85 0.97 1.00
DESIGN d mm 324.0 309.0 324.0
As mm² 5794 4140 4831
As' mm² 0 0 0
TOP STEEL Layer 1 3H32 + 7H25 4H16 + 4H12 2H32 + 7H25
. . .
As prov mm² 5849 As' prov 1257 As prov 5045
BTM STEEL Layer 1 1H20 + 6H16 5H32 + 4H25 1H20 + 6H16
. . .
As' prov mm² 1521 As prov 5985 As' prov 1521
DEFLECTION 27.508 Allowed 28.312 As auto-increased by 38.3 %
SHEAR V kN 524.9 Link Ø V 499.0
v N/mm² 1.350 10 v 1.283
vc N/mm² 0.709 Nominal vc 0.850
LINKS R10 @ 150 for 1050 R10 @ 225 R10 @ 225 for 900
legs No 7 7 7

CHECKS % As ok ok ok
Cover ok ok ok
min S ok ok ok
max S ok ok ok
Links ok ok ok
Main bars ok ok ok
max V ok ok
Deflection ok

SPAN 4 LEFT CENTRE RIGHT

ACTIONS M kNm 498.1 136.1 3.0
ßb 1.00 1.00 1.00
DESIGN d mm 327.5 317.0 332.0
As mm² 3986 1039 22
As' mm² 0 0 0
TOP STEEL Layer 1 7H25 + 2H20 1H25 + 6H20 2H16 + 7H12
. . .
As prov mm² 4064 As' prov 2376 As prov 1194
BTM STEEL Layer 1 7H8 1H16 + 8H12 7H8
. . .
As' prov mm² 352 As prov 1106 As' prov 352
DEFLECTION 12.618 Allowed 37.733
SHEAR V kN 341.6 Link Ø 149.0
v N/mm² 0.869 10 0.374
vc N/mm² 0.624 Nominal 0.518
LINKS R10 @ 225 for 450 R10 @ 225 R10 @ 225 for 450
legs No 7 7 7

CHECKS % As ok ok ok
Cover ok ok ok
min S ok ok ok
max S ok ok ok
Links ok ok ok
Main bars ok ok ok
max V ok ok
Deflection ok

112

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:112 17/07/2006 17:07:10

 RCC51 Column Load Take-down & Design.xls
RCC51 Column Load Take-down & Design.xls
Conventional column load take downs by hand can be time-
consuming. This spreadsheet emulates conventional column
design to BS 8110(2) by providing on separate sheets: load take
down from inputs of location, dimensions, levels and loads to give
design axial loads and moments per floor. RCC51.xls is intended
as a stand-alone column design spreadsheet for use when a sub-
frame analysis is not available or is unwarranted. As in COLUMN!
within RCC11.xls, this spreadsheet determines the area of steel
required (As).
The spreadsheet is set up in such a way that one column size
(input in CDES!) is used throughout the height of the column
location and that the critical section for design occurs where axial
load is at its maximum.
The example is based on Designed and detailed (15) but differs in
several respects:
■ Seven storeys used in the example rather than three (in order
to demonstrate automatic input adequately)
■ No special account taken of roof loadings (in order to
demonstrate automatic input adequately)
■ All columns are taken as 4.00 m long (again, in order to
demonstrate automatic input adequately)
■ Load distribution according to BS 8110: Part 1, Clause 3.8.2.3,
i.e. reaction factors of 0.5 are used for loads from adjacent
spans rather than results of analysis or using shear force
factors from BS 8110: Part 1 Tables 3.5 and/or 3.12.
■ No double counting of floor slabs due to allowances for floor
slabs in design of, therefore reactions from, edge beams
spanning parallel to floor slab span.
As a default the level with maximum axial load with concurrent
maximum moment, i.e. the bottom level, is chosen for
consideration in DESMMNTS! (derivation of design moments)
and CDES! (design). The user may investigate other levels by
choosing the appropriate level in the combo-box on the right
hand side of CDES!.
Unbraced columns may be designed, but the spreadsheet
demands some input of applied moment in LOADTD! in the
appropriate axis. If the column is unbraced then it must be part of
a stability frame – if only nominally – with moments that should
be input as applied moments in LOADTD!
LOADTD!
Input is self explanatory but, in order to facilitate use of this
spreadsheet, some degree of automation has been introduced.
It is vital that input data is hand checked to ensure the loads
are described properly. It is also advised that a clean version of
the spreadsheet should be used for each column analysed and
designed (i.e. reload the base spreadsheet each time).
EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:113
Please note when inputting a location for numbered gridlines
to start with an apostrophe, i.e. use ’2 - 3 (otherwise 2 - 3 will
give the result of -1!). Cantilevers may be dealt with by inputting
no beam on the appropriate axis but inputting additional loads
and moments (under ‘At column position, other applied loads
(e.g. loads from cantilevers)’). Note that, so far as the column
is concerned, cantilever moments will relieve (or even exceed
fixed end) beam moments and should be specified as negative
moments.
As explained under Operator Instructions deleting a level will
‘grey-out’ subsequent columns and set spans to 0.0 m. Enter
data (and delete any subsequent hatches, #####) or equate
cells to previous cells (avoid copying cells across) to get up to
10 levels of load take down. Deleting or setting a value of 0 in
columns G to P will ‘grey-out’ values to the right, which will be
set at 0.0. Generally, input values are carried through to the right.
Red figures or red backgrounds mean inconsistent or incorrect
data entries. Overwrite if incorrect.
Slab spans may be parallel to x or y, or two-way spanning.
Troughed slabs may be modelled by using the topping thickness
for the slab and adding widths of ribs within a bay to the width
of the beam.
Some input (highlighted in magenta) defaults to values from
other sheets. For instance column dimensions are input in CDES!
The user may immediately see whether the design is viable or not
and change dimensions accordingly. These cells are not protected
so can be overwritten: beware. For troughed slabs use topping
thickness and aggregate width of ribs with width of beam.
Reduction factors for live load to according to BS 6399: Part 1(19)
Clause 5.2 are automatically applied to axial load unless specified
otherwise.
DESMMNTS!
The basic design procedure is covered in BS 8110: Part 1 Clause
3.8. In order to determine design moments several inputs are
required:
■ Values of ß for braced and unbraced columns are required
at G15:H15, see Clause 3.8.1.6 and Tables 3.19 and 3.20 as
shown overleaf.
■ Whether the column is braced or un-braced – see BS 8110:
Part 1, Clause 3.8.1.5.
■ In order to evaluate Nuz and thus K accurately, an initial
assessment of the area of reinforcement, As, is required
at cell N22. An indication of the probable percentage of
reinforcement is given at Q23 (automation of this figure
would cause a circular reference error in the spreadsheet). If
As is set at 0% then effectively K = 1, which is conservative
(see BS 8110: Part 1, equation 33 and definitions under
Clause 3.8.1.1).
113
17/07/2006 17:07:13
 Table 2
Values of ß for braced columns Values of ß for unbraced columns
Values of ß for braced and
unbraced columns
End condition at top End condition at bottom End condition at bottom

1 2 3 1 2 3

1 0.75 0.80 0.90 1.20 1.30 1.50

2 0.80 0.85 0.95 1.30 1.50 1.80

3 0.90 0.95 1.00 1.60 1.80 -

4 - - - 2.20 - -

Condition 1 - column monolithically connected to beam at least as deep as the column in the plane
considered (or foundation specifically designed for moment)
Condition 2 - column monolithically connected to beams or slabs shallower than the column in the plane
considered
Condition 3- column connected to members which will provide some nominal restraint
Condition 4- column unrestrained
NOTE: Taken from BS 8110 Tables 3.19 and 3.20

CDES!
As in COLUMN! within RCC11.xls, this sheet designs symmetrical
rectangular columns where both axial load, N, and design
moment, Mx or My (see BS 8110: Part 1, Clause 3.8.2, 3 and 4)
have been calculated from previous sheets. CDES! iterates x/h to
determine where the neutral axis lies. The sheet includes stress
and strain diagrams to aid comprehension of the final design
(please refer to notes regarding COLUMN! in
RCC11.xls).
The spreadsheet is set up in such a way that one column size
(input in CDES!) is used throughout the height of the column
location and that the critical section for design occurs where axial
load is at its maximum.
Ltdcalcs!
This sheet shows workings for the load take-down and is not
necessarily intended for printing out other than for checking
purposes. Load distribution works according to BS 8110: Part 1,
Clause 3.8.2.3 – “…axial force in a column may be calculated on
the assumption that beams and slabs transmitting force into it
are simply supported”.
Stiffs!
This sheet shows workings for beam and column stiffnesses
and is not necessarily intended for printing out other than for
checking purposes.

Other levels can be investigated by choosing the appropriate In the determination of section properties, beams are considered
level from the combo-box located under Operating Instructions. full height – beam widths are deducted from slab widths. Moment
Always ensure that the size of column designed is correct for the distribution works according to BS 8110: Part 1, Clause 3.2.1.2.5
level under consideration. – “… beams possess half their actual stiffness”.

For simplicity, where three or more bars are required in the

top and bottom of the section, a (rotationally) symmetrical Notes!
arrangement of reinforcement is proffered, i.e. top and bottom
reinforcement with additional side bars. The argument goes that This sheet gives disclaimers and revision history.
using the critical axis method of BS 8110 to determine areas
of steel in bi-axially bent columns implies that the bars are in
the corners of the element. Therefore ‘additional’ side bars help
ensure this is so. Counter-arguments suggest these additional
bars are unnecessary. Bresaler’s load contour check [(Mx / Mux )a
+ (My / Muy )a < 1.0, where a = 2/3 + 5N/3Nuz], used in CP 110(20)
is not adopted in this spreadsheet but may be investigated using
RCC53.xls.

Some input (highlighted in magenta) defaults to values from

other sheets. These cells are not protected so can be overwritten:
beware.

114

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:114 17/07/2006 17:07:15

 RCC51 Column Load Take-down & Design.xls

RCC51 Column Load Take-down & Design/ LOADTD!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made by Date Page
Location Edge Column B1 (akin to D&D) rmw 11-Apr-06 115
85
COLUMN LOAD TAKE DOWN & DESIGN FOR SYMMETRICALLY REINFORCED RECT. COLUMNS BENT ABOUT TWO AXES TO BS 8110:2005 Checked Revision Job No
Originated from RCC51.xls v3.0 © 2006 TCC chg - R68

INPUT 1-2
3
Location Edge Column B1 (akin to D&D) y concrete density, kN/m 24.0

fgk 1.40
Orientation A-B x x B-C H
fqk 1.60

y
n/a

Level 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Dimensions
Spans Cl to Cl A-B m 5.00 5.00 5.00 5.00 5.00 5.00 5.00
B-C m 5.00 5.00 5.00 5.00 5.00 5.00 5.00
1-2 m 7.50 7.50 7.50 7.50 7.50 7.50 7.50
n/a m 0.00

Slab thickness (solid) mm 175 175 175 175 175 175 175
span direction,(II to) x, y or b x x x x x x x

Beams width A-B mm 300 300 300 300 300 300 300
depth o/a A-B mm 350 350 350 350 350 350 350
width B-C mm 300 300 300 300 300 300 300
depth o/a B-C mm 350 350 350 350 350 350 350
width 1-2 mm 300 300 300 300 300 300 300
depth o/a 1-2 mm 500 500 500 500 500 500 500
width n/a mm 0
depth o/a n/a mm 0

Column below (col above)

H (ll to yy) mm 300 300 300 300 300 300 300
B (ll to xx) mm 300 300 300 300 300 300 300
Height (fl. to floor.) m 4.00 4.00 4.00 4.00 4.00 4.00 4.00

Level 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 0
Loads (characteristic uno)
Slab (inc swt.) gk kN/m2 5.00 5.00 5.00 5.00 5.00 5.00 5.00
qk kN/m2 4.00 4.00 4.00 4.00 4.00 4.00 4.00

Beams (swt.) gk kN/m included included included included included included included included included included
line loads (-extra over slab loads and beam self weight)
A-B gk kN/m 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0
qk kN/m 0.0
B-C gk kN/m 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0
qk kN/m 0.0
1-2 gk kN/m 0.0
qk kN/m 0.0
n/a gk kN/m 0.0
qk kN/m 0.0

At column position, other applied loads (eg loads from cantilevers)

Gk kN (char) 0.0
Qk kN (char) 0.0
Mxx kNm (ult) 0.0
Myy kNm (ult) 0.0

Loads per floor

Floor Gk kN 133.8 133.8 133.8 133.8 133.8 133.8 133.8
Floor Qk kN 75.0 75.0 75.0 75.0 75.0 75.0 75.0
Column below Gk kN 8.6 8.6 8.6 8.6 8.6 8.6 8.6

OUTPUT Column level 7 to 6 6 to 5 5 to 4 4 to 3 3 to 2 2 to 1 Below 1

Cumulative loads in column.
Gk kN 142.5 284.9 427.4 569.9 712.3 854.8 997.3
Redn Qk kN 75.0 150.0 225.0 300.0 375.0 450.0 525.0
factors Qk redn factor 1.0 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.6 0.6 0.6
OK*? Y Qk red* kN 75.0 135.0 180.0 210.0 225.0 270.0 315.0
N kN 319 615 886 1134 1357 1629 1900
Moments in column
about x-x Mxx top kNm 112.6 91.7 91.7 91.7 91.7 91.7 91.7
about y-y Myy top kNm 1.6 1.3 1.3 1.3 1.3 1.3 1.3
Mxx bottom kNm 91.7 91.7 91.7 91.7 91.7 91.7
Myy bottom kNm 1.3 1.3 1.3 1.3 1.3 1.3

115

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:115 17/07/2006 17:07:16

 RCC51 Column Load Take-down & Design/ DESMMNTS!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made by Date Page
Location Edge Column B1 (akin to D&D) rmw 11-Apr-06 116
86
COLUMN LOAD TAKE DOWN & DESIGN FOR SYMMETRICALLY REINFORCED RECT. COLUMNS BENT ABOUT TWO AXES TO BS
8110:2005 Checked Revision Job No
Originated from RCC51.xls v3.0 © 2006 TCC chg - R68

INPUT Location Edge Column B1 (akin to D&D)

Level considered: Bottom (Max N) Orientation 1-2
y
Dimensions about x-x about y-y
h (ll to yy) mm 300 - A-B x x B-C H
b (ll to xx) mm - 300
lo, clear height mm 3500 3650 y
ß value 0.90 0.90 n/a
Height (fl. to floor.) 4.00 m
Column properties
Braced or Unbraced? B or U B B fcu 35
fy 500
Loads cover to link mm 30
Axial N kN 1900 - Max sized main bar mm 32
Moments top kNm 91.7 1.3 Probable percentage As % 2.00%
bottom kNm 0.0 0.0 link diameter mm 8
OUTPUT
Design criteria
N kNm 1900
M kN 92.1
about X-X
PROOF
Slenderness Design moments (cont) about x-x about y-y
le mm 3150 3285 Design moments for unbraced columns
Slenderness 10.50 10.95 M2+100% Madd kNm n/a n/a
Limit for short column 15.0 15.0 eminN kNm n/a n/a
Design column as Short Maximum kNm n/a n/a
Column is Short Short
about x-x about y-y Design moments
kNm 91.7 1.3
Design moments about x-x about y-y
Min eccentricity, 0.05 h kNm 28.5 Short
Braced Braced
Madd n/a - short column
d mm 246 246
Nuz kN 2200.1 2200.1
Nbal kN 645.8 645.8 Biaxial bending
K 0.193 0.193 Mx/h' 0.373
b' or, if slender, h? - b' mm 246 246 My/b 0.005
ßa 0.082 0.089 Critical direction X-X
au mm 4.7 5.2
Madd kNm 0.0 0.0 N/bhfcu 0.60
Eqns 32-35 ok to use? ok ß 0.30
Braced columns M1 kNm 0.0 0.0
Mi kNm 55.0 0.8 Maximum design moment
Mi, (Mi=0 if Le/h>20) kNm 55.0 0.8 = 91.7+0.30*246/246*1.3
Mi, (Mi=0 if b/h>3) 55.0 0.8
= kNm 92.1 -
Design moments for braced columns
M2 kNm 91.7 1.3
Mi+Madd kNm 55.0 0.8
M1+Madd/2 kNm 0.0 0.0
eminN kNm 28.5 n/a
Maximum kNm 91.7 1.3

116

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:116 17/07/2006 17:07:19

 RCC51 Column Load Take-down & Design.xls

RCC51 Column Load Take-down & Design/ CDES!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made by Date Page
Location Edge Column B1 (akin to D&D) rmw 11-Apr-06 87
117
COLUMN LOAD TAKE DOWN & DESIGN FOR SYMMETRICALLY REINFORCED RECT. COLUMNS
BENT ABOUT TWO AXES TO BS 8110:2005 Checked Revision Job No
Originated from RCC51.xls v3.0 © 2006 TCC chg - R68

INPUT Level designed: Bottom (Max N)

Axial load, N 1900 kN fcu 35 N/mm²
Moment, M 92.1 kNm fy 500 N/mm²
about X-X axis fyv 500 N/mm²
Height, h (ll to yy, L'r to xx) 300 mm γm 1.15 steel
Breadth, b (ll to xx) 300 mm γm 1.5 concrete
Max bar diameter 32 mm Link Ø 8 mm
cover (to link) 30 mm steel class A
CALCULATIONS
from M As = {M - 0.67fcu.b.dc(h/2 - dc/2)}/[(h/2-d').(fsc+fst).
m]
from N As = (N - 0.67fcu.b.dc/
m) / (fsc - fst) As = Ast = Asc: dc=min(h,0.9x)
d' = 54 mm .67fcu/
m = 15.6 N/mm²
d= 246 mm fy/
m = 434.8 N/mm²
critical about X-X axis:…... h= 300 mm
b= 300 mm

from iteration, neutral axis depth, x, = 266.3 mm

dc 239.7 mm
0.67.fcu.b.dc/
m 1124.0 kN
Steel comp strain 0.00279
Steel tens strain -0.00027
Steel stress in comp. face, fsc 435 N/mm2 (Comp. stress in reinf.)
Steel stress in tensile face, fst -53 N/mm2 (Tensile stress in reinf.)
from M, As = 1590 mm2
from N, As = 1590 mm2 OK

As req'd = 1590mm² T&B:- PROVIDE 4H32

(ie 2H32 T&B - 1609mm²T&B) - 3.57% o/a - @192 cc.)
Links : - PROVIDE H8 @ 300
.
OK
Strain diagram Stress diagram
15.6 N/mm²
0.00350
435
0.00279
about X-X axis

0.00027
53 Notes
2
-0.00044 Stresses in N/mm

Compression +ve

117

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:117 17/07/2006 17:07:22

 RCC52 Column Chart generation.xls
This spreadsheet generates axial load:design moment interaction The chart shows lines for 0.1fcuAc and Mmin. The user should be
charts for symmetrically reinforced rectangular columns. It aware that all load cases should be within the boundaries of
checks the capacity of the columns with various arrangements of these lines.
reinforcement against input load cases of axial load and uniaxial
bending.
Calcs!
Within RCC11.xls, COLUMN! allows the user to determine the
area of steel required from inputs of axial load and moment about Calcs! Shows the derivation of the charts where moment capacity
the x - x axis. Another approach, adopted in BS 5400(21) and CP is calculated at intervals of neutral axis depth from n.a. depth for
110(20) and more suited to the grouping of columns on particular N = 0 to n.a. depth for N = Nbal, then at intervals from n.a. depth
projects and adopted here by RCC52.xls, is to give an interaction for N = Nbal to n.a. depth for N = Nuz.
chart. This shows axial load against moment for symmetrical
sections of specified size, strength and reinforcement. It works on
the premise of calculating the moment and axial load capacities Cases!
of a section with assumed amounts of reinforcement and
assumed neutral axis depth. Iterations of neutral axis depth give Cases! identifies the smallest bar diameter that satisfies each of
data for the Axial load:Moment interaction chart for the specified the load cases.
section. The spreadsheet also checks the reinforcement required
for input load cases. The user may try different arrangements of
reinforcement. Notes!
RCC52.xls assumes that the moments input in the load cases This sheet gives disclaimers and revision history.
have already been adjusted, if necessary, for bi-axial bending. For
many side and all corner columns, there is no choice but to design
for bi-axial bending, and the method given in Clause 3.8.4.5 must
be adhered to, i.e. RCC53.xls should be used.

MAIN!
Main! contains all input and output data, Bending is assumed to
be about the x - x, i.e. horizontal axis, and the input moment
is assumed to be the maximum design moment as defined in BS
8110 i.e. including Madd etc and in the correct orientation.

Where more than two bars are required per face, the user may
choose to specify a similar arrangement of bars on the side
faces in order to avoid confusion in detailing and fixing. In this
respect, there is also a question regarding design. To an extent
all columns are bi-axially bent and BS 8110 directs that bi-axially
bent columns are effectively designed about one axis only (by
adding moment in the critical direction to account for moment
in the non-critical direction). By implication the second axis is
not designed specifically.

One reason for adding side bars (when three, four or more bars
are required T & B) in square(ish) sections, is to ensure that the
second axis is catered for. Ideally with BS 8110, the resultant
axis should be found and calculations done accordingly. But this
presumes that the arrangement of bars is known to start with.
With BS 5400 and CP 110 checks are carried out on a chosen
section about both axes. Bi-axially bent columns are dealt with
in RCC53.xls

118

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:118 17/07/2006 17:07:26

 RCC52 Column Chart generation.xls

RCC52 Column Chart generation/ MAIN!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made by Date Page
Location Columns at A1, A2 etc RMW 11-Apr-06 94
119
COLUMN CHART FOR SYMMETRICALLY REINFORCED RECTANGULAR COLUMNS
BENT ABOUT THE X-X AXIS TO BS 8110:2005 Checked Revision Job No
Originated from 'RCC52.xls ' v3.0 on CD © 2006 TCC chg - R68

MATERIALS
fcu 30 N/mm² γm 1.15 steel Cover 30 mm
fy 500 N/mm² γm 1.5 concrete h agg 20 mm
steel class A
SECTION
h 400 mm
b 400 mm X X SINGLE AXIS
with 3 bars per face BENDING
All bars in 400 wide faces

BAR ARRANGEMENTS
Type Bar Ø Asc % Link Ø Bar c/c Nbal (kN) Nuz (kN) Checks
H 32 3.02 8 146.0 1113.7 4177.4 ok
H 25 1.84 8 149.5 1104.4 3385.1 ok
H 20 1.18 6 154.0 1106.9 2938.3 ok
H 16 0.75 6 156.0 1105.8 2652.3 ok
H 12 0.42 6 158.0 1106.2 2429.9 ok
H 10 0.00 6 159.0 0.0 0.0 < 0.4% - ignored

N:M INTERACTION CHART for 400 x 400 column, grade C30, 30 mm cover and 3 bars on
400 mm faces

4500
M min KEY
4000
6H32
3500
AXIAL COMPRESSION, N, kN

6H25
3000 3000

2500 6H20

2000 6H16
1850
1500 1500 6H12

1000 1000 1000

500 500 0.1fcuAc

0
0 100 200 300 400 500
MOMENT Mx
kNm

LOADCASES Load case N (kN) Mx' (kNm) Load case N (kN) Mx' (kNm)
A1 top 500 200 6 H20 4 1500 150 6 H16
A1 bot 1850 100 6 H16 5 1000 150 6 H12
A2 bot 3000 50 6 H25 6 1000 50 6 H12

119

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:119 17/07/2006 17:07:27

 RCC53 Column Design.xls
RCC53.xls generates column design charts for symmetrically ‘K’ in C40:C49 refers to the reduction factor as per equation 33
reinforced rectangular columns bent about two axes and checks in BS8110.
input load cases. For circular columns RCC54.xls may be used.

RCC53.xls also gives interaction charts, showing axial load against
moment for the critical axis for symmetrical rectangular sections
of specified size, strength and reinforcement arrangement. The
user may try different arrangements of reinforcement. It also
provides designs for input load cases, which are plotted on the
relevant x- or y- axis chart.
RCC53.xls takes account of any side-bars.
CHARTS!
CHARTS! shows two charts, one chart for when Mxx is critical and
one for when Myy is critical. These Axial load:Moment interaction
charts for the specified section also show relevant input load
cases. The charts show lines for 0.1 fcuAc and Mmin (i.e. emin N). The
user should be aware that all load cases should be within the
boundaries of these lines. Due to a quirk in Excel, load cases can
only be identified by axial load, N, on the charts.

Philosophy of design for bi-axially

bent columns Xcal! and Ycal!
These sheets show the derivation of the charts where moment
When preparing this spreadsheet, there was some discussion
and axial load capacity is calculated at intervals of neutral axis
about the interpretation of BS 8110 with respect to bi-axially
depth (in intervals from n.a. depth for N = 0 to n.a. depth for N =
bent columns and the provision of side bars.
Nbal, then in intervals from n.a. depth for N = Nbal to n.a. depth
for N = Nuz. .).
For simplicity, where three or more bars are required in the top
and bottom of the section, it appears to be common practice,
in small- to medium-sized columns at least, to provide a
(rotationally) symmetrical arrangement of reinforcement, i.e. to
Cases!
provide additional side bars. The argument goes that using the Cases! identifies the smallest bar diameter that satisfies each
critical axis method of BS 8110 to determine areas of steel in of the load cases. Clause 3.8.3.2 is included for both directions
bi-axially bent columns implies that the bars are in the corners (columns K & L) and the spreadsheet decides which axis is
of the element. Therefore ‘additional’ side bars help ensure that dominant.
this is so.

There is a counter argument to suggest that the design procedure

for bi-axially bent columns in BS 8110 makes the precaution of
Notes!
adding additional side bars unnecessary. This sheet gives disclaimers and revision history.
(22)
Rafiq argues that the Bresaler’s load contour check, as used in
CP 110( 20) should be adopted to ensure a safe design for bi-axially
bent columns otherwise designed to BS 8110, as shown below.

(Mx /Mux)a + (My /Muy)a < 1.0, where a = 2/3 + 5N/3Nuz

MAIN!
MAIN! contains all input data and gives designs for the input load
cases.

Guidance for the input is given within the spreadsheet but users
should be familiar with BS 8110: Part 1, Clause 3.8 which deals
with column design. The input moments under LOADCASES are
the initial end moments due to ultimate design loads is defined
in BS 8110 about the appropriate axes for slender columns. The
spreadsheet calculates the additional design ultimate moment
induced by deflection of column (Madd), the critical direction for
bi-axial bending and the design moment.

120

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:120 17/07/2006 17:07:31

 RCC53 Column Design.xls

RCC53 Column Design/ MAIN!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made by Date Page
Location Ground floor columns at B1, B2 etc RMW 11-Apr-06 121
96
SYMMETRICALLY REINFORCED RECTANGULAR COLUMN DESIGN, BENT ABOUT TWO
AXES TO BS 8110:2005 Checked Revision Job No
Originated from RCC53.xls v3.0 on CD © 2006 TCC chg - R68

MATERIALS
fcu 35 N/mm² γm, steel 1.15 Cover to link 30 mm
fy 500 N/mm² γm, conc 1.5 h agg 20 mm
steel class A
SECTION
h 400 mm
b 300 mm
with 3 #N/A X X
and 3 #N/A
#N/A

RESTRAINTS Top Btm

Lo (mm) Condition Condition Braced ? ß Le (mm) Slenderness Status
X-AXIS 3600 2 2 Y 0.85 3060 Lex/h = 7.65 Column is
Y-AXIS 3600 2 2 Y 0.85 3060 Ley/b = 10.20 SHORT

LOADCASES AXIAL TOP MOMENTS (kNm) BTM MOMENTS (kNm)

N (kN) M ix M iy M ix M iy
B1 3500 90.0 25.0 90.0 25.0
B2 3000 80.0 60.0 80.0 60.0
Loadcase 3 1000 100.0 35.0 100.0 35.0
Loadcase 4 1200 50.0 150.0 50.0 150.0
Loadcase 5 500 220.0 90.0 220.0 90.0
Loadcase 6 2500 35.0 25.0 35.0 25.0

BAR ARRANGEMENTS BAR CENTRES (mm)

Bar Ø Asc % Link Ø 300 Face 400 Face Nuz (kN) Checks
H 40 8.38 10 90 140 0 Asc > 6 % (3.12.6.2)
H 32 5.36 8 96 146 4573 ok
H 25 3.27 8 100 150 3522 ok
H 20 2.09 6 104 154 2929 ok
H 16 1.34 6 106 156 2550 ok
H 12 0.75 6 108 158 2255 ok

DESIGN MOMENTS (kNm) X AXIS Y AXIS COMBINED

K M add Mx M add My Axis M' REBAR max V *
B1 0.000 0.0 90.0 0.0 25.0 X 100.5 8 H32 99.6
B2 0.000 0.0 80.0 0.0 60.0 Y 77.1 8 H32 102.3
Loadcase 3 0.000 0.0 100.0 0.0 35.0 X 135.1 8 H12 52.0
Loadcase 4 0.000 0.0 50.0 0.0 150.0 Y 173.8 8 H25 86.5
Loadcase 5 0.000 0.0 220.0 0.0 90.0 X 329.0 No Fit 97.3
Loadcase 6 0.000 0.0 35.0 0.0 37.5 Y 45.1 8 H25 88.1

SEE CHARTS ON NEXT SHEET

121

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:121 17/07/2006 17:07:32

 RCC53 Column Design/ CHARTS!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made by Date Page
Location Ground floor columns at B1, B2 etc RMW 11-Apr-06 122
97
SYMMETRICALLY REINFORCED RECTANGULAR COLUMN DESIGN, BENT ABOUT
TWO AXES TO BS 8110:2005 Checked Revision Job No
Originated from RCC53.xls v3.0 on CD © 2006 TCC chg - R68

N:M interaction chart: Mx' critical

400 x 300 column (h x b), grade C35, 30 mm cover
5000
Mx min
4500 KEY

4000

3500 3500
8H32
AXIAL LOAD, kN

3000

2500 8H25

2000 8H20

1500
8H16
1000 1000
8H12
500 500 0.1fcuAc

0 0
0 100 200 300 400 500
Mx' kNm

N:M interaction chart: My' critical

400 x 300 column (h x b), moment about yy axis), Grade C35, 30 Cover
5000

My min
4500 KEY

4000

3500
8H32
AXIAL LOAD kN

3000 3000
8H25
2500 2500

2000 8H20

1500
8H16
1200
1000
8H12
500 0.1fcuAc

0 0
0 50 100 150 200 250 300
My' kNm

122

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:122 17/07/2006 17:07:36

 RCC54 Circular column charting .xls

RCC54 Circular column charting .xls

This spreadsheet generates design charts for circular reinforced
concrete columns. It shows the interaction between axial load
and applied moment. Designs for input design load cases are
given.

MAIN!
MAIN! contains all input data. It charts the relevant interaction
diagram and gives designs for the input load cases.

Some guidance for the input is given within the spreadsheet but
users should be familiar with BS 8110 Part 1, Clause 3.8 Columns.
The input moments should be the maximum design moments as
defined in BS 8110.

Calcs!
For each bar diameter size Calcs! works out the co-ordinates for
the N-M interaction diagram. Calcs! first works out the geometry
for columns with up to 16 bars, specifically the neutral axis depth
associated with no axial load, i.e. for N=0. Then for increments
of neutral axis depth, moment and axial load capacities are
calculated. The size of the increment is increased when neutral
axis depth exceeds 2/3d, i.e. as axial load predominates and less
accuracy is necessary.

Circle!
Circle! provides geometrical data for truncated circular sections
as look-up data for other sheets, notably for Calcs!

Cases!
For each load case, Cases! determines the smallest bar diameter
that satisfies the axial load and moment requirements. The input
load is used to look up the appropriate capacities from Calcs!.
These capacities are then used to determine the maximum
moment allowable with the specified axial load.

Notes!
This sheet gives disclaimers and revision history.

123

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:123 17/07/2006 17:07:38

 RCC53 Column Design/ MAIN!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made by Date Page
Location Columns at A1, A2 etc RMW 12-Apr-06 124
94
COLUMN CHART FOR CIRCULAR COLUMNS TO BS 8110:2005 Checked Revision Job No
Originated from 'RCC54.xls ' v3.0 on CD © 2006 TCC chg - R68

MATERIALS
fcu 35 N/mm² γm 1.15 steel Cover 30 mm
fy 500 N/mm² γm 1.5 concrete h agg 20 mm
steel class A
SECTION h 475 mm with 8 bars

BAR ARRANGEMENTS
Type Bar Ø Asc % Link Ø Bar c/c Nbal (kN) Nuz (kN) Checks
H 40 5.67 10 139.4 719 6984 ok
H 32 3.63 8 144.1 948 5467 ok
H 25 2.22 8 146.9 1028 4416 ok
H 20 1.42 6 150.4 1142 3824 ok
H 16 0.91 6 152.0 1152 3445 ok
H 12 0.51 6 153.5 1293 3150 ok

N:M INTERACTION CHART for 475 diameter column,

grade C35, 30 mm cover and 8 bars
8000
KEY
7000 M min

6000
AXIAL COMPRESSION, N, kN

8H40

5000 8H32

4000 4100 8H25

3600
3000 3000 8H20
2500
2000 8H16
1500
1000 8H12
650 0.1fcuAc

0
0 100 200 300 400 500 600
MOMENT M, kNm

LOADCASES Load case N (kN) M (kNm) Load case N (kN) M (kNm)

1 650 210 8 H20 4 1500 160 8 H12
2 4100 320 8 H40 5 2500 210 8 H25
3 3000 60 8 H16 6 3600 175 8 H32

124

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:124 17/07/2006 17:07:39


RCC61 Basement Wall.xls
This spreadsheet designs simple retaining basement walls and is
intended for walls up to 3.5 m high. It is based on complying with
BS 8002: 1994(4) and BS 8004: 1986(23) . It may also be used to
design walls to comply with CECP 2(6) and BS 8007(5).
The spreadsheet has been developed with both the BS 8002
and the conventional (CECP 2) methods in mind. On balance,
the spreadsheet provides reasonable flexibility and in doing so,
encourages the designer to employ his/ her own engineering
judgement and interpretation of the codes.
The spreadsheet is intended to cover only short walls and to
help ‘general’ engineers who, from time to time, design retaining
walls as part of a wider interest in structures, rather than the
specialists. The 3.5 m wall height is an arbitrary limit set for a
short wall which is intended to cover over 90% of the cases
encountered in ‘general’ structural designs. Although many of the
design principles still apply to higher walls, criteria such as wall
movements and the validity of the assumptions made (e.g. no
wall friction) require further consideration and investigation.
The effects of compaction pressures can be generated using
idealised imposed/ surcharged loads. Residual lateral pressure
calculations were considered to be too complicated to be covered
in the spreadsheet.
Many cells are referred to in formulae by names; for example,
DATA!C24 is given the name H which is used in formulae at M50:
N50, Diagrams!D146:D150, etc. A list of names and where they
are defined can be seen by referring to Insert\ Name\ Define in
Excel, having unprotected the current sheet. Input is required on
three sheets.
The spreadsheet is laid out in a very similar manner to RCC62.
xls. Correct display of the diagrams requires that the Tekton and
Marker fonts have been installed. See FAQ.
DATA!
This single sheet consists of the main inputs. Most inputs, which
are in blue and underlined, should be self-explanatory. The top
diagram defines most input parameters. Please note that unless
the Marker and Tekton fonts are loaded into the Windows font
folder the diagram will not display correctly. A simplistic chart
shows the geometry of a section of the wall and base.
The spreadsheet is based on a number of assumptions, which
should be assessed as being true or erring on the safe side in each
case.
These assumptions are:
■ Wall friction is zero
■ Minimum active earth pressure = 0.25qH
■ Granular backfill is used
EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:125
RCC61 Basement Wall.xls
■ The spreadsheet is not intended for walls over 3.5 m high
STABILITY! details other assumptions, i.e:
■ The wall idealised as a propped cantilever (i.e. pinned at top
and fixed at base)
■ The wall is braced
■ Maximum slenderness of wall is limited to 15, i.e. [ 0.9 x (He
- Tb/2)/Tw < 15 ]
■ Maximum ultimate axial load on wall is limited to 0.1fcu
times the wall cross-sectional area
■ Design span = Effective wall height = He - (Tb/2)
■ -ve moment is hogging (i.e. tension at external face of wall)
■ +ve moment is sagging (i.e. tension at internal face of wall)
■ ‘ Wall MT ‘ is maximum +ve moment on the wall
■ Estimated lateral deflections are used for checking the P∆
effects.
Factors for γf can be set at 1.4 or 1.6 in accordance with BS 8110
or may be set to 1. The designer has, and should have, the final
decision and responsibility to select the load factors he or she
feels are suitable to the design conditions. Under Operating
Instructions a number of checks are carried out and problems
highlighted.
An estimate of reinforcement per metre length of wall and base
is given. Further details about DATA! can be seen under the
description for RCC62.xls.
STABILITY!
STABILITY! calculates the overturning and restoring moments,
sliding and resisting forces on a section together with ground
bearing pressures and factors of safety. Failures are highlighted.
Factors of safety against overturning and sliding are required as
input. As noted in the sheet, wall and/ or surcharge loads may
have stabilising effects.
By using the buttons at L37:L40, the user should toggle between
maximum and minimum values to ascertain worst case(s)
(perhaps this will be automated some time).
In the case of sliding, where sliding resistance of the base alone is
insufficient, the user may choose, outside of the spreadsheet, to
rely on a propping force through the basement slab.
DESIGN!
The first page of this sheet tabulates moments and shears.
Input of eccentricity of vertical load, reinforcement diameters
and centres is required for main bending steel on both internal
and external faces and for transverse reinforcement. The
spreadsheet works on the principle of checking a proposed
125
17/07/2006 17:07:42
 section and reinforcement arrangement rather than proposing
an arrangement of reinforcement.

The second page details the design of both outer and inner parts
of the base. Again, the spreadsheet works on the principle of
checking a proposed section, and input of both reinforcement
diameter and centres is required for both main bending and
transverse reinforcement.

WEIGHT!
This sheet shows the build up to the estimate of reinforcement
weight given. The figures should be treated as approximate
estimates only as they cannot deal with the effects of designers’
and detailers’ preferences, rationalisation, etc.

Diagrams!
Diagrams! shows data for the charts used in other sheets but is
not necessarily intended for printing out other than for checking
purposes.

Crack width!
This sheet shows calculations to determine crack widths in the
wall. It is not necessarily intended for printing out, other than for
checking purposes.

Notes!
This sheet gives disclaimers and revision history.

126

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:126 17/07/2006 17:07:44

 RCC61 Basement Wall.xls

RCC61 Basement Wall/ DATA!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 etc The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made by Date Page
Location Grid line 2 rc 12-Apr-2006 127
95
Basement wall design to BS8110:2005 Checked Revision Job No
Originated from 'RCC61 Basement Wall..xls ' v3.0 © 2006 TCC chg - R68
IDEALISED STRUCTURE and FORCE DIAGRAMS DESIGN STATUS : VALID

DIMENSIONS(mm)
H= 3000 B= 3500 Tw = 225
Hw = 0 BI = 150 Tb = 350
He = 2500

MATERIAL PROPERTIES steel class A

fcu = 35 N/mm2 γm = 1.50 concrete
fy = 500 N/mm2 γm = 1.15 steel
Cover to tension reinforcement (co) = 40 mm
Max. allowable design surface crack width (W) = 0.3 mm (0.2 or 0.3 mm
only)
Concrete density = 24.0 kN/m3 Wall Geometry

SOIL PROPERTIES
Design angle of int'l friction of retained mat'l (Ø) = 30 degree
Design cohesion of retained mat'l (C ) = 0 kN/m2 (Only granular backfill considered, ie "C" = 0)
Density of retained mat'l (q ) = 20 kN/m3
Submerged Density of retained mat'l (qs ) = 13.33 kN/m3 (default=2/3 of q), only apply when Hw >0
Design angle of int'l friction of base mat'l (Øb) = 20 degree = 20.00
Design cohesion of base mat'l (Cb ) = 0 kN/m2 ASSUMPTIONS
Density of base mat'l (qb ) = 10 kN/m3 a) Wall friction is zero
Allowable gross ground bearing pressure (GBP) = 150 kN/m2 b) Minimum active earth pressure = 0.25qH
LOADINGS (unfactored) c) Granular backfill
Surcharge load -- live (SQK) = 10 kN/m2 h) Design not intended for walls over 3.5 m high
Surcharge load -- dead (SGK) = 10 kN/m2 i)Does not include check for temp or shrinkage eff
Line load -- live (LQK) = 15 kN/m
Line load -- dead (LGK) = 20 kN/m
Distance of line load from wall (X) = 250 mm
Wall load -- live (WQK) = 50 kN/m
Wall load -- Dead (WGK) = 50 kN/m

LATERAL FORCES Ko = 0.50 default Ko = (1-SIN Ø) = 0.50

Kac = 1.41 = 2Ko0.5

Force (kN) Lever arm (m) γf Ultimate Force (kN)

PE = 31.25 LE = 0.833 1.40 43.75
PS(GK) = 12.50 LS = 1.25 1.40 17.50
PS(QK) = 12.50 LS = 1.25 1.60 20.00
PL(GK) = 10.00 LL = 2.29 1.40 14.00
PL(QK) = 7.50 LL = 2.29 1.60 12.00
PW = 0.00 LW = 0.00 1.40 0.00
Total 73.75 107.25

127

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:127 17/07/2006 17:07:45

 RCC61 Basement Wall/ STABILITY!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 etc The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made by Date Page
Location Grid line 2 rc 12-Apr-2006 96
128
Basement wall design to BS8110:2005 Checked Revision Job No
Originated from 'RCC61 Basement Wall.xls' v3.0 © 2006 TCC chg - R68

EXTERNAL STABILITY STABILITY CHECK : OK

ANALYSIS - Assumptions & Notes

1) Wall idealised as a propped cantilever ( i.e. pinned at top and fixed at base )
2) Wall is braced.
3) Maximum slenderness of wall is limited to 15, i.e [ 0.9*(He-Tb/2)/Tw < 15 ]
4) Maximum Ultimate axial load on wall is limited to 0.1fcu times the wall cross-sectional area
5) Design Span (Effective wall height) = He - (Tb/2)
6) -ve moment is hogging ( i.e. tension at external face of wall )
+ve moment is sagging ( i.e. tension at internal face of wall )
7) " Wall MT. " is maximum +ve moment on the wall.
8) Estimated lateral deflections are used for checking the P ∆ effect .

UNFACTORED LOADS AND FORCES

Force Lever arm Base MT. Wall MT. Reaction at Reaction at Estimated Elastic
Lateral Force (kN) to base (m) (kNm) (kNm) Base (kN) Top (kN) Deflection ∆ (mm)
PE = 26.98 0.78 -10.11 4.14 23.15 3.82 0.2
PS(GK) = 11.62 1.16 -4.68 2.54 8.50 3.13 0.2
PS(QK) = 11.62 1.16 -4.68 2.54 8.50 3.13 0.1
PL(GK) = 10.00 2.12 -3.32 4.48 3.69 6.31 0.1
PL(QK) = 7.50 2.12 -2.49 3.36 2.77 4.73 0.0
PW = 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.0
Total 67.73 -25.28 17.06 46.61 21.12 0.6

GROUND BEARING FAILURE

LOAD CASE: Wall Load MAX 1
Taking moments about centre of base (anticlockwise "+") Surcharge MIN 0

Vertical FORCES (kN) Lever arm (m) Moment (kNm) BEARING PRESSURE
Wall load = 100 1.49 148.75 (kN/m²)
0.00 3.50
Wall (sw) = 14.31 1.49 21.29 0
Base = 29.40 0.00 0.00
Earth = 6.45 1.68 10.80 50
Water = 0.00 1.68 0.00
Surcharge = 1.50 1.68 2.51 100

Line load = 20.00 0.00 0.00

¦V= 171.66 ¦ Mv = 183.35
150

200
MOMENT due to LATERAL FORCES, Mo = -18.11 kNm

RESULTANT MOMENT, M = Mv + Mo = 165.24 kNm

ECCENTRICITY FROM BASE CENTRE, M / V = 0.96 m

MAXIMUM GROSS BEARING PRESSURE = 145.34 kN/m2 < 150 OK

SLIDING AT BASE (using overall factor of safety instead of partial safety fa F.O.S = 1.50

SUM of LATERAL FORCES, P = 46.61 kN

BASE FRICTION, Fb = - ( V TANØb + B.Cb ) = -62.48 kN

Factor of Safety, Fb / P = 1.34 < 1.50 FAIL .. but

therefore, LATERAL RESISTANCE to be provided by BASEMENT SLAB = 7.43 kN

128

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:128 17/07/2006 17:07:49

 RCC61 Basement Wall.xls

RCC61 Basement Wall/ DESIGN!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 etc The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made by Date Page
Location Grid line 2 rc 12-Apr-2006 129
97
Basement wall design to BS8110:2005 Checked Revision Job No
Originated from 'RCC61 Basement Wall.xls' v3.0 © 2006 TCC chg - R68

STRUCTURAL DESIGNS (ultimate) DESIGN CHECKS : OK

BS8110
WALL ( per metre length ) reference
AXIAL LOAD CAPACITY ( Limited to 0.1fcu ) = 787.50 kN > 150 OK 3.4.4.1

Force γf Ultimate Ult. Moment Ult. Shear Ult. Shear

Lateral Force (kN) Force (kN)at base (kNmat base (kN) at top (kN)
PE = 26.98 1.40 37.77 -14.15 32.41 5.35
PS(GK) = 11.62 1.40 16.27 -6.55 11.90 4.38
PS(QK) = 11.62 1.60 18.60 -7.49 13.60 5.00
PL(GK) = 10.00 1.40 14.00 -4.65 5.17 8.83
PL(QK) = 7.50 1.60 12.00 -3.99 4.43 7.57
PW = 0.00 1.40 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
Total 67.73 98.64 -36.83 67.50 31.14

EXT MOMENT (kNm) INT

Design Bending Moments
-50 0 50
0.00
On INTERNAL face due to lateral forces, M int = 21.83 kNm
top >

On EXTERNAL face due to lateral forces, M ext = -36.83 kNm

0.57
Eccentricity of Axial Loads = 125 mm
LATERAL DEFLECTION " ∆ " = 0.6 mm
WALL (m)

1.13
Due to eccentricity of axial loads, M ecc = 18.8 kNm
Due to P∆ effect, Mp = 0.08 kNm
1.70

Total Mmt on INTERNAL face (Mint+0.5Mecc+Mp) = 31.3 kNm

< base

2.26
Total Mmt on EXTERNAL face (Mext+0.5Mecc) = -46.2 kNm
2.83

EXTERNAL FACE INTERNAL FACE

WALL REINFORCEMENT : Min. As = 293 293 mm 2 Table 3.25
φ= 16 12 mm
centres = 200 < 399 200 < 549 mm OK 3.12.11.2.7(b)
As = 1005 > 293 565 > 293 mm 2 OK
MOMENT of RESISTANCE : d= 177 179 mm
z= 163 170 mm 3.4.4.4
As' = 0 0 mm 2 3.4.4.4
Mres = 71.3 > 46.21 41.8 > 31.29 kNm OK

BASE of WALL TOP of WALL

SHEAR RESISTANCE: As = 1005 φ= 10 @200 mm 393 mm2/m
100As/bd = 0.57% = 0.22%
vc = 0.72 0.52 N/mm2 Table 3.8
Vres = 127.1 > 67.50 93.3 > 31.14 kN OK 3.5.5.2

RACK WIDTH to BS8100/8007 X= 59.61 mm εm = 0.00055 BS8007

Temp & shrinkage effects not Acr = 102.92 mm W= 0.10 < 0.30 mm OK App. B.2
included

REINFORCEMENT SUMMARY for WALL

Type φ centres As Min. As
mm mm mm 2 mm 2
INTERNAL FACE H 12 200 565 293 OK
EXTERNAL FACE H 16 200 1005 293 OK
TRANSVERSE H 10 225 349 293 OK

129

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:129 17/07/2006 17:07:52

 RCC61 Basement Wall/ DESIGN!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 etc The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made by Date Page
Location Grid line 2 rc 12-Apr-2006 130
98
Basement wall design to BS8110:2005 Checked Revision Job No
Originated from 'RCC61 Basement Wall.xls' v3.0 © 2006 TCC chg - R68

OUTER BASE ( per metre length ) BS8110

γf = 1.50 (ASSUMED) reference
Ult. Shear = 10.35 kN (AT d from FACE of WALL)
Ult. MT. = 1.67 kNm TENSION - BOTTOM FACE

BOTTOM REINFORCEMENT : Min. As = 455 mm2 Table 3.25

φ= 12 mm
centres = 225 mm < 762 OK
As = 503 mm2 > 455 OK

MOMENT of RESISTANCE : d= 304 mm

Z= 289 mm 3.4.4.4
As' = 0 mm2
Mres = 63.12 kNm > 1.67 OK

SHEAR RESISTANCE: 100As/bd = 0.28%

2
vc = 0.42 N/mm Table 3.8
Vres = 126.35 kN > 10.35 OK 3.5.5.2

CHECK CRACK WIDTH IN ACCORDANCE WITH BS8100/8007 : Temp & shrinkage effects not included
X= 60.69 mm εm = -0.0017 BS8007
Acr = 115.54 mm W= -0.38 mm < 0.30 OK App. B.2
NO CRACKING

INNER BASE ( per metre length )

Ult. Shear = -67.05 kN (AT d from FACE of WALL)
Ult. MT. = 39.60 kNm TENSION - BOTTOM FACE

BOTTOM REINFORCEMENT : Min. As = 455 mm2 Table 3.25

φ= 12 mm
centres = 225 mm < 762 OK
As = 503 mm2 > 455 OK

MOMENT of RESISTANCE : d= 304 mm

Z= 289 mm
As' = 0 mm2
Mres = 63.12 kNm > 39.60 OK 3.4.4.4

SHEAR RESISTANCE: 100As/bd = 0.17%

vc = 0.42 N/mm2 Table 3.8
Vres = 126.35 kN > 67.05 OK 3.5.5.2

CHECK CRACK WIDTH IN ACCORDANCE WITH BS8100/8007 : Temp & shrinkage effects not included
X= 60.69 mm εm = -0.0006 BS8007
Acr = 115.54 mm W= -0.14 mm < 0.30 OK App. B.2
NO CRACKING

REINFORCEMENT SUMMARY for BASE

Type φ centres As Min. As
2
mm mm mm mm2
TOP H 12 225 503 455 OK
BOTTOM T 12 225 503 455 OK
TRANSVERSE T 12 225 503 455 OK

130

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:130 17/07/2006 17:07:55

 RCC61 Basement Wall.xls

RCC61 Basement Wall/ WEIGHT!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 etc The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made by Date Page
Location Grid line 2 rc 12-Apr-2006 99
131
Basement wall design to BS8110:2005 Checked Revision Job No
Originated from 'RCC61 Basement Wall.xls' v3.0 © 2006 TCC chg - R68

APPROXIMATE WEIGHT OF REINFORCEMENT per metre length of wall

No. Type Dia Length Unit Wt Weight

WALL VERTICAL - Internal face 6 H 12 2746 0.888 14.63

VERTICAL - External face 6 H 16 2778 1.578 26.31
TRANSVERSE (Ext.+ Int.) 24 H 10 1000 0.617 14.80

BASE TOP (MAIN) 5 H 12 3596 0.888 15.96

BOTTOM (MAIN) 5 H 12 3596 0.888 15.96
TRANSVERSE ( T & B ) 32 H 12 1000 0.888 28.41
WALL STARTERS (Int.) 6 H 12 1001 0.888 5.33
WALL STARTERS (Ext.) 6 H 16 1193 1.578 11.30

SUMMARY Total reinforcement per metre length of wall (kg) 133

131

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:131 17/07/2006 17:07:59

 RCC62 Retaining Wall.xls
RCC62.xls designs simple retaining walls with stems up to 3.0 m
high. The spreadsheet has been developed with both the BS 8002
and the conventional (CECP 2) methods in mind. On balance,
the spreadsheet provides reasonable flexibility and, in doing
so, encourages the designer to employ their own engineering
judgement and interpretation of the codes. It is based on
complying with BS 8002: 1994(4) and BS 8004: 1986(23). It may
also be used to design retaining walls to comply with CECP 2(6)
and BS 8007(5).
The spreadsheet is intended to cover only short walls and to
help ‘general’ engineers who, from time to time, design retaining
walls as part of a wider interests in structures rather than the
specialists. The 3.0 m wall height is an arbitrary limit set for
short wall which is intended to cover over 90% of the cases
encountered in general structural designs. Although many of the
design principles still apply to higher walls, criteria such as wall
movements and the validity of the assumptions made (e.g. no
wall friction) require further consideration and investigation. For
instance, with reference to pressures, the engineer is expected
to judge between using the default of ka (active coefficient) or
inputting a larger figure relating to ko (at rest coefficient).
The effects of compaction pressures can be generated using
idealised imposed/ surcharged loads. Residual lateral pressure
calculations were considered to be too complicated to be covered
in the spreadsheet.
Stability analysis is done about the toe of the base. (Stability
analysis taken about toe of nib is ignored; the nib is a section
sticking down from general level of the base, and stability analysis
about its toe gives strange answers). Global slope stability checks
are not undertaken in the spreadsheet and should be addressed
using other means. Input is required on three sheets.
Many cells are referred to in formulae by names; for instance
DATA!C23 is given the name H which is used in formulae at C56:
D60, Diagrams!D88:D137, etc. A list of names and where they
are defined can be seen by referring to Insert\Name\Define in
Excel having unprotected the current sheet. The spreadsheet is
laid out in a very similar manner to RCC61.xls. Correct display
of the diagrams requires that the Tekton and Marker fonts have
been installed. See FAQ.
DATA!
This single sheet consists of the main inputs. Most inputs, which
are in blue and underlined, should be self-explanatory. The top
diagram defines most input parameters. Please note that unless
the Marker and Tekton fonts are loaded into the Windows font
folder the diagram will not display correctly.
The designer should determine the ‘Design Soil Parameters’
based on the combinations in BS 8002 which will give the worst
credible loads i.e. the design values should be the lower of (a) the
132
EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:132
peak strength reduced by a mobilisation factor or (b) the critical
state strength.
As default values, the earth pressure coefficients are calculated
using the simplified Rankine’s formula for smooth vertical walls
based on values of the design soil parameters. Alternatively,
the engineer can enter his or her own coefficients to suit the
conditions of the design by overwriting the default values.
Maximum earth pressure occurs during service and not at
ultimate limit state, as at ultimate limit state the actual earth
pressure will be less. BS 8002(4) also uses a mobilisation factor
on soil parameters, increasing load on the active side of the wall
and reducing soil resistance on the passive side. In so doing,
the code recommends that no further partial load factors are
necessary in design of the structure. The above are not entirely
compatible with BS 8110: Part 1, Table 2.1, nor to our knowledge
have they been fully accepted by the general practising engineer.
Many designers do seem to use the BS 8002 mobilisation factor
as well as the traditional safety factors. Therefore the built-in
partial load factors may be changed. Factors can be set at 1.4 or
1.6 in accordance with BS 8110 or may be set to 1.0. The designer
has, and should have the final decision and responsibility to
select the load factors he or she feels are suitable to the design
conditions.
BS 8002 suggests that no additional factors of safety are required
in checking of external stability (i.e. over-turning and sliding)
provided that the structure is in equilibrium and the ‘worst
credible loads’ are used in the design.
For the calculation of bearing pressures, all partial load factors are
switched to unity and the design checks are based on allowable
ground bearing pressure, i.e. the permissible stress approach.
The bearing pressure is then factored up with the partial load
factors adopted from above for the design of concrete base.
Bearing pressure is calculated using the concept of ‘no tension’
equilibrium, i.e. triangular stress blocks are used when eccentricity
is outside the middle third.
BS 8002 has minimum surcharge and minimum unplanned
excavation depth requirements. However in the spreadsheet, the
surcharge loads are set as input data. The minimum 10 kN/m2
limit in BS 8002 has not been used with the understanding that
the BS 8002 committee is considering reducing the 10 kN/m2 to
6 kN/m2 for 3 m high walls.
The spreadsheet is based on a number of assumptions which
should be assessed as being true or erring on the safe side in each
case. These are:
■ Wall friction is zero
■ Minimum active earth pressure = 0.25qH. A minimum active
pressure of 0.25H (made to be a function of soil property rather
than an arbitrary value equivalent to approx. 5 kN/m3 per m
17/07/2006 17:08:01
 RCC62 Retaining Wall.xls

height to cover conditions regarding tension cracks. However,

this does not comply with BS 8002, which recommends that
full hydrostatic pressure is used. As the majority of small
retaining walls have granular backfills, the cohesion value of
retaining soil has been ‘locked’ to zero.
● Granular backfill is used. Even a small value of effective
cohesion, c´, can significantly reduce active pressures.
However, to acknowledge the fact that many retaining
walls are built with granular backfill for drainage and to
err on the side of caution, the spreadsheet assumes only
cohesionless materials.
■ The spreadsheet does not include checks on rotational slide/
slope failure.
■ The spreadsheet does not include checks on the effects of
seepage of ground water beneath the wall.
■ The spreadsheet does not include checks on deflection of the
wall due to lateral earth pressures.
■ The spreadsheet is not intended for walls over 3.0 m high.
■ The spreadsheet includes for concrete self-weight.

Many engineers have reservations about including the effect of

passive pressure in front of the wall and a warning message has
been used to help ensure that passive pressure is considered only
if it can be guaranteed that there will be no future excavation in
front of the wall.

Under Operating Instructions a number of checks are carried out

and problems are highlighted.

Kp is calculated using base material properties. Lever arm of

passive reaction is measured from bottom base level downward.
In the calculation of passive force, cohesion of the base material
is also taken into consideration.

133

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:133 17/07/2006 17:08:03

 RCC62 Retaining Wall/ DATA!

Project
Spreadsheets to BS 8110etc The Concrete Centre
Client
Advisory Group Made by Date Page
Location 134
Grid line 1 rc 12-Apr-2006 101
RETAINING WALL design to BS 8110:2005 Checked Revision Job No
Originated from 'R
RCC62.xls ' v3.0 © 2006 TCC chg - R68

IDEALISED STRUCTURE and FORCE DIAGRAMS DESIGN STATUS: VALID

WARNING :
Passive pressure should
only be considered if it
can be guaranteed that
there will be no future
excavation in front of
the wall.

DIMENSIONS (mm)
H= 3250 B= 4000 Tw = 300
Hw = 1500 BI = 1200 Tb = 300
Hp = 300 BN = 0 TN = 0
Hn = 0
MATERIAL PROPERTIES steel class A
fcu = 35 N/mm² γm = 1.5 concrete
fy = 500 N/mm² γm = 1.15 steel
cover to tension steel = 50 mm
Max allowable design surface crack width (W) = 0.3 mm (0.2 or 0.3
mm only)
Concrete density = 24 kN/m³
SOIL PROPERTIES Wall Geometry
Design angle of int'l friction of retained mat'l (Ø) = 30 degree
Design cohesion of retained mat'l (C ) = 0 kN/m² (Only granular backfil considered, "C" = zero)
Density of retained mat'l (q ) = 20 kN/m³
Submerged Density of retained mat'l (qs ) = 5.00 kN/m³ [default=2/3*q (only apply when Hw13.33
Design angle of int'l friction of base mat'l (Øb) = 20 degree ASSUMPTIONS
Design cohesion of base material (Cb ) = 10 kN/m² a) Wall friction is zero
Density of base material (qb ) = 10 kN/m³ b) Minimum active earth pressure = 0.25qH
Allowable gross ground bearing pressure (GBP) = 200 kN/m² c) Granular backfill
d)Does not include check of rotational slide/slope f
LOADINGS Surcharge load -- live (SQK) = 10 kN/m² e)Does not include effect of seepage of ground
Surcharge load -- dead (SGK) = 10 water beneath the wall.
Line load -- live (LQK) = 10.3 kN/m f)Does not include deflection check of wall due to
Line load -- dead (LGK) = 43 kN/m lateral earth pressures
Distance of line load from wall (X) = 0 mm h) Design not intended for walls over 3.0 m high
i) Does not include check for temp. or shrinkage eff
LATERAL FORCES (unfactored) Ka = 0.33 [ default ka = (1-SIN Ø)/(1+SIN Ø) ] 0.33
Kp = 2.04 [ default kp = (1+SIN Øb)/(1-SIN Øb 2.04
Kpc = 2.86 [ default kpc = 2kp0.5 ] = 2.86
Kac = 1.15 [ 2ka0.5 ]

Force Lever arm Moment about TOE γf Fult Mult

(kN) (m) (kNm) (kN) (kNm)
PE = 29.58 LE = 1.194 35.33 1.40 41.42 49.46
PS(GK) = 10.83 LS = 1.63 17.60 1.40 15.17 24.65
PS(QK) = 10.83 LS = 1.63 17.60 1.60 17.33 28.17
PL(GK) = 0.00 LL = 3.25 0.00 1.40 0.00 0.00
PL(QK) = 0.00 LL = 3.25 0.00 1.60 0.00 0.00
PW = 11.25 LW = 0.50 5.63 1.40 15.75 7.88
Total 62.50 76.16 89.67 110.15
PP = -9.49 (LP-HN) = 0.15 -1.38 1.00 -9.49 -1.38

134

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:134 17/07/2006 17:08:04

 RCC62 Retaining Wall.xls

RCC62 Retaining Wall/ STABILITY!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110etc The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made by Date Page
Location Grid line 1 rc 12-Apr-2006 135
102
RETAINING WALL design to BS 8110:2005 Checked Revision Job No
Originated from 'RCC62.xls' v3.0 © 2006 TCC chg - R68

EXTERNAL STABILITY STABILITY CHECKS : OK

OVERTURNING about TOE F.O.S = 1.50

(using overall factor of safety instead of partial safety factor) LOADING OPTION
Overturning Lateral FORCE (kN) Lever arm (m) Moment (kNm) (select critical load combination)
Moments PE = 29.58 LE = 1.08 32.05 9EARTH
PS(GK) = 10.83 LS = 1.63 17.60 PS(GK) Warning:
PS(QK) = 10.83 LS = 1.63 17.60 PS(QK)
PL(GK) = 0.00 LL = 3.25 0.00 PL(GK)
PL(QK) = 0.00 LL = 3.25 0.00 PL(QK)
PW = 11.25 LW = 0.50 5.63 PW
¦P= 62.50
Pp = -9.49 (LP-HN) = 0.15 -1.38
¦ Mo = 71.50

Restoring Vertical FORCE (kN) Lever arm (m) Moment (kNm)

Moments Wall = 17.64 1.35 23.81
Base = 16.80 2.00 33.60 Warning:
Nib = 0.00 0.00 0.00
Earth = 102.50 2.75 281.88 ALLOW BUOYANCY OF BASE
Water = 30.00 2.75 82.50
Surcharge = 50.00 2.75 137.50
Line load = 53.30 1.50 79.95
¦V= 270.24 ¦ Mr = 639.24

Factor of Safety, Mr / Mo = 8.94 > 1.50 OK

SLIDING (using overall factor of safety instead of partial safety factor) F.O.S = 1.50

Sum of LATERAL FORCES, P = 62.50 kN

PASSIVE FORCE, Pp x Reduction factor (1) = -9.49 kN Red'n factor for passive force = 1.00
BASE FRICTION ( ¦ V TANØb + B Cb ) = -138.36 kN
Sum of FORCES RESISTING SLIDING, Pr = -147.85 kN

Factor of Safety, Pr / P = 2.37 > 1.50 OK

GROUND BEARING FAIL Taking moments about centre of base (anticlockwise "+") :

Vertical FORCES (kN) Lever arm (m) Moment (kNm) BEARING PRESSURE (KN/m²)
4.00 0.00
Wall = 21.24 0.65 13.81 0
Base = 28.80 0.00 0.00
Nib = 0.00 2.00 0.00
Earth = 102.50 -0.75 -76.88
Water = 30.00 -0.75 -22.50
50
Surcharge= 50.00 -0.75 -37.50
Line load = 53.30 0.50 26.65
¦V= 285.84 ¦ Mv = -96.42

Moment due to LATERAL FORCES, Mo = 71.50 kNm 100

Resultant Moment, M = Mv + Mo = -24.91 kNm

Eccentricity from base centre, M / V = -0.09 m

Therefore, MAXIMUM Gross Bearing Pressure ( GRP) = 77 kN/m² < 200 OK

135

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:135 17/07/2006 17:08:08

 RCC62 Retaining Wall/ DESIGN!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110etc The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made by Date Page
Location Grid line 1 rc 12-Apr-2006 103
136
RETAINING WALL design to BS 8110:2005 Checked Revision Job No
Originated from 'RCC62.xls' v3.0 © 2006 TCC chg - R68

STRUCTURAL DESIGNS (ultimate) DESIGN CHECKS : OK

WALL ( per metre length )

Force Lever arm Moment γf V ult M ult

(kN) (m) (kNm) (kN) (kNm)
EARTH 25.41 1.07 27.08 1.4 35.57 37.92
SURCHARGE(GK) 9.83 1.48 14.50 1.4 13.77 20.31
SURCHARGE(QK) 9.83 1.48 14.50 1.6 15.73 23.21
LINE LOAD(GK) 0.00 2.95 0.00 1.4 0.00 0.00
LINE LOAD(QK) 0.00 2.95 0.00 1.6 0.00 0.00
WATER 7.20 0.40 2.88 1.4 10.08 4.03
Total 52.27 58.97 75.15 85.46
BS8110
reference

MOMENT (KNm)
MAIN REINFORCEMENT :
0 50 100 Min. As = 390 mm2 Table 3.25
0.00 φ= 20 mm
centres = 150 mm < 364 OK 3.12.11.2.7(b)
top >

2
0.59 Asprov = 2094 mm > 390 OK

MOMENT of RESISTANCE :
1.18
WALL (m)

d= 240 mm
z= 210.88 mm 3.4.4.4
2
1.77 As' = 0 mm
Mres = 192.03 kNm > 85.46 OK
< base

2.36
SHEAR RESISTANCE:
100 As/bd = 0.87%
2
2.95 vc = 0.77 N/mm Table 3.8
Vres = 184.24 kN > 75.15 OK 3.5.5.2
Ultimate Bending Moment Diagram

CHECK CRACK WIDTH TO BS8110/BS8007 : X= 95.47 mm

Temperature and shrinkage effects not included) Acr = 86.05 mm
εm = 0.0006 BS8007
W= 0.12 mm < 0.30 OK App. B.2

REINFORCEMENT SUMMARY for WALL

Type φ Centres As Min. As

2
mm mm mm mm2
VERTICAL EXT. FACE H 12 150 754 390 OK
VERTICAL INT. FACE H 20 150 2094 390 OK
TRANSVERSE H 12 150 754 390 OK

136

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:136 17/07/2006 17:08:12

 RCC62 Retaining Wall.xls

RCC62 Retaining Wall/ DESIGN!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110etc The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made by Date Page
Location Grid line 1 rc 12-Apr-2006 137
104
RETAINING WALL design to BS 8110:2005 Checked Revision Job No
Originated from 'RCC62.xls' v3.0 © 2006 TCC chg - R68

BASE - unloaded side ( per metre length ) BS8110

γf = 1.45 (default = ult mt / non-factored mt 1.45 reference
V ult = 85.74 kN
M ult = 67.33 kNm ( '+' TENSION AT BOTTOM FACE)

BOTTOM REINFORCEMENT : Min. As = 390 mm2 Table 3.25

φ= 16 mm
centres = 150 mm < 558 OK 3.12.11.2.7(b)
2
Asprov = 1340 mm > 390 OK

MOMENT of RESISTANCE : d= 242 mm

z= 223.36 mm 3.4.4.4
As' = 0 mm2
Mres = 130.17 kNm > 67.33 OK

SHEAR RESISTANCE: 100 As/bd = 0.55%

vc = 0.66 N/mm2 Table 3.8
Vres = 159.32 kN > 85.74 OK 3.5.5.2

CHECK CRACK WIDTH TO BS8110/BS8007 : (Temperature and shrinkage effects not included)
X= 80.69 mm εm = 0.00054 BS8007
Acr = 86.81 mm W= 0.11 mm < 0.30 OK App. B.2

BASE - loaded side ( per metre length )

V ult = 81.52 kN
M ult = 18.13 kNm (TENSION - TOP FACE)

TOP REINFORCEMENT : Min. As = 390 mm2 Table 3.25

φ= 16 mm
centres = 150 mm < 558 OK 3.12.11.2.7(b)
Asprov = 1340 mm2 > 390 OK

MOMENT RESISTANCE : d= 242 mm

z= 223.36 mm 3.4.4.4
As' = 0 mm2
Mres = 130.17 kNm > 18.13 OK

SHEAR RESISTANCE: 100 As/bd = 0.55%

vc = 0.66 N/mm2 Table 3.8
Vres = 159.32 kN > 81.52 OK 3.5.5.2

CHECK CRACK WIDTH to BS8100/ BS8007 : (Temperature and shrinkage effects not included)
X= 80.69 mm εm = -0.0003 BS8007
Acr = 86.81 mm W= -0.05 mm < 0.30 OK App. B.2

REINFORCEMENT SUMMARY for BASE

Type φ Centers As Min. As

2 2
mm mm mm mm
TOP (DESIGN) H 16 150 1340 390 OK
BOTTOM (DESIGN) H 16 150 1340 390 OK
TRANSVERSE H 12 200 565 390 OK

137

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:137 17/07/2006 17:08:15

 RCC62 Retaining Wall/ WEIGHT!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110etc The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made by Date Page
Location Grid line 1 rc 12-Apr-2006 105
138

RETAINING WALL design to BS 8110:2005 Checked Revision Job No

Originated from 'RCC62.xls' v3.0 © 2006 TCC chg - R68

APPROXIMATE WEIGHT OF REINFORCEMENT

No. Type Dia Length Unit Wt Weight

WALL VERTICAL - External face 7 H 12 3046 0.888 18.93

VERTICAL - Internal face 7 H 20 3110 2.466 53.69
TRANSVERSE (Ext.& Int.) 40 H 12 1000 0.888 35.51

BASE TOP (MAIN) 7 H 16 4128 1.578 45.61

BOTTOM (MAIN) 7 H 16 4128 1.578 45.61
TRANSVERSE ( T & B ) 42 H 12 1000 0.888 37.29
WALL STARTERS (Ext.) 7 H 12 1155 0.888 7.18
WALL STARTERS (Int.) 7 H 20 1475 2.466 25.46

NIB (assume same reinforcement as wall)

INTERNAL FACE (MAIN) 7 H 12 96 0.888 0.60
EXTERNAL FACE (MAIN) 7 H 20 160 2.466 2.76
TRANSVERSE (EXT.+ INT.) 2 H 12 1000 0.888 1.78

SUMMARY Approx total reinforcement per metre length of wall (kg) 274.4

138

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:138 17/07/2006 17:08:18

 RCC71 Stair Flight & Landing - Single.xls

RCC71 Stair Flight & Landing - Single.xls

RCC71.xls designs simply supported flights and landings to BS
8110. Input is required on two sheets.
Notes!
This sheet gives disclaimers and revision history.
FLIGHT!
This single sheet consists of the input and main output. Inputs
are in blue and underlined and most should be self-explanatory.

Only simply supported spans are catered for. If flights are

continuous with floors, the user should specify continuity steel
over supports as appropriate. Calculations are done per metre
width of flight. Input loads are assumed to be characteristic and
acting vertically. They should account for any undercuts. Self-
weight, moments and reactions are calculated automatically.
The area of steel required, Asreq , may be automatically increased
to increase modification factors and satisfy deflection criteria.
Where the stair flight occupies more than 60% of the span an
increase in allowable span to depth ratios of 15% is included in
accordance with Clause 3.10.2.2. Nominal top reinforcement
may be specified in order to help overcome deflection problems.
Dimensions are not checked for compliance with Building
Regulations.

Ultimate, characteristic dead and characteristic imposed

reactions are given below the indicative diagram.

LANDING!
Again, this single sheet consists of the input and main output.
Input defaults in magenta have been derived from FLIGHT! but
may be overwritten. Calculations are done per metre width of
landing.

Inputs are underlined and most should be self-explanatory.

As defaults, which can be overwritten, the material data and
characteristic flight reactions carry over from FLIGHT! Self-
weight, moments and reactions are calculated automatically.
The maximum width of landing over which flight loads can be
dispersed has been restricted to 1.8 m in the spirit of Clause
3.10.1.3. Reactions are ultimate, both total and per metre run.

The area of steel required, As, can be automatically increased to

satisfy deflection criteria.

Dias!
Dias! calculates the reinforcement sizes and reinforcement
percentages for deflection modification factors used in FLIGHT!
and LANDING!

139

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:139 17/07/2006 17:08:20

 RCC71 Stair Flight & Landing - Single/ FLIGHT!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made by Date Page
Location South Staircase FLIGHT rmw 12-Apr-06 106
140
STAIR FLIGHTS AND LANDINGS to BS 8110:2005 Checked Revision Job No
Originated from RCC71.xls ' v3.0 on CD © 2006 TCC chg - R68

MATERIALS
fcu 35 N/mm² γm 1.5 concrete Min bar Ø = 10
fy 500 N/mm² γm 1.15 steel Max bar Ø = 16
h agg 20 mm steel class A
Cover 25 mm Density 23.6 kN/m³ Nominal top steel ? Y
(Normal weight concrete)
DIMENSIONS Sectional Elevation

a= 600 mm landing A h = 175

b= 2500 mm flight waist = 200
c= 1200 mm landing B h = 200
d= -600 mm
e= -100 mm
Going = 250 mm L = 4300
Rise = 1900 mm total 10 treads
Rise = 173 mm each step Rake = 34.64 º

LOADING
Imposed 4.00 kN/m² 47.08 kN/m ult 37.81 kN/m ult
Flight finishes 1.60 kN/m² (20.87 + 11.16) (16.91 + 8.84)
Landing finishes 1.30 kN/m²

DESIGN
LANDING A, gk = 4.13 + 1.30 = 5.43 kN/m² n = 1.4 x 5.43 + 1.6 x 4.0 = 14.00 kN/m²
FLIGHT, gk = 7.78 + 1.60 = 9.38 kN/m² n = 1.4 x 9.38 + 1.6 x 4.0 = 19.53 kN/m²
LANDING C, gk = 4.72 + 1.30 = 6.02 kN/m² n = 1.4 x 6.02 + 1.6 x 4.0 = 14.83 kN/m²

Zero shear is at 0.6 + (47.08 - 16.80) /19.53 = 2.151 m from left

M = 47.08 x 2.151 - 16.80 x 2.151 - 19.53 x 1.551²/2 = 41.64 kNm/m
d = 200 - 25 - 8 = 167 mm K = 0.0427 As = 604 mm²/m
PROVIDE H16 @ 280 B = 718 mm²/m
Enhanced by 17.9 % for deflection H10 @ 300 T in span
L/d = 4,300 /167 = 25.749 < 20.0 x 1.235 x 1.050 = 25.930 allowed OK

140

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:140 17/07/2006 17:08:21

 RCC71 Stair Flight & Landing - Single.xls

RCC71 Stair Flight & Landing - Single/ LANDING!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made by Date Page
Location South Staircase LANDING rmw 12-Apr-06 141
107
STAIR FLIGHTS AND LANDINGS to BS 8110:2005 Checked Revision Job No
Originated from RCC71.xls' v3.0 on CD © 2006 TCC chg R68

MATERIALS
fcu 35 N/mm² γm 1.5 concrete Min bar Ø = 10
fy 500 N/mm² γm 1.15 steel Max bar Ø = 16
h agg 20 mm Density 23.6 kN/m³
Cover 25 mm (Normal weight concrete) Nominal top steel ? Y

DIMENSIONS
a = 1200 mm depth, h = 175 mm
b = 1200 mm width, w = 1200 mm
c = 250 mm
d = 175 mm L = 3000 mm

LOADING
LANDING Imposed 4.00 kN/m² 79.3 kN ult 74.0 kN ult
Finishes 1.50 kN/m² 66.1 kN/m ult 61.6 kN/m ult
Slab 4.13 kN/m² n = 1.4 x 5.63 + 1.6 x 4.0 = 14.28 kN/m²
gk qk
Flight a reaction 20.87 11.16 kN/m n1 = (1.4 x 20.87 + 1.6 x 11.16)/1.20 = 39.23 kN/m²
Flight b reaction 16.91 8.84 kN/m n2 = (1.4 x 16.91 + 1.6 x 8.84)/1.20 = 31.51 kN/m²

DESIGN
Zero shear is at (66.11 - 2.50) /(14.28 + 39.23) + 0.175 = 1.364 m from left
M = 66.11 x 1.364 - 14.28 x 1.364²/2 - 39.23 x 1.189²/2 = 49.15 kNm/m
d = 175 - 25 - 8 = 142 mm K = 0.0696 As = 870 mm²/m
PROVIDE H16 @ 200 B = 1005 mm²/m
Enhanced by 12.7 % for deflection H10 @ 325 T in span
L/d = 3,000 /142 = 21.127 < 20.0 x 1.021 = 21.516 allowed OK

141

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:141 17/07/2006 17:08:25

 RCC72 Stairs & Landings - Multiple.xls
This spreadsheet designs the flights and landings of a staircase in
a stair core to BS 8110. It is assumed that flights are supported
on the landings and that the landings are simply supported on
bearings at each end.

STAIRCORE!
This single sheet consists of the input and main output. Inputs
are in blue and underlined and most should be self-explanatory.

Dimensions are not checked for compliance with Building

Regulations. Simple supports are assumed. Calculations are done
per metre width of flight and landing. Input loads are assumed
to be characteristic and acting vertically. They should account
for any undercuts. All stairs are assumed to start from flight 1.
Superfluous flights and landings are blanked out. Self-weight,
moments and reactions are calculated automatically. Where the
stair flight occupies more than 60% of the span an increase in
allowable span to depth ratios of 15% is included in accordance
with Clause 3.10.2.2 and, as with other spreadsheets, the area
of steel required may be automatically increased to satisfy
deflection criteria. Ultimate reactions per metre are given.

Dias!
Dias! calculates the reinforcement sizes and reinforcement
percentages for deflection modification factors used in
STAIRCORE!

Notes!
This sheet gives disclaimers and revision history.

142

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:142 17/07/2006 17:08:29

 RCC72 Stairs & Landings - Multiple.xls

RCC72 Stairs & Landings - Multiple/ STAIRCORE!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made by Date Page
Location North Staircase RMW 12-Apr-06 143
109
REINFORCED CONCRETE STAIRCASES to BS 8110:2005 Checked Revision Job No
Originated from RCC72.xls v3.0 on CD © 2006 TCC chg - R68

MATERIALS Plans
fcu 35 N/mm² γm 1.5 concrete
fy 500 N/mm² γm 1.15 steel
h agg 20 mm steel class A
Cover 20 mm Density 23.6 kN/m³
(Normal weight concrete)
DIMENSIONS No of Flights = 6
A = 1200 mm B= 150 mm bearing
C = 250 mm Going = 250 mm

L1 = 1200 mm F1 = 2500 mm 10 treads

L2 = 1200 mm F2 = 2500 mm 10 treads
L3 = 1200 mm F3 = 2500 mm 10 treads
L4 = 1200 mm F4 = 2500 mm 10 treads
L5 = 1200 mm F5 = 2500 mm 10 treads
L6 = 750 mm F6 = 2500 mm 10 treads

STOREY HEIGHT RISERS RISE RAKE

Lower 3500 mm 22 159.1 mm 32.5 º
Typical 3500 mm 22 159.1 mm 32.5 º
Upper 3500 mm 22 159.1 mm 32.5 º

LOADING Imposed 4.00 kN/m²

Flight finishes 0.50 kN/m²
Landing finishes 1.30 kN/m²

FLIGHT 1
Waist = 150 mm a = 2.350 m
b = 0.600 m
Waist 4.20 L = 2.950 m
Steps 1.88
Finishes 0.50
6.57 kN/m²
n1 = 1.4x6.57+1.6x4.00 14.60 kN/m 22.06 kN/m
= 15.60 kN/m²
M = 22.06 x 1.414 / 2 = 15.60 kNm/m d = 125 mm K = 0.0285
As = 363 mm² PROVIDE 5 H10 @ 270 B = 393 mm² L/d = 23.600 < 25.863 allowed OK

FLIGHT 2
Waist = 150 mm a = 2.500 m b = 0.600 m c = 0.600 m
L = 3.700 m
Waist 4.20
Steps 1.88
Finishes 0.50
6.57 kN/m² n2 = 15.60 kN/m² 19.50 kN/m 19.50 kN/m

M = 19.50 x ( 1.850 - 0.625 ) = 23.89 kNm/m d = 124 mm K = 0.0444

As = 561 mm² PROVIDE 9 H12 @ 130 B = 1018 mm² L/d = 29.839 < 30.921 allowed OK
As increased by 67.0 % for deflection

143

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:143 17/07/2006 17:08:29

 RCC72 Stairs & Landings - Multiple/ STAIRCORE!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made by Date Page
Location North Staircase RMW 12-Apr-06 144
110
REINFORCED CONCRETE STAIRCASES to BS 8110:2005 Checked Revision Job No
Originated from RCC72.xls v3.0 on CD © 2006 TCC chg - R68

LANDING 1 +1.750 m
h = 150 mm L = 2.800 m

Self wt 3.54 n1 = 14.60/1.20 = 12.17 kN/m²

Finishes 1.30 n2 = 19.50/1.20 = 16.25 kN/m²
4.84 kN/m² na = 1.4x4.84+1.6x4.0 = 13.18 kN/m² 34.23 kN/m 36.77 kN/m

M = 36.77 x 1.310 - 11.31 - 12.39 = 24.48 kNm/m d = 124 mm K = 0.0455

As = 576 mm² PROVIDE 6 H12 @ 220 B = 679 mm² L/d = 22.581 < 23.995 allowed OK
As increased by 9.7 % for deflection
FLIGHT 3
Waist = 150 mm a = 2.500 m b = 0.600 m c = 0.600 m
L = 3.700 m
Waist 4.20
Steps 1.88
Finishes 0.50
6.57 kN/m² n3 = 15.60 kN/m² 19.50 19.50

M = 19.50 x ( 1.850 - 0.625 ) = 23.89 kNm/m d = 124 mm K = 0.0444

As = 561 mm² PROVIDE 9 H12 @ 130 B = 1018 mm² L/d = 29.839 < 30.921 allowed OK
As increased by 67.0 % for deflection
LANDING 2 +3.500 m
h = 150 mm L = 2.800 m

Self wt 3.54 n3 = 16.25 kN/m²

Finishes 1.30 n2 = 16.25 kN/m²
4.84 kN/m² nb = 13.18 kN/m² 37.95 37.95

M = 37.95 x 1.400 - 12.91 - 14.14 = 26.08 kNm/m d = 124 mm K = 0.0485

As = 616 mm² PROVIDE 7 H12 @ 180 B = 792 mm² L/d = 22.581 < 24.984 allowed OK
As increased by 12.4 % for deflection
FLIGHT 4
Waist = 150 mm a = 2.500 m b = 0.600 m c = 0.600 m
L = 3.700 m
Waist 4.20
Steps 1.88
Finishes 0.50
6.57 kN/m² n4 = 15.60 kN/m² 19.50 19.50

M = 19.50 x ( 1.850 - 0.625 ) = 23.89 kNm/m d = 124 mm K = 0.0444

As = 561 mm² PROVIDE 9 H12 @ 130 B = 1018 mm² L/d = 29.839 < 30.921 allowed OK
As increased by 67.0 % for deflection
LANDING 3 +5.250 m
h = 150 mm L = 2.800 m

Self wt 3.54 n3 = 16.25 kN/m²

Finishes 1.30 n4 = 16.25 kN/m²
4.84 kN/m² nc = 13.18 kN/m² 37.95 37.95

M = 37.95 x 1.400 - 12.91 - 14.14 = 26.08 kNm/m d = 124 mm K = 0.0485

As = 616 mm² PROVIDE 7 H12 @ 180 B = 792 mm² L/d = 22.581 < 24.984 allowed OK
As increased by 12.4 % for deflection

144

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:144 17/07/2006 17:08:33

 RCC72 Stairs & Landings - Multiple.xls

RCC72 Stairs & Landings - Multiple/ STAIRCORE!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made by Date Page
Location North Staircase RMW 12-Apr-06 145
111
REINFORCED CONCRETE STAIRCASES to BS 8110:2005 Checked Revision Job No
Originated from RCC72.xls v3.0 on CD © 2006 TCC chg - R68

FLIGHT 5
Waist = 150 mm a = 2.500 m b = 0.600 m c = 0.600 m
L = 3.700 m
Waist 4.20
Steps 1.88
Finishes 0.50
6.57 kN/m² n5 = 15.60 kN/m² 19.50 19.50

M = 19.50 x ( 1.850 - 0.625 ) = 23.89 kNm/m d = 124 mm K = 0.0444

As = 561 mm² PROVIDE 9 H12 @ 130 B = 1018 mm² L/d = 29.839 < 30.921 allowed OK
As increased by 67.0 % for deflection
LANDING 4 +7.000 m
h = 150 mm L = 2.800 m

Self wt 3.54 n5 = 16.25 kN/m²

Finishes 1.30 n4 = 16.25 kN/m²
4.84 kN/m² nd = 13.18 kN/m² 37.95 37.95

M = 37.95 x 1.400 - 12.91 - 14.14 = 26.08 kNm/m d = 124 mm K = 0.0485

As = 616 mm² PROVIDE 7 H12 @ 180 B = 792 mm² L/d = 22.581 < 24.984 allowed OK
As increased by 12.4 % for deflection
FLIGHT 6
Waist = 150 mm a = 2.500 m b = 0.600 m c= 0.375 m
L = 3.475 m
Waist 4.20
Steps 1.88
Finishes 0.50
6.57 kN/m² n6 = 15.60 kN/m² 18.24 20.77

M = 18.24 x ( 1.769 - 0.585 ) = 21.61 kNm/m d = 124 mm K = 0.0401

As = 506 mm² PROVIDE 7 H12 @ 180 B = 792 mm² L/d = 28.024 < 30.077 allowed OK
As increased by 38.0 % for deflection
LANDING 5 +8.750 m
h = 150 mm L = 2.800 m

Self wt 3.54 n5 = 16.25 kN/m²

Finishes 1.30 n6 = 15.20 kN/m²
4.84 kN/m² ne = 13.18 kN/m² 37.65 36.99

M = 37.65 x 1.377 - 12.49 - 13.69 = 25.65 kNm/m d = 124 mm K = 0.0477

As = 605 mm² PROVIDE 6 H12 @ 220 B = 679 mm² L/d = 22.581 < 22.669 allowed OK
As increased by 11.7 % for deflection
LANDING 6 +10.500 m
h = 150 mm L = 2.800 m

Self wt 3.54 n6 = 27.69 kN/m²

Finishes 1.30
4.84 kN/m² nf = 13.18 kN/m² 26.46 43.66

M = 43.66 x 1.119 - 8.25 - 15.10 = 25.52 kNm/m d = 125 mm K = 0.0467

As = 596 mm² PROVIDE 6 H10 @ 130 B = 471 mm² L/d = 22.400 < 25.042 allowed OK
As increased by 9.7 % for deflection

145

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:145 17/07/2006 17:08:36

 RCC81 Foundation Pads.xls
This spreadsheet designs simple pad foundations from input of
material properties, dimensions and characteristic loads and
moments. Single column bases and combined, double bases are
catered for on separate sheets.
A diagram is provided to illustrate the dimensions: a chart
showing scale plan views is provided to help ensure gross errors
are avoided. The ‘efficiency’ diagrams are provided so that the user
may gauge how hard the base is working in respect to allowable
increase in ground bearing pressure, bending and shear in the two
axes together with a measure on punching shear capacity. If the
design is invalid, this chart should help identify the problem.
The spreadsheet does not allow for punching shear links –
bending reinforcement is increased to ensure allowable shear, vc,
is adequate. The user should note that punching shear perimeters
can jump from being rectangular to being two- or three-sided,
leading to unexpectedly large increases in reinforcement for
increases in base thickness. Information from BS 8110: Part 1,
Clause 3.7.7.8 and Figure 3.19 has yet to be fully incorporated in
this spreadsheet.
Warnings are given if columns encroach within 100 mm of an
edge.
SINGLE!
Suggestions are made, under the Operating Instructions column
at L12, for the optimum plan size of the base.
Where two centres are given, e.g. 14 T16 @ 200 & 325 B2, the
reinforcement is subject to BS 8110: Part 1, Clause 3.11.3.2 and
different centres are required, bars need to be grouped closer in
the central part of the base.
Det1!
This sheet shows workings and is not necessarily intended for
printing out other than for checking purposes.
Allowable bearing pressure is taken as an allowable increase in
bearing pressure and density of concrete –density of excavated
material (i.e. soil) is used in the calculations. The program
assumes that pads are embedded to depth H in the soil. A 25%
over-stress is allowed where load cases include wind loads.
Design moments are generally those at the face of the column.
Both sides of the column are checked for moment in each
direction to ensure maxima are identified. Shear enhancement is
allowed for both beam and punching shear.
Neither crack widths, factors of safety against sliding, nor water
tables are catered for. Where resultant eccentricities are outside
146
EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:146
the base a warning message is given; the general status message
is updated as well.
Factors of safety against overturning are checked (minimum 1.5).
Warnings are also given at the onset of an uplift situation.
DOUBLE!
In addition to graphs showing plan layout and ‘efficiency’, this
sheet gives moment diagrams for the two principal axes. Design
moments are taken at the edge of both column sections.
Suggestions are made, under the Operating Instructions column
at L31:L35, for the optimum plan size of the base and eccentricities
given the column offsets from one another.
The user’s attention is drawn to the fact that the analysis is done
in two orthogonal directions. When column eccentricities are
large in both directions the analysis may not account adequately
for local effects (e.g. bottom cantilever moments on two sides of
each column – loads in opposite corners gives bottom moments of
0 kNm). In such cases, it may be better to change the orientation
of the base in such a way that eccentricity in one direction is
minimal. Warnings about double eccentricities are given when
the distances between column centrelines exceed 15% of the
relevant base dimension in each orthogonal direction.
Comparison with FE analysis suggests this is reasonable so long
as the base is thick and rigid.
Det2!
This sheet shows workings and is not necessarily intended for
printing out other than for checking purposes.
The notes for Det! above also apply.
Legends!
This sheet shows dimensions, axes, corners and notation used.
Graf!
This sheet comprises data for graphs for both SINGLE! and
DOUBLE!
Notes!
This sheet gives disclaimers and revision history.
17/07/2006 17:08:39
 RCC81 Foundation Pads.xls

RCC81 Foundation Pads/ SINGLE!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made by Date Page
Location Level -1 Base B1 RMW 12-Apr-06 147
113
PAD FOUNDATION DESIGN to BS 8110:2005 Single column base Checked Revision Job No
Originated from RCC81.xls v3.2 on CD © 2006 TCC chg - R68

MATERIALS fcu 35 N/mm² h agg 20 mm γc 1.5 concrete

fy 500 N/mm² cover 50 mm γs 1.15 steel
Densities - Concrete 24 kN/m³ Soil 21 kN/m³ steel class A
Bearing pressure 185 kN/m² (net allowable increase)

DIMENSIONS mm
BASE COLUMN
L = 3000 h = 500
B = 3000 b = 500
depth H = 500
ex = 0 ey = 0

COLUMN REACTIONS kN, kNm characteristic Plot (to scale) Key

DEAD IMPOSED WIND
Axial (kN) 1480.0 128.0 STATUS VALID DESIGN
Mx (kNm) -20.0
Grnd Brg Pressure 100%
My (kNm)
Hx (kN) Bending fsx 55%
Hy (kN)
(As/Asprov) fsy 52%

Overturning FOS = Large Shear v xx 44%

Uplift FOS = infinite
v yy 45%

BEARING PRESSURES kN/m² characteristic punching 98%

CORNER 1 2 3 4
0% 25% 50% 75% 100% 125%
no wind 184.6 175.7 184.6 175.7
with wind 184.6 175.7 184.6 175.7 Efficiency

REINFORCEMENT Detail to 3.11.3.2 Detail to 3.11.3.2

Mxx = 603.4 kNm Myy = 592.9 kNm
b = 3000 mm b = 3000 mm
d = 437.5 mm d = 412.5 mm
As = 3339 mm² As = 3480 mm²
PROVIDE 13 H25 @ 200 & 250 B1 PROVIDE 13 H25 @ 200 & 275 B2
As prov = 6381 mm² As prov = 6381 mm²
Asx increased 80% for shear Asy increased 70% for shear
BEAM SHEAR . .
Vxx = 625.8 kN at d from col face Vyy = 629.9 kN at d from col face
v= 0.477 N/mm² v = 0.509 N/mm²
or Vxx = 286.9 kN at 2d from col face or Vyy = 311.2 kN at 2d from col face
v= 0.219 N/mm² v = 0.251 N/mm²
vc = 0.544 N/mm² vc = 0.563 N/mm²

PUNCHING SHEAR . .
d ave = 425 mm u crit = 7100 mm
As prov = 0.501 % v max = 2.782 N/mm² at col face
v = 0.541 N/mm² vc = 0.553 N/mm²

147

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:147 17/07/2006 17:08:41

 RCC81 Foundation Pads/ DOUBLE!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made by Date Page
Location Base B3/B4 RMW 12-Apr-06 148
114
PAD FOUNDATION DESIGN to BS 8110:2005 Combined base Checked Revision Job No
Originated from RCC81.xls v3.2 on CD © 2006 TCC chg - R68

MATERIALS fcu 35 N/mm² h agg 20 mm γc 1.5 concrete

fy 500 N/mm² cover 50 mm γs 1.15 steel
Densities - Concrete 24 kN/m³ Soil 21 kN/m³
Bearing pressure 185 kN/m² (net allowable)
STATUS VALID DESIGN
COLUMN REACTIONS kN, kNm characteristic
Column 1 (rhs) DEAD IMPOSED WIND Column 2 (lhs) DEAD IMPOSED WIND
Axial 1369.5 1369.5 Axial 1369.5 1369.5
Mx Mx
My My
Hx Hx
Hy Hy

DIMENSIONS mm
BASE COLUMN 1 (rhs) COLUMN 2 (lhs)
L= 6000 h1 = 450 h2 = 450
B= 5000 b1 = 450 b2 = 450
depth H = 800
Σex = 3000 ex1 = 1500 ex2 = 1500
Σey = 0 ey1 = 0 ey2 = 0

Overturning FOS = Large Uplift FOS = infinite

PLOT (to scale)
BEARING PRESSURES kN/m² characteristic
Grnd Brg Pressure 100%
CORNER 1 2 3 4
no wind 185.0 185.0 185.0 185.0 Bending fsx 98%

with wind 185.0 185.0 185.0 185.0 (As/Asprov) fsy 83%

Shear v xx 31%
REINFORCEMENT
Btm Mxx - 1113.1 kNm Myy - 4252.8 v yy 75%
b = 5000 mm b = 6000 punching 91%
d= 740 mm d = 717.5
As = 3642 mm² As = 14350 0% 50% 100% 150%

PROVIDE 17 H20 @ 275 & 325 B1 & 30 H25 @ 225 B2 Efficiency'

As prov = 5341 mm² As prov = 14726

Detail to clause 3.11.3.2 0.0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5 6.0 6.5
Top Mxx + 0.0 kNm Myy + 0.0 200
0
d= 740 mm d= 720 -200
As = 0 mm² As = 0 -400
-600
PROVIDE 17 H20 @ 275 & 325 T1 & 20 H20 @ 325 T2 -800
As prov = 5341 mm² As prov = 6283 -1000
-1200
. . Moment Columns Zero axis

BEAM SHEAR . . Mx Diagram (1.4Gk + 1.6Qk)

Vxx = 732.7 kN at d Vyy = 2559.6 0.0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5
v = 0.198 N/mm² v = 0.595 0
or Vxx = 0.0 kN at 2d or Vyy = 1380.5 -1000
v = 0.000 N/mm² v = 0.321 -2000
vc = 0.318 N/mm² vc = 0.427 -3000
-4000
PUNCHING SHEAR . .
-5000
d ave = 729 mm u crit = 16545 mm

148

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:148 17/07/2006 17:08:44

 RCC82 Pilecap Design.xls

RCC82 Pilecap Design.xls

This spreadsheet designs pilecaps with between two and six piles,
and then prepares a sketch drawing of each type of cap together
with a bar schedule. Bending theory is employed throughout to
design the caps. Depending upon the pilecap’s dimensions, the
alternative truss method of design may be possible, but is not
covered by this spreadsheet.
There are seven main sheets: DOUBLE!, 3CAP!, 4CAP!, 5CAP!,
6CAP!, SCHEDULE! and DRAWING! Each of the first five sheets
contains two pages that may be printed out. The first (or upper)
page contains input data and a summary of results, while the
second (or lower) page shows more detailed calculations.
The selection of size and number of top and bottom bars is
automated. The number of bars determined by either:
■ Area of steel required/ area of maximum sized bar (40mm
diameter)
■ Spacing rules or
■ Number of legs of links required in shear.
Page numbers for printing do not follow on from previous sheets,
so must be entered by the user. This allows for intermediate
calculation pages (perhaps for loading) to be inserted.
SCHEDULE!
This sheet is a bar schedule complying with BS 8666, for the
pilecap drawing on the DRAWING! sheet.
Beneath the operating instructions, the number of each type
of cap must be entered. These numbers are then used on the
schedule and the drawing.
DRAWING!
This sheet draws approximately to scale plans and elevations
with reinforcement and bar marks for each of the cap types. It
is intended for printout to an A3 sheet. If the user wishes to add
additional notes, these may be added in cell U27.

The size of link to be used has also been automated.

Graf!
The designer and detailer may wish to rationalise the output
given on the DRAWING! sheet. But doing so will obviously affect This sheet provides data for the charts in all sheets. It is not
the bar data on SCHEDULE! intended for formal printing.

DOUBLE! Notes!
The DOUBLE! sheet is where all material properties are entered, This sheet gives disclaimers and revision history.
together with covers, pile diameter and pile tolerance. All
subsequent sheets use these same properties. Pile tolerance is the
amount by which a pile may deviate from its intended position.
This value is used in calculation to increase bending moments to
allow for this possible deviation. Pile reactions are not similarly
increased.

Dimensional data for a double pile cap and the supported column
are then entered, followed by characteristic column axial loads,
moments and horizontal shears for dead load, imposed load
and wind load. The results of calculations for all BS 8110 loading
combinations are then displayed below (on page X), together
with the required arrangement of reinforcement. More detailed
calculations may be found by scrolling down to page X.

3CAP!, 4CAP!, 5CAP! and 6CAP!

These sheets are identical in function to DOUBLE!, but deal with
caps having 3, 4, 5 and 6 piles respectively.

However, material properties, pile diameter and tolerance are

picked up from DOUBLE!

149

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:149 17/07/2006 17:08:48

 RCC82 Pilecap Design/ DOUBLE!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre

Client BigBucks PLC Made by Date Page
Location Pilecap G14 Rod 12-Apr-06 101
150
Double Pilecap
PILECAP DESIGN to BS 8110:2005 Checked Revision Job No
Originated from RCC82.xls v 3.1 on CD © 2006 TCC - - P2000

MATERIALS fcu 35 N/mm² h agg 20 mm γc 1.5 concrete

fy 500 N/mm² T&S cover 50 mm γs 1.15 steel
Pile capacity 200 kN Btm cover 75 mm steel class A
DIMENSIONS mm Conc density 23.6 kN/m³
COLUMN PILECAP
→ = 350 A= 400
↑ = 350 B= 1500
C= 400
Pile Ø = 375 E= 750
Tolerance = 150 depth H = 400

COLUMN ACTIONS kN, kNm characteristic

DEAD IMPOSED WIND
Axial (kN) 218 104.2 27.5 PLOT (to scale) KEY
M (kNm) 23.2 10.4 2.7
H (kN) 0 0 0 STATUS VALID DESIGN

REINFORCEMENT PILE REACTIONS kN

BOTTOM M = 196.9 kNm PILE 1 PILE 2
d = 309.0 mm, As = 1,611 mm² Gk + Qk 147.4 192.2
9 H16 B = 1,810 mm² Gk + Qk +Wk 159.3 207.7
TOP M = 0.0 kNm
d = 337.0 mm, As min = 416 mm²
6 H10 T = 471 mm² 6 H10 02 T
LINKS
V = 279.7 kN, v = 1.131 N/mm²
vc = 0.68 N/mm² 9 H16 01 B
(v - vc)b = 361.4 N/mm Links 10 H8 03.225 + 2x10 H8 04.225
4 Legs H8 @ 225 LINKS = 388.5 N/mm ELEVATION

150

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:150 17/07/2006 17:08:49

 RCC82 Pilecap Design.xls

RCC82 Pilecap Design/ DESIGN!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre

Client BigBucks PLC Made by Date Page
Location Pilecap G14 - Detailed Calculations Rod 12-Apr-06 151
102
Double Pilecap
PILECAP DESIGN to BS 8110:2005 Checked Revision Job No
Originated from RCC82.xls v 3.1 on CD © 2006 TCC - - P2000

Cap load (kN) = 17.4 Piles @ (m) 1.500 PILE REACTIONS kN

or (kN/m) = 7.55 PILE 1 PILE 2
Gk + Qk 147.4 192.2 .
OVERTURNING MOMENTS - kNm characteristic Gk + Qk +Wk 159.3 207.7 .
DEAD IMPOSED WIND 1.4Gk + 1.6Qk 215.4 280.9
23.2 10.4 2.7 Gk + 1.4Wk 118.9 154.9 .
1.2(Gk+Qk+Wk) 191.2 249.3
BENDING MOMENTS - kNm
1.4Gk + 1.6Qk Gk + 1.4Wk 1.2(Gk+Qk+Wk)
M
of col 149.5 81.5 132.9 arm (m) 0.725
M  of col 196.9 107.5 175.0 arm (m) 0.725
(including tolerance)
BOTTOM STEEL TOP STEEL
Bottom M = 196.9 Ø16 Top M = 0.0 Ø10 K' = 0.1558
d= 309.0 d= 337.0 min As = 0.13%
K= 0.0737 K= 0.0000
z= 281.2 z= 320.2
As = 1611 As = 0
Provide 1611 Provide 416
No = 9 No = 6
As prov = 1810 As prov = 471
fs = 297 fs = 0
Max clear S = 158.4 Max clear S = 252.8
Min clear S = 25.0 Min clear S = 25.0
Clear S = 67.5 9 H16 B Clear S = 124.8 6 H10 T

SHEAR Crit section is 112.5 from pile centres 0.732 %

PILE 1 1.4Gk + 1.6Qk Gk + 1.4Wk 1.2(Gk+Qk+Wk)
V 214.2 118.1 190.2
Av = 637.5 v = 0.8664 vc = 0.6797
PILE 2
V 279.7 154.1 248.3
Av = 637.5 v = 1.1314 vc = 0.6797

Max (v - vc)b = 361.4 Ø8 links

No of legs = 4 Link spacing = 225 4 Legs H8 @ 225 LINKS

151

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:151 17/07/2006 17:08:53

 RCC82 Pilecap Design/ 3CAP!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre

Client BigBucks PLC Made by Date Page
Location Pilecap F13 Rod 12-Apr-06 14
152
Triple Pilecap
PILECAP DESIGN to BS 8110:2005 Checked Revision Job No
Originated from RCC82.xls v 3.1 on CD © 2006 TCC - - P2000
DIMENSIONS mm
COLUMN PILECAP
→ = 300 A= 350
↑ = 300 B= 1300
C= 1126
Pile Ø = 375 E= 375.33
Min spacing = 1300 depth H = 400
Tolerance = 150

COLUMN ACTIONS kN, kNm characteristic PLOT (to scale) KEY

DEAD IMPOSED WIND
Axial (kN) 355.5 118.2 10.0 STATUS VALID DESIGN
Mx (kNm) 10.0 5.0 2.0
My (kNm) 20.0 10.0 5.0 PILE REACTIONS kN characteristic
Hx (kN) PILE 1 PILE 2 PILE 3
Hy (kN) Gk + Qk 140.4 168.9 191.9
Gk + Qk +Wk 139.3 172.9 199.0
REINFORCEMENT
EW (2-3) M = 222.6 kNm, b = 1,050 mm
d = 307.0 mm, As = 1,808 mm² 4 H12 06 T1
6 H20 B = 1,885 mm²

V = 278.3 kN, bv = 1,050 mm 6 H20 05 B1

v = 0.863 N/mm², (v-vc)b = 420 N/mm Links 8 H8 07 200 + 2x8 H8 08 200
4 Legs H8 @ 200 LINKS = 437 N/mm ↑ ELEVATION

NS (1-2/3) M = 196.2 kNm, b = 1,798 mm

d = 284.5 mm, As = 1,669 mm² 4 H12 10 T2
4 H25 B = 1,963 mm²

V = 202.7 kN, bv = 1,234 mm 4 H25 09 B2

v = 0.577 N/mm², (v-vc)b = 494 N/mm Links 7 H8 11 175 + 2x7 H8 12 175
4 Legs H8 @ 175 LINKS = 500 N/mm ← ELEVATION

152

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:152 17/07/2006 17:08:56

 RCC82 Pilecap Design.xls

RCC82 Pilecap Design/ 3CAP!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre

Client BigBucks PLC Made by Date Page
Location Pilecap F13 Rod 12-Apr-06 153
15
Triple Pilecap
PILECAP DESIGN to BS 8110:2005 Checked Revision Job No
Originated from RCC82.xls v 3.1 on CD © 2006 TCC - - P2000

Cap load = 27.6 kN Group centre @ 751 m from pile 1

PILE REACTIONS kN
PILE 1 PILE 2 PILE 3 OVERTURNING MOMENTS - kNm characteristic
Gk + Qk 140.4 168.9 191.9 . DEAD IMPOSED WIND
Gk + Qk +Wk 139.3 172.9 199.0 . Mx 10.0 5.0 2.0
1.4Gk + 1.6Qk 202.7 244.4 278.3 My 20.0 10.0 5.0
Gk + 1.4Wk 108.4 134.5 154.2 .
1.2(Gk+Qk+Wk) 167.2 207.5 238.8

BENDING MOMENTS - kNm

1.4Gk + 1.6Qk Gk + 1.4Wk 1.2(Gk+Qk+Wk)
My v of col 152.2 81.4 125.5
My ^ of col 196.2 108.4 167.5 (including tolerance)
Mx 222.6 123.4 191.1

E-W STEEL N-S STEEL

M= 222.6 Ø20 M= 196.2 Ø25 K' = 0.1558
b= 1050 b= 1798 min As = 0.13%
d= 307.0 d= 284.5
K= 0.0643 K= 0.0385
z= 283.2 z= 270.3
As = 1808 As = 1669
Provide 1808 Provide 1669
No = 6 No = 4
As prov = 1885 As prov = 1963
fs = 320 fs = 283
Max clear S = 251.4 Max clear S = 275.0
Min clear S = 25.0 Min clear S = 25.0
Clear S = 92.8 6 H20 B Clear S = 161.3 4 H25 B

SHEAR Crit section is 112.5 from pile centres

PILES 2 & 3 Ø8 links
V = 278.3 b= 1050 As% = 0.585 .
av = 537.5 v= 0.8632 vc = 0.7216
(v - vc)b = 420.0 No of legs = 4 Spacing = 200 4 Legs H8 @ 200 LINKS
PILE 1 Ø8 links
V = 202.7 b= 1234 As% = 0.559 .
av = 638.2 v= 0.5775 vc = 0.6224
(v - vc)b = 493.6 No of legs = 4 Spacing = 175 4 Legs H8 @ 175 LINKS

PUNCHING Column Face At Fig 3.23 critical section

V = 686.8 µ = 4163 d ave = 295.75
v = 1.935 v = 0.558 av = 494.0
v max = 4.733 ok vc 2d/av = 0.717 ok

153

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:153 17/07/2006 17:08:59

 RCC82 Pilecap Design/ 4CAP!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre

Client BigBucks PLC Made by Date Page
Location Pilecap E12 Rod 12-Apr-06 154
28
4 Pile Cap
PILECAP DESIGN to BS 8110:2005 Checked Revision Job No
Originated from RCC82.xls v 3.1 on CD © 2006 TCC - - P2000

DIMENSIONS mm PILECAP
COLUMN A= 350
→ = 300 B= 1300
↑ = 400 C= 1300
D= 650
Pile Ø = 375 E= 650
Tolerance = 150 depth H = 450

COLUMN ACTIONS kN, kNm characteristic PLOT (to scale) KEY

DEAD IMPOSED WIND
Axial (kN) 475.0 157.0 13.6 STATUS VALID DESIGN
Mx (kNm) 10.0 5.0 2.0
My (kNm) 20.0 10.0 5.0 PILE REACTIONS kN
Hx (kN) 1.0 0.5 0.2 PILE 1 PILE 2 PILE 3 PILE 4
Hy (kN) 2.0 1.0 0.5 Gk + Qk 150.5 162.6 174.6 186.7
Gk + Qk +Wk 151.1 164.8 179.3 192.9
REINFORCEMENT
EW(1/3-2/4) M = 328.6 kNm, b = 2,000 mm
d = 367.0 mm, As = 2,168 mm² 11 H10 14 T1
11 H16 B1 = 2,212 mm²

V = 505.5 kN, bv = 2,000 mm 11 H16 13 B1

v = 0.689 N/mm², (v-vc)b = 800 N/mm 11 Link Legs
11 Legs H8 @ 300 LINKS = 801 N/mm ↑ ELEVATION

NS(1/2-3/4) M = 313.9 kNm, b = 2,000 mm

d = 351.0 mm, As = 2,165 mm² 11 H10 16 T2
11 H16 B2 = 2,212 mm²

V = 523.2 kN, bv = 2,000 mm 11 H16 15 B2

v = 0.745 N/mm², (v-vc)b = 800 N/mm Links 11x7 H8 17 300
11 Legs H8 @ 300 LINKS = 801 N/mm ← ELEVATION

Note: 5CAP! AND 6CAP! similar

154

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:154 17/07/2006 17:09:04

 RCC82 Pilecap Design.xls

RCC82 Pilecap Design/ 4CAP!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre

Client BigBucks PLC Made by Date Page
Location Pilecap E12 Rod 12-Apr-06 155
29
4 Pile Cap
PILECAP DESIGN to BS 8110:2005 Checked Revision Job No
Originated from RCC82.xls v 3.1 on CD © 2006 TCC - - P2000

Cap load = 42.5 kN OVERTURNING MOMENTS - kNm characteristic

DEAD IMPOSED WIND
PILE REACTIONS kN Mx 10.5 5.2 2.1
PILE 1 PILE 2 PILE 3 PILE 4 My 20.9 10.5 5.2
Gk + Qk 150.5 162.6 174.6 186.7 .
Gk + Qk +Wk 151.1 164.8 179.3 192.9 .
1.4Gk + 1.6Qk 217.4 235.1 252.8 270.4
Gk + 1.4Wk 118.1 128.4 139.8 150.1 .
1.2(Gk+Qk+Wk) 181.3 197.7 215.1 231.5

BENDING MOMENTS - kNm

1.4Gk + 1.6Qk Gk + 1.4Wk 1.2(Gk+Qk+Wk)
My v of col 271.5 147.9 227.5
My ^ of col 313.9 174.0 268.0 (including tolerance)
My < of col 305.6 167.7 257.7
My > of col 328.6 181.1 279.0

E-W STEEL BOTTOM TOP N-S STEEL BOTTOM TOP

Ø16 Ø10 Ø16 Ø10
M= 328.6 0.0 M= 313.9 0.0 K' = 0.1558
b= 2000 2000 b= 2000 2000 min As = 0.13%
d= 367.0 395.0 d= 351.0 385.0
K= 0.0349 0.0000 K= 0.0364 0.0000
z= 348.7 375.3 z= 333.5 365.8
As = 2168 0 As = 2165 0
Provide 2168 0 Provide 2165 0
No = 11 11 No = 11 11
As prov = 2212 864 As prov = 2212 864
fs = 327 11 H10 T1 fs = 326 11 H10 T2
Max clear S = 284.0 Max clear S = 284.0
Min clear S = 25.0 Min clear S = 25.0
Clear S = 170.8 Clear S = 170.8
11 H16 B1 11 H16 B2

BEAM SHEAR Critical section is 112.5 mm from pile centres

EW (NS plane) Ø8 links
V = 505.5 v = 0.6887 As% = 0.301 .
av = 537.5 vc 2d/av = 0.6614 (v - vc)b = 800.0
No of legs = 11 Spacing = 300 11 Legs H8 @ 300 LINKS
NS (EW plane)
V = 523.2 v = 0.7453 As% = 0.315 .
av = 537.5 vc 2d/av = 0.6420 (v - vc)b = 800.0
No of legs = 11 Spacing = 300 11 Legs H8 @ 300 LINKS

PUNCHING Column Face At Fig 3.23 critical section

V = 916.2 µ = 4300 d ave = 359
v = 1.823 v = 0.594 av = 537.5
v max = 4.733 ok vc 2d/av = 0.655 ok

Note: 5CAP! AND 6CAP! similar

155

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:155 17/07/2006 17:09:08

 RCC82 Pilecap Design.xls

RCC82 Pilecap Design/ SCHEDULE!

The Concrete Centre Bar schedule ref : 202 01 Rev: -

Site ref : Spreadsheets to BS 8110 Date prepared : 12-Apr-06

Job no : P2000 Prepared by : Rod Checked by : -

No. of
Length of A* B* C* D* E/R *
Type and No. bars Shape
Member Bar mark Total No. each bar †
size of mbrs in code
mm mm mm mm mm mm
each

Double 01 H 16 4 9 36 2675 21 270 2175

Pilecaps 02 H 10 4 6 24 2175 00
03 H8 4 10 40 2075 51 270 695 115
04 H8 4 20 80 500 31 115 50 270 115
3-Pile Caps 05 H 20 3 6 18 2300 21 255 1890
06 H 12 3 4 12 1875 00
07 H8 3 8 24 1975 51 270 650 115
08 H8 3 16 48 500 31 115 50 270 115
09 H 25 3 4 12 2125 21 270 1715
10 H 12 3 4 12 1700 00
11 H8 3 7 21 1800 51 235 600 115
12 H8 3 14 42 475 31 115 50 235 115
4-Pile Caps 13 H 16 5 11 55 2100 21 130 1890
14 H 10 5 11 55 1875 00
15 H 16 5 11 55 2100 21 130 1890
16 H 10 5 11 55 1875 00
17 H8 5 77 385 525 31 115 50 290 115
5-Pile Caps 18 H 16 2 12 24 2625 21 130 2410
19 H 12 2 12 24 2400 00
21 H 16 2 12 24 2650 21 150 2410
22 H 10 2 12 24 2400 00
20 H8 2 120 240 675 31 115 50 440 115
6-Pile Caps 23 H 16 1 14 14 2100 21 130 1890
24 H 12 1 14 14 1875 00
26 H 16 1 12 12 3425 21 145 3175
27 H 10 1 12 12 3175 00
28 H 10 1 84 84 750 31 120 60 490 120
This schedule complies with BS 8666. 1,641 kg on this schedule PILECAP DESIGN to BS 8110:2005

* Specified in multiples of 5mm. † Specified in multiples of 25mm. © 2003-2005 Reinforced Concrete Council

156

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:156 17/07/2006 17:09:13

 NOTES
Concrete grade C35.
Cover 75 mm bottom.
Cover 50 mm top & sides.

Refer to GA drawings for

orientation and dimensions.

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:157

This drawing is diagramatic.
Connecting slabs & beams
PLAN (Pilecap G14) PLAN (Pilecap F13) PLAN (Pilecap E12) not shown.
RCC82 Pilecap Design/ DRAWING!

6 H10 02 T 9 H16 01 B 4 H12 06 T1 6 H20 05 B1 11 H10 14 T1 11 H16 13 B1

3 Pile Cap - 3 No

2 Pile Cap - 4 No
4 Pile Cap - 5 No
Links 10 H8 03.225 + 2x10 H8 04.225 Links 8 H8 07 200 + 2x8 H8 08 200 11 Link Legs
← ELEVATION ← ELEVATION ← ELEVATION

4 H12 10 T2 4 H25 09 B2 11 H10 16 T2 11 H16 15 B2

Links 7 H8 11 175 + 2x7 H8 12 175 Links 11x7 H8 17 300

↑ ELEVATION ↑ ELEVATION ↑ ELEVATION

PLAN (Pilecap C10)

Spreadsheets to BS 8110
BigBucks PLC

Project
Client

PLAN (Pilecap D11)

12 H12 19 T2 12 H16 18 B2 12 H10 27 T1 12 H16 26 B1

202

P2000

5 Pile Cap - 2 No
Job No
Dwg No

Links 12x10 H8 20 250 14 Link Legs

← ELEVATION ↑ ELEVATION
-

12-Apr-06

Date
Revision

12 H10 22 T1 12 H16 21 B1 14 H12 24 T2 14 H16 23 B2

The Concrete Centre
-

Rod

12 Link Legs Links 14x6 H10 25 350

6 Pile Cap - 1 No
Made by
Checked

↑ ELEVATION ← ELEVATION
RCC82 Pilecap Design.xls

157

17/07/2006 17:09:19
 RCC91 One-way Solid Slabs (Tables).xls
Design is often undertaken using the moment and shear factors
taken from BS 8110: Part 1, Tables 3.5 and/ or 3.12. This series of
spreadsheets uses factors for moment and shear based on these
tables.
moments. The factors from Table 3.12 give rise to a single load
case that has been subject to 20% redistribution: a bending
moment envelope is inappropriate and the diagram is therefore
indicative only. The factors used are given in the table below.

RCC91.xls designs simple one-way solid slabs to BS 8110. For
three or more spans they use moment and shear factors from
Table 3.12. The use of these factors is governed by Clause 3.7.2.7
(single load case and the conditions of Clause 3.5.2.3 are met
{bays > 30 m2 , qk >/ 1.25 gk, qk >/ 5.0 kN/m2 } and at least three
bays of approximately equal span (the corresponding factors for
beams also restrict use of the factors to where spans differ by
no more than 15% of the maximum span)). Where the relevant
conditions are not met, users are directed towards RCC31.
xls where continuous beam analysis overcomes many of these
caveats.
The design of single- and two-span slabs is also possible. The
factors used for two-span slabs should be considered subject to
the same conditions as for using the factors from Table 3.12 of
BS 8110.
MAIN!
This single sheet consists of the input and main output. In itself
it should prove adequate for the design of the simplest one-way
solid slab designs. A nominal 1 m wide strip of slab is considered.
Inputs are underlined and most should be self-explanatory. End
support condition determines the factors applied for bending.
Simple charts show the spans, loads and indicative bending
The factors used are based on continuous end supports. The
two-span factors were derived by modelling the appropriate
number of spans with a single loadcase of 4 kN/m dead and 5
kN/m imposed and allowing any one span to be 15% less than
the input length (strictly according to BS 8110 this is applicable
to beams only).
The area of steel required, As, may be automatically increased
to reduce service stress, fs, and to increase modification factors
to satisfy deflection criteria. The option in line 42 to have top
steel in spans influences modification factors used in deflection
calculations.
As most contractors prefer prefabricated reinforcement mats
might be considered.
To the right of the sheet are calculations. An approximate
reinforcement density is given.
Weight!
Weight! gives an estimate of the amount of reinforcement
required in a slab. Simplified curtailment rules, as defined in
Clause 3.12 are used to determine lengths of bars. The figures
should be treated as approximate estimates only as they cannot
deal with the effects of designers’ and detailers’ preferences,

Table 3
Coefficient End End First int Interior Interior
Bending moment and shear
supports spans supports spans supports
force coefficients
Bending

Simple 1 Span 0.00 0.125 ~ ~ ~

support 2 Span 0.00 0.086 0.100 ~ ~
3 Span etc 0.00 0.075 0.086 0.063 (0.063)

1 Span 0.040 0.105 ~ ~ ~

2 Span 0.040 0.066 0.100 ~ ~
3 Span etc 0.040 0.075 0.086 0.063 (0.063)

Shear

1 Span 0.50 ~ ~
2 Span 0.46 0.60 ~
3 Span etc 0.46 0.60 0.50

158

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:158 17/07/2006 17:09:23

 RCC91 One-way Solid Slabs (Tables).xls

rationalisation, the effects of holes etc, etc. It excludes supporting

beams, trimming to holes etc. To the right of the sheet are
calculations of length, etc.

Graf!
This sheet comprises data for graphs used in MAIN! It is not
necessarily intended for printing out other than for checking
purposes.

Notes!
This sheet gives disclaimers and revision history.

159

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:159 17/07/2006 17:09:26

 RCC91 One-way Solid Slabs (Tables)/ MAIN!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 & EC2 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made by Date Page
Location 8rd Floor slab rmw 12-Apr-2006 160
116
1-WAY SOLID CONCRETE SLAB DESIGN to BS 8110:2005 Table 3.12 Checked Revision Job No
Originated from RCC91.xls v3.0 on CD © 2006 TCC chg - R68

LOCATION Supports from grid A to grid F STATUS

End support condition is C (C
C)ontinuous or (S
S)imple VALID DESIGN

DIMENSIONS MATERIALS
Nº of spans Nº 3 fy N/mm² 500 γs = 1.15 steel class A
Max Span m 7.200 fcu N/mm² 35 γc = 1.50
Thickness, h mm 200 Density kN/m³ 23.6
cover mm 20 (Normal weight concrete) 100
50
LOADING 0
Self Weight kN/m² 4.72 -50
Additional Dead kN/m² 1.00 -100
Total Dead, gk kN/m² 5.72
Imposed Load, qk kN/m² 2.50 A F A F
Design load, n = kN/m² 12.01 Geometry and Loading Indicative Bending Moment Diagram

MAIN STEEL END END FIRST INT INTERIOR INTERNAL BS 8110

SUPPORTS (A & F) SPANS SUPPORTS SPANS SUPPORTS Reference
Factor 0.040 0.075 0.086 0.063 0.000 Table 3.12
M kNm/m 24.9 46.7 53.5 39.2 0.0
d mm 175 172 174 172
K 0.023 0.045 0.051 0.038 M/bd²fcu
z 166.3 162.9 163.6 163.4 Clause 3.4.4.4
As mm²/m 344 659 753 552
Rebar H H H H
Ø mm 10 16 12 16 12
@ mm c/c 225 150 150 200
As prov mm²/m 349 1340 754 1005
= % 0.199 0.779 0.433 0.584
Max S 535 532 534 532 Clause
subclause (a) (a) (a) (a) 3.12.11.2.7

DEFLECTION
fs N/mm² 329 164 333 183 Eqn 8
Top steel provided % bd 0 0
Comp Mod factor 1.000 1.000 Table 3.11
Tens Mod factor 1.603 1.651 Eqn 7
Perm L/d 41.7 As auto-increased 43 As auto-increased Table 3.9
Actual L/d 41.8 by 100 % 41.8 by 70 %

DISTRIBUTION STEEL As = 0.13% = 260 mm²/m Table 3.25

Provide H 10 at 300 = 262 mm²/m

SHEAR END SUPPORT FIRST INT SUPT INTERNAL SUPTS

V kN/m 39.8 51.9 Table 3.12
As prov % 0.390 0.433
v N/mm² 0.231 0.298 equation 3
vc N/mm² 0.638 0.659 Table 3.8

OUTPUT/SUMMARY
END END FIRST INT INTERIOR INTERNAL
SUPPORTS SPANS SUPPORTS SPANS SUPPORTS DISTRIBUTION
PROVIDE H10 @ 225 T1 H16 @ 150 B1 H12 @ 150 T1 H16 @ 200 B1 H10 @ 300

CHECKS BAR Ø SINGLY BAR NO SHEAR GLOBAL

< COVER REINFORCED SPACING DEFLECTION LINKS STATUS
OK OK OK OK OK VALID DESIGN

160

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:160 17/07/2006 17:09:27

 RCC92 Ribbed Slabs (Tables).xls

RCC92 Ribbed Slabs (Tables).xls

This spreadsheet designs simple single-, two-span and multiple- or no links is a matter of choice for the designer. Most contractors
span ribbed slabs to BS 8110: Part 1 using the moment and shear prefer to prefabricate reinforcement for ribbed slabs on the
factors in, or in the case of single and two spans, consistent with ground or off-site: this means at least nominal links and nominal
Table 3.12 of BS 8110. top steel are usually required.

The use of factors from Table 3.12 is governed by Clause 3.7.2.7
as follows
■ A single load case is assumed
■ Conditions of 3.5.2.3 are met
● bays > 30 m2 ,
● k >/ 1.25gk,
● k >/ 5.0 kN/m2 and at least three bays are of
approximately equal span
■ The corresponding factors for beams also restrict use of the
factors to where spans differ by no more than 15% of the
maximum span.
The factors used for two-span slabs should be considered subject
to these same conditions. They were derived by modelling the
appropriate number of spans with a single load case of 4 kN/
m2 dead and 5 kN/m2 imposed, and allowing any one span to
be 15% less than the input length (strictly according to BS 8110
this is applicable to beams only). The factors used are based on
continuous end supports.
■ Designed links are taken to be those provided where (vc + 0.4)
< v < 0.8 fcu 0.5;
■ Minimal links are taken to be those that are required to
provide shear resistance for vc < v < (vc+ 0.4)
■ Nominal links are those used if required for temporary
support only in areas where v < vc
Under Bending, the Width of solid from CL in line 28 refers to
the distance between centre line of support and the rib/ solid
intersection. It determines where shear and, at internal supports,
hogging moment in ribs are checked. The user inputs preferred
diameters of reinforcement in the rib. At supports, these bars
usually need to be supplemented by intermediate bars to comply
with either spacing rules or with hogging moments in the solid
section of slab.
In spans, the area of steel required, As, may be automatically
increased to reduce service stress, fs, and to increase modification
factors to satisfy deflection criteria.
An approximate reinforcement density is given. It excludes mesh,
supporting beams, trimming to holes etc.

Where the relevant conditions are not met, users are directed
towards RCC32.xls where continuous beam type analysis
overcomes many of these caveats.
MAIN!
This single sheet consists of the input and main output. In itself
it should prove adequate for the simplest ribbed slab designs.
Inputs are underlined and most should be self-explanatory.
The option to have top steel in spans or not has bearings on
whether shear links can be accommodated and on deflection
calculations. The option to have links, minimal (or nominal) links
Please note that the bending moment diagrams are indicative
only. The factors from Table 3.12 give rise to a single load case
that has been subject to 20% redistribution: a bending moment
envelope is inappropriate. The factors used are given in the table
below.
The factors used are based on continuous end supports. The two-
span factors were derived by modelling the appropriate number
of spans with a single load case of 4 kN/m dead and 5 kN/m
imposed and allowing any one span to be 15% less than the input
length (strictly according to BS 8110 this is applicable to beams
only).

Table 4
Coefficient End End First int Interior Interior
Bending moment and shear
supports spans supports spans supports
force coefficients used in
RCC 92 Bending 1 Span 0.040 0.105 ~ ~ ~
2 Span 0.040 0.066 0.100 ~ ~
3 Span etc 0.040 0.075 0.086 0.063 (0.063)

Shear 1 Span 0.50 ~ ~

2 Span 0.46 0.60 ~
3 Span etc 0.46 0.60 0.50

161

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:161 17/07/2006 17:09:37

 DETAILS!
DETAILS! gives two pages of detailed calculations and references
to BS 8110 justifying the output in MAIN! This sheet is intended
as an explanation for the less experienced engineers and may
prove useful for checking purposes.

Maximum spacing, smax , at supports is based on rib centres: usually

two large bars are required in the top of the rib for moment at
the rib/ solid intersection and one, two or even three smaller bars
(minimum T10) are required between to overcome spacing rules.
Concentrating reinforcement with larger bars in the top of the rib
raises the percentage steel in the rib at the rib/ solid interface,
thereby maximising vc and reducing shear requirements.

In terms of curtailment, 50% of reinforcement for maximum

sagging is taken as being As req’d for bending, i.e. excluding any extra
for deflection, etc. (Figure 3.25 refers to ‘reinforcement for max.
moment’.) Ribbed slabs are taken as being “slabs” so the 40%
rule is applied and 40% of As req’d is assumed at end supports.

It is usually assumed that ‘ribs’ become ‘beams’ when they are

at centres > 1.5 m Tapered links are assumed. Where required for
shear resistance, links should be at maximum 0.75d centres.

WEIGHT!
Weight! gives an estimate of the amount of reinforcement
required in a slab. Simplified curtailment rules, as defined in
Clause 3.12 are used to determine lengths of bars. The figures
should be treated as approximate estimates only as they cannot
deal with the effects of designers’ and detailers’ preferences,
rationalisation, the effects of holes etc, etc. To the right of the
sheet are calculations of length etc.

Graf!
This sheet comprises data for graphs used in MAIN!

Notes!
This sheet gives disclaimers and revision history.

162

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:162 17/07/2006 17:09:39

 RCC92 Ribbed Slabs (Tables).xls

RCC92 Ribbed Slabs (Tables)/ MAIN!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made by Date Page
Location 2nd Floor slab rmw 12-Apr-2006 163
119
RIBBED SLAB DESIGN to BS 8110:2005 using table 3.12 coefficients Checked Revision Job No
Originated from RCC92.xls v3.0 on CD © 2006 TCC chg prelim R68

LOCATION rts from grid

Support A to grid F STATUS
VALID DESIGN
DIMENSIONS MATERIALS steel class A
Nº of spans Nº 5 rib width mm 150 fcu N/mm² 35 γc = 1.50
Max Span m 7.200 rib centres mm 750 fy N/mm² 500 γs = 1.15
depth o/a, h mm 300 Side slope 1 in 10 fyv N/mm² 500 Density kN/m³ 24.0
topping depth, hf mm 100 h agg mm 20 (Normal weight concrete)
Top steel in spans ? Y Top cover (to links) mm 35
Min No of bars per rib 2 B/S cover (to links) mm 25
Use Links? Y (Y
Y)es, (N
N )o or (M)inimal

LOADING
Self Wt kN/m² 4.00
+ Dead kN/m² 1.50
Total Dead, gk kN/m² 5.50
Imposed qk kN/m² 5.00 A F A F
Design load, n = kN/m² 15.70 Geometry and Loading Indicative Bending Moment Diagram

BENDING END END FIRST INT INTERIOR INTERNAL BS8110

SUPPORTS (A & F) SPANS SUPPORTS SPANS SUPPORTS Reference
Width solid from CL 150 --- 500 --- 500
M kNm/m 32.6 61.1 70.0 51.3 51.3 Table 3.12
d mm 254 259 249 259 249
As mm² 233 428 511 360 374 Fig 3.3
As' mm² 0 0 0 0 0 Fig 3.3
DEFLECTION
L/d Max 37.869 44.162 3.4.6.3

Actual L/d 27.799 OK 27.799 OK 3.4.5.1

As auto increased by 28.1% As auto increased by 23.4%

TENSION REINFORCEMENT
Ø mm 10 20 20 20 20
No 3 Top+3H10 2 Btm 2 Top+2H10 2 Btm 2 Top+2H10
As prov mm² 471 628 785 628 785
= % 0.247 1.427 0.421 1.427 0.421
COMPRESSION ZONE REINFORCEMENT
Ø 20 8 12 8 10 mm
No 2 Btm 2 Top 2 Btm 2 Top 2 Btm
As' prov mm² 628 101 226 101 157
= % 1.455 0.228 0.534 0.228 0.371

RIB SHEAR OUTER SUPT FIRST INT SUPT INT SUPT

V kN/rib 37.2 45.0 36.5 Table 3.12
v N/mm² 0.863 1.063 0.863 Eqn 3
vc N/mm² 0.897 0.908 0.908 NOMINAL Table 3.8
Link Ø 6 6 6 6
@ mm 175 175 175 175
REACTIONS
Dead kN/m 18.23 43.59 39.63 solid weight included
Imposed kN/m 16.56 39.60 36.00
Ultimate kN/m 52.01 124.38 113.08 Table 3.12

OUTPUT/SUMMARY
END END FIRST INT INTERIOR INTERNAL
PROVIDE SUPPORTS SPANS SUPPORTS SPANS SUPPORTS
MAIN STEEL 3H10 /rib 2H8 T 2H20 /rib 2H8 T 2H20 /rib
+ 3H10 T + 2H10 T + 2H10 T
Nominal B 2H20 B Nominal B 2H20 B Nominal B
LINKS 2H6 @ 175 2H6 @ 175 2H6 @ 175 2H6 @ 175 2H6 @ 175
from edge of solid for 875 for 175

CHECKS BAR Ø SINGLE BAR SHEAR GLOBAL

& COVER LAYERS SPACING DEFLECTION LINKS STATUS

163

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:163 17/07/2006 17:09:41

 RCC92 Ribbed Slabs (Tables)/ DETAILS!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made by Date Page
Location 2nd Floor slab from grids A to F rmw 12-Apr-2006 120
164
RIBBED SLAB DESIGN to BS 8110:2005 using table 3.12 coefficients Checked Revision Job No
Originated from RCC92.xls v3.0 on CD © 2006 TCC chg prelim R68

DETAILED CALCULATIONS
ave bw mm 170.0 self wt kN/m² 3.49
rib area m² 0.1090 E/O solid kN/m² 0.52
Total SW kN/m² 4.00

Gk = 39.63 Qk = 36.00 F = 113.08 N = 15.705 kN/m width

MAIN STEEL END END FIRST INT INTERIOR INTERNAL BS 8110

SUPPORTS SPANS SUPPORTS SPANS SUPPORTS Reference
Factor 0.04 0.075 0.086 0.063 0.063 Table 3.12
M/m kNm/m 32.6 61.1 70.0 51.3 51.3 -=-
M/rib kNm 24.42 45.80 52.51 38.47 38.47 -=-
d mm 254 259 249 259 249
bf mm 750 750 750 750 750
K' 0.1320 0.1558 0.1320 0.1558 0.1320 3.4.4.4
Web MOR kNm 50.7 62.2 48.7 62.2 48.7 Fig 3.3
Flange MOR kNm 223.5 245.1 214.8 245.1 214.8 -=-
K 0.0144 0.0260 0.0323 0.0218 0.0236 3.4.4.4
z mm 241.3 246.1 236.6 246.1 236.6 -=-
x mm 28.2 28.8 27.7 28.8 27.7 -=-
d' mm 41.0 45.0 37.0 45.0 36.0
net fsc N/mm² 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 Fig 3.3
Excess M kNm 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
As' req mm² 0 0 0 0 0
max fst N/mm² 434.8 434.8 434.8 434.8 434.8 Fig 3.3
fst deflection N/mm² --- 308.8 --- 341.5 ---
As req mm² 233 428 511 360 374
bw/b --- 0.2267 --- 0.2267 ---
Min % 0.13% 0.18% 0.13% 0.18% 0.13% Table 3.25
Min As mm² 293 92 293 92 293
At EDGE of SOLID
M/m kNm/m 24.9 residual steel 38.1 residual steel 25.0 Table 3.13
M/rib kNm 18.7 0.26% 28.5 0.26% min % 0.26% 18.7 -=-
bf mm 150 57 150 0 As resid 0 150
K 0.0552 10 0.0877 10 Ø extra 10 0.0576
z mm 237.3 3 221.8 2 No 2 231.9
x mm 37.1 236 60.5 157 As prov 157 38.0
net fsc N/mm² 0.0 256.5 36.9 Fig 3.3
Excess M kNm 0.0 0.0 0.0
As' req mm² 0 0 0
fst N/mm² 434.8 434.8 434.8
As req mm² 181 296 186
TENSION STEEL
Required mm² 181 428 296 360 186
Ø in rib ok 10 ok 20 ok 20 ok 20 ok 20
No 3 2 2 2 2
As prov mm² 236 628 628 628 628
Clear dist mm 54.4 54.2 97.8 54.2 97.8 between bars
Min S ok 25.0 ok 25.0 ok 25.0 ok 25.0 ok 25.0 3.12.11.1
Max S ok 183.3 ok 207.0 ok 299.3 ok 246.4 ok 300.0 3.12.11.2.4
COMPRESSION STEEL
Required 171 0 128 0 108 Table 3.25
Ø ok 20 ok 8 ok 12 ok 8 ok 10
No 2 2 2 2 2
As' prov mm² 628 101 226 101 157
=% ok 1.455 ok 0.228 ok 0.534 ok 0.228 ok 0.371
Clear dist mm 55.6 123.0 70.8 123.0 74.6 between bars
Min S ok 25.0 ok 25.0 ok 25.0 ok 25.0 ok 25.0 3.12.11.1

164

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:164 17/07/2006 17:09:49

 RCC92 Ribbed Slabs (Tables).xls

RCC92 Ribbed Slabs (Tables)/ DETAILS!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made by Date Page
Location 2nd Floor slab from grids A to F rmw 12-Apr-2006 165
121
RIBBED SLAB DESIGN to BS 8110:2005 using table 3.12 coefficients Checked Revision Job No
Originated from RCC92.xls v3.0 on CD © 2006 TCC chg prelim R68

END END FIRST INT INTERIOR INTERNAL BS 8110

DEFLECTION SUPPORTS SPANS SUPPORTS SPANS SUPPORTS Reference
fs N/mm² 256.5 227.1 157.1 190.8 98.6 Eqn 8
Base ratio 20.80 20.80 3.4.6.3/4
Tens Mod 1.700 1.983 Table 3.10
Comp Mod 1.071 1.071 Table 3.11
Perm L/d 37.869 44.162 3.4.6.3
Actual L/d 27.799 ok 27.799 ok 3.4.5.1
As req increased by 28.1% 23.4%

RIB SHEAR
END FIRST INT INTERNAL
SUPPORTS SUPPORTS SUPPORTS
Factor 0.46 0.6 0.5 Table 3.12
V max kN/m 52.01 67.85 56.54 -=-
V rib kN/m 37.24 44.99 36.51
v N/mm² 0.8625 1.0630 0.8626 Eqn 3
vc N/mm² 0.8975 0.9080 0.9080 NOMINAL Table 3.8
(v-vc)bv N/mm 68.0 68.0 68.0 68.0 Table 3.7
Link Ø ok 6 ok 6 ok 6 ok 6 3.12.7.1
@ mm 191 187 187 194 Spacing
adjust to mm 175 175 175 175 Spacing
for mm 0 795 75 --- from solid
adjust to mm 0 875 175 --- from solid

As Dist ok 64.4 ok 0 ok 0 ok 0 OK 3.4.5.5

As' Dist ok 0 ok 0 ok 0 ok 0 OK 3.12.7.2

165

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:165 17/07/2006 17:09:54

 RCC93 Flat Slabs (Tables).xls
This spreadsheet designs simple rectangular flat slabs to BS 8110:
Part 1 using moment and shear factors from Table 3.12. The use of
DETAILS!
these factors is also governed by Clause 3.7.2.7 as shown below.
DETAILS! gives detailed calculations and references to BS
8110 justifying the output in MAIN! This sheet is intended as
■ A single load case is assumed explanation for the less experienced engineers and may prove
■ The conditions of 3.5.2.3 are met useful for checking purposes.
● bays > 30m2 ,
Column transfer moments are limited to Mt max see Clause 3.7.4.2
● qk >/ 1.25gk,
and equation 24 A basic deflection ratio of 26 x 0.9 (see Clauses
● qk >/ 5.0 kN/m2 and at least three bays of approximately 3.4.6.1 and 3.7.8) is used in line 189 etc. Some engineers like to
equal span use a lower basic deflection ratio (rather than 26 in the code) to
offset any potential problems with deflection of partitions and
■ The corresponding factors for beams also restrict use of the
especially of cladding.
factors to where spans differ by no more than 15% of the
maximum span. Traditional shear links can be very time consuming on site, so in
order to minimise the number of links the centres are maximised
at 0.75d (see line 226 et seq). Additional bars may be necessary
Where the relevant conditions are not met, users are directed
to act as carriers to these links if top and bottom bars cannot be
towards RCC33.xls where sub-frame analysis overcomes many
arranged at the preferred spacings. Consideration should also be
of the caveats made in the code restricting the use of bending
given to using proprietary systems.
moment and shear factors from Table 3.12.

The spreadsheet does not currently allow for holes or drops. If

holes are considered critical then the user is directed towards
WEIGHT!
using RCC21.xls (sub-frame analysis) and allowing for holes
Weight! gives an estimate of the amount of reinforcement
in breadths used. Note should also be made of Clause 3.7.5.,
required in a slab. Simplified curtailment rules, as defined in
Openings in panels. Punching shear can be checked using RCC13.
Clause 3.12 are used to determine lengths of bars. The figures
xls.
should be treated as approximate estimates only as they cannot
deal with the effects of designers’ and detailers preferences’,
It does not cater for single or two-span cases.
rationalisation, the effects of holes etc, etc. Additional link carrier
bars are not included.
MAIN!
This single sheet consists of the input and main output. In itself it
Xdia! And Ydia!
should prove adequate for the simplest flat slab designs.
In these sheets each bending moment is designed using a
different size bar (with different effective depths, d). The largest
Most inputs should be self-explanatory. A location plan helps
bar (i.e. minimum number of bars) consistent with maximum
with definition of dimensions. The number of spans is altered by
specified diameter and maximum spacing rules is identified and
changing the number of grid line inputs: deleting the end grid
used in DETAILS! Thus a least bars solution is given. The Xdia! and
line name will decrease the number of spans. A combo-box is
Ydia! pages find the maximum diameter that can be used while
used to switch between the continuous and simply supported
complying with spacing rules. The sheet finds which of Clause
end support/ slab connection factors. Note the effect on column
3.12.11.2.7 (a) or (b) applies. This has quite a dramatic effect
transfer moments. Edge distance, C, is actually from centreline of
on rationality of the bars and spacings. A detailer can always
column to edge of slab.
reduce bar diameters and/ or close-up spacing if he or she wishes
provided that overall areas of steel are at least maintained.
‘Double penult’ means penultimate in both directions, i.e. internal
column of corner bay.

Please note that the bending moment diagrams are indicative

Notes!
only. The factors from Table 3.12 give rise to a single load case
This sheet gives disclaimers and revision history.
that has been subject to 20% redistribution: a bending moment
envelope is therefore inappropriate.

166

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:166 17/07/2006 17:10:00

 RCC93 Flat Slabs (Tables).xls

RCC93 Flat Slabs (Tables)/ MAIN!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made by Date Page
Location ECBP Typical floor to BS8110 rmw 12-Apr-2006 167
123
SIMPLIFIED FLAT SLAB DESIGN to BS 8110:2005 Cl 3.7.2.7 (Table 3.12) Checked Revision Job No
Originated from RCC93.xls v3.0 on CD © 2006 TCC chg - R68

STATUS VALID DESIGN

LOCATION NS Grids on lines 1 2 3 4 5
EW Grids on lines A B C D
COLUMNS Internal Edge Corner
DIMENSIONS X Y H mm 400 400 400
Nº of spans Nº 4 3 slab depth, h mm 250 B mm 400 250 250
Span, L m 7.500 7.500 Top cover mm 25
Edge dist, C mm 125 125 Btm cover mm 25 1 <-- X direction --> 5
from C/L column
Edge supports are CONTINUOUS
MATERIALS B D

B
fcu N/mm² 37 h agg 20 mm H

Ly
fy N/mm² 500 γm 1.15 steel Legend
H
γm

<-- Y direction -->

max bar Ø mm 20 1.5 concrete
fyv 500 Density 23.6

B
N/mm² kN/m³

Ly
steel class A (Normal weight concrete)
C Lx Lx Lx
LOADING
Self Wt kN/m² 5.90 Perim Load 8.85 kN/m
+ Dead kN/m² 1.50

Ly
Total Dead, gk kN/m² 7.40 DEFLECTION CONTROL 3 or more
approximately equal spans
Imposed qk kN/m² 2.50 Min % top steel in col strips 0.13 % A
Design load, n kN/m² 14.36 Same in top of middle strips? N
C
Indicative Bending Moments - X Direction (kNm per bay) Indicative Bending Moments - Y Direction (kNm per bay)

600 600
400 400
200 200
0 0
-200 -200
-400 -400
-600 -600

1 5 A D

MAIN STEEL INTERNAL COLUMN STRIPS MIDDLE STRIPS PERIMETER COLUMN STRIPS
X DIRECTION b REBAR b REBAR b REBAR
END SUPPORTS
0.575 7H20 @ 75 T1 6.925 12H16 @ 575 T1 0.413 4H20 @ 100 T1
END SPANS 3.750 13H20 @ 275 B1 3.750 11H20 @ 325 B1 2.000 14H20 @ 125 B1
PENULTIMATE SUPPORTS 3.750 13H20 @ 200 : 400 T1 3.750 7H16 @ 525 T1 2.000 10H20 @ 150 : 300 T1
INTERIOR SPANS 3.750 10H20 @ 375 B1 3.750 8H20 @ 450 B1 2.000 10H20 @ 200 B1
INTERIOR SUPPORTS 3.750 9H20 @ 300 : 600 T1 3.750 7H16 @ 525 T1 2.000 7H20 @ 200 : 400 T1
Y DIRECTION
END SUPPORTS 0.575 6H20 @ 75 T2 6.925 12H16 @ 575 T2 0.450 4H20 @ 100 T2
END SPANS 3.750 21H20 @ 175 B2 3.750 17H20 @ 200 B2 2.000 15H20 @ 125 B2
PENULTIMATE SUPPORTS 3.750 15H20 @ 175 : 350 T2 3.750 8H16 @ 450 T2 2.000 10H20 @ 200 : 400 T2
INTERIOR SPANS 3.750 15H20 @ 250 B2 3.750 12H20 @ 300 B2 2.000 11H20 @ 175 B2

SHEAR (ultimate) Grid Vt LINKS Link Zone

Ref kN Arrangement Width H x Breadth B
INTERNAL None CHECKS
PENULTIMATE None
PENULTIMATE 3B etc 888.5 H8 @ 150 EW 1788 1788 BAR Ø > COVER OK
DOUBLE PENULTIMATE B2 etc 969.3 H10 @ 150 EW 1826 1826 SINGLY REINFORCED OK
SIDE INTERNAL A3 etc 478.0 H8 @ 150 EW 1670 885 BAR SPACING OK
SIDE INTERNAL None DEFLECTION OK
PENULTIMATE SIDE A2 etc 525.7 H10 @ 150 EW 1782 941 SHEAR LINKS OK
PENULTIMATE SIDE B1 etc 525.7 H8 @ 150 EW 1704 902
CORNER A1 etc 341.1 H8 @ 150 EW 997 922 GLOBAL STATUS VALID DESIGN

167

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:167 17/07/2006 17:10:02

 RCC93 Flat Slabs (Tables)/ DETAIL!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made by Date Page
Location ECBP Typical floor to BS8110 rmw 12-Apr-2006 168
124
SIMPLIFIED FLAT SLAB DESIGN to BS 8110:2005 Cl 3.7.2.7 (Table 3.12) Checked Revision Job No

Originated from RCC93.xls v3.0 on CD © 2006 TCC chg - R68

DETAILED CALCULATIONS BS 8110

Reference

GENERAL internal hc 0.451 m edge hc 0.357 m corner hc 0.357 m 3.7.1.4

Lx 7.500 m Ly 7.500 m Min As 325 mm²/m 3.7.1.1

MAIN STEEL - X DIRECTION

END END PENULTIMATE INTERIOR INTERIOR
SUPPORTS SPANS SUPPORTS SPANS SUPPORTS
F 807.8 807.8 807.8
0.15Fhc 43.23 54.69 54.69
Total Mu kNm 147.5 454.4 466.3 381.7 327.0 3.7.2.7

INTERNAL COLUMN STRIPS

b m 0.575 3.750 3.750 3.750 3.750 figs 3.12&3.13

Mu kNm 147.5 249.9 349.7 209.9 245.2 3.7.2.10

d mm 215 215 215 215 215

K' 0.156 0.156 0.156 0.156 0.156 3.4.4.4

K 0.150 0.039 0.055 0.033 0.038 3.4.4.4

z mm 169.6 204.3 201.1 204.3 204.3 3.4.4.4

As mm² 2001 2814 4001 2364 2761 3.4.4.4

As shear mm² 365 1767 0

Def enhancement 1.405 1.282
As min mm² 2001 3954 4001 3031 2761 table 3.25

Ø mm 20 20 20 20 20
No bars No 7 13 13 10 9
@ mm 75 275 200 375 300
&@ mm ~ ~ 400 ~ 600 3.7.3.1

As prov mm² 2199 4084 4084 3142 2827

= mm²/m 3825 1089 1089 838 754
= % 1.779 0.507 0.507 0.390 0.351
fs N/mm² 303.3 229.7 408.1 250.8 406.9 Eqn 8

Max S mm 140 401 226 645 327 3.12.11.2.7

subclause (b) (b) (b) (a) (b) 3.12.11.2.7

MIDDLE STRIPS
b m 6.925 3.750 3.750 3.750 3.750 figs 3.12&3.13

Mu kNm 36.9 204.5 116.6 171.7 81.7 3.7.2.10

d mm 217 215 217 215 217

K' 0.156 0.156 0.156 0.156 0.156 3.4.4.4

K 0.003 0.032 0.018 0.027 0.013 3.4.4.4

z mm 206.2 204.3 206.2 204.3 206.2 3.4.4.4

As mm² 411 2302 1301 1934 912 3.4.4.4

Def enhancement 1.405 1.282

As min mm² 2251 3235 1301 2480 1219 table 3.25

Ø mm 16 20 16 20 16
No bars No 12 11 7 8 7
@ mm 575 325 525 450 525
As prov mm² 2413 3456 1407 2513 1407
= mm²/m 348 922 375 670 375
= % 0.161 0.429 0.173 0.312 0.173
fs N/mm² 56.8 222.1 385.1 256.5 270.0 Eqn 8

Max S mm 651 645 651 645 651 3.12.11.2.7

subclause (a) (a) (a) (a) (a) 3.12.11.2.7

168

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:168 17/07/2006 17:10:11

 RCC93 Flat Slabs (Tables).xls

RCC93 Flat Slabs (Tables)/ DETAIL!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made by Date Page
Location ECBP Typical floor to BS8110 rmw 12-Apr-2006 169
125
SIMPLIFIED FLAT SLAB DESIGN to BS 8110:2005 Cl 3.7.2.7 (Table 3.12) Checked Revision Job No
Originated from RCC93.xls v3.0 on CD © 2006 TCC chg - R68

MAIN STEEL - X DIRECTION, continued

END END PENULTIMATE INTERIOR INTERIOR BS 8110

SUPPORTS SPANS SUPPORTS SPANS SUPPORTS Reference

PERIMETER COLUMN STRIPS

F 510.3 510.3 510.3
0.15Fhc 27.31 27.31 27.31
Mu kNm 93.2 184.8 243.5 155.2 172.9 3.7.2.10
b m 0.413 2.000 2.000 2.000 2.000 figs 3.12&3.13
d mm 215 215 215 215 215
K' 0.156 0.156 0.156 0.156 0.156 3.4.4.4
K 0.132 0.054 0.071 0.045 0.051 3.4.4.4
z mm 176.6 201.2 196.4 203.5 202.2 3.4.4.4
As mm² 1214 2112 2852 1754 1967 3.4.4.4
As shear mm² 336 2290 1448
Def enhancement 1.956 1.662
As min mm² 1214 4132 2852 2914 1967 table 3.25
Ø mm 20 20 20 20 20
No bars No 4 14 10 10 7
@ mm 100 125 150 200 200
& @ mm ~ ~ 300 ~ 400 3.7.3.1
As prov mm² 1257 4398 3142 3142 2199
= mm²/m 3046 2199 1571 1571 1100
= % 1.417 1.023 0.731 0.731 0.511
fs N/mm² 322.0 160.1 378.3 186.1 372.7 Eqn 8
Max S mm 140 285 169 343 245 3.12.11.2.7
subclause (b) (b) (b) (b) (b) 3.12.11.2.7

MAIN STEEL - Y DIRECTION

END END PENULTIMATE INTERIOR INTERIOR
SUPPORTS SPANS SUPPORTS SPANS SUPPORTS
Total Mu kNm 121.3 454.4 466.3 381.7 327.0
INTERNAL COLUMN STRIPS

b m 0.575 3.750 3.750 3.750 3.750 figs 3.12&3.13

Mu kNm 121.3 249.9 349.7 209.9 245.2 3.7.2.10
d mm 195 195 195 195 195
K' 0.156 0.156 0.156 0.156 0.156 3.4.4.4
K 0.150 0.047 0.066 0.040 0.046 3.4.4.4
z mm 153.8 184.1 179.4 185.3 184.3 3.4.4.4
As mm² 1815 3121 4484 2606 3060 3.4.4.4
As shear mm² 380 1797 1130
Def enhancement 2.044 1.708
As min mm² 1815 6379 4484 4450 3060 table 3.25
Ø mm 20 20 20 20 20
No bars No 6 21 15 15 10
@ mm 75 175 175 250 275
& @ mm ~ ~ 350 ~ 550 3.7.3.1
As prov mm² 1885 6597 4712 4712 3142
= mm²/m 3278 1759 1257 1257 838
= % 1.681 0.902 0.644 0.644 0.430
fs N/mm² 320.9 157.7 396.5 184.4 405.8 Eqn 8
Max S mm 140 328 183 393 268 3.12.11.2.7

subclause (b) (b) (b) (b) (b) 3.12.11.2.7

169

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:169 17/07/2006 17:10:14

 RCC93 Flat Slabs (Tables)/ DETAIL!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made by Date Page
Location ECBP Typical floor to BS8110 rmw 12-Apr-2006 170
126
SIMPLIFIED FLAT SLAB DESIGN to BS 8110:2005 Cl 3.7.2.7 (Table 3.12) Checked Revision Job No

Originated from RCC93.xls v3.0 on CD © 2006 TCC chg - R68

MAIN STEEL - Y DIRECTION, continued

END END PENULTIMATE INTERIOR INTERIOR BS 8110
SUPPORTS SPANS SUPPORTS SPANS SUPPORTS Reference

MIDDLE STRIPS
b m 6.925 3.750 3.750 3.750 3.750 figs 3.12&3.13
Mu kNm 30.3 204.5 116.6 171.7 81.7 3.7.2.10
d mm 197 195 197 195 197
K' 0.156 0.156 0.156 0.156 0.156 3.4.4.4
K 0.003 0.039 0.022 0.033 0.015 3.4.4.4
z mm 187.2 185.3 187.2 185.3 187.2 3.4.4.4
As mm² 373 2539 1433 2132 1005 3.4.4.4
Def enhancement 2.044 1.708
As min mm² 2251 5188 1433 3641 1219 table 3.25
Ø mm 16 20 16 20 16
No bars No 12 17 8 12 7
@ mm 575 200 450 300 525
As prov mm² 2413 5341 1608 3770 1407
= mm²/m 348 1424 429 1005 375
= % 0.177 0.730 0.218 0.516 0.191
fs N/mm² 51.5 158.4 371.1 188.5 297.4 Eqn 8
Max S mm 591 403 591 585 591 3.12.11.2.7
subclause (a) (b) (a) (a) (a) 3.12.11.2.7

PERIMETER COLUMN STRIPS

F 510.3 510.3 510.3
0.15Fhc 27.31 27.31 27.31
Mu kNm 93.2 184.8 243.5 155.2 172.9 3.7.2.10
b m 0.450 2.000 2.000 2.000 2.000 figs 3.12&3.13
d mm 215 215 215 215 215
K' 0.156 0.156 0.156 0.156 0.156 3.4.4.4
K 0.121 0.054 0.071 0.045 0.051 3.4.4.4
z mm 180.6 201.2 196.4 203.5 202.2 3.4.4.4
As mm² 1187 2112 2852 1754 1967 3.4.4.4
As shear mm² 359 1811 0
Def enhancement 2.170 1.801
As min mm² 1187 4584 2852 3159 1967 table 3.25
Ø mm 20 20 20 20 20
No bars No 4 15 10 11 7
@ mm 100 125 200 175 275
& @ mm ~ ~ 400 ~ 550 3.7.3.1
As prov mm² 1257 4712 3142 3456 2199
= mm²/m 2793 2356 1571 1728 1100
= % 1.299 1.096 0.731 0.804 0.511
fs N/mm² 314.9 149.4 378.3 169.2 372.7 Eqn 8
Max S mm 140 285 169 343 245 3.12.11.2.7

subclause (b) (b) (b) (b) (b) 3.12.11.2.7

170

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:170 17/07/2006 17:10:17

 RCC93 Flat Slabs (Tables).xls

RCC93 Flat Slabs (Tables)/ DETAIL!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made by Date Page
Location ECBP Typical floor to BS8110 rmw 12-Apr-2006 171
127
SIMPLIFIED FLAT SLAB DESIGN to BS 8110:2005 Cl 3.7.2.7 (Table 3.12) Checked Revision Job No
Originated from RCC93.xls v3.0 on CD © 2006 TCC chg - R68

DEFLECTION - X DIRECTION
PERIMETER INTERNAL PERIMETER INTERNAL BS 8110
END SPANS END SPANS INTERIOR SPANS INTERIOR SPANS Reference
As req mm² 3264 5116 2721 4298
As prov mm² 6126 7540 4398 5655
fs N/mm² 177.6 226.2 206.2 253.3 Eqn 8
K ave 0.043 0.035 0.036 0.030
As' prov mm² 670 1257 670 1257
100As'/bd % 0.080 0.078 0.080 0.078
Comp Mod 1.026 1.025 1.026 1.025 Eqn 9
Tens Mod 1.547 1.495 1.555 1.482 Eqn 7
Perm L/d 37.15 35.88 37.33 35.55 3.4.6.1+3.7.8
Actual L/d 34.88 34.88 34.88 34.88
As enhanced 95.6% 40.5% 66.2% 28.2%

DEFLECTION - Y DIRECTION
PERIMETER INTERNAL PERIMETER INTERNAL
END SPANS END SPANS INTERIOR SPANS INTERIOR SPANS
As req mm² 3382 5660 2820 4739
As prov mm² 7383 11938 5341 8482
fs N/mm² 152.7 158.0 176.0 186.2 Eqn 8
K ave 0.047 0.043 0.039 0.036
As' prov mm² 670 1257 670 1257
100As'/bd % 0.080 0.086 0.080 0.086
Comp Mod 1.026 1.028 1.026 1.028 Eqn 9
Tens Mod 1.579 1.616 1.618 1.633 Eqn 7
Perm L/d 37.92 38.87 38.84 39.27 3.4.6.1+3.7.8
Actual L/d 34.88 38.46 34.88 38.46
As enhanced 117.0% 104.4% 80.1% 70.8%

PUNCHING SHEAR DOUBLE SIDE SIDE

INTERNAL PENULT PENULT INTERNAL INTERNAL
None None3B etc B2 etc A3 etc None
Vt kN 0.0 888.5 969.3 478.0 0.0
Veff/Vt kN 1.15 1.15 1.15 1.40 1.40 table 3.13
ave d mm 205.0 205.0 205.0 205.0 215.0 3.7.6.3
ave As % 0.390 0.468 0.575 1.096 1.145
at 1.5d from column face
H mm 1015 1015 1015 633 648
B mm 1015 1015 1015 865 895 3.7.7.6
u 0 mm 1600 1600 1600 900 900 3.7.7.6
v max N/mm² 0.000 3.107 3.390 3.616 0.000 Eqn 27
V kN 0.0 1004.8 1097.7 643.1 0.0
u mm 4060 4060 4060 2130 2190 3.7.7.6
v N/mm² 0.000 1.207 1.319 1.473 0.000
vc N/mm² 0.622 0.661 0.708 0.878 0.880 Eqn 28
Links ? No Yes Yes Yes No table 3.9
Links at 0.5d & 1.25d
Sv mm EW 0 150 150 150 0 3.7.7.6
Asv req mm² 0 1762 2059 770 0 3.7.7.5
Total u mm 0 6070 6070 3235 0
Ø mm 0 8 10 8 0
Number 0 41 41 22 0
Asv prov mm² 0 2061 3220 1106 0
solve for H&B crit ( v = vc ) 3.7.7.6
H crit mm 0 1788 1825 1670 0
B crit mm 0 1788 1825 885 0
Additional 0.75d perimeters 0 2 2 1 0

171

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:171 17/07/2006 17:10:19

 RCC93 Flat Slabs (Tables)/ DETAIL!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made by Date Page

Location ECBP Typical floor to BS8110 rmw 12-Apr-2006 172

128
SIMPLIFIED FLAT SLAB DESIGN to BS 8110:2005 Cl 3.7.2.7 (Table 3.12) Checked Revision Job No
Originated from RCC93.xls v3.0 on CD © 2006 TCC chg - R68

PUNCHING SHEAR, continued SIDE SIDE BS 8110

CORNER PENULT PENULT Reference
A1 etc A2 etc B1 etc
Vt kN 341.1 525.7 525.7
Veff/Vt kN 1.25 1.40 1.40 table 3.13
ave d mm 215.0 205.0 215.0 3.7.6.3
ave As % 1.358 1.206 1.255
at 1.5d from column
H mm 648 633 648
B mm 573 865 895 3.7.7.6
u 0 mm 575 900 900 3.7.7.6
v max N/mm² 3.435 3.979 3.793
V kN 400.8 710.0 708.9
u mm 1220 2130 2190 3.7.7.6
v N/mm² 1.528 1.626 1.506
vc N/mm² 0.931 0.906 0.907 Eqn 28
Links ? Yes Yes Yes table 3.9
Links at 0.5d & 1.25d
Sv mm EW 150 150 150 3.7.7.6
Asv req mm² 417 1166 794 3.7.7.5
Total u mm 1902.5 3235 3305
Ø mm 8 10 8
Number 13 22 23
Asv prov mm² 653 1728 1156
solve for H&B crit ( v = vc ) 3.7.7.6
H crit mm 996 1782 1704
B crit mm 921 941 902
Additional 0.75d perimeters 2 2 1

172

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:172 17/07/2006 17:10:23

 RCC94 Two-way Slabs (Tables).xls

RCC94 Two-way Slabs (Tables).xls

This spreadsheet designs restrained two-way solid slabs in
accordance with BS 8110: Part 1 using moment and shear factors
Notes!
from equations 14 to 20 (i.e. Tables 3.14 and 3.15). Input is
This sheet gives disclaimers and revision history.
required on the first two sheets.

MAIN!
This single sheet consists of the input and main output. In itself it
should prove adequate for the design of restrained two-way slabs.
Inputs are underlined and most should be self-explanatory.

Self-weight, moment and shear factors are calculated

automatically. The use of the factors is also governed by Clause
3.5.3.5 (similar loads on adjacent spans, similar spans adjacent).
Where the relevant conditions are not met, users are directed
towards Clause 3.5.3.6 or alternative methods of analysis (e.g.
sub-frame analysis). Whilst ultimate reactions to beams are
given, shear per se is not checked as it is very rarely critical.

The dimension ly must be greater than lx : bays where lx> ly

are invalid. It is recognised that B1 can be parallel to ly and
the user should specify in which layers the top and bottom
reinforcement are located (see D33 and H33). In line 32 the user
is asked to specify the diameter of reinforcement to be used.
This reinforcement should be provided at the required centres
in accordance with Clause 3.5.3.5 (1) to (7) (middle strips and
column strips, torsion reinforcement at corners where an edge
or edges is/ are discontinuous). The spreadsheet highlights
whether additional reinforcement for torsion is required or not.
As noted under Deflection, the area of steel required, Asreq , may
be automatically increased in order to reduce service stress, fs ,
and increase modification factors to satisfy deflection criteria.

An approximate reinforcement density is given. This is

approximate only and excludes supporting beams, trimming to
holes, etc.

WEIGHT!
Weight! gives an estimate of the amount of reinforcement
required in a slab. Simplified curtailment rules, as defined in
Clause 3.12, are used to determine lengths of bars. The figures
should be treated as approximate estimates only as they cannot
deal with the effects of designers’ and detailers’ preferences,
rationalisation, the effects of holes, etc, etc. To the right of the
sheet are calculations of length, etc.

Support widths are required as input as they affect curtailments

and lengths.

173

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:173 17/07/2006 17:10:26

 RCC94 Two-way Slabs (Tables)/ MAIN!

174

174

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:174 17/07/2006 17:10:27

 RCC95 Continuous Beams (Tables).xls

RCC95 Continuous Beams (Tables).xls

The spreadsheet designs multiple-span rectangular or flanged
beams. It uses design ultimate bending moment and shear force
Graf!
factors from Table 3.5 of BS 8110: Part 1. As such its use should be
This sheet provides data for the charts in MAIN! and is not
limited, as defined by Clause 3.4.3, to where:
intended for formal printing.

■ Qk >⎜ Gk Notes!
■ Substantially uniform loads over three or more spans
This sheet gives disclaimers and revision history.
■ Variations in span < 15% lmax.

The intention is to provide the design of a simple continuous

beam on one sheet of A4.

MAIN!
The input requirements are self-explanatory. Answering “Y”
to Support in alt layer will incur additional cover to top bars
at supports (of the same size as those being designed at that
location) to allow for beams in the other direction. Users should
ensure effective depths, d, are correct (see DETAIL!D15, etc.).

The choice between rectangular, L or T beam is made via a combo-

box to the right hand side. When considering span reinforcement,
the spreadsheet will, where necessary, automatically increase
reinforcement in order to lower service stresses and enhance
allowable span to depth ratios. The diagrams for loading and
for bending moment are indicative only (the moment factors in
Table 3.5 do not give rise to a moment envelope).

DETAIL!
For first time users and young engineers, further detail of the
calculations undertaken is given on the sheet named DETAIL!,
pages 2 and 3 of the print-out.

Weight!
This sheet estimates the weight of reinforcement in the beam
when designed according to normal curtailment rules as defined
in BS 8110. The estimate is repeated at the bottom of MAIN! at
O62. Workings are shown on the right hand side of the sheet. The
estimate may be printed out using File/print or the print button
on the normal toolbar.

It should be recognised that different engineers’ and detailers’

interpretations of these clauses, different project circumstances
and requirements will all have a bearing on actual quantities of
reinforcement used.

175

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:175 17/07/2006 17:10:30

 RCC95 Continuous Beams (Tables)/ MAIN!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made by Date Page
Location D&D: Edge beam Grid 1 from A to J rmw 12-Apr-2006 176
132
CONTINUOUS CONCRETE BEAM DESIGN to BS 8110:2005 Table 3.5 Checked Revision Job No
Originated from RCC95.xls v3.0 on CD © 2006 TCC chg - R68

LOCATION Supports: from grid A to grid J STATUS

VALID DESIGN
DIMENSIONS MATERIALS γm = 1.50
Nº of spans Nº 5 Shape L BEAM fcu N/mm² 40 γm = 1.15
Max Span m 5.00 Top cover mm 40 fyl N/mm² 500 steel class A
depth, h mm 350 Bottom cover mm 40 fyv N/mm² 500 Density kN/m³ 23.6
bw mm 300 Side cover mm 40 h agg mm 20 (Normal weight concrete)
hf mm 175 Support steel in alt layer ? Y
bf mm 650 100
50
LOADING 0
Self Wt kN/m 1.2 -50
+ Dead kN/m 10.9
-100
Total Dead, gk kN/m 12.1
Imposed qk kN/m 5.0 A J A J
Design load, n = kN/m 25.0 Geometry and Loading Indicative Bending Moment Diagram

BENDING END END FIRST INT INTERIOR INTERNAL BS8110

SUPPORTS (A & J) SPANS SUPPORTS SPANS SUPPORTS Reference
M kNm 0.0 56.2 68.7 43.7 50.0 Table 3.5
d mm 276 290 270 294 270
bf mm 300 650 300 650 300 3.4.1.5
As mm² 0 470 648 360 457 3.4.4.4
As' mm² 0 0 0 0 0 3.4.4.4
Deflection
L/d Max 36.46 37.98 3.4.6.3
Actual L/d 17.24 OK 17.01 OK 3.4.6.1

Tension reinforcement
Ø 16 20 20 12 20
No 2 Top 2 Btm 3 Top 4 Btm 2 Top
As prov mm² 402 628 942 452 628
= % 0.49 0.72 1.16 0.51 0.78
Compression reinforcement
Ø 16 12 12 12 12
No 2 Btm 2 Top 2 Btm 2 Top 2 Btm
As' prov mm² 402 226 226 226 226
= % 0.49 0.26 0.28 0.26 0.28

SHEAR OUTER SUPT FIRST INT SUPT INT SUPT NOMINAL

V kN/m 56.2 75.0 68.7 ~ Table 3.5
v N/mm² 0.646 0.926 0.849 ~ Eqn 3
vc N/mm² 0.570 0.858 0.749 ~ Table 3.8
Link Ø mm 10 10 10 10
Legs No 2 2 2 2
@ mm 200 200 200 200

OUTPUT/SUMMARY
END END FIRST INT INTERNAL INTERNAL
SUPPORTS SPANS SUPPORTS SPANS SUPPORTS
PROVIDE 2 H16 T 2 H12 T 3 H20 T 2 H12 T 2 H20 T
Main reinforcement Nominal B 2 H20 B Nominal B 4 H12 B Nominal B

Links 2 H10 @ 200 2 H10 @ 200 2 H10 @ 200 2 H10 @ 200 2 H10 @ 200
from CL of support for 800 for 600 for 600

CHECKS BAR Ø SINGLE BAR SHEAR GLOBAL

< COVER LAYERS SPACING DEFLECTION LINKS STATUS
OK OK OK OK OK VALID DESIGN

176

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:176 17/07/2006 17:10:31

 RCC95 Continuous Beams (Tables).xls

RCC95 Continuous Beams (Tables)/ DETAILS!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made by Date Page
Location D&D: Edge beam Grid 1 from A to J rmw 12-Apr-2006 177
133
CONTINUOUS CONCRETE BEAM DESIGN to BS 8110:2005 Table 3.5 Checked Revision Job No
Originated from RCC95.xls v3.0 on CD © 2006 TCC chg - R68

DETAILED CALCULATIONS Gk = 60.70 Qk = 25.00 F = 124.98 kN

MAIN STEEL
END END FIRST INT INTERIOR INTERNAL BS 8110
SUPPORTS SPANS SUPPORTS SPANS SUPPORTS Reference
Factor 0.00 0.09 0.11 0.07 0.08 Table 3.5
M kNm 0.0 56.2 68.7 43.7 50.0 -=-
d mm 276 290 270 294 270
bf mm 300 650 300 650 300 3.4.1.5
K' 0.1558 0.1558 0.1558 0.1558 0.1558 Fig 3.3
Web Mres kNm 142.4 157.2 136.3 161.6 136.3 -=-
Flange Mres kNm --- 411.5 --- 419.7 --- -=-
K 0.0000 0.0257 0.0786 0.0195 0.0571 3.4.4.4
z mm 262.2 275.5 243.9 279.3 251.6 -=-
x mm 30.7 32.2 58.0 32.7 40.9 -=-
d' mm 78 56 76 56 68
net fsc N/mm² 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 Fig 3.3
Excess M kNm 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
As' req mm² 0 0 0 0 0
fst N/mm² 434.8 434.8 434.8 434.8 434.8 Fig 3.3
As req mm² 0 470 648 360 457
bw/b --- 0.4615 --- 0.4615 ---
Min % 0.20% 0.13% 0.20% 0.13% 0.20% Table 3.25
Min As 210 137 210 137 210

DEFLECTION
fs N/mm² 0.0 249.1 229.3 265.4 242.4 Eqn 8
Base ratio 22.00 22.00 3.4.6.3/4
Tens Mod 1.535 1.600 Table 3.10
Comp Mod 1.080 1.079 Table 3.11
Perm L/d 36.455 37.982 3.4.6.3
Actual L/d 17.241 ok 17.007 ok 3.4.6.1

TENSION STEEL
As mm² 210 470 648 360 457
Ø mm 16 ok 20 ok 20 ok 12 ok 20
No 2 2 3 4 2
As prov mm² 402 628 942 452 628
Clear dist mm 168.0 160.0 70.0 50.7 160.0 between bars
Min S ok 25.0 ok 25.0 ok 25.0 ok 25.0 ok 25.0 3.12.11.1
Max S ok 300.0 ok 188.7 ok 205.0 ok 177.1 ok 193.9 Table 3.28
3.12.11.2.4
COMPRESSION STEEL
Required mm² 314 188 188 188 136 Table 3.25
Ø ok 16 ok 12 ok 12 ok 12 ok 12
No 2 2 2 2 2
As' prov mm² 402 226 226 226 226
=% ok 0.486 ok 0.260 ok 0.279 ok 0.256 ok 0.279

177

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:177 17/07/2006 17:10:35

 RCC95 Continuous Beams (Tables)/ DETAILS!

Project Spreadsheets to BS 8110 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made by Date Page
Location D&D: Edge beam Grid 1 from A to J rmw 12-Apr-2006 134
178
CONTINUOUS CONCRETE BEAM DESIGN to BS 8110:2005 Table 3.5 Checked Revision Job No
Originated from RCC95.xls v3.0 on CD © 2006 TCC chg - R68

SHEAR
OUTER FIRST INT INTERNAL NOMINAL
SUPPORT SUPPORT SUPPORT
Factor 0.45 0.60 0.55 ~ Table 3.5
V kN 56.2 75.0 68.7 ~ -=-

v N/mm² 0.646 0.926 0.849 ~ Eqn 3

vc N/mm² 0.570 0.858 0.749 ~ Table 3.8

(v-vc)bv N/mm 120.0 120.0 120.0 120.0 Table 3.7

Link Ø ok 10 ok 10 ok 10 ok 10 3.12.7.1
Legs ok 2 ok 2 ok 2 ok 2
@ mm 218 203 203 218 3.12.7.1
Adjust to mm 200 200 200 200
for mm 0 0 0 --- from cl of supt
Adjust to mm 800 600 600 ---
As Dist ok 0.0 ok 90.0 ok 0.0 ok 0.0 3.4.5.5
As' Dist ok 0.0 ok 0.0 ok 0.0 ok 0.0 3.12.7.2

178

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:178 17/07/2006 17:10:39

 Spreadsheets to Eurocode 2

Spreadsheets to Eurocode 2

179

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:179 17/07/2006 17:10:42

 180

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:180 17/07/2006 17:10:43


General notes to Eurocode 2 versions
The Spreadsheets and Eurocode 2
The layout and workings of the spreadsheets to Eurocode 2 are
in line with those to BS 8110 outlined in the previous section,
Spreadsheets to BS 8110. The Introduction and General notes
are common to the use of all spreadsheets in this publication.
Descriptions of the spreadsheets to Eurocode 2 are given in the
following pages.
The spreadsheets are in accordance with Parts 1-1 and 1-2 of
Eurocode 2 and their respective UK National Annexes (NAs).
Parts 1-1 and 1-2 of Eurocode 2 (Eurocode 2: Design of concrete
structures, Part 1-1 General rules and rules for buildings, BS EN
1992-1-1 and Eurocode 2: Design of concrete structures, Part
1-2 General rules – Structural fire design BS EN 1992-1-2) were
published in December 2004.
Each Eurocode has a National Annex. These specifiy the values
of Nationally Determined Parameters (NDPs : factors relating to
safety and UK conditions, requirements for durability, etc. e.g.
values of cover, γm, αcc, k etc.) to be used within the Eurocodes in
each country. The values of the NPDs used are documented on
a separate sheet within each spreadsheet and allow for different
values to be used, for instance when the project is outside the UK.
The equivalents of these values are hidden away in BS 8110 and
indeed in the BS 8110 spreadsheets.
The UK National Annexes (NAs) that confirm or change Nationally
Determined Parameters within Eurocode 2 were published in
December 2005
Eurocode 2 will ultimately supersede all UK codes dealing with
the design of concrete structures. All conflicting British Standards
are due to be withdrawn in 2010.
The spreadsheets have called for some interpretation of both
Eurocodes and their NAs.
Implementation of Eurocode 2
BS EN 1992-1-1 and BS EN 1992-1-2 were published by BSI in
December 2004. Their National Annexes were published in
December 2005. BS EN 1992 is expected to be used generally
in conjunction with other Eurocodes (and their UK National
Annexes) for loading etc and other European Standards (ENs)
for materials and execution. During the early stages of the
implementation of BS EN 1992, all the related codes, standards
and their UK National Annexes may not be available in their final
form. Nonetheless, as PD6687[31] points out, EN 1992 –1 – 1
can still be used to design structures using:
■ BS EN 1990 Basis of structural design &. UK National Annex
■ BS EN 1991 series, Actions. Almost all UK National Annexes
EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:181
General notes to Eurocode 2 versions
should be available in 2006. It should be noted that EN 1992
– 1 –1 was calibrated using the contemporary BS standards
for loading, which might therefore be used satisfactorily in
conjunction with EN 1992 –1 –1 pending the final publication
of BS EN 1991 series of standards.
■ BS EN197, cement and EN 206, concrete and its BS derivative
BS8500. These standards have been in use for some time in
the UK.
■ BS EN10080 (steel for the reinforcement of concrete), BS
4449 (BS 4449: 2005, reinforcement), BS4482 (BS 4482:
2005, fabric), BS 4483 (BS 4483: 2005, fabric), and BS 8666
(BS 8666: 2005, scheduling). These standards were published
in late 2005 and came into effect on 1 January 2006.
One of the fundamental assumptions in EC2 is that the
requirements of ENV 13670 for execution and workmanship
are complied with. This raises a difficulty in the UK, as EN 13670
(Execution of concrete structures) is some way off. However
for the UK, the provisions of the National Structural Concrete
Specification (NSCS) [ref 32] are considered equivalent to those
in ENV 13670 for tolerance class 1.
Other standards are in various states of readiness and in areas
not specifically mentioned above, the designers might consider
using current UK practice or current British Standards but they
should satisfy themselves that they are compatible with BS EN
1992 and that the resulting reliability would be acceptable. For
instance the spreadsheets for pad foundations, TCC 81 uses
current UK practice for sizing (allowable under EN 1997) rather
than the full limit state approach.
In the UK, the process of converting from BS8110 to Eurocode
might be perceived as being a large barrier. As with any change,
there will be opportunities and threats. Eurocode 2 will be adopted
only where there is commercial advantage in doing so but from
calibration studies it would appear that there are significant gains
to be made by adopting it in the design of building structures. The
authors are confident that in the long run Eurocode 2 will be seen
as being a very good standard allowing consistent safety across
materials and opportunity for greater economy and even greater
flair in concrete design and construction.
Notes regarding Eurocode2
In his comparison of design requirements in Eurocode 2 and BS
8110, Narayanan(24) gave the following outline description of
Eurocode 2.
General layout
BS EN 1992-1-1(1) and BS EN 1992-1-2 are broadly comparable
to BS 8110: Parts 1 and 2. Eurocode 2 comprises principles
and rules of application. Principles are general statements,
181
17/07/2006 17:10:44
 definitions, other requirements, and analytical models for which
no alternative is permitted. The rules of application are generally
recognised rules that follow the principles and satisfy their
requirements. Eurocode 2 is generally laid out to give advice on
the basis of phenomena (e.g. bending, shear etc) rather than by
member types as in BS 8110 (e.g. beams, slabs, columns etc).
The Code does not provide derived formulae (e.g. for bending),
only the details of the stress block are expressed). This is the
traditional European approach.
The UK Nationally Determined Parameters (NDPs) that are used
in the spreadsheets are taken from the relevant National Annex
(NA) and are shown in a separate sheet within the spreadsheets.
Units for stress are mega Pascals, MPa (1 MPa = 1 N/mm2 )
Terminology employed will be generally familiar to UK engineers,
although there are some new words. Thus ‘loads’ are referred
to as ‘actions’; ‘bending moments’ and ‘shear forces’ are called
‘internal forces and moments’; ‘superimposed loads’ are ‘variable
actions’; and ‘self-weight’ and ‘dead loads’ are referred to as
‘permanent actions’.
Concrete strength
Concrete strength in Eurocode 2 refers to the cylinder strength
(fck) and cube strength (fcu). This fck/fcu notation is used throughout
Eurocode 2. However, design is based on characteristic cylinder
strengths not cube strengths and the spreadsheets refer to fck
only. The relationship between cylinder and cube strengths
is shown below in Table 5 along with approximate moduli of
elasticity from Eurocode 2.
Eurocode 2 and the spreadsheets permit much higher strengths of
concrete to be used than currently. The maximum characteristic
cylinder strength fck permitted is 90N/mm2. Because the
characteristics of higher strength concrete are different, some
expressions in the Code are adjusted for classes above C50/60.
Supplies of these high strength concretes should be assured
before using them in design.
The spreadsheets are unsuitable for the design of lightweight
concrete.
Table 5
Property Strength class
Relationship between
cylinder and cube stregths C20/25 C25/30
fck (cylinder) 20 25
fck (cube) 25 30
Ecm 29 30.5
‡ Based on the outline description of Eurocode 2 in Comparison of design requirements in Eurocode 2 and
BS 8110, Narayanan( 24)
182
EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:182
Reinforcement
Eurocode 2 is applicable for ribbed reinforcement with
characteristic yield strengths of 400 to 600 MPa. Plain bar and
mild steel reinforcement are, strictly, outside the Code. The
characteristic yield strength of reinforcing steel to BS 4449:2005
will be 500 MPa. According to the UK National Annex, the partial
factor for steel reinforcement is 1.15
Cover
Minimum concrete cover, cmin, is related to bond strength,
durability and fire resistance. In addition to the minimum cover
an allowance for deviations due to variations in execution
(construction) should be allowed for in design. Eurocode 2
recommends that, for concrete cast against formwork, this
allowance,- ∆cdev, is taken as 10 mm, unless the construction is
subject to a quality assurance system in which case it could be
reduced to 5 mm or even 0 mm where non-conforming members
are rejected (e.g. in a precast yard). cmin + ∆cdev = nominal cover
It is recommended that the nominal cover is clearly stated on
the drawings.
Cover for durability is governed by BS 8500. Guidance on the use
of BS8500 is given in How to use BS8500 with BS 8110 - copy
available from www.concretecentre.com.
Fire resistance
Eurocode 2, Part 1–2: Structural fire design[13], gives guidance on
design for fire resistance of concrete structures. Although much
of the Code is devoted to fire engineering methods, the design
for fire resistance may still be carried out by referring to tables
for minimum axis distances and dimensions for various elements.
The axis distance is measured from the surface to the centre of the
bar and is treated as a mean to be obtained during execution.
Axis distances and dimensions are given in section 5 of Part 1–2.
Further advice on using the tabular methods is given in How to
design concrete structures using Eurocode 2: Getting started [34].
C30/37 C35/40 C40/50 C45/50 C50/60
30 35 40 45 50
37 40 50 50 60
32 33.5 35 36 37
17/07/2006 17:10:46

Load combinations
BS EN1990 allows the designer (of UK structures) to use either
Expression (6.10) or the less favourable of Exp (6.10a) or Exp (6.10b).
For members supporting one variable action the combination
1.25Gk + 1.5Qk may be used. This combination is derived from
Exp (6.10b) and can be used provided that the permanent actions
(Gk) are not greater than 4.5 times the variable actions (Qk) and
the structure is not used for storage.
Less economically designers may choose to use 1.35 Gk + 1.5 Qk
(derived from Exp (6.10)).
EN 1990 requires that actions should be checked using both γG.sup
(=1.25 or 1.35) and γG.inf (= 1.0). γG.sup (i.e. 1.25 or 1.35) will always
be the more onerous when designing for peak moments, but
greater hogging moments in spans often occur when γG.inf is used.
For this reason, a macro is employed in a number of spreadsheets
to change γG to its lower value (1.0), record the results, then set
it back to the higher value again. The larger value of the tensile
force in the reinforcement, Ftd, from both sets of results is then
used for the design of top steel in spans.
For the serviceability limit states of deflection and cracking, the
quasi-permanent load case is used. Generally a quasi-permanent
load of Gk + Ψ2Qk is used where Ψ2 is a factor dependant on the
use of the structure (see BS EN 1990 A1.2.2 and UK National
Annex).
Load cases
For building structures, the UK NA to Eurocode 2, Part 1–1 allows
either of the following sets of load arrangements to be used:
1. Alternate or adjacent spans loaded
2. All or alternate spans loaded
The spreadsheets use the all-or-alternate-spans-loaded case by
default. Users may switch to 1, the alternate-or-adjacent-spans-
loaded by changing the setting in Notes!
Simplified arrangements for slabs
According to the UK NA, the load arrangements can be simplified
for slabs where only the all spans loaded needs to be checked (see
Figure 3), provided the following conditions are met:
a) In a one-way spanning slab the area of each bay exceeds 30
m2 (a bay means a strip across the full width of a structure
bounded on the other sides by lines of support)
b) The ratio of the variable action (Qk) to the permanent action
(Gk) does not exceed 1.25
c) The magnitude of the variable action excluding partitions
does not exceed 5 kN/m2.
EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:183
General notes to Eurocode 2 versions
Actions
The most notable difference between UK Standards and
Eurocode 1 is the bulk density of reinforced concrete, which has
been increased to 25 kN/m3.
Analysis
Eurocode 2 dictates that the type of analysis should be appropriate
to the problem being considered. The following are commonly
used: linear elastic analysis, linear elastic analysis with limited
redistribution and plastic analysis.
Linear analysis may be carried out assuming cross sections are
uncracked and remain plane (i.e. may be based on concrete gross
sections) and linear stress-strain relationships and the use of
mean values of elastic modulus. Linear analysis is the basis of the
analyses used in the spreadsheets.
In the rigorous spreadsheets the spans are checked at 1/20th
points to see whether the section theoretically cracks under load;
if so that section remains cracked and cracked section properties
are applied and used in the serviceability calculations. (Cracked
section properties are used only for the deflection calculations
and not for the analysis as the process would become iterative,
non-linear and would take a long time to run.)
For ULS, the moments derived from elastic analysis may
be redistributed to a maximum of 30% where Class B or C
reinforcement is used or 20% if Class A reinforcement is used.
According to BS8666:2000 reinforcement called up as may be
500 grade Class A, B or C.
Section analysis – Design assumptions
The simplified rectangular concrete stress block as shown in
Figure 3.5 of BS EN 1992-1-1 has been used throughout the
spreadsheets, in conjunction with option B (the horizontal line)
on the reinforcement stress/ strain curve (Figure 3.8 of BS EN
1992-1-1). In the case of columns and other members with
axial force, these strain distributions have been modified by the
imposition of the “hinge point” as shown in Figure 6.1. (of BS EN
1991-1-1).
The rectangular stress block option has been chosen because of
its’ relative simplicity, thereby making it more straightforward for
users to follow the logic used in calculations. The choice of stress
block normally makes little difference in the design of slabs and
beams, but in column design, slightly higher axial loads may be
resisted by employing the recto-parabolic stress block as shown
in Figure 3.3 and option (A) in Figure 3.8.
These options may be adopted for future versions of TCC12 and
TCC51 to TCC54.
Lever arm, z is restricted to a maximum of 0.95 x effective depth.
This limit is derived from BS 8110 and avoids dangers associated
with theoretically over-shallow neutral axis depths.
183
17/07/2006 17:10:48
 rounded at the corners. The formulae are slightly different than
Analysis & design spreadsheets those for beam shear. For instance where shear reinforcement is
– Top steel checks in spans required, the contribution of the concrete resistance in punching
shear is recognised (compared to beam shear where it is not).
Within the spreadsheets for continuous elements, it has been
assumed that at least 50% of support reinforcement in beams
and slabs will normally extend to a point 0.3L from the centrelines αcc and shear
of support. The other 50% is assumed to be curtailed at a point
0.2L from the centrelines of support. However, the element αcc is a coefficient applied to the compression block that takes
is checked at 0.25L and 0.75L to determine the whether any into account long-term effects on the compressive strength
top steel is required to resist hogging moment. If so the larger and unfavourable effects resulting from the way in which load
amount of top steel required is assumed to be necessary in the is applied. According to EN 1992-1-1, αcc = 1.0. However, the UK
span between these two points. National Annex to BS EN 1992-1-1 makes αcc = 0.85 for flexure
and axial load and 1.0 for other phenomena. Generally, the
The adoption of a shear truss model in Eurocode 2 causes the spreadsheets adopt αcc = 1.0 for shear.
force in tension reinforcement to be increased above MEd/z. This
can be accommodated by using the shift rule to curtail bars at
a distance al from where they are no longer required to resist
Deformation
bending moment. The spreadsheets take a slightly different
Generally, serviceability checks for deformation may be carried
approach by actually `calculating tensile force to be resisted, Ftd,
out using ‘deemed to satisfy’ span to effective depth rules that
at 0.25L and 0.75L, where
are similar to those in BS 8110. However, if a more detailed
check is required, Eurocode 2 gives guidance which varies from
Ftd = MEd/Z + ∆Ftd
the rules in BS 8110 Part 2.
where
∆Ftd = 0.5VEd( cot θ – cot α)
More rigorous approaches may be used if required and are
where
covered in the ‘R’ (for Rigorous) series of spreadsheets. The
θ = the angle of the compression strut
methods employed are described in more detail in Deflections in
cot α = 0 for vertical reinforcement
concrete slabs and beam [30].
The spreadsheets determine the values of MED and VEd at 1/20th
points for all load combinations, then select those producing the
highest value of Ftd. If either MEd or VEd is reversed for a particular
Detailing
combination, the additional tensile force is taken by bottom
The rules for determining the anchorage and lap lengths are more
reinforcement, so the value of ∆Ftd is set to zero.
complex than the simple tables in BS 8110. Eurocode 2 considers
the effects of, amongst other things, the position of bars during
concreting, the shape of the bar and cover. Designers and detailers
Shear are directed to more specialised references for further guidance
eg IStructE/Con Soc Detailing Manual [28 ].
The ‘variable strut inclination’ method is used in Eurocode 2 for
the assessment of the shear capacity of a section. The assumed
angle of the concrete compression strut can be altered to give
the most economic design. In most cases the angle of the strut
may be assumed to be 21.8º (ie where cot θ = 2.5). Angles above
21.8º may prove to be economic where shear loads are high.
Further advice can be found in the guide ‘How to design concrete
structures using Eurocode 2: Beams [12] in the ‘How to’ series.

Applied shear force (VEd) is compared with three values for the
resistance (VRd):-

VRdc = shear capacity of the concrete alone;

VRd.max = shear resistance determined by the capacity of the
notional concrete struts
VRds = capacity of a section with shear reinforcement.

The formula for VRds can be rewritten to give the area of shear
reinforcement required per unit length. Asw/s

With respect to punching shear, checks are carried at 2d from the

face of the column and for a rectangular column, the perimeter is

184

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:184 17/07/2006 17:10:50


TCC11 Element Design.xls
TCC11.xls includes sheets for designing
■ Solid slabs
■ Rectangular beams and
■ T beams (and ribbed slabs) for bending
■ Beam shear
■ Columns with axial load and bending about one axis.
TCC11.xls designs elements to Eurocode 2: Part 1: 1992(3). It is
assumed that loads, moments, shears, etc, are available for input
from hand calculations or from analysis from elsewhere. Span-
to-depth ratios and other ‘NDP’ values are taken from the UK
National Annex (part of reference 3).
SLAB!
This sheet designs a section of solid slab in a single simply
supported span, in a continuous end or internal span, at supports
or as a cantilever. Workings and references to clause numbers are
given to the right hand side of the sheet.
Input should be self-explanatory. Terminology may differ from
the BS 8110 version: for instance the term δ is the redistribution
factor (i.e. 1 – redistribution percentage/100). Concrete cylinder
strength, fck, is changed using the combo-box to the right hand
side.
In spans, the location of the section being designed has a bearing
on deflection limitations, and the appropriate location should
be chosen from the combo-box to the right hand side. Similarly,
the user should choose from the list of usage (dwelling, office/
store, parking etc.), which governs the proportion of imposed
load affecting long-term deflection. Eurocode 2 requires the
input of the relationship between dead and imposed loading.
This is done at cells G9 and G10. When appropriate the sheet
will automatically increase amounts of reinforcement in order
to lower service stresses and enhance allowable span-to-depth
ratios.
The ‘cover’ specified at D12 should be the normal cover including
the allowance in design for deviation ∆cdev. This allowance is
spccified in cell D13 and is used in the checking of allowable
maximum bar size.
RECT~BEAM!
This sheet designs a rectangular beam in a single simply
supported span, in a continuous end or internal span, at supports
or as a cantilever. These choices have a bearing on deflection
limitations and the user should choose the appropriate location
from the combo-box to the right hand side. The user should
similarly choose from the list of usage (dwelling, office/ store,
parking, etc.), which governs the proportion of imposed load
EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:185
TCC11 Element Design.xls
affecting long-term deflection. This sheet will, where necessary,
automatically increase reinforcement in order to lower service
stresses and enhance allowable span to depth ratios. Again, input
of the relationship between dead and imposed loading is required
in cells D12 and D13.
ψ2 is the quasi-permanent load factor applied to imposed loads
in calculations of deflection. The factors are 0.2 for dwellings, 0.3
for offices, 0.6 for parking areas and 0.0 for snow and wind.
TEE~BEAM!
TEE~BEAM! designs T beams and L beams in single simply-
supported span, end span, internal span or cantilever locations.
Again, these choices have a bearing on deflection limitations
and the user should choose the appropriate location from the
combo-box to the right hand side.
With respect to the effective width of the flange, the user may
also choose that the section is considered as a tee- or an inverted
L beam. Again usage and whether brittle partitions are present
must also be selected.
A default value for the width of the flange bf must be input. Tips
for values of bf ,max are given in cells J18 and:J19.
In the determination of compression steel, where the neutral axis
lies below flange, the concrete in web, bw, below the flange has
been ignored.
In order to calculate the appropriate deflection factor for
compression reinforcement, there is a facility to specify the
diameter of compression reinforcement. When considering
deflection, the spreadsheet will, where necessary, automatically
increase span reinforcement in order to lower service stresses and
enhance allowable span-to-depth ratios.
SHEAR!
This sheet designs beams for shear. Input is (we hope) self-
explanatory. Providing the applied load is fundamentally a UDL, or
where the principal load is located further than 2d from the face
of the support, Eurocode 2 allows shear to be checked at d from
the face of support (as does BS 8110).The value of shear force,
VEd, input at G11 can, provided there is diagonal compression
and continuity of tension reinforcement for at least 2.5 d from
the face of support, be evaluated at d from the face of support
(see Clause 6.2.2(6)). Cell H11, requires the relevant ultimate
uniformly distributed load to be specified.
The sheet designs the links required at the section considered. If
the beam loading is considered to be uniformly distributed, the
ultimate UDL, n, can be entered to give the distance for which
this arrangement is required before reverting to nominal link
arrangement.
185
17/07/2006 17:10:52
 Kϕ = 1 + βϕef
COLUMN!
where
This spreadsheet designs symmetrically reinforced rectangular
β = 0.35 + (fck/200) – (λ/150)
columns bent about one axis where both axial load, NEd , and
where
maximum design moment, MEd , are known. It is based on
λ = slenderness ratio l0/i
Eurocode 2 Figure 6.1 and 3.5. The spreadsheet iterates x/h to
where
determine where the neutral axis lies. Assuming a value of x
i = radius of gyration of the uncracked concrete
allows strains and therefore stresses to be determined using the
section = h/3.46 for rectangular sections,
principles shown in Figure 6.1. From these stresses the area of
where h is the depth in the direction under
steel required for the design moment MEd and design axial load
consideration and i = d/4 for circular sections
can be determined seperately. The neutral axis depth x is adjusted
where d is the diameter.
until the areas of steel considering MEd and NEd match. The sheet
ϕef = effective creep coefficient as defined in 5.6.1.
includes stress and strain diagrams to aid comprehension of the
lo = effective length of column
final design. Workings and references are shown to the right hand
side of the sheet.
In columns in an unbraced structures MEd = M02 + M2
Please note that for ‘stocky’ columns i.e. when λ ≤λ lim
M02
MEd = M02 = M + eiNEd e iNE d M02
M
where
M = numerically higher moment from first order analysis
ei = lo/400 ≤ (h/30) ≤ 20mm for columns in braced
systems
NEd = design axial action at ULS.
M0e + M2 M0e + M2
M2 = NEd e 2
When λ >λllim, i.e when ‘slender’, the design bending moment M02
in a column in a braced structure is: + =
MEd= Maximum of {M0Ed + M2 ; M02 ; M01 + 0.5 M2} (see figure)
where
M0Ed = equivalent first order moment including the effect of
imperfections (at about mid height) and may be taken
as = M0e
M01 0.5 M2 M01 + 0.5 M2
where
M0e = (0.6M02 + 0.4M01) ≥ 0.4 M02 First order Additional Total
moments for second order moment
Note: M01 and M02 should have the same sign ‘stocky ’ diagram
moments
if they give tension on the same side. Attention columns for ‘slender for ‘slender
should be paid to the sign of the bending moments. columns ’ columns ’
M2 = nominal second order moment in slender columns = NEd e2
Moments in slender columns
where
NEd = design axial action at ULS
e2 = deflection = (1/r)l02/10
where For simplicity, where three or more bars are required in the top
1/r = curvature = KrKϕ (fyd /(Es0.45d)) and bottom of the section, it is assumed that a symmetrical
where arrangement will be required for the side faces (see the argument
Kr = (nu – n)/(nu – nbal) ≤ 1.0 included within the commentary for the BS 8110 version).
where
nu = 1 + ω COLUMN! assumes that the moment entered has already been
where adjusted, if necessary, for bi-axial bending.
ω = mechanical reinforcement ratio =
(As/Ac)(fyd/fcd) as in 5.6.1 above For many side and all corner columns, there is no other choice
n = NEd/Acfcd as defined in 5.6.1 above; than to design for bi-axial bending, and the method given in
nbal = value of n corresponding to the Clause 5.8.9 must be adhered to, i.e.,TCC53.xls or sheets 2 and 3
maximum moment of resistance and may be of TCC51.xls should be used.
taken as 0.4
Note: Kr may be derived fom column charts.
Theoretical shortfalls in area of up to 2% are considerer to be
acceptable. In theory, negative amounts of reinforcement required
can be obtained but these are superseded by requirements for
minimum amounts of reinforcement in columns. No adjustment

186

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:186 17/07/2006 17:10:54

 TCC11 Element Design.xls

is made in the area of concrete occupied by reinforcement.

Maximum link centres are given in Clause 9.5.2[4]. Column shear

should be checked separately, in the event that this is likely to
be critical.

INDIRECT!
This spreadsheet considers indirect supports, e.g. where one
beam is supported by another, to calculate additional legs of links
required in the supporting beam.

Refs!
This sheet comprises the values for Nationally Determined
Parameters that have been used in the spreadsheet. These data
reflect the values given in draft UK National Annexes for BS EN
1990, BS EN 1992 -1-1 and BS EN 1992-1-2 Designers should
ensure that these data are current when the spreadsheet is used.

When using TCC11 for permanent design, designers are

strongly advised to include a copy of this sheet with any design
calculations.

Notes!
This sheet gives disclaimers and revision history.

187

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:187 17/07/2006 17:10:57

 TCC11 Element Design/ SLAB!

188

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:188 17/07/2006 17:10:58

 TCC11 Element Design.xls

TCC11 Element Design/ RECT~BEAM

Section design to Eurocode 2 (BS EN 1992-1)

RECTANGULAR BEAMS
Originated from TCC11.xls, v 1.3 on CD © 2003-2005 TCC

INPUT Location 1st Floor, Span 1 Beam type END SPAN

M kNm 370.0 fck 30 N/mm²
c = 1.50
 0.85 fyk 500 N/mm²
s = 1.15
span mm 8000 Steel class A c,dev 10
h mm 500 REBAR Ø COVER to main bars
b mm 300 Tension 32 42
gk kN/m 25.80 Comp'n 20 35
qk kN/m 20.00 Side -- 42
2 = 0.6 Shopping brittle partitions? YES

OUTPUT 1st Floor, Span 1 .

Effective depth, d = 500 - 42 - 32/2 = 442.0 mm
Neutral axis, x = [442-(442² -2E6x370x1.5/0.85/300/30)]/0.8 = 272.2 mm
(x/d) limit = 0.450 x/d actual = 0.616 > 0.450, x = 198.9 mm
Lever arm, z = 442 - 0.4 x 198.9 = 362.4 mm
d2 = 35 + 20/2 = 45 mm
Gross fsc = 434.8 N/mm² from strain diagram
Net fsc = 434.8 - 0.85 x 30 /1.5 = 417.8 N/mm²
Excess M = 370 - 294.1 = 75.9 kNm
Compession steel, As2 = 75.9E6 /417.8 /(442 - 45) = 457 mm²
PROVIDE 2H20 COMPRESSION STEEL = 628 mm²
Steel stress, fyd = 434.8 N/mm² from strain diagram ρ = 280 N/mm²
Tension steel, As = 294.1E6/362.4/434.8 + 457.5 x 417.8/434.8 = 2306 mm²
9.2.1.1 (1) As min = 1.3 x 300 x 500 = 200 mm²
7.3.2 (1) As crack = 400 x 0.86 x 2.896 x 68.1/500 = 136 mm² .
7.4.2 As def = 2341 mm²
PROVIDE 3H32 TENSION STEEL = 2413 mm²
DEFLECTION QP M =370 x 37.8 /64.8 = 253.8 kNm s = 280 N/mm²
7.4.2 (2) Modification factor = 310 /280.0 = 1.107
Permissible L/d = 1.107 x 0.875 x 18.967 = 18.37
Actual L/d = 8000 /442 = 18.10 ok .

189

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:189 17/07/2006 17:11:04

 TCC11 Element Design/ TEE~BEAM!

Section design to Eurocode 2 (BS EN 1992-1)

SIMPLE TEE & L BEAMS
Originated from TCC11.xls, v 1.3 on CD © 2003-2005 TCC

INPUT Location 1st Floor, Span 3 to 4

M kNm 275.0 Beam type END SPAN
 1.00 fck 30 N/mm²
c = 1.50
span mm 9000 fyk 500 N/mm²
s = 1.15
h mm 500 teel class A ǻc,dev 10
bw mm 300 REBAR Ø COVER
bf mm 840 Tension 25 35
hf mm 150 Comp'n 12 30
gk kN/m 25.80 Side -- 35
qk kN/m 20.00 2 = 0.6 Shopping
brittle partitions? YES
OUTPUT 1st Floor, Span 3 to 4
Effective depth, d = 500 - 35 - 25/2 = 452.5 mm
Neutral axis, x = [452.5-¥(452.5² -2E6x275x1.5/0.85/300/30)]/0.8 = 56.0 mm
(x/d) limit = 0.414 x/d actual = 0.124 ok
Lever arm, z = 452.5 - 0.4 x 56.0 = 430.1 > 0.95d = 429.9 mm
Tension steel, As = 275.0E6 /429.9 /434.8 = 1471 mm²
9.1.1.1 (1) As min = 1.3 x 300 x 452.5 = 204 mm²
7.3.2 (1) As crack = 400.0 x 0.86 x 2.896 x 87.6 /500 = 175 mm²
for deflection, As def = 1893 mm²
PROVIDE 4H25 TENSION STEEL = 1963 mm²
.
Service stress, QP M =275 x 45.8 /64.83 = 160.3 kNm ıs = 202 N/mm²
7.4.2 (2) Modification factor = 310 /201.7 = 1.537
Permissible L/d = 1.537 x 0.638 x 21.005 = 20.59
Actual L/d = 9000 /452.5 = 19.89 ok .
.
.
. ıs = 202 N/mm²
.
.
. .

190

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:190 17/07/2006 17:11:10

 TCC11 Element Design.xls

TCC11 Element Design/ SHEAR!

Section design to Eurocode 2 (BS EN 1992-1)

BEAM SHEAR
Originated from TCC11.xls, v 1.3 on CD © 2003-2005 TCC

INPUT Location 1st Floor, Span 2 at 2E

fck N/mm² 30
c = 1.50 d bw
fywk N/mm² 500
s = 1.15 440 300

Main Steel Link Ø Legs Side cover VEd n

Ø 25 10 2 30 258.0 64.8
No 2 mm No mm kN at face kN/m

OUTPUT 1st Floor, Span 2 at 2E

6.2.2 (1) AsL = 982 mm² = 0.744% fcd = 20.0 N/mm²
equation (6.6) ν = 0.6(1 - 30/250) = 0.528 . cot = 2.50
equation (6.9) VRd,max = 1 x 300 x 396.0 x 0.528 x 20.0 /2.90 /1000 = 432.6 kN ok
6.2.1 (8) VEd @ d = 258 - 64.8 x 0.44 = 229.5 kN
6.2.2 (1) k= 1 + (200 /440) = 1.674 .
equation (6.2) VRd,c = 0.12 x 1.674 cube root(0.744 x 30) = 74.7 kN .
9.2.2 (5) Asw/s (min)= 0.08 x 300 /500 x 30 = 0.263 mm
equation (6.9) Asw/s (max) = 0.5 x 300 /500 x 1.15 x 0.528 x 20.0 = 3.643 mm ok
equation (6.7) Asw/s = 229.5E3 /(396.0 x 434.8 x 2.50) = 0.533 > 0.263
9.2.2 (6) smax,L = 330 mm smax,T = 330 mm 9.2.2 (8) ok
PROVIDE 2 legs T10 @ 275
Provide for distance of 825 mm from support face
then nominal links = 2 legs T10 @ 325

191

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:191 17/07/2006 17:11:14

 TCC11 Element Design/ COLUMN!

Section design to Eurocode 2 (BS EN 1992-1)

SYMMETRICAL RECTANGULAR COLUMN DESIGN
COLUMN DESIGN MOMENTS ABOUT X AXIS ONLY

Originated from TCC11.xls, v 1.3 on CD © 2003-2005 TCC

INPUT Location Column 2E fck 35 N/mm²

Axial load, NEd 2507 kN fyk 500 N/mm²
Moment, MEd 27.0 kNm Main bar Ø 20 mm
height, h 300 mm Link Ø 8 mm
breadth, b 325 mm
c = 1.50 concrete
cover (to link ) 25 mm
s = 1.15 steel
CALCULATIONS
from MED As = [M - αηfck.b.dc(h/2 - dc/2)] / [(h/2-d2).(σsc+σst).γc]
from NEd As = (N - αηfck.b.dc) / [(σsc - σst).γc] Asc = Ast = As d c = min(h, λx)
d2 = 43 mm αηfck /γc = 19.8 N/mm²
d= 257 mm fyk /γs = 434.8 N/mm²

from iteration, neutral axis depth, x = 374.7 mm dc = 299.7 mm

αηfcu.b.dc/γc = 1932.1 kN
Steel comp strain = 0.00258
Steel tens strain = -0.00092
σsc = 434.8 N/mm² (Comp. stress in reinf.) 415 net
σst = -183.3 N/mm² (Tensile stress in reinf.) -163 net
from M, As = 994 mm² from N, As = 994 mm²
OUTPUT OK
Column 2E
Requires 994mm² T&B:- PROVIDE 12T20
(ie 4T20 T&B - 1257mm² T&B - 3.87% o/a, @80 c/c.)
Links : - PROVIDE T8 @ 300 see clause 9.5.2 (4)

Strain diagram Stress diagram

0.00292 19.8 N/mm²

435
0.00258

Notes
0.00092
Stresses in N/mm2
183
0.00058 Compression +ve
- - - Neutral axis

192

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:192 17/07/2006 17:11:20

 TCC11 Element Design.xls

TCC11 Element Design/ COLUMN!

Section design to Eurocode 2 (BS EN 1992-1)

Indirect Supports
Originated from TCC11.xls, v 1.3 on CD © 2003-2005 TCC

INPUT Location 1st Floor, Beam 7D-E

fywk 500 N/mm²
s = 1.15
h1 300 mm
h2 450 mm
bw1 225 mm Link Ø = 10
bw2 300 mm
VEd 127.0 kN from secondary

OUTPUT 1st Floor, Beam 7D-E

a = Min(300/2 + 300/3, 300/2) = 150 mm
d = Min(450/3 + 225/2, 450/2) = 225 mm
fyd = 500 /1.15 = 434.78 N/mm²
Extra Asw = 1000 x 127 /434.78 = 292 mm²
PROVIDE 4 additional T10 legs within 2a (and within d,if needed)
Asw,prov = 314 mm²

193

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:193 17/07/2006 17:11:26

 TCC12 Bending and Axial Force.xls
This spreadsheet gives an interaction chart for moment
against axial load for rectangular sections with asymmetrical
reinforcement arrangements. Primarily intended for beams
with axial load, it is also applicable to asymmetrically reinforced
columns.

MAIN!
Moments are considered to be about the x-x axis. All applied
loads and moments should be ultimate, with compressive axial
loads positive and with positive moments inducing tension in the
bottom reinforcement.

With asymmetrical arrangements of reinforcement the diagram

indicates that negative moments are theoretically possible. After
much consideration, the diagram is considered to be correct
but strictly is valid only for load cases where M is greater than
Mmin as shown on the graph. A reciprocal diagram is generated
automatically when top and bottom steels are reversed in the
input.

Calcs!
Calcs! shows the derivation of the chart where moment capacity
is calculated at intervals of neutral axis depth from n.a. depth for
N = 0 to n.a. depth for N = Nbal, then in intervals from n.a. depth
for N = Nbal to n.a. depth for N = Nuz. This sheet shows workings
and is not necessarily intended for printing out other than for
checking purposes.

REFS!
This sheet comprises the values for Nationally Determined
Parameters that have been used in the spreadsheet. These data
reflect the values given in draft UK National Annexes for BS EN
1992-1-1. Designers should ensure that these data are current
when the spreadsheet is used. When using TCC12 for permanent
design, designers are strongly advised to include a copy of this
sheet with any design calculations.

Notes!
This sheet gives disclaimers and revision history.

194

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:194 17/07/2006 17:11:31

 TCC12 Bending and Axial Force.xls

TCC12 Bending and Axial Force/ MAIN!

Project Spreadsheets to Eurocode 2 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made by Date Page
Location Beam C1-2, Level 3 RMW 30-Jun-06 195
205
BENDING AND AXIAL FORCE to EN 1992-1 : 2003 Checked Revision Job No
Originated from TCC12.xls v 3.0 on CD © 2002-2005 TCC chg - FB625

MATERIALS
fck 35 N/mm² γs 1.15
fyk 500 N/mm² γc 1.50

SECTION COVERS (to main steel)

h 450 mm TOP 35 mm
b 300 mm BOTTOM 35 mm
SIDES 35 mm
REINFORCEMENT
Bar Ø No Area % Space
TOP 25 2 982 0.727 180.0 .
BOTTOM 32 3 2413 1.787 67.0 .

M:N interaction chart for 450 x 300 section, Grade 35 concrete

5000

4000
Mmin

3000 3100
AXIAL COMPRESSION, NEd kN

2000
1600
1200
1000

0.1Acfck

-600
-1000

-2000
-500 -400 -300 -200 -100 0 100 200 300 400 500

MOMENT, MEdxx kNm

LOADCASES (ULS) CASE NEd MEd CASE NEd MEd

1 3100 -210 2 -600 180
3 1600 280 4 1200 -240

195

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:195 17/07/2006 17:11:32

 TCC13 Slab Punching.xls
This spreadsheet designs punching shear links. Essentially it is
intended to be used with simple rectangular flat slabs to BS EN
1992-1-1, i.e. with TCC33.xls. Equally it can be used to check wide
beams in, say, troughed slabs.
The spreadsheet is presented as four pairs of sheets dealing
with internal, edge, (external) corner and re-entrant corners. It
should be remembered that in slabs, traditional links are time-
consuming to fix on site – proprietary systems are generally
much quicker to fix on site and this far outweighs first cost. This
spreadsheet may be used for some proprietary systems as well as
for traditional links.
The shear at 2.0d and at the column face are shown under ‘Results’,
together with the perimeter (uout) at which shear reinforcement is
no longer required. The given solution then indicates the number
of link spurs required, with the number, spacing and diameter of
the links in each spur.
Detailed design calculations are shown to the right of each sheet
(off screen). These sheets derive three alternative radial link
configurations then check the validity of each before selecting
the optimum solution.
The amounts of reinforcement per perimeter may be converted
to a traditional arrangement of links.

INTERNAL! (Similarly EDGE!,
CORNER and REENTRANT!)
These sheets constitute the input and main output. Input is
fairly self-evident but, as ever, care must be exercised in ensuring
correct values are used. The top diagram acts as a legend and the
chart at the bottom of the sheet shows the column, any holes
and link perimeters, and should act both as a check for input and
help explain output. The x-x axis is across the page.
To the right is a combo-box that allows either:
Deductions for holes in the calculation of shear perimeters
are calculated by finding the angle defined by the extremities
of the hole. The projection of this angle is deducted from the
appropriate perimeter.
GEOMETRY!
This sheet shows the geometrical arrangements of link spurs
assumed in the design calculations, which should also be used
for detailing purposes.

■ Input of both VEd (design shear transferred to column) and Gra!

ß VEd (design effective shear including allowance for moment
transfer) is required. These figures should be available from sub- This sheet contains charting data
frame analysis e.g. output from TCC33.xls under Reactions. A
value of ß VEd, computed from VEd and the factor according
to location of the column (BS EN 1992-1-1, Clause 6.4.3) is Refs!
suggested under Operating Instructions: in general this figure
may be regarded as a maximum: calculating effective shear This sheet contains values for nationally determined parameters
from moment transfer generally results in lower figures. used in the spreadsheets.

or
Notes!
■ Input of Vt alone. Veff defaults to the values given in BS EN
1992-1-1, Clause 6.4.3 This sheet gives disclaimers and revision history.

or

■ Input of VEd alone. ß VEd defaults to the values given in BS EN

1992-1-1, Clause 6.4.3

The spreadsheet asks for the areas of steel in the two directions.
These should be averages in each direction, i.e., ensure that it
reflects the actual reinforcement in the sides of the perimeter; an
average of column strips and middle strips may be appropriate.

Holes more than 6d from the column face are ignored as in BS EN

1992-1-1, Clause 6.4.2 (3). Multiple holes should be aggregated
pro-rata as if they were one hole at one location.

196

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:196 17/07/2006 17:11:38

 TCC13 Slab Punching.xls

TCC13 Slab Punching/ INTERNAL!

Project Spreadsheets to EC2 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made by Date Page
Location ECBP Typical Floor Column B3 rmw 30-Jun-2006 207
197

PUNCHING SHEAR to BS EN 1992-1: 2004 INTERNAL Checked Revision Job No

Originated from TCC13.xls Version 3.0 on CD © 2003-2006 TCC COLUMN chg - FB625

2
MATERIALS fck N/mm 35 STATUS LEGEND
2
fyk N/mm 500 VALID DESIGN
Steel class A .

DIMENSIONS A mm 400 E mm 200

B mm 400 F mm 50
G mm 150 H mm 150

LOADING VEd kN 965.5 ß VEd = kN 1060.7

ult UDL kN/m2 16.10

2
SLAB h mm 250 dx mm 215 Asx mm /m 1608 in B + 6d
2
dy mm 195 Asy mm /m 1608 in A + 6d
d mm 205 100ρL % 0.786

RESULTS VEd = 1060.7 kN vRd,c = 0.7199 N/mm2 Equation (6.47)

2
At hole face, vEd = 3.612 N/mm At 2d perimeter, vED,red = 1.3793 N/mm2
Uout required = 6542 mm Equation (6.54)

SOLUTION Fig 6.22 (A)

12 link spurs of 5H10 @ 135 84 links
plus 12 spurs of 2H10 @ 135
St = 175.7 mm Sr = 135 mm
Asw/Sr req = 6.949 (6.52) & (9.11)

Asw/Sr prov = 6.981 mm

First link perimeter 100 mm from column face
Uout = 7389 mm > 6,542 mm
SPUR
See GEOMETRY page for link locations. PLAN
Some links shown may need to be re-located to avoid holes.

197

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:197 17/07/2006 17:11:40

 TCC13 Slab Punching/ EDGE!

Project Spreadsheets to EC2 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made by Date Page

Location Column B2 rmw 30-Jun-2006 208

198

PUNCHING SHEAR to BS EN 1992-1: 2004 EDGE Checked Revision Job No

Originated from TCC13.xls Version 3.0 on CD © 2003-2006 TCC COLUMN chg - FB625

2
MATERIALS fck N/mm 35 STATUS LEGEND
2
fyk N/mm 500 VALID DESIGN
Steel class A .

DIMENSIONS A mm 400 E mm -75

B mm 250 F mm -275
G mm 150
D mm 0 H mm 150

LOADING VEd kN 500.9 ß VEd = kN 627.7

ult UDL kN/m2 16.10

2
SLAB h mm 250 dx mm 215 Asx mm /m 2010 in B + 3d+D
2
dy mm 195 Asy mm /m 1340 in A + 6d
d mm 205 100ρL % 0.802

2
RESULTS VEd = 627.7 kN vRd,c = 0.7248 N/mm Equation (6.47)
2
At col. face, vEd = 4.069 N/mm At 2d perimeter, vED,red = 1.9656 N/mm2

Uout required = 3371 mm Equation (6.54)

SOLUTION Fig 6.22 (A)

7 link spurs of 5H10 @ 110 35 links
.
St = 157.6 mm Sr = 110 mm
Asw/Sr req = 4.886 (6.52) & (9.11)

Asw/Sr prov = 4.998 mm

First link perimeter 100 mm from column face
Uout = 3528 mm > 3,371 mm
SPUR
See GEOMETRY page for link locations. PLAN
Some links shown may need to be re-located to avoid holes.

198

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:198 17/07/2006 17:11:47

 TCC13 Slab Punching.xls

TCC13 Slab Punching/ CORNER!

Project Spreadsheets to EC2 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made by Date Page
Location Columns A1, D1, A5 & D5 rmw 30-Jun-2006 209
199

PUNCHING SHEAR to BS EN 1992-1: 2004 CORNER Checked Revision Job No

Originated from TCC13.xls Version 3.0 on CD © 2003-2006 TCC COLUMN chg - FB625

2
MATERIALS fck N/mm 35 STATUS LEGEND
fyk N/mm2 500 VALID DESIGN
Steel class A .

DIMENSIONS A mm 400 E mm 50
B mm 250 F mm -275
C mm 0 G mm 150
D mm 0 H mm 150

LOADING VEd kN 272.0 0 350

2
ult UDL kN/m 16.10

2
SLAB h mm 250 dx mm 215 Asx mm /m 2010 in B + 3d+D
2
dy mm 195 Asy mm /m 2010 in A + 3d+C
d mm 205 100ρL % 0.982

2
RESULTS VEd = 408.0 kN vRd,c = 0.7754 N/mm Equation (6.47)
2 2
At hole face, vEd = 4.185 N/mm At 2d perimeter, v = 2.5486 N/mm
Uout required = 1711 mm Equation (6.54)

SOLUTION Fig 6.22 (A)

4 link spurs of 4H12 @ 130 16 links
.
St = 157.6 mm Sr = 130 mm
Asw/Sr req = 3.379 (6.52) & (9.11)

Asw/Sr prov = 3.480 mm

First link perimeter 100 mm from column face
Uout = 1886 mm > 1,711 mm
SPUR
See GEOMETRY page for link locations. PLAN
Some links shown may need to be re-located to avoid holes.

199

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:199 17/07/2006 17:11:55

 TCC13 Slab Punching/ REENTRANTS!

Project Spreadsheets to EC2 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made by Date Page
Location An example rmw 30-Jun-2006 210
200
PUNCHING SHEAR to BS EN 1992-1: 2004 RE-ENTRANT Revision Job No
Originated from TCC13.xls Version 3.0 on CD © 2003-2006 TCCCOLUMN chg - FB625

2
MATERIALS fck N/mm 35 STATUS LEGEND
2
fyk N/mm 500 VALID DESIGN
Steel class A .

DIMENSIONS A mm 400 E mm 200

B mm 400 F mm -50
C mm -100 G mm 100
D mm -100 H mm 100

LOADING VEd kN 478.0 ß VEd = kN 1065

ult UDL kN/m2 16.10

2
SLAB h mm 250 dx mm 215 Asx mm /m 1340 in B + 6d
2
dy mm 195 Asy mm /m 1340 in A + 6d
d mm 205 100ρL % 0.654

RESULTS VEd = 1064.9 kN vRd,c = 0.6774 N/mm2 Equation (6.47)

2
At col. face, vEd = 3.974 N/mm At 2d perimeter, v = 1.7068 N/mm2
Uout required = 3442 mm Equation (6.54)

SOLUTION Fig 6.22 (B)

12 link spurs of 3H10 @ 115 36 links
.
St = 130 mm Sr = 115 mm
Asw/Sr req = 8.030 (6.52) & (9.11)

Asw/Sr prov = 8.195 mm

First link perimeter 100 mm from column face
Uout = 4212 mm > 3,442 mm
SPUR
See GEOMETRY page for link locations. PLAN
Some links shown may need to be re-located to avoid holes.

200

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:200 17/07/2006 17:12:03

 TCC14 Crack Width.xls

TCC14 Crack Width.xls

Crack Width!
In the design of reinforced concrete structures, it is assumed
that the tensile capacity of concrete does not contribute to the
strength of the structure, and steel reinforcement is provided
to resist the internal tensile forces that develop. Because steel
reinforcement can develop the resisting tensile force only by
extension (i.e. steel needs to extend to develop stress), and
hence cracks are formed in the surrounding concrete: cracks in
reinforced concrete structures cannot be avoided. In day-to-
day practical design, crack widths are controlled by limiting the
maximum spacing of the tension reinforcement. However there
are times when the engineer will need to carry out more rigorous
analysis and calculations, e.g. in the design of water-retaining
structures, and design for severe exposure where estimation/
prediction of crack width is important.

This spreadsheet calculates crack widths in accordance with BS

EN 1992-1-1, Section 7.3.

Recommended maximum crack widths for the various exposure

classes are given in Table 7.1N (BS) of the National Annex to BS
EN 1992-1-1. Essentially crack widths for reinforced concrete
members under quasi-permanent loading is restricted to 0.3mm.
For exposure conditions XO and XCI this limit may be relaxed
[to 0.4mm].

The calculations shown are in accordance with Section 7.3.4 of

BS EN 1992-1-1 and should be self-explanatory.

For bridges reference should be made to BS EN 1992-2 Section

7.3 and the appropriate National Annex.

For liquid retaining structures refer to BS EN 1992-3 Section 7

Notes!
This sheet contains disclaimers and revision history.

201

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:201 17/07/2006 17:12:10

 TCC14 Crack widths/ RECTANGULAR!

Project Spreadsheets to EC2 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made by Date Page
Location Grid line 1 rmw 30-Jun-06 212
202
FLEXURAL CRACK WIDTH CALCULATION to BS EN 1992-1 : 2004 Checked Revision Job No
Originated from TCC14.xls v3.0 on CD © 2002-2005 BCA for RCC RECTANGULAR chg - FB625

LEGEND

INPUT
fck = 30 N/mm2 Area of tension steel, As = 565 mm2
fyk = 500 N/mm2 d= 129 mm
b= 1000 mm Area of compression steel, As2 = 314 mm2
h= 160 mm d2 = 31 mm
QP moment, M = 24.9 KNm Maxmum tension bar spacing, S = 200 mm
Age at cracking = 14 days Max tension bar dia, Øeq = 12 mm
Cement type = N (S, N, R or RS) Short term or long term ? L (S or L)
Creep factor,
= 2.0 Cover to As, c = 25 mm

CALCULATIONS
modulus of elasticity of concrete = 22[(f ck+8)/10]0.3 Ecm = 32.8 Gpa
moduli of elasticity of steel Es = 200.0 Gpa
Modular ratio e = 18.27
' = 0.0024 = 0.0044
mean concrete strength at cracking fcm,t = 34.26 Mpa
mean concrete tensile strength fct,eff = 2.61 Mpa
uncracked neutral axis depth
[bh²/2+(e-1)(Asd+As2d2)]/[bh+(e-1)(As+As2)] xu = 81.21 mm
uncracked 2 nd moment of area
bh³/12+bh(h/2-x)²+(e-1)[As(d-x)²+As2(x-d2)²] Iu = 378 mm4 106
cracking moment = f ctI/(h-x) Mcr = 12.51 kNm
< 24.9 kNm  section is CRACKED
fully cracked x = d[-e( - ') + {e²( - ')²+2e( + 'd2/d)}½] xc = 41.19 mm
concrete stress = M/[bx(d-x/3)/2+(e-1)As2(x-d2)/x(d-d2)] c = 9.939 Mpa
stress in tension steel = c
e(d-x)/x s = 387.2 Mpa
effective tension area = min[2.5(h-d), (h-x)/3, h/2]b Ac,eff = 39605 mm2
As /Ac,eff p,eff = 0.0143
max final crack spacing = min[1.3/(h-x),3.4c+0.17Ø/ p,eff)] sr,max = 154.5 mm
average strain for crack width calculation sm-cm = 1474.6 µstrain
CALCULATED CRACK WIDTH Wk = 0.228 mm

202

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:202 17/07/2006 17:12:11

 TCC14 Crack Width.xls

TCC14 Crack widths/ SPANTEE!

Project Spreadsheets to EC2 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made by Date Page
Location Grid line 2 rmw 30-Jun-06 33
203
FLEXURAL CRACK WIDTH CALCULATION to BS EN 1992-1 : 2004 TEE IN Checked Revision Job No
Originated from TCC14.xls v3.0 on CD © 2002-2005 BCA for RCC COMPRESSION chg - FB625

LEGEND

INPUT
2
fck = 35 N/mm2 Area of tension steel, As = 1473 mm
fyk = 500 N/mm2 d= 399.5 mm
2
bw = 300 mm Area of compression steel, As2 = 236 mm
h= 450 mm d2 = 33 mm
bf = 2170 mm Maxmum tension bar spacing, S = 87 mm
hf = 125 mm Max tension bar dia, Øeq = 25 mm
QP moment, M = 114.2 KNm Short term or long term ? L (S or L)
Age at cracking = 14 days Cover to As, c = 38 mm
Cement type = N (S, N, R or RS)
Creep factor,
= 2.0
CALCULATIONS modulus of elasticity of concrete = 22[(fck+8)/10]0.3 Ecm = 34.1 Gpa
moduli of elasticity of steel Es = 200.0 Gpa
Modular ratio e = 17.61
mean concrete strength at cracking fcm,t = 38.77 Mpa
mean concrete tensile strength fct,eff = 2.89 Mpa
uncracked neutral axis depth
[bwh²/2+(bf-bw)hf²/2+(e-1)(Asd+As2d2)]/[bwh+(bf-bw)hf+(e-1)(As+As2)] xu = 138.21 mm
uncracked 2nd moment of area
bwh³/12+bwh(h/2-x)²+(bf-bw)hf³/12+(bf-bw)hf(x-hf/2)²+(e-1)[As(d-x)²+As2(x-d2)²] Iu = 6653 mm4 106
cracking moment = fctI/(h-x) Mcr = 61.75 kNm
< 114.2 kNm  section is CRACKED
fully cracked x (within flange) xc = 85.53 mm
concrete stress (x within flange) c = 3.234 Mpa
stress in tension steel = c
e(d-x)/x s = 209.0 Mpa
effective tension area = min[2.5(h-d), (h-x)/3, h/2]bw Ac,eff = 36447 mm2
As /Ac,eff p,eff = 0.0404
max final crack spacing = min[1.3/(h-x),3.4c+0.17Ø/ p,eff)] sr,max = 234.4 mm
average strain for crack width calculation sm-cm = 800.1 µstrain
CALCULATED CRACK WIDTH Wk = 0.188 mm

203

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:203 17/07/2006 17:12:19

 TCC14 Crack widths/ SUPPORTTEE!

Project Spreadsheets to EC2 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made by Date Page
Location Grid line 2 rmw 30-Jun-06 33
204
FLEXURAL CRACK WIDTH CALCULATION to BS EN 1992-1 : 2004 TEE IN Checked Revision Job No
Originated from TCC14.xls v3.0 on CD © 2002-2005 BCA for RCC TENSION chg - FB625

LEGEND

INPUT
2
fck = 35 N/mm
2 Area of tension steel, As = 1000 mm
fyk = 500 N/mm2 d= 417 mm
2
bw = 300 mm Area of compression steel, As2 = 236 mm
h= 450 mm d2 = 34 mm
bf = 1222 mm Maxmum tension bar spacing, S = 87.4 mm
hf = 125 mm Max tension bar dia, Øeq = 10 mm
QP moment, M = 147 KNm Short term or long term ? L (S or L)
Age at cracking = 14 days Cover to As, c = 28 mm
Cement type = N (S, N, R or RS)
Creep factor,
= 2.0
CALCULATIONS modulus of elasticity of concrete = 22[(fck+8)/10]0.3 Ecm = 34.1 Gpa
moduli of elasticity of steel Es = 200.0 Gpa
Modular ratio e = 17.61
' = 0.0019 = 0.0080
mean concrete strength at cracking fcm,t = 38.77 Mpa
mean concrete tensile strength fct,eff = 2.89 Mpa
uncracked neutral axis depth
[bwh²/2+(bf-bw)hf(h-hf/2)+(e-1)(Asd+As2d2)]/[bwh+(bf-bw)hf+(e-1)(As+As2)] xu = 303.18 mm
nd
uncracked 2 moment of area
bwh³/12+bwh(h/2-x)²+(bf-bw)hf³/12+(bf-bw)hf(h-x-hf/2)²+(e-1)[As(d-x)²+As2(x-d2)²] Iu = 4572 mm4 106
cracking moment = fctI/(h-x) Mcr = 90.12 kNm
< 147 kNm  section is CRACKED
fully cracked x = d[-e( - ') + {e²( - ')²+2e( + 'd2/d)}½] xc = 162.30 mm
concrete stress = M/[bx(d-x/3)/2+(e-1)As2(x-d2)/x(d-d2)] c = 14.668 Mpa
stress in tension steel = c
e(d-x)/x s = 405.3 Mpa
height of tension zone = min[2.5(h-d), (h-x)/3, h/2] hc,eff = 82.50 mm
effective tension area Ac,eff = 100815 mm2
As /Ac,eff p,eff = 0.0099
max final crack spacing = min[1.3/(h-x),3.4c+0.17Ø/ p,eff)] sr,max = 266.6 mm
average strain for crack width calculation sm-cm = 1341.0 µstrain
CALCULATED CRACK WIDTH Wk = 0.357 mm

204

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:204 17/07/2006 17:12:26


TCC21 Subframe Analysis.xls
TCC21 Subframe Analysis.xls analyses sub-frames one bay wide
in accordance with BS EN 1992-1-1 using moment distribution.
Inputs are required on two sheets.
MAIN!
This single sheet consists of the main inputs, most of which should
be self-explanatory. As in other spreadsheets, avoid pasting input
from one cell to another as this may cause formatting and other
errors.
The dimensions of the flange widths, beff, are entered manually,
but maximum permitted values can be seen in cells M12:M17.
It is important that the correct usage of the members under
consideration is selected from the combo-box to the right of the
screen, as this affects the magnitude of quasi-permanent SLS
moments.
Unwanted data cells are ‘greyed-out’.
Supports may be specified by giving dimensions, etc. in C20: J26.
The use of C, K or E in column C can alter the characteristics of a
support from cantilever to knife-edge to encastre.
Where supports are dimensioned, their remote ends (i.e the
top of a column above or the bottom of a supporting column
below) may be specified as being ‘F’ for fixed or ‘P’ for pinned in
spreadsheet columns F and J. Extraneous data is highlighted in
red or by messages in red.
Under ‘Operating Instructions’ a number of checks, mainly
for missing entries, are carried out and any problems are
highlighted.
At the bottom of the sheet a simplistic but to-scale arrangement
and loading diagram is shown. This is given to aid data checking.
It may prove prudent to write down expected values for
bending moments at each support down before progressing to
ACTIONS!.
UDLs are input as line loads per unit area e.g. 4kN/m2.
Ultimate and characteristic support reactions are given at the
bottom of the sheet.
ACTIONS!
This sheet includes charts showing the elastic bending moment
diagram, redistributed moment envelope, elastic shear forces
and envelope of redistributed shear forces. These diagrams are
based on data from the analysis undertaken in Analysis! at 1/20
span points. Maximum span and support moments are given.
EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:205
TCC21 Subframe Analysis.xls
The user is required to input desired amounts of redistribution
to the initial moments in line 26. Cell L14 allows three types of
distribution according to the user’s preference for calculating
span moments (see Table 1). Redistribution input is included
close to the bending moment diagrams in order to give the user
control rather than relying on blanket redistribution.
The sheet also tabulates elastic and redistributed ultimate shears
and column moments according to the various load cases.
Uls! and Sls!
These sheets detail the moment distribution analyses carried
out for the ultimate and serviceability limit states respectively,
but are not necessarily intended for printing out other than for
checking purposes.
All load cases to BS EN 1992-1-1 are calculated (but see Refs!)
Graf!
This sheet comprises data for graphs used on other sheets,
particularly in ACTIONS! It is not necessarily intended for printing
out other than for checking purposes.
Refs!
This sheet comprises the values for nationally determined
parameters that have been used in the spreadsheet. These data
reflect the values given in draft UK National Annexes for EN 1990
and EN 1992.
Designers should ensure that these data are current when the
spreadsheet is used. When using TCC21 for permanent design,
designers are strongly advised to include a copy of this sheet with
any design calculations. It should be noted that it is possible to
switch on the adjacent spans loaded combination by changing ‘b’
to ‘a’ in cell D4. BS EN 1992-1-1 recommends using the adjacent
and alternate load arrangements. However to the UK National
Annex only the all spans and alternate load arrangements need
to be considered.
Notes!
This sheet contains disclaimers and revision history.
205
17/07/2006 17:12:34
 TCC21 Subframe Analysis MAIN!

Project Spreadsheets to EC2 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made by Date Page
Location Worked Examples: Main beam Grids C to J rmw 03-Jul-06 206
216
SUBFRAME ANALYSIS to EN 1992-1 : 2004 Checked Revision Job No
Originated from TCC21.xls v3.0 on CD © 2002-2005 TCC chg - FB625

LOCATION Supports from grid B to grid E Usage: Office

Bay width 5000 mm LOADING PATTERN

SPANS L (m) h (mm) bw (mm) hf (mm) Type beff (mm) BS EN 1990: (6.10b)
SPAN 1 6.000 450 300 125 T 2140 min max
SPAN 2 6.000 450 300 125 T 1680 DEAD 1.25 1.25
SPAN 3 6.000 450 300 125 T 1680 IMPOSED 1.50
SPAN 4 6.000 450 300 125 T 2140
SPAN 5
SPAN 6 STATUS OK

SUPPORTS ABOVE (m) H (mm) B (mm) End Cond BELOW (m) H (mm) B (mm) End Cond
Support 1 3.750 250 250 F 3.750 250 250 F
Support 2 3.750 300 300 F 3.750 300 300 F
Support 3 3.750 300 300 F 3.750 300 300 F
Support 4 3.750 300 300 F 3.750 300 300 F
Support 5 3.750 250 250 F 3.750 250 250 F
Support 6
Support 7

LOADING DIAGRAM

LOADING UDLs (kN/m²) PLs (kN) Position (m)

Dead Imposed Position Loaded Dead Imposed Position Loaded
Span 1 Load Load from left Length Span 4 Load Load from left Length
UDL 37.8 15.0 ~~~~~ ~~~~~ UDL 37.8 15.0 ~~~~~ ~~~~~
PL 1 ~~~~~ PL 1 ~~~~~
PL 2 ~~~~~ PL 2 ~~~~~
Part UDL Part UDL
Span 2 Span 5
UDL 37.8 15.0 ~~~~~ ~~~~~ UDL ~~~~~ ~~~~~
PL 1 ~~~~~ PL 1 ~~~~~
PL 2 ~~~~~ PL 2 ~~~~~
Part UDL Part UDL
Span 3 Span 6
UDL 37.8 15.0 ~~~~~ ~~~~~ UDL ~~~~~ ~~~~~
PL 1 ~~~~~ PL 1 ~~~~~
PL 2 ~~~~~ PL 2 ~~~~~
Part UDL Part UDL

REACTIONS (kN)
SUPPORT 1 2 3 4 5
ALL SPANS LOADED 178.7 454.7 407.4 454.7 178.7
MAX ULTIMATE 179.3 454.7 407.4 454.7 179.3
Characteristic Dead 93.3 252.2 217.0 252.2 93.3
Maximum Imposed 41.1 100.0 86.0 100.0 41.1
Minimum Imposed -4.1 49.8 43.0 49.8 -4.1

206

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:206 17/07/2006 17:12:36

 TCC21 Subframe Analysis.xls

TCC21 Subframe Analysis ACTIONS!

Project Spreadsheets to EC2 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made by Date Page
Location Worked Examples: Main beam Grids C to J rmw 03-Jul-06 207
217
SUBFRAME ANALYSIS to EN 1992-1 : 2004 Checked Revision Job No
Originated from TCC21.xls v3.0 on CD © 2002-2005 TCC chg - FB625
BENDING MOMENTS (kNm) .

0 5 10 15 20 25 30 0 5 10 15 20 25 30
400 300
250
300
200
200 150
100
100 50

0 0
-50
-100 -100
-150
-200
-200
-300 -250

B Elastic Moments E ULS B Redistributed Envelope E

SUPPORT No 1 2 3 4 5
Full SLS M 33.2 203.2 158.2 203.2 33.2 ~ kNm/m
Quasi-permanent M 25.4 161.2 119.9 161.2 25.4 ~ kNm/m
Elastic ULS M 44.3 263.9 190.8 263.9 44.3 ~ kNm/m
Redistributed ULS M 44.3 224.3 190.8 224.3 44.3 ~ kNm/m
δ 1.000 0.850 1.000 0.850 1.000 ~ ~
Redistribution 15.0% 15.0%

SPAN No 1 2 3 4
Full SLS M 137.1 88.2 88.2 137.1 ~ ~
Quasi-permanent M 106.2 62.7 62.7 106.2 ~ ~
Elastic ULS M 183.2 119.8 119.8 183.2 ~ ~
Redistributed ULS M 188.1 116.9 116.9 188.1 ~ ~
δ 1.027 0.976 0.976 1.027 ~ ~
ULS SHEARS (kN)

300 300

200 200

100 100

0 0

-100 -100

-200 -200

-300 -300
0 5 10 15 20 25 30 0 5 10 15 20 25 30

B Elastic Shears E B Redistributed Shears E

SPAN No 1 2 3
Elastic V 178.2 246.5 218.5 201.4 201.4 218.5
Redistributed V 179.3 239.9 218.2 203.7 203.7 218.2

SPAN No 4
Elastic V 246.5 178.2 ~ ~ ~ ~
Redistributed V 239.9 179.3 ~ ~ ~ ~

COLUMN MOMENTS (kNm) 1 2 3 4 5 ultimate

ALL SPANS Above 20.3 -8.8 8.8 -20.3
LOADED Below 20.3 -8.8 8.8 -20.3
MAXIMUM Above 22.2 18.1 10.8 18.1 22.2
MOMENT Below 22.2 18.1 10.8 18.1 22.2

207

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:207 17/07/2006 17:12:41

 TCC31 One-way Slabs.xls
This spreadsheet analyses and designs up to six spans of one-way
solid slabs to BS EN 1992-1-1 using continuous beam analysis.
There is user input on each of the first four sheets and the choice
of reinforcement for each span is implicit.
MAIN!
This single sheet consists of the main inputs, most of which
should be self-explanatory.
The number of spans is altered by entering or deleting data under
L (m) in cells C16:C21. Unwanted data cells are ‘greyed-out’. The
use of C, K or E in J17:J18 can alter the characteristics of the end
supports from cantilever to knife-edge or encastre. Erroneous
data is highlighted in red or by messages in red. Under Operating
Instructions a number of checks are carried out and problems are
highlighted.
For the purposes of defining load, the section is assumed to be
1.00 m wide. At the bottom of the sheet a simplistic loading
diagram is given to aid data checking. It may prove prudent to
write down expected values of bending moments at each support
down before progressing to ACTIONS!
Support reactions are given at the bottom of the sheet.
The top and bottom covers specified at J10:J11 should be
nominal covers including ∆cdev. ∆ cdev is required in the checking
of maximum bar size allowed.
ACTIONS!
This sheet shows bending moment and shear force diagrams
from the analysis undertaken in Analysis!
The user is required to input the desired amount of redistribution
to the initial moments in line 25. Cell J14 allows three types of
distribution according to the user’s preferences. Requesting
redistribution at a cantilever produces a warning message in the
remarks column.
SPANS!
SPANS! designs sections taken at the left, centre and right of
each span. The user is required to choose the diameters for top,
bottom and if necessary, link reinforcement for each span. The
amounts of bending and shear reinforcement required and checks
are derived from detailed calculations in Bar! The designer and
detailer should agree as to how these minimum reinforcement
arrangements are to be rationalised in the final detailed drawings.
Unwanted cells are ‘greyed-out’.
208
EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:208
Current interpretation of EC2 requires that all spans should be
loaded with both γGk,sup and γGk,inf , Gk,sup is used initially, and
for γGk,inf the “Run γGk,inf Loadcase” button must be activated. A
red warning message will appear if this has not been done, or if
any relevant input data are subsequently changed. Using γGk,inf
(=1.0) leads to higher hogging moments in spans.
Maximum moments at supports are taken at centre of supports
rather than side of supports as in the beam spreadsheets. Unless
overwritten, reinforcement diameter specified for a support
carries through both sides of the support, i.e. the diameter
specified for the right hand support of a span carries over to
the left hand support of the next span. It may be possible to
obtain different numbers of bars each side of the support due to
differences in depth or to comply with minimum percentage of
span steel; issues of practicality and buildability should dictate
that the largest number of bars is used throughout for each
support.
With regard to deflection, the area of steel required, As mm2/m,
shown under ‘Design for the Centre’ part of the span, may have
been automatically increased in order to reduce service stress,
σs, and increase modification factors to satisfy deflection criteria.
The percentage increase, if any, is shown under ‘Deflection’.
With respect to cantilevers, neither compression steel
enhancement nor consideration of rotation at supports is
included.
Hogging moments at 1/4 span are checked and used in the
determination of top steel in the centre of spans.
Careful examination of the Bending Moment Diagram and
Graf! should help to determine whether any curtailment of this
reinforcement is warranted (but see shift rule in Eurocode 2
Clause 9.2.1.3).
To avoid undue sensitivity, especially with regard to deflection,
reinforcement may be theoretically over-stressed by up to 2.5%
The top steel in the centre of spans is determined by adding
together the steel required for hogging at 1/4 span and the
appropriate additional tensile force due to shear ∆Ftd (see CI
9.2.1.3). It is assumed that 100% hogging steel at supports will
be curtailed at 0.25 span or max 50% at 0,2 span and 50% at
0.3 span.
WEIGHT!
Weight! gives an estimate of the amount of reinforcement for
both design and distribution steel required in the slab per bay and
per cubic metre. Bay and support widths are required as input.
17/07/2006 17:12:46
 TCC31 One-way Slabs.xls

Simplified curtailment rules, as explained above and similar to

those used with BS 8110, are used to determine lengths of bars.
Refs!
The figures should be treated as estimates only as they cannot
This sheet comprises the values for Nationally Determined
deal with the effects of designers’ and detailers’ preferences,
Parameters that have been used in the spreadsheet. These data
rationalisation, etc, etc. They do not allow for reinforcement in
reflect the values given in draft UK National Annexes for EN 1990
supporting beams or for mesh.
and EN 1992.

Uls! Designers should ensure that these data are current when the
spreadsheet is used. When using TCC31 for permanent design,
designers are strongly advised to include a copy of this sheet with
This sheet details the moment distribution analysis carried out
any design calculations. It should be noted that it is possible to
at the ultimate limit state. The following patterns for imposed
switch on the adjacent spans loaded combination by changing ‘b’
loading are considered to find a worse case.
to ‘a’ in cell D6. BSEN 1992-1-1 recommends using the adjacent
and alternate load cases. However to the UK NA only the cell
■ All spans loaded spans and alternate load cases need to be considered.
■ Odd spans loaded
■ Even spans loaded
■ Adjacent spans loaded*
Notes!
● Spans 1 & 2 and 5 & 6 loaded* This sheet gives disclaimers and revision history.
● Spans 2 & 3 loaded*
● Spans 3 & 4 loaded*
● Spans 4 & 5 loaded*

* According to the UK National Annex, it is not necessary to

consider the adjacent-spans-loaded case and the option of using
this case may be switched on or off at Refs!D6.

Uls! is not necessarily intended for printing out other than for
checking purposes.

Sls!
This sheet details the analysis carried out at the serviceability
limit states corresponding to full service load and to quasi-
permanent load. It uses the same load cases as Uls! and finds
upper and lower bound limits at 1/20 th points along the spans.
Again this sheet is not necessarily intended for printing out other
than for checking purposes.

Bar!
This sheet shows design calculations, complete with references
to BS EN 1992-1-1. It is not necessarily intended for printing
out other than for checking or educational purposes. In many
instances, service stress, σs, has been set to 1.0 or 0.0001 N/mm2
to avoid problems with division by zero.

Graf!
This sheet comprises data for graphs used on other sheets,
particularly in ACTIONS! It is not necessarily intended for printing
out other than for checking purposes.

209

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:209 17/07/2006 17:12:47

 TCC31 One-way Slabs/ MAIN!

Project Spreadsheets to Eurocode 2 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made by Date Page
Location 8th Floor slab from A to G rmw 03-Jul-06 220
210
ONE-WAY SOLID RC SLAB DESIGN to EN 1992-1: 2004 Checked Revision Job No
Originated from TCC31.xls v3.0 on CD © 2003- 2006 TCC chg - FB625

LOCATION Supports from grid A to grid G Wk 0.4 mm top

Wk 0.3 mm btm
MATERIALS COVERS
fck 30 N/mm² dg 20 mm Top cover 25 mm
fyk 500 N/mm² γs 1.15 steel Btm cover 25 mm
fywk 500 N/mm² γc 1.50 concrete c,dev 10 mm
Steel class B
Usage: Shopping With brittle partitions
SPANS L (m) H (mm) SUPPORTS
SPAN 1 5.000 160 Supt No Type
SPAN 2 5.000 160 LOADING PATTERN 1 K
SPAN 3 5.000 160 BS EN 1990: (6.10b) 5 K
SPAN 4 5.000 160 min max K(nife), C(antilever) or E(ncastre)
SPAN 5 DEAD 1.25 1.25
SPAN 6 IMPOSED 1.50

LOADING UDLs (kN/m²) PLs (kN/m) Position (m) LOADING

Dead Imposed Position Dead Imposed Position
Span 1 Load Load from left Span 4 Load Load from left
UDL 7.34 3.00 ~~~~ UDL 7.34 3.00 ~~~~
PL 1 PL 1
PL 2 PL 2
Span 2 Span 5
UDL 7.34 3.00 ~~~~ UDL ~~~~
PL 1 PL 1
PL 2 PL 2
Span 3 Span 6
UDL 7.34 3.00 UDL ~~~~
PL 1 PL 1
PL 2 PL 2

LOADING DIAGRAM

A G
REACTIONS (kN/m)
SUPPORT 1 2 3 4 5
Characteristic Dead 14.42 41.94 34.08 41.94 14.42
Max Imposed 6.70 17.14 13.93 17.14 6.70
Min Imposed -0.80 8.57 6.97 8.57 -0.80
MAX ULTIMATE 27.94 75.89 65.65 75.89 27.94

210

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:210 17/07/2006 17:12:49

 TCC31 One-way Slabs.xls

TCC31 One-way Slabs/ ACTIONS!

Project Spreadsheets to Eurocode 2 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made by Date Page
Location 8th Floor slab, from A to G rmw 03-Jul-06 211
221
ONE-WAY SOLID RC SLAB DESIGN to EN 1992-1: 2004 Checked Revision Job No
Originated from TCC31.xls v3.0 on CD © 2003- 2006 TCC chg - FB625
BENDING MOMENT DIAGRAMS (kNm/m)

40 40

30 30

20 20

10 10

0 0

-10 -10

-20 -20

-30 -30

-40 -40
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22

A Elastic Moments G A Redistributed Envelope G

SUPPORT No 1 2 3 4 5
Elastic M 36.6 24.4 36.6 ~ ~
Redistributed M 31.1 24.4 31.1 ~ ~
ßb 1.000 0.850 1.000 0.850 1.000 ~ ~
Redistribution 15.0% 15.0%

SPAN No 1 2 3 4
Elastic M 28.8 17.4 17.4 28.8 ~ ~
Redistributed M 28.6 17.1 17.1 28.6 ~ ~
ßb 0.992 0.986 0.986 0.992 ~ ~

SHEAR FORCE DIAGRAMS (kN/m)

50 50
40 40
30 30
20 20
10 10
0 0
-10 -10
-20 -20
-30 -30
-40 -40
-50 -50
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22

A Elastic Shears G A Redistributed Shears G

SPAN No 1 2 3
Elastic V 28.1 41.5 36.6 32.1 32.1 36.6
Redistributed V 27.9 40.4 36.3 32.8 32.8 36.3

SPAN No 4
Elastic V 41.5 28.1 ~ ~ ~ ~
Redistributed V 40.4 27.9 ~ ~ ~ ~

211

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:211 17/07/2006 17:12:55

 TCC31 One-way Slabs/ SPANS!

Project Spreadsheets to Eurocode 2 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made by Date Page
Location 8th Floor slab, from A to G rmw 03-Jul-06 212
222
ONE-WAY SOLID RC SLAB DESIGN to EN 1992-1: 2004 Checked Revision Job No
Originated from TCC31.xls v3.0 on CD © 2003- 2006 TCC chg - FB625
. .
SPAN 1 LEFT CENTRE RIGHT
Av mm 0 5000
ACTIONS M kNm/m 4.3 28.6 31.1
δ 1.00 0.99 0.85
VEd kN/m 27.94 40.38
DESIGN d mm 131.0 129.0 129.0
As mm²/m 187 538 589
As' mm²/m 0 As top 194 As' 0
TOP STEEL B 8 @ 250 B 8 @ 250 B 12 @ 175
As prov mm²/m 201 As' prov 201 As prov 646
BTM STEEL B 10 @ 350 B 12 @ 175 B 10 @ 350
As' prov mm²/m 224 As prov 646 As' prov 224
SHEAR vEd N/mm2 0.203 . 0.299
vRdct N/mm2 0.542 0.592
Links not required
DEFLECTION L/d 38.760 Allowed 39.995 ok (As increased by 16.2%)
& CHECKS % As ok ok ok
d'/x ok ok ok
σs ok ok ok
max S ok ok ok

SPAN 2 LEFT CENTRE RIGHT

Av 0 5000
ACTIONS M 31.1 17.1 24.4
δ 0.85 0.99 1.00
VEd 36.31 32.83
DESIGN d 129.0 129.0 129.0
As 589 321 458
As' 0 As top 194 0
TOP STEEL Y 12 @ 175 Y 10 @ 400 Y 12 @ 225
As prov 646 As' prov 196 As prov 503
BTM STEEL Y 10 @ 400 Y 12 @ 350 Y 10 @ 400
As' prov 196 As prov 323 As' prov 196
SHEAR vEd 0.271 . 0.241
vRdct 0.592 0.545
Links not required
DEFLECTION L/d 38.760 Allowed 90.491 ok
& CHECKS % As ok ok ok
d'/x ok ok ok
σs ok ok ok
max S ok ok ok

212

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:212 17/07/2006 17:12:59

 TCC31 One-way Slabs.xls

TCC31 One-way Slabs/ SPANS!

Project Spreadsheets to Eurocode 2 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made by Date Page
Location 8th Floor slab, from A to G rmw 03-Jul-06 213
223
ONE-WAY SOLID RC SLAB DESIGN to EN 1992-1: 2004 Checked Revision Job No
Originated from TCC31.xls v3.0 on CD © 2003- 2006 TCC chg - FB625

SPAN 3 LEFT CENTRE RIGHT

Av 0 5000
ACTIONS M 24.4 17.1 31.1
δ 1.00 0.99 0.85
VEd 32.83 36.31
DESIGN d 129.0 129.0 129.0
As 458 321 589
As' 0 As top 194 As' 0
TOP STEEL Y 12 @ 225 Y 10 @ 400 Y 12 @ 175
As prov 503 As' prov 196 As prov 646
BTM STEEL Y 10 @ 400 Y 12 @ 350 Y 10 @ 400
As' prov 196 As prov 323 As' prov 196
SHEAR vEd 0.244 . 0.268
vRdct 0.545 0.592
Links not required
DEFLECTION L/d 38.760 Allowed 90.491 ok
& CHECKS % As ok ok ok
d'/x ok ok ok
σs ok ok ok
max S ok ok ok

SPAN 4 LEFT CENTRE RIGHT

Av 0 5000
ACTIONS M 31.1 28.6 4.3
δ 0.85 0.99 1.00
VEd 40.38 27.94
DESIGN d 129.0 129.0 131.0
As 589 538 187
As' 0 As top 194 As' 0
TOP STEEL Y 12 @ 175 Y 8 @ 250 Y 8 @ 250
As prov 646 As' prov 201 As prov 201
BTM STEEL Y 10 @ 350 Y 12 @ 175 Y 10 @ 350
As' prov 224 As prov 646 As' prov 224
SHEAR vEd 0.302 . 0.200
vRdct 0.592 0.542
Links not required
DEFLECTION L/d 38.760 Allowed 39.995 ok (As increased by 16.2%)
& CHECKS % As ok ok ok
d'/x ok ok ok
σs ok ok ok
max S ok ok ok

213

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:213 17/07/2006 17:13:03

 TCC31R Rigorous One-way Slabs.xls
This spreadsheet allows the estimation of deflections in one-way
solid slabs according to BS EN 1992-1-1.
Eurocode 2 recognises that members in bending exist in a state
partway between uncracked and fully cracked. The spreadsheet
considers both construction and design pattern loading in
assessing whether a section is cracked or not (i.e. whether the
flexural tensile strength of the concrete is exceeded during these
stages of the slabs life). Once cracked, it is assumed that a
section remains cracked.
The spreadsheet is based on TCC31 but has an initial sheet
JOBDATA! to allow input of all the variables and performance
criteria required. Deflections are given as a range in a chart at the
bottom of ACTIONS!
They are shown as a range due to potential pattern loading. In
SPANS!, the worst case is compared with the
specified serviceability criteria.
It should be noted that the number of assumptions and
uncertainties in the material and design criteria and construction
process render deflection calculations carried out in this manner
can be inaccurate (and usually conservative) compared to actual
measured deflections. For instance, a slab’s deflection is very
dependent upon whether the slab has cracked in bending during
construction or not. The calculated deflections might be regarded
as being akin to a 95% confidence limit that they will not be
exceeded in service.
The spreadsheet analyses and designs up to six spans of one-way
solid slabs to BS EN 1992-1-1 using continuous slab analysis.
There is user input on each of the first four sheets and choice
of reinforcement for each span must be done/ assumed to have
been done by the user. Input of spans and loads is in MAIN!,
User input is required for bar sizes used in SPANS!
JOBDATA!
This sheet consists of the main inputs of material, loading,
construction and serviceability criteria pertaining to the
calculation of deflection to BS EN 1992-1-1. Users are expected to
use their knowledge of the project and judgement in completing
this sheet. For creep reference is made to Eurocode 2. Reference
may be made to the Concrete Centre publication How to design
concrete structures to Eurocode 2: Deflection’(27) for guidance on
values to be used. The default values given in this sheet are not
unusual.
MAIN!
This single sheet consists of the main inputs of span and loads,
most of which should be self-explanatory.
214
EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:214
The number of spans is altered by entering or deleting data under
L (m). Unwanted data cells are ‘greyed-out’. The use of C, K or E
can alter the characteristics of the end supports from cantilever
to knife-edge to encastre. Extraneous data is highlighted in red or
by messages in red. Under ‘Operating Instructions’ a number of
checks are carried out and problems are highlighted.
For the purposes of defining load, the section is assumed to be
1.00 m wide. At the bottom of the sheet a simplistic loading
diagram is given to aid data checking. Great care should be
taken to ensure this sheet is completed correctly for the case
in hand. It may prove prudent to write down expected values of
bending moments at each support down before progressing to
ACTIONS!
Support reactions are given at the bottom of the sheet.
ACTIONS!
This sheet shows bending moment and shear force diagrams
from the analysis undertaken in Analysis!
The user is required to input the desired amount of redistribution
to the initial moments in line 25. Cell J14 allows three types of
distribution according to the user’s preferences (see Table 1).
Requesting redistribution at a cantilever produces a warning
message in the remarks column.
The chart at the bottom of the page shows calculated deflections
at construction of partitions, and ranges for longer term
deflections due to patterns of permanent and imposed loading.
The worst case is taken in subsequent checks and this might be
viewed as being unduly conservative.
SPANS!
In SPANS! the user is required to choose top, bottom and where
necessary link reinforcement for each span.
The amounts of bending and shear reinforcement required and
checks are derived from detailed calculations in Bar! Unwanted
cells are ‘greyed-out’.
Eurocode 2 requires that all spans should be loaded with both
γGk,sup and γGk,inf (=1.0) γGk,sup is used initially, and for γGk,inf the Run
-γGk,inf (=1.35 or 1.25) Loadcase button must be activated. A red
warning message will appear if this has not been done, or if any
relevant input data are subsequently changed. Using γGk,inf (=1.0)
leads to higher hogging moments in spans.
Unless overwritten, reinforcement diameter specified for a
support carries through both sides of the support, i.e. the
diameter specified for the right hand support of a span carries
over to the left hand support of the next span. It may be possible
17/07/2006 17:13:08
 TCC31R Rigorous One-way Slabs.xls

to obtain different numbers of bars each side of the support due to - εc, z, final x, concrete stresses –σc, curvature -1/r, slope and
differences in depth or to comply with the minimum percentage curvature to calculate deflection. The sheet is rather large and is
of span steel; practicality may dictate that the maximum number not necessarily intended for printing out other than for checking
of bars at each support should be used. purposes.

Hogging moments at 1/4 span are checked and used in the

determination of top steel in spans. Careful examination of the
Bending Moment Diagram and Graf! should help to determine
whether any curtailment of this reinforcement is warranted.
WEIGHT!
Weight! gives an estimate of the amount of reinforcement
required in one direction of the slab per bay and per cubic metre.
Bay and support widths and distribution steel diameters are
required as input.
Graf!
This sheet comprises data for graphs used on other sheets,
particularly in ACTIONS! It is not necessarily intended for printing
out other than for checking purposes.
Refs!
This sheet comprises the values for nationally determined
parameters that have been used in the spreadsheet.

Simplified curtailment rules, similar to those defined in BS 8110, These data reflect the values given in draft UK National Annexes
are used to determine lengths of bars. for EN 1990 and EN 1992.

The figures should be treated as estimates only as they cannot
deal with the effects of designers’ and detailers’ preferences,
rationalisation, etc. They do not allow for reinforcement in
supporting beams or for mesh.
Uls!
This sheet details the moment distribution analysis carried out
at the ultimate limit state but is not necessarily intended for
printing out other than for checking purposes. All load cases to
BS EN 1992-1-1 are calculated.
Sls!
This sheet details the analysis carried out at the serviceability
limit state at 1/20th points along each span.
Designers should ensure that these data are current when the
spreadsheet is used. When using TCC31R for permanent design,
designers are strongly advised to include a copy of this sheet with
any design calculations. It should be noted that it is possible to
switch on the adjacent spans loaded combination by changing ‘b’
to ‘a’ in cell D6. BSEN 1992-1-1 recommends using the adjacent
and alternate load arrangements. However to the UK National
Annex only the cell spans and alternate load arrangements need
to be considered.
Notes!
This sheet gives disclaimers and revision history.

The results are used in Def!. This sheet is not necessarily intended
for printing out other than for checking purposes.

Bar!
This sheet shows design calculations, complete with references
to prEN 1992-1-1. It is not necessarily intended for printing out
other than for checking purposes. In many instances, service
stress, σs, has been set to 1.0 or 0.0001 N/mm2 to avoid problems
with division by zero.

Def!
This sheet calculates deflections at 1/20th points for each span
and for each load condition. For each point and loading stage it
considers moment, As, As’, d, d2 , uncracked neutral axis depth
- x, uncracked inertia - I, cracked neutral axis depth - x, cracked
inertia – I, uncracked moment capacity – Mcr, distribution factor

215

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:215 17/07/2006 17:13:10

 TCC31R Rigourous One-way Slabs/ JOBDATA!

Project Spreadsheets to Eurocode 2 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made by Date Page

Location 8th Floor slab from A to G rmw 03-Jul-06 226

216
RIGOROUS ONE-WAY SOLID RC SLAB DESIGN to EN 1992-1 : 2004 Checked Revision Job No
Originated from TCC31R.xls v 3.0 on CD © 2002-2006 TCC chg - FB625

LOCATION Supports from grid A to grid G COVERS

Top cover 25 mm
MATERIALS Btm cover 25 mm
fck 35 N/mm² dg 20 mm
fyk 500 N/mm²
s 1.15 steel Concrete density 25 kN/m³
fywk 500 N/mm²
c 1.50 concrete Curing time 3 days
Steel class B
SERVICEABILITY CRITERIA Maximum permanent ∆ = L / 250 7.4.1(5)

Maximum imposed ∆ = L / 500

Degree of restraint 60% Max ∆ affecting partitions = L / 350 7.4.1(6)

(50% = nominal, 100% = severe) Maximum precamber = 50% of permanent ∆ 7.4.1(5)

Design Crack width, W k = 0.4 mm top or 0.3 mm btm Table 7.1

CREEP COEFFICIENTS (to Annex A)

RH 50 % relative humidity fcm = 43 N/mm² Table 3.1

Cement N Type (S, N, or R) Ecm = 35.781 kN/mm² & Annex B

AMBIENT TEMPERATURES ºC from 0 to 7 days from 7 to 90 days from 90 days on

20 20 20

LOADING SEQUENCE (loads rationalised to kN/m²)

Span 1 Span 2 Span 3 Span 4 Span 5 Span 6 At age
kN/m² kN/m² kN/m² kN/m² kN/m² kN/m² Days
Self weight 6.25 6.25 6.25 6.25 0.00 0.00 7
Partitions 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 60
Other dead loads 1.50 1.50 1.50 1.50 #DIV/0! #DIV/0! 90
Permanent imposed 0.45 0.45 0.45 0.45 #DIV/0! #DIV/0! 90
Variable load 1.05 1.05 1.05 1.05 #DIV/0! #DIV/0! ∞
Composite 10.25 10.25 10.25 10.25 #DIV/0! #DIV/0!

COMPOSITE E and Ø VALUES - Span 1 (other spans omitted for clarity )

To 70 years To 70 years To 60 days
Et Et Ø (t,t0) Et
Ø0 Ø0
kN/mm² kN/mm² kN/mm²
Self weight 2.63 9.85 2.63 9.85 1.07 17.33
Partitions 1.75 13.00 1.75 13.00 SW + partitions
Other dead loads 1.62 13.65 1.62 13.65
Permanent imposed 1.75 13.00 1.75 13.00 Construction load
Variable load 0 37.77 from day 14
Composite 2.33 10.75 2.09 11.60 0.70 21.09
Quasi-permanent Total load

216

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:216 17/07/2006 17:13:12

 TCC31R Rigourous One-way Slabs.xls

TCC31R Rigourous One-way Slabs/ MAIN!

Project Spreadsheets to Eurocode 2 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made by Date Page
Location 8th Floor slab, from A to G rmw 03-Jul-06 217
227
RIGOROUS ONE-WAY SOLID RC SLAB DESIGN to EN 1992-1 : 2004 Checked Revision Job No
Originated from TCC31R.xls v 3.0 on CD © 2002-2006 TCC chg - FB625

SPANS L (m) H (mm) SUPPORTS

SPAN 1 7.600 250 Supt No Type
SPAN 2 7.600 250 LOADING PATTERN 1 K
SPAN 3 7.600 250 min max 5 K
SPAN 4 7.600 250 DEAD 1.25 1.25 K(nife), C(antilever) or E(ncastre)
SPAN 5 IMPOSED 1.50
SPAN 6 BS EN 1990: (6.10b) Office Useage

LOADING UDLs (kN/m²) PLs (kN/m) Position (m) LOADING

Dead Imposed Position Dead Imposed Position
Span 1 Load Load from left Span 4 Load Load from left
UDL 7.75 2.50 ~~~~ UDL 7.75 2.50 ~~~~
PL 1 PL 1
PL 2 PL 2
Construction 4.90 ~~~~ ~~~~ Construction 4.90 ~~~~ ~~~~
Span 2 Span 5
UDL 7.75 2.50 ~~~~ UDL ~~~~
PL 1 PL 1
PL 2 PL 2
Construction 4.90 ~~~~ ~~~~ Construction ~~~~ ~~~~
Span 3 Span 6
UDL 7.75 2.50 UDL ~~~~
PL 1 PL 1
PL 2 PL 2
Construction 4.90 ~~~~ ~~~~ Construction ~~~~ ~~~~

LOADING DIAGRAM

A G
REACTIONS (kN/m)
SUPPORT 1 2 3 4 5
Characteristic Dead 23.14 67.31 54.70 67.31 23.14
Max Imposed 8.48 21.71 17.65 21.71 8.48
Min Imposed -1.02 10.86 8.82 10.86 -1.02
MAX ULTIMATE 41.74 113.34 98.06 113.34 41.74

217

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:217 17/07/2006 17:13:17

 TCC31R Rigourous One-way Slabs/ ACTIONS!

Project Spreadsheets to Eurocode 2 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made by Date Page
Location 8th Floor slab, from A to G, rmw 03-Jul-06 228
218
RIGOROUS ONE-WAY SOLID RC SLAB DESIGN to EN 1992-1 : 2004 Checked Revision Job No
Originated from TCC31R.xls v 3.0 on CD © 2002-2006 TCC chg - FB625
BENDING MOMENT DIAGRAMS (kNm/m) Elastic Redistributed
100 100

50 50

0 0

-50 -50

-100 -100
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32

A G A G
SUPPORT No 1 2 3 4 5
Elastic M 0.0 83.1 55.4 83.1 0.0 ~ ~
Redistributed M 0.0 70.6 55.4 70.6 0.0 ~ ~
ßb 1.000 0.850 1.000 0.850 1.000 ~ ~
Redistribution 15.0% 0.0% 15.0%

SPAN No 1 2 3 4
Elastic M 64.5 37.7 37.7 64.5 ~ ~
Redistributed M 64.9 38.1 38.1 64.9 ~ ~
ßb 1.005 1.011 1.011 1.005 ~ ~

SHEAR FORCE DIAGRAMS (kN/m) Elastic Redistributed

80 100
60
40 50
20
0 0
-20
-40 -50
-60
-80 -100
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32

A G A G
SPAN No 1 2 3
Elastic V 41.6 62.0 54.7 47.9 47.9 54.7
Redistributed V 41.7 60.3 54.0 49.0 49.0 54.0

SPAN No 4
Elastic V 62.0 41.6 ~ ~ ~ ~
Redistributed V 60.3 41.7 ~ ~ ~ ~

DEFLECTIONS (mm) Precamber not included

10

-10

-20

-30

-40

SPAN No 1 2 3 4
SW + parts (inst) 15.8 1.8 1.8 15.8 mm
Quasi permanent 25.5 4.6 4.6 25.5 #DIV/0! #DIV/0! mm
Variable 5.1 2.3 2.3 5.1 #DIV/0! #DIV/0! mm

218

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:218 17/07/2006 17:13:22

 TCC31R Rigourous One-way Slabs.xls

TCC31R Rigourous One-way Slabs/ SPANS!

Project Spreadsheets to Eurocode 2 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made by Date Page
Location 8th Floor slab, from A to G, rmw 03-Jul-06 219
229
RIGOROUS ONE-WAY SOLID RC SLAB DESIGN to EN 1992-1 : 2004 Checked Revision Job No
Originated from TCC31R.xls v 3.0 on CD © 2002-2006 TCC chg - FB625
.
SPAN 1 LEFT CENTRE RIGHT
Av mm 0 7600
ACTIONS M kNm/m 9.7 64.9 70.6
δ 1.00 1.01 0.85
VEd kN/m 41.74 60.32
DESIGN d mm 220.0 219.0 219.0
As mm²/m 210 717 781
As' mm²/m 0 As top 219 As' 0
TOP STEEL B 10 @ 350 B 8 @ 225 B 12 @ 125
As prov mm²/m 224 As' prov 223 As prov 905
BTM STEEL B 10 @ 250 B 12 @ 125 B 10 @ 250
As' prov mm²/m 314 As prov 905 As' prov 314
SHEAR vEd N/mm2 0.184 0.262
vRdct N/mm2 0.565 0.572
Links not required
DEFLECTIONS Permanent = 25.53 < 30.40 Imposed = 5.13 < 15.20 Precamber (mm) = 0
mm Affecting partitions = 9.82 < 21.71 ok Increase btm As by 10%
CHECKS % As ok ok ok
d'/x ok ok ok
σs ok ok ok
Crack width ok 0.00 ok 0.15 ok 0.21

SPAN 2 LEFT CENTRE RIGHT

Av 0 7600
ACTIONS M 70.6 38.1 55.4
δ 0.85 1.01 1.00
VEd 54.04 49.03
DESIGN d 219.0 219.0 219.0
As 781 422 613
As' 0 As top 219 0
TOP STEEL T 12 @ 125 T 8 @ 225 T 12 @ 175
As prov 905 As' prov 223 As prov 646
BTM STEEL T 10 @ 350 T 12 @ 250 T 10 @ 350
As' prov 224 As prov 452 As' prov 224
SHEAR vEd 0.241 0.210
vRdct 0.572 0.566
Links not required
DEFLECTIONS Permanent = 4.58 < 30.40 Imposed = 2.34 < 15.20 Precamber (mm) = 0
mm Affecting partitions = 2.81 < 21.71 ok Increase btm As by 0%
CHECKS % As ok ok ok
d'/x ok ok ok
σs ok ok ok
Crack width ok 0.21 ok 0.17 ok 0.21

219

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:219 17/07/2006 17:13:26

 TCC31R Rigourous One-way Slabs/ SPANS!

Project Spreadsheets to Eurocode 2 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made by Date Page
Location 8th Floor slab, from A to G, rmw 03-Jul-06 220
230
RIGOROUS ONE-WAY SOLID RC SLAB DESIGN to EN 1992-1 : 2004 Checked Revision Job No
Originated from TCC31R.xls v 3.0 on CD © 2002-2006 TCC chg - FB625

SPAN 3 LEFT CENTRE RIGHT

Av 0 7600
ACTIONS M 55.4 38.1 70.6
δ 1.00 1.01 0.85
VEd 49.03 54.04
DESIGN d 219.0 219.0 219.0
As 613 422 781
As' 0 As top 219 As' 0
TOP STEEL T 12 @ 175 T 8 @ 225 T 12 @ 125
As prov 646 As' prov 223 As prov 905
BTM STEEL T 10 @ 350 T 12 @ 250 T 10 @ 350
As' prov 224 As prov 452 As' prov 224
SHEAR vEd 0.218 0.233
vRdct 0.566 0.572
Links not required
DEFLECTIONS Permanent = 4.58 < 30.40 Imposed = 2.34 < 15.20 Precamber (mm) = 0
mm Affecting partitions = 2.81 < 21.71 ok Increase btm As by 0%
CHECKS % As ok ok ok
d'/x ok ok ok
σs ok ok ok
Crack width ok 0.21 ok 0.17 ok 0.21

SPAN 4 LEFT CENTRE RIGHT

Av 0 7600
ACTIONS M 70.6 64.9 9.7
δ 0.85 1.01 1.00
VEd 60.32 41.74
DESIGN d 219.0 219.0 220.0
As 781 717 210
As' 0 As top 219 As' 0
TOP STEEL T 12 @ 125 T 8 @ 225 T 10 @ 350
As prov 905 As' prov 223 As prov 224
BTM STEEL T 10 @ 250 T 12 @ 125 T 10 @ 250
As' prov 314 As prov 905 As' prov 314
SHEAR vEd 0.269 0.176
vRdct 0.572 0.565
Links not required
DEFLECTIONS Permanent = 25.53 < 30.40 Imposed = 5.13 < 15.20 Precamber (mm) = 0
mm Affecting partitions = 9.82 < 21.71 ok Increase btm As by 10%
CHECKS % As ok ok ok
d'/x ok ok ok
σs ok ok ok
Crack width ok 0.21 ok 0.15 ok 0.00

220

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:220 17/07/2006 17:13:31


TCC32 Ribbed Slabs (A&D).xls
Using continuous beam analysis, this spreadsheet analyses and
designs up to six spans of ribbed slab to EN 1992-1-1[3]. There
is user input on each of the first three sheets and choice of
reinforcement for each span is implicit.
MAIN!
This single sheet consists of the main inputs, which should be
self-explanatory. The number of spans is altered by entering
or deleting data under L (m). Unwanted data cells are ‘greyed-
out’. The use of C, K or F can alter the characteristics of the end
supports from cantilever to knife-edge to fixed. Extraneous data
is highlighted in red or by messages in red. Under ‘Operating
Instructions’ a number of checks are carried out and any problems
are highlighted.
For the purposes of defining load the section under consideration
is assumed to be 1.00 m wide. It will be seen from Bar! that
moments per metre are converted to moments per rib, and
calculations of reinforcement areas required etc. are based on
moments and shears per rib. Great care should be taken to ensure
this sheet is completed correctly for the case in hand.
Combo-boxes to the right under ‘Operating Instructions’ define
minimum bar sizes to be used (e.g. at supports between ribs), the
type of usage of the slab (this affects the magnitude of quasi-
permanent SLS moments) and whether the user wants to use
links or not. If links are required these may be either designed or
nominal links; the centres of nominal links can be changed.
Towards the bottom of the sheet a simplistic loading diagram is
given to aid data checking. At the bottom of the sheet, support
reactions are given.
ACTIONS!
This sheet shows bending moment and shear force diagrams
from the analysis undertaken in Analysis!
The user is required to input the desired amount of redistribution
to the initial moments in line 26. Cell L14 allows three types of
distribution according to the user’s preferences. See Table 1.
SPANS!
In SPANS! the user is required to choose top, bottom and link
reinforcement for each span. The amounts of bending and shear
reinforcement required and checks are derived from detailed
calculations in Bar!Unwanted cells are ‘greyed-out’.
The reinforcement diameter specified for a support carries
through both sides of the support, i.e. the diameter specified for
the right hand support of a span carries over to the left hand
support of the next span.
EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:221
TCC32 Ribbed Slabs (A&D).xls
It should be noted that hogging moment is checked both at the
centre of support (solid section) and the solid/ rib intersection
(ribbed section). As the moments at the solid/ rib intersection
each side of the support may differ, it may be possible to obtain a
design giving different numbers of bars each side of the support.
Practicality should dictate that the maximum number of bars at
each support is used for detailing.
The top steel in the centre of spans is determined by adding
together the steel required for hogging at 0.25L (¼ span) and
the appropriate additional tensile force due to shear = ∆ Ftd (see
BS EN 1992-1-1 9.2.1.3). Similarly at 3/4 span. The higher figure
is used to determine for top steel in the span. It is assumed
that 100% hogging steel at supports is curtailed at 0.25L or a
maximum of 50% is curtailed at 0.2L span and the remainder
at 0.3L.
With regard to deflection, the area of steel required, As mm2/m,
shown under ‘Design for the Centre’ part of the span, may be
automatically increased in order to reduce service stress, σs,
and therefore increase modification factors to satisfy deflection
criteria. The percentage increase, if any, is shown under
‘Deflection’.
With respect to cantilevers, neither compression steel
enhancement nor consideration of rotation at supports is
included.
WEIGHT!
WEIGHT! gives an estimate of the amount of reinforcement
required in one direction of the slab per rib and per square metre.
Simplified curtailment rules, similar to those defined in BS 8110,
are used to determine lengths of bars. The figures should be
treated as estimates only as they cannot deal with the effects of
designers’ and detailers’ preferences, rationalisation, etc. They do
not allow for reinforcement in supporting beams or for mesh.
Uls!
This sheet details the moment distribution analysis carried out
at the ultimate limit state. The following patterns for imposed
loading are considered to find a worse case.
■ All spans loaded
■ Odd spans loaded
■ Even spans loaded
■ Adjacent spans loaded*
● Spans 1 & 2 and 5 & 6 loaded*
● Spans 2 & 3 loaded*
● Spans 3 & 4 loaded*
● Spans 4 & 5 loaded*
221
17/07/2006 17:13:36
 * According to the UK National Annex, it is not necessary to
consider the adjacent-spans-loaded case and the option of using
this case may be switched on or off at Refs!D6.

Uls! is not necessarily intended for printing out other than for
checking purposes.

Sls!
This sheet details the analysis carried out at the serviceability
limit states corresponding to full service load and to quasi-
permanent load. It uses the same load cases as Uls! and finds
upper and lower bound limits at 1/20th points along the spans.
Again this sheet is not necessarily intended for printing out other
than for checking purposes.

Bar!
This sheet shows design calculations, complete with references
to prEN 1992-1-1. It is not necessarily intended for printing out
other than for checking purposes. In many instances, service
stress, ss, has been set to 1.0 or 0.0001 N/mm2 to avoid problems
with division by zero.

Graf!
This sheet comprises data for graphs used on other sheets,
particularly in ACTIONS! It is not necessarily intended for printing
out other than for checking purposes.

Refs!
This sheet comprises the values for nationally determined
parameters that have been used in the spreadsheet. These data
reflect the values given in draft UK National Annexes for EN 1990
and EN 1992.

Designers should ensure that these data are current when the
spreadsheet is used. When using TCC31R for permanent design,
designers are strongly advised to include a copy of this sheet with
any design calculations. It should be noted that it is possible to
switch on the adjacent spans loaded combination by changing ‘b’
to ‘a’ in cell D6. BSEN 1992-1-1 recommends using the adjacent
and alternate load arrangements. However to the UK National
Annex only the cell spans and alternate load arrangements need
to be considered.

Notes!
This sheet gives disclaimers and revision history.

222

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:222 17/07/2006 17:13:38

 TCC32 Ribbed Slabs (A&D).xls

TCC32 Ribbed Slabs (A&D)/ MAIN!

Project Spreadsheets to Eurocode 2 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made by Date Page
Location 3rd Floor slab from 1 to 5a rmw 03-Jul-06 233
223
RIBBED SLABS to EN 1992-1: 2004 Checked Revision Job No
Originated from TCC32.xls v 3.0 on CD © 2003-2006 TCC chg - FB625

LOCATION Supports from grid 1 to grid 5a

COVERS (to links, or if no links, to reinf)
MATERIALS dg 20 mm Top cover 25 mm
fck 35 N/mm² γs 1.15 steel Btm cover 30 mm
fyk 500 N/mm² γc 1.50 concrete Side cover 30 mm
fywk 500 N/mm² Wk 0.40 mm top c,dev 10 mm
Steel class A (Normal weight concrete) 0.30 mm btm RIBS
Density 25 kN/m³ slab depth, hf 100 mm
SPANS Solid (mm) Rib width 150 mm
L (m) H (mm) Left Right Centres 900 mm
SPAN 1 8.000 275 300 450 1 in 10 taper
SPAN 2 9.000 275 450 450 SUPPORTS
SPAN 3 8.000 275 450 300 Support No Type
SPAN 4 1 K
SPAN 5 4 K
SPAN 6 K(nife), C(anti(antilever) or E(ncastre)
Usage: Vehicle<= 30kN With brittle partitions
LOADING UDLs (kN/m²) PLs (kN/m) Position (m)
Self Add Dead Imposed Position Self Add Dead Imposed Position
Span 1 Weight Load Load from left Span 4 Weight Load Load from left
UDL 3.65 2.50 4.00 ~~~~ UDL ~~~~
PL 1 ~~~~ PL 1 ~~~
PL 2 ~~~~ PL 2 ~~~
Span 2 Span 5
UDL 3.67 2.50 4.00 ~~~~ UDL
PL 1 ~~~~ 8.50 1.00 1.450 PL 1 ~~~
PL 2 ~~~~ PL 2 ~~~
Span 3 Span 6
UDL 3.65 2.50 4.00 ~~~~ UDL ~~~~
PL 1 ~~~~ PL 1 ~~~~
PL 2 ~~~~ PL 2 ~~~~

LOADING PATTERN min max

DEAD 1.25 1.25
IMPOSED 1.50
LOADING DIAGRAM

1 5a
REACTIONS (kN/m)
SUPPORT 1 2 3 4
Characteristic Dead 18.5 65.9 59.3 18.8 ~ ~ ~
Max Imposed 14.5 38.5 37.8 14.5 ~ ~ ~
Min Imposed -2.2 2.2 2.1 -2.1 ~ ~ ~
MAX ULTIMATE 43.5 138.1 128.8 43.9 ~ ~ ~

223

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:223 17/07/2006 17:13:39

 TCC32 Ribbed Slabs (A&D)/ ACTIONS!

Project Spreadsheets to Eurocode 2 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made by Date Page
Location 3rd Floor slab, from 1 to 5a rmw 03-Jul-06 234
224
RIBBED SLABS to EN 1992-1: 2004 Checked Revision Job No
Originated from TCC32.xls v 3.0 on CD © 2003-2006 TCC chg - FB625

BENDING MOMENT DIAGRAMS (kNm/m)

120 120
100 100
80 80
60 60
40 40
20 20
0 0
-20 -20
-40 -40
-60 -60
-80 -80

-100 -100

0 5 10 15 20 25 30 0 5 10 15 20 25 30

1 Elastic Moments 5a 1 Redistributed Envelope 5a

SUPPORT No 1 2 3 4
Elastic M 0.0 105.2 101.6 0.0 ~ ~ kNm/m
Redistributed M 0.0 89.4 86.4 0.0 ~ ~ kNm/m

1.000 0.850 0.850 1.000 ~ ~ ~
Redistribution 15.0% 15.0%

SPAN No 1 2 3
Elastic M 73.49 62.07 74.78 ~ ~ ~
Redistributed M 69.27 59.73 70.49 ~ ~ ~

0.943 0.962 0.943 #VALUE! #VALUE! #VALUE!
SHEAR FORCE DIAGRAMS (kN/m)

80 80

60 60

40 40

20 20
0 0
-20 -20
-40 -40
-60 -60
-80 -80
0 5 10 15 20 25 30 0 5 10 15 20 25 30

1 Elastic Shears 5a 1 Redistributed Shears 5a

SPAN No 1 2 3
Elastic V 44.8 67.9 72.2 63.2 67.4 45.2
Redistributed V 43.5 65.9 72.2 63.3 65.5 43.9

SPAN No
Elastic V ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~
Redistributed V ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~

224

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:224 17/07/2006 17:13:46

 TCC32 Ribbed Slabs (A&D).xls

TCC32 Ribbed Slabs (A&D)/ SPANS!

Project Spreadsheets to Eurocode 2 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made by Date Page
Location 3rd Floor slab, from 1 to 5a rmw 03-Jul-06 235
225
RIBBED SLABS to EN 1992-1: 2004 Checked Revision Job No
Originated from TCC32.xls v 3.0 on CD © 2003-2006 TCC chg - FB625
.
SPAN 1 LEFT CENTRE RIGHT
ACTIONS M kNm/m 0.0 69.3 89.4

1.00 0.94 0.85
DESIGN d mm 236.0 224.5 (x=28.1<hf/) 232.0
As mm² 0 672 (755 for defln) 840
As2 mm² 0 As T 203 As2 245
TOP STEEL 3H 12 /rib 4H 10 /rib 2H 20 /rib
+ 2H8 between + 2H12 between
As prov mm² 440 As T prov 314 As prov 855
BTM STEEL 2H 16 /rib 2H 25 /rib 2H 16 /rib
As2 prov mm² 402 As prov 982 As2 prov 402
SHEAR VEd kN 43.53 VEd 65.89
VEd per rib kN 35.24 VEd per rib 53.39
VRd,c kN 29.96 Link Ø 8 VRd,c 35.42
LINKS 2H8 @ 175 for 350 2H8 @ 1,200 2H8 @ 150 for 300
DEFLECTION L/d 35.63 Allowed 45.8 ok (As increased by 12.4%)
& CHECKS % As ok ok ok
Bar Ø & cover ok ok ok
Bar spacing ok ok ok
Max Asw/s ok ok

SPAN 2 LEFT CENTRE RIGHT

ACTIONS M kNm/m 89.4 59.7 86.4

0.85 0.96 0.85
DESIGN d mm 232.0 224.5 (x=28.1<hf/) 232.0
As mm² 840 580 (631 for defln) 811
As2 mm² 233 As T 242 As2 240
TOP STEEL 2H 20 /rib 4H 10 /rib 2H 20 /rib
+ 2H12 between + 2H12 between
As prov mm² 855 As T prov 314 As prov 855
BTM STEEL 2H 16 /rib 2H 25 /rib 2H 16 /rib
As2 prov mm² 402 As prov 982 As2 prov 402
SHEAR VEd kN 72.18 VEd 63.29
VEd per rib kN 59.05 VEd per rib 51.05
VRd,c kN 35.42 Link Ø 8 VRd,c 35.42
LINKS 2H8 @ 150 for 300 2H8 @ 1,200 2H8 @ 150 for 300
DEFLECTION L/d 40.09 Allowed 61.2 ok (As increased by 8.9%)
& CHECKS % As ok ok ok
Bar Ø & cover ok ok ok
Bar spacing ok ok ok
Max Asw/s ok ok

225

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:225 17/07/2006 17:13:50

 TCC32 Ribbed Slabs (A&D)/ SPANS!

Project Spreadsheets to Eurocode 2 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made by Date Page
Location 3rd Floor slab, from 1 to 5a rmw 03-Jul-06 /236
226
RIBBED SLABS to EN 1992-1: 2004 Checked Revision Job No
Originated from TCC32.xls v 3.0 on CD © 2003-2006 TCC chg - FB625

SPAN 3 LEFT CENTRE RIGHT

ACTIONS M kNm/m 86.4 @col face 70.5 0.0

0.85 0.94 1.00
DESIGN d mm 232.0 224.5 (x=28.1<hf/) 236.0
As mm² 811 684 (792 for defln) 0
As2 mm² 208 As T 179 As2 0
TOP STEEL 2H 20 /rib 4H 10 /rib 3H 12 /rib
+ 2H12 between + 2H8 between
As prov mm² 855 As T prov 314 As prov 440
BTM STEEL 2H 16 /rib 2H 25 /rib 2H 16 /rib
As2 prov mm² 402 As prov 982 As2 prov 402
SHEAR VEd kN 65.51 VEd 43.91
VEd per rib kN 53.05 VEd per rib 35.58
VRd,c kN 35.42 Link Ø 8 VRd,c 29.96
LINKS 2H8 @ 150 for 300 2H8 @ 1,200 2H8 @ 175 for 350
DEFLECTION L/d 35.63 Allowed 43.78 ok (As increased by 15.7%)
& CHECKS % As ok ok ok
Bar Ø & cover ok ok ok
Bar spacing ok ok ok
Max Asw/s ok ok

226

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:226 17/07/2006 17:13:55

 TCC32 Ribbed Slabs (A&D).xls

TCC32 Ribbed Slabs (A&D)/ WEIGHT!

Project Spreadsheets to Eurocode 2 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made by Date Page
Location 3rd Floor slab, from 1 to 5a rmw 03-Jul-06 237
227
RIBBED SLABS to EN 1992-1: 2004 Checked Revision Job No
Originated from TCC32.xls v 3.0 on CD © 2003-2006 TCC chg - FB625

APPROXIMATE WEIGHT of REINFORCEMENT

TOP STEEL Location No Type Dia Length Unit Wt Weight

Support 1 3 T 12 2375 0.888 6.3
2 T 8 2375 0.395 1.9
Span 1 4 T 10 4775 0.617 11.8
Support 2 2 T 20 4250 2.466 21.0
2 T 12 4250 0.888 7.5
Span 2 4 T 10 5275 0.617 13.0
Support 3 2 T 20 4250 2.466 21.0
2 T 12 4250 0.888 7.5
Span 3 4 T 10 4775 0.617 11.8
Support 4 3 T 12 2375 0.888 6.3
2 T 8 2375 0.395 1.9

BOTTOM STEEL Support 1 2 T 16 1000 1.578 3.2

Span 1 2 T 25 7200 3.853 55.5
Support 2 2 T 16 2175 1.578 6.9
Span 2 2 T 25 8050 3.853 62.0
Support 3 2 T 16 2175 1.578 6.9
Span 3 2 T 25 7200 3.853 55.5
Support 4 2 T 16 1575 1.578 5.0

LINKS Span 1 11 H 8 825 0.395 3.6

Span 2 12 H 8 825 0.395 3.9
Span 3 11 H 8 825 0.395 3.6

SUMMARY All figures approximate - see User Guide

Reinforcement density (kg/m²) 13.71 Total rebar per rib, excluding mesh (kg) 315.9

227

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:227 17/07/2006 17:14:00

 TCC33 Flat Slabs (A&D).xls
TCC33.xls analyses and automatically designs bays of simple
rectangular flat slabs to BS EN 1992-1-1.
The spreadsheet uses sub-frame analysis with pattern loading
(as TCC21.xls) to calculate a bending moment envelope. This
envelope may be subjected to redistribution.
For a complete rectangular flat slab the user is expected to use
the spreadsheet at least four times (internal bay(s) x - x, internal
bay(s) y - y, edge bay(s) x - x and edge bay(s) y - y). Punching
shear should be checked using TCC13.xls, or by hand. See also
Eurocode 2 Clause 6.4., Punching.
Beyond panel aspect ratios of 1.5 consideration might be given to
the appropriateness of using other forms of analysis (e.g. grillage
or finite element).
MAIN!
This sheet provides the main inputs to the spreadsheet (although
other inputs occur in other sheets).
Most inputs are self-explanatory. LEGEND! should help with
definition of dimensions, e.g. end distance in MAIN! F18: F19 is
actually from centreline of column to the end/edge of the slab.
Cover is defined as being to the layer under design.
The layering is set at T1 - B1 (& T2 - B2) although T1 - B2 might be
deemed more appropriate (e.g. with prefabricated mats)., Some
cells have comments attached to them where terms might be
unfamiliar to UK users.
To the right hand side, by using the various combo boxes, the user
should choose the type of usage, whether internal or edge bay,
the preferred maximum size of bar, and whether brittle partitions
need to be considered in the design. These all have effects on
the detailed design. Covers requested at J9:J10 should be nominal
covers (including ∆cdev).
The number of spans is altered by entering data in the appropriate
cells. Unwanted data cells are ‘greyed-out’.
As with TCC 21, where support dimentions are not used the use
of C, K, F or P can alter the characteristics of a support from
Cantilever to Knife-edge to Fixed to Pinned. Extraneous data
is highlighted in red or by messages in red. Under Operating
Instructions in column L, a number of checks are carried out and
problems found are highlighted. At the bottom of the sheet a
simplistic loading diagram is given to aid data checking. Great
care should be taken to ensure that this sheet is completed
correctly for the case in hand. It may prove prudent to estimate
values for bay width bending moments at each support by hand
before progressing to ACTIONS!
228
EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:228
Cantilevers less than 1.00 m should be described as end distances
rather than cantilevers; otherwise certain logic regarding breadth
of effective moment transfer strip, be (see BSEN1992-1-1 Clause
9.4.2), goes wrong. On edge columns, be restricts the transfer
moment, M, which in itself restricts the amount of moment
transferred into columns above and below. End distances
equivalent to the half width of the column should be used to
define slabs whose edge is flush with the outside of the column.
Load input should define the loads on the slab only. A combo-
box is used to switch between the internal or edge bays. If EDGE
is chosen, cells F17 I15:J15 and E17:G17 become operative and
information about the perimeter load along the edge and the
distance of the edge from the centreline is required as input.
Perimeter loading is assumed to be dead load.
Cell L52 gives an estimate of reinforcement requirements for
the element considered in the direction considered (not both
directions).
The spreadsheet takes automatic measures to ensure deflection
criteria are met.
To the right under Operating instructions a number of checks are
carried out. Box markers indicate where checks have been carried
out and proved satisfactory.
ACTIONS!
This sheet shows bending moment and shear force diagrams
from the analysis undertaken in Analysis! The user is required
to input the desired amount of redistribution to the initial
moments in line 26. Cell L14 allows three types of distribution
according to the user’s preference. The sheet also provides output
reactions and column moments. For punching shear calculations,
the values of ex/by and u1/u1* given in D60:I61 may be used for
determination of the shear enhancement factor, ß
SPANS!
SPANS! details the amounts of reinforcement required derived
from detailed calculations in Bar!
The warning message “Results Invalid - Run with Gk,inf may appear.
This occurs when a check of the left hand side of support 2 reveals
that the γGk,inf load case has not been calculated. The button to
the right should be depressed to run the γGk,inf load case.
EC2 requires that all spans should be loaded with both γGk,sup
and γGk,inf. γGk,sup is used initially, and for γGk,inf the “Run-γGk,inf
Loadcase” button must be activated. A red warning message will
appear if this has not been done, or if any relevant input data
are subsequently changed. Using γGk,inf (=1.0) leads to higher
hogging moments in spans.
17/07/2006 17:14:04
 TCC33 Flat Slabs (A&D).xls

The top steel in the centre of spans is determined by adding

together the steel required for the greater hogging at 1/4 span
Bar!
and the appropriate additional tensile force due to shear ∆Fed (see
This sheet shows design calculations, complete with references
CI 9.2.1.3). It is assumed that 100% hogging steel at supports
to BS EN 1992-1-1. It is not necessarily intended for printing out
will be curtailed at 0.25 span or max 50%at 0,2 span and 50%
other than for checking purposes. The selection of bar sizes is
at 0.3 span.
automated.

LEGEND! Hogging moments at 1/4 span positions within a span are

checked and are used in the determination of top steel in spans.
LEGEND! gives an explanation of the dimensions used in MAIN!
and for the analysis and design.
Graf!
WEIGHT! This sheet comprises data for graphs used on other sheets,
particularly in ACTIONS!
WEIGHT! gives an estimate of the amount of reinforcement
required in one direction of the slab for the internal or end bays
considered. Simplified curtailment rules, similar to those used
Refs!
with BS 8110, are used to determine lengths of bars. The figures
This sheet comprises Nationally Determined Parameters (NDP’s)
should be treated as approximate estimates only as they cannot
contained within in the UK’s (draft) National Annexes to EN1990
deal with the effects of designers’ and detailers’ preferences,
(basis of design) and BS EN 1992-1-1. This page should be
rationalisation, the effects of holes etc, etc. They do not allow for
reviewed each time the spreadsheet is used to ensure the values
punching shear links or link carrier bars.
remain valid for the UK or are valid for the country where the
works are to be carried out or changed to suit. It is suggested that
Uls! this page is printed out to accompany submissions of calculations
that include this spreadsheet. It should be noted that it is possible
This sheet details the moment distribution analysis carried out to switch on the adjacent spans loaded by changing ‘b’ to ‘a’ in
at the ultimate limit state. The following patterns for imposed cell D6. BSEN 1992-1-1 recommends using the adjacent and
loading are considered to find a worse case. alternate load arrangement. However to the UK National Annex
only the cell spans and alternate load arrangements need to be
considered.
■ All spans loaded
■ Odd spans loaded
■ Even spans loaded Notes!
■ Adjacent spans loaded*
This sheet gives disclaimers and revision history.
● Spans 1 & 2 and 5 & 6 loaded*
● Spans 2 & 3 loaded*
■ Spans 3 & 4 loaded*
■ Spans 4 & 5 loaded*

* According to the UK National Annex, it is not necessary to

consider the adjacent-spans-loaded case and the option of using
this case may be switched on or off at Refs!D6.

Uls! is not necessarily intended for printing out other than for
checking purposes.

Sls!
This sheet details the analysis carried out at the serviceability
limit states corresponding to full service load and to quasi-
permanent load. It uses the same load cases as Uls! and finds
upper and lower bound limits at 1/20th points along the spans.
Again this sheet is not necessarily intended for printing out other
than for checking purposes.

229

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:229 17/07/2006 17:14:05

 TCC33 Flat Slabs (A&D)/ MAIN!

Project Spreadsheets to EC2 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made by Date Page
Location ECBP Typical Floor from grids A to D rmw 03-Jul-06 240
230
FLAT SLAB ANALYSIS & DESIGN to EN 1992-1 : 2004 Checked Revision Job No
Originated from TCC33.xls v3.0 on CD © 2003 - 2005 TCC chg - FB625

MATERIALS fck 35 N/mm² dg 20 mm COVERS mm TO LAYER

fyk 500 N/mm²
s 1.15 steel Top cover 25 1
fywk 500 N/mm²
c 1.50 concrete Btm cover 25 1
Steel class A Wk 0.4 mm top c,dev 10 mm
0.3 mm btm
SPANS L (m) GEOMETRY PERIMETER LOADS characteristic
SPAN 1 7.500 Bay type INTERNAL 4.00 kN/m outside supports 1 & 6
SPAN 2 7.500 Slab depth, h 230 mm
SPAN 3 7.500 Int Panel width, b 7500 mm LOADING PATTERN
SPAN 4 7.500 min max
SPAN 5 7.500 End distance 325 from supt 1 DEAD 1.25 1.25
SPAN 6 End distance 325 from supt 6 IMPOSED 1.50
.
SUPPORTS ABOVE (m) H (mm) B (mm) End Cond BELOW (m) H (mm) B (mm) End Cond
Support 1 3.750 450 450 F 3.75 450 450 F
Support 2 3.750 450 450 F 3.75 450 450 F
Support 3 3.750 450 450 F 3.75 450 450 F
Support 4 3.750 450 450 F 3.75 450 450 F
Support 5 3.750 450 450 F 3.75 450 450 F
Support 6 3.750 450 450 F 3.75 450 450 F
Support 7
Usage: Office With brittle partitions
LOADING UDLs (kN/m²) PLs (kN/m) Position (m)
Dead Imposed Position Loaded Dead Imposed Position Loaded
Span 1 Load Load from left Length Span 4 Load Load from left Length
UDL 6.75 5.00 ~~~~~ ~~~~~ UDL 6.75 5.00 ~~~~~ ~~~~~
PL 1 ~~~~~ PL 1 ~~~~~
PL 2 ~~~~~ PL 2 ~~~~~
Part UDL Part UDL
Span 2 Span 5
UDL 6.75 5.00 ~~~~~ ~~~~~ UDL 6.75 5.00 ~~~~~ ~~~~~
PL 1 ~~~~~ PL 1 ~~~~~
PL 2 ~~~~~ PL 2 ~~~~~
Part UDL Part UDL
Span 3 Span 6
UDL 6.75 5.00 ~~~~~ ~~~~~ UDL ~~~~~ ~~~~~
PL 1 ~~~~~ PL 1 ~~~~~
PL 2 ~~~~~ PL 2 ~~~~~
Part UDL Part UDL

LOADING DIAGRAM

A D

230

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:230 17/07/2006 17:14:07

 TCC33 Flat Slabs (A&D).xls

TCC33 Flat Slabs (A&D)/ ACTIONS!

Project Spreadsheets to EC2 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made by Date Page
Location ECBP Typical Floor, from grids A to D rmw 03-Jul-06 231
241
FLAT SLAB ANALYSIS & DESIGN to EN 1992-1 : 2004 Checked Revision Job No
Originated from TCC33.xls v3.0 on CD © 2003 - 2005 TCC chg - FB625
BENDING MOMENT DIAGRAMS (kNm/m)

800 800

600 600

400 400

200 200

0 0

-200 -200

-400 -400

-600 -600

Elastic Moments Redistributed Envelope

SUPPORT No 1 2 3 4 5 6
Elastic M 400.8 632.5 558.0 558.0 632.5 400.8 ~
Redistributed M 249.4 506.0 530.1 530.1 506.0 249.4 ~
δ 0.622 0.800 0.950 0.950 0.800 0.622 ~
Redistribution 20.0% 5.0% 5.0% 20.0%
End support reinf. Ø mm 16 16
* *
SPAN No 1 2 3 4 5
Elastic M 363.0 320.2 328.4 320.2 363.0 ~
Redistributed M 468.8 322.2 309.9 322.2 468.8 ~
δ 1.291 1.006 0.944 1.006 1.291 ~
SHEAR FORCE DIAGRAMS (kN/m)
600 600

400 400

200 200

0 0

-200 -200

-400 -400

-600 -600
0 10 20 30 40 0 10 20 30 40

Elastic Shears Redistributed Shears

SPAN No 1 2 3
Elastic V 427.2 482.3 452.5 443.9 448.0 448.0
Redistributed V 413.8 482.6 444.9 451.2 448.0 448.0

SPAN No 4 5
Elastic V 443.9 452.5 482.3 427.2 ~ ~
Redistributed V 451.2 444.9 482.6 413.8 ~ ~
REACTIONS (kN/m)
SUPPORT 1 2 3 4 5 6
ALL SPANS LOADED 490.1 927.0 899.2 899.2 927.0 490.1
MAXIMUM 490.1 927.0 899.2 899.2 927.0 490.1
Characteristic Dead 222.0 395.8 377.8 377.8 395.8 222.0
Characteristic Imposed 141.9 288.5 285.0 285.0 288.5 141.9
For punching ex /by 0.2225 0.2107 0.2107 0.2225 (6.43)
u1 /u1* 1.3114 1.3114 (6.44)

COLUMN MOMENTS (kNm) 1 2 3 4 5 6

ALL SPANS Above 115.5 -23.9 3.6 -3.6 23.9 -115.5 #DIV/0!
LOADED Below 115.5 -23.9 3.6 -3.6 23.9 -115.5 #DIV/0!
WITH MAX Above 115.5 -23.9 3.6 -3.6 23.9 -115.5 #DIV/0!
REACTION Below 115.5 -23.9 3.6 -3.6 23.9 -115.5 #DIV/0!

231

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:231 17/07/2006 17:14:12

 TCC33 Flat Slabs (A&D)/ SPANS!

Project Spreadsheets to EC2 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made by Date Page

Location ECBP Typical Floor, from grids A to D rmw 03-Jul-06 232
242
FLAT SLAB ANALYSIS & DESIGN to EN 1992-1 : 2004 Checked Revision Job No
Originated from TCC33.xls v3.0 on CD © 2003 - 2005 TCC chg - FB625
. .
SPAN 1 LEFT CENTRE RIGHT
ACTIONS δ 1.000 1.291 0.800
Be 1000 3750
Total M kNm 165.0 468.8 430.4
Mt max kNm 230.9 883.6

MIDDLE STRIP Width mm 6500 3750 3750

M kNm 16.0 211.0 107.6
d mm 199.0 199.0 201.0
As mm²/m 30 684 346
As deflection mm²/m 321
Provide H12 @ 375 T1 Provide H12 @ 150 B1 Provide H8 @ 125 T1
As prov mm²/m 302 754 402
Top steel Provide H12 @ 375 T1
Deflection L/d = 7,500 /199 = 37.69 < 45.40 x 1.00 x 0.830 = 84.74 OK

COLUMN STRIP Width mm 1000 3750 3750

M kNm 165.0 257.8 322.8
d mm 197.0 199.0 199.0
As mm²/m 2195 837 1056
As deflection mm²/m 542
Provide H16 @ 75 T1 Provide H12 @ 125 B1 Provide H12 @ 75:150 T1
As prov mm²/m 2681 905 1131
Top steel Provide H12 @ 325 T1
Deflection L/d = 7,500 /199 = 37.69 < 34.09 x 1.00 x 1.105 = 61.54 OK

CHECKS % As ok ok ok
Singly reinforced ok ok ok
σs ok ok ok
max S ok ok ok

SPAN 2 LEFT CENTRE RIGHT

ACTIONS δ 0.800 1.006 0.950
Be 3750 3750
Total M kNm 430.4 322.2 432.3
Mt max kNm 883.6 883.6

MIDDLE STRIP Width mm 3750 3750 3750

M kNm 107.6 145.0 108.1
d mm 201.0 200.0 200.0
As mm²/m 346 468 349
As deflection mm²/m 133
Provide H8 @ 125 T1 Provide H10 @ 150 B1 Provide H10 @ 225 T1
As prov mm²/m 402 524 349
Top steel Provide H12 @ 375 T1
Deflection L/d = 7,500 /200 = 37.50 < 83.02 x 1.00 x 0.452 = 131.56 OK

COLUMN STRIP Width mm 3750 3750 3750

M kNm 322.8 177.2 324.2
d mm 199.0 199.0 199.0
As mm²/m 1056 575 1061
As deflection mm²/m 246
Provide H12 @ 75:150 T1 Provide H12 @ 175 B1 Provide H12 @ 75:150 T1
As prov mm²/m 1131 646 1131
Top steel Provide H12 @ 325 T1
Deflection L/d = 7,500 /199 = 37.69 < 59.36 x 1.00 x 0.635 = 92.94 OK

CHECKS % As ok ok ok
Singly reinforced ok ok ok
σs ok ok ok
max S ok ok ok

232

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:232 17/07/2006 17:14:18

 TCC33 Flat Slabs (A&D).xls

TCC33 Flat Slabs (A&D)/ SPANS!

Project Spreadsheets to EC2 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made by Date Page

Location ECBP Typical Floor, from grids A to D rmw 03-Jul-06 233

243
FLAT SLAB ANALYSIS & DESIGN to EN 1992-1 : 2004 Checked Revision Job No
Originated from TCC33.xls v3.0 on CD © 2003 - 2005 TCC chg - FB625

SPAN 3 LEFT CENTRE RIGHT

ACTIONS δ 0.950 0.944 0.950
Be 3750 3750
Total M kNm 432.3 309.9 432.3
Mt max kNm 883.6 883.6

MIDDLE STRIP Width mm 3750 3750 3750

M kNm 108.1 139.5 108.1
d mm 200.0 200.0 200.0
As mm²/m 349 450 349
As deflection mm²/m 128
Provide H10 @ 225 T1 Provide H10 @ 150 B1 Provide H10 @ 225 T1
As prov mm²/m 349 524 349
Top steel Provide H12 @ 375 T1
Deflection L/d = 7,500 /200 = 37.50 < 88.38 x 1.00 x 0.424 = 135.85 OK

COLUMN STRIP Width mm 3750 3750 3750

M kNm 324.2 170.5 324.2
d mm 199.0 199.0 199.0
As mm²/m 1061 553 1061
As deflection mm²/m 238
Provide H12 @ 75:150 T1 Provide H12 @ 200 B1 Provide H12 @ 75:150 T1
As prov mm²/m 1131 565 1131
Top steel Provide H12 @ 375 T1
Deflection L/d = 7,500 /199 = 37.69 < 63.12 x 1.00 x 0.597 = 84.96 OK

CHECKS % As ok ok ok
Singly reinforced ok ok ok
σs ok ok ok
max S ok ok ok

SPAN 4 LEFT CENTRE RIGHT

ACTIONS δ 0.950 1.006 0.800
Be 3750 3750
Total M kNm 432.3 322.2 430.4
Mt max kNm 883.6 883.6

MIDDLE STRIP Width mm 3750 3750 3750

M kNm 108.1 145.0 107.6
d mm 200.0 200.0 201.0
As mm²/m 349 468 346
As deflection mm²/m 133
Provide H10 @ 225 T1 Provide H10 @ 150 B1 Provide H8 @ 125 T1
As prov mm²/m 349 524 402
Top steel Provide H12 @ 375 T1
Deflection L/d = 7,500 /200 = 37.50 < 83.02 x 1.00 x 0.452 = 131.56 OK

COLUMN STRIP Width mm 3750 3750 3750

M kNm 324.2 177.2 322.8
d mm 199.0 199.0 199.0
As mm²/m 1061 575 1056
As deflection mm²/m 246
Provide H12 @ 75:150 T1 Provide H12 @ 175 B1 Provide H12 @ 75:150 T1
As prov mm²/m 1131 646 1131
Top steel Provide H12 @ 325 T1
Deflection L/d = 7,500 /199 = 37.69 < 59.36 x 1.00 x 0.635 = 92.94 OK

CHECKS % As ok ok ok
Singly reinforced ok ok ok
σs ok ok ok
max S ok ok ok

233

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:233 17/07/2006 17:14:22

 TCC33 Flat Slabs (A&D)/ SPANS!

Project Spreadsheets to EC2 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made by Date Page

Location ECBP Typical Floor, from grids A to D rmw 03-Jul-06 244
234
FLAT SLAB ANALYSIS & DESIGN to EN 1992-1 : 2004 Checked Revision Job No
Originated from TCC33.xls v3.0 on CD © 2003 - 2005 TCC chg - FB625

SPAN 5 LEFT CENTRE RIGHT

ACTIONS δ 0.800 1.291 1.000
Be 3750 1000
Total M kNm 430.4 468.8 165.0
Mt max kNm 883.6 230.9

MIDDLE STRIP Width mm 3750 3750 6500

M kNm 107.6 211.0 2.1
d mm 201.0 199.0 199.0
As mm²/m 346 684 4
As deflection mm²/m 321
Provide H8 @ 125 T1 Provide H12 @ 150 B1 Provide H12 @ 375 T1
As prov mm²/m 402 754 302
Top steel Provide H12 @ 375 T1
Deflection L/d = 7,500 /199 = 37.69 < 45.40 x 1.00 x 0.830 = 84.74 OK

COLUMN STRIP Width mm 3750 3750 1000

M kNm 322.8 257.8 165.0
d mm 199.0 199.0 197.0
As mm²/m 1056 837 2195
As deflection mm²/m 542
Provide H12 @ 75:150 T1 Provide H12 @ 125 B1 Provide H16 @ 75 T1
As prov mm²/m 1131 905 2681
Top steel Provide H12 @ 325 T1
Deflection L/d = 7,500 /199 = 37.69 < 34.09 x 1.00 x 1.105 = 61.54 OK

CHECKS % As ok ok ok
Singly reinforced ok ok ok
σs ok ok ok
max S ok ok ok

234

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:234 17/07/2006 17:14:27

 TCC33 Flat Slabs (A&D).xls

TCC33 Flat Slabs (A&D)/ LEGEND!

Project Spreadsheets to EC2 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made by Date Page
Location ECBP Typical Floor, from grids A to D rmw 03-Jul-06 235
245
FLAT SLAB ANALYSIS & DESIGN to EN 1992-1 : 2004 Checked Revision Job No
Originated from TCC33.xls v3.0 on CD © 2003 - 2005 TCC chg - FB625

Legend for input data on MAIN sheet

Diagram shows legend for frames centred on EW gridlines - rotate 90° for frames centred on NS
gridlines.

235

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:235 17/07/2006 17:14:32

 TCC33 Flat Slabs (A&D)/ WEIGHT!

Project Spreadsheets to EC2 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made by Date Page
Location ECBP Typical Floor, from grids A to D rmw 03-Jul-06 246
236
FLAT SLAB ANALYSIS & DESIGN to EN 1992-1 : 2004 Checked Revision Job No
Originated from TCC33.xls v3.0 on CD © 2003 - 2005 TCC chg - FB625
No
WEIGHT of REINFORCEMENT Mid Strip Col Strip Type Dia Length Unit wt Weight
TOP STEEL Support 1 18 T 12 2725 0.888 43.5
15 T 16 2725 1.578 64.5
Span 1 10 T 12 5050 0.888 44.8
12 T 12 5050 0.888 53.8
Support 2 30 T 8 3750 0.395 44.4
38 T 12 3750 0.888 126.5
Span 2 10 T 12 5050 0.888 44.8
12 T 12 5050 0.888 53.8
Support 3 17 T 10 3750 0.617 39.3
38 T 12 3750 0.888 126.5
Span 3 10 T 12 5050 0.888 44.8
10 T 12 5050 0.888 44.8
Support 4 17 T 10 3750 0.617 39.3
38 T 12 3750 0.888 126.5
Span 4 10 T 12 5050 0.888 44.8
12 T 12 5050 0.888 53.8
Support 5 30 T 8 3750 0.395 44.4
38 T 12 3750 0.888 126.5
Span 5 10 T 12 5050 0.888 44.8
12 T 12 5050 0.888 53.8
Support 6 18 T 12 2725 0.888 43.5
15 T 16 2725 1.578 64.5

BTM STEEL Span 1 25 T 12 6975 0.888 154.8

30 T 12 7950 0.888 211.7
Span 2 25 T 10 6825 0.617 105.2
22 T 12 7650 0.888 149.4
Span 3 25 T 10 6825 0.617 105.2
19 T 12 7650 0.888 129.0
Span 4 25 T 10 6825 0.617 105.2
22 T 12 7650 0.888 149.4
Span 5 25 T 12 6975 0.888 154.8
30 T 12 7950 0.888 211.7

SUMMARY Rebar for single direction only. All figures approximate - see User Guide.
3
TOTAL REINFORCEMENT IN BAY (kg) 2850 REINFORCEMENT DENSITY (kg/m ) 43.3

236

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:236 17/07/2006 17:14:39


TCC33X Flat Slabs (A&D).xls
TCC33X designs flat slabs in both orthogonal directions by running
TCC33 for each grid line and collecting the data generated. It
uses macros heavily and takes some time to run, once the “Run
Results” button is pressed. It is intended to be used for the design
of flat slabs in braced structures only, where all columns are on
grid and where there are no major openings.
This spreadsheet also checks basic punching shear stresses around
each column and gives an indication of the degree of shear
reinforcing required. As it is impractical within this spreadsheet
to model a variety of holes adjacent to columns, the user should
check the effects of holes separately by using TCC13.
Sheets ACTIONS!, SPANS!, LEGEND!, Weight!, Uls!, Sls!, Bar!,
Gra!, Refs! and Notes!, work in the same way as TCC33.
INPUT!
All relevant materials, geometric and loading data is input on this
sheet.
As spans are entered into cells C13:E18, the key diagram below
will change in order to serve as a visual check on the correct input
of geometry. Although the plan is to scale, the columns on this
key diagram are indicative only and do not reflect the column
sizes entered.
Correct gridlines must be entered at cells G13 to H19. These
are used to name the various runs on individual grids, so it is
important that there are no duplicates and that the correct
number of grids are entered.
The edge distances (centre line of column to edge of slab) in cells
O12 to O15 are equally important, as both analysis and punching
shear calculations are very sensitive to these values.
When all input is complete, the “RUN RESULTS” button should
be clicked. This then designs the frame on each gridline in turn,
and summarizes data on the RESULTS sheet. If any data changes
are subsequently made, the RESULTS VALID message at cell P17
will change to “PRESS RUN BUTTON”.
RESULTS!
This sheet has eight printable pages:
Summary 1 repeats the key and legend diagrams, displays
validity checks for the sub-frames on all gridlines, gives a guide
to the levels of shear stress and gives the reinforcement density
as designed.
Summary 2 to Summary 4 display reinforcement call-ups for
each of the four layers, T1, T2, B1 and B2. The top steel in some
column strips will have a call-up such as 20 H16 @ 125:250. This
EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:237
TCC33X Flat Slabs (A&D).xls
indicates that the central half of the column strip has bars at
125 mm centres, with 250 mm centres being required over the
remainder of the strip width.
Summary 5 gives principal design bending moments throughout
each gridline.
Summary 6 gives both characteristic and maximum ultimate
column reactions.
Summary 7 similarly displays column design moments and
values of ß VEd for punching shear.
Summary 8 indicates the levels of punching shear stress by
summarizing actual stress divided by allowable stress at both the
basic control perimeter, u1 and at the column face. Where values
are greater than unity, shear links or studs are required and may
be designed using TCC13. Alternatively or additionally, greater
punching resistance may be provided at a column by either a)
increasing levels of top reinforcement, or b) adding shear heads
at columns (see INPUT! cell K34).
MAIN! ACTIONS! SPANS! LEGEND!
WEIGHT! Uls! Sls! Bar! Graf! Refs!
These sheets are identical to the sheet of the same name in
TCC33, except that input values are controlled from INPUT!
and may not be amended. In MAIN! if it is required to print out
detailed calculations for a particular gridline, the gridline should
be selected via the combo-boxes in L16. First select direction
(either EW or NS), then the required gridline.
In ACTIONS!, the redistribution is controlled by INPUT! L22.
In SPANS! the γGk,inf case is run automatically when the Run
Results Button is used.
Punch!
This sheet gives details of the various values used in punching
shear calculations at all columns. These being, dave, pl, vRdc, u1, u1*,
u0, ß and vEd.
Notes!
This sheet gives disclaimers and revision history.
237
17/07/2006 17:14:43
 TCC33X Flat Slabs (A&D)/ INPUT!

Project Spreadsheets to EC2 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made by Date Job No
Location Third floor slab Rod 03-Jul-06 FB625
FLAT SLAB ANALYSIS & DESIGN to EN 1992-1 : 2004 Checked Revision Page

Originated from TCC33X.xls v3.0 on CD © 2004-6 The Concrete Centre chg - 238
248

MATERIALS fck 35 N/mm² dg 20 mm COVERS (mm) SLAB DEPTH (mm)

fyk 500 N/mm² c,dev 5 mm Top cover 25 h= 250
Steel class A Wk 0.4 mm top Btm cover 25
0.3 mm btm EDGE DISTANCES (mm)
SPANS (m) N-S E-W N/S E/W COLUMN SIZES (mm) North 125
Span A - B 7.500 Span 1 - 2 7.500 1 A
  South 125
Span B - C 7.500 Span 2 - 3 7.500 2 B Internal 400 400 East 125
GRIDLINES

Span C - D 7.500 Span 3 - 4 7.500 3 C North edge 250 400 West 125
Span D - E 7.500 4 D South edge 250 400
E East edge 400 250 LOADING (kN/m²)
West edge 400 250 Applied dead 0.50
Corners 250 250 Partitions 1.00
1 4 Imposed 2.50
Perimeter cladding
A Redistribution 15% % kN/m 8.50

st
Preferred max bar Ø 20 mm AGE at 1
End support reinf. Ø 20 mm CRACKING
14
Brittle partitions ? Yes days (3 - 28)
Usage Office

Columns below Yes Columns above ? Yes

Length 3.750 m Length 3.750 m
End condition F F or P End condition F F or P

E Columns heads ? No Projection from mm

column face

238

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:238 17/07/2006 17:14:45

 TCC33X Flat Slabs (A&D).xls

TCC33X Flat Slabs (A&D)/ RESULTS!

Summary 1 and Summary 2

Project Spreadsheets to EC2 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made by Date Page
Location Third floor slab Rod 03-Jul-06 239
249
FLAT SLAB ANALYSIS & DESIGN to EN 1992-1 : 2004 Checked Revision Job No
Originated from TCC33X.xls v3.0 on CD © 2004-6 The Concrete Centre chg - FB625
Summary 1
1 4
A Rebar

Rotate 90° for frames centred on NS

Layering
B1 & T1


gridlines.
B2 & T2


TO SCALE PLAN Legend for frames on EW gridlines

VALIDITY Deflection %age As End bar Ø Deflection %age As End bar Ø

Grid 1    Grid A   
Grid 2    Grid B   
Grid 3    Grid C   
Grid 4    Grid D   
Grid E   

PUNCHING SHEAR VERY HIGH at SOME COLUMNS Heads with a 400 projection should give few or no links at internal columns.
See page Summary 8 Alternatively, increases in top steel over columns will reduce link requirements.
REINFORCEMENT Estimated quantities (excluding any shear links)
Quantities allow for laps, but not for wastage, rationalisation or steel increases for shear. Concrete volume, m³ 172.0
Total weight, Tonnes 12.84 Rebar density, kg/m³ 74.7 Rebar density, kg/m² 18.7

Project Spreadsheets to EC2 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made by Date Page
Location Third floor slab Rod 03-Jul-06 239
250
FLAT SLAB ANALYSIS & DESIGN to EN 1992-1 : 2004 Checked Revision Job No
Originated from TCC33X.xls v3.0 on CD © 2004-6 The Concrete Centre chg - FB625
Summary 2
RESULTS - DESIGN
TOP REINFORCEMENT Layer T2
Grid 1 Grid 2 Grid 3 Grid 4
Support A Column strip 4 H20 @ 150 4 H20 @ 225 4 H20 @ 225 4 H20 @ 150
Middle strip 13 H10 @ 275 25 H10 @ 275 25 H10 @ 275 13 H10 @ 275
Span A - B Column strip 8 H10 @ 275 14 H10 @ 275 14 H10 @ 275 8 H10 @ 275
Middle strip 7 H10 @ 275 14 H10 @ 275 14 H10 @ 275 7 H10 @ 275
Support B Column strip 15 H16 @ 100:200 23 H16 @ 125:250 23 H16 @ 125:250 15 H16 @ 100:200
Middle strip 19 H8 @ 100 30 H8 @ 125 30 H8 @ 125 19 H8 @ 100
Span B - C Column strip 10 H10 @ 200 10 H12 @ 375 10 H12 @ 375 10 H10 @ 200
Middle strip 7 H10 @ 275 14 H10 @ 275 14 H10 @ 275 7 H10 @ 275
Support C Column strip 10 H16 @ 150:300 17 H16 @ 175:350 17 H16 @ 175:350 10 H16 @ 150:300
Middle strip 15 H8 @ 125 22 H8 @ 175 22 H8 @ 175 15 H8 @ 125
Span C - D Column strip 10 H10 @ 200 10 H12 @ 375 10 H12 @ 375 10 H10 @ 200
Middle strip 7 H10 @ 275 14 H10 @ 275 14 H10 @ 275 7 H10 @ 275
Support D Column strip 15 H16 @ 100:200 23 H16 @ 125:250 23 H16 @ 125:250 15 H16 @ 100:200
Middle strip 19 H8 @ 100 30 H8 @ 125 30 H8 @ 125 19 H8 @ 100
Span D - E Column strip 8 H10 @ 275 14 H10 @ 275 14 H10 @ 275 8 H10 @ 275
Middle strip 7 H10 @ 275 14 H10 @ 275 14 H10 @ 275 7 H10 @ 275
Support E Column strip 4 H20 @ 150 4 H20 @ 225 4 H20 @ 225 4 H20 @ 150
Middle strip 13 H10 @ 275 25 H10 @ 275 25 H10 @ 275 13 H10 @ 275
Column strip
Middle strip
Column strip
Middle strip
Column strip
Middle strip
Column strip
Middle strip

239

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:239 17/07/2006 17:14:51

 TCC33X Flat Slabs (A&D)/ RESULTS!
Summary 3 and Summary 4

Project Spreadsheets to EC2 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made by Date Page
Location Third floor slab Rod 03-Jul-06 240
251
FLAT SLAB ANALYSIS & DESIGN to EN 1992-1 : 2004 Checked Revision Job No
Originated from TCC33X.xls v3.0 on CD © 2004-6 The Concrete Centre chg - FB625
Summary 3
TOP REINFORCEMENT Layer T1
Grid A Grid B Grid C Grid D Grid E
Support 1 Column strip 4 H20 @ 175 4 H20 @ 250 4 H20 @ 250 4 H20 @ 250 4 H20 @ 175
Middle strip 9 H12 @ 400 18 H12 @ 400 18 H12 @ 400 18 H12 @ 400 9 H12 @ 400
Span 1 - 2 Column strip 5 H12 @ 400 11 H12 @ 350 11 H12 @ 350 11 H12 @ 350 5 H12 @ 400
Middle strip 5 H12 @ 400 10 H12 @ 400 10 H12 @ 400 10 H12 @ 400 5 H12 @ 400
Support 2 Column strip 12 H16 @ 125:250 19 H16 @ 150:300 19 H16 @ 150:300 19 H16 @ 150:300 12 H16 @ 125:250
Middle strip 19 H8 @ 100 25 H8 @ 150 25 H8 @ 150 25 H8 @ 150 19 H8 @ 100
Span 2 - 3 Column strip 9 H10 @ 225 11 H12 @ 350 11 H12 @ 350 11 H12 @ 350 9 H10 @ 225
Middle strip 8 H10 @ 250 10 H12 @ 400 10 H12 @ 400 10 H12 @ 400 8 H10 @ 250
Support 3 Column strip 12 H16 @ 125:250 19 H16 @ 150:300 19 H16 @ 150:300 19 H16 @ 150:300 12 H16 @ 125:250
Middle strip 19 H8 @ 100 25 H8 @ 150 25 H8 @ 150 25 H8 @ 150 19 H8 @ 100
Span 3 - 4 Column strip 5 H12 @ 400 11 H12 @ 350 11 H12 @ 350 11 H12 @ 350 5 H12 @ 400
Middle strip 5 H12 @ 400 10 H12 @ 400 10 H12 @ 400 10 H12 @ 400 5 H12 @ 400
Support 4 Column strip 4 H20 @ 175 4 H20 @ 250 4 H20 @ 250 4 H20 @ 250 4 H20 @ 175
Middle strip 9 H12 @ 400 18 H12 @ 400 18 H12 @ 400 18 H12 @ 400 9 H12 @ 400
Column strip
Middle strip
Column strip
Middle strip
Column strip
Middle strip
Column strip
Middle strip
Column strip
Middle strip
Column strip
Middle strip

Project Spreadsheets to EC2 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made by Date Page
Location Third floor slab Rod 03-Jul-06 240
252
FLAT SLAB ANALYSIS & DESIGN to EN 1992-1 : 2004 Checked Revision Job No
Originated from TCC33X.xls v3.0 on CD © 2004-6 The Concrete Centre chg - FB625
Summary 4
BOTTOM REINFORCEMENT Layer B2
Grid 1 Grid 2 Grid 3 Grid 4
Span A - B Column strip H16 @ 225 H12 @ 125 H12 @ 125 H16 @ 225
Middle strip H16 @ 250 H12 @ 175 H12 @ 175 H16 @ 250
Span B - C Column strip H16 @ 325 H10 @ 150 H10 @ 150 H16 @ 325
Middle strip H16 @ 375 H10 @ 175 H10 @ 175 H16 @ 375
Span C - D Column strip H16 @ 325 H10 @ 150 H10 @ 150 H16 @ 325
Middle strip H16 @ 375 H10 @ 175 H10 @ 175 H16 @ 375
Span D - E Column strip H16 @ 225 H12 @ 125 H12 @ 125 H16 @ 225
Middle strip H16 @ 250 H12 @ 175 H12 @ 175 H16 @ 250
Column strip
Middle strip
Column strip
Middle strip

Layer B1 Grid A Grid B Grid C Grid D Grid E

Span 1 - 2 Column strip H16 @ 225 H12 @ 150 H12 @ 150 H12 @ 150 H16 @ 225
Middle strip H16 @ 275 H10 @ 125 H10 @ 125 H10 @ 125 H16 @ 275
Span 2 - 3 Column strip H12 @ 250 H8 @ 150 H8 @ 150 H8 @ 150 H12 @ 250
Middle strip H12 @ 300 H8 @ 150 H8 @ 150 H8 @ 150 H12 @ 300
Span 3 - 4 Column strip H16 @ 225 H12 @ 150 H12 @ 150 H12 @ 150 H16 @ 225
Middle strip H16 @ 275 H10 @ 125 H10 @ 125 H10 @ 125 H16 @ 275
Column strip
Middle strip
Column strip
Middle strip
Column strip
Middle strip

240

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:240 17/07/2006 17:14:58

 TCC33X Flat Slabs (A&D).xls

TCC33X Flat Slabs (A&D)/ RESULTS!

Summary 5 and Summary 6

Project Spreadsheets to EC2 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made by Date Page
Location Third floor slab Rod 03-Jul-06 241
253
FLAT SLAB ANALYSIS & DESIGN to EN 1992-1 : 2004 Checked Revision Job No
Originated from TCC33X.xls v3.0 on CD © 2004-6 The Concrete Centre chg - FB625
Summary 5
RESULTS FROM ANALYSIS - BENDING MOMENTS at support centrelines and maxima in spans kNm
Grid 1 Grid 2 Grid 3 Grid 4
Support A 76.86 107.26 107.26 76.86
Span A - B 261.97 424.88 424.88 261.97
Support B 316.53 524.40 524.40 316.53
Span B - C 174.50 272.06 272.06 174.50
Support C 231.18 377.92 377.92 231.18
Span C - D 174.50 272.06 272.06 174.50
Support D 316.53 524.40 524.40 316.53
Span D - E 261.97 424.88 424.88 261.97
Support E 76.86 107.26 107.26 76.86

Grid A Grid B Grid C Grid D Grid E

Support 1 78.11 108.45 108.45 108.45 78.11
Span 1 - 2 265.64 428.91 428.91 428.91 265.64
Support 2 306.08 513.05 513.05 513.05 306.08
Span 2 - 3 141.25 208.30 208.30 208.30 141.25
Support 3 306.08 513.05 513.05 513.05 306.08
Span 3 - 4 265.64 428.91 428.91 428.91 265.64
Support 4 78.11 108.45 108.45 108.45 78.11

Project Spreadsheets to EC2 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made by Date Page
Location Third floor slab Rod 03-Jul-06 241
254
FLAT SLAB ANALYSIS & DESIGN to EN 1992-1 : 2004 Checked Revision Job No
Originated from TCC33X.xls v3.0 on CD © 2004-6 The Concrete Centre chg - FB625
Summary 6
COLUMN REACTIONS
Characteristic dead load, kN
Grid 1 Grid 2 Grid 3 Grid 4
Grid A 146.52 280.63 280.63 146.52
Grid B 287.30 420.33 420.33 287.30
Grid C 248.58 412.30 412.30 248.58
Grid D 287.30 420.33 420.33 287.30
Grid E 146.52 280.63 280.63 146.52

Characteristic imposed load, kN

Grid 1 Grid 2 Grid 3 Grid 4
Grid A 49.04 105.23 105.23 49.04
Grid B 108.33 213.80 213.80 108.33
Grid C 95.99 206.33 206.33 95.99
Grid D 108.33 213.80 213.80 108.33
Grid E 49.04 105.23 105.23 49.04

Maximum ultimate load VEd, kN without enhancement factor,

Grid 1 Grid 2 Grid 3 Grid 4
Grid A 256.52 508.29 508.29 256.52
Grid B 521.27 845.59 845.59 521.27
Grid C 454.40 824.36 824.36 454.40
Grid D 521.27 845.59 845.59 521.27
Grid E 256.52 508.29 508.29 256.52

241

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:241 17/07/2006 17:15:03

 TCC33X Flat Slabs (A&D)/ RESULTS!
Summary 7 and Summary 8

Project Spreadsheets to EC2 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made by Date Page
Location Third floor slab Rod 03-Jul-06 242
255
FLAT SLAB ANALYSIS & DESIGN to EN 1992-1 : 2004 Checked Revision Job No
Originated from TCC33X.xls v3.0 on CD © 2004-6 The Concrete Centre chg - FB625
Summary 7
COLUMN MOMENTS
Ultimate, kNm
Grid 1 Grid 2 Grid 3 Grid 4

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Grid A Above 32.70 / 33.46 44.52 / -13.95 44.52 / 13.95 32.70 / -33.46
Below 32.70 / 33.46 44.52 / -13.95 44.52 / 13.95 32.70 / -33.46
Grid B Above -10.84 / 45.24 -31.72 / -38.97 -31.72 / 38.97 -10.84 / -45.24
Below -10.84 / 45.24 -31.72 / -38.97 -31.72 / 38.97 -10.84 / -45.24
Grid C Above 0.00 / 45.24 0.00 / -38.97 0.00 / 38.97 0.00 / -45.24
Below 0.00 / 45.24 0.00 / -38.97 0.00 / 38.97 0.00 / -45.24
Grid D Above 10.84 / 45.24 31.72 / -38.97 31.72 / 38.97 10.84 / -45.24
Below 10.84 / 45.24 31.72 / -38.97 31.72 / 38.97 10.84 / -45.24
Grid E Above -32.70 / 33.46 -44.52 / -13.95 -44.52 / 13.95 -32.70 / -33.46
Below -32.70 / 33.46 -44.52 / -13.95 -44.52 / 13.95 -32.70 / -33.46
Above
Below
Above
Below

Punching shear load VEd, kN

Grid 1 Grid 2 Grid 3 Grid 4
Grid A 327.4 601.5 601.5 327.4
Grid B 609.6 990.7 990.7 609.6
Grid C 511.5 936.4 936.4 511.5
Grid D 609.6 990.7 990.7 609.6
Grid E 327.4 601.5 601.5 327.4

Project Spreadsheets to EC2 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made by Date Page
Location Third floor slab Rod 03-Jul-06 256
FLAT SLAB ANALYSIS & DESIGN to EN 1992-1 : 2004 Checked Revision Job No
Originated from TCC33X.xls v3.0 on CD © 2004-6 The Concrete Centre chg - FB625
Summary 8
PUNCHING, v Ed / v Rdc Adjacent holes will increase values Without column heads
Grid 1 Grid 2 Grid 3 Grid 4
Grid A 2.270 2.107 2.107 2.270 No links
Grid B 2.101 1.640 1.640 2.101
Grid C 1.886 1.640 1.640 1.886 Some links
Grid D 2.101 1.640 1.640 2.101
Grid E 2.270 2.107 2.107 2.270 Many links

Very many

PUNCHING, v Ed / v Rd.max Adjacent holes will increase values v Rd.max (Mpa) = 6.020
Grid 1 Grid 2 Grid 3 Grid 4
Grid A 0.531 0.539 0.539 0.531 < 50%
Grid B 0.546 0.497 0.497 0.546
Grid C 0.458 0.470 0.470 0.458 50 to 75%
Grid D 0.546 0.497 0.497 0.546
Grid E 0.531 0.539 0.539 0.531 75 to 100%

FAILS

242

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:242 17/07/2006 17:15:09


TCC41 Continuous Beams.xls
The spreadsheet designs multiple-span rectangular or flanged
beams to BS EN 1991-1-1 using sub-frame analysis to derive
moments and shears. The intention is to provide the design and
analysis of up to six spans of continuous beams with columns
above and below. Spans may incorporate cantilevers, fixed ends
or knife-edge supports. There are three main sheets: MAIN!,
ACTIONS! and SPANS!
MAIN!
This sheet contains user input of materials, frame geometry and
load data.
Input data is blue and underlined. New data may be input by
overwriting default values or by entering values in ‘greyed-out’
cells. Entering a value of 5.0 in cell C18 will clear a line of data
in both the span and support data ready for input. Guidance on
input for the type of section and type of end condition of the
support is given under ‘Operating instructions’.
The dimensions of the flange widths, beff, are entered manually,
but maximum permitted values can be seen in cells M12:M17.
It is important that the correct usage of the members under
consideration is selected from the combo-box to the right of the
screen, as this affects the magnitude of quasi-permanent SLS
moments.
The sheet has been set up with as many ‘carry throughs’ as
possible, i.e. input cells are made equal to preceding input
cells to make the inputting of regular beams easier. Inputting
C18 as = C17 will insert 6.00 in the remaining spans: it will also
remove the grey conditional background to the remaining spans,
supports and loads and allow data entry. Deleting C18, indeed
C19, will blank out remaining spans, etc. Generally, values in red
or red backgrounds indicate either incorrect or excess data. For
instance, if knife-edge supports are required, entering ‘K’ in cell
C24 will elicit red data to the right, which needs to be cleared
manually. Point loads should be at least 0.001m from a support.
Do not copy and paste input values as this can corrupt formatting
(copy and paste values only is OK).
‘Rebar layering’ refers to whether there are beams in the other
direction. Answering yes drops by one bar diameter the steel at
the supports. For instance when using splice bars at the support
bars in the other direction have to be avoided - and allowed for
in the design.
With respect to cantilevers, design for bending caters for
moments at the face of support; design for deflection considers
the cantilever from the centre line of support. In beam-to-beam
situations the width of support can be input as being very small
to avoid under-design in bending.
EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:243
TCC41 Continuous Beams.xls
The dimensions of the flange widths, beff, are entered manually,
but maximum permitted values can be seen in cells M12:M17.
It is important that the correct usage of the members under
consideration is selected from the combo-box to the right of the
screen, as this affects the magnitude of quasi-permanent SLS
moments.
ACTIONS!
ACTIONS! includes bending moment and shear force diagrams,
summaries of moments and shears and user input for amounts
of redistribution. Users should ensure that the amounts of
redistribution are always considered and selected in line 26 as
there are no default values.
SPANS!
This sheet designs reinforcement for bending in spans and
supports and for shear in the spans. User input is required for
reinforcement sizes – some intuition may be required to obtain
sensible arrangements of reinforcement. Non-existent spans are
blanked out. Support moments (including cantilever moments)
are considered at the face of the support. This may lead to
unequal amounts of reinforcement being designed for each side
of the support. See Bar!
EC2 requires that all spans should be loaded with both γGk,sup
and γGk,inf . γGk,sup is used initially, and for γGk,inf the “Run γGk,inf
Loadcase” button must be activated. A red warning message will
appear if this has not been done, or if any relevant input data are
subsequently changed. Using γGk,inf (=1.0) leads to higher hogging
moments in spans.
With regard to deflection, the area of steel required, As mm2 /m,
shown under ‘Design for the Centre’ part of the span, may have
been automatically increased in order to reduce service stress,
σs, and increase modification factors to satisfy deflection criteria.
The percentage increase, if any, is shown under ‘Deflection’.
An additional limit of maximum allowable area of steel to comply
with deflection criteria, As def, = 1.5 x As reqd has been imposed in
line with UK Nation Annex, Note 5 to Table 7.4.N (BS). With
respect to cantilevers, neither compression steel enhancement
nor consideration of rotation at supports is included.
The top steel in the centre of spans is determined by adding
together the steel required for hogging at 1/4 span and the
appropriate additional tensile force due to shear ∆Fed (see CI
9.2.1.3). It is assumed that 100% hogging steel at supports will
be curtailed at 0.25 span or max 50%at 0,2 span and 50% at
0.3 span.
243
17/07/2006 17:15:15
 WEIGHT!
This sheet estimates the weight of reinforcement in the beam
when designed according to normal curtailment rules similar to
those defined in BS 8110. Workings are shown on the right hand
side of the sheet. The estimate may be printed out using File/print
or the print button on the normal toolbar. It should be recognised
that different engineers’ and detailers’ interpretations of these
clauses, and different project circumstances and requirements
will all have a bearing on actual quantities used.
Refs!
This sheet comprises the values for nationally determined
parameters that have been used in the spreadsheet. These data
reflect the values given in draft UK National Annexes for EN 1990
and EN 1992.
Designers should ensure that these data are current when the
spreadsheet is used. When using TCC31 for permanent design,
designers are strongly advised to include a copy of this sheet with
any design calculations.

Uls! It should be noted that it is possible to switch on the adjacent

spans loaded arrangement by changing ‘b’ to ‘a’ in cell D7. BS
This sheet details the moment distribution analysis carried out EN 1992-1-1 recommends using the adjacent and alternate
at the ultimate limit state. The following patterns for imposed load arrangements. However to the UK National Annex, only
loading are considered to find a worse case. the alt spans and alternate spans load arrangements need to be
considered.
■ All spans loaded
■ Odd spans loaded
Notes!
■ Even spans loaded
■ Adjacent spans loaded* This sheet gives disclaimers and revision history.
● Spans 1 & 2 and 5 & 6 loaded*
● Spans 2 & 3 loaded*
■ Spans 3 & 4 loaded*
■ Spans 4 & 5 loaded*

* According to the UK National Annex, it is not necessary to

consider the adjacent-spans-loaded case and the option of using
this case may be switched on or off at Refs!D6.

Uls! is not necessarily intended for printing out other than for
checking purposes.

Sls!
This sheet details the analysis carried out at the serviceability
limit states corresponding to full service load and to quasi-
permanent load. It uses the same load cases as Uls! and finds
upper and lower bound limits at 1/20th points along the spans.
Again this sheet is not necessarily intended for printing out other
than for checking purposes.

Bar!
Intended mainly for first time users and young engineers, this
sheet gives further details of the calculations summarised in
SPAN! Support moments are considered at faces of supports;
checks at 1/4 span relate to hogging and any top steel required is
provided in the span.

Graf!
This sheet provides data for the charts in MAIN! and ACTIONS!:
it is not intended for formal printing.
244

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:244 17/07/2006 17:15:17

 TCC41 Continuous Beams.xls

TCC41 Continuous Beams/ MAIN!

Project Spreadsheets to EC2 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made by Date Page
Location Worked Examples: Main beam Grids C to J rmw 03-Jul-06 245
255
CONTINUOUS BEAM ANALYSIS & DESIGN to EN 1992-1 : 2004 Checked Revision Job No
Originated from TCC41.xls v3.0 on CD © 2000-2006 TCC chg - FB625

MATERIALS STATUS OK COVERS (to links)

fck 30 N/mm² dg (mm) 20 Wk (mm)Top 0.4 Top cover 20 mm
fyk 500 N/mm² γs 1.15 Wk (mm)Btm 0.3 Btm cover 30 mm
fywk 500 N/mm² γc 1.50 c,dev 10 Side cover 30 mm
Steel class A Bay width 5000 mm
SPANS L (m) h (mm) bw (mm) hf (mm) Type beff (mm) LOADING PATTERN (6.10b)
SPAN 1 6.000 450 300 125 T 2170 min max
SPAN 2 6.000 450 300 125 T 1715 DEAD 1.25 1.25
SPAN 3 6.000 450 300 125 T 1715 IMPOSED 1.50
SPAN 4 6.000 450 300 125 T 2170 REBAR LAYERING
SPAN 5 Support steel in alt layer ?
SPAN 6 N

SUPPORTS ABOVE (m) H (mm) B (mm) End Cond BELOW (m) H (mm) B (mm) End Cond
Support 1 3.750 250 250 F 3.750 250 250 F
Support 2 3.750 300 300 F 3.750 300 300 F
Support 3 3.750 300 300 F 3.750 300 300 F
Support 4 3.750 300 300 F 3.750 300 300 F
Support 5 3.750 250 250 F 3.750 250 250 F
Support 6
Support 7
Usage: Shopping With brittle partitions
LOADING DIAGRAM

LOADING UDLs (kN/m²) PLs (kN) Position (m)

Dead Imposed Position Loaded Dead Imposed Position Loaded
Span 1 Load Load from left Length Span 4 Load Load from left Length
UDL 37.8 12.0 ~~~~~ ~~~~~ UDL 37.8 12.0 ~~~~~ ~~~~~
PL 1 ~~~~~ PL 1 ~~~~~
PL 2 ~~~~~ PL 2 ~~~~~
Part UDL Part UDL
Span 2 Span 5
UDL 37.8 12.0 ~~~~~ ~~~~~ UDL ~~~~~ ~~~~~
PL 1 ~~~~~ PL 1 ~~~~~
PL 2 ~~~~~ PL 2 ~~~~~
Part UDL Part UDL
Span 3 Span 6
UDL 37.8 12.0 ~~~~~ ~~~~~ UDL ~~~~~ ~~~~~
PL 1 ~~~~~ PL 1 ~~~~~
PL 2 ~~~~~ PL 2 ~~~~~
Part UDL Part UDL

REACTIONS (kN)
SUPPORT 1 2 3 4 5
ALL SPANS LOADED 169.2 421.3 385.2 421.3 169.2
MAX ULTIMATE 169.7 421.3 385.2 421.3 169.7
Characteristic Dead 93.3 252.3 217.0 252.3 93.3
Max Imposed 32.8 80.0 68.8 80.0 32.8
Min Imposed -3.3 39.9 34.4 39.9 -3.3

245

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:245 17/07/2006 17:15:18

 TCC41 Continuous Beams/ ACTIONS!

Project Spreadsheets to EC2 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made by Date Page
Location Worked Examples: Main beam Grids C to J rmw 03-Jul-06 256
246
CONTINUOUS BEAM ANALYSIS & DESIGN to EN 1992-1 : 2004 Checked Revision Job No
Originated from TCC41.xls v3.0 on CD © 2000-2006 TCC chg - FB625
BENDING MOMENT DIAGRAMS (kNm)

300 250
250 200
200 150
150 100
100 50
50 0
0 -50
-50 -100
-100 -150
-150 -200
-200 -250

Elastic Moments Redistributed Envelope

SUPPORT No 1 2 3 4 5
Elastic M 40.9 246.9 178.5 246.9 40.9 ~ kNm/m
Redistributed M 40.9 197.5 178.5 197.5 40.9 ~ kNm/m
δ 1.000 0.800 1.000 0.800 1.000 ~ ~
Redistribution 20.0% 20.0%

SPAN No 1 2 3 4
Elastic M 169.8 108.9 108.9 169.8 ~ ~
Redistributed M 181.3 113.9 113.9 181.3 ~ ~
δ 1.068 1.046 1.046 1.068 ~ ~
SHEARS FORCE DIAGRAMS (kN)

300 250
200
200
150
100
100
50
0 0
-50
-100
-100
-150
-200
-200
-300 -250

Elastic Shears Redistributed Shears

SPAN No 1 2 3
Elastic V 165.8 230.6 204.4 188.2 188.2 204.4
Redistributed V 169.7 222.4 201.6 192.6 192.6 201.6

SPAN No 4
Elastic V 230.6 165.8 ~ ~ ~ ~
Redistributed V 222.4 169.7 ~ ~ ~ ~

COLUMN MOMENTS (kNm) 1 2 3 4 5

ALL SPANS Above 19.0 -8.3 8.3 -19.0
LOADED Below 19.0 -8.3 8.3 -19.0
ALT SPANS Above 20.4 -15.6 8.6 15.6 -20.4
LOADED Below 20.4 -15.6 8.6 15.6 -20.4

246

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:246 17/07/2006 17:15:25

 TCC41 Continuous Beams.xls

TCC41 Continuous Beams/ SPANS!

Project Spreadsheets to EC2 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made by Date Page
Location Worked Examples: Main beam Grids C to J rmw 03-Jul-06 247
257
CONTINUOUS BEAM ANALYSIS & DESIGN to EN 1992-1 : 2004 Checked Revision Job No
Originated from TCC41.xls v3.0 on CD © 2000-2006 TCC chg - FB625
.
SPAN 1 LEFT CENTRE RIGHT
ACTIONS M kNm 45.3 181.3 172.4

1.00 1.07 0.80
DESIGN d mm 416.0 399.5 417.0
As mm² 264 1099 1068
As2 mm²
TOP STEEL Layer 1 3 H 12 3 H 12 14 H 10

As prov mm² 339 As2 prov 339 As prov 1100

BTM STEEL Layer 1 5 H 10 3 H 25 3 H 10

As2 prov mm² 393 As prov 1473 As2 prov 236

DEFLECTION L/d 15.02 Allowed 24.52 ..
SHEAR VEd kN 161.5 LINK Ø 212.6
VRd,ct kN 52.7 8 75.6
VEd,max kN 409.0 NOMINAL 410.0
s req mm 305 382 221
LINKS H8 @ 300 for 600 H8 @ 300 H8 @ 200 for 1200
legs No 2 2 2
.
CHECKS % As ok ok ok
Cover ok ok ok
min S ok ok ok
max S ok ok ok
Links ok ok ok
Main bars ok ok ok
max V ok ok
Deflection ok

SPAN 2 LEFT CENTRE RIGHT

ACTIONS M kNm 175.5 113.9 150.3

0.86 1.05 1.00
DESIGN d mm 417.0 404.0 416.0
As mm² 1089 683 917
As2 mm²
TOP STEEL Layer 1 14 H 10 4 H 12 9 H 12

As prov mm² 1100 As2 prov 452 As prov 1018

BTM STEEL Layer 1 3 H 10 4 H 16 3 H 10

As2 prov mm² 236 As prov 804 As2 prov 236

DEFLECTION L/d 14.85 Allowed 31.12 ..
SHEAR VEd kN 191.8 LINK Ø 182.8
VRd,ct kN 75.6 8 73.6
VEd,max kN 410.0 NOMINAL 409.0
s req mm 249 382 263
LINKS H8 @ 225 for 900 H8 @ 300 H8 @ 250 for 750
legs No 2 2 2
.
CHECKS % As ok ok ok
Cover ok ok ok
min S ok ok ok
max S ok ok ok
Links ok ok ok
Main bars ok ok ok
max V ok ok
Deflection ok

247

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:247 17/07/2006 17:15:29

 TCC41 Continuous Beams/ SPANS!

Project Spreadsheets to EC2 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made by Date Page
Location Worked Examples: Main beam Grids C to J rmw 03-Jul-06 248
258
CONTINUOUS BEAM ANALYSIS & DESIGN to EN 1992-1 : 2004 Checked Revision Job No
Originated from TCC41.xls v3.0 on CD © 2000-2006 TCC chg - FB625

SPAN 3 LEFT CENTRE RIGHT

ACTIONS M kNm 150.3 113.9 175.5

1.00 1.05 0.86
DESIGN d mm 416.0 404.0 417.0
As mm² 917 683 1089
As2 mm²
TOP STEEL Layer 1 9 H 12 4 H 12 14 H 10

As prov mm² 1018 As2 prov 452 As prov 1100

BTM STEEL Layer 1 3 H 10 4 H 16 3 H 10

As2 prov mm² 236 As prov 804 As2 prov 236

DEFLECTION L/d 14.85 Allowed 31.12 ..
SHEAR VEd kN 182.8 LINK Ø V 191.8
VRd,ct kN 73.6 8 v 75.6
VEd,max kN 409.0 NOMINAL vc 410.0
s req mm 263 382 249
LINKS H8 @ 250 for 750 H8 @ 300 H8 @ 225 for 900
legs No 2 2 2
.
CHECKS % As ok ok ok
Cover ok ok ok
min S ok ok ok
max S ok ok ok
Links ok ok ok
Main bars ok ok ok
max V ok ok
Deflection ok

SPAN 4 LEFT CENTRE RIGHT

ACTIONS M kNm 172.4 181.3 45.3

0.80 1.07 1.00
DESIGN d mm 417.0 402.0 417.0
As mm² 1068 1092 263
As2 mm²
TOP STEEL Layer 1 14 H 10 3 H 12 4 H 10

As prov mm² 1100 As2 prov 339 As prov 314

BTM STEEL Layer 1 3 H 10 4 H 20 4 H 10

As2 prov mm² 236 As prov 1257 As2 prov 314

DEFLECTION L/d 14.93 Allowed 21.25 ..
SHEAR VEd kN 212.6 LINK Ø 161.5
VRd,ct kN 75.6 8 52.8
VEd,max kN 410.0 NOMINAL 410.0
s req mm 221 382 305
LINKS H8 @ 200 for 1200 H8 @ 300 H8 @ 300 for 600
legs No 2 2 2
.
CHECKS % As ok ok ok
Cover ok ok ok
min S ok ok ok
max S ok ok ok
Links ok ok ok
Main bars ok ok ok
max V ok ok
Deflection ok

248

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:248 17/07/2006 17:15:34


TCC41R Rigorous Continuous Beams.xls
This spreadsheet allows the estimation of deflections in
continuous beams according to BS EN 1992-1-1 and generally in
accordance with Concrete Society TR58, Deflections in concrete
beams and slabs [30].
Deflection is very dependant on whether and how much of an
element cracks under service loads. Eurocode 2 recognises that
members in bending exist in a state partway between uncracked
and fully cracked. This spreadsheet considers construction and
design pattern loading in assessing whether a section is cracked
or not (i.e. whether the flexural tensile strength of the concrete is
exceeded during these stages of the beam’s life). Once cracked,
it is assumed that a section remains cracked.
The spreadsheet is based on TCC41 but has an initial sheet
JOBDATA! to allow input of all the variables and performance
criteria required. Deflections are given as a range in a chart at the
bottom of ACTIONS!
They are shown as a range due to potential pattern loading.
In SPANS!, the worst case is compared with the specified
serviceability criteria.
It should be noted that the number of assumptions and
uncertainties in the material and design criteria and construction
process mean that deflection calculations carried out in this
manner can be inaccurate (and usually conservative) compared
with actual measured deflections. For instance, a slab’s deflection
is very dependent upon whether the slab has cracked in bending
during construction or not. The calculated deflections might be
regarded as being akin to a 95% confidence limit that they will
not be exceeded in service.
The spreadsheet analyses and designs up to six spans of
continuous beams using sub-frame analysis. There is user input
on each of the first four sheets and choice of reinforcement for
each span is implicit. Input of spans and loads is in MAIN!. User
input is required for bar sizes used in SPANS!
JOBDATA!
This sheet consists of the main inputs of material, loading,
construction and serviceability criteria pertaining to the
calculation of deflection to EN 1992-1-1. Users are expected to
use their knowledge of the project and judgement in completing
this sheet. For creep reference is made to Eurocode 2. Reference
may be made to the ‘How to Design’ leaflet (due to be published
by the Concrete Centre during 2006) on calculating deflections
for guidance on values to be used. The default values given in this
sheet are not unusual.
MAIN!
Input is identical to TCC41.
EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:249
TCC41R Rigorous Continuous Beams.xls
ACTIONS!
This sheet shows bending moment and shear force diagrams
from the analysis undertaken in Analysis! The user is required to
input the desired amount of redistribution to the initial moments
in line 21. Cell L14 allows three types of distribution according
to the user’s preferences (see Table 1, page 14) in General Notes.
Requesting redistribution at a cantilever produces a warning
message in the remarks column.
The chart at the bottom of the page shows calculated deflections
at construction of partitions, and ranges for longer term
deflections due to patterns of permanent and imposed loading.
The worst case is taken in subsequent checks and this might be
viewed as being unduly conservative.
SPANS!
In SPANS! the user is required to choose top, bottom and link
reinforcement for each span. The amounts of bending and shear
reinforcement required and checks are derived from detailed
calculations in Bar!
Unwanted cells are ‘greyed-out’.
EC2 requires that all spans should be loaded with both γGk,sup
and γGk,inf , γGk,sup is used initially, and for γGk,inf the ‘Run -γGk,inf -
Loadcase’ button must be activated. A red warning message will
appear if this has not been done, or if any relevant input data are
subsequently changed. Using γGk,inf (=1.0) leads to higher hogging
moments in spans.
Unless overwritten, reinforcement diameter specified for a
support carries through both sides of the support, i.e. the
diameter specified for the right hand support of a span carries
over to the left hand support of the next span. It may be possible
to obtain different numbers of bars each side of the support due to
differences in depth or to comply with the minimum percentage
of span steel; practicality may dictate that the maximum number
of bars at each support should be used.
The top steel in the centre of spans is determined by adding
together the steel required for hogging at 1/4 span and the
appropriate additional tensile force due to shear ∆FEd (see CI
9.2.1.3). It is assumed that 100% hogging steel at supports will
be curtailed at 0.25 span or max 50%at 0,2 span and 50% at
0.3 span.
WEIGHT!
Weight! gives an estimate of the total amount of reinforcement
required in the beam and per cubic metre.
249
17/07/2006 17:15:39
 Simplified curtailment rules, similar to those defined in BS 8110,
are used to determine lengths of bars. The figures should be
treated as approximate estimates only as they cannot deal with
the effects of designers’ and detailers’ preferences, rationalisation
etc.
It should be noted that it is possible to switch on the adjacent
spans loaded arrangement by changing ‘b’ to ‘a’ in cell D6. BSEN
1992-1-1 recommends using the adjacent and alternate load
arrangements. However to the UK National Annex only the all
spans and alternate load arrangements need to be considered.

Uls! Notes!
This sheet details the moment distribution analysis carried out This sheet gives disclaimers and revision history.
at the ultimate limit state but is not necessarily intended for
printing out other than for checking purposes.

Sls!
This sheet details the analysis carried out at the serviceability
limit state at 1/20th points along each span. The results are used
in Def!. This sheet is not necessarily intended for printing out
other than for checking purposes.

Bar!
This sheet shows design calculations, complete with references to
EN 1992-1-1. It is not necessarily intended for printing out other
than for checking purposes. In many instances, service stress, σs,
has been set to 1.0 or 0.0001 N/mm2 to avoid problems with
division by zero.

Def!
This sheet calculates deflections at 1/20th points for each span
and for each load condition. For each point and loading stage it
considers moment, As, As’, d, d2 , uncracked neutral axis depth
- x, uncracked inertia - I, cracked neutral axis depth - x, cracked
inertia – I, uncracked moment capacity – Mcr, distribution factor
- ε, z, final x, concrete stresses – σc, curvature -1/r, slope and
curvature to calculate deflection. The sheet is rather large and is
not necessarily intended for printing out other than for checking
purposes.

Graf!
This sheet comprises data for graphs used on other sheets,
particularly in ACTIONS! It is not necessarily intended for printing
out other than for checking purposes.

Refs!
This sheet comprises the values for nationally determined
parameters that have been used in the spread-sheet. These data
reflect the values given in draft UK National Annexes for EN 1990
and EN 1992. Designers should ensure that these data are current
when the spreadsheet is used. When using TCC31R for permanent
design, designers are strongly advised to include a copy of this
sheet with any design calculations.

250

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:250 17/07/2006 17:15:41

 TCC41R Rigorous Continuous Beams.xls

TCC41R Rigorous Continuous Beams/ JOBDATA!

Project Spreadsheets to EC2 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made by Date Page
Location Worked Examples: Main beam Grids C to J rmw 03-Jul-06 251
261
CONTINUOUS BEAM ANALYSIS & DESIGN to EN 1992-1 : 2004 Checked Revision Job No
Originated from TCC41R.xls v 3.0 on CD © 2002-2006 BCA for RCC chg - FB625

MATERIALS COVERS (to links)

fck 35 N/mm² dg 20 mm Top cover 25 mm
fyk 500 N/mm² γs 1.15 Btm cover 25 mm
fywk 500 N/mm² γc 1.50 Side cover 25 mm
Steel class B
SERVICEABILITY CRITERIA Maximum permanent  = L / 250 7.4.1(5)

Maximum imposed  = L / 500

Degree of restraint 60% Max  affecting partitions = L / 500 * 7.4.1(6)
(50% = nominal, 100% = severe) Maximum precamber = 50% of permanent  7.4.1(5)

Design Crack width, Wk = 0.4 mm top or 0.3 mm btm Table 7.1

CREEP COEFFICIENTS (to Annex A) Curing time 3 days

RH 80 % relative humidity fcm = 43 N/mm² Table 3.1

Cement N Type (S, N, R or RS) Ecm = 35.78 kN/mm² & Annex A

AMBIENT TEMPERATURES ºC from 0 to 7 days from 7 to 60 days from 60 days on

18 18 18

LOADING SEQUENCE (loads rationalised to kN/m)

Span 1 Span 2 Span 3 Span 4 Span 5 Span 6 At age
kN/m kN/m kN/m kN/m kN/m kN/m Days
Self weight 17.34 17.34 17.34 17.34 0.00 0.00 7
Partitions/walls 5.00 5.00 5.00 5.00 5.00 5.00 28
Other dead loads 15.66 16.86 16.86 15.66 #DIV/0! #DIV/0! 60
Permanent imposed 3.00 3.00 3.00 3.00 #DIV/0! #DIV/0! 60
Variable load 7.00 7.00 7.00 7.00 #DIV/0! #DIV/0! ∞
Total 48.00 49.20 49.20 48.00 #DIV/0! #DIV/0!
Construction loading 14
COMPOSITE E and Ø VALUES - Span 1
To 70 years To 70 years To 28 days
Et Et Et
0 0  (t,t0)
kN/mm² kN/mm² kN/mm²
Self weight 2.11 11.49 2.11 11.49 0.61 22.22
Partitions/walls 1.63 13.62 1.63 13.62 SW + partitions
Other dead loads 1.41 14.87 1.41 14.87
Permanent imposed 1.63 13.62 1.63 13.62
Variable load 0 37.77 from 14 to 28 days
Composite 1.75 13.02 1.49 14.35 0.53 23.42
Quasi-permanent Total load Construction load

251

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:251 17/07/2006 17:15:42

 TCC41R Rigorous Continuous Beams/ MAIN!

Project Spreadsheets to EC2 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made by Date Page
Location Worked Examples: Main beam Grids C to J rmw 03-Jul-06 252
262
CONTINUOUS BEAM ANALYSIS & DESIGN to EN 1992-1 : 2004 Checked Revision Job No
Originated from TCC41R.xls v 3.0 on CD © 2002-2006 BCA for RCC chg - FB625

Bay width 5000 mm STATUS OK Office Useage

SPANS L (m) h (mm) bw (mm) hf (mm) Type beff (mm) LOADING PATTERN
SPAN 1 6.000 450 300 125 T 2150 min max
SPAN 2 6.000 450 300 125 T 1700 DEAD 1.25 1.25
SPAN 3 6.000 450 300 125 T 1700 IMPOSED 1.50
SPAN 4 6.000 450 300 125 T 2150 REBAR LAYERING
SPAN 5 Support steel
SPAN 6 in alt layer ? N

SUPPORTS ABOVE (m) H (mm) B (mm) End Cond BELOW (m) H (mm) B (mm) End Cond
Support 1 3.750 250 250 F 3.750 250 250 F
Support 2 3.750 250 250 F 3.750 250 250 F
Support 3 3.750 250 250 F 3.750 250 250 F
Support 4 3.750 250 250 F 3.750 250 250 F
Support 5 3.750 250 250 F 3.750 250 250 F
Support 6
Support 7

LOADING DIAGRAM

LOADING UDLs (kN/m²) PLs (kN) Position (m)

Dead Imposed Position Loaded Dead Imposed Position Loaded
Span 1 Load Load from left Length Span 4 Load Load from left Length
UDL 33.0 15.0 ~~~~~ ~~~~~ UDL 33.0 15.0 ~~~~~ ~~~~~
PL 1 ~~~~~ PL 1 ~~~~~
PL 2 ~~~~~ PL 2 ~~~~~
Part UDL Part UDL
Construction 12.14 ~~~~~ ~~~~~ ~~~~~ Constr'n 12.14 ~~~~~ ~~~~~ ~~~~~
Span 2 Span 5
UDL 34.2 15.0 ~~~~~ ~~~~~ UDL ~~~~~ ~~~~~
PL 1 ~~~~~ PL 1 ~~~~~
PL 2 ~~~~~ PL 2 ~~~~~
Part UDL Part UDL
Construction 12.14 ~~~~~ ~~~~~ ~~~~~ ~~~~~ ~~~~~ ~~~~~
Span 3 Span 6
UDL 34.2 15.0 ~~~~~ ~~~~~ UDL ~~~~~ ~~~~~
PL 1 ~~~~~ PL 1 ~~~~~
PL 2 ~~~~~ PL 2 ~~~~~
Part UDL Part UDL
Construction 12.14 ~~~~~ ~~~~~ ~~~~~ ~~~~~ ~~~~~ ~~~~~

REACTIONS (kN)
SUPPORT 1 2 3 4 5
ALL SPANS LOADED 165.4 417.7 380.7 417.7 165.4
ODD SPANS LOADED 166.1 350.3 312.5 353.1 95.0
EVEN SPANS LOADED 95.0 353.1 312.5 350.3 166.1
MAX ULTIMATE 166.1 417.7 380.7 417.7 166.1
Characteristic Dead 81.5 223.6 196.3 223.6 81.5
Max characteristic Imposed 42.9 92.3 90.4 92.3 42.9
Min characteristic Imposed -4.5 47.4 44.9 47.4 -4.5

252

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:252 17/07/2006 17:15:50

 TCC41R Rigorous Continuous Beams.xls

TCC41R Rigorous Continuous Beams/ ACTIONS!

Project Spreadsheets to EC2 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made by Date Page
Location Worked Examples: Main beam Grids C to J rmw 03-Jul-06 253
263
CONTINUOUS BEAM ANALYSIS & DESIGN to EN 1992-1 : 2004 Checked Revision Job No
Originated from TCC41R.xls v 3.0 on CD © 2002-2006 BCA for RCC chg - FB625
BENDING MOMENT DIAGRAMS (kNm) Elastic Redistributed

300 300

200 200

100 100

0 0

-100 -100

-200 -200

SUPPORT No 1 2 3 4 5
Elastic M 41.5 239.4 177.8 239.4 41.5
Redistributed M 41.5 191.5 160.0 191.5 41.5
δ 1.000 0.800 0.900 0.800 1.000 ~ ~
Redistribution 20.0% 10.0% 20.0%

SPAN No 1 2 3 4
Elastic M 171.0 117.4 117.4 171.0
Redistributed M 177.5 117.9 117.9 177.5
δ 1.038 1.003 1.003 1.038 HOGS HOGS

SHEARS FORCE DIAGRAMS (kN) Elastic Redistributed

300 300

200 200

100 100

0 0

-100 -100

-200 -200

-300 -300

SPAN No 1 2 3
Elastic V 164.6 224.8 204.5 188.0 188.0 204.5
Redistributed V 166.1 216.8 200.9 190.4 190.4 200.9
SPAN No 4
Elastic V 224.8 164.6
Redistributed V 216.8 166.1

COLUMN MOMENTS (kNm) 1 2 3 4 5

ALL SPANS Above 18.6 -4.1 4.1 -18.6

LOADED Below 18.6 -4.1 4.1 -18.6
ODD SPANS Above 20.8 -9.3 6.2 -2.6 -9.9
LOADED Below 20.8 -9.3 6.2 -2.6 -9.9
EVEN SPANS Above 9.9 2.6 -6.2 9.3 -20.8
LOADED Below 9.9 2.6 -6.2 9.3 -20.8

DEFLECTIONS (mm) Precamber not included

5.0

0.0

-5.0

-10.0

-15.0

SPAN No 1 2 3 4
At striking 3.1 0.7 0.7 3.1 mm
Quasi permanent 8.0 3.4 3.4 8.0 #DIV/0! #DIV/0! mm
Variable 2.2 1.4 1.4 2.2 #DIV/0! #DIV/0! mm

253

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:253 17/07/2006 17:15:54

 TCC41R Rigorous Continuous Beams/ SPANS!

Project Spreadsheets to EC2 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made by Date Page
Location Worked Examples: Main beam Grids C to J rmw 03-Jul-06 254
264
CONTINUOUS BEAM ANALYSIS & DESIGN to EN 1992-1 : 2004 Checked Revision Job No
Originated from TCC41R.xls v 3.0 on CD © 2002-2006 BCA for RCC chg - FB625
.
SPAN 1 LEFT CENTRE RIGHT
ACTIONS M kNm 44.4 177.5 172.8
d 1.00 1.04 0.80
DESIGN d mm 411.0 407.0 407.0
As mm² 261 1056 1082
As2 mm²
TOP STEEL Layer 1 3 B 12 3 B 12 4 B 20
Layer 2
As prov mm² 339 As2 prov 339 As prov 1257
BTM STEEL Layer 1 3 B 10 4 B 20 3 B 10
Layer 2
As2 prov mm² 236 As prov 1257 As2 prov 236
DEFLECTION Permanent = 8.04 < 24.00 Imposed = 2.18 < 12.00 Precamber (mm) =
mm Affecting partitions/walls = 4.91 < 12.00 ok Increase btm As by
SHEAR VEd kN 158.2 LINK Ø 208.9
VRd,ct kN 56.5 8 82.3
VEd,max kN 460.7 NOMINAL 456.2
s req mm 306 354 219
LINKS B8 @ 300 for 600 B8 @ 300 B8 @ 200 for 1200
legs No 2 2 2
.
CHECKS % As ok ok ok
Cover ok ok ok
min S ok ok ok
Links ok ok ok
Main bars ok ok ok
max V ok ok
Crack width mm ok 0.09 ok 0.29 ok 0.30

SPAN 2 LEFT CENTRE RIGHT

ACTIONS M kNm 175.1 117.9 140.4
d 0.83 1.00 0.90
DESIGN d mm 407.0 407.0 407.0
As mm² 1098 701 860
As2 mm²
TOP STEEL Layer 1 4 B 20 4 B 12 3 B 20
Layer 2
As prov mm² 1257 As2 prov 452 As prov 942
BTM STEEL Layer 1 3 B 10 3 B 20 3 B 10
Layer 2
As2 prov mm² 236 As prov 942 As2 prov 236
DEFLECTION Permanent = 3.44 < 24.00 Imposed = 1.43 < 12.00 Precamber (mm) =
mm Affecting partitions/walls = 2.78 < 12.00 ok Increase btm As by
SHEAR VEd kN 192.7 LINK Ø 182.2
VRd,ct kN 82.3 8 74.8
VEd,max kN 456.2 NOMINAL 456.2
s req mm 241 354 257
LINKS B8 @ 225 for 900 B8 @ 300 B8 @ 250 for 750
legs No 2 2 2
.
CHECKS % As ok ok ok
Cover ok ok ok
min S ok ok ok
Links ok ok ok
Main bars ok ok ok
max V ok ok
Crack width mm ok 0.29 ok 0.21 ok 0.31

254

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:254 17/07/2006 17:16:00

 TCC41R Rigorous Continuous Beams.xls

TCC41R Rigorous Continuous Beams/ SPANS!

Project Spreadsheets to EC2 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made by Date Page
Location Worked Examples: Main beam Grids C to J rmw 03-Jul-06 255
265
CONTINUOUS BEAM ANALYSIS & DESIGN to EN 1992-1 : 2004 Checked Revision Job No
Originated from TCC41R.xls v 3.0 on CD © 2002-2006 BCA for RCC chg - FB625

SPAN 3 LEFT CENTRE RIGHT

ACTIONS M kNm 140.4 117.9 175.1
d 0.90 1.00 0.83
DESIGN d mm 407.0 407.0 407.0
As mm² 860 701 1098
As2 mm²
TOP STEEL Layer 1 3 B 20 4 B 12 4 B 20
Layer 2
As prov mm² 942 As2 prov 452 As prov 1257
BTM STEEL Layer 1 3 B 10 3 B 20 3 B 10
Layer 2
As2 prov mm² 236 As prov 942 As2 prov 236
DEFLECTION Permanent = 3.43 < 24.00 Imposed = 1.43 < 12.00 Precamber (mm) =
mm Affecting partitions/walls = 2.77 < 12.00 ok Increase btm As by
SHEAR VEd kN 182.2 LINK Ø 192.7
VRd,ct kN 74.8 8 82.3
VEd,max kN 456.2 NOMINAL 456.2
s req mm 257 354 241
LINKS B8 @ 250 for 750 B8 @ 300 B8 @ 225 for 900
legs No 2 2 2
.
CHECKS % As ok ok ok
Cover ok ok ok
min S ok ok ok
Links ok ok ok
Main bars ok ok ok
max V ok ok
Crack width mm ok 0.31 ok 0.21 ok 0.29

SPAN 4 LEFT CENTRE RIGHT

ACTIONS M kNm 172.8 177.5 44.4
d 0.80 1.04 1.00
DESIGN d mm 407.0 407.0 411.0
As mm² 1082 1056 261
As2 mm²
TOP STEEL Layer 1 4 B 20 3 B 12 3 B 12
Layer 2
As prov mm² 1257 As2 prov 339 As prov 339
BTM STEEL Layer 1 3 B 10 4 B 20 3 B 10
Layer 2
As2 prov mm² 236 As prov 1257 As2 prov 236
DEFLECTION Permanent = 8.04 < 24.00 Imposed = 2.18 < 12.00 Precamber (mm) =
mm Affecting partitions/walls = 4.90 < 12.00 ok Increase btm As by
SHEAR VEd kN 208.9 LINK Ø 158.2
VRd,ct kN 82.3 8 56.5
VEd,max kN 456.2 NOMINAL 460.7
s req mm 219 354 306
LINKS B8 @ 200 for 1200 B8 @ 300 B8 @ 300 for 600
legs No 2 2 2
.
CHECKS % As ok ok ok
Cover ok ok ok
min S ok ok ok
Links ok ok ok
Main bars ok ok ok
max V ok ok
Crack width mm ok 0.30 ok 0.29 ok 0.09

255

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:255 17/07/2006 17:16:05

 TCC42 Post-tensioned Analysis & Design.xls (Beta)
This spreadsheet designs post-tensioned beam and one-way
spanning slab elements in accordance with BS EN 1992-1:2004.
In essence the spreadsheet checks a number of parameters:-
■ stresses at transfer,
■ stresses in service,
■ moments of resistance at ULS,
■ shear,
■ vibration,
■ deflection,
■ neutral axis depth, and
■ reinforcement service stress
The spreadsheet is set out in several sheets.
■ JOBDATA! Defines load cases, various options and material
properties.
■ LOADS! Is where loadings, spans and section data are
entered.
■ CONTROL! Is where tendons and bonded reinforcement are
adjusted to find a solution.
■ RESULTS! Summarises the design, analysis, checks and
outputs from the rest of the spreadsheet.
■ TYPICALC! Shows a typical longhand calculation for the first
span.
■ DETAILS! Shows the workings for the moment distribution
for the various load cases, profiles, prestress losses and checks
in some detail.
■ Def! Shows workings for deflection at 1/20 points along each
span.
■ Gra! Provides the data for the graphs, and values generated
are used for checking.
■ Refs! Is where nationally determined parameters are set.
Users are referred to Concrete Society TR43 Post-tensioned
concrete floors – Design Handbook[33] for further details of
methods and values used.
A maximum of three spans may be considered. Cantilevers are
not available. Shortening is calculated in the losses section, but is
not used to modify column moments. The effects of restraint to
both columns and prestress in the member must be considered.
The spreadsheet considers one direction at a time only.
The nub of this spreadsheet is CONTROL! page. The source
of any failures or missing information (e.g. no tendons or no
tendon height specified) will become apparent on CONTROL!
Users may wish to create a split window in this part of the
spreadsheet (Window/ Split) to obtain a more comprehensive
view. CONTROL! Also shows the results of the parameter checks
from RESULTS!
256
EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:256
JOBDATA!
The first sheet includes all the general and material input data
used in the subsequent sheets. Load combinations and load
factors are defined. The input under Options should be self-
explanatory. Some of the input is controlled via the combi-boxes
in the right margin. The choices have implications on the design
as shown below.
■ Stressing ends determines where prestressing losses occur.
■ Prestressing system – Specifying unbonded or bonded
changes the prestress loss calculations. Prestress losses tend
to be higher with bonded tendons as wobble factors and
coefficients of friction are higher but using several strands in
a single duct can lead to overall economy, especially in more
heavily loaded beams. Bonded systems may require less
conventional reinforcement.
■ The exposure class to Eurocode 2 determines both the
permissible crack width and the allowable flexural tensile
stresses in prestressed beams (and slabs).
■ The Slab or Beam pull-down varies shear requirements and
determines whether nominal top bonded reinforcement is
included in the spans or not. Nominal top steel is included
in mid-span of beams. If slabs are specified, the user may
choose to use nominal top steel to overcome hogging
moments or reduce deflection in the spans. Invoking the
nominal bonded reinforcement in mid-span should overcome
most problems with hogging in say, dissimilar spans of slabs.
■ Beams requires a second input; slab type (type of slab
supported by the beam) alters parameters used in checking
vibration.
■ Normal curtailment rules for conventional reinforcement
are not necessarily satisfactory for post-tensioned slabs and
beams. Nonetheless the spreadsheet assumes that curtailment
occurs at 0.3 x span.
With regard to concrete, the usual minimum cylinder strength
used in prestressing is 32 MPa, although 40 MPa would be more
usual. Ambient temperatures during curing may be taken as 15°C
for a UK summer, but otherwise may be dependent upon curing/
insulation regimes. Typically, long-term Relative Humidity may
be taken as 55% indoors, or 80% outdoors.
Under loading sequence, the ages of transfer and additional
loading are entered. These values are used to determine relevant
creep and shrinkage factors. These factors are case specific and
have been derived from Annex B of EC2.
Details of strand used in the UK are given at the bottom of the
sheet. Users should ensure that their chosen strand is readily
available. TR43 Post-tensioned concrete floors – design handbook
gives typical values for µ (coefficient of friction), K (wobble
factors), Rel% (relaxation) and draw-in (mm).
17/07/2006 17:16:10
 TCC42 Post-tensioned Analysis & Design.xls (Beta)
LOADS!
The top part of this page is for input of data for the sub-frame
analysis, i.e. dimensions and loads.
Input should be fairly self explanatory. It should be noted that
H is in the plane of the screen and b, bw etc. are at right angles
to the plane of the screen. Several warnings are given under
‘Operating Instructions’ and with conditional formatting should
data be incorrect.
Supports may be specified as being knife-edge by inputting K in
column D: remote ends of supporting columns may be either F
for fixed, or P for pinned. The line can be left blank. A support
width (h below) can be used in conjunction with a ‘K’ support so
that design moments at the face of support are used.
Data under ‘Normal Direction’ are used for the vibration checks. The
number of bays affects possible modes of vibration, which is checked in
accordance with the original Concrete Society TR43 [14] . The vibration
response factors calculated are accordance with Concrete Society
guidelines. Vibration should not be a problem in post-tensioned
slabs and beams. Normally, vibration response factors of 12 are
used for very busy offices, 8 for normal offices, or 4 for high
specification offices or laboratories where vibration is critical.
Designers should be aware that the 2005 version of Concrete
Society TR43 Appendix G gives revised recommendations on
vibration. (At the time of releasing the Beta 3 version, it was
considered that these recommendations were unsuited to
spreadsheet Further guidance is being prepared by The Concrete
Centre). If vibration is considered to be critical more specialist
software and experience should be sought and used.
Loads specified should be characteristic and for the whole bay
width (not expressed as kN/m2 – unless a 1 m bay width is being
analysed). Under ‘dead at transfer’, the self-weight should be
input together with any other loads present at transfer. However,
designers should consider the load history of the slab to ensure
worst cases are checked, e.g. temporary loads while casting
floors above. Bay widths in the normal direction do not affect the
loading unless, of course, the user chooses to introduce a suitable
relationship (in the loads input).
The current configuration being designed is shown in a chart. This
gives a scale representation of the spans, supports, loads and an
idealised cross section of each member.
At the bottom of the page, charts also show representations of
the tendon profiles and equivalent loads used in the analysis.
For the tendons, a reversed parabolic profile is used but
minimum lengths of straight tendon are used at the supports as
recommended by Khan(16). Service equivalent loads are shown:
those at transfer may be viewed at Gra! C368: N369.
CONTROL!
This page is the nub of the spreadsheet: it has a number of key
inputs and outputs. These include inputs of
EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:257
■ Pi / Pj (initial force/ jacking force),
■ Pf / Pj (final force/ jacking force),
■ number and height of tendons, and
■ amounts of conventional reinforcement.
There are also two charts. The ‘efficiency’ chart gives the user
an idea of how hard the section is working or how far it is out
or what is critical to the design. The second chart, ultimate limit
state moment envelope and moments of resistance (capacity),
should be used in conjunction with choosing amounts of bonded
reinforcement.
With regard to Tendons, the spreadsheet automatically
calculates a recommended number of tendons for each span
using an algorithm. The algorithm uses either the maximum
of the median stress levels, or the maximum permitted. The
spreadsheet calculates the minimum number of strands required
so that permissible concrete tensions or compressions are not
exceeded at either the initial or final stages. The numbers of
tendons are then shown as recommended values, and the user
should override them as required. Once the number of tendons
for each span has been fixed, the program attempts to find an
optimum single level of initial prestress for all strands (this often
appears to be the maximum permissible). If the minimum force
required generates excessive stresses, the section is deemed to
have failed.
Tendons are assumed to be level through supports and follow a
parabolic profile between. The points of inflection are taken to be
at 1/10 of the clear span points.
Besides number of tendons, the main user control is to adjust the
tendon heights. The recommended tendon heights given in row
16 should normally be used. Short and long-term prestress losses
are initially assumed by the spreadsheet and then actual losses
are calculated, based on the remaining data. This process results
in calculated and assumed losses being different. To equalise (or
balance) these, the ‘Balance Losses’ button needs to be clicked
(in some cases more than once).
Details of bonded rebar should then be entered under
‘REINFORCEMENT’ (this may then require the ‘Balance Losses’
button to be clicked again). If the message in cell N46 reads
“no links required’, links may be omitted by entering zero in cell
D46.
The checks carried out are listed below.
■ Tendons (a)
■ Stresses at transfer (b)
■ Stresses in service (c)
■ ULS MOR (d)
■ Shear (e)
■ Vibration (f)
■ Deflection (g)
■ Neutral axis depth
■ Rebar stress
257
17/07/2006 17:16:12
 In the spreadsheet, those that are unsatisfactory are highlighted
and directions are given for further information. These checks are
visualised in the ‘efficiency’ chart.
A second chart shows the ultimate limit state moment envelope
and the moments of resistance of the section (capacity). It is
intended that it is used in conjunction with choosing amounts of
bonded reinforcement.
RESULTS!
This page shows stresses at transfer and in service in both tabular
and chart form. It should be noted that, in keeping with current
practice, moments are considered at the face of columns. Thus
peak moments are not necessarily at column centrelines and
moments might be different each side of an internal column.
The convention used in the stress charts is:
■ Red squares – tension, blue circles – compression
■ Solid markers – bottom, hollow markers – top
■ Dotted lines – permissible stresses
Below the stress diagrams, there are details of shear envelopes,
vibration and deflection together with support reactions and
column moments.
TYPICALC!
■ equivalent loads,
■ ULS moments and capacities,
■ shear envelopes,
■ deflections,
■ stresses at transfer and
■ stresses in service
Each chart is plotted at 1/20 points along each span. Many values
within Gra! are used and checked for being minima or maxima
for the various criteria. For instance it may be here that problems
with hogging moments are found.
Refs!
This sheet comprises Nationally Determined Parameters (NDP’s)
contained within in the UK’s National Annexes to EN1990 (basis
of design) and to BS EN 1992-1-1. This page should be reviewed
each time the spreadsheet is used to ensure the values remain
valid for the UK or are valid for the country where the works are
to be carried out or changed to suit. It is suggested that this page
is printed out to accompany submissions of calculations that
include this spreadsheet. It should be noted that it is possible
to switch on the adjacent spans loaded by changing ‘b’ to ‘a’ in
cell D11. BS EN 1992-1-1 recommends using the adjacent and
alternate load arrangement. However to the UK National Annex,
only the all spans and alternate load arrangements need to be
considered.

This sheet is intended to illustrate typical calculations for a

particular point in a span in order to show how all the criteria Notes!
are satisfied. The sheet illustrates the transfer and service stress
checks and the calculation of Moment of Resistance carried out This sheet gives disclaimers and revision history.
in tabular form in Gra! The point chosen is at 0.3L in the first span
and is highlighted in Gra!

DETAILS!
Over nine pages, DETAILS! shows detailed calculations regarding
section properties, distribution factors, moment distribution
used for the sub-frame analysis, profiling constants, pre-stressing
losses, balanced loads, ULS moment and shear checks, and finally
vibration.

Def!
The deflection sheet gives details of calculations dealing with
defections.

Gra!
Graf! provides the data for the charts within CONTROL! and
RESULTS! That show:
■ the configuration and loads,
■ tendon profile,

258

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:258 17/07/2006 17:16:14

 TCC42 Post-tensioned Analysis & Design.xls (Beta)

TCC42 Post-tensioned Analysis & Design/ JOBDATA!

Project Spreadsheets to EC2 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made by Date Page
Location Level 2 - Beam on Grid 7 rmw 03-Jul-2006 259
269
POST-TENSIONED ANALYSIS & DESIGN to BS EN 1992-1:2004 Checked Revision Job No
Originated from TCC42.xls v6 on CD © 2005 TCC chg - FB625

POST-TENSIONED ANALYSIS & DESIGN to BS EN 1992-1:2004 - GENERAL DATA

LOAD COMBINATIONS
TRANSFER SLS 1 Transfer prestress + dead load at transfer
SLS 2 Final prestress + dead + full imposed load on all spans NOTES
RARE SLS 3 Final prestress + dead + full imposed load on odd spans INPUT IS UNDERLINED.
SLS 4 Final prestress + dead + full imposed load on even spans FRAMES ARE ASSUMED TO BE
SLS 5 Final prestress + dead + frequent imposed load on all spans BRACED
FREQUENT SLS 6 Final prestress + dead + frequent imposed load on odd spans
SLS 7 Final prestress + dead + frequent imposed load on even spans USAGE
SLS 8 Final prestress + dead + QP imposed load on all spans Office
QUASI-
SLS 9 Final prestress + dead + QP imposed load on odd spans
PERMANENT
SLS 10 Final prestress + dead + QP imposed load on even spans
ULS 1 Final prestress + factored dead and imposed load on all spans VIBRATION
ULTIMATE ULS 2 Final prestress + factored dead + factored imposed load on odd spans Limiting reponse factor
ULS 3 Final prestress + factored dead + factored imposed load on even spans R=8

ULS LOADING PATTERN min max DEFLECTION

Dead 1.25 1.25 Limit QP deflection to L/ 250
Imposed 0 1.50 BS EN 1990: (6.10b) Limit after construction  to L/ 500

OPTIONS Exposure class is XC2, XC3, XC4 Prestress system is unbonded and stressed from left end
Beam supporting solid slab Wmax, mm = 0.3
Jacking force /fpk = 0.8 Top bonded rebar in spans? Yes (Helps to reduce deflections - recommended)
Slab type S (S)olid, (R)ibbed or (W)affle, supported by beam Damping, ζ (1% to 4½%) 1.5%

MATERIALS CONCRETE fck = 40 Ecm = 35.22 c,max = 18.00 t,max = 5.09 Design hypothetical
tensile stresses to limit
At transfer, 4 days, fck(i) = 26.54 Ecm(i) = 31.91 c,max(i) = 11.94 t,max (i) = 3.66
cracking
Cement type R Curing time (days) = 3
c = 1.50
Ave ambient during curing = 18ºC Longterm R/H % 55 .

STRAND fpk = 1860 Aps, mm² = 100 µ = 0.060 K = 0.0050

Eps = 195 Rel % = 2.5 , draw in = 6 Depth to strand centre = 41

REBAR fyk = 500 Grade A COVERS Top Bottom Sides

m = 1.15 to links 25 25 25

LOADING SEQUENCE Loading sequence for  assessment 2 = 0.3 Rare combination

Load @ Age fctm fctm,fl
Ecm(t) Load
Ecm(t)
kN/m days MPa MPa Creep GPa kN/m² Creep GPa
Dead at transfer 14.63 4 2.52 2.71 2.12 11.31 14.63 2.12 11.31
Applied dead 42.00 30 3.51 3.77 1.65 13.30 42.00 1.65 13.30
Quasi-permanent imposed 7.50 -=- 25.00
COMBINED 64.13 - 1.76 12.78 81.63 1.73 12.89

NOTES on MATERIALS
BRITISH LOW RELAXATION STRAND
Type Dia Area fpk Weight RELAXATION at 0.7fpk
Standard 15.2 139 1670 1.090 Ambient ºC 20 40 60 80 100
12.5 93 1770 0.730 Relaxation 1.8 3.5 5.1 7.5 10.7
Super 15.7 150 1770 1.180
12.9 100 1860 0.785
Compact 15.2 165 1820 1.295
12.7 112 1860 0.890

259

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:259 17/07/2006 17:16:16

 TCC42 Post-tensioned Analysis & Design/ LOADS!

Project Spreadsheets to EC2 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made by Date Page
Location Level 2 - Beam on Grid 7 rmw 03-Jul-2006 260
270
POST-TENSIONED ANALYSIS & DESIGN to BS EN 1992-1:2004 Checked Revision Job No
Originated from TCC42.xls v6 on CD © 2005 TCC chg - FB625
Dimensions and Loads
NORMAL DIRECTION
SPANS Lm H mm bw mm hf mm Section beff mm No Bays Bay width m
Span 1 12.000 525 1800 200 T 3000 5 6.000
Span 2 12.500 525 1800 200 T 3000 5 6.000
Span 3

SUPPORTS Above m H mm b mm End cond Below m H mm b mm End cond

Support 1 4.000 300 600 F
Support 2 4.000 300 600 F
Support 3 K
Support 4

CONFIGURATION SLAB supporting Solid Slab, Exposure class XC2, XC3, XC4, Wk = 0.3 mm, fck = 40, Stressed from Both Ends

LOADING UDLs~kN/m (char), PLs~kN (char), Position~m

Dead at Applied Imposed Position Loaded Dead at Applied Imposed Position Loaded
SPAN 1 transfer Dead Load from left Length SPAN 3 transfer Dead Load from left Length
UDL 14.63 42.00 25.00 ~~~~~ ~~~~~ UDL ~~~~~ ~~~~~
PL 1 ~~~~~ PL 1 ~~~~~
PL 2 ~~~~~ PL 2 ~~~~~
Part UDL Part UDL
SPAN 2
UDL 14.63 42.00 25.00 ~~~~~ ~~~~~
PL 1 ~~~~~
PL 2 ~~~~~ GLOBAL STATUS
Part UDL VALID DESIGN

TENDON PROFILE (heights to strand centre: see heights specified under TENDONS below)

484
295 295

41 43

EQUIVALENT LOADS in service

400 301 kN/m 266 kN/m

300 222 kN/m
169 kN/m
200
100 0 kN/m
-57 kN/m -50 kN/m
0
-100
-200

260

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:260 17/07/2006 17:16:23

 TCC42 Post-tensioned Analysis & Design.xls

TCC42 Post-tensioned Analysis & Design/ CONTROL!

Project Spreadsheets to EC2 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made by Date Page
Location Level 2 - Beam on Grid 7 rmw 03-Jul-2006 261
271
POST-TENSIONED ANALYSIS & DESIGN to BS EN 1992-1:2004 Checked Revision Job No
Originated from TCC42.xls v6 on CD © 2005 TCC chg - FB625
Tendons & bonded reinforcement
(a) TENDONS Pj = 149 kN Pi/A = 2.18 MPa max
Supt 1 Span 1 Supt 2 Span 2 Supt 3 Span 3 Supt 4
Pi/Pj 93.3% 90.4% 100.0%
P30/Pj 90.9% 89.1% 100.0%
Pf/Pj 87.7% 84.9% 100.0%
No of strands
Recommended  10  10  10  13  13  13 0 0 0
Use 18 18 18 18 18 18 0 0
Recommend'd height 295 41 484 41 295 0
Height mm 295 41 484 484 41 295 295 0
Length Straight mm 150 150 150 0 0 0
x to max Sag mm 5272 7047 0
Pi kN 2581 2545 2498 2498 2453 2421 0 0 0
Balance Load kN 252.5 342.8 315.2 228.5 0.0 0.0
Pf kN 2431 2377 2349 2350 2282 2274 #DIV/0! #DIV/0! #DIV/0!
Balance Load kN 233.0 316.4 292.2 211.9 0.0 0.0

CHECKS 'EFFICIENCY' a 44%

Tendons (a) OK 51%
Stresses at transfer (b) OK b(T) 81%
Stresses in service (c) OK
37%
ULS MOR (d) OK
Shear (e) OK
c(T) 63%
Vibration (f) OK - see note 61%
Deflection (g) OK e 20%
Neutral axis depth OK 9%
Rebar stress OK
g 96%

GLOBAL STATUS VALID DESIGN 0% 20% 40% 60% 80% 100% 120%

REINFORCEMENT Input bonded rebar arrangement (Support bars cutailed at 0.3L)

Span 1 Span 2 0
Supt 1 btm top Supt 2 btm top Supt 3 btm top Supt 4
Required at SLS 2638 1590 1898 2638 2723 1898 2638 0 0 0
Main bar Ø 20 16 20 20 25 20 20 16 16 12
No 9 9 9 9 8 9 9 8 10 15
As provided 2827 1810 2827 2827 3927 2827 2827 1608 2011 1696
% 0.299% 0.191% 0.299% 0.299% 0.416% 0.299% 0.299% 0.000% 0.000% 0.000%
Link Ø = 8
No of legs 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 8 8 8

(d) ULS MOMENTS With bonded reinforcement

Supt 1 Span 1 Supt 2 Span 2 Supt 3 Span 3 Supt 4
Mu 60.9 633.8 948.7 945.9 872.9 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
MOR 1128.8 1418.5 1543.6 1544.1 1773.0 1099.3 0.0 0.0 0.0

ULS MOMENT ENVELOPE/MOR

2000
1500
1000
500
0
-500
-1000
-1500
-2000

261

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:261 17/07/2006 17:16:28

 TCC42 Post-tensioned Analysis & Design/ RESULTS!

Project Spreadsheets to EC2 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made by Date Page
Location Level 2 - Beam on Grid 7 rmw 03-Jul-2006 273
262
POST-TENSIONED ANALYSIS & DESIGN to BS EN 1992-1:2004 Checked Revision Job No
Originated from TCC42.xls v6 on CD © 2005 TCC chg - FB625
Results (2)
(e) SHEAR Link Ø = 8
Span 1 Span 2 0
Left Right Left Right Left Right
VEd - Vtd 444.4 566.1 610.3 512.4 #DIV/0! #DIV/0!
cracked ? N Y Y N N N
(VEd - Vtd)/VRdc 0.661 0.854 0.921 0.783 #DIV/0! #DIV/0!
No of legs 4 4 4 4 8 8
Link spacing 0 0 0 0 0 0

ULS SHEAR ENVELOPE (VEd)

1000
758.6
500 571.3

0 0.0

-500 -594.0
-727.3
-1000

(f) VIBRATION Span 1 Span 2 Span 3

Response factor 0.62 0.73 0.00
OK OK OK

(g) DEFLECTION

MAX DEFLECTIONS (mm)

10
5
0
-5
-10
-15
-20
-25
-30

At transfer Span 1 = -4.2mm Span 2 = -4.2mm .

Quasi-permanent Span 1 = 12mm < 48 OK Span 2 = 26.3mm < 50 OK . .
After construction Span 1 = 11.7mm < 24 OK Span 2 = 23.9mm < 25 OK . .

SUPPORT REACTIONS Supt 1 Supt 2 Supt 3 Supt 4

ULS 1 534.3 1557.3 559.6 0.0 kN
ULS 2 534.3 1322.9 325.2 0.0 kN
ULS 3 303.0 1338.6 559.6 0.0 kN
Dead 274.0 823.7 289.6 0.0 kN
Imposed 114.8 378.5 119.2 0.0 kN

COLUMN MOMENTS Supt 1 Supt 2 Supt 3 Supt 4

Above 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 kNm
ULS 1
Below 54.82 15.81 0.00 0.00 kNm
Above 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 kNm
ULS 2
Below 105.14 -100.24 0.00 0.00 kNm
Above 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 kNm
ULS 3
Below -92.58 118.22 0.00 0.00 kNm

262

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:262 17/07/2006 17:16:34

 TCC42 Post-tensioned Analysis & Design.xls (Beta)

TCC42 Post-tensioned Analysis & Design/ TYPICALC!

Project Spreadsheets to EC2 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made by Date Page
Location Level 2 - Beam on Grid 7 rmw 03-Jul-06 263
274
POST-TENSIONED ANALYSIS & DESIGN to BS EN 1992-1:2004 Checked Revision Job No
Originated from TCC42.xls v6 on CD © 2005 TCC chg - FB625

TYPICAL CALCULATION
for Span 1 at 3.60 m from C/L of LH support EC2 Ref
Class XC2, XC3, XC4 Tee section, h = 525 mm, bw = 1800 mm hf = 200 mm, bf =3000 mm. Table 4.1
Ac = 1185000mm², Z top = 120.0E6 mm³, and Z bottom = 93.3E6 mm³
Tendons are unbonded, Ap = 100mm², fpk = 1,860 N/mm2 and 75.0 mm from soffite
There are 18 tendons, jacked to 1,488 N/mm² or 80% fpk
Prestress losses at this section are 121.4 kN at transfer and 283.3 kN longterm 5.10.5 & 6

(b) STRESSES at TRANSFER

M = 311.4 kNm hogging, and prestressing force = 2,557.0 kN
Max compression (bottom) = M/Z + P/A = -311.4E3 / 120.0 + 2,557.0 / 1185 = 5.50 N/mm²
< 11.94 N/mm² allowed 5.10.2.2(5)
Max tension (bottom) = M/Z - P/A = 311.4E3 / 120.0 - 2,557.0 / 1185 = 0.44 N/mm²
< 3.66 N/mm² allowed TR43
(c) STRESSES in SERVICE
Frequent M = 314.7 kNm sagging, and prestressing force = 2,395.1 kN
Max compression (top) = 314.7E6 / 120.0E6 + 2,395.1E3 / 1185E3 = 4.19 N/mm²
< 18.00 N/mm² allowed 5.10.2.2(5)
Quasi-permanent M = 260.4 kNm sagging
Max tension (bottom) = 260.4 / 93.3 - 2,395.1 / 1185 = 1.35 N/mm²
< 5.09 N/mm² allowed TR43
(d) MOR at ultimate limit state
M = 611.7 kNm sagging, and prestressing force = 2,395.1 kN
pe = 1000 x 2,395.1 / 18 / 100 = 1,330.6 N/mm²
Reinforcement d = 484 mm
Tendon force = 0.9 (2,395.1 + 100 /1000 x 18 x 100) = 2,317.6 kN 5.10.8(2)
As = /4 x 16² x 9 = 1,810 mm²
Rebar force = 500 / 1.15 x 1,810 / 1000 = 786.8 kN
Total tensile force = 2,317.6 + 786.8 = 3,104.4 kN

fcd = 1 x 0.85 x 40/1.5 = 22.67 N/mm² 3.1.7(3)
Compression block depth, x = 1000 x 3,104.4 / 22.67 / 3000 = 45.65 mm Fig 3.5
MOR = (2,317.6 ( 525 - 75.0 - 45.65 / 2) + 786.8 x (484 - 45.65 / 2)) / 1000
= 1,352.8 kNm > 611.7 ok

263

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:263 17/07/2006 17:16:38

 TCC43 Wide Beams (A & D).xls
This spreadsheet designs multiple-span rectangular or flanged
beams, to prEN 1992-1, using sub-frame analysis to derive
moments and shears. The intention is to provide the design
and analysis of up to six spans of continuous wide beams with
columns above and below. Spans may incorporate cantilevers,
fixed ends or knife-edge supports. There are three main sheets:
MAIN!, ACTIONS! and SPANS!
This spreadsheet is very similar to TCC41.xls, but caters for wide
beams by allowing two sizes of bar in one layer and by allowing
top steel in the span to be augmented to help satisfy span:depth
criteria.
The selection of size and number of top and bottom bars is
automated. The number of bars determined by either:
■ area of steel required/ area of maximum sized bar,
■ spacing rules or
■ number of legs of links required in shear.
Where the latter two may govern, two diameters of bending steel
are allowed in the same layer to avoid excessive over-specification
of reinforcement.
Input to the right of SPANS! allows top steel to be increased to
satisfy span:depth criteria. The designer and detailer are expected
to rationalise this output (but always remembering that bar
spacings should not be increased).
The size of link to be used remains as manual input.
MAIN!
This sheet contains user input of materials, frame geometry and
load data.
Input data is blue and underlined. New data may be input by
overwriting default values or by entering values in ‘greyed-out’
cells. Entering a value of 5.0 in cell C20 will clear a line of data
in both the span and support data ready for input. It will also
initiate red data that will clear as the appropriate missing data is
added. Guidance on input for the type of section and type of end
condition of the support is given under ‘Operating instructions’.
The dimensions of the flange widths, beff, are entered manually,
but maximum permitted values can be seen in cells M14:M19.
It is important that the correct usage of the members under
consideration is selected from the combo-box to the right of the
screen, as this affects the magnitude of quasi-permanent SLS
moments.
The ‘brittle partitions’ switch affects the span:depth modifier for
spans greater than 7 m.
264
EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:264
The sheet has not been set up with many ‘carry-throughs’
(making the value of one cell equal another).
Users may choose to emulate cell D17 in other cells in their saved
version to speed input. Generally, values in red or red backgrounds
indicate either incorrect or excess data. For instance, if knife-edge
supports are required, entering ‘K’ in cell C25 will elicit red data to
the right, which needs to be cleared manually.
‘Rebar layering’ refers to whether there are beams in the other
direction. Answering yes drops by one bar diameter the steel at
the supports. For instance when using splice bars at the support
bars in the other direction have to be avoided - and allowed for
in the design.
With respect to cantilevers, design for bending caters for
moments at the face of support; design for deflection considers
the cantilever from the centre line of support. In beam-to-beam
situations (where the beam soffits are the same depth), the width
of support can be input as being very small to avoid under-design
in bending.
ACTIONS!
ACTIONS! includes bending moment and shear force diagrams,
summaries of moments and shears and user input for amounts
of redistribution. Users should ensure that the amounts of
redistribution are always considered as at line 26 there are no
default values.
SPANS!
This sheet designs reinforcement for bending in spans and
supports and for shear in the spans. User input is required for link
sizes (e.g. at cell I22) and the amount by which span top steel
should be increased (e.g. at cell N21). Non-existent spans are
blanked out. Support moments (including cantilever moments)
are considered at the face of the support. This may lead to
unequal amounts of reinforcement being designed for each side
of the support. See Bar!
Beneath ‘Operating instructions’, both maximum and minimum
main bar diameters may be selected. Also, for each span, the
percentage of span top steel may be increased in order to improve
the permissible span:depth ratio.
Besides the limit of maximum modification factor for deflection
= 2.0, an additional limit of maximum allowable area of steel
to comply with deflection criteria, As def, = 1.5 x As reqd, i.e. an
allowable increase of 1.5 As req ie.50% bottom span steel, has
been imposed in line with Note 5 to Table 7.4 N(BS) in the UK
National Annex.
17/07/2006 17:16:44
 TCC43 Wide Beams (A & D).xls

EC2 requires that all spans should be loaded with both γGk,sup
and γGk,inf. γGk,sup is used initially, and for γGk,inf the Run γGk,inf
Bar!
Loadcase button must be activated. A red warning message will
Intended mainly for first time users and young engineers, this
appear if this has not been done, or if any relevant input data are
sheet gives further details of the calculations summarised in
subsequently changed. Using γGk,inf (=1.0) leads to higher hogging
SPAN! Support moments are considered at faces of supports;
moments in spans.
checks at 1/4 span relate to hogging and any top steel required at
either of these points is provided throughout the span.
The top steel in the centre of spans is determined by adding together
the steel required for hogging at 1/4 span and the appropriate
additional tensile forces due to shear ∆ FEd (see CI 9.2.1.3). It is
assumed that 100% hogging steel at supports will be curtailed at
Graf!
0.25 span or max 50%at 0,2 span and 50% at 0.3 span.
This sheet provides data for the charts in MAIN! and ACTIONS!:
it is not intended for formal printing.
WEIGHT!
Weight! gives an estimate of the total amount of reinforcement
Refs!
required in the beam and per cubic metre.
This sheet comprises the values for nationally determined
parameters that have been used in the spreadsheet.
Simplified curtailment rules, similar to those defined in BS 8110,
are used to determine lengths of bars. The figures should be
These data reflect the values given in draft UK National Annexes
treated as estimates only as they cannot deal with the effects of
for EN 1990 and EN 1992.
designers’ and detailers’ preferences, rationalisation etc.
Designers should ensure that these data are current when the
Uls! spreadsheet is used. When using TCC31 for permanent design,
designers are strongly advised to include a copy of this sheet with
any design calculations.
This sheet details the moment distribution analysis carried out
at the ultimate limit state. The following patterns for imposed
It should be noted that it is possible to switch on the adjacent
loading are considered to find a worse case.
spans loaded arrangement by changing ‘b’ to ‘a’ in cell D6. BS
EN 1992-1-1 recommends using the adjacent and alternate load
■ All spans loaded arrangements. However to the UK National Annex only the cell
■ Odd spans loaded spans and alternate load arrangements need to be considered.
■ Even spans loaded
■ Adjacent spans loaded* Notes!
● Spans 1 & 2 and 5 & 6 loaded*
● Spans 2 & 3 loaded* This sheet gives disclaimers and revision history.
● Spans 3 & 4 loaded*
● Spans 4 & 5 loaded*

* According to the UK National Annex, it is not necessary to

consider the adjacent-spans-loaded case and the option of using
this case may be switched on or off at Refs!D6.

Uls! is not necessarily intended for printing out other than for
checking purposes.

Sls!
This sheet details the analysis carried out at the serviceability
limit states corresponding to full service load and to quasi-
permanent load. It uses the same load cases as Uls! and finds
upper and lower bound limits at 1/20th points along the spans.
Again this sheet is not necessarily intended for printing out other
than for checking purposes.

265

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:265 17/07/2006 17:16:46

 TCC43 Wide Beams (A & D)/ MAIN!

Project Spreadsheets to EC2 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made by Date Page
Location Worked Examples: Main beam Grids C to J rmw 03-Jul-06 276
266
WIDE BEAM ANALYSIS & DESIGN to EN 1992-1 : 2004 Checked Revision Job No
Originated from TCC43.xls v 3.0 on CD © 2003-2006 TCC chg - FB625

MATERIALS . STATUS OK COVERS (to links)

fck 35 N/mm² dg (mm) 20 Wk (mm)Top 0.4 Top cover 27 mm
fyk 500 N/mm² γs 1.15 Wk (mm)Btm 0.3 Btm cover 27 mm
fywk 500 N/mm² γc 1.50 c,dev 10 Side cover 27 mm
Steel class A Bay width 5000 mm
SPANS L (m) h (mm) bw (mm) hf (mm) Type beff (mm) LOADING PATTERN
SPAN 1 5.500 390 1200 125 T 2600 min max
SPAN 2 8.000 390 1200 125 T 2900 DEAD 1.25 1.25
SPAN 3 8.500 390 1200 125 T 3000 IMPOSED 1.50
SPAN 4 4.000 390 1200 125 T 2700 REBAR LAYERING
SPAN 5 Support steel
SPAN 6 in alt layer ? N

SUPPORTS ABOVE (m) H (mm) B (mm) End Cond BELOW (m) H (mm) B (mm) End Cond
Support 1 3.750 300 300 F 3.750 300 300 F
Support 2 3.750 300 300 F 3.750 300 300 F
Support 3 3.750 300 300 F 3.750 300 300 F
Support 4 3.750 300 300 F 3.750 300 300 F
Support 5 3.750 300 300 F 3.750 300 300 F
Support 6
Support 7
Usage: Office With brittle partitions
LOADING DIAGRAM

LOADING UDLs (kN/m²) PLs (kN) Position (m) Office usage

Dead Imposed Position Loaded Dead Imposed Position Loaded
Span 1 Load Load from left Length Span 4 Load Load from left Length
UDL 63.0 30.0 ~~~~~ ~~~~~ UDL 63.0 30.0 ~~~~~ ~~~~~
PL 1 ~~~~~ PL 1 ~~~~~
PL 2 ~~~~~ PL 2 ~~~~~
Part UDL Part UDL
Span 2 Span 5
UDL 63.0 30.0 ~~~~~ ~~~~~ UDL ~~~~~ ~~~~~
PL 1 25.0 25.0 4.00 ~~~~~ PL 1 ~~~~~
PL 2 ~~~~~ PL 2 ~~~~~
Part UDL Part UDL
Span 3 Span 6
UDL 63.0 30.0 ~~~~~ ~~~~~ UDL ~~~~~ ~~~~~
PL 1 ~~~~~ PL 1 ~~~~~
PL 2 ~~~~~ PL 2 ~~~~~
Part UDL Part UDL

REACTIONS (kN)
SUPPORT 1 2 3 4 5
ALL SPANS LOADED 245.2 952.5 1078.4 889.1 117.4
MAX ULTIMATE 278.6 952.5 1078.4 889.1 169.4
Characteristic Dead 126.1 471.4 558.1 446.7 59.4
Max Imposed 80.8 232.9 273.5 211.3 63.5
Min Imposed -22.3 75.8 131.2 44.4 -34.7

266

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:266 17/07/2006 17:16:48

 TCC43 Wide Beams (A & D).xls

TCC43 Wide Beams (A & D)/ ACTIONS!

Project Spreadsheets to EC2 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made by Date Page
Location Worked Examples: Main beam Grids C to J rmw 03-Jul-06 267
277
WIDE BEAM ANALYSIS & DESIGN to EN 1992-1 : 2004 Checked Revision Job No
Originated from TCC43.xls v 3.0 on CD © 2003-2006 TCC chg - FB625
BENDING MOMENTS (kNm)

0 5 10 15 20 25 30 0 5 10 15 20 25 30
1000 800

800 600

600 400
400
200
200
0
0
-200
-200
-400
-400

-600 -600

Elastic Moments Redistributed Envelope

SUPPORT No 1 2 3 4 5
Elastic M 63.7 602.9 812.5 601.2 15.4 ~ kNm/m
Redistributed M 63.7 602.9 690.6 601.2 15.4 ~ kNm/m
δ 1.000 1.000 0.850 1.000 1.000 ~ ~
Redistribution 15.0%

SPAN No 1 2 3 4
Elastic M 250.3 488.5 475.2 100.7 ~ ~
Redistributed M 250.3 487.7 482.8 100.7 ~ ~
δ 1.000 0.998 1.016 1.000 ~ ~
SHEARS FORCE DIAGRAMS (kN)

800 600

600
400
400
200
200

0 0

-200
-200
-400
-400
-600

-800 -600
0 5 10 15 20 25 30 0 5 10 15 20 25 30

Elastic Shears Redistributed Shears

SPAN No 1 2 3
Elastic V 278.6 434.6 516.0 554.2 552.9 515.8
Redistributed V 278.6 434.6 517.8 541.8 538.6 514.8

SPAN No 4
Elastic V 377.1 169.4 ~ ~ ~ ~
Redistributed V 377.1 169.4 ~ ~ ~ ~

COLUMN MOMENTS (kNm) 1 2 3 4 5

ALL SPANS Above 22.1 18.9 3.3 -30.3 1.0
LOADED Below 22.1 18.9 3.3 -30.3 1.0
ALT SPANS Above 31.9 35.1 30.6 -39.9 9.4
LOADED Below 31.9 35.1 30.6 -39.9 9.4

267

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:267 17/07/2006 17:16:54

 TCC43 Wide Beams (A & D)/ SPANS

Project Spreadsheets to EC2 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made by Date Page
Location Worked Examples: Main beam Grids C to J rmw 03-Jul-06 268
278
WIDE BEAM ANALYSIS & DESIGN to EN 1992-1 : 2004 Checked Revision Job No

Originated from TCC43.xls v 3.0 on CD © 2003-2006 TCC chg - FB625

.
SPAN 1 LEFT CENTRE RIGHT
ACTIONS M kNm 62.6 250.3 501.3

1.00 1.00 1.00
DESIGN d mm 348.0 345.0 340.5
As mm² 435 1756 3767
As2 mm² 0 0 0
TOP STEEL Layer 1 7H10 + 3H8 7H16 + 3H12 6H25 + 3H20
. . .
As prov mm² 701 As2 prov 1747 As prov 3888
BTM STEEL Layer 1 4H12 + 2H10 8H16 + 2H12 4H12 + 2H10
0 . 0 . 0 .
As2 prov mm² 609 As prov 1835 As2 prov 609
DEFLECTION L/d 15.94 Allowed 46.06 ..
SHEAR VEd kN 260.1 LINK Ø 416.1
VRd,ct kN 201.6 10 278.6
VEd,max kN 1560.4 NOMINAL 1526.8
s req mm 415 415 415
LINKS H10 @ 250 for 500 H10 @ 250 H10 @ 250 for 500
legs No 6 6 6

CHECKS % As ok ok ok
Cover ok ok ok
min S ok ok ok
max S ok ok ok
Links ok ok ok
Main bars ok ok ok
max V ok ok
Deflection ok

SPAN 2 LEFT CENTRE RIGHT

ACTIONS M kNm 526.6 487.7 636.4
d 1.00 1.00 0.86
DESIGN d mm 340.5 343.0 340.5
As mm² 3982 3442 4958
As2 mm² 0 0 0
TOP STEEL Layer 1 7H25 + 2H20 6H16 + 2H12 9H25 + 2H20
. . .
As prov mm² 4064 As2 prov 1433 As prov 5046
BTM STEEL Layer 1 4H12 + 2H10 10H20 + 2H16 4H12 + 2H10
. . .
As2 prov mm² 609 As prov 3544 As2 prov 609
DEFLECTION L/d 23.32 Allowed 25.99 ..
SHEAR VEd kN 499.3 LINK Ø 523.3
VRd,ct kN 282.8 10 304.0
VEd,max kN 1526.8 NOMINAL 1526.8
s req mm 343 415 326
LINKS H10 @ 250 for 500 H10 @ 250 H10 @ 250 for 500
legs No 6 6 6

CHECKS % As ok ok ok
Cover ok ok ok
min S ok ok ok
max S ok ok ok
Links ok ok ok
Main bars ok ok ok
max V ok ok
Deflection ok

268

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:268 17/07/2006 17:16:59

 TCC43 Wide Beams (A & D).xls

TCC43 Wide Beams (A & D)/ SPANS!

Project Spreadsheets to EC2 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made by Date Page

Location Worked Examples: Main beam Grids C to J rmw 03-Jul-06 269

279
WIDE BEAM ANALYSIS & DESIGN to EN 1992-1 : 2004 Checked Revision Job No

Originated from TCC43.xls v 3.0 on CD © 2003-2006 TCC chg - FB625

SPAN 3 LEFT CENTRE RIGHT

ACTIONS M kNm 635.3 482.8 525.3
d 0.85 1.02 1.00
DESIGN d mm 340.5 343.0 340.5
As mm² 4949 3408 3972
As2 mm² 0 0 0
TOP STEEL Layer 1 9H25 + 2H20 7H12 + 5H10 7H25 + 2H20
. . .
As prov mm² 5046 As2 prov 1184 As prov 4064
BTM STEEL Layer 1 4H12 + 2H10 11H20 + 2H16 4H12 + 2H10
. . .
As2 prov mm² 609 As prov 3858 As2 prov 609
DEFLECTION L/d 24.78 Allowed 26.19 As auto-increased by 6.9 %
SHEAR VEd kN 520.1 LINK Ø V 496.3
VRd,ct kN 304.0 10 v 282.8
VEd,max kN 1526.8 NOMINAL vc 1526.8
s req mm 328 415 346
LINKS H10 @ 250 for 500 H10 @ 250 H10 @ 250 for 500
legs No 6 6 6

CHECKS % As ok ok ok
Cover ok ok ok
min S ok ok ok
max S ok ok ok
Links ok ok ok
Main bars ok ok ok
max V ok ok
Deflection ok

SPAN 4 LEFT CENTRE RIGHT

ACTIONS M kNm 478.5 100.7 25.2
d 1.00 1.00 1.00
DESIGN d mm 340.5 348.0 348.0
As mm² 3575 700 175
As2 mm² 0 0 0
TOP STEEL Layer 1 8H25 7H20 + 2H16 7H10 + 3H8
. . .
As prov mm² 3927 As2 prov 2601 As prov 701
BTM STEEL Layer 1 4H12 + 2H10 8H10 + 2H8 4H12 + 2H10
. . .
As2 prov mm² 609 As prov 729 As2 prov 609
DEFLECTION L/d 11.49 Allowed 250.52 ..
SHEAR VEd kN 358.5 LINK Ø 150.8
VRd,ct kN 279.6 10 201.6
VEd,max kN 1526.8 NOMINAL 1560.4
s req mm 415 415 415
LINKS H10 @ 250 for 500 H10 @ 250 H10 @ 250 for 500
legs No 6 6 6

CHECKS % As ok ok ok
Cover ok ok ok
min S ok ok ok
max S ok ok ok
Links ok ok ok
Main bars ok ok ok
max V ok ok
Deflection ok

269

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:269 17/07/2006 17:17:03

 TCC51 Column Load Take-down Design.xls
Conventional column load take-downs by hand can be time-
consuming. This spreadsheet emulates conventional column
design to Eurocode 2 by providing load take down from inputs of
location, dimensions, levels and loads to give design axial loads
and moments per floor, and to foundations. TCC51.xls is intended
as a stand-alone column design spreadsheet for use when a sub-
frame analysis is not available or is unwarranted. This spreadsheet
also determines the area and arrangement of steel required (As)
for all lifts in RESULTS! or individual lifts in CALC!.
This spreadsheet is intended for use with braced columns only.
Moments and vertical loads for unbraced structures should be
derived from a frame analysis, and then should be designed via
TCC53 or TCC54.
Load distribution is according to shear force factors from Tables in
the ISE/ ICE Manual for the design of reinforced concrete building
structures to EC2(28). Column moments are assessed via a limited
moment distribution routine making conservative assumptions
regarding remote spans etc.
There is no double counting of floor slabs due to allowances for
floor slabs in design of, therefore reactions from, edge beams
spanning parallel to floor slab span.
As a default the level with maximum axial load with concurrent
maximum moment, i.e. the bottom level, is chosen for
consideration in CALC! (long-hand design). The user may
investigate other levels by choosing the appropriate level via the
arrows on the right hand side of CALC!.
INPUT!
All relevant materials, geometric and loading data is input on this
sheet.
After materials data, number of storeys, column location and
base condition should be selected. If the number of storeys is
reduced below 12, rows at the foot of this page will be “browned
out” so that the correct number of storeys is displayed.
The base condition refers to whether or not the column should
be fixed or pinned at foundation level.
Under column location, the selection from a list of five differing
locations should be self-explanatory. “Double penultimate”
means a column that is penultimate in both directions. As this
selection is made, the key diagram changes to indicate relevant
plan dimensions with the column to be designed highlighted in
red.
The X and Y spans should then be input together with edge
distances. Next, level references should be entered in cells B28 to
B39, and the general, geometric and loading data for each floor
270
EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:270
in the remainder of rows 28 to 39. Slab spans may be parallel to
x or y, or two-way spanning.
If there are more than twelve storeys in a structure, upper storeys
(>12) may be calculated first with “No” entered in the “column
above” cell, D22. For the remaining lower storeys, cell D22 may
then be set to “Yes”, with data related to the upper storeys being
entered on row 22 and cells M27 to P27.
The check box to the top right hand side of this page allows the
user to select whether or not EN 1990 loading equations 6.10a
and 610b should be used to determine ULS loads and moments.
This may make a considerable difference to results, and it is
recommended that this box should be un-checked unless the
user is fully familiar with these equations.
When all input on this page has been completed, go to the next
page called:
RESULTS!
This page displays the following results:
■ Characteristic dead and imposed loads applied to the column
at each level, including imposed load reduction factors to
EN1991 and its’ UK National annex.
■ Cumulative loads at each level, both characteristic and
ultimate (NEd).
■ The summation of ultimate initial moments and additional
moments due to slenderness on each axis.
■ The reinforcement arrangement required at each level, based
on a user specified number of bars.
The number of main bars is entered at each level or the “Set all
lifts to” button may be used to insert the specified number of
bars in each lift of the column. Initially and after changing the
number of bars at any level, “CHECK” buttons to the right will be
highlighted in red to indicate that the arrangement has yet to be
determined. Then clicking either an individual CHECK button or
the “Check all levels” button will calculate bar arrangements.
The recommended procedure is to initially set all lifts to a standard
number of bars, click the “Check all levels” button, then change
and check any lifts that appear unsuitable or where “NO FIT”
appears under the number of bars. It should also be remembered
that the concrete grade for each lift may be amended in cells
O27 to O39 of INPUT!
CALC!
This sheet shows detailed calculations for a single lift of the
column. As a default, the level with maximum axial load with
17/07/2006 17:17:08
 TCC51 Column Load Take-down Design.xls

concurrent maximum moment, i.e. the bottom level, is chosen

for consideration here. The user may investigate other levels by
Refs!
choosing the appropriate level via the arrows on the right hand
Relevant National Annex values are tabulated here, both for BS
side of the page.
EN 1990 and BS EN 1992. These values are editable for use in
other countries.
After summarising the actions on the chosen lift of column, a
check is made to determine whether or not the column is slender,
then the section is analysed to find the moments of resistance
about both axes for the given axial load. On the second page of
Notes!
CALC!, firstly moments due to imperfections are calculated and
This page contains details of spreadsheet status, revision history
it is decided about which axis these will be critical. Design first
and program assumptions, as well as a standard disclaimer
order moments (M0Ed) are then derived by adding imperfection
clause.
(Mi) moments to the basic first order design moment (m0E).
Finally, single axis and biaxial checks are carried out to ensure
that applied moments are less than the section’s moments of
resistance.

Select!
On this page, checks for the chosen number of bars at each level
are carried out for six different bar diameters. The smallest bar
diameter that passes all checks is then selected for display on
RESULTS!

Col~M
On this page, flexural stiffnesses are calculated for all beams and
columns and limited moment distributions are carried out to
determine column moments.

Slen!
Here the effective heights of columns and slenderness ratios
are determined from relative rotational stiffnesses, as well as
nominal moments due to imperfections.

M2!
This is where second order moments are calculated, for each lift
and for each possible bar diameter.

Secs!
Here the section moments of resistance are determined for the
given axial load at each level, for each possible bar diameter and
on both axes.

Gra!
This page contains data for generation of the diagrams.

271

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:271 17/07/2006 17:17:10

 TCC51 Column Load Take-down Design/ INPUT!

Project Spreadsheets to Eurocode 2 The Concrete Centre

Client BigBucks PLC BRACED FRAMES ONLY Made by Date Page
Location Column G14 Rod 03-Jul-06 272
282
COLUMN LOAD TAKE DOWN & DESIGN for RECTANGULAR COLUMNS to EN 1992: 2004 Checked Revision Job No
Originated from TCC51.xls version 3.0 on CD © 2004 - 2005 TCC CHG - FB625
Beam fck (N/mm²) 30 No of storeys (this sheet) 10 Column Location EN 1990 Yes
Concrete density (kN/m³ ) 25 Double penultimate Allow 610a & 6.10b ?
fyk (N/mm² ) 500 Span X1 Span X2 (,t0) = 2.00
Steel class A · No
Span Y1

Base condition
Pinned
Span Y2

KEY PLAN

Beam spans (m ) Edge distances (mm ) COLUMN SECTION

Span Y1 3.750 Span X1 5.500 West 0 Min column cover (mm ) 30
Span Y2 4.000 Span X2 6.000 North 0 c,dev (mm ) 10

Column above? No Storeys Gk Qk 0 M0EX M0EY

DIMENSIONS LOADS
SLAB Span BEAM SIZES (mm ) COLUMN BELOW SLAB BEAM LINE LOADS
Solid hf Direction || to Span Y1 Span Y2 Span X1 Span X2 mm  mm fck Height (m ) gk qk Cat N-S E-W
Level mm X, Y or B h bw h bw h bw h bw H B N/mm² floor to floor kN/m² kN/m² A to K kN/m kN/m
.
Roof 125 Y 300 250 300 250 350 300 350 300 250 300 30 3.750 5.20 1.50 I 0.00 0.00
9 125 Y 300 250 300 250 350 300 350 300 250 300 30 3.750 5.20 4.00 B 0.00 0.00
8 125 Y 300 250 300 250 350 300 350 300 250 300 30 3.750 5.20 4.00 B 0.00 0.00
7 125 Y 300 250 300 250 350 300 350 300 250 300 30 3.750 5.20 4.00 B 0.00 0.00
6 125 Y 300 250 300 250 350 300 350 300 300 450 30 3.750 5.20 4.00 B 0.00 0.00
5 125 Y 300 250 300 250 350 300 350 300 300 450 30 3.750 5.20 4.00 B 0.00 0.00
4 125 Y 300 250 300 250 350 300 350 300 300 450 30 4.500 6.30 5.00 D 0.00 0.00
3 125 Y 300 250 300 250 350 300 350 300 300 450 35 4.500 6.30 5.00 D 0.00 0.00
2 125 Y 300 250 300 250 350 300 350 300 300 450 35 4.500 6.30 5.00 D 0.00 0.00
1 125 Y 300 250 300 250 350 300 350 300 300 450 35 4.500 6.30 5.00 D 0.00 0.00

272

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:272 17/07/2006 17:17:11

 TCC51 Column Load Take-down Design.xls

TCC51 Column Load Take-down Design/ RESULTS!

Project Spreadsheets to Eurocode 2 The Concrete Centre

Client BigBucks PLC Made by Date Page
Location Column G14 Rod 03-Jul-06 283
273
COLUMN LOAD TAKE DOWN & DESIGN to EN 1992: 2004 Checked Revision Job No
Originated from TCC51.xls version 3.0 on CD © 2004 - 2005 TCC CHG - FB625
Braced frames only
Characteristic Design Reinforcement
Below Gk Qk Moments about No Bar
Level from above 0.0 0.0 NEd X-X Y-Y and Ø Layout
Loaded area Category 164.8 41.3 M0Ed 5.15 2.54
Roof 4
27.536 I reduction 0.0 267.7 M2 0.00 0.00
Clear height 3.400 Cumulative 164.8 41.3  5.15 2.54 H12
Loaded area Category 164.8 110.1 M0Ed 5.12 1.42
9 4
27.536 B reduction 15.1 616.1 M2 0.00 0.00
Clear height 3.400 Cumulative 329.6 136.4  5.12 1.42 H12
Loaded area Category 164.8 110.1 M0Ed 5.12 1.42
8 4
27.536 B reduction 15.1 964.5 M2 0.00 0.00
Clear height 3.400 Cumulative 494.4 231.4  5.12 1.42 H12
Loaded area Category 164.8 110.1 M0Ed 5.11 0.88
7
27.536 B 43.6 0.00 0.00
4
reduction 1270.1 M2
Clear height 3.400 Cumulative 659.2 298.0  5.11 0.88 H16
Loaded area Category 169.9 110.1 M0Ed 5.55 1.33
6
27.536 B 43.6 0.00 0.00
4
reduction 1582.1 M2
Clear height 3.400 Cumulative 829.1 364.5  5.55 1.33 H12
Loaded area Category 169.9 110.1 M0Ed 5.52 2.16
5
27.536 B 43.6 0.00 0.00
4
reduction 1894.1 M2
Clear height 3.400 Cumulative 999.0 431.1  5.52 2.16 H12
Loaded area Category 202.7 137.7 M0Ed 6.20 1.74
4
27.536 D 52.1 0.00 0.00
4
reduction 2275.6 M2
Clear height 4.150 Cumulative 1201.7 516.7  6.20 1.74 H20
Loaded area Category 202.7 137.7 M0Ed 6.17 1.45
3
27.536 D 52.8 0.00 0.00
4
reduction 2656.0 M2
Clear height 4.150 Cumulative 1404.4 601.5  6.17 1.45 H20
Loaded area Category 202.7 137.7 M0Ed 6.18 0.96
2
27.536 D 53.2 0.00 0.00
6
reduction 3035.9 M2
Clear height 4.150 Cumulative 1607.1 686.0  6.18 0.96 H25
Loaded area Category 202.7 137.7 M0Ed 7.80 0.20
1
27.536 D 53.5 45.29 30.20
6
reduction 3415.3 M2
Clear height 4.150 Cumulative 1809.8 770.2  53.09 30.41 H32
Loaded area Category 0.0 0.0 M0Ed #N/A #N/A
0
27.536 0.00 #N/A #N/A #N/A
6
reduction #N/A M2
Clear height 0.000 Cumulative 1809.8 #N/A  #N/A #N/A #N/A
Loaded area Category 0.0 0.0 M0Ed #N/A #N/A
0
27.536 0.00 #N/A #N/A #N/A
6
reduction #N/A M2
Clear height 0.000 Cumulative 1809.8 #N/A  #N/A #N/A #N/A

273

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:273 17/07/2006 17:17:17

 TCC51 Column Load Take-down Design/ CALC!

Project Spreadsheets to Eurocode 2 The Concrete Centre

Client BigBucks PLC Made by Date Page
Location Column G14 Rod 03-Jul-06 274
284
COLUMN LOAD TAKE DOWN & DESIGN to EN 1992: 2004 Checked Revision Job No
Originated from TCC51.xls version 3.0 on CD © 2004 - 2005 TCC CHG - FB625

Section calculation for column below level 2 300 x 450 with 6 H25 bars
fcd = cc x fck /
c = 0.85 x 35 /1.5 = 19.83 N/mm²
fyd = fyk /
s = 500 /1.15 = 434.78 N/mm²
STATUS Valid design

ACTIONS
from load take-down, NEd = 3,035.9 kN n = 1000 x 3,035.9 /19.83 /300 /450 = 1.134 5.8.8.3 (3)
from bending analysis, M0xx top = 0.10 kNm M0yy top = 1.42 kNm M 0 are applied moments

M0xx btm = 0.12 kNm M0yy btm = 0.27 kNm

combining top and bottom moments, m0Exx = 0.11 kNm and m0Eyy = 0.96 kNm (5.32)

SLENDERNESS
from flexural stiffness analysis, L0x = 2.576 m and L0y = 3.084 m (5.15)
rxx = (300² /12) = 86.60 mm ryy = (450² /12) = 129.90 mm gross section
therefore, x = 2,576 /86.60 = 29.74 and y = 3,084 /129.90 = 23.74
efx = 2 x 0.741 = 1.481 efy = 2 x 0.611 = 1.222 (5.19)
limx = 22x2.538/(1+0.2 x 1.481)/1.134 = 40.46 limy = 22x1.893/(1+0.2 x 1.222)/1.134 = 31.42 (5.13N)
29.74  40.46 therefore column is short 23.74  31.42 therefore column is short

SECTION ANALYSIS
cu3 = 0.0035 and c3 = 0.00175 from Table 3.1  = 0.80  = 1.00 3.19) to (3.22)
.fcd = 19.83 x 1.00 = 19.83 N/mm² net fyd = 434.78 - 19.83 = 414.95 N/mm²
d2 = 30 + 8 + 25/2 = 50.5 mm As =  x 25² /4 x 6 = 2,945 mm²

About xx axis About yy axis

d = 300 - 50.5 = 249.5 mm d = 450 - 50.5 = 399.5 mm
(1-c3/c3u)h = 300(1 - 175 /350) = 150 mm (1-c3/c3u)h = 450(1 - 175 /350) = 225 mm hinge point
there are 2 bars in xx faces and 3 bars in yy faces (total of 6 bars)
Neutral axis depth x = 305.33 mm x = 476.29 mm by iteration
Conc comp force, Fc = MIN(0.8 x 305.33 ; 300)450 x 19.83 /1000 Fc = MIN(0.8 x 476.29 ; 450)300 x 19.83 /1000
= 2,180.1 kN = 2,267.1 kN
Limiting strain, c max = c3 /[x-(1-c3/c3u)h]x  0.00344 c max = c3 /[x-(1-c3/c3u)h]x  0.00332 Figure 6.1
Intermediate bars are at 150, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0 & 0 and at No intermediate bars from column face
µ-strain at main compression steel = 3,440(305.3- 50.5)/305.3 = 2,871 sc = 3,317(476.3- 50.5)/476.3 = 2,965
µ-strains at intermediate bars = 1,750, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0 si = No intermediate bars
µ-strain at main tension steel = 3,440(305.3- 249.5)/305.3 = 629 st = 3,317(476.3- 399.5)/476.3 = 535
Net stress at main compression steel = Min(200000s, fyd) - .fcd = 414.95 sc = Min(200000s, fyd) - .fcd = 414.95 N/mm²
Net stresses at intermediate bars = 330.2, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0 si = No intermediate bars N/mm²
Net stress at main tension steel = Min(200000s, fyd) = 125.80 st = Min(200000s, fyd) = 106.95 N/mm²
Force at main compression steel = 414.95 x 982 /1000 = 407.4 kN Fsc = 414.95 x 1,473 /1000 = 611.1 kN
Forces at intermediate bars = As
s = 324.1 kN Fsi = As
s = 0.0 kN
Force at main tension steel = 125.80 x 982 /1000 = 123.5 kN Fst = 106.95 x 1,473 /1000 = 157.5 kN
NRd = Fc + Fs = 2,180.1 + 407.4 + 324.1 + 123.5 NRd = 2,267.1 + 611.1 + 0.0 + 157.5
= 3,035.1 kN  NEd = 3,035.7 kN  NEd value of x selected to
Conc lever arm, z = Max(d - x /2, d - h/2) = 127.37 mm z = 208.98 mm match N Ed & N Rd

MRd = fc
z + Fs
a - NRd(d - h/2) = 277.67 + 113.32 - 301.99 MRd = 473.80 + 213.26 - 529.73
Moment of resistance, MRd = 89.00 kNm MRd = 157.33 kNm

274

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:274 17/07/2006 17:17:22

 TCC51 Column Load Take-down Design.xls

TCC51 Column Load Take-down Design/ CALC!

Project Spreadsheets to Eurocode 2 The Concrete Centre

Client BigBucks PLC
Location Column G14 Rod 03-Jul-06 275
285
COLUMN LOAD TAKE DOWN & DESIGN to EN 1992: 2004

Originated from TCC51.xls version 3.0 on CD © 2004 - 2005 TCC CHG - FB625

Section calculation for column below level 2 continued

IMPERFECTIONS n = MIN(1, MAX(, 2 /4.5) = 0.943 5.2 (5)

M i x = 0.943 x 0.005 x 2.576 x 500 = 6.07 kNm M i y = 0.943 x 0.005 x 3.084 x 500 = 7.27 kNm (5.1) & (5.2)
Inperfections critical about xx axis, therefore set Miy = 0 5.8.9 (2)

SECOND ORDER MOMENTS

x = 0.35 + 35 /200 - 29.74 /250 = 0.406 y = 0.35 + 35 /200 - 23.74 /250 = 0.430 5.8.8.3 (4)
isx = 81.24 mm isy = 174.50 mm radius of gyration of steel
dx = 231.2 mm dy = 399.5 mm 5.8.8.3 (2)
K
x = Max(1, 1 + 0.406 x 1.481) = 1.602 K
y = Max(1, 1 + 0.430 x 1.222) = 1.526 5.8.8.3 (1)
nu = As
fyd /(Ac
fcd) = 1.478 Kr = (nu - n) /(nu - nbal) = 0.319 5.8.8.3 (1)
1/r0 = yd /(0.45d) = 2.089
10E-5 1/r0 = 1.209
10E-5 5.8.8.3 (1)
1/r = Kr
K
1/ro = 1.0687
10E-5 1/r = 0.5893
10E-5 (5.34)
M0Edx = m0E + M i = 6.18 Knm M0Edy = 0.96 Knm 5.8.2 (5)P
M 2 x = NEd
(1/r)
L0² /² = 21.81 kNm M 2 y = 17.24 kNm (5.32)
Column is short  IGNORE Column is short  IGNORE 5.8.2 (6)

SINGLE AXIS CHECKS

M0Ed + M 2 = 6.18 kNm M0Ed + M 2 = 0.96 kNm (5.31)
Minimum moment, M Ed,min x = 20 x 3,035.9 /1000 = 60.72 kNm MEd,min y = 20 x 3,035.9 /1000 = 60.72 kNm 6.1 (4)
Therefore design moment, M Ed x = 60.72 kNm < 89.00  OK and M Edy = 60.72 kNm < 157.33  OK

BIAXIAL CHECK
Max of x/y and y/x = 1.253 < 2 exbeyh = 0.103 (5.38a & b)
BIAXIAL CHECK NOT REQUIRED 5.8.9 (3)
. 3,958.0 kN . 3,035.9 /3,958.0 = 0.767 5.8.9 (4)
a = 1.612 from table
. 0.7555 <1  OK

275

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:275 17/07/2006 17:17:28

 TCC52 Column Chart generation.xls
This spreadsheet generates axial load:design moment interaction
charts for symmetrically reinforced rectangular columns. It
Refs!
checks the capacity of the columns with various arrangements
This sheet comprises the values for nationally determined
of reinforcement against input load cases of axial load and uni-
parameters that have been used in the spreadsheet. These data
axial bending.
reflect the values given in draft UK National Annexes for BS EN
1990 and BS EN 1992. Designers should ensure that these data
Within TCC11.xls, COLUMN! allows the user to determine the area
are current when the spreadsheet is used.
of steel required from inputs of axial load and moment about the
x - x axis. The approach of TCC52 is to give an interaction chart.
When using TCC31R for permanent design, designers are
This shows axial load against moment for symmetrical sections
strongly advised to include a copy of this sheet with any design
of specified size, strength and reinforcement. It works on the
calculations.
premise of calculating the moment and axial load capacities of
a section with assumed amounts of reinforcement and assumed
neutral axis depth. Iterations of neutral axis depth give data
for the Axial load:Moment interaction chart for the specified
Notes!
section. The spreadsheet also checks the reinforcement required
This sheet gives disclaimers and revision history.
for input load cases. The user may try different arrangements of
reinforcement.

RCC52.xls assumes that the moments input in the load cases

have already been adjusted, if necessary, for bi-axial bending.
For many side and all corner columns, there is no choice but to
design for bi-axial bending, and TCC53.xls should then be used.
Moments due to imperfections and second order moments in
slender columns are added automatically.

MAIN!
Main! contains all input and output data, including details of
members connected to the top and bottom of the column. These
are used to assess slenderness criteria and additional moments.

Bending is assumed to be about the x - x, i.e. horizontal axis,

and the input moment is assumed to be the maximum design
moment as defined in EC2. Any additional moments due to
slenderness are added by the program.

The dotted line within the chart indicates minimum design

moment.

Calcs!
Calcs! shows the derivation of the charts where moment capacity
is calculated at intervals of neutral axis depth from n.a. depth for
N = 0 to n.a. depth for N = Nbal, then at intervals from n.a. depth
for N = Nbal to n.a. depth for N = Nuz.

Cases!
Cases! identifies the smallest bar diameter that satisfies each of
the load cases.

276

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:276 17/07/2006 17:17:35

 TCC52 Column Chart generation.xls

TCC52 Column Chart generation/ MAIN!

Project Spreadsheets to EC2 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made by Date Page
Location Columns at A1, A2 etc RMW 03-Jul-06 277
287
COLUMN CHART FOR SYMMETRICALLY REINFORCED RECTANGULAR COLUMNS BENT ABOUT THE X-X AXIS TO
EN 1992-1 : 2004 Checked Revision Job No
Originated from TCC52.xls v3.0 on CD © 2003-05 TCC chg - FB625

MATERIALS
fck 32 N/mm²
s 1.15 steel Cover 35 mm
fyk 500 N/mm²
c 1.5 concrete dg 20 mm
 2 ef 1.15 c,dev 10 mm Remote
Steel class A CONNECTING BEAMS/SLABS end
DESIGN SECTION Clear height, L = 3600 mm b (mm) h (mm) L (m) (F) or (P)
h 400 mm RESTRAINTS Top left 350 500 7.5 F
b 250 mm Top F Fixed Top right 350 500 6 F
Bars per face 2 No Btm F Fixed Bottom left 350 500 7.5 F
All bars in 250 wide faces Braced Y Bottom right 350 500 6 F
. Beam stiffnesses are 70% of uncracked stiffness
Column above? Y Col below? Y
BAR ARRANGEMENTS Data on connecting beams only affects loadcases, not charting.
Type Bar Ø Asc % Link Ø Bar c/c Nbal (kN) Nuz (kN) Checks
H 40 5.03 10 120.0 0.0 0.0 Asc > 4 %
H 32 3.22 8 132.0 733.7 2880.9 ok
H 25 1.96 8 139.0 752.9 2465.0 ok
H 20 1.26 8 144.0 764.9 2230.4 ok
H 16 0.80 8 148.0 773.5 2080.2 ok
H 12 0.45 8 152.0 781.1 1963.5 ok

N:M INTERACTION CHART for 400 x 250 column, grade C32, 35 mm cover and 2 bars on 250 mm faces
3500

3000
Min M

2600
AXIAL COMPRESSION, NEd (kN)

2500 2500
H32

2000 H25
H20
H16 1750

1500 H12
1350

1000

Nbal
610
500 500

0
0 50 100 150 200 250 300

MOMENT MEd (kNm)

LOADCASES Load case NEd (kN) m0e (kNm) MEd (kNm) Load case NEd (kN) m0e (kNm) MEd (kNm)
Double 1 500 165 167.7 4 H25 4 610 80 83.2 4 H12
curvature ? 2 1750 120 129.3 4 H32 5 1350 185 192.2 4 H32
Yes 3 2600 35 52.0 4 H32 6 2500 150 163.3 No Fit

277

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:277 17/07/2006 17:17:36

 TCC53 Column Design.xls
TCC53.xls generates column design charts for symmetrically
reinforced rectangular columns bent about two axes and checks
input load cases.
TCC53.xls also gives interaction charts, showing axial load against
moment for the critical axis for symmetrical rectangular sections
of specified size, strength and reinforcement arrangement. The
user may try different arrangements of reinforcement. It also
provides designs for input load cases, which are plotted on the
relevant x- or y- axis chart.
TCC53.xls takes account of any side-bars specified.
considered and the critical axis identified. MEd is calculated by
adding NEde1 for imperfections and where necessary M2(=NEde2)
for second order moments in slender columns. MEd is used in the
design and plot (in CHARTS!).
Refs!
This sheet comprises the values for nationally determined
parameters that have been used in the spreadsheet. These data
reflect the values given in draft UK National Annexes for EN 1990
and EN 1992.

Designers should ensure that these data are current when the
MAIN! spreadsheet is used. When using TCC31R for permanent design,
designers are strongly advised to include a copy of this sheet with
MAIN! contains all input data and gives designs for the input load any design calculations.
cases.

Guidance for the input is given within the spreadsheet but users Notes!
should be familiar with BS EN 1992-1-1 Section 5.8 The input
moments are the initial end moments due to ultimate design This sheet gives disclaimers and revision history.
loads as defined in BS EN 1990 about the appropriate axes. Madd,
the critical direction for bi-axial bending and design moments are
calculated.

CHARTS!
CHARTS! shows two charts, one chart for when MEdx is critical and
one for when MEdy is critical. These Axial load:Moment interaction
charts for the specified section also show relevant input load
cases. The load cases are identified by axial load only (a quirk of
Excel!).

Xcal! and Ycal!

These sheets show the derivation of the charts where moment
and axial load capacity is calculated at intervals of neutral axis
depth (in intervals from n.a. depth for N = 0 to n.a. depth for N
= Nbal, then in intervals from n.a. depth for N = Nbal to n.a. depth
for N = Nuz).

Slen!
The calculations on this sheet determine slenderness criteria and
effective column lengths about both axes.

Cases!
Cases! identifies the smallest bar diameter that satisfies each of
the load cases. Calculations are made for both directions and the
spreadsheet decides which axis is dominant. Bi-axial bending is

278

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:278 17/07/2006 17:17:43

 TCC53 Column Design.xls

TCC53 Column Design/ MAIN!

Project EC2 Comparative Design The Concrete Centre

Client BRE Made by Date Page
Location Column D2 RMW 03-Jul-06 279
289
SYMMETRICALLY REINFORCED RECTANGULAR COLUMN DESIGN, BENT ABOUT TWO AXES
TO EN 1992-1 : 2004 Checked Revision Job No
Originated from TCC53.xls v 3.0 on CD © 2002-2005 TCC - FB625

MATERIALS
fck 35 N/mm²
s 1.15 Cover to link 30 mm
fyk 500 N/mm²
c 1.5 dg 20 mm
 2.9 ef 1.6 c,dev 10 mm
SECTION Steel class A
h 325 mm .
b 275 mm
with 2 bars per 275 face X X
and 2 bars per 325 face
ie. 325 x 275 columns with 4 bars
Remote
RESTRAINTS Storey Top Btm CONNECTING BEAMS/SLABS end
height (mm) Condition Condition Braced ? b (mm) h (mm) L (m) (F) or (P)
X-AXIS 5000 F P Y Top West 300 500 8 F
Y-AXIS 5000 F P Y Top East 300 500 6 F
Top North 7000 175 5 F
Top South 7000 175 5 F
L (mm) L0 (mm) h0 (mm) Bottom West
X-AXIS 4500 3459 149 Bottom East
Y-AXIS 4825 3709 Bottom North
Bottom South
Beam stiffnesses are 70% of uncracked stiffness
Column above? Y Col below? Y
BAR ARRANGEMENTS BAR CENTRES (mm)
Bar Ø Asc % Link Ø 275 Face 325 Face Nuz (kN) Checks
H 32 3.60 8 167 217 2835 ok
H 25 2.20 8 174 224 2421 ok
H 20 1.41 8 179 229 2188 ok
H 16 0.90 8 183 233 2038 ok
H 12 0.51 8 187 237 1922 ok
H 10 8 189 239 As or Ø < minimum

LOADCASES AXIAL TOP MOMENTS (kNm) BTM MOMENTS (kNm)

N (kN) m0x m0y m0x m0y
1 2126.1 19.5 2.5
Moments m 0 at top and bottom of column (from
2 2030.5 29.9 2.5
analysis) are combined to find m 0e . The moment
3 1025 50.0 2.5
due to imperfections (e 1 N) and the second
4 783 80.0 2.5 order moment (M 2 ) are then added to obtain
5 600 120.0 2.5 M Ed In the table below.
6 1570 130.0 2.5

DESIGN X AXIS Y AXIS Critical Biaxial Check

MOMENTS MEd x MRd x MEd y MRd y axis Equation (5.39) REBAR
1 42.5 57.6 38.4 100.1 X 0.691 4 H25
2 48.4 69.3 41.0 107.2 X 0.634 4 H25
3 58.8 87.3 40.3 98.2 X 0.878 4 H12
4 80.0 92.7 6.3 96.2 X 0.863 4 H12
5 120.0 126.3 5.2 117.5 X 0.965 4 H20
6 130.0 157.7 11.2 164.7 X 0.807 4 H32
SEE CHARTS ON NEXT SHEET

279

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:279 17/07/2006 17:17:44

 TCC54 Circular Column Design.xls
TCC54.xls generates a column design chart for symmetrically
reinforced circular columns of an inputted size with an inputted
number of bars. It checks input load cases of ultimate axial load
and resolved moment.
MAIN!
MAIN! contains all input data and gives designs for the input load
cases.
Refs!
This sheet comprises the values for Nationally Determined
Parameters that have been used in the spreadsheet. These data
reflect the values given in draft UK National Annexes for BS EN
1990 and BS EN 1992. Designers should ensure that these data
are current when the spreadsheet is used. When using TCC54 for
permanent design, designers are strongly advised too include a
copy of this sheet with any design calculations.

Guidance for the input is given within the spreadsheet but users
should be familiar with BS EN 1992-1-1 especially Section 5.8.
Notes!
The input moments are the ultimate design moments from
This sheet gives disclaimers and revision history.
analysis resolved around an appropriate axis. Allowances for
imperfections (NEde1) and where appropriate for second order
effects (M2=NEde2) in slender columns are added automatically
to the first order moment input at E57 to give MEd in cells F57etc.
The input moment at E57 should have been resolved for bending
in two directions by the user.

The axial load:moment interaction chart for the specified section

also show relevant input load cases.

The load cases are identified.

Calcs!
These sheets show the derivation of the charts where moment
and axial load capacity is calculated at intervals of neutral axis
depth (in intervals from n.a. depth for N = 0 to n.a. depth for N
= Nbal, then at intervals from n.a. depth for N = Nbal to n.a. depth
for N = Nuz.

Circle!
The calculations on this sheet determine slenderness criteria and
effective column lengths about both axes.

Cases!
Cases! identifies the smallest bar diameter that satisfies each of
the load cases. Calculations are made for both directions and the
spreadsheet decides which axis is dominant.

280

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:280 17/07/2006 17:17:50

 TCC54 Circular Column Design.xls

TCC54 Circular Column Design/ MAIN!

Project Spreadsheets to EC2 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made by Date Page
Location Columns at A1, A2 etc RMW 03-Jul-06 281
291
CIRCULAR COLUMN DESIGN TO EN 1992-1 : 2004
Checked Revision Job No
Originated from TCC54.xls v3.0 on CD © 2004-05 TCC chg - FB625

MATERIALS
fck 30 N/mm²
s 1.15 steel Cover 30 mm
fyk 500 N/mm²
c 1.5 concrete dg 20 mm
 2.41 ef 1.45 c,dev 5 mm Remote
Steel class A CONNECTING BEAMS/SLABS end
DESIGN SECTION RESTRAINTS b (mm) h (mm) L (m) (F) or (P)
h 475 mm L= 3600 mm Top left 350 500 7.5 F
with 8 bars Top F Fixed Top right 350 500 6 F
Btm F Fixed Bottom left 350 500 7.5 F
Braced Y . Bottom right 350 500 6 F
Beam stiffnesses are 70% of uncracked stiffness
Column above? Y Col below? Y
BAR ARRANGEMENTS Data on connecting beams only affects loadcases, not charting.
Type Bar Ø Asc % Link Ø Bar c/c Nbal (kN) Nuz (kN) Checks
H 40 5.67 10 163.0 0.0 0.0 Asc > max %
H 32 3.63 8 165.3 899.0 5264.4 ok
H 25 2.22 8 166.7 963.0 4386.9 ok
H 20 1.42 8 167.7 1185.1 3892.1 ok
H 16 0.91 8 168.5 1355.4 3575.5 ok
H 12 0.51 8 169.3 1363.9 3329.2 ok

N:M interaction chart for 475 diameter column, grade C30/37 concrete and 30 mm cover

6000

Min M
5000

8H32
4000
AXIAL LOAD NEd (kN)

8H25
LC2
8H20
3000 8H16
LC3
LC5
LC1 8H12

2000

LC6

1000

LC4

0
0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450

MOMENT MEd X (kNm)

LOADCASES Loadcase NEd (kN) m0e (kNm) MEd (kNm) Loadcase NEd (kN) m0e (kNm) MEd (kNm)
Double 1 2600 40 57.6 8 H12 4 610 170 174.1 8 H16
curvature ? 2 3500 110 133.7 8 H25 5 2750 315 333.6 8 H32
Yes 3 2850 120 139.3 8 H20 6 1500 240 250.1 8 H20

281

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:281 17/07/2006 17:17:51

 TCC55 Axial Column Shortening.xls
This spreadsheet works out column shortenings in accordance
with BS EN 1992-1-1 Clauses 3.1.3(1), 3.1.3(3)and Annex B, creep
and shrinkage strain. It works from the roof down and assumes
that time 0 equates to construction of the lowest column.
When ‘shortenings between floors’ need to be considered, this
spreadsheet calculates the longterm floor displacements due to
columns being loaded incrementally.
A detailed construction history is input so that time-dependent
creep and shrinkage factors may be computed. A maximum of 12
lifts of columns are currently catered for. It would not be practical
to superimpose further storeys by running this spreadsheet more
than once, but an extended version could be produced at a later
date if demand exists.
To investigate particular situations it is suggested that the
spreadsheet is run more than once. For instance, to investigate
column shortenings that affect partitions, it is suggested that
the spreadsheet is run twice once at partition installation and
secondly at say 30 years.
MAIN!
MAIN is used to input materials, dimensional and load data. Enter
general data first, before geometry and loading sequence.
Eurocode 2 permits RH (relative humidity) values between 10%
and 100%. Values of 50% (internal exposure) and 80% (external
exposure) are considered typical in the UK. Exposure will be
external during the construction period, followed by a reduced
RH in use, so when in doubt, a value of 65% could be appropriate.
The formulae in BS EN 1992-1-1 are used for concrete strength
gain (3.1.2(6)) with age and for Young’s modulus, E (Table 3.1).
At present, specific values of gain of strength and E (determined
from tests) cannot be accommodated by this spreadsheet, but
may be accommodated at a later date.
`Shortenings between floors’ are the amounts by which individual
column lifts may shorten in length following construction of
the floor immediately above. This value will directly affect any
cladding or brittle partitions between floors.
‘Floor Displacements’ are the long-term net displacements of
floors from the level at which they were constructed. The floor
at an individual column may therefore be cast at say 50% of
this value above the nominal floor level, in order to minimise
racking effects. The particular shape of the curve is defined by
effects of incremental loading and the effects of drying shrinkage.
It is assumed that any ‘shortenings between floors’ have been
compensated for and therefore dealt with prior to a floor’s
construction. The difference between floor displacements of
adjacent columns will create a racking effect on any attached
cladding or brittle partitions.
282
EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:282
Any differential shortening between connected vertical members
will generate a transfer of vertical load. If connecting slabs or
beams are stiff and/ or short, such load transfer can be substantial
and, in tall buildings, may even be critical at ULS. If such effects
are considered to be critical between a group of vertical members,
the following procedure is recommended:
■ Run each column or wall and save it under an individual file
name.
■ Write a routine within one of these worksheets to assess the
amount of load transfer at each level, using long-term cracked
section properties for connecting horizontal members. This
will link the results between worksheets. Remember to adjust
estimated displacements by any elastic shortening that may
have been included in a global frame analysis.
■ Add a routine in each linked worksheet to modify the long-
term floor loads at each level, by adding transfer loads into
cells MAIN!Q15:Q26, which are already set up for this purpose.
NOTE: transfer of loads should be damped by a constant
factor, to reduce the number of iterations required.
■ Write a VBA macro to iterate this transfer process until a
balance is reached (ie. residual transfer is close to zero).
■ Differential foundation displacements may also need to be
considered within this process.
Creep1!
In a series of cascading calculations, Creep1 calculates the
total creep and elastic shortenings based on applied dead and
permanent imposed loads. Concrete E values are based on the
mean 28 day strength fcm, adjusted by creep factors ϕ that allow
for both age at loading and load duration.
Creep2!
Again, in a series of cascading calculations, Creep2 similarly
calculates elastic shortenings that occur before each floor is
constructed.
Shrink!
Shrink! calculates the amount of drying shrinkage; for both total
long-term and before construction of each floor.
Notes!
This sheet gives disclaimers and revision history.
17/07/2006 17:17:57
 TCC55 Axial Column Shortening.xls

TCC55 Axial Column Shortening/ MAIN!

Project Spreadsheets to EC2 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made by Date Page
Location Column K2 rmw 03-Jul-06 283
293
AXIAL COLUMN SHORTENING to EN 1992-1 : 2004 Checked Revision Job No
Originated from TCC55.xls v3.0 on CD © 2002-2005 TCC chg - FB625
General Data Aggregate Quartzite
Quartzite
No of Storeys 12 Cement type RR Occupancy at 250 days from level 0
Curing time 3 days
Ambient temp, ºC 20 Relative humidity % 50 2 . 0.3
0.3
Geometry & Loading Sequence
Permanent Load
Time Column below Col Floor At age Balance Age Perm Age
LEVEL
gap days fck Length H B ASL SW SW days of Gk days Imposed days
Roof 14 40 3750 300 300 452 2.2 354.4 7 118.1 28 44.3 82
11 14 40 3750 300 300 1257 2.2 354.4 7 118.1 28 62.0 96
10 14 40 3750 400 400 1257 3.8 354.4 7 118.1 28 62.0 110
9 14 40 3750 450 450 1257 4.9 354.4 7 118.1 28 62.0 124
8 14 40 3750 450 450 1963 4.9 354.4 7 118.1 28 62.0 138
7 14 60 3750 450 450 1257 4.9 354.4 7 118.1 28 62.0 152
6 14 60 3750 450 450 2592 4.9 354.4 7 118.1 28 62.0 166
5 14 60 3750 500 500 3217 6.0 354.4 7 118.1 28 62.0 180
4 14 60 3750 500 500 3217 6.0 354.4 7 118.1 28 62.0 194
3 14 80 3750 500 500 3217 6.0 354.4 7 118.1 28 62.0 208
2 14 80 3750 500 500 3217 6.0 354.4 7 118.1 28 62.0 222
1 14 80 3750 500 500 4825 6.0 354.4 7 118.1 28 62.0 236

Shortenings Between Floors (mm)

Creep & Shrin-
Lift Total 12.7 20.0 32.7
Elastic kage 45.00
11 - R 1.87 2.15 4.02 0.11%
11.6 22.0 33.7
10 - 11 3.16 1.89 5.05 0.13%
41.25
9 - 10 2.59 1.95 4.54 0.12%
8-9 2.90 1.94 4.84 0.13% 10.8 22.0 32.7
37.50
7-8 3.40 1.85 5.25 0.14%
6-7 3.18 1.83 5.01 0.13% 9.7 21.9 31.7
5-6 3.45 1.71 5.16 0.14% 33.75
4-5 3.15 1.67 4.82 0.13% 8.6 21.2 29.8
3-4 3.51 1.67 5.18 0.14% 30.00
Level (m)

2-3 3.26 1.63 4.88 0.13%

7.6 19.5 27.1
1-2 3.56 1.63 5.19 0.14%
26.25
0-1 3.69 1.55 5.24 0.14%
6.6 17.7 24.3
22.50
Floor Displacements (mm)
Creep & Shrin- 5.6 15.3 20.9
Floor Level Total 18.75
Elastic kage
Roof 45.00 20.0 12.7 32.7 4.6 13.0 17.6
11 41.25 22.0 11.6 33.7 15.00
10 37.50 22.0 10.8 32.7 3.5 10.0 13.5
9 33.75 21.9 9.7 31.7 11.25
8 30.00 21.2 8.6 29.8
2.5 7.1 9.6
7 26.25 19.5 7.6 27.1 Floors
7.50
6 22.50 17.7 6.6 24.3 C and E
1.3 3.75.0 Shrinkage
5 18.75 15.3 5.6 20.9
Total 3.75
4 15.00 13.0 4.6 17.6
3 11.25 10.0 3.5 13.5 0.0
0
2 7.50 7.1 2.5 9.6
0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40
1 3.75 3.7 1.3 5.0
Vertical Displacement (mm)

283

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:283 17/07/2006 17:17:59

 TCC71 Stair Flight & Landing - Single.xls
TCC71.xls designs simply supported flights and landings to BS EN
1992. Input is required on two sheets.

FLIGHT!
This single sheet consists of the input and main output. Inputs
are in blue and underlined and most should be self-explanatory.

Only simply supported spans are catered for. If flights are

continuous with floors, the user should specify continuity steel
over supports as appropriate. Calculations are done per metre
width of flight. Input loads are assumed to be characteristic and
acting vertically. They should account for any undercuts. Self-
weight, moments and reactions are calculated automatically.
The area of steel required, Asreq, may be automatically increased
to increase modification factors and satisfy deflection criteria.
Nominal top reinforcement may be specified in order to help
overcome deflection problems. Dimensions are not checked for
compliance with Building Regulations.

Ultimate, characteristic dead and characteristic imposed

reactions are given below the indicative diagram.

LANDING!
Again, this single sheet consists of the input and main output.
Input defaults in magenta have been derived from FLIGHT! but
may be overwritten. Calculations are done per metre width of
landing.

Inputs are underlined and most should be self-explanatory.

As defaults, which can be overwritten, the material data and
characteristic flight reactions carry over from FLIGHT! Self-
weight, moments and reactions are calculated automatically.
The maximum width of landing over which flight loads can be
dispersed has been restricted to 1.8 m as with BS 8110.

Reactions are ultimate, both total and per metre run. The area
of steel required, As, can be automatically increased to satisfy
deflection criteria.

Dias!
Dias! calculates the reinforcement sizes and reinforcement
percentages for deflection modification factors used in FLIGHT!
and LANDING!

Notes!
This sheet gives disclaimers and revision history.

284

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:284 17/07/2006 17:18:05

 TCC71 Stair Flight & Landing - Single.xls

TCC71 Stair Flight & Landing -single/ LANDING!

Project Spreadsheets to EC2 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made by Date Page
Location South Staircase rmw 03-Jul-06 285
295
STAIR FLIGHTS AND LANDINGS to EN 1992-1: 2004 FLIGHT Checked Revision Job No
Originated from TCC71.xls v3.0 on CD © 2005 TCC chg - FB625

MATERIALS
fck 30 Mpa
c 1.5 concrete Min bar Ø = 10
fyk 500 Mpa
s 1.15 steel Max bar Ø = 16
dg 20 mm Density 25 kN/m³ Steel class = A
Cover 25 mm (Normal weight concrete) Nominal top steel ? Y

DIMENSIONS SECTIONAL ELEVATION

a= 600 mm landing A, h = 200

b= 2500 mm flight waist = 175
c= 1200 mm landing C, h = 200
d= -600 mm
e= -100 mm
Going = 250 mm L = 4300
Rise = 1900 mm total 10 treads
Rise = 173 mm each step Rake = 34.64 º

LOADING
Imposed 4.00 kN/m² 43.64 kN/m ult 34.37 kN/m ult
Flight finishes 1.60 kN/m² (21.54 + 11.16) (16.91 + 8.84)
Landing finishes 1.30 kN/m²

DESIGN
LANDING A, gk = 5.00 + 1.30 = 6.30 kN/m² n = 1.25 x 6.30 + 1.50 x 4.0 = 13.87 kN/m²
FLIGHT, gk = 7.48 + 1.60 = 9.08 kN/m² n = 1.25 x 9.08 + 1.50 x 4.0 = 17.33 kN/m²
LANDING C, gk = 5.00 + 1.30 = 6.30 kN/m² n = 1.25 x 6.30 + 1.50 x 4.0 = 13.87 kN/m²

Zero shear is at 0.6 + (43.64 - 16.64) /17.33 = 2.157 m from left

M = 43.64 x 2.157 - 16.64 x 2.157 - 17.33 x 1.557²/2 = 37.22 kNm/m
d = 175 - 25 - 8 = 142 mm K = 0.0615 As = 640 mm²/m
PROVIDE H16 @ 270 B = 745 mm²/m
s = 232.8 Mpa Enhanced by 16.0 % for deflection H10 @ 350 T in span
L/d = 4,300 /142 = 30.28 > 22.7 x 1.331 x 1.000 = 30.28 allowed OK

285

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:285 17/07/2006 17:18:06

 TCC71 Stair Flight & Landing - single/ LANDING!

Project Spreadsheets to EC2 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made by Date Page

Location South Staircase rmw 03-Jul-06 296

286
STAIR FLIGHTS AND LANDINGS to EN 1992-1: 2004 LANDING Checked Revision Job No
Originated from TCC71.xls v3.0 on CD © 2005 TCC chg FB625

MATERIALS
fck 30 N/mm²
c 1.5 concrete Min bar Ø = 10
fyk 500 N/mm²
s 1.15 steel Max bar Ø = 16
dg 20 mm Density 25 kN/m³
Cover 25 mm (Normal weight concrete) Nominal top steel ? Y

DIMENSIONS
a = 1200 mm depth, h = 175 mm
b = 1200 mm width, w = 1200 mm
c = 250 mm
d = 175 mm L = 3000 mm

LOADING
LANDING Imposed 4.00 kN/m² 73.50 kN ult 68.12 kN ult
Finishes 1.50 kN/m² 61.25 kN/m ult 56.77 kN/m ult
Slab 4.38 kN/m²
n = 1.25 x 5.88 + 1.5 x 4.0 = 13.34 kN/m²
gk qk n1 = (1.25 x 21.54 + 1.5 x 11.16)/1.20 = 36.37 kN/m²
Flight a reaction 21.54 11.16 kN/m n2 = (1.25 x 16.91 + 1.5 x 8.84)/1.20 = 28.64 kN/m²
Flight b reaction 16.91 8.84 kN/m

DESIGN
Zero shear is at (61.25 - 2.33) /(13.34 + 36.37) + 0.175 = 1.360 m from left
M = 61.25 x 1.360 - 13.34 x 1.360²/2 - 36.37 x 1.185²/2 = 45.43 kNm/m
d = 175 - 25 - 8 = 142 mm K = 0.0751 As = 792 mm²/m
PROVIDE H16 @ 160 B = 1257 mm²/m
s = 310.1 Mpa Enhanced by 50.0 % for deflection H10 @ 350 T in span
L/d = 3,000 /142 = 21.12 > 19.1 x 1.000 x 1.000 = 19.05 allowed FAILS

286

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:286 17/07/2006 17:18:12

 TCC81 Foundation Pads.xls

TCC81 Foundation Pads.xls

(Subject to further interpretation)

This spreadsheet designs simple pad foundations from input of

material properties, dimensions and characteristic loads and
DOUBLE!
moments. Single column bases and combined double bases
In addition to graphs showing plan layout and ‘efficiency’,
are catered for on separate sheets. This version is “subject to
this sheet gives moment diagrams for the two principal axes.
interpretation” as the full implications of Eurocode 7 and its
Design moments are taken at the edge of both column sections
National Annex have yet to be incorporated. For example, ground
Suggestions are made, under the ‘Operating instructions’ column,
bearing pressure distribution at ULS will in due course be changed
for the optimum plan size of the base and eccentricities given the
from trapezoidal to rectangular.
column offsets from one another.
This spreadsheet was prepared in line with BS EN 1997 [29]
The user’s attention is drawn to the fact that the analysis is done
but before UK National Annex to EN1997-1 was available. The
in two orthogonal directions. When column eccentricities are
spreadsheets therefore may not fully integrate with the NA
large in both directions the analysis may not account adequately
but has been prepared on the basis of Prescriptive measure (i.e.
for local effects (e.g. bottom cantilever moments on two sides of
comparable experience) and therefore in line with ‘traditional’
each column – loads in opposite corners gives bottom moments of
methods of design (including the 25% allowable overload
0 kNm). In such cases, it may be better to change the orientation
for wind load and trapezoidal or triangular ground pressure
of the base in such a way that eccentricity in one direction is
distributions at ULS rather than rectangular).
minimal. Warnings about double eccentricities are given when
the distances between column centrelines exceed 15% of the
A diagram is provided to illustrate the dimensions: a chart
relevant base dimension in each orthogonal direction.
showing scale plan views is provided to help ensure gross errors
are avoided. The ‘efficiency’ diagrams are provided so that the user
Comparison with FE analysis suggests this is reasonable so long
may gauge how hard the base is working in respect to allowable
as the base is thick and rigid.
increase in ground bearing pressure, bending and shear in the two
axes together with a measure on punching shear capacity. If the
design is invalid, this chart should help identify the problem.
Legends!
The spreadsheet does not allow for punching shear links – bending
This sheet shows dimensions, axes, corners and notation used.
reinforcement is increased to ensure allowable shear, vRd c, is
adequate. The user should note that punching shear perimeters
can jump from being four-sided to being two- or three-sided,
leading to unexpectedly large increases in reinforcement for
SingleDet!
increases in base thickness.
This sheet shows workings and is not necessarily intended for
printing out other than for checking purposes.
TCC81.xls allows the user to specify whether or not equations
6.10a and 6.10b of EN 1990 may be employed.
Allowable bearing pressure is taken as an allowable increase in
bearing pressure and density of concrete –density of excavated
Warnings are given if columns overlap base edges.
material (i.e. soil) is used in the calculations. The program
assumes that pads are embedded to depth H in the soil.
SINGLE! Design moments are generally those at the face of the column.
Both sides of the column are checked for moment in each
Suggestions are made, under the ‘Operating instructions’ column,
direction to ensure maxima are identified. Shear enhancement is
for the optimum plan size of the base. It is important that the
allowed for both beam and punching shear.
principal usage of the structure is selected from the combo-box
in column L.
Neither crack widths, factors of safety against sliding, nor water
tables are catered for. Where resultant eccentricities are outside
This is used in the determination of partial load factors, if EN 1990
the base a warning message is given; the general status message
equations 6.10a and 6.10b are permitted. The usage selected here
is updated as well.
is also utilised on the DOUBLE! sheet.
Factors of safety against overturning are checked (The equilibrium
Where two centres are given, e.g. 14 T16 @ 200 & 325 B2, bars
limit state EQU to EN 1990). Warnings are also given at the onset
need to be grouped more closely in the central part of the base.
of an uplift situation.

287

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:287 17/07/2006 17:18:18

 DoubleDet!
This sheet shows workings and is not necessarily intended for
printing out other than for checking purposes.

The notes for SingleDet! above also apply.

Graf!
This sheet comprises data for graphs for both SINGLE! and
DOUBLE!

Refs!
This sheet comprises the values for nationally determined
parameters that have been used in the spreadsheet. These data
reflect the values given in draft UK National Annexes for EN 1990
and EN 1992.
Designers should ensure that these data are current when the
spreadsheet is used. When using TCC81 for permanent design,
designers are strongly advised to include a copy of this sheet with
any design calculations.

Notes!
This sheet gives disclaimers and revision history.

288

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:288 17/07/2006 17:18:20

 TCC81 Foundation Pads.xls

TCC81 Foundation Pads/ SINGLE!

Project Spreadsheets to Eurocode 2 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made by Date Page
Location Level -1 Base B1 RMW 03-Jul-06 289
299
PAD FOUNDATION DESIGN to EN 1992-1 : 2004 Single column base Checked Revision Job No
Originated from TCC81.xls v 3.0 on CD © 2003-2006 TCC chg - FB625
Usage: Office
MATERIALS fck 30 N/mm² dg 20 mm
c 1.5 concrete
fyk 500 N/mm² cover 50 mm
s 1.15 steel
Densities - Concrete 25 kN/m³ Soil 18 kN/m³ Wk 0.3 mm
Bearing pressure 200 kN/m² (net allowable increase)
Steel class A
DIMENSIONS mm
BASE COLUMN
L= 3000 h = 500
B= 3000 b = 500
depth H = 500
ex = 0 ey = 0

COLUMN REACTIONS kN, kNm characteristic Plot (to scale) Key

DEAD IMPOSED WIND
Axial (kN) 1500.0 128.0
Grnd Brg Pressure 94%
Mx (kNm) -20.0
My (kNm) As/Asprov sx 61%
Hx (kN)
Hy (kN) sy 59%
ψ0 = 0.7 0.5
Shear vEd xx 49%
see EN 1990 - Table A1.1
STATUS VALID DESIGN vEd yy 50%

BEARING PRESSURES kN/m² characteristic Punching 99%

CORNER 1 2 3 4
no wind 188.8 179.9 188.8 179.9 0% 25% 50% 75% 100% 125%

with wind 188.8 179.9 188.8 179.9 Efficiency

REINFORCEMENT
of As within 1,820 mm
of As within 1,760 mm

Mxx = 572.5 kNm Myy = 562.3 kNm
b = 3000 mm b = 3000 mm
d= 440 mm d= 420 mm
As = 3150 mm² As = 3242 mm²
Provide 17H20 @ 160 & 205 B1 Provide 17H20 @ 155 & 215 B2
As prov = 5341 mm² As prov = 5341 mm²
Asx increased 67% for shear Asy increased 60% for shear
BEAM SHEAR . .
VEdxx = 593.7 kN at d from col face VEDyy = 597.4 kN at d from col face
vEd = 0.450 N/mm² vEd = 0.474 N/mm²
or VEd xx = 272.2 kN at 2d from col face or VEDyy = 295.1 kN at 2d from col face
vEd = 0.206 N/mm² vEd = 0.234 N/mm²
vRd,c = 0.462 N/mm² vRd,c = 0.473 N/mm²

PUNCHING SHEAR . .
d ave = 430 mm u crit = 7404 mm
As prov = 0.414 % vEd max = 2.750 N/mm² at col face
vEd = 0.464 N/mm² vRd,c = 0.467 N/mm²

289

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:289 17/07/2006 17:18:21

 TCC81 Foundation Pads/ DOUBLE!

Project Spreadsheets to Eurocode 2 The Concrete Centre

Client Advisory Group Made by Date Page
Location Base B3/B4 RMW 03-Jul-06 290
300
PAD FOUNDATION DESIGN to EN 1992-1 : 2004 Combined base Checked Revision Job No
Originated from TCC81.xls v 3.0 on CD © 2003-2006 TCC chg - FB625
Usage: Office
MATERIALS fck 30 N/mm² dg 20 mm
c 1.5 concrete
fyk 500 N/mm² cover 50 mm
s 1.15 steel
Densities - Concrete 25 kN/m³ Soil 18 kN/m³ Steel class A
Bearing pressure 125 kN/m² (net allowable)

COLUMN REACTIONS kN, kNm characteristic

Column 1 (rhs) DEAD IMPOSED WIND Column 2 (lhs) DEAD IMPOSED WIND
Axial 225.0 225.0 112.5 Axial 225.0 225.0 112.5
Mx Mx
My My 50.0
Hx Hx
Hy Hy 25.0

DIMENSIONS mm
BASE COLUMN 1 (rhs) COLUMN 2 (lhs)
L= 3000 h1 = 300 h2 = 300
B= 3000 b1 = 300 b2 = 300
depth H = 475
ex = 300 ex1 = 150 ex2 = 150
ey = 1000 ey1 = 500 ey2 = 500

STATUS VALID DESIGN

PLOT (to scale)
BEARING PRESSURES kN/m² characteristic
Grnd Brg Pressure 91%
CORNER 1 2 3 4
no wind 103.3 103.3 103.3 103.3 As/Asprov sx 85%
with wind 142.1 142.1 114.6 114.6 sy 97%

Shear vEd xx 45%

REINFORCEMENT
Btm Mxx - 421.7 kNm Myy - 235.6 vEd yy 28%
b = 3000 mm b= 3000 Punching 84%
d= 419 mm d= 407
As = 2437 mm² As = 1401 0% 133%

PROVIDE 23H12 @ 150 B1 & 17H12 @ 150 & 200 B2 Efficiency

As prov = 2601 mm² As prov = 1923
0.0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5
Detail to clause 3.11.3.2 50
Top Mxx + 0.0 kNm Myy + 0.0 0
-50
d= 421 mm d= 413 -100
As = 0 mm² As = 0 -150
-200
PROVIDE 19H8 @ 175 T1 & 19H8 @ 125 & 175 T2 -250
As prov = 955 mm² As prov = 955 -300
-350
. . Moment Columns Zero axis

BEAM SHEAR . . Mx Diagram (1.35G+1.05Q)

Vxx = 365.9 kN at d Vyy = 219.3 0.0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5
v = 0.291 N/mm² v= 0.180 50
or Vxx = 169.6 kN at 2d or Vyy = 18.0 0
v = 0.135 N/mm² v= 0.015 -50
vc = 0.324 N/mm² vc = 0.326 -100
-150
PUNCHING SHEAR . .
-200
d ave = 413 mm u crit = 8990 mm

290

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:290 17/07/2006 17:18:29


TCC82 Pilecap Design.xls
(Subject to further interpretation)
This spreadsheet designs pilecaps with between two and six piles,
and then prepares a sketch drawing of each type of cap together
with a bar schedule. Bending theory is employed throughout to
design the caps. This version is “subject to interpretation” as the
full implications of Eurocode 7 and its National Annex have yet
to be incorporated.
This spreadsheet was prepared in line with BS EN 1997 [29]
but before UK National Annex to EN1997-1 was available. The
spreadsheets therefore may not fully integrate with the NA
but has been prepared on the basis of Prescriptive measure (i.e.
comparable experience) and therefore in line with ‘traditional’
methods of design (including the 25% allowable overload for
wind load).
This spreadsheet was prepared in line with BS EN 1997 [29]
but before UK National Annex to EN1997-1 was available. The
spreadsheets therefore may not fully integrate with the NA
but has been prepared on the basis of Prescriptive measure (i.e.
comparable experience) and therefore in line with ‘traditional’
methods of design (including the 25% allowable overload for
wind load).
Depending upon the pilecap’s dimensions, the alternative strut-
and-tie method of design may be possible, but is not covered by
this spreadsheet. There are seven main sheets: DOUBLE!, 3CAP!,
4CAP!, 5CAP!, 6CAP!, SCHEDULE! and DRAWING!
Each of the first five sheets contains two pages that may be
printed out. The first (or upper) page contains input data and
a summary of results, while the second (or lower) page shows
more detailed calculations.
The selection of size and number of top and bottom bars is
automated. The number of bars determined by either:
■ area of steel required/ area of maximum sized bar (taken to
be 32 mm diameter),
■ spacing rules or
■ number of legs of links required in shear.
The size of link to be used has also been automated.
The designer and detailer may wish to rationalise the output
given on the DRAWING! sheet. But doing so will obviously affect
the bar data on SCHEDULE!
DOUBLE!
The DOUBLE! sheet is where all material properties are entered,
together with covers, pile diameter and pile tolerance. All
subsequent sheets use these same properties. Pile tolerance is the
amount by which a pile may deviate from its intended position.
This value is used in calculation to increase bending moments to
EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:291
TCC82 Pilecap Design.xls
allow for this possible deviation. Pile reactions are not similarly
increased.
Dimensional data for a double pile cap and the supported
column are then entered, then column axial loads, moments and
horizontal shears for dead load, imposed load and wind load. The
results of calculations for all Eurocode 2 loading combinations
are then displayed below (on page 1), together with the required
arrangement of reinforcement. More detailed calculations may
be found by scrolling down to page 2.
3CAP!, 4CAP!, 5CAP! and 6CAP!
These sheets are identical in function to DOUBLE!, but deal with
caps having 3, 4, 5 and 6 piles respectively. Material properties,
pile diameter and tolerance are picked up from DOUBLE!.
Page numbers for printing do not follow on from previous sheets,
so must be entered by the user. This allows for intermediate
calculation pages (perhaps for loading) to be inserted.
SCHEDULE!
This sheet is a bar schedule complying with BS 8666, for the
pilecap drawing on the DRAWING! sheet.
Beneath the ‘Operating instructions’, the number of each type
of cap must be entered. These numbers are then used on the
schedule and the drawing.
DRAWING!
This sheet draws approximately to scale plans and elevations
with reinforcement and bar marks for each of the cap types. It
is intended for printout to an A3 sheet. If the user wishes to add
additional notes, these may be added in cell U27.
Graf!
This sheet provides data for the charts in all sheets. It is not
intended for formal printing
Notes!
This sheet gives disclaimers and revision history.
291
17/07/2006 17:18:34
 TCC82 Pilecap Design/ DOUBLE!

Project Spreadsheets to Eurocode 2 The Concrete Centre

Client BigBucks PLC Made by Date Page
Location Pilecap G14 Rod 03-Jul-06 302
292
PILECAP DESIGN to EN 1992-1: 2004 Double Pilecap Checked Revision Job No
Originated from TCC82.xls v 3.0 on CD © 2003-2006 TCC - - FB625
Usage: Traffic, 30 to 160kN
MATERIALS fck 35 N/mm² dg 20 mm γc 1.5 concrete
fyk 500 N/mm² T&S cover 50 mm γs 1.15 steel
Steel class A Btm cover 75 mm Conc density 25 kN/m³
Pile capacity 525 kN
DIMENSIONS mm
COLUMN PILECAP
→= 350 A= 400
↑= 350 B= 1500
Pile Ø = 450 C= 400
Tolerance = 0 E= 750
depth H = 400
COLUMN ACTIONS kN, kNm characteristic
DEAD IMPOSED WIND
Axial (kN) 218 104.2 27.5 PLOT (to scale) KEY
M (kNm) 23.2 10.4 2.7
H (kN) 0 0 0 STATUS VALID DESIGN
0 = 0.7 0.5
REINFORCEMENT PILE REACTIONS kN
BOTTOM M = 164.2 kNm PILE 1 PILE 2
d = 309.0 mm, As = 1,296 mm² Gk + Qk 147.9 192.7
7H16 B = 1,407 mm² Gk + Qk +Wk 159.9 208.3
TOP M = 0.0 kNm
d = 338.0 mm, As = 0 mm²
4H8 T = 201 mm² 4H8 02 T
LINKS
VEd = 293 kN, vEd = 1.185 N/mm²
vRd 2d/av = 0.825 N/mm² 7H16 01 B
Asw/S = 0.9691 mm Links 11H8 03.200 + 2x11H8 04.200
4 Legs H8 @ 200 LINKS = 1.0053 mm ELEVATION

292

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:292 17/07/2006 17:18:37

 TCC82 Pilecap Design.xls

TCC82 Pilecap Design/ DOUBLE!

Project Spreadsheets to Eurocode 2 The Concrete Centre

Client BigBucks PLC Made by Date Page
Location Pilecap G14 - Detailed Calculations Rod 03-Jul-06 303
293
PILECAP DESIGN to EN 1992-1: 2004 Double Pilecap Checked Revision Job No
Originated from TCC82.xls v 3.0 on CD © 2003-2006 TCC - - FB625

Cap load (kN) = 18.4 Piles @ (m) 1.500 PILE REACTIONS kN

or (kN/m) = 8.00 PILE 1 PILE 2
Gk + Qk 147.9 192.7

OVERTURNING MOMENTS - kNm characteristic Gk + Qk +Wk 159.9 208.3

DEAD IMPOSED WIND 1.35Gk + 1.5Qk 206.4 269.0
23.2 10.4 2.7 1.0Gk + 1.5Wk 120.7 157.0

1.35Gk + 1.5Qk + 0.75Wk 229.2 294.4
BENDING MOMENTS - kNm
1.35Gk + 1.5Qk 1.0Gk + 1.5Wk 1.35Gk + 1.5Qk + 0.75Wk
M  of col 113.6 65.6 126.6 arm (m) 0.575
M
of col 149.5 86.5 164.2 arm (m) 0.575
(including tolerance)
BOTTOM STEEL TOP STEEL
Bottom M = 164.2 Ø16 Top M = 0.0 Ø8 K' = 0.2067
d= 309.0 d= 338.0 min As = 0.167%
K= 0.0614 K= 0.0000
z= 291.2 z= 321.1
As = 1296 As = 0
Provide 1296 Provide 0
No = 7 No = 4
As prov = 1407 As prov = 201
s = 286 s = 0
Max S = 193.1 Max S = 300.0
Min S = 41.0 Min S = 33.0
S= 111.3 7H16 B S= 225.3 4H8 T

SHEAR Crit section is 135.0 from pile centres 0.569%

PILE 1 1.35Gk + 1.5Qk 1.0Gk + 1.5Wk 1.35Gk + 1.5Qk + 0.75Wk
VEd 205.0 119.6 227.7
av = 440.0 vEd = 0.9211 cot = 2.50 vRd 2d/av = 0.8246
PILE 2
VEd 267.5 155.9 293.0
av = 440.0 vEd = 1.1851 cot = 2.50 vRd 2d/av = 0.8246
vRd,max = 4.152
Asw/S required= 0.9691 mm Ø8 links
No of legs = 4 Link spacing = 200 4 Legs H8 @ 200 LINKS

293

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:293 17/07/2006 17:18:42

 TCC82 Pilecap Design/ 3CAP!

Project Spreadsheets to Eurocode 2 The Concrete Centre

Client BigBucks PLC Made by Date Page
Location Pilecap F13 Rod 03-Jul-06 294
14
PILECAP DESIGN to EN 1992-1: 2004 Triple Pilecap Checked Revision Job No
Originated from TCC82.xls v 3.0 on CD © 2003-2006 TCC - - FB625
DIMENSIONS mm Usage: Office
COLUMN PILECAP
→ = 300 A= 350
↑ = 300 B= 1300
C= 1126
Pile Ø = 450 E= 375.33
Min spacing = 1300 depth H = 400
Tolerance = 0

COLUMN ACTIONS kN, kNm characteristic PLOT (to scale) KEY

DEAD IMPOSED WIND
Axial (kN) 355.5 118.2 10.0 STATUS VALID DESIGN
Mx (kNm) 10.0 5.0 2.0
My (kNm) 20.0 10.0 5.0 PILE REACTIONS kN characteristic
Hx (kN) PILE 1 PILE 2 PILE 3
Hy (kN) Gk + Qk 141.0 169.4 192.5
0 = 0.7 0.5 Gk + Qk +Wk 139.9 173.4 199.6
REINFORCEMENT
EW (2-3) M = 178.2 kNm, b = 1,050 mm
d = 309.0 mm, As = 1,396 mm² 4H8 06 T1
7H16 B = 1,407 mm²

VEd = 274.1 kN, bw = 1,050 mm 7H16 05 B1

vEd = 0.845 N/mm², Asw/S = 0.994 mm Links 8H8 07 200 + 2x8H8 08 200
4 LegsH8 @ 200 LINKS = 1.005 mm
ELEVATION

NS (1-2/3) M = 117.1 kNm, b = 1,798 mm

d = 293.0 mm, As = 967 mm² 4H8 10 T2
5H16 B = 1,005 mm²

VEd = 194.9 kN, bv = 1,260 mm 5H16 09 B2

vEd = 0.528 N/mm², Asw/S = 1.193 mm Links 8H8 11 150 + 2x8H8 12 150
4 LegsH8 @ 150 LINKS = 1.340 mm  ELEVATION

294

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:294 17/07/2006 17:18:48

 TCC82 Pilecap Design.xls

TCC82 Pilecap Design/ 3CAP!

Project Spreadsheets to Eurocode 2 The Concrete Centre

Client BigBucks PLC Made by Date Page
Location Pilecap F13 Rod 03-Jul-06 15
295
PILECAP DESIGN to EN 1992-1: 2004 Triple Pilecap Checked Revision Job No
Originated from TCC82.xls v 3.0 on CD © 2003-2006 TCC - - FB625

Cap load = 29.2 kN Group centre @ 751 m from pile 1

PILE REACTIONS kN
PILE 1 PILE 2 PILE 3 OVERTURNING MOMENTS - kNm characteristic
Gk + Qk 141.0 169.4 192.5 . DEAD IMPOSED WIND
Gk + Qk +Wk 139.9 173.4 199.6 Mx 10.0 5.0 2.0
1.35Gk + 1.5Qk 194.9 234.7 267.0 My 20.0 10.0 5.0
1.0Gk + 1.5Wk 108.8 135.4 155.4 .
1.35Gk + 1.5Qk + 0.75Wk 193.8 238.7 274.1 .

BENDING MOMENTS - kNm

1.35Gk + 1.5Qk 1.0Gk + 1.5Wk 1.35Gk + 1.5Qk + 0.75Wk
My v of col 117.1 65.4 116.4
My ^ of col 113.1 65.5 115.6 (including tolerance)
Mx 173.6 101.0 178.2

E-W STEEL N-S STEEL

M= 178.2 Ø16 M= 117.1 Ø16 K' = 0.2067
b= 1050 b= 1798 min As = 0.167%
d= 309.0 d= 293.0
K= 0.0508 K= 0.0217
z= 293.6 z= 278.4
As = 1396 As = 967
Provide 1396 Provide 967
No = 7 No = 5
As prov = 1407 As prov = 1005
s = 307 s = 298
Max S = 165.6 Max S = 177.1
Min S = 41.0 Min S = 41.0
S= 94.7 7H16 B S= 142.0 5H16 B

SHEAR Crit section is 135.0 from pile centres

PILES 2 & 3 Ø8 links
VEd = 274.1 b= 1050 l = 0.434% cot = 2.50
av = 515.0 vEd = 0.8448 vRd 2d/av = 0.6434 vRd,max = 4.152
Asw/S = 0.9939 No of legs = 4 Spacing = 200 4 LegsH8 @ 200 LINKS
PILE 1 Ø8 links
VEd = 194.9 b= 1260 l = 0.272% cot = 2.50
av = 615.7 vEd = 0.5280 vRd 2d/av = 0.5110 vRd,max = 4.152
Asw/S = 1.1926 No of legs = 4 Spacing = 150 4 LegsH8 @ 150 LINKS

PUNCHING At column Face At 465.7 from column face (1.55d perimeter)

VEd = 664.7 u1 = 4126  = 1.112
vEd = 1.840 d ave = 301.0 vEd = 0.5353
vRd,max = 4.152 ok l = 0.231% vRd 2d/av = 0.6546 ok

295

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:295 17/07/2006 17:18:54

 TCC82 Pilecap Design/ SCHEDULE!

Bar schedule ref : 202 01 Rev: -

The Concrete Centre
Site ref : Spreadsheets to Eurocode 2 Date prepared : 03-Jul-06

Job no : FB625 Prepared by : Rod Checked by : -

No. of A* B* C* D* E/R *
Length of
Type and No. bars Shape
Member Bar mark Total No. each bar †
size of mbrs in code
mm mm mm mm mm mm
each

Double 01 H 16 4 7 28 2375 21 130 2175

Pilecaps 02 H8 4 4 16 2175 00
03 H8 4 11 44 2075 51 270 695 115
04 H8 4 22 88 500 31 115 50 270 115
3-Pile Caps 05 H 16 3 7 21 2475 21 320 1890
06 H 12 3 4 12 1875 00
07 H8 3 8 24 1975 51 270 650 115
08 H8 3 16 48 500 31 115 50 270 115
09 H 16 3 5 15 1975 21 155 1715
10 H 12 3 4 12 1700 00
11 H8 3 8 24 1825 51 240 600 115
12 H8 3 16 48 475 31 115 50 240 115
4-Pile Caps 13 H 16 5 18 90 2225 21 145 1975
14 H8 5 10 50 1975 00
15 H 16 5 18 90 2225 21 145 1975
16 H8 5 10 50 1975 00
17 H 10 5 100 500 600 31 120 60 345 120
5-Pile Caps 18 H 12 2 19 38 2625 21 125 2410
19 H8 2 10 20 2400 00
21 H 12 2 20 40 2625 21 125 2410
22 H8 2 11 22 2400 00
20 H 10 2 80 160 700 31 120 60 450 120
6-Pile Caps 23 H 12 1 28 28 2100 21 125 1890
24 H 12 1 14 14 1875 00
26 H 12 1 17 17 3400 21 125 3175
27 H 12 1 9 9 3175 00
28 H 10 1 84 84 750 31 120 60 495 120
This schedule complies with BS 8666. 1,770 kg on this schedule PILECAP DESIGN to EN 1992-1: 2004

* Specified in multiples of 5mm. † Specified in multiples of 25mm. © 2003-2006 TCC

296

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:296 17/07/2006 17:18:59

 NOTES
Concrete grade C35.
Cover 75 mm bottom.
Cover 50 mm top & sides.

Refer to GA drawings for

orientation and
dimensions.

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:297

This drawing is
diagramatic. Connecting
PLAN (Pilecap G14) PLAN (Pilecap F13) PLAN (Pilecap E12) slabs & beams not shown.
TCC82 Pilecap Design/ DRAWING!

4H8 02 T 7H16 01 B 4H8 06 T1 7H16 05 B1 10H8 14 T1 18H16 13 B1

2 Pile Cap - 4 No
3 Pile Cap - 3 No
Links 11H8 03.200 + 2x11H8 04.200 Links 8H8 07 200 + 2x8H8 08 200 10 Link Legs 4 Pile Cap - 5 No
 ELEVATION  ELEVATION  ELEVATION

4H8 10 T2 5H16 09 B2 10H8 16 T2 18H16 15 B2

Links 8H8 11 150 + 2x8H8 12 150 Links 10x10H10 17 200

ELEVATION ELEVATION ELEVATION

PLAN (Pilecap C10)

Spreadsheets to Eurocode 2
BigBucks PLC

PLAN (Pilecap D11)

Project
Client

10H8 19 T2 19H12 18 B2 9H12 27 T1 17H12 26 B1

202

FB625

5 Pile Cap - 2 No
Job No
Dwg No

Links 10x8H10 20 325 14 Link Legs

 ELEVATION ELEVATION
-

03-Jul-06

11H8 22 T1 20H12 21 B1 14H12 24 T2 28H12 23 B2

Date
Revision

The Concrete Centre

-

Rod

10 Link Legs Links 14x6H10 25 350

ELEVATION  ELEVATION
6 Pile Cap - 1 No
Made by
Checked
TCC82 Pilecap Design.xls

297

17/07/2006 17:19:02
 Admin folder
Under the Admin folder will be found several files associated with Column width and cell overlap problems may occur unless the
the use of the spreadsheets. correct fonts and default font size are installed.

To the best of our knowledge these fonts are copyright-free.

Readme.doc
Essential for first time users of the spreadsheets in Word format.
Spreadsheet Issue sheet.xls
This file shows the version history of the spreadsheets.
UserGuid Version 3.doc:
‘Word’ file of User Guide
This file formed the basis of the printed User Guide. It may be
loaded, read and printed out by using Word 97 or subsequent
releases. The file is included to provide help and to allow printing
of parts of the document. It may also be used as a basis for
comment.
By Others
The TCC disclaim any responsibility for programs by others. These
programs and files are provided to help dissemination. They are
subject to the authors’ conditions of use.
Bar Schedule
This folder contains Barshed8666.xlt, a spreadsheet template
for the scheduling of steel for the reinforcement of concrete to
BS 8666:2005. The aim of the spreadsheet is to reduce the time
taken to produce a bar schedule, eliminate arithmetical errors,
reduce scheduling errors, increase compliance with the BSI
specified format for bar scheduling and to facilitate electronic
data interchange. The spreadsheet has the additional ability
to produces weight schedules without the need for additional
input.

The spreadsheet presents a familiar interface to the user who has

User Guide Version 3.pdf:
‘Adobe Acrobat’ file of the User Guide
This User Guide will be made available as an Acrobat file on
future editions of the accompanying CD-ROM. It will present the
full User Guide in colour. Adobe Acrobat Reader v 4.0 or later will
be required to read and interrogate the .pdf file.
produced schedules by hand and it is simple to use. It will guide
the user through the scheduling process while checking the input
is in accordance with British Standard requirements.
This template is made available as shareware by its author, Chris
Buczkowski. For further information, including registration details
and support, etc. go to www.structural-engineering.fsnet.co.uk or
email: chris@buczkowski.freeserve.co.uk

The Fonts
This folder contains the font files:
■ Tekton~i.ttf
■ Tekton~n.ttf
■ Marker.ttf

These fonts have been included in order to give users access to

the fonts intended for the spreadsheets.

These upright fonts were used in the spreadsheets in order to

emulate a designer’s handwriting and to allow an adequate
amount of information to be shown across the page and in each
cell. As described under Loading a spreadsheet for the first time
see (FAQ), unless the appropriate fonts and default font size have
been installed, the appearance on screen will be different from
the publication and from that intended.

298

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:298 17/07/2006 17:19:07


References and further reading
References
1 Goodchild, C.H. Economic concrete frame elements. British
Cement Association, Crowthorne, 1997. 128 pp.
2 BRITISH STANDARDS INSTITUTION. BS 8110: 1997.
Structural use of concrete. Part 1. Code of practice for design
and construction. British Standards Institution, London, 1997 up to
and including Amendment 3.
3 BRITISH STANDARDS INSTITUTION. BS EN 1992-1-1: 2004.
Eurocode 2: Design of concrete structure (part 1-1) General rules and
rules for buildings, including UK National Annex to BS EN 1992-1-1:
Design of Concrete Structures Part 1-1 BSI London 2005.
4 BRITISH STANDARDS INSTITUTION. BS 8002: 1994. Code of
practice for earth retaining structures. British Standards Institution,
London, 1994.
5 BRITISH STANDARDS INSTITUTION. BS 8007: 1987. Code of practice
for design of concrete structures for retaining aqueous liquids. British
Standards Institution, London, 1987.
6 INSTITUTION OF STRUCTURAL ENGINEERS ET AL. Earth retaining
structures. (Civil Engineering Code of Practice No. 2.) Institution of
Structural Engineers, London, 1975. 224 pp.
7 MACLEOD, I.A. ET AL. Information technology for the structural
engineer. The Structural Engineer, Vol. 77, No. 3, 2 February 1999. pp.
23 - 25.
8 STANDING COMMITTEE ON STRUCTURAL SAFETY. Standing
Committee on Structural Safety, 10th report, July 1992 – June 1994.
SETO Ltd, London, 1994. 32 pp.
9 ANSLEY, M. Liability concerns require adaptable software. Concrete
International, Vol. 19, No. 12, December 1997. pp. 37, 38.
10 KHAN, S. Techno Consultants Ltd, Manchester. Correspondence with
authors, May 1999.
11 MOSLEY, W.H. & BUNGEY, J.H. Reinforced concrete design (4th
edition). Macmillan, Basingstoke, 1990. 392 pp.
12 REYNOLDS, C.E. & STEEDMAN, J.C. Reinforced concrete designer’s
handbook (10th edition). E&FN Spon, London, 1998. 448 pp.
13 ALLEN, A.H. Reinforced concrete design to BS 8110 - simply explained.
E&FN Spon, London, 1988. 256 pp.
14 THE CONCRETE SOCIETY. Post-tensioned concrete floors – Design
Handbook, Technical Report No 43. The Concrete Society,
Slough (now Crowthorne), 1994. 162 pp.
15 HIGGINS, J.B. & ROGERS, B.R. Designed and detailed (BS 8110:1997).
British Cement Association, Crowthorne, 1998. 28 pp.
16 KHAN, S. & WILLIAMS, M. Post -tensioned concrete floors.
Butterworth Heinnemann, Oxford, 1995. 312 pp.
17 CEMENT AND CONCRETE ASSOCIATION. Basic data for the
prediction of shrinkage and creep. Training note TDH 2391. Cement
and Concrete Association (now British Cement Association), Slough
(now Crowthorne), 11 pp.
18 WYATT, T A. Design guide on the vibration of floors. Pub. No. 076,
Steel Construction Institute, Ascot, 1989. 43 pp.
EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:299
References and further reading
19 BRITISH STANDARDS INSTITUTION. BS 6399: Part 1: 1996. Loading
for buildings. Code of practice for dead and imposed loads. British
Standards Institution, London, 1996.
20 BRITISH STANDARDS INSTITUTION. CP 110: 1972. Code of practice
for the structural use of concrete. British Standards Institution,
London, 1972.
21 BRITISH STANDARDS INSTITUTION. BS 5400: 1988. Steel, concrete
and composite bridges. British Standards Institution, London, 1988.
22 RAFIQ, M.Y. AND SOUTHCOMBE, C. Genetic algorithms in optimal
design and detailing of reinforced concrete biaxial columns supported
by a declarative approach for capacity checking. International Journal
of Computers and Structures, 69 (1998), pp 443 - 457.
23 BRITISH STANDARDS INSTITUTION. BS 8004: 1986. Code of
practice for foundations. British Standards Institution, London, 1986.
24 NARAYANAN, R S. Comparison of design requirements in EC2 and BS
8110. The Structural Engineer, Vol. 67, No 11, 6 June 1989, pp. 218 -
227.
25 BEEBY, A.W. ET AL. Worked examples for the design of concrete
buildings. British Cement Association, Crowthorne, 1994. 256 pp.
26 BEEBY, A.W. & NARAYANAN, R.S. Designers handbook to Eurocode 2
Part 1.1: Design of concrete structures. Thomas Telford Ltd, London,
1994. 242 pp.
27 WEBSTER, R. & Brooker, O. How to design concrete structures using
Eurocode 2: Deflections. The Concrete Centre, Camberley, Draft in
preparation 2005, 6pp.
28 INSTITUTION OF STRUCTURAL ENGINEERS. Manual for the design of
reinforced concrete building structures to EC2. I Struct E, Draft in
preparation 2005.
29 BRITISH STANDARDS INSTITUTION BS EN 1997-1: 2004, Eurocode
7: Geotechnical design. Part 1. General rules, BSI, London
30 CONCRETE SOCIETY. Deflections in concrete slabs and beams,
Technical Report 58, The Concrete Society, Camberley. 2005
31 BRITISH STANDARDS INSTITUTION, PD 6687, Background paper
to the UK National Annex to BS EN 1992-1-1 and BS EN 1992-1-2, BSI,
London. 2006
32 CONSTRUCT, National Structural Concrete Specification for building
construction (NSCS) Third Edition, 2004, Concrete Society,
Camberley
33 CONCRETE SOCIETY, Technical Report 43 Post-tensioned concrete
floors – Design Handbook, Second Edition, Concrete Society,
Camberley 2005
34 Brooker, O. How to design concrete structures using Eurocode 2:-
Getting Started. The Concrete Centre, 2005
35 BRITISH STANDARDS INSTITUTION BS EN 1991-1: 2002 Eurocode1:
Actions on structures - Part 1-1 General Actions - Densities, Self
weight, imposed loads for Buildings, BSI, 2002, including UK national
Annex to BS EN 1991-1: 2002 Actions on Structures Part 1-1, BSI,
2005
299
17/07/2006 17:19:08
 Further reading
1 INSTITUTION OF STRUCTURAL ENGINEERS; INSTITUTION OF CIVIL
ENGINEERS. Manual for the design of reinforced concrete building
structures. London, ISE, London, 1985. 88 pp.

2 REYNOLDS, C.E. & STEEDMAN, J.C. Examples of the design of

reinforced concrete buildings to BS 8110 (4th edition). E&FN Spon,
London, 1992. 320 pp.

3 MOSLEY, W.H. Et Al. Reinforced concrete design to Eurocode 2 (EC2).

Macmillan, London, 1996. 426 pp.

4 THE CONCRETE CENTRE - How to design concrete structures

using Eurocode 2 . Guides including Introduction to Eurocodes,
Getting started, Slabs, Beams, Columns, Foundation, Fleet Slabs and
Deflection calculations. The Concrete Centre, Camberley, 2005-2006.
See also www.eurocode2.info

5 THE CONCRETE CENTRE - Concise Eurocode 2 for the design

of concrete structures to BS EN 1992-1-1:2004 and the UK National
Annex:2005. The Concrete Centre Camberley, due 2006.

6 THE INSTITUTION OF STRUCTURAL ENGINEERS/CONCRETE

SOCIETY Standard Method of Detailing Structural Concrete – a
manual for best practice. IStructE London 2006.

300

EC2 USERGUIDEv2.indd Sec1:300 17/07/2006 17:19:10

 Foreword The Advisory Group Members
This publication was originally produced by the Reinforced Concrete Council (RCC) as part of its S Alexander H Dikme G King M Perera
project ‘Spreadsheets for concrete design to BS 8110 and EC2’. Since their release in 2000 the S Alhayderi C P Edmondson S King B Quick
spreadsheets have proved enormously popular and have been maintained by the RCC and its Dr H Al-Quarra J Elliott K Kus Y Rafiq
successor The Concrete Centre. I Baldwin I Feltham I Lockhart A Rathbone
C Barker G Fernando M Lord M Rawlinson
The release of Version 3 of the spreadsheets follows the publication of BS EN 1992-1-1 (Eurocode 2) M Beamish M Fernando B Lorimer P Reynolds
plus its UK National Annex and the publication of Amendment 3 to BS 8110 Part 1: 1987. A Beasley I Francis M Lovell H Riley
The requirements within these standards have necessitated the revision of all the published T Bedford A Fung Dr Luker N Russell
spreadsheets. This user guide gives guidance on the use of all design spreadsheets to BS 8110 and G Belton P Gardner J Lupton U P Sarki
Eurocode 2 contained on the CD ROM RC Spreadsheets: v3, published by The Concrete Centre R Bhatt J Gay M Lytrides T Schollar
(order ref. CCIP-008CD). R Bickerton P Green Prof I Macleod A Stalker
P Blackmore A Hall F Malekpour A Starr
D Blackwood N Harris A McAtear M Stevenson
M Brady G Hill A McFarlane B Stoker
Acknowledgements C Buczkowski D W Hobbs F Mohammad B Treadwell
A Campbell R Hulse A Mole A Truby
The ideas and illustrations come from many sources. The help and guidance received from many
Dr P Chana M Hutcheson M Morton R Turner
individuals are gratefully acknowledged.
G Charlesworth A Idrus R Moss T Viney
L Cheng N Imms B Munton Dr P Walker
Thanks are due to members of the original project’s Advisory Group for their time and effort in
Mr Chichger P Jennings C O’Boyle B Watson
helping to make the project feasible and in bringing it to fruition. The members of the Advisory
R Collison D Kennedy Dr A Okorie J Whitworth
Group are listed on the inside back cover.
A Craddock G Kennedy T O’Neill C Wilby
M Morton R Jothiraj B Osafa-Kwaako S Wilde
Special appreciation is extended to: Richard Cheng, BSc, CEng, Eur Ing, FIStructE, author of the
J Curry Dr S Khan D Patel A Wong
retaining wall and basement wall spreadsheets, Peter Noble for conversions and checking, and to
J Dale A King D Penman E Yarimer
Andy Pullen for initial studies into compatibility of spreadsheet software. Also the late Sami Khan
for help with post-tensioning spreadsheets.

Published by The Concrete Centre

Riverside House, 4 Meadows Business Park, Station Approach, Blackwater, Camberley, Surrey GU17 9AB
Tel: +44 (0)1276 606800 Fax: +44 (0)1276 606801

CCIP-008
Published July 2006
ISBN 1-904818-38-2
Price Group O
© The Concrete Centre

User Guide v1 published by the British Cement Association on behalf of the Reinforced Concrete Council.
User Guide v2 published electronically by The Concrete Centre.

CCIP publications are produced by The Concrete Society on behalf of the Cement and Concrete Industry
Publications Forum – an industry initiative to publish technical guidance in support of concrete design
and construction.
CCIP publications are available from the Concrete Bookshop at www.concretebookshop.com
Tel: +44 (0)7004 607777

All advice or information from The Concrete Centre is intended for those who will evaluate the significance and limitations of
its contents and take responsibility for its use and application. No liability (including that for negligence) for any loss resulting
from such advice or information is accepted by the Concrete Centre or their subcontractors, suppliers or advisors. Readers should
note that The Concrete Centre publications are subject to revision from time to time and should therefore ensure that they are in
possession of the latest version.

Cover artwork: D J Killoran - The Concrete Society.

Printed by Cromwell Press, Trowbridge, UK.

Cover files.indd 2 17/07/2006 11:52:24


User Guide to RC Spreadsheets: v3
This user guide provides guidance on the use of
RC Spreadsheets v3 for the design of reinforced
concrete elements.
The release of Version 3 of the spreadsheets and user guide
follows the publication of BS EN 1992-1-1 (Eurocode 2) and its
UK National Annex and the publication of Amendment 3 to
BS 8110 Part 1: 1987.
For more information on the spreadsheets visit
www.concretecentre.com/rcspreadsheets
Cover files.indd 1
A cement and concrete industry publication
CCIP-008
CI/Sfb
UDC
624.04
User Guide to RC Spreadsheets: v3
User Guide to
RC Spreadsheets: v3
User guide to Excel spreadsheets for design to BS 8110: Part 1, 1997 (Amd. 3)
and BS EN 1992: 2004 Part 1-1 and its UK National Annex
C H Goodchild BSc CEng MCIOB MIStructE
Charles Goodchild is Principal Structural Engineer for
The Concrete Centre where he promotes efficient concrete R M Webster CEng FIStructE
design and construction. He was responsible for the concept,
content and management of this publication and of the
RC Spreadsheets.
C H Goodchild BSc CEng MCIOB MIStructE R M Webster CEng FIStructE
Rod Webster of Concrete Innovation & Design is
principal author of the spreadsheets. He has been writing
spreadsheets since 1984 and is expert in the design of tall
concrete buildings and in advanced analytical methods.
CCIP-008
Published July 2006
ISBN 1-904818-38-2
Price Group O
© The Concrete Centre
Riverside House, 4 Meadows Business Park,
Station Approach, Blackwater, Camberley, Surrey, GU17 9AB
Tel: +44 (0)1276 606800 Fax: +44 (0)1276 606801
www.concretecentre.com
17/07/2006 11:51:53